JP7525005B2 - Gaming Machines - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko machines.

A game in which the direction of a game ball flowing down a game area is adjusted in a game machine such as a pachinko machine.
A machine for this purpose is known (Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 11-197311

However, the above-mentioned gaming machine has a problem of a decrease in the operating rate of the gaming machine.
.
The present invention has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and has an object to provide a gaming machine that can improve the operating rate of the gaming machine.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine described in claim 1 comprises a gaming board having a gaming area on the front side, a first member for being disposed on the front side of the gaming board, and a second member disposed on the front side of the first member at a predetermined distance and allowing gaming balls to flow down between the first member and the second member, and further comprises a change means capable of changing the distance between a predetermined portion disposed on at least one of the first member or the second member and the other of the first member or the second member, and the change means changes the direction in which gaming balls flow down between the first member and the second member to a first state and a second state to a second state. a first state and a second state, the specified portion being longer in the width direction than in the top-bottom direction when viewed from the front of the game board, the change means being capable of changing the opposing spacing by displacing the specified portion in the front-to-back direction of the game board, and a state in which the spacing is maintained at a first spacing and a state in which the spacing is maintained at a second spacing can be formed, the specified portion being capable of being contacted by a game ball flowing down between the opposing first and second members when the spacing is changed, and the first and second members being configured to be able to be arranged on the game board from the front side of the game board .

According to the gaming machine of claim 1, the gaming machine includes a gaming board having a gaming area on the front side, a first member for being disposed on the front side of the gaming board, and a second member disposed on the front side of the first member at a predetermined interval and allowing gaming balls to flow down between the first member and the opposing second member, and includes a change means capable of changing the opposing interval between a predetermined portion disposed on at least one of the first member or the second member and the other of the first member or the second member, and the change means changes a first state to a second state in which the flow direction of gaming balls flowing down between the opposing first member and the second member is different from that of the first state. a state in which the predetermined portion is longer in the width direction than in the top-bottom direction when viewed from the front of the game board, and the change means is capable of changing the opposing distance by displacing the predetermined portion in the front-to-back direction of the game board, and is capable of forming a state in which the distance is maintained at a first distance and a state in which the distance is maintained at a second distance, and when the distance is changed, the predetermined portion is capable of being contacted by a game ball flowing down between the opposing first and second members, and the first and second members are configured to be able to be arranged on the game board from the front side of the game board .

This has the effect of preventing players from perceiving that they are at a disadvantage, thereby improving the operating rate of the gaming machine .

1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to a first embodiment. FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. FIG. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine. FIG. 1 is an exploded perspective front view of a pachinko machine. 2 is an exploded oblique front view of the operating unit and the game board. FIG. FIG. FIG. FIG. FIG. FIG. 12(a) is a front view of the general winning port unit, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the general winning port unit taken along line XIIb-XIIb in FIG. 12(a). 1 is a cross-sectional view of the game board taken along line XIII-XIII in FIG. 2. FIG. 14 is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the game board in range XIV of FIG. 13 . A rear view of the general prize slot unit. FIG. 14 is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the game board in range XIV of FIG. 13 . FIG. 4A is a front view of the first unit, FIG. 4B is a side view of the first unit, and FIG. 4C is a rear view of the first unit. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective front view of the first unit. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective rear view of the first unit. 18(b) is a cross-sectional view of the first unit taken along line XXI-XXI in FIG. 22 is a schematic cross-sectional view of the first unit shown in FIG. 21. 18(b) is a cross-sectional view of the first unit taken along line XXIII-XXIII in FIG. 21A is a cross-sectional view of the first unit taken along line XXIVa-XXIVa in FIG. 21, (b) is a cross-sectional view of the first unit taken along line XXIVb-XXIVb in FIG. 21, and (c) is a cross-sectional view of the first unit taken along line XXIVc-XXIVc in FIG. 21. 25A is a partially enlarged view of the first unit in the range XXVa of FIG. 21, and FIG. 25B is a cross-sectional view of the first unit taken along the line XXIVb-XXIVb of FIG. 25A. 26A is a partial enlarged view of the first unit in the range XXVa of FIG. 21, and FIG. 26B is a cross-sectional view of the first unit taken along the line XXIVb-XXIVb of FIG. 26A. 25(a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the first unit taken along line XXVIIa-XXVIIa in FIG. 25(a), (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the first unit taken along line XXVIIb-XXVIIb in FIG. 25(a), and (c) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the first unit taken along line XXVIIc-XXVIIc in FIG. 25(a). 25(a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the first unit taken along line XXVb-XXVb in FIG. 25(a), and (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the first unit taken along line XXVIIIb-XXVIIIb in FIG. 25(a). 4A is a front view of the second unit, and FIG. 4B is a rear view of the second unit. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective front view of the second unit. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective rear view of the second unit. A cross-sectional view of the second unit taken along line XXXII-XXXII in Figure 29. 4A is a front view of the center frame, and FIG. 4B is a side view of the center frame. 4A is a perspective front view of the center frame, and FIG. 4B is a perspective rear view of the center frame. FIG. A cross-sectional view of the center frame taken along line XXXVI-XXXVI in Figure 33. 1A is a schematic cross-sectional view of a game board, and FIG. 1B is a schematic exploded cross-sectional view of the game board. 1A is a front view of the rear case, and FIG. 1B is a rear view of the rear case. 4A is an exploded perspective front view of the rear case, and FIG. 4B is an exploded perspective rear view of the rear case. 1A is a front view of the rear case, and FIG. 1B is a rear view of the rear case. 1A is a front view of the rear case, and FIG. 1B is a rear view of the rear case. 1A is a perspective rear view of the rear case and the board box, and FIG. 1B is a rear view of the rear case and the board box. FIG. FIG. FIG. FIG. FIG. 13 is a front view of the lower displacement unit in the retracted state. FIG. 11 is a front view of the lower displacement unit in a first extended state. FIG. 11 is a front view of the lower displacement unit in the second extended state. FIG. 13 is a rear view of the lower displacement unit in the retracted state. FIG. 11 is a rear view of the lower displacement unit in the first extended state. FIG. 11 is a rear view of the lower displacement unit in the second extended state. 5A is a rear view of the first link member and the cam member in the retracted state, FIG. 5B is a rear view of the first link member and the cam member in the first extended state, and FIG. 51A is a schematic cross-sectional view of the lower displacement unit taken along line LIVa-LIVa in FIG. 50, and FIG. 51B is a schematic cross-sectional view of the lower displacement unit taken along line LIVb-LIVb in FIG. 50, (b) is a cross-sectional view of the lower displacement unit taken along line LVb-LVb in FIG. 51, and (c) is a cross-sectional view of the lower displacement unit taken along line LVc-LVc in FIG. 52. 52, and FIG. 53A is a cross-sectional view of the lower displacement unit taken along line LVIa-LVIa in FIG. 52, and FIG. 53B is a front view of the first link member and cam member of the lower displacement unit in the second extended state. 4A is a front view of a lower displacement member, and FIG. 4B is a rear view of the lower displacement member. FIG. FIG. 13A and 13B are front views of a lower displacement member. FIG. 4 is a front view of the lower displacement member in the first position. FIG. 4 is a front view of the lower displacement member in a second position. FIG. 13 is a front view of the lower displacement member in a third position. 4A to 4C are partial enlarged views of the lower displacement member. 13A to 13C are front views of a lower displacement member. 13A to 13C are front views of a lower displacement member. 13A to 13C are front views of a lower displacement member. 13A to 13C are front views of a lower displacement member. 68(a) is a partial enlarged view of the lower displacement member in a range LXIXa of FIG. 68(b), and FIG. 68(b) is a partial enlarged view of the lower displacement member in a range LXIXb of FIG. 68(a). 4A is a top view of the sorting unit, and FIG. 4B is a rear view of the sorting unit. FIG. FIG. A cross-sectional view of the distribution unit taken along line LXXIII-LXXIII in Figure 70(a). 74(a) and (b) are partial enlarged views of the distribution unit in range LXXIV of FIG. 73. 4A and 4B are partial enlarged views of the sorting unit. 4A and 4B are partial enlarged views of the sorting unit. 4A and 4B are partial enlarged views of the sorting unit. 4A and 4B are partial enlarged views of the sorting unit. FIG. FIG. 4 is a top view of the distribution unit and the lower displacement unit. FIG. FIG. FIG. FIG. FIG. FIG. FIG. FIG. FIG. FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view of the decorative unit. 91A is a side view of the decorative unit as viewed in the direction of arrow XCIIa in FIG. 91, and FIG. 91B is a side view of the decorative unit as viewed in the direction of arrow XCIIb in FIG. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective front view of the decorative unit. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective rear view of the decorative unit. 89A shows a rotation unit as viewed in the direction of arrow XCVa in FIG. 89, and FIG. 89B shows a rotation unit as viewed in the direction of arrow XCVb in FIG. 89A shows a rotation unit as viewed in the direction of arrow XCVa in FIG. 89, and FIG. 89B shows a rotation unit as viewed in the direction of arrow XCVb in FIG. FIG. 13 is a side view of the ornamental unit and the right transmission member in (a) a closed state, (b) an intermediate state, and (c) an open state. FIG. 13 is a side view of the ornamental unit and the right transmission member in (a) an open state, (b) an intermediate state, and (c) a closed state. FIG. 2A is a side view of the decorative unit in a closed state, and FIG. 2B is a side view of the decorative unit in an open state. 100(a) is a front view of the rotating body, (b) is a side view of the rotating body as viewed in the direction of arrow Cb in FIG. 100(a), and (c) is a side view of the rotating body as viewed in the direction of arrow Cc in FIG. 100(a). FIG. FIG. 1A is a side view of the rotating body when the opening/closing member is in a closed state, and FIG. 1B is a side view of the rotating body when the opening/closing member is in an open state. 1A and 1B are side views of a decorative unit. FIG. 4 is a front view of the lower displacement unit and the rotation unit. FIG. 106 is a top view of the lower displacement unit as viewed in the direction of arrows CVI in FIG. 105 . FIG. 4 is a front view of the lower displacement unit and the rotation unit. 108(a) is a top view of the ball receiving stand, (b) is a front view of the ball receiving stand, and (c) is a cross-sectional view of the ball receiving stand taken along line CVIIIc-CVIIIc in FIG. 108(a). This is an exploded oblique view of the ball receiving stand. 13A and 13B are cross-sectional views of the ball receiving stand. 88(a) and (b) are schematic cross-sectional views of the rotating unit taken along line CXI-CXI in FIG. 87. FIG. FIG. FIG. 13 is a front view of the upper displacement unit with the upper displacement member disposed in the retracted position. FIG. 13 is a front view of the upper displacement unit with the upper displacement member disposed in an intermediate position. FIG. 13 is a front view of the upper displacement unit with the upper displacement member disposed in the extended position. FIG. 1A is a front view of the variable portion, and FIG. 1B is a rear view of the variable portion. FIG. 11 is an exploded perspective front view of a lower displacement member in a second embodiment. FIG. FIG. 13 is a front view of the lower displacement member in a third position. 13A is a front view of a lower displacement member in a third embodiment, and FIG. FIG. FIG. 13A and 13B are front views of a lower displacement member. 4A is a front view of the lower displacement member in a first position, and FIG. 4B is a front view of the lower displacement member in a second position. 1A is a front view of the lower displacement member in a third position, and FIG. 1B is a front view of the lower displacement member in a second position. FIG. 13 is a front view of a lower displacement unit in a fourth embodiment. FIG. FIG. 13A is a top view of a distribution unit in a fifth embodiment, and FIG. 13B is a rear view of the distribution unit. FIG. FIG. A cross-sectional view of the distribution unit taken along line CXXXIV-CXXXIV in Figure 131 (a). 134(a) and (b) are partially enlarged views of the distribution unit in range CXXXV of FIG. 134. FIG. 23 is a front view of a rotation unit according to a sixth embodiment. FIG. FIG. 138(a) to (c) are side views of the decorative unit as viewed in the direction of arrow CXXXIX in FIG. 138(a) to (c) are side views of the decorative unit as viewed in the direction of arrow CXXXIX in FIG. FIG. 23 is a schematic side view of a displacement unit in the seventh embodiment. FIG. 4 is a schematic side view of the displacement unit. 13 is a schematic side view of the displacement unit when a game ball is held by the displacement member. FIG. 13 is a schematic side view of the displacement unit when a game ball is held by the displacement member. FIG. FIG. 23 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to an eighth embodiment. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective front view of the rotary operation unit. This is a schematic cross-sectional view of a pachinko machine taken along line CXLVII-CXLVII in Figure 145. FIG. 1 is a schematic cross-sectional view of a pachinko machine. 13A is a perspective front view of a first link member in a ninth embodiment, and FIG. 13B is a schematic cross-sectional view of a lower displacement unit. A cross-sectional view of a game board in the tenth embodiment. FIG. 23 is an exploded perspective front view of a lower displacement member in an eleventh embodiment. 13A and 13B are front views of a lower displacement member. 153(a) is a front view of the lower displacement member, (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the lower displacement member taken along line CLIIIb-CLIIIb in Figure 153(a), and (c) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the lower displacement member taken along line CLIIIc-CLIIIc in Figure 153(a). 12(a) is an exploded oblique front view of the ball receiving portion in the twelfth embodiment, and (b) is a front view of the ball receiving portion. FIG. 155(a) and (b) are front views of a lower displacement member, and (c) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the lower displacement member taken along line CLVc-CLVc in FIG. 155(b). 156(a) is a front view of the special prize device in the thirteenth embodiment, (b) is an oblique front view of the special prize device, and (c) is a cross-sectional view of the special prize device taken along line CLVIc-CLVIc in FIG. 156(a). 1 is an exploded oblique front view of a special prize-winning device. 158(a) is a top view of the special prize device, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the special prize device taken along line CLVIIIb-CLVIIIb in FIG. 158(a). 159(a) is a rear view of the rear case in the fourteenth embodiment, and FIG. 159(b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the rear case taken along line CLIXb-CLIXb in FIG. 159(a). 23A is a schematic cross-sectional view of a rear case according to a fifteenth embodiment, and FIG. 23B is a schematic cross-sectional view of a rear case according to a sixteenth embodiment. 161(a) is a rear view of the rear case in the seventeenth embodiment, and FIG. 161(b) is a cross-sectional view of the rear case taken along line CLXIb-CLXIb in FIG. 161(a). 23A is a front view of the rear case in the 18th embodiment, and FIG. 23B is a rear view of the rear case. 1A is a front view of the rear case, and FIG. 1B is a rear view of the rear case. 1A is a schematic top view of a game board, and FIG. 1B is a schematic top view of a pachinko machine 10. FIG. FIG. 23 is an exploded perspective front view of the engaging member in the nineteenth embodiment. 167A is a front view of the rear case, and FIG. 167B is a cross-sectional view of the one-way taken along line CLXVIb-CLXVIb in FIG. 165. An exploded oblique view of the rear case and rotating unit in the twentieth embodiment. 4A is a front view of the engagement member, and FIG. 4B is a rear view of the rotation unit and the engagement member. 2A is a rear view of the rotating unit and the engaging member, and FIG. 2B is a rear view of the rear case 20300. FIG. 170 is an exploded perspective view of the rear case and the rotating unit in the twenty-first embodiment. 171(a) is a rear view of the rotating unit and the engaging member, and (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the rotating unit taken along line CLXXIb-CLXXIb in FIG. 171(a). 4A is a rear view of the rotation unit and the engagement member, and FIG. 4B is a schematic cross-sectional view of the rear case and the rotation unit. 4A is a rear view of the rotation unit and the engagement member, and FIG. 4B is a schematic cross-sectional view of the rear case and the rotation unit. FIG. 4 is a perspective front view of an engagement member and a fixing member. 1A and 1B are front views of the rear case. 175(a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the rear case taken along line CLXXVIa-CLXXVIa in FIG. 175(b). FIG. 177(b) is a front view of the rear case in the 24th embodiment, and FIG. 177(b) is a cross-sectional view of the rear case taken along line CLXXVIIb-CLXXVIIb in FIG. 177(a). A cross-sectional view of the rear case taken along line CLXXVIII-CLXXVIII in Figure 177(b). 25(a) and (b) are cross-sectional views of a game board in a 25th embodiment. 26(a) and 26(b) are cross-sectional views of a game board in a 26th embodiment. 27(a) and 27(b) are cross-sectional views of a game board according to a 27th embodiment. 2A is a cross-sectional view of a game board in a twenty-eighth embodiment, and FIG. 2B is a cross-sectional view of a game board in a twenty-ninth embodiment. 3A is a cross-sectional view of a general prize winning port unit in the 30th embodiment, and FIG. 3B is a cross-sectional view of a general prize winning port unit in the 31st embodiment. An exploded oblique front view of the special prize winning device in the 32nd embodiment. 185(a) is a front view of the special prize device, (b) is a top view of the special prize device, and (c) is a cross-sectional view of the special prize device taken along line CLXXXVc-CLXXXVc in FIG. 185(a). 186(a) is a cross-sectional view of the special prize winning device, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the special prize winning device taken along line CLXXXVIb-CLXXXVIb in FIG. 186(a). 33A is an exploded oblique front view of a first path member in the thirty-third embodiment, and FIG. 33B is a cross-sectional view of a special prize device. 188(a) is a front view of the game board in the thirty-fourth embodiment, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the game board taken along line CLXXXVIIIb-CLXXXVIIIb in FIG. 188(a). FIG. This is a cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine taken along line CXC-CXC in Figure 188. 35(a) is a front view of the game board in the 35th embodiment, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the game board taken along line CXCIb-CXCIb in (a). FIG. FIG. 191(a) to (c) are cross-sectional views of the game board 13 taken along line CXCIII-CXCIII in FIG. 191(b). 36(a) is an exploded oblique front view showing a schematic diagram of a game board in a 36th embodiment, and FIG. 36(b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the game board. 37(a) is an exploded oblique front view showing a schematic diagram of a game board in a 37th embodiment, and FIG. 37(b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the game board. FIG. 38 is an exploded oblique front view of a lower displacement member in the thirty-eighth embodiment. 197(a) is a front view of the lower displacement member, (b) is a cross-sectional view of the lower displacement member taken along line CXCVIIb-CXCVIIb in Figure 197(a), and (c) is a cross-sectional view of the lower displacement member taken along line CXCVIIc-CXCVIIc in Figure 197(a). FIG. 39 is an exploded perspective rear view of the lower displacement member in the thirty-ninth embodiment. 199(a) is a front view of the lower displacement member, and FIG. 199(b) and FIG. 199(c) are cross-sectional views of the lower displacement member. FIG. 200(a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the first unit in the fortieth embodiment, and FIG. 200(b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the first unit along line CCb-CCb in FIG. 200(a). 201(a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the first unit in the forty-first embodiment, and (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the first unit taken along line CCIb-CCIb in FIG. 201(a). 201(a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the first unit taken along line CCIIa-CCIIa in FIG. 201(a), and (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the first unit taken along line CCIIb-CCIIb in FIG. 201(a). FIG. 42 is an exploded oblique front view of the rear case in the forty-second embodiment. 204(a) is a front view of the rear case, and (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the rear case taken along line CCIVb-CCIVb in FIG. 204(a). 205(a) is a front view of the rear case, and (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the rear case taken along line CCVb-CCVb in FIG. 205(a). 206(a) is a rear view of the game board, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the game board taken along line CCVIb-CCVIb in FIG. 206(a). A front view of the game board of a pachinko machine in the first control example. A schematic diagram showing the internal structure of the special prize device in the first control example. 1A is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of area division settings and effective line settings on a display screen, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing an example of an actual display screen. 1A is a diagram showing an example of the display content showing the fluctuation of a 16R special jackpot in the first control example, and FIG. 1B is an example of the display mode of the rotation unit when the 16R special jackpot fluctuates. 1A is a diagram showing an example of the display content showing the fluctuation of a 6R special jackpot in the first control example, and FIG. 1B is an example of the display mode of the rotation unit when the 6R special jackpot fluctuates. (a) is a figure showing an example of display content indicating fluctuations during the CHARGE presentation in the first control example, and (b) is a figure showing an example of display content indicating the halt of fluctuations during the CHARGE presentation in the first control example. (a) is a figure showing an example of the display content showing the roulette presentation after a special pattern stops in the first control example, and (b) is a figure showing an example of the display content showing the result of the roulette presentation in the first control example. 1A is a diagram showing an example of the display content when the valid period for pressing the button occurs in the first control example, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing an example of the display content when the valid period for pressing the button has elapsed for a certain period in the first control example. (a) is a figure showing an example of the display content while a button is pressed in the first control example, and (b) is a figure showing an example of a case where the button effects are fused after the effective period displays of each button press match in the first control example. 13 is a timing chart showing the period during which the button is pressed in the first control example. (a) is a figure showing an example of the display content of automatic button press performance 1 in the first control example, and (b) is a figure showing an example of the display content of automatic button press performance 2 in the first control example. A figure showing an example of the display content of automatic button press performance 3 in the first control example. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display content when an attacca is won during a jackpot game in the first control example, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display content when a pseudo attacca is won during a jackpot game in the first control example. 2 is a schematic diagram showing counters and the like provided in RAM 203 of main control device 110. FIG. 1A is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the main control device in the first control example, and FIG. 1B is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the main control device in the first control example. (a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the special pattern jackpot random number table, (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the small jackpot random number table, and (c) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the normal jackpot random number table. (a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the jackpot type selection table, (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the special chart 1 jackpot type selection table, and (c) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the special chart 2 jackpot type selection table. A schematic diagram showing the configuration of a variation pattern selection table. This is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the normal/latent fluctuation pattern selection table. This is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the probability variable variation pattern selection table. (a) is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the first control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the voice lamp control device in the first control example. 1A is a schematic diagram showing the contents of a reservation rank selection table, and FIG. 1B is a schematic diagram showing the contents of a reservation mode selection table. FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram showing the contents of a treasure box mode selection table. 13 is a schematic diagram showing the contents of a performance counter group. FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a display control device in a first control example. FIG. 13A to 13C are diagrams illustrating images displayed when the power is turned on. 1A is an explanatory diagram illustrating the rear surface A, and FIG. 1B is an explanatory diagram illustrating the rear surfaces B to D. FIG. 4A to 4C are explanatory diagrams illustrating the rear surface E. FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of a display data table. FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of a transfer data table. FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of a drawing list. 5 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by an MPU in the main control device. 13 is a flowchart showing a special pattern change process executed by the MPU in the main control device. 13 is a flowchart showing the special pattern 2 variation start processing executed by the MPU in the main control device. 13 is a flowchart showing the special pattern 1 variation start processing executed by the MPU in the main control device. 13 is a flowchart showing the small win setting process executed by the MPU in the main control device. 13 is a flowchart showing a game status update process executed by the MPU in the main control device. A flowchart showing the start winning processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit. 11 is a flowchart showing a read-ahead process executed by an MPU in a main control device. 13 is a flowchart showing the normal pattern change processing executed by the MPU in the main control device. 13 is a flowchart showing the normal pattern variation start processing executed by the MPU in the main control device. 13 is a flowchart showing a through-gate passing process executed by an MPU in the main control device. 13 is a flowchart showing a general map pre-reading process executed by the MPU in the main control device. 13 is a flowchart showing other prize-winning processing executed by the MPU in the main control device. 5 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by an MPU in a main control device. 5 is a flowchart showing a start-up process executed by an MPU in the main control device. 4 is a flowchart showing main processing by an MPU in the main control device. 13 is a flowchart showing a jackpot control process executed by the MPU in the main control device. 13 is a flowchart showing the small win control process executed by the MPU in the main control device. 10 is a flowchart showing a start-up process executed by an MPU in the voice lamp control device. 4 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by an MPU in the voice lamp control device. 10 is a flowchart showing a command determination process executed by an MPU in the voice lamp control device. 11 is a flowchart showing a variation pattern receiving process executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device. A flowchart showing a winning information related process executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device. 11 is a flowchart showing a hold mode selection process executed by an MPU in the voice lamp control device. 13 is a flowchart showing a treasure box mode selection process executed by an MPU in the voice lamp control device. 13 is a flowchart showing a winning-related process executed by an MPU in the voice lamp control device. 13 is a flowchart showing the right attacker jackpot-related processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. 11 is a flowchart showing the pseudo-attacker production process executed by an MPU in the voice lamp control device. 11 is a flowchart showing a stop process executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device. A flowchart showing the variable display setting process executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device. A flowchart showing the variable performance setting process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. A flowchart showing the operation performance setting process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. 13 is a flowchart showing the charge performance setting process executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device. A flowchart showing the frame button input monitoring and presentation processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. A flowchart showing the LCD performance execution management process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. A flowchart showing the operation performance management processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. 4 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by an MPU in the display control device. 4 is a flowchart showing a boot process executed by an MPU in the display control device. 1A is a flowchart showing a command interrupt process executed by an MPU in a display control device, and FIG. 1B is a flowchart showing a V interrupt process executed by an MPU in a display control device. 11 is a flowchart showing a command determination process executed by an MPU in the display control device. 13A is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and FIG. 13B is a flowchart showing the stop type command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. 13A is a flowchart showing the preview display processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and FIG. 13B is a flowchart showing the variable replacement switching processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. 13A is a flowchart showing operation presentation command processing executed by an MPU in a display control device, and FIG. 13B is a flowchart showing button fusion display processing executed by an MPU in a display control device. 13 is a flowchart showing a pseudo winning display process executed by an MPU in a display control device. 10 is a flowchart showing an error command process executed by an MPU in the display control device. 4 is a flowchart showing a display setting process executed by an MPU in the display control device. 13A is a flowchart showing a warning image setting process executed by an MPU in a display control device, and FIG. 13B is a flowchart showing a pointer updating process executed by an MPU in a display control device. 13A is a flowchart showing a transfer setting process executed by an MPU in a display control device, and FIG. 13B is a flowchart showing a resident image transfer setting process executed by an MPU in a display control device. 11 is a flowchart showing a normal image transfer setting process executed by an MPU in the display control device. 4 is a flowchart showing a drawing process executed by an MPU in the display control device. 13A is a diagram showing an example of the display content indicating the start of the point acquisition effect in the second control example, and FIG. 13B is a diagram showing an example of the display content indicating the end of the point acquisition effect. 13A is a diagram showing an example of the display content of the point acquisition presentation with the reserved ball in the second control example, and FIG. 13B is a diagram showing an example of the display content showing the reach selection variation pattern. 13A is a diagram showing an example of the display content of the pseudo-fluctuation in the second control example, and FIG. 13B is a diagram showing an example of the display content showing the point consumption re-fluctuation. 13A is a diagram showing an example of the display contents of a pattern HOLD selection screen in the second control example, and FIG. 13B is a diagram showing an example of the display contents of a pattern HOLD screen in the second control example. (a) is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the second control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the voice lamp control device in the second control example. A schematic diagram showing the contents of the point selection table with reservations in the second control example. A schematic diagram showing the contents of the point selection table without reservations in the second control example. 13A is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the fluctuation point selection table in the second control example, and FIG. 13B is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the display position in the second control example. (a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the winning consumption point selection table in the second control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the losing consumption point selection table in the second control example. 13 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in a second control example. 11 is a flowchart showing command determination process 2 executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in a second control example. A flowchart showing the variation pattern reception process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the second control example. 13 is a flowchart showing a point selection process executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in a second control example. A flowchart showing the frame button input monitoring and performance process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the second control example. 11 is a flowchart showing the advance notice setting process executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in a second control example. 13 is a flowchart showing a special point selection process executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in a second control example. 13 is a flowchart showing the consumption reach selection process executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in a second control example. 13 is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing 2 executed by an MPU in a display control device in a second control example. 13 is a flowchart showing a command determination process 2 executed by an MPU in the display control device in the second control example. 13A to 13C are front views of the lower displacement member in a third control example. (a) is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the third control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the voice lamp control device in the third control example. FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram showing the contents of initial operation data in a third control example. 13A is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the firing operation data in the third control example, and FIG. 13B is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the origin operation data in the third control example. 13A is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the first operation data in the third control example, and FIG. 13B is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the second operation data in the third control example. 13 is a flowchart showing an initial operation setting process executed by an MPU in the display control device in the third control example. 13 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in a third control example. 13 is a flowchart showing an initial discharge operation setting process executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in a third control example. 13 is a flowchart showing an operational control process executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in a third control example. A flowchart showing a first operation setting process executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in a third control example. 13 is a flowchart illustrating a discharge operation setting process executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in a third control example. A flowchart showing a second operation setting process executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in a third control example. A flowchart showing the firing operation setting process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the third control example. A front view of the game board of a pachinko machine in the fourth control example. A schematic diagram showing the internal structure of the special prize device in the fourth control example. A schematic diagram showing the game flow of a pachinko machine in the fourth control example. A schematic diagram showing the flow of presentations executed in response to the game state in the fourth control example. (a) is a figure showing an example of display content indicating the presentation during potential confirmation presentation A mode in the fourth control example, and (b) is a figure showing an example of display content indicating the presentation during potential confirmation presentation B mode in the fourth control example. (a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the special pattern winning random number 4 table in the fourth control example, (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the small winning random number 4 table in the fourth control example, and (c) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the normal winning random number 4 table in the fourth control example. (a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the special chart 1 jackpot type selection 4 table in the fourth control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the special chart 2 jackpot type selection 4 table in the fourth control example. A schematic diagram showing the contents of the variation pattern selection 4 table in the fourth control example. This is a schematic diagram showing the contents of four tables for normal and special rate in the fourth control example. (a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of four tables for potential confirmation in the fourth control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of four tables for time reduction in the fourth control example. FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the main control device in the fourth control example. A schematic diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the voice lamp control device in the fourth control example. 13 is a flowchart showing the special pattern change processing 4 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fourth control example. A flowchart showing the first special pattern variation start process 4 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fourth control example. A flowchart showing the first special pattern jackpot determination process 4 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fourth control example. This is a flowchart showing the first special pattern change pattern selection process 4 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fourth control example. A flowchart showing the first special pattern variation in progress processing 4 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fourth control example. A flowchart showing the first special pattern variation stop processing 4 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fourth control example. A flowchart showing the second special pattern change start process 4 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fourth control example. A flowchart showing the second special pattern jackpot determination process 4 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fourth control example. A flowchart showing the special chart 2 out-of-range variation processing 4 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fourth control example. A flowchart showing the second special pattern change pattern selection process 4 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fourth control example. A flowchart showing the special chart 2 out-of-range variation pattern selection process 4 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fourth control example. A flowchart showing the second special pattern variation execution process 4 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fourth control example. A flowchart showing the second special pattern variation stop processing 4 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fourth control example. A flowchart showing the special chart 2 off-axis stop processing 4 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fourth control example. This is a flowchart showing normal pattern change processing 4 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fourth control example. A flowchart showing the jackpot end processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fourth control example. 13 is a flowchart showing main processing 4 executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in a fourth control example. 13 is a flowchart showing command determination process 4 executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in a fourth control example. 13 is a flowchart showing a state command processing 4 executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in a fourth control example. A flowchart showing the pseudo-performance setting process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the fourth control example. A front view of the game board of a pachinko machine in a modified example of the first control example.

Hereinafter, an embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to Fig. 1 to Fig. 111, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko game machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as a "pachinko machine") 10 will be described as a first embodiment. Fig. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, Fig. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and Fig. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

In the following description, the front side of the paper will be referred to as the front (front) side and the back side of the paper will be referred to as the rear (back) side with respect to the pachinko machine 10 in the state shown in Fig. 1. Also, the upper side will be referred to as the upper (upper) side, the lower side as the lower (lower) side, the right side as the right (right) side, and the left side as the left (left) side with respect to the pachinko machine 10 in the state shown in Fig. 1. Furthermore, the arrows U-D, L-R, and F-B in the figure indicate the up-down direction, left-right direction, and front-back direction of the pachinko machine 10, respectively.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11, which is formed by combining wooden frames into a substantially rectangular shape to form an outer shell, and an inner frame 4, which is formed to have substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11 and is supported so as to be openable and closable relative to the outer frame 11.
See FIG. 1. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the top and bottom of the left side, and the inner frame 4 is supported so as to be able to open and close toward the front, with the side where the hinges 18 are provided as the axis of opening and closing.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a number of nails and winning holes 63, 64, etc. is attached to the inner frame 4 so as to be detachable from the back side. A pinball game is played by balls (game balls) flowing down the front of the game board 13. The inner frame 4 is also equipped with a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that launches balls into the front area of the game board 13 and a ball launching unit 112a that receives the balls from the ball launching unit 112a and stores them in the game board 1.
A launch rail (not shown) that guides the launch vehicle to the front area of the vehicle 3 is attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 4, there is a front door 5 which covers the upper side of the front face, and a lower tray unit 15 which covers the lower side of the front door 5.
In order to support the front door 5 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two locations, top and bottom, on the left side when viewed from the front (see Figure 1), and the front door 5 and the lower tray unit 15 are supported so that they can be opened and closed toward the front, with the side where the hinges 19 are provided serving as the axis for opening and closing. The locking of the inner frame 4 and the locking of the front door 5 can be released by inserting a special key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a specified operation.

The front door 5 is fitted with decorative resin parts, electrical parts, etc., and has a window 5c formed in a substantially elliptical shape at its approximate center. A glass unit 16 having two glass sheets 8 is disposed on the rear side of the front door 5, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be seen from the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

In the front door 5, the upper tray 17 for storing balls is formed in a box shape with an open top that protrudes forward, and prize balls and loan balls are discharged into the upper tray 17. The bottom surface of the upper tray 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the inclination guides the balls dropped into the upper tray 17 to the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4). In addition, the upper surface of the upper tray 17 has frame buttons 2
2 is provided. The frame button 22 is, for example, a third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2).
It is operated by the player when, for example, changing the stage of the performance displayed or changing the content of the Super Reach performance.

The front door 5 is provided with various light-emitting means such as lamps around it (for example, at the corners). The light-emitting means are controlled to change the light-emitting state by lighting or blinking depending on the change in the game state such as when a jackpot is hit or when a certain reach is reached, and play a role in enhancing the presentation effect during the game. The periphery of the window portion 5c is provided with illumination units 29-33 incorporating light-emitting means such as LEDs. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination units 29-33 function as presentation lamps such as jackpot lamps, and when a jackpot is hit or when a reach is reached, each illumination unit 29-33 lights up or blinks by lighting or blinking the built-in LEDs, thereby notifying that a jackpot is being hit or that a reach is being reached just before a jackpot. In addition, the front door 5 is provided with an indicator lamp 34 at the upper left when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), which incorporates light-emitting means such as LEDs and can display when prize balls are being paid out and when an error occurs.

In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin to the back side of the front door 5 under the right-side illumination part 32 so that the back side of the front door 5 can be seen, and the attachment space K1 (see FIG. 2) on the front side of the game board 13
The stamps and the like affixed to the illumination units 29 to 33 can be seen from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plated member 36 made of chrome-plated ABS resin is attached to the area around the illumination units 29 to 33 to create a more brilliant appearance.

A ball lending operation unit 40 is disposed below the window portion 5c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a number display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43.
When bills, cards, etc. are inserted into the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) located to the side of the machine and the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated, balls are lent in accordance with the operation.
Specifically, the point display section 41 is an area where the remaining balance information of the card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED lights up to display the remaining balance in numbers as the remaining balance information. The ball loan button 42 is operated to obtain loan balls based on the information recorded on the card or the like (recording medium).
As long as there is a balance on the card, the loan balls are supplied to the upper tray 17. Return button 43
is operated when requesting the return of a card inserted in the card unit. In pachinko machines in which balls are directly dispensed from a ball dispensing device to the upper tray 17 without going through a card unit, i.e., so-called cash machines, the ball dispensing operation unit 40 is not necessary, but in this case, a decorative sticker or the like may be added to the installation portion of the ball dispensing operation unit 40 to make the parts configuration common. It is possible to commonize pachinko machines using a card unit and cash machines.

The lower tray unit 15 located below the upper tray 17 has a lower tray 50 in the center thereof, which is formed in a generally box-like shape with an open top, for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper tray 17.
To the right of 0 is provided an operating handle 51 which is operated by the player to hit the ball into the front of the game board 13 .

Inside the operation handle 51, there are a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball launching unit 112a, and a launch stop switch 51 for stopping the launch of the ball while the touch sensor 51a is being pressed.
The touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes corresponding to the amount of rotation (rotation position) of the operating handle 51, and a variable resistor (not shown) that detects this amount of rotation (rotation position) of the operating handle 51 by a change in electrical resistance. When the operating handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes corresponding to the amount of rotation, and the ball is launched with a strength (launch strength) corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor, thereby shooting the ball into the front of the game board 13 with a flight distance corresponding to the operation of the player. When the operating handle 51 is not being operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and launch stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball removal lever 52 is provided on the lower front part of the lower tray 50 to be operated when discharging the balls stored in the lower tray 50 downward. This ball removal lever 52 is always biased to the right, and by sliding it to the left against this bias, a bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower tray 50 opens, and the balls fall naturally from the bottom opening and are discharged. This ball removal lever 52 is usually operated with a box (commonly called a "senryo box") that receives the balls discharged from the lower tray 50 placed below the lower tray 50. As described above, the operating handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower tray 50, and an ashtray 53 is attached to the left side of the lower tray 50.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 is provided with a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front.
In addition to the numerous nails (not shown) for guiding the balls and the windmill, the rails 76, 77, the general winning hole 63, the first
It is constructed by assembling a winning port 64, a second winning port 640, a variable winning device 65, a first through gate 66, a variable display unit 80, etc., and its peripheral portion is attached to the back side of the inner frame 4 (see FIG. 1). The base plate 60 is made of wood made by gluing together thin boards, and is formed so that the various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 are not visible to the player from the front side.
The general winning port 63, the first winning port 64, the second winning port 640, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and are fixed from the front side of the game board 13 by tapping screws or the like.

The central portion of the front surface of the game board 13 can be seen from the front side of the inner frame 4 through the window portion 5c (see FIG. 1) of the front door 5. The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below mainly with reference to FIG.

On the front surface of the game board 13, there is an outer rail 77 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arcuate shape.
is installed in the front of the game board 13, and an arc-shaped inner rail 76 made of a strip-shaped metal plate like the outer rail 77 is installed inside the outer rail 77. The front periphery of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 76 and the outer rail 77, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and rear, forming a game area in front of the game board 13 where games are played according to the behavior of the ball. The game area is an area (where winning slots and the like are located,
The area into which the launched ball flows.

The two rails 76, 77 are provided to guide the balls launched from the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13.
A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the top of the outer rail 77 (upper left of FIG. 2 ) to prevent a ball that has been guided to the top of the game board 13 from returning back into the ball guide passage. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 77 (upper right of FIG. 2 ) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight part of the ball, and a ball launched with a force greater than a predetermined force hits the return rubber 69 and is bounced back toward the center while its force is reduced.

At the lower left side of the game area as viewed from the front (lower left side of FIG. 2), first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are provided, each of which is equipped with a plurality of LEDs as light-emitting means and a seven-segment display.
The symbol display devices 37A and 37B are used to display information according to the controls performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the game status of the pachinko machine 10. In this embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are configured to be used differently depending on whether the ball has entered the first winning hole 64 or the second winning hole 640. Specifically, when the ball has entered the first winning hole 64, the first symbol display device 37A is activated, while when the ball has entered the second winning hole 640, the first symbol display device 37B is activated.

The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a special mode, a time-saving mode, or a normal mode, whether it is fluctuating, whether the stopped symbol corresponds to a special mode jackpot, a normal jackpot, or a miss, and the number of reserved balls. The seven-segment display device also displays the number of rounds during a jackpot and errors.
The ED is configured so that each LED has a different light emission color (e.g., red, green, blue), and by combining these light emission colors, it is possible to indicate various game states of the pachinko machine 10 using a small number of LEDs.

In this pachinko machine 10, a lottery is held when a prize is won in either the first prize slot 64 or the second prize slot 640. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 judges whether or not a jackpot has been won (jackpot lottery), and if a jackpot has been determined, it also judges the type of jackpot. The types of jackpots that are judged here include 15R guaranteed jackpot,
A 4R special jackpot and a 15R regular jackpot are available.
7B not only indicates whether the result of the lottery is a jackpot or not as the stopping pattern after the fluctuation ends, but also indicates a pattern according to the type of jackpot if the result is a jackpot.

Here, a "15R chance jackpot" refers to a chance jackpot that transitions to a high probability state after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15, and a "4R chance jackpot" refers to a chance jackpot that transitions to a high probability state after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 4. Also, a "15R normal jackpot" refers to a chance jackpot that transitions to a high probability state after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15,
This is a jackpot that transitions to a low probability state and also results in a time-saving state for a specified number of fluctuations (e.g., 100 fluctuations).

Moreover, the "high probability state" refers to a state in which the probability of a subsequent jackpot is increased as an added value after the end of the jackpot, that is, during the so-called probability fluctuation (during the probability change), in other words, a game state in which it is easy to transition to a special game state. The high probability state (during the probability change) in this embodiment includes a game state in which the probability of a hit of the second symbol described later is increased and the ball is likely to enter the second winning hole 640. The "low probability state" refers to a time when the probability change is not in progress, and refers to a state in which the probability of a jackpot is in a normal state, that is, a state in which the probability of a jackpot is lower than in the probability change. Furthermore, the time-saving state (during the time-saving state) in the "low probability state" refers to a game state in which the probability of a jackpot is in a normal state and the probability of a jackpot remains the same, only the probability of a hit of the second symbol is increased, and the ball is likely to enter the second winning hole 640. On the other hand, the normal state of the pachinko machine 10 refers to a game state in which the probability of a jackpot is not in a probability change state nor a time-saving state (
Neither the probability of winning the jackpot nor the probability of winning the second symbol has increased.

During the probability of winning or the time limit, not only does the probability of winning the second symbol increase, but the second winning slot 64
The time for which the first electric device 640a associated with 0 is opened is also changed, and is set to a longer time than during normal play. When the first electric device 640a is in an open state (open state), the ball is more likely to enter the second winning hole 640 than when the first electric device 640a is in a closed state (closed state). Therefore, during the probability change or time reduction, the ball is more likely to enter the second winning hole 640, and the number of times the jackpot lottery is held can be increased.

In addition, during the probability variation or time reduction, instead of changing the opening time of the first electric role 640a associated with the second winning port 640, or in addition to changing the opening time, the number of times the first electric role 640a opens with one win may be increased compared to normal. Also, during the probability variation or time reduction, the winning probability of the second symbol may not be changed, and at least one of the time when the first electric role 640a associated with the second winning port 640 is opened and the number of times the first electric role 640a opens with one win may be changed. Also, during the probability variation or time reduction, the time when the first electric role 640a associated with the second winning port 640 is opened and the number of times the first electric role 640a opens with one win may not be changed, and only the winning probability of the second symbol may be changed to be increased compared to normal.

In the game area, a plurality of general winning holes 63 are arranged, through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters the winning hole. In addition, a variable display unit 80 is arranged in the center of the game area. The variable display unit 80 has a first winning hole 64, a second winning hole 65, a third winning hole 66, a fourth winning hole 67, a fifth winning hole 68, a sixth winning hole 69, a sixth winning hole 61, a seventh winning hole 62, a seventh winning hole 63, a seventh winning hole 64, a seventh winning hole 65, a seventh winning hole 66, a seventh winning hole 67, a seventh winning hole 68, a seventh winning hole 69 ...1, a seventh winning hole 62, a seventh winning hole 63, a seventh winning hole 64, a seven
The first symbol display device 37A,
There is provided a third pattern display device 81 consisting of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply abbreviated as "display device") that displays the changing third pattern in synchronization with the changing display in 37B, and a second pattern display device (not shown) consisting of an LED that displays the changing second pattern in response to the passage of the ball through the first through gate 66.

In addition, a center frame 86 is disposed in the variable display unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third pattern display device 81. The third pattern display device 81 can be viewed from an opening in the center of the center frame 86.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large 9-inch liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), so that, for example, three symbol rows, upper, middle, and lower, are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbols), and these third symbols are scrolled horizontally for each symbol row, so that the third symbols are variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. The third symbol display device 81 of this embodiment performs decorative display according to the display of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, while the display of the game state accompanied by the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4) is performed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B. Note that, instead of a display device, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, a reel or the like.

The second symbol display device displays a display symbol (a second symbol (
The pachinko machine 10 performs a variable display in which a "circle" symbol and an "x" symbol as a winning combination (not shown) are alternately lit for a predetermined period of time. When it is detected that the ball has passed through the first through gate 66, a winning selection is performed in the pachinko machine 10. If the result of the winning selection is a winning combination, the second symbol display device displays a static display of a "circle" symbol after the second symbol has been displayed in a variable manner. If the result of the winning selection is a losing combination, the second symbol display device displays a static display of a "circle" symbol after the third symbol has been displayed in a variable manner.
The "×" symbol is displayed frozen.

When the variable display in the second symbol display device stops at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, a symbol of "○"), the first electric device 64 attached to the second winning hole 640 is turned on.
0a is configured to be in an activated state (opened) for a predetermined period of time.

The time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set to be shorter during the probability variable or time-saving mode than during the normal game state. As a result, the variable display of the second symbol is performed in a short time during the probability variable or time-saving mode, so that more winning lotteries can be performed than during the normal game state.
Therefore, the chances of winning in the winning lottery are increased, and the first electric device 640a of the second winning port 640 is given to the player more opportunities to be in the open state. Therefore, during the probability variation and the time reduction, the state in which the ball is likely to enter the second winning port 640 can be made.

In addition, during the probability of winning or the time limit, the first win per win
If the state is made such that the ball is likely to enter the second winning slot 640 during the probability variation or time-saving period by other methods such as increasing the opening time or number of openings of the electric role 640a, the time taken for the second symbol to be displayed may be constant regardless of the game state. On the other hand, if the time taken for the second symbol to be displayed is set shorter during the probability variation or time-saving period than during normal periods, the probability of winning may be constant regardless of the game state, and the first probability of winning per winning may be set to 1.
The opening time and number of times the electric device 640a is opened may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

The first through gate 66 is attached to the game board in the area to the right of the variable display unit 80. The first through gate 66 is configured to allow some of the balls that are launched onto the game board and flow down the game board to pass through. When the ball passes through the first through gate 66, the second through gate 66
A lottery is held to determine the winning symbol. After the lottery, the second symbol display device changes the display.
If the result of the lottery is a win, the symbol "○" will be displayed as the stopping symbol on the variable display.
If the result of the winning lottery is a miss, an "X" symbol is displayed as the stopping symbol of the variable display.

The number of times that the balls pass through the first through gate 66 is reserved up to a maximum of four times in total, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display device 37A, 37B, and is also displayed by lighting the second symbol reservation lamp (not shown). Four second symbol reservation lamps are provided, the maximum number of reserved balls, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

In addition, the variable display of the second symbol is performed by switching on and off a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in this embodiment, or by the first symbol display device 37A,
37B and a part of the third symbol display device 81. Similarly, the second symbol reservation lamp may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81.
The maximum number of reserved balls for passing through the first through gate 66 is not limited to four times.
The number of times may be set to three or less, or to five or more (e.g., eight). The number of through gates to be installed is not limited to two, but may be three or more. The installation position of the through gate is not limited to both the left and right sides of the variable display unit 80, but may be, for example, below the variable display unit 80. Since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first pattern display devices 37A and 37B, the second pattern reserved lamp may not be illuminated.

A first winning hole 64 into which a ball can win is disposed below the variable display unit 80. When a ball wins into this first winning hole 64, a first winning hole switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and when the first winning hole switch is turned on, a lottery for a big win is held by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and a display according to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37A.

On the other hand, a second winning hole 640 into which a ball can win is disposed to the right of the first winning hole 64 as viewed from the front. When a ball wins into the second winning hole 640, a second winning hole switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and when the second winning hole switch is turned on, a lottery for a big win is performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and a display according to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37B.

In addition, the first winning hole 64 and the second winning hole 640 are also one of the winning holes from which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters the winning hole.
The number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the winning port 64 is the same as the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second winning port 640. However, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first winning port 64 is different from the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second winning port 640. For example, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first winning port 64 is set to three.
The number of winning balls paid out when a ball enters the second winning port 640 may be set to five.

Furthermore, a third winning opening 82 into which a ball can win is disposed on the left side of the first winning opening 64 when viewed from the front. When a ball wins, the third winning opening 82 can send the winning ball to a first opening 511 of a distribution unit 500 (described later) via a ball sending unit 600. That is, the third winning opening 82 is disposed in communication with the first opening 511 (described later).

The third winning hole 82 is provided with a third electric device 82a. The third electric device 82a is configured to be openable and closable by rotational displacement relative to the game board 13.
a is in a closed state (reduced state), making it difficult for the ball to enter the third winning hole 82.
On the other hand, if a jackpot is determined to have been won due to a win at the first winning slot 64 or the second winning slot 640, the third electric device 82a is opened (expanded) for a predetermined time after or during the jackpot, making it easier for the ball to win at the third winning slot 82.
A sensor device SE1 is mounted downstream of the sensor device SE1 for detecting a passing ball.

The timing of opening the third electric device 82a is determined by the timing of the first winning hole 64 and the second winning hole 56.
It does not have to be triggered by the winning of 40, but may be opened when the second pattern display device displays a "○" pattern as a result of the changing display of the second pattern triggered by the passage of a ball lying on the first through gate 66.

The second winning slot 640 is provided with a first electric device 640a.
The first electric device 640a is configured to be openable and closable, and the first electric device 640a is normally in a closed state (reduced state).
This makes it difficult for the ball to enter the second winning port 640. On the other hand, when the second symbol display device displays a "○" symbol as a result of the variable display of the second symbol triggered by the passage of the ball through the first through gate 66, the first electric device 640a is opened (expanded), making it easier for the ball to enter the second winning port 640.

As mentioned above, during the special and time-limited modes, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than during normal modes.
In addition, the time it takes for the second pattern to change is short, so the second pattern will change to "○".
The symbol is more likely to be displayed, and the number of times the first electric device 640a is in the open state (expanded state) increases. Furthermore, during the probability variation or time reduction, the time during which the first electric device 640a is opened is longer than during normal times. Therefore, during the probability variation or time reduction, the second winning port 640
This creates conditions that make it easier for the ball to score.

Here, the probability of winning a jackpot when a ball enters the first winning slot 64 and when a ball enters the second winning slot 640 is the same in both low and high probability states. However, the probability of a 15R variable jackpot being selected as the type of jackpot when a jackpot occurs is set higher when a ball enters the second winning slot 640 than when a ball enters the first winning slot 64. On the other hand, the first winning slot 64 does not have the first electric device 640a like the second winning slot 640, and the ball is always in a state where it can win a jackpot.

Therefore, in normal times, the electric device associated with the second winning port 640 is often in a closed state, making it difficult to win at the second winning port 640. Therefore, the ball is shot toward the first winning port 64, which does not have an electric device, so that the ball passes to the left of the variable display unit 80 (so-called "left shot").
) It is more advantageous for the player to aim for a jackpot by winning through the first winning slot 64, thereby gaining more opportunities to win the jackpot lottery.

On the other hand, during the special bonus period or the time-saving period, the first electric device 640a attached to the second winning port 640 is likely to be opened by passing the ball through the first through gate 66, making it easier to win at the second winning port 640. Therefore, it is more advantageous for the player to shoot the ball toward the second winning port 640 so that it passes to the right of the variable display unit 80 (the so-called "right hit"), passing the ball through the first through gate 66 to open the first electric device 640a, and aiming for a 15R special bonus jackpot by winning at the second winning port 640.

In this way, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment allows the player to select how to shoot the ball depending on the game state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is in a special mode, a time-saving mode, or a normal mode).
This allows the player to change between "left hit" and "right hit". This allows the player to have more fun playing the game because it allows for more variety in the way the ball is hit.

A variable winning device 65 is disposed to the right of the first winning hole 64, and a horizontally long rectangular specific winning hole (large opening) 65a is disposed in the approximate center of the device.
If the jackpot lottery held due to a winning entry at either the first winning slot 64 or the second winning slot 640 results in a jackpot, after a predetermined time (variable time) has elapsed, the first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on to show the jackpot stopping symbol, and the stopping symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, indicating that a jackpot has occurred. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (jackpot) in which it is easier for balls to win. In this special game state, the specific winning slot 65a, which is normally closed, is turned on for a predetermined time (e.g., 30
The reel will be released until 10 seconds have passed or until 10 balls have been scored.

This specific winning hole 65a is closed after a predetermined time has elapsed, and after the closing, the specific winning hole 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening and closing operation of this specific winning hole 65a can be repeated up to, for example, 15 times (15 rounds). The state in which this opening and closing operation is being performed is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is paid out a larger number of prize balls than usual as an addition of game value (game value).

Specifically, the variable winning device 65 includes a horizontally long rectangular opening plate that covers the specific winning hole 65a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for driving the opening and closing of the opening and closing hole forward with the lower side of the opening and closing plate as an axis.
The specific winning hole 65a is normally in a closed state in which the ball cannot or does not easily win a prize. When a big win occurs, the large opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening/closing plate downward toward the front, temporarily creating an open state in which the ball can easily win the specific winning hole 65a, and the open state and the normal closed state are alternately repeated.

The special game state is not limited to the above-mentioned form. A large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a may be provided in the game area, and when an LED corresponding to a big win is lit in the first pattern display device 37A, 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, and a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when a ball enters the specific winning opening 65a while the specific winning opening 65a is open, so that the special game state may be formed. Also, the specific winning opening 65a is not limited to one, and one or more than two (for example, three) may be provided, and the location of the specific winning opening 65a is not limited to the right side of the first winning opening 64, but may be, for example, the left side of the variable display unit 80.

An attachment space K1 for attaching stamps, identification labels, etc. is provided in the right corner of the lower side of the game board 13, and the stamps, etc. attached to the attachment space K1 can be viewed through a small window 35 in the front door 5 (see Figure 1).

The game board 13 is provided with a first outlet 71. A ball flowing down the game area that does not win any of the winning holes 63, 64, 65a, 640, 82 is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the first outlet 71. The first outlet 71 is disposed below the first winning hole 64.

A large number of nails are set on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the direction in which the balls fall, and various components (gimmicks) such as windmills are also provided.

As shown in Fig. 3, the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 is mainly equipped with control board units 90, 91 and a back pack unit 94. The control board unit 90 is a unit equipped with a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113) and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is a unit equipped with a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115) and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 is a unit formed by the back pack 92 forming the protective cover and the payout unit 93. In addition, each control board is equipped with an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer for each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used in various lotteries, a clock pulse generating circuit used for time counting and synchronization, etc. as necessary.

In addition, the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113, the display control device 114, the payout control device 111, the launch control device 112, the power supply device 115, the card unit connection board 1
The boards 100 to 16 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively.
The box base 104 includes a box cover that covers the opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house the control devices and the boards.

In addition, the board box 100 (main control device 110) and the board box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and launch control device 112) have a box base and a box cover connected to each other by a sealing unit (not shown) in an unopenable manner (connected by a crimping structure).
A seal (not shown) is attached to the joint between the box base and the box cover. This seal is made of a brittle material, and if you try to peel off the seal to open the board boxes 100, 102 or forcefully open the board boxes 100, 102, it will be cut into the box base side and the box cover side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or seal,
It is possible to know whether the board boxes 100, 102 have been opened.

The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opening upward, a tank rail 131 connected to the bottom of the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, a case rail 132 connected vertically to the downstream side of the tank rail 131, and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream part of the case rail 132 and paying out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the payout device 133 appropriately pays out the required number of balls. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

In addition, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, and the launch control device 11
A variable resistor control knob 121 is provided on the power supply unit 115, and a RAM erase switch 122 is provided on the power supply unit 115. The state recovery switch 120 is operated to clear ball jams (return to normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as ball jams in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). The control knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to its initial state.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to Fig. 4. Fig. 4 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is a calculation device. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a RAM 203 that is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control programs stored in the ROM 202 are executed.
In addition, various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data transmission/reception circuit, etc. are built in. In the main control device 110, the MPU 201 controls the big win lottery and the first symbol display device 3.
It executes the main processing of the pachinko machine 10, such as setting the display on the third symbol display device 81, 37A, and 37B, and drawing the display results on the second symbol display device.

In addition, in order to instruct sub-control devices such as the dispensing control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113 to operate, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub-control devices via a data transmission/reception circuit, but such commands are transmitted in only one direction, from the main control device 110 to the sub-control devices.

The RAM 203 includes a stack area for storing various areas, counters, flags, and the like, as well as the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and return addresses of control programs executed by the MPU 201, and a work area (
In addition, even after the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, the RAM 203 is supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 and retains data (backup).
All data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up.

When the power supply is cut off due to a power outage or the like, the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of the power outage (including the time of the power outage, the same applies below) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power supply is turned on (including the time of the power supply being turned on due to the power outage being resolved, the same applies below), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power supply was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is performed by the main processing (not shown) when the power supply is turned off, and the restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is performed in the start-up processing (not shown) when the power supply is turned on. Note that the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power outage signal SG1 from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 when the power supply is cut off due to a power outage or the like, and when the power outage signal SG1 is input to the MPU 201, an NMI interrupt processing (not shown) is immediately executed as a processing during a power outage.

The MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is connected to an input/output port 205 via a bus line 204 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 205 is connected to the payout control device 111, the sound lamp control device 113, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B,
Solenoids 209 consisting of a second pattern display device, a second pattern pending lamp, a large opening solenoid for driving the specific winning port 65a to open and close forward around the lower edge of the opening and closing plate as an axis, and a solenoid for driving the electric device are connected, and the MPU 201 sends various commands and control signals to these via the input/output port 205.

The input/output port 205 also includes various switches 208, which are made up of a group of switches (not shown) and a group of sensors including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R, and the power supply device 1.
15, a RAM erase switch circuit 253 (described later) is connected, and the MPU 201 receives signals output from the various switches 208 and the R
Various processes are executed based on the AM cancellation signal SG2.

The payout control device 111 drives a payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and loan balls. The MPU 211, which is a calculation device, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 213 used as a work memory, etc.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110,
The RAM 213 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the PU 211 and return addresses of the control programs executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and a work area (work region) in which various flags, counters, I/O values, etc. are stored.
Even after the power supply to the main control device 110 is cut off, the power supply device 115 supplies a backup voltage to the main control device 110 so that data can be retained (backed up), and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up.
When the power failure signal SG1 is input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) is immediately executed as a process to be performed in the event of a power failure.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 215 is connected to the main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the launch control device 112, and the like. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid-out prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but is not connected to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112 so that the ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51 when the main control device 110 issues an instruction to launch the ball.
The ball launching unit 112a is equipped with a launch solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the launch solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to operate when a predetermined condition is met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball is turned off (
Under the condition that the control handle 51 is not being operated (i.e., the control handle 51 is not being operated), the launch solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation (rotational position) of the control handle 51, and a ball is launched with a strength according to the amount of rotation of the control handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 controls the display control device 114, which controls the output of audio from an audio output device (such as a speaker not shown) 226, the output of lighting and extinguishing from a lamp display device (such as the illumination units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34) 227, and the display control device 114, which controls the display of variable effects (variable display) and advance notice effects.
The MPU 221, which is a calculation device, has a ROM 222 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory, etc.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the voice and lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 consisting of an address bus and a data bus.
The main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, other devices 228, the frame button 22, etc. are connected to 25. The other devices 228 include drive motors KM1, KM2, and KM3.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and notifies the display control device 114 of the determined display mode by a command (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). In addition, the voice lamp control device 113 monitors input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player,
The display control device 114 is instructed to change the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or to change the performance content during a super reach. When the stage is changed, a back image change command including information on the changed stage is sent to the display control device 114 so that the third symbol display device 81 can display a back image corresponding to the changed stage. Here, the back image refers to an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is the main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to the command sent from this voice lamp control device 113.

In addition, the voice lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) representing the display content of the third pattern display device 81 from the display control device 114. In the voice lamp control device 113,
Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, sound corresponding to the display content of the third pattern display device 81 is output from the sound output device 226 in accordance with the display content, and the turning on and off of the lamp display device 227 is controlled in accordance with the display content.

The display control device 114 is connected to the voice and lamp control device 113 and the third pattern display device 81, and controls the third pattern display device 81 based on a command received from the voice and lamp control device 113.
The display control device 1 controls the display of the third symbol variation effect in the reel 1.
14 transmits a display command for notifying the display contents of the third pattern display device 81 to the voice lamp control device 113 as appropriate. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs a sound from the voice output device 226 in accordance with the display contents indicated by this display command, thereby making it possible to match the display of the third pattern display device 81 with the sound output from the voice output device 226.

The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring a power failure due to a power failure or the like, and a RAM erase switch 122 (FIG. 3).
The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the necessary operating voltages to each of the control devices 110 to 114 through a power supply path (not shown).
A voltage of 4 volts is input to the various switches 208 and the solenoid 20
The inverter generates a 12-volt voltage for driving solenoids such as 9, motors, etc., a 5-volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc., and supplies the necessary voltages to each of the control devices 110 to 114, etc., using these 12-volt voltage, 5-volt voltage, and backup voltage.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 detects the power failure of the MPU of the main control device 110 when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like.
201 and the MPU 211 of the dispensing control device 111. The power outage monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of 24 volts DC, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and when this voltage falls below 22 volts, it determines that a power outage (power outage, power interruption) has occurred, and outputs the power outage signal SG1 to the main control device 110 and the dispensing control device 111. By outputting the power outage signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the dispensing control device 111 recognize the occurrence of a power outage and execute NMI interrupt processing. Note that the power supply unit 2
51 is configured to maintain the output of the 5 volt voltage, which is the drive voltage of the control system, at a normal value for a sufficient time to execute the NMI interruption process, even after the DC stable 24 volt voltage falls below 22 volts. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the dispensing control device 111 can execute and complete the NMI interruption process (not shown) normally.

The RAM clear switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM clear signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control device 110 when the RAM clear switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the main control device 110 inputs the RAM clear signal SG2 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, it clears the backup data and transmits a payout initialization command to the payout control device 111 for clearing the backup data in the payout control device 111.

Next, the schematic configuration of the operation unit 200 will be described with reference to Fig. 5 to Fig. 10. Fig. 5 is an exploded perspective front view of the pachinko machine 10, and Fig. 6 is an exploded perspective front view of the operation unit 200 and the game board 13. Figs. 7 to 10 are front views of the operation unit 200.

In addition, Figure 7 shows a state in which the upper displacement member 940 is retracted upward and the lower displacement member 440 is retracted downward, Figure 8 shows a state in which the upper displacement member 940 is rotated and displaced downward from the state shown in Figure 7, Figure 9 shows a state in which the lower displacement member 440 is extended from the state shown in Figure 7 to a first extension position described below, and Figure 10 shows a state in which the lower displacement member 440 is displaced to a second extension position which is the maximum extension position.

As shown in FIG. 5 and FIG. 6, the operating unit 200 includes a rear case 30 formed in a box shape.
The rear case 300 includes an upper displacement unit 900, a lower displacement unit 400, a rotation unit 700, and a distribution unit 5a00 attached to the rear of the game board 13 in the internal space of the rear case 300.
and a throwing unit 600 are housed in the housing.

The rear case 300 includes a bottom wall 301 that is generally rectangular when viewed from the front, and an outer wall 302 that stands upright from the outer edges of the four sides of the bottom wall 301 toward the front, and is formed into a box shape with one side (front side) open by the walls 301 and 302. The bottom wall 301 has a rectangular opening 301a at its center when viewed from the front, and the third pattern display device 81 (see FIG. 2) disposed on the back side of the bottom wall 301 can be seen through the opening 301a.

The upper displacement unit 900 includes a base member 910 that is rectangular in front view and long horizontally, which is disposed in an upper portion of the opening 301a of the bottom wall portion 301 of the rear case 300, and an upper displacement member 940 that is slidably disposed on the base member 910.
The third symbol display device 81 is formed so that the performance of sliding and rotating the upward displacement member 940 can be executed on the front side of the third symbol display device 81. The upward displacement unit 900 will be described in detail later.

The lower displacement unit 400 includes a base member 410 that is rectangular in front view and long horizontally and is disposed in the lower portion of the opening 301a of the bottom wall portion 301 of the rear case 300, and a lower displacement member 440 that is slidably disposed on the base member 410. The lower displacement member 440 is formed so as to be capable of performing a performance of rotating and displacing while sliding on the front side of the opening 301a of the rear case (i.e., the third pattern display device 81). The lower displacement unit 400 will be described in detail later.

The rotation unit 700 includes a rear base 720 that is generally rectangular in front view and is disposed on the right side (arrow) of the lower portion of the opening 301a of the bottom wall portion 301 of the rear case 300 in front view, and a rotating body 800 disposed in front of the rear base 720. The player can visually recognize the effect of rotating and displacing the rotating body 800 through a transparent plate portion formed on the lower right side of the game board 13 in front view. A detailed description of the rotation unit 700 will be given later.

The ball sending unit 600 is attached to the rear side of the game board 13 and is connected to the third winning hole 82 of the game board 13.
A path is formed for sending the game ball sent from the rear side of the game board 13 to a first opening 511 of the distribution unit 500 described later.

The distribution unit 500 includes a path forming member 510 attached to the rear side of the game board 13, a base plate 520 disposed opposite the path forming member 510 with a predetermined gap formed therebetween,
The ball distributing unit 540 is attached to the base plate 520 and distributes the game balls flowing down between the opposing path forming member 510 and the base plate 520 to each ball sending path (the second ball sending path KR2 or the third ball sending path KR3). The game balls distributed by the distribution member 540 are sent to the lower displacement unit 400. The distribution unit 500 will be described in detail later.

<The first decorative body and the second decorative body are arranged adjacent to each other in the front-rear direction>
Next, referring to FIG. 11 to FIG. 16, the general winning port unit 1 arranged on the game board 13 will be described.
50 will be explained.

First, the general winning port unit 150 will be described with reference to Figures 11 and 12.
FIG. 11 is an exploded perspective front view of the game board 13, and FIG. 12(a) is a general winning port unit 1
12(b) is a cross-sectional view of the general winning port unit 150 taken along line XIIb-XIIb in FIG. 12(a).

As shown in Figures 11 and 12, the game board 13 comprises a base plate 60 formed from a plate member that is approximately rectangular when viewed from the front, and a center frame 86 and a general winning port unit 150 arranged in an opening portion formed in the base plate 60.

The base plate 60 has a first opening 60a that opens in the center when viewed from the front, and a second opening 60b that opens on the lower side in the direction of gravity of the play area formed by the rail members 76 and 77. A center frame 86 is disposed in the first opening 60a, and the second opening 60
A general winning port unit 150 is disposed at b. A sticker with a decoration (such as a pattern or design) is attached to the front side (the side in the direction of the arrow F) of the base plate 60, so that the player can see the decoration. The decoration on the front side of the base plate 60 is not limited to a sticker, and the decoration may be printed (painted) on the front side of the base plate 60.

The general winning port unit 150 is disposed in the game area (in front of the base plate 60) of the game board 13, and is capable of changing the path of the game ball flowing down the game area.
50 is disposed at a position along the end of the play area formed by the inner rail 76 and the outer rail 77 on the lower side in the direction of gravity (the side in the direction of arrow D) when viewed from the front (as viewed in the direction of arrow B). Note that in Figs. 13 to 16, the stickers arranged on the base plate 60 are illustrated with the reference numeral of the decorative member 60c. In this embodiment, the decorative member 60c is provided with a character (person)
is depicted.

The general winning port unit 150 includes a main body 151 formed in a crescent shape when viewed from the front,
A first standing portion 152 standing from an end of the main body portion 151 toward the front side (the direction of the arrow F);
A second erected portion 153 extends from the end of the first erected portion 152 on the upper side in the direction of gravity (the side in the direction of the arrow U) toward the center of the play area, and a decorative member 15 is disposed on the back side of the main body portion 151.
4, and a plurality of (three in this embodiment) general winning holes 63 formed on the front side of the main body 151.
And, mainly prepare.

The main body 151 is set to have an outer shape that is slightly larger than the opening shape of the second opening 60b that opens in the plate thickness direction of the base plate 60, and is attached to the base plate 60 while being covered by the opening of the second opening 60b.
The second opening 60b allows game balls flowing into a general winning opening 63 disposed in the main body 151 to be sent to the rear side of the game board 13 (base plate 60). Furthermore, the main body 151 is gradually narrower from the inner portion toward the outer end when viewed from the front.
1. The inclined surface 151a is inclined toward the side of the arrow B. The recess 151b is recessed in the rear surface of the base plate 60 side (the side in the direction of the arrow B). The rear surface 151 forms the rear surface of the main body 151 excluding the recess 151b.
d and is formed mainly comprising.

The inclined surface 151a is formed at an angle of approximately 30 degrees with respect to the front surface of the base plate 60. This allows a game ball flowing down the play area of the game board 13 to come into contact with the inclined surface 151a and flow down along the inclination of the inclined surface 151a, and move to the front side of the main body 151.

Here, the inclined surface 151a is not formed at the end of the main body portion 151, and the side surface of the main body portion 151 is
If it is formed perpendicular to the front of the base plate 60, a game ball flowing down the play area of the game board 13 may abut (collide) with the side of the main body 151 from a direction perpendicular to the side, and the abutting game ball may bounce back in the opposite direction to the flow direction.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the inclined surface 151a can move the game balls that come into contact with the side surface of the main body 151 to the front side of the main body, thereby preventing the game balls from temporarily stagnating as they flow down the game area. As a result, the game balls can be made to flow smoothly from the front side of the base plate 60 to the front of the main body 151 of the general winning port unit 150.

As described above, the rear surface portion 151d is the rear surface of the main body portion 151, and the recessed portion 1
The rear part 151d is formed at a certain width around the general winning port unit 151b.
When the decorative member 50 is disposed on the base plate 60, the decorative member 50 is disposed in contact with the front surface of the base plate 60 (decorative member 60c).

The recess 151b is recessed toward the front side (the direction of the arrow F).
The recessed portion 151 has a recessed bottom surface 151b2 which is the bottom surface in the recessed direction, and an inner surface 151b3 which stands from the outer edge of the recessed bottom surface 151b2 toward the rear surface side (the side in the direction of arrow B).

The recessed bottom surface 151b2 is an adhesive surface for the decorative member 154 described later, and is formed as a plane parallel to the front surface of the main body 151. This allows the decoration of the decorative member 154 to be viewed uniformly when viewed through the main body 151.

The inner surface 151b3 extends in the front-rear direction (the direction of the arrows F-B) in a front view. The shape of the inner surface 151b3 in a front view is formed to be substantially the same as the outer shape of the decorative member 154 described later. As a result, when the decorative member 154 is disposed in the recess 151b, the decorative member 154 is
54 can be prevented from protruding outside the recess 151b.
When the general winning port unit 150 is disposed on the base plate 60, the decorative member 154 is sandwiched between the back surface 151d of the main body 151 and the base plate 60, thereby preventing a gap from being formed between the back surface 151d of the main body 151 and the base plate 60. This prevents the main body 151 from protruding further to the front side than the normal installation position with respect to the base plate 60. As a result, the game balls can be made to flow smoothly down from the front side of the base plate 60 to the front of the main body 151 of the general winning port unit 150.

The recess 151b is a recess that accommodates a decorative member 154 described later in its recessed space, and the recess depth (the recessed distance toward the front side (the direction of the arrow F)) is set to be greater than the thickness of the decorative member 154.
51 at a position spaced a certain distance inside the main body 151 , and is recessed in accordance with the shape of the end of the main body 151 .

Therefore, when the decorative member 154 is disposed inside the recess 151b, the back surface of the decorative member 154 can be prevented from protruding further back than the main body 151. Therefore, when the general winning port unit 150 is disposed on the base plate 60, the decorative member 154 is sandwiched between the recessed bottom surface 151b2 and the base plate 60, and a gap can be prevented from being formed between the back surface 151d of the main body 151 and the base plate 60. This prevents the main body 151 from protruding further forward than the normal installation position relative to the base plate 60. As a result, the game balls can be smoothly flowed down from the upper side of the gravity direction of the main body 151 (arrow U direction) to the front of the main body 151 of the general winning port unit 150.

The first erected portion 152 is erected from the end of the main body 151 at the end side (the inner rail 76 side) of the play area toward the front side (the side in the direction of arrow F). The erection dimension of the first erected portion 152 is set to be approximately the same as the width dimension in the erection direction of the inner rail 76 erected on the front side of the base plate 60 (decorative member 60c). Furthermore, the distance between the first erected portion 152 and the glass unit 16 of the front door 5 covering the front side of the play board 13 is set to be smaller than the diameter of a game ball. This allows the game ball flowing down the front side of the main body 151 to be stopped by the first erected portion 152 at the end on the lower side in the gravity direction of the play area.
52. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game balls flowing down the front side of the main body 151 from colliding with the inner rail 76, and it is possible to prevent the inner rail 76 from colliding with the game balls and being bent.

Here, the space between the inner rail 76 and the outer rail 77 is a space for guiding the game balls launched from the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13.
There is limited space for providing reinforcement between the opposing inner rail 76 and the outer rail 77. Therefore, it is difficult to provide reinforcement to prevent the inner rail 76 from bending, and there is a risk that the game balls flowing down the play area will collide with the inner rail 76, causing the inner rail 76 to bend.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the general winning port unit 150 (
The first upright portion 152 makes it difficult for game balls flowing down the play area to collide with the inner rail 76. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a change in the distance between the opposing inner rail 76 and the outer rail 77 due to bending of the inner rail 76. As a result, it is possible to stably launch game balls into the play area.

The second standing portion 153 is extended from the end of the first standing portion 152 on the upper side in the direction of gravity (the side in the direction of the arrow U) toward the center of the game area (the first winning opening 64) with a downward incline (see FIG. 2). As a result, when a game ball flowing down between the inner rail 76 and the center frame 83 (see FIG. 2) is sent to the upper surface (the surface on the side in the direction of the arrow U) of the downwardly inclined extension part of the second standing portion 153, the game ball can be rolled along the downward incline of the second standing portion 153 and sent toward the center of the game area. As a result, it is possible to easily make the game ball flowing down the game area on the side between the inner rail 76 and the outer rail 77 (the side in the direction of the arrow L) win (flow) into the first winning opening 64 arranged in the center of the game area.

The decorative member 154 is formed in a plate shape and is adhered to the back side of the main body 151. In addition, the decorative member 154 is formed with a decoration on the front side of the main body 151 that is continuous with the decoration formed on the decorative member 60c of the base plate 60 in a front view. This allows the decoration formed on the base plate 60 to be visually recognized as one decoration together with the decoration of the decorative member 154.
In this embodiment, part of a character (person) is depicted on decorative member 154, and the character on decorative member 60c and the character on decorative member 154 can be visually recognized as a single character.

Moreover, the decorative member 154 is formed from a light-transmitting material. This allows light passing through the second opening 60b from the rear side (arrow B direction side) of the base plate 60 to enter the rear side of the decorative member 154 and exit from the front side (arrow F direction side) of the decorative member 154. This makes it possible to brighten the decoration formed on the front side of the decorative member 154 and make it visible to the player, making it easier for the player to see the decoration of the decorative member 154.

Next, the base plate 60 and the general winning port unit 150 will be described with reference to Fig. 13. Fig. 13 is a cross-sectional view of the game board 13 taken along line XIII-XIII in Fig. 2.

As shown in FIG. 13, the decorative member 154 is formed to have an outer shape larger than the opening shape of the second opening 60b of the base plate 60 in a front view.
When the decorative member 154 is attached to the base plate 60, the end of the decorative member 154 fits into the recess 151b of the main body 151.
and the base plate 60 (decorative member 60c).
When the adhesive between the main body 151 and the decorative member 154 comes off due to aging or the like, the decorative member 1
54 can be prevented from falling off the game board 13.

In addition, the width dimension of the decorative member 154 overlapping with the base plate 60 in the front-rear direction (arrow F-B direction) is set to be larger than the diameter of a circular opening 60g (see FIG. 11) of the base plate 60 into which a protrusion 155 protruding from the back surface of the main body 151, which will be described later, is inserted.
It is possible to prevent gaps from being formed between the decorations of the decorative member 154 and the decorative member 60c when viewed from the front due to misalignment of the arrangement of the decorative member 154 with respect to the main body 151 or misalignment of the position where the decorative member 60c is formed. As a result, it is possible to make the player easily recognize the decoration of the decorative member 60c of the base plate 60 and the decoration of the decorative member 154 as one decoration.

In addition, the three general winning openings 63 arranged in the main body 151 are connected to openings 514 to 516 of a distribution unit 500 (see FIG. 71) arranged on the back side of the game board 13.
A gaming ball that has entered the general winning port 63 is sent to the fourth ball sending path KR4 of the sorting unit 500. The sorting unit 500 will be described in detail later.

Furthermore, in the distribution unit 500, a board (not shown) equipped with a light source capable of emitting light to the front side is arranged on the base plate 520 (see Figure 71), and the light emitted from the board passes through the second opening 60b of the base plate 60 and is irradiated onto the back of the general prize winning port unit 150.

Therefore, the second opening 60b is used as a path for the game ball entering through the general winning opening 63 of the general winning opening unit 150 and as a space for irradiating light onto the back surface of the general winning opening unit 150. This eliminates the need to form two separate openings, one for sending the game ball and one for passing light, so that it is possible to easily irradiate light onto the entire back surface of the general winning opening unit 150 and to prevent the main body 151 of the general winning opening unit 150 from being damaged.
As a result, the general winning port 63 can be arranged in the entire area of the general winning port unit 150.
This improves the freedom of design, and also makes it easier for players to see the decoration (decorative member 154) of the general winning port unit 150 by emitting light from the entire area of the general winning port unit 150.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 13, decorative member 154, which is connected to decorative member 60c of base plate 60 of game board 13, is positioned on the rear surface of main body 151 arranged along the front surface of base plate 60, so that decorative member 60c of base plate 60 and decorative member 154 can be positioned adjacent (close to) each other in the front-to-back direction (arrow F-B direction).
As a result, the decorative member 60c and the decorative member 154 are viewed from an angle inclined with respect to the front view (for example, from a viewpoint at the same height as the upper end of the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1 ) in the direction of gravity).
When the decoration of the general winning port unit is visually recognized, the decoration of the decorative member 60c and the decorative member 154 can be prevented from being visually recognized as being misaligned, compared to when the decoration of the general winning port unit is arranged in front of the general winning port unit.
The connecting parts with the decorations can be visually recognized by the player in the same positional relationship regardless of the player's viewpoint, thereby improving the design of the game board 13.

Next, the connection between the decorative member 154 and the decorative member 60c of the base plate 60 will be described in detail with reference to Fig. 14. Fig. 14 is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the game board 13 in the range XIV of Fig. 13. In Fig. 14, the path of light visible to the player is illustrated by a two-dot chain line.

As described above, the decoration of the decorative member 60c of the base plate 60 and the decoration of the decorative member 154 are visually recognized by the player as one decoration. Therefore, in order to make the player visually recognize the decoration of the decorative member 60c of the base plate 60 and the decoration of the decorative member 154 as one decoration (pattern), it is necessary to suppress the positional deviation of the two decorations. However, when forming a decoration on the base plate 60 or when arranging the decorative member 154 on the main body part 151, it is difficult to arrange the decoration in an accurate position (the same position every time). Therefore, when the general winning port unit 150 is arranged on the base plate 60, the decoration of the decorative member 154 is arranged in a misaligned position relative to the decorative member 60c of the base plate 60, which makes it difficult for the player to visually recognize the decoration of the decorative member 60c and the decoration member 154 as one decoration.

In contrast, according to the present embodiment, the end of the decorative member 154 is disposed on the rear side of the inclined surface 151a.
It is possible to make it difficult for the player to accurately recognize the connecting portion with the decoration of decoration member 60c (the connecting portion is blurred so that the player can see it). Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize that decorative member 60c and decorative member 154 are one decoration.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 14, the connection portion between the decoration of the decorative member 154 and the decoration of the decorative member 60c (hereinafter referred to as the "boundary P1" (see FIG. 14)) is the inclined surface 1 of the main body 151.
Therefore, the light emitted from the boundary P1 toward the player's viewpoint and the light emitted from the connecting portion between the front surface of the main body 151 and the inclined surface 151a (hereinafter referred to as "boundary P2" (see FIG. 14)) toward the player's viewpoint can be reflected at different positions on the decorative member 60c or the decorative member 154 (i.e., the formation of the boundary P2 on the path of the light emitted from the boundary P1 toward the player's viewpoint can be suppressed).

Therefore, in the boundary P1, the deviation of the arrangement of the decorative member 60c relative to the decorative member 154 is easily recognized by the player as a deviation in the decoration position, and in the boundary P2, the deviation in the decoration position due to the difference in the refraction direction of light is easily recognized by the player. However, since the decorations that the player sees from the positions of the boundaries P1 and P2 can be decorations at different positions, it is possible to prevent the deviation in the decoration position at the boundaries P1 and P2 from being recognized by the player at the same position. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the deviation in the decoration position at the boundary P1 and the deviation in the decoration position at the boundary P2 from being combined and becoming large and being recognized by the player. As a result, it is possible to easily allow the player to recognize the decoration of the decorative member 60c and the decorative member 154 as one decoration, and the design of the game board 13 can be improved.

Furthermore, by locating the boundary P1 on the rear side of the inclined surface 151a, the boundary P1 can be located between the connecting portion (hereinafter referred to as "boundary P3" (see FIG. 14)) of the decorative member 60c and the main body 151 and the boundary P2 from the player's viewpoint. Therefore, between the position of the decoration that is misaligned due to refraction of light when it is emitted from the main body 151 (boundaries P2, P3),
The boundary P1 can be arranged. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the area in which the decoration is recognized as being displaced from becoming stretched. In other words, the area in which the decoration is recognized as being displaced can be limited to the front of the game board 13. As a result, the area in which the decoration is displaced can be reduced relative to the game area of the game board 13, making it easier for the player to recognize the decorations of the decorative member 60c and the decorative member 154 as one decoration.

In this embodiment, the decorative member 60c of the base plate 60 is decorated with a character's face.
The body of the character decorated with the decorative member 60c is decorated on the decorative member 154 of the general winning port unit 150. That is, the outline of the decoration is positioned at the connecting portion of the decoration between the decorative member 60c and the decorative member 154. Therefore, the player can recognize the misalignment of the connecting portion between the decorative member 60c and the decorative member 154 as the outline of the decoration. As a result, the decorative member 6
This makes it easier for the player to recognize the decoration of 0c and the decorative member 154 as the decoration of 1.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the character's face is decorated up to the neck on the decorative member 60c of the base plate 60, and the decorative member 154 of the general winning port unit 150 is decorated with the decorative member 60c.
The clothes worn by the character's body decorated with 60c are decorated, and the character's face (neck) and clothes are decorated with different colors (in this embodiment, the face is flesh-colored and the clothes are black). By making the misalignment of the connecting portion between decorative member 60c and decorative member 154 a portion with a different color, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize that decorative member 60c and decorative member 154 are separate. As a result, it is possible to make the player easily recognize the decorations of decorative member 60c and decorative member 154 as one decoration.

As described above, the main body 151 has a recess 151b on the back side, and the decorative member 154 is disposed inside the recess 151b. The shape of the inner side surface (inner surface 151b3) of the recess 151b is set to be substantially the same as the outer shape of the decorative member 154 when viewed from the front. This allows the inner surface 151b3 of the recess 151b to be used as a guide (positioning) when disposing the decorative member 154 on the main body 151. As a result, when attaching the decorative member 154 to the main body 151, the arrangement of the decorative member 154 can be prevented from being misaligned with respect to the main body 151.

Furthermore, cylindrical protrusions 155 (see FIG. 15) are formed at multiple locations (three locations in this embodiment (see FIG. 15)) on the back side of the main body 151. The protrusions 155 are positioning protrusions that position the general winning port unit 150 on the base plate 60 when the general winning port unit 150 is disposed on the base plate 60, and are inserted into recesses 60d recessed in the base plate 60. The protrusions 155
At least one portion (one portion in this embodiment) is a recessed bottom surface 151b2 of the recess 151b.
and is inserted into an opening formed in the decorative member 154. Therefore, the protrusion 155 can be used for positioning when the decorative member 154 is disposed on the main body 151.

Thus, the projection 155 can determine the position when the general winning port unit 150 is disposed on the base plate 60, and can also determine the position when the decorative member 154 is disposed on the main body 151. Therefore, the part that is used for positioning when arranging the decorative member 154 on the front side of the decorative member 60c can be the same part, so that the decoration of the decorative member 60c and the decoration of the decorative member 154 can be prevented from being misaligned. As a result, the decoration of the decorative member 60c and the decoration of the decorative member 154 can be easily recognized by the player as a single decoration.

Furthermore, the projection 155 protruding from the recessed bottom surface 151b2 is within a range E1 (see FIG. 15) described later.
15) (the area to which the adhesive tape 154a is applied).
When disposing decorative member 154 on main body 151, with protrusion 155 inserted into the opening of decorative member 154, one point of the edge of decorative member 154 is aligned with inner surface 151b3 of recess 151b, thereby positioning decorative member 154 at two points relative to main body 151. Therefore, it is no longer necessary to align the edge of decorative member 154 at two points with inner surface 151b3 of recess 151b before disposing decorative member 154 on main body 151. As a result, the work of disposing decorative member 154 on main body 151 can be simplified.

Next, the adhesion between the main body 151 and the decorative member 154 will be described with reference to Figs. 15 and 16. Fig. 15 is a rear view of the general winning port unit 150, and Fig. 16 is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the game board 13 in the range XIV of Fig. 13.
14, the path of light that is visible to the player is shown by a two-dot chain line. In this embodiment, the adhesive tape 154a is formed of a light-transmitting double-sided tape, and the range E1 is shown by a two-dot chain line.
It is affixed to 1.

15 and 16, the adhesive tape 154a that bonds the decorative member 154 and the main body 151 is applied with a constant width along the edge of the decorative member 154. As a result, in the area where the adhesive tape 154a is not applied (the area other than the area E1), the adhesive tape 154
A gap (space) of a predetermined width is formed between main body 151 (recessed bottom surface 151b2) and decorative member 154 (front surface of decorative member) by the thickness of a.

The adhesive tape 154a extends from the end of the decorative member 154 through the boundary P3 and onto the inclined surface 1
The adhesive is applied to an area beyond a virtual line PK1 (see FIG. 14) that is perpendicular to the line 51a.
The portion of the light that passes through the main body 151 and is emitted from the inclined surface 151a that is affected by the decoration of the decorative member 154 (the portion where the wavelength is changed) can be the range E1 (the end of the decorative member 154) where the adhesive tape 154a is attached. As a result, even when the player views the general winning port unit 150 from an angle equal to or greater than a predetermined angle, the player can easily view the decoration of the decorative member 60c and the decoration of the decorative member 154 as a single decoration.

Here, when the player views the game board 13 from a higher position than usual (for example, from a viewpoint at the same height as the upper end of the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1) in the direction of gravity), as shown in FIG. 16, the light L that exits from the inclined surface 151a toward the line of sight of the player is repeatedly reflected off the front and back of the main body 151 and passes through the inside of the main body 151. In this case, the decorative member 15
If the entire front surface of the lamp 154 is in contact with the main body 151 via the adhesive tape 154a, the wavelength of the light will be changed by the decoration of the decorative member 154 each time the light is reflected by the decorative member 154. Therefore, the light passing through the inside of the main body 151 and emitted from the inclined surface 151a will have a wavelength that is different from that of the decorative member 154.
The light cannot be reflected only by the change in wavelength due to the decoration on the end of the inclined surface 151.
Since the wavelength of the decoration recognized by the player from inclined surface 151a is different from the wavelength of the decoration visually recognized by the player from the front of main body 151, there was a problem that the decoration was not continuous between main body 151 and inclined surface 151a.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the adhesive portion of the decorative member 154 to the main body portion 151 is within the range E1
By using only the adhesive tape 154a, it is possible to prevent the light L that is reflected and passes through the inside of the main body 151 from being affected by the decoration of the decorative member 154 (so that the wavelength of the light is not changed). As a result, as shown in FIG. 16, the light that passes through the main body 151 and is emitted from the inclined surface 151a passes through the portion affected by the decoration of the decorative member 154 (the portion where the wavelength is changed) by the adhesive tape 154a.
The decorative member 154 can be attached to the area E1 (the end of the decorative member 154), and the decoration of the inclined surface 151a that is visible to the player can be easily recognized by the player as being connected to the adjacent decoration. As a result, the design of the game board 13 can be improved.

Next, the special prize device 550 will be described with reference to Figures 17 to 36. First, a method of installing the special prize device 550 will be described with reference to Figure 17. Figure 17 is an exploded perspective front view of the center frame 86.

As shown in FIG. 17, the center frame 86 is configured to include a base frame 86a formed in a substantially circular frame shape surrounding the central opening of the base plate 60, and a protrusion 86b protruding radially outward from the base frame 86a.

The base frame 86a is shaped to fit the central opening of the base plate 60, with a portion of the base frame 86a inserted inside the central opening and the rest of the base frame 86a protruding toward the front side of the base plate 60.

The protruding portion 86b protrudes to the right side (arrow R direction side) when viewed from the front with respect to the play area of the play board 13. This allows the special winning device 550 disposed on the protruding portion 86b to be disposed to the right side (arrow R direction side) when viewed from the front with respect to the play area, and allows the special winning device 550 to configure part of the ball sending path of the game ball when hit to the right in a special play state.

In addition, the protrusion portion 86b mainly comprises an opening 86b1 that opens in the front-to-rear direction (the direction of arrows F-B), and a recess 86b2 that is located above the opening 86b1 (the direction of arrow U) and recessed toward the rear side (the direction of arrow B).

A part of a first unit 551 of the special prize winning device 550 described later is inserted into the opening 86b1. This allows the first unit 551 to be connected to a second unit 552 of the special prize winning device 550 disposed on the back side of the protruding portion 86b via the opening 86b1.

The recess 86b2 is capable of accommodating a part of the first unit 551 of the special winning device 550 described later inside. In addition, the recess 86b2 is provided with a detection device 86b3 capable of detecting the passage of a game ball.
In this way, it is possible to detect a game ball passing through the portion of the first unit 551 that is accommodated inside the recess 86b2.

The special prize-winning device 550 is mainly composed of a first unit 551 arranged on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the protrusion portion 86b of the center frame 86, and a second unit 552 arranged on the back side (arrow B direction side) of the protrusion portion 86b.

The first unit 551 has a space (path) through which the game balls can flow down, and a part of it is disposed in the play area of the game board 13. The first unit 551 is disposed in the center frame 86 by a screw inserted through the second unit 552. A detailed explanation of the method of disposing the first unit 551 and the second unit 552 will be given later.

Next, the configuration of the first unit 551 of the special prize-winning device 550 will be described with reference to Figs. 18(a) is a front view of the first unit 551, and Fig. 18(b) is a front view of the first unit 551.
18(a) is a side view of the first unit 551, and FIG. 18(c) is a rear view of the first unit 551. FIG. 19 is an exploded perspective front view of the first unit 551, and FIG. 20 is an exploded perspective rear view of the first unit 551.

As shown in Figures 18 to 20, the first unit 551 is mainly formed by including a first path member 560 arranged on the front side, a second path member 570 arranged on the back side of the first path member 560, and a third path member 580 arranged on the back side of the second path member 570.

The first path member 560 mainly comprises a front panel 564 formed in a plate shape that follows the front of the playing area of the game board 13, a first receiving portion 561, a second receiving portion 562 and a third receiving portion 563 formed in an approximately U-shaped cross section with an open upper side (arrow U direction side) and protruding from the upper end of the front panel 564 to the back side, a first wall portion 565 formed in connection with the lower side (arrow D direction side) of the first receiving portion 561, the second receiving portion 562 and the third receiving portion 563 and extending along a portion of the end of the front panel 564, and two sets of second wall portions 566 and third wall portions 567 formed below the first wall portion 565 and protruding from two locations spaced a predetermined distance apart.

The front plate 564 is a plate member that serves as a wall portion on the front side of the flow path of the game ball formed between the second path member 570 and the third path member 580 described later, and is made of a light-transmitting member. This allows the player to see the game balls flowing down inside the first unit 551 through the front plate 564.
It can be seen through (or through).

The front plate 564 also includes a guide portion 564a that protrudes toward the second path member 570 (back side (arrow B direction side)).

The guide portion 564a guides the game balls flowing down the inside of the first unit 551 to the front plate 564.
The wall portion prevents the entire wall surface of the second path member 570 or the third path member 571 from being soiled.
The guide portion 564a extends along the path of the game ball flowing down between the opposing path member 580. The guide portion 564a protrudes from the first unit 551 at a position spaced apart from the rolling surface of the game ball flowing down the first unit 551 by the radius of the game ball. In other words, the guide portion 564a protrudes from a position substantially identical to the center position of the game ball flowing down the first path member 560. This makes it possible to limit the portion where the front plate 564 and the game ball come into contact to the protruding tip of the guide portion 564a. Therefore, the front plate 5
It is possible to prevent the game ball from coming into contact with the entire area of the first path member 560, and to prevent dirt adhering to the game ball from being transferred thereto. As a result, it is possible to make the player easily visually recognize the game ball flowing down inside the first path member 560 through the front plate 564.

The first receiving section 561, the second receiving section 562, and the third receiving section 563 are sections that receive game balls flowing down from a game area above (arrow U direction) the first unit 551 into the inside of the first unit 551, and the upper opening is set to a dimension larger than the diameter of the game ball. Also, the first receiving section 561, the second receiving section 562, and the third receiving section 563 are arranged side by side in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction) at the end of the upper side (arrow U direction side) of the front plate 564.

The first receiving section 561 is set to have a larger receiving width (width dimension in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction)) for game balls than the second receiving section 562 and the third receiving section 563. This makes it easier for game balls flowing into the special winning device 550 to flow into the first receiving section 561 than into the second receiving section 562 or the third receiving section 563.

Moreover, the first receiving portion 561 is connected to a flow path formed inside the first unit 551. As a result, the game balls received in the first receiving portion 561 flow down the inside of the first unit 551. The flow path of the game balls in the first unit 551 will be described later.

The second receiving portion 562 and the third receiving portion 563 are connected to a flow path formed inside the second unit 552, which will be described later. As a result, the game balls received in the second receiving portion 562 and the third receiving portion 563 flow down the inside of the second unit 552.
The flow path of 2 will be described later.

The first wall portion 565 is an inner wall that forms a space for sending a game ball between the first wall portion 565 and a fourth wall portion 573 formed in the second path member 570 described later. The first wall portion 565 is mainly composed of an upper side wall portion 565a, one end of which is connected to the lower side of the first receiving portion 561 described above and the other end of which is extended in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction) across the lower sides of the second receiving portion 562 and the third receiving portion 563, and a curved wall portion 565b that is curved in a substantially C-shape when viewed from behind and is connected to the upper side wall portion 565a.

The upper side wall portion 565a is an inner wall that covers the upper side of the rolling surface when the game ball rolls on the upper surface (the surface on the direction of arrow U) of the fourth wall portion 573 described later, and is formed at a position that is spaced upward (in the direction of arrow U) beyond the diameter of the game ball in a direction perpendicular to the upper surface of the fourth wall portion 573.

The curved wall portion 565b is an inner wall that changes the rolling direction of the game ball rolling on the upper surface of the fourth wall portion 573 described later, and is formed at a position facing the rolling side end of the fourth wall portion 573. The curved wall portion 565b is also formed in a semicircular arc shape centered on the rolling side end of the fourth wall portion 573. This allows the game ball rolling on the upper surface of the fourth wall portion 573 to flow down along the inner wall of the curved wall portion 565b, thereby guiding it to the lower surface side of the fourth wall portion 573 and making the rolling direction opposite to the rolling direction on the upper surface of the fourth wall portion 573.

The second wall portion 566 is an inner wall that forms a space for a path branching off from the main path of the game ball flowing down inside the first unit 551, and the distance between the pair of opposing walls protruding from the back surface of the front plate 564 is set to a dimension slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball. This makes it possible to increase the number of paths for the game ball to flow down inside the first unit 551.

The third wall 567 is a wall that forms the inner surface of a path that branches off from the main ball sending path (main path SK3) of the game ball flowing down inside the first unit 551, and the distance between the pair of opposing walls that protrude from the back surface of the front plate 564 is set to a dimension slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball. This makes it possible to increase the number of paths for the game ball flowing down the first unit 551.

The downstream ends of the second wall portion 566 and the third wall portion 567 are connected to the first unit 5
In this way, it is possible to send game balls to both the left and right sides of the first unit 551 from branch passages, which will be described later.

The second path member 570 includes a plate-shaped base plate 571 facing the front plate 564 of the first path member 560 and a fourth wall portion 564 protruding from the front surface of the base plate 571 toward the first path member 560.
73, a fifth wall portion 574 protruding downward from the fourth wall portion 573 at a position spaced a predetermined distance away, and a sixth wall portion 575 protruding downward from the fifth wall portion 574 at a position spaced a predetermined distance away.

The base plate 571 is disposed at a position separated from the front plate 564 of the first path member 560 by a distance slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball. This allows the game ball to flow down between the front plate 564 and the base plate 571. The base plate 571 also has first openings 571 that open at positions corresponding to the first receiving portion 561, the second receiving portion 562, and the third receiving portion 563, respectively.
a, a second opening 571b and a third opening 571c, a fourth opening 571d that opens below the first opening 571a, a fifth opening 571e and a sixth opening 571f that open above the fifth wall portion 574 and the sixth wall portion 575,
and a recessed portion 571g located between the recessed portion 571a and recessed on the rear surface side.

The first opening 571a, the second opening 571b and the third opening 571c are openings that allow game balls flowing into the first receiving portion 561, the second receiving portion 562 and the third receiving portion 563 of the first pathway member 560 described above to pass through to the rear side of the base plate 571.

The base plate 571 has a first opening 571a, a second opening 571b and a third opening 571c.
The first opening 571a includes a first rolling portion 576, a second rolling portion 577, and a third rolling portion 578 that protrude from the lower end of the opening 571c toward the rear side. As a result, the game ball passing through the first opening 571a is guided to a third path member 580 (described later), and the game ball passing through the second opening 571b or the third opening 571c is guided to a third path member 580 (described later).
The balls are then thrown to second unit 552, which will be described later.

The first opening 571a and the fourth opening 571d are provided on the rear side with a third path member 580 (described later).
As a result, a game ball passing through the first opening 571a is sent to the front side of the base plate 571 (the direction of the arrow F) from the fourth opening 571d.

The fourth wall portion 573 protrudes from the base plate 571 along the lower end of the fourth opening 571d and extends in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction). The fourth wall portion 573 is formed such that the upper surface thereof is inclined downward from the side of the fourth opening 571d, which is opened on the left side as viewed from the front of the base plate 571, toward the right side as viewed from the front (arrow R direction). This allows the game ball that passes through the fourth opening 571d and is sent to the front side of the base plate 571 to be placed on the upper surface of the fourth wall portion 573, and the inclination of the upper surface of the fourth wall portion 573 allows the ball to be sent to the right side of the base plate 571 (arrow R direction).

The fifth wall portion 574 is a portion that becomes the rolling surface of the game ball sent from the curved wall portion 565b of the first wall portion 565 described above, and is provided protruding at a position spaced downward from the diameter of the game ball in a direction perpendicular to the lower surface of the fourth wall portion 573, and is provided extending in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction) of the base plate 571. In addition, the fifth wall portion is formed such that the upper surface (surface on the arrow U direction side) is inclined downward from the curved wall portion 565b side (arrow R direction side) toward the recessed portion 574g side (arrow L direction side) described later. This allows the game ball sent from the curved wall portion 565b to the upper surface of the fifth wall portion 574 to roll toward the recessed portion 574g side. Furthermore, the fifth wall portion 574 has a first receiving recess 574a and a second receiving recess 574b that are recessed downward on the rolling surface of the game ball.

The first receiving recess 574a and the second receiving recess 574b are arranged side by side in the extending direction of the fifth wall portion 574. The first receiving recess 574a and the second receiving recess 574b are set to have a recess width and a recess depth larger than the diameter of the game ball. Furthermore, a fifth opening 571e that opens into the base plate 571 is formed inside the first receiving recess 574a and the second receiving recess 574b. As a result, the game ball that flows into the first receiving recess 574a or the second receiving recess 574b passes through the fifth opening 571e and is sent to the back side of the base plate 571.

The recessed portion 574g is formed above the downstream end (the end in the direction of arrow L) of the fifth wall portion 574, and allows the game ball rolling on the upper surface of the fifth wall portion 574 to flow inside the recessed portion 574g and be sent to the top of the sixth wall portion 575 formed below the recessed portion 574g (in the direction of arrow D).

The sixth wall portion 575 is a portion that becomes a rolling surface for the game ball that rolls on the fifth wall portion 574 and is sent to the recessed portion 574g, and is provided so as to protrude from the base plate 571 at a position that is spaced downward from the lower surface of the fifth wall portion 574 by a distance greater than the diameter of the game ball, and is provided so as to extend in the left-right direction (arrow L-R) of the base plate 571. The sixth wall portion 575 is also formed with an upper surface that is inclined downward from the recessed portion 574g side (arrow L direction side) toward the above-mentioned third wall portion 567 side. This allows the recessed portion 574
The game ball sent from the third wall portion 567 to the upper surface of the sixth wall portion 575 can be rolled toward the ball sending path formed by the third wall portion 567. The sixth wall portion 575 also includes a third receiving recess 575a and a fourth receiving recess 575b that are recessed downward on the rolling surface of the game ball.

The third receiving recess 575a and the fourth receiving recess 575b are arranged in parallel in the extension direction of the sixth wall portion 575. The third receiving recess 575a and the fourth receiving recess 575b are set to have a recess width and a recess depth larger than the diameter of the game ball. Furthermore, a sixth opening 571f that opens into the base plate 571 is formed inside the third receiving recess 575a and the fourth receiving recess 575b. As a result, the game ball that flows into the third receiving recess 575a and the fourth receiving recess 575b passes through the sixth opening 571f and is sent to the back side of the base plate 571.

The third path member 580 includes a first covering member 581 disposed on the rear surface of the second path member 570 on the upper side in the direction of gravity (the side in the direction of arrow U), a second covering member 582 disposed on the rear surface of the second path member 570 on the lower side in the direction of gravity (the side in the direction of arrow D), and a first covering member 581 and a second covering member 582 disposed on the rear surface of the second path member 570 on the lower side in the direction of gravity (the side in the direction of arrow D).
82 and a second driving unit 584 disposed on the back surface of the second covering member 582.

The first covering member 581 includes a curved portion 581a disposed on the rear side of the first opening 571a and the fourth opening 571d, and a plate-shaped mounting portion 581b connected to the lower side of the curved portion 581a.
1b.

The curved portion 581a is connected to the first opening 571a and the fourth opening 571d (the second path member 570
The curved portion 581a is curved to have a U-shaped cross section with the open end at the end, and the first rolling portion 576 is disposed inside the U-shaped cross section (see FIG. 24(a)).
The distance between the protruding tip of the ball and the ball is set to be larger than the diameter of the ball.
The game ball rolling on the rolling portion 576 can be sent to the lower side of the first rolling portion 581a by flowing down along the inner wall of the curved portion 581a. Therefore, by sending the game ball to the curved portion 581a that curves toward the rear side, the rolling time of the game ball can be extended. As a result, even if the rolling surface of the game ball cannot be secured on a plane parallel to the playing area of the game board 13, the rolling speed of the game ball can be slowed down.

Furthermore, the lower end of the curved portion 581a is positioned slightly higher than the lower inner edge of the fourth opening 571d, thereby preventing the game ball that flows down from the first rolling portion 576 along the inner wall of the curved portion 581a and is sent to the fourth opening 571d from flowing back into the inside of the curved portion 581a.

The mounting portion 581b has two through holes 581b1 through which screws for fastening the first covering member 581 to the rear surface of the second path member 570 are inserted.
The first unit 551 includes a columnar body 551a that protrudes in a cylindrical shape toward the rear side. A screw hole is drilled at the tip of the columnar body 551a for fastening a second unit 552 (described later) to the first unit 551. This allows a screw inserted from the rear side of the second unit 552 to be screwed into the columnar body 551a, thereby fastening the first unit 551 and the second unit 552 together.

The second covering member 582 has a second curved portion 582a disposed on the rear side of the sixth opening 571f.
and the rear side wall portion 58 disposed on the rear side of the first receiving recess 574a to the fourth receiving recess 575b.
2b.

The second curved portion 582a is curved to have a U-shaped cross section that is open toward the sixth opening 571f (the second path member 570) (see FIG. 24C). The second curved portion 582a includes a standing wall 582a1 that stands from the front side toward the back side on the inside of the U shape.
82a1, the internal space of the second curved portion 582a is aligned with the first curved portion 582a on the left side (arrow L direction) when viewed from the front.
The space 582a is divided into a space 582a2 and a second space 582a3 formed adjacent to the first space 582a2 with a standing wall 582a1 therebetween.

The first space 582a2 and the second space 582a3 are spaces larger than the diameter of a game ball, and are formed from the front side toward the rear side.
2a3 are connected on the rear side. The inner surface of the first space 582a2 is formed to be inclined downward toward the rear side, and the inner surface of the second space 582a3 is formed to be inclined downward toward the front side. As a result, the game ball sent from the recessed portion 571g to the second curved portion 582a is rolled toward the rear side due to the inclination of the first space 582a2, and is rolled toward the second curved portion 582a at the end on the rear side.
The ball is sent to the second space 582a3 by the bending of the curved portion 582a, and is rolled toward the front side by the inclination of the second space 582a3. The ball passes through the opening of the sixth opening 571f and is sent to the front side of the base plate 571.

The rear side wall portion 582b receives the ball through the first receiving recess 574a to the fourth receiving recess 575b.
The wall portion is a rear wall of the ball sending path that guides the game ball passing through the fifth opening 571e and the sixth opening 571f to the lower side of the special winning device 550.
The game ball sent to the receiving recess 575b can be collected.
It is possible to prevent a game ball that has been sent to the fourth receiving recess 575b through 74a and passed through the detection devices SE3 through SE6 described below to award game value to a player from flowing down the game area again and awarding game value to the player again.

The first drive unit 583 includes a first solenoid 583a having a shaft that is displaced in the front-rear direction by electric power, a first variable plate 583b connected to the shaft of the first solenoid 583a, and a first
and a first protective member 583c surrounding the periphery of the solenoid 583a and the first variable plate 583b.

The first variable plate 583b is a rectangular plate member that is long in the left-right direction (the direction of the arrows LR), and is displaced in the front-rear direction (the direction of the arrows FB) in accordance with the displacement of the shaft of the first solenoid 583a.
In addition, when the first variable plate 583b is extended to the front side, the tip of the first variable plate 583b is inserted into the fifth opening 571e and is inserted into the first receiving recess 574a and the second receiving recess 574b.
In this way, when the first variable plate 583b is extended to the front side, the first variable plate 583b can prevent game balls from flowing into the first receiving recess 574a and the second receiving recess 574b.

The first protective member 583c is formed in a box shape that is open on the side of the second path member 570, and a mechanism that connects the shaft of the first solenoid 583a and the first variable plate 583b is disposed inside the first protective member 583c. The first protective member 583c also has a plurality of through holes 583c1 that penetrate in the front-rear direction.

The through-hole 583c1 is a portion through which a screw is inserted to fasten the first driving unit 583 to the second path member 570. The screw inserted through the through-hole 583c1 is fastened to the first covering member 581.
or the through hole 582b1 of the second covering member 582,
The first driving unit 583 is screwed into a hole formed in the path member 570. Therefore, by disposing the first driving unit 583 on the second path member 570, the first covering member 581 and the second covering member 582 can be disposed on the second path member 570. This makes it possible to reduce the number of screw fastening portions of the first covering member 581 and the second covering member 582, thereby reducing manufacturing costs.

In addition, since the first covering member 581 or the second covering member 582 can be sandwiched between the second path member 570 and the first driving unit 583, the first driving unit 583 can
When the special prize winning device 550 is forcibly removed, the first covering member 581 or the second covering member 5
It is easy to make the fastening between the first covering member 582 and the second path member 570 incomplete, thereby making it impossible for the game ball to pass through the first covering member 581 or the second covering member 582. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game from being continued in an illegal state.

Similar to the first drive unit 583, the second drive unit 584 mainly comprises a second solenoid 584a having an axis that is displaced in the forward/backward direction by electric power, a second variable plate 584b connected to the axis of the second solenoid 584a, and a second protective member 584c that covers the periphery of the second solenoid 584a and the second variable plate 584b.

The second variable plate 584b is formed of a plate-like body that is long in the left-right direction (the direction of the arrows L-R) and is bent in a crank shape when viewed from the front. In addition, when the second variable plate 584b is extended to the front side, the tip of the second variable plate 584b is in contact with the sixth opening 57 described above.
1f and is disposed above the third receiving recess 575a and the fourth receiving recess 575b. With this, when the second variable plate 584b is protruding to the front side, the second variable plate 584b can prevent game balls from flowing into the third receiving recess 575a and the fourth receiving recess 575b.

Second protective member 584c is formed in a box shape that opens toward second path member 570, and a mechanism that connects the shaft of second solenoid 584a and second variable plate 584b is disposed inside second protective member 584c. Second protective member 584c also includes rear side wall portion 584c1 that covers the rear side of the ball throwing path formed by second wall portion 566 of first path member 560. Thus, rear side wall portion 584c
The first wall portion 584c1 and the second wall portion 566 form a ball throwing path.
The wall portion 566 can cover the second path member 570. As a result, the first unit 55
When an unauthorized member is inserted from the side surface of the first path member 570, the detection devices SE3 to SE5 disposed on the second path member 570
This makes it easier to prevent fraudulent acts on SE6.

Next, the ball sending path of the game ball flowing from the first receiving portion 561 into the inside of the first unit 551 will be described with reference to Figures 21 to 24.
Fig. 22 is a schematic cross-sectional view of the first unit 551 shown in Fig. 21. Fig. 23 is a cross-sectional view of the first unit 551 taken along line XXIII-XXIII in Fig. 18(b). Fig. 24(a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the first unit 551 taken along line XXIVa-XXIVa in Fig. 21.
FIG. 24B is a cross-sectional view of the first unit 551 taken along line a in FIG.
24(c) is a cross-sectional view of the first unit 551 taken along line XXIVc-XXIVc in FIG. 21. FIG.

In addition, the game ball flowing into the first unit flows down the main paths SK1 to SK6 of the game ball in the order of the main path SK1, the main path SK2, the main path SK3, the main path SK4, the main path SK5, and the main path SK6.
3 and flows down the sub-path HK1.
1 to the sub-route HK that connects to the main route SK5 from the main route SK5 on the way down the main route SK6
The suction pipe 14 flows into either the sub-route HK2 or the sub-route HK3 and flows down either the sub-route HK2 or the sub-route HK3.

In addition, the sub-paths HK1 to HK3 are provided with detection devices SE3 to SE6 for detecting the passage of game balls, and a predetermined game value is awarded to the player when the detection devices SE3 to SE6 detect the game balls. In this embodiment, the game value is awarded to the player when a predetermined number of winning balls are won.

As shown in FIGS. 21 to 24 , the main path SK1 is formed by the curved portion 581 of the first covering member 581.
a and the first rolling portion 576 (see FIG. 24(a)) of the second path member 570, and communicates the first opening 571a and the fourth opening 571d. As described above, the curved portion 581a is curved in a U-shape in cross section with the first opening 571a and the fourth opening 571d (second path member 570) side open, and the game ball passing through the main path SK1 can be diverted to the back side. This makes it possible to reduce the amount of movement of the game ball in the left-right direction when the game ball passes through a space with a limited area in a front view (the inside of the first opening 571a or the fourth opening 571d), making it easier for the player to see the game ball passing through the main path SK1. This makes it easier for the player to see the game ball passing through the first unit 551, and increases the player's interest.

As described later, the game balls that flow into the main path SK1 are awarded a predetermined game value to the player, so that the player can easily see the rolling of the game balls that may be awarded game value to the player. As a result, the player can easily get interested. The main path SK1 is connected to a main path SK2 that will be described later, so that the game balls that pass through the main path SK1 can flow into the main path SK2.

In addition, the curved portion 581a of the main path SK1 is formed in the recess 86b of the center frame 86 described above.
2 (see FIG. 17). In this way, when the game balls are clogged in the main path SK1 (the flow is slow), the malfunction can be detected by the detector 86b3 (see FIG. 17) and an error can be notified.

Furthermore, the passage width of the main path SK1 is set to be slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball,
The apertures of the detection devices SE3 to SE7 (see FIG. 23) are set smaller than the apertures through which the game balls pass. This allows the ball to be moved along the main path S when a game ball (illegal game ball) with a diameter larger than the diameter (11 mm) of a standard game ball is manufactured and an illegal game is played with the ball.
Therefore, it is possible to prevent the illegal game ball from flowing down to the detection devices SE3 to SE7 arranged downstream of the main path SK1 and committing fraud. Also, by keeping the illegal game ball on the main path SK1, it is possible to detect it by the detection device 86b3 (see FIG. 17) and report an error (fraud). In this case, the fraud is the ball that is detected by the detection device S
The objective of the present invention is to insert an illegal game ball into any of the openings E3 to SE7, and have the detection devices SE3 to SE7 continue to detect it, thereby obtaining a payout (game value) for the illegal game ball.

The main path SK2 is formed by a first wall portion 565 of the first path member 560 and a fourth wall portion 566 of the second path member 570.
The fourth wall portion 573 is a space formed between the fourth wall portion 573 and the main path SK2. The game balls flowing into the main path SK2 roll on the upper surface of the fourth wall portion 573 and flow down. As described above, the fourth wall portion 573 is
The recess 571 extends in the direction of the arrows LR and slopes downward as it moves away from the fourth opening 571d.

Therefore, the curved portion 581a (curved path toward the rear side) is formed at the changeover portion of the throwing direction of the game ball (the connecting portion between the main path SK1 and the main path SK2), so that the player can be prevented from losing sight of the game ball flowing down the main path SK1. In other words, when a path that curves toward the rear side is formed in the middle of a straight ball throwing path (for example, the main path SK2) that extends in the left-right direction, the acceleration of the game ball that rolls at a constant acceleration on the curved path is changed (reduced), so that the line of sight that was following the game ball will move ahead of the game ball, and the player may lose sight of the game ball.

In response to this, the rolling direction of the game ball is changed and a curved path toward the rear side is formed in the part where the rolling speed of the game ball would normally be slowed down, thereby preventing the player's line of sight from getting ahead of the game ball and preventing the player from losing sight of the game ball.

Furthermore, the curved portion 581a which is the inner wall of the main path SK1 is formed on the left side (end on the arrow L direction side) as viewed from the front of the first unit 551 which is disposed slightly to the right (arrow R direction) of the left-right center of the game board 13. Thus, the curved path (main path SK1) to the rear side is formed on the side where the first unit 551 can be easily seen by a player positioned in front of the game board 13, which makes it easier to prevent the player from losing sight of the game ball passing from the main path SK1 to the main path SK2.

In addition, the main path SK2 is connected to the curved path WK1, and
The curved path WK1 is connected to a main path SK3, which will be described later. As a result, the game ball passing through the main path SK2 flows into the main path SK3 via the curved path WK1. The curved path WK1 will be described in detail later.

The main path SK3 is a space formed between the fourth wall portion 573 and the fifth wall portion 574 of the second path member 570. The game balls flowing into the main path SK3 roll on the upper surface of the fifth wall portion 574 and flow down. In addition, the first variable plate 583b of the first drive unit 583 described above protrudes onto the main path SK3 when extended. The first variable plate 583b is provided on the main path SK3.
In the state where the fifth wall portion 574 is in the protruding state, the game ball rolling on the upper portion of the fifth wall portion 574 is in contact with the first variable plate 58.
The ball rolls on the top surface of 3b and is sent to the main path SK4.

On the other hand, when the first variable plate 583b is retracted from the main path SK3, the game ball flows into the sub-path HK1 in the space formed inside the first receiving recess 574a and the second receiving recess 574b formed in the fifth wall portion 574. The sub-path HK1 sends the ball to the recovery path formed by the rear side wall portion 582b through the fifth opening 571e.

In this way, the first unit 551 includes a first variable plate 583b that protrudes onto the ball sending path or retracts from the ball sending path, and the first variable plate 583b is displaced to guide the game ball flowing down the main path SK3 of the first unit 551 to the sub path HK1 or to the main path S.
Since the direction in which the game ball flows down the first unit 551 can be changed to when the game ball is guided to K4, the direction in which the game ball flows down the first unit 551 can be changed.

In this case, the game ball flowing into the sub-path HK1 is given a predetermined game value to the player, so that the player can pay attention to whether the game ball has flowed into the sub-path HK1. Also, the first variable plate 583b is disposed in the middle of the ball sending path formed in the first unit 551 and is displaced in the player's viewing direction (arrow F-B direction), so that the first variable plate 583b can be seen from the player.
As a result, the player can focus on the gaming balls flowing down from the first unit 551, which makes it easier for the player to become interested in the flow of the gaming balls.

The sub-path HK1 is formed in a fifth wall portion 574 that is formed between a main path SK3 that sends the game ball from the right side (arrow R direction side) to the left side (arrow L direction side) in a front view, and a main path SK6 that is located below the main path SK3 and sends the game ball from the left side to the right side.
Since the sub-path HK1 is formed by utilizing the space between the left and right paths for sending the game ball, it is possible to prevent the external shape of the first unit 551 from becoming large in the vertical direction. As a result, by making the external shape of the first unit 551 smaller, the range in which the player can follow the game ball with his/her eyes can be narrowed.
This makes it easier for the player to see the game ball flowing down the first unit 551.

The main path SK4 is a space formed by the recessed portion 571g and the protrusion 568 of the first path member 560. The game ball flowing into the main path SK4 comes into contact with the protrusion 568 and enters the recessed portion 571g.
After the game ball is sent to the inside (back side) of the recessed portion, it rolls around the protrusion 568 along the inner surface of the recessed portion and is sent to the outside (front side) of the recessed portion. That is, the game ball rolls so as to bypass the protrusion 568. In addition, the main path SK4 is connected to the main path SK5, and the game ball passing through the main path SK4 can be made to flow into the main path SK5.

The main path SK5 is the first space 582 of the second covering member 582 of the third path member 580 described above.
The main path SK5 is a space formed by the first space 582a2 and the second space 582a3. The game ball flowing into the main path SK5 rolls inside the first space 582a2 to the rear side as described above, and then flows into the second space 582a3.
82a3 to the front side. In addition, the second variable plate 584b of the second drive unit 584 described above protrudes onto the main path SK5 when extended.
When the second variable plate 584b protrudes above the second curved portion 582a, the game ball rolling inside the second curved portion 582a is sent to the main path SK6.

On the other hand, when the second variable plate 584b is retracted from the main path SK5, the game ball flows down the sub-path HK2 in the space formed inside the third receiving recess 575a and the fourth receiving recess 575b formed in the sixth wall portion 575. The sub-path HK2 sends the game ball to the recovery path formed by the rear side wall portion 582b through the sixth opening 571f.

In addition, the second curved portion 582a constituting the main path SK5 is curved toward the rear side as described above, and can cause the game ball passing through the main path SK5 to be detoured toward the rear side.
This makes it possible to increase the distance that the game ball can roll, even when the area in a front view is set to a predetermined limited space.

Furthermore, the second variable plate 584b is configured to be displaced to project or retreat at a part on the upstream side of the main path SK5 and a part on the downstream side of the main path SK5, and a curved path to the rear side is formed between the upstream side of the main path SK5 and the downstream side of the main path SK5.
This increases the time during which the game ball passing through K5 may award the player with game value, thereby lengthening the time during which the game is entertaining to the player.

The sub-route HK3 is connected to the connecting portion of the main route SK4 and the main route SK5.
K3 is a distance between the second wall portion 566 of the first path member 560 and the rear side wall portion 58 of the third path member 580.
4c1 is a space formed between the opposing surfaces.

The sub-path HK3 opens in a direction (leftward when viewed from the front (arrow L direction)) different from the downward flow direction of the game ball when the game ball flows from the main path SK4 to the main path SK5. In addition, the lower inner edge of the inlet of the sub-path HK3 is set below the second variable plate 584b (in the direction of arrow D).

Here, when the game ball flows normally (without any external force other than gravity acting) from the main path SK4 to the main path SK5, the game ball flows from the main path SK4 to the main path SK5 or the sub-path HK2. On the other hand, when the second variable plate 584b is extended at the timing when the game ball flows from the main path SK4 to the sub-path HK2, and the tip face of the second variable plate 584b comes into contact with the game ball, and an external force other than gravity acts on the game ball, the game ball is pushed out to the inlet of the sub-path HK3 by the second variable plate 584b and flows into the sub-path HK3.

Therefore, the first unit 551 is provided with a second variable plate 584b that protrudes onto the ball throwing path or retracts from the ball throwing path, and the ball flowing down the main path SK4 or the main path SK5 of the first unit 551 is moved to the main path SK5 or the sub path HK2 by the displacement of the second variable plate 584b.
or sub-route HK3, thereby making it possible to change the direction in which the game ball flows down the first unit 551.

In this case, a predetermined game value is awarded to the player by the game ball flowing into the sub-path HK2 or the sub-path HK3, so that the player can be made to pay attention to whether the game ball has flowed into the sub-path HK2 or the sub-path HK3. Also, since the second variable plate 584b is disposed in the middle of the ball sending path formed in the first unit 551, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to visually recognize the displacement of the plate member 584b2. As a result, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the game ball flowing down the first unit 551, and it is possible to easily give the player an interest in the flow of the game ball.

As described above, on the upstream side of the main path SK4, the first variable plate 583b switches the path along which the game balls flow. Therefore, game balls that do not flow into the upstream sub-path HK1 and to which no game value has been awarded to the player are caused to flow further downstream and enter the sub-path HK2 or HK3.
Therefore, by passing the switching portion of the flow path, the game ball that may have once been awarded a game value to the player can flow into the sub-path HK2 and HK3.
This can give the player a renewed desire to flow into K3.

Furthermore, between the main path SK3 and the main path SK5, where the path of the game ball is switched, a main path SK4 that curves to the rear side is arranged. Therefore, the game ball can be rolled within a predetermined range when viewed from the front, making it easier for the player to recognize the position of the game ball. In other words, by making the player recognize the position of the game ball through the main path SK4 after it flows down the main path SK3, it is easier for the player to focus on the game ball rolling on the main path SK5 connected downstream of the main path SK4. As a result, it is easier for the player to visually recognize the game ball flowing into the sub paths HK2 and HK3, improving the player's interest.

In addition, inclined surfaces 584b1 (see FIG. 24(c)) are formed on both left and right ends of the front side of the second movable plate 584b, which are inclined toward the rear side as they approach the left and right ends.
When the second variable plate 584b is extended at the timing when the game ball flows from the main path SK4 into the sub-path HK2 and the tip surface of the second variable plate 584b comes into contact with the game ball, the inclined surface 584b1 can push the game ball toward the inlet side of the sub-path HK3.
The sub-path HK2 prevents the game ball from getting caught between the second variable plate 584b and the first path member 560, and also makes it possible to form multiple paths (three paths in this embodiment) in which the flow direction of the game ball can be changed depending on the timing at which the game ball flows down.

The main path SK6 is a space surrounded by the third wall portion 567 of the first path member 560. The game ball flowing down the main path SK6 is sent to the game area of the game board 13. Therefore, the first receiving portion 5
If the game ball that has flowed into 61 does not flow into the first receiving recess 574a to the fourth receiving recess 575b, no game value is awarded to the player, and the ball is sent from the main path SK6 to the game area of the game board 13 and collected from an outlet 71 formed in the game board 13.

<Guide means for displacing the game ball in the forward and backward directions>
Next, the flow of the game ball from the main path SK2 to the main path SK3 will be described with reference to Figures 25 to 28. Figures 25(a) and 26(a) are partial enlarged views of the first unit 551 in the range XXVa in Figure 21, and Figures 25(b) and 26(b) are partial enlarged views of the first unit 551 in the range XXVa in Figure 21.
27A is a schematic cross-sectional view of the first unit 551 taken along line XXVIIa-XXVIIa in FIG. 25A, and FIG. 27B is a schematic cross-sectional view of the first unit 551 taken along line XXVIIb-XXVIIb in FIG.
FIG. 27(c) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the unit 551, and corresponds to XXVIIc-X in FIG.
28A is a schematic cross-sectional view of the first unit 551 taken along line XVIIc in FIG.
FIG. 28 is a schematic cross-sectional view of the first unit 551 taken along line XXVb-XXVb in FIG.
(b) is a first unit 55 taken along line XXVIIIb-XXVIIIb in FIG.
26 is a schematic cross-sectional view of the curved path WK1. In addition, in FIG. 26, a gaming ball flowing down the curved path WK1 is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 25 to FIG. 28, the main path SK2, the main path SK3 and the curved path WK1 are
The first path member 570 has a base plate 571, and is recessed in a cross-sectional arc shape toward the rear side.
It has a recess 571h, a second recess 571i and a third recess 571j, a first step 571k that protrudes in a stepped manner toward the front side from the inner wall on the main path SK2, and a second step 571m that protrudes in a stepped manner from the inner wall on the main path SK3.

The front plate 564 of the first path member 560 has a first recess 571h, a second recess 571i, and a third recess 571i.
A first protrusion 564b, a second protrusion 564c, and a third protrusion 564d are provided at positions facing the recess 571j.
A protruding portion 564d is provided.

The distance L11 between the second recess 571i and the second protrusion 564c (see FIG. 28A) is
It is set to a value larger than the diameter of the game ball and smaller than the distance dimension L12 (see FIG. 28(a)) between the facing front plate 564 and the facing base plate 571.
The first recess 571h, the second recess 571i, and the third recess 571j, the first protrusion 564b, the second protrusion 564c, and the third recess 571i.
The game ball sent between the convex portion 564c and the third convex portion 564d is guided to the first concave portion 571h,
The second recess 571i and the third recess 571j can be brought into contact with the first convex portion 564b, the second convex portion 564c and the third convex portion 564d to slow down the rolling (flowing) speed of the game ball.

In addition, the opposing dimension between the first recess 571h and the first convex portion 564b and the opposing dimension between the third recess 571j and the third convex portion 564d are set to be approximately the same distance as the opposing dimension L11 between the second recess 571i and the second convex portion 564c.

Furthermore, the protruding tip surfaces of the first convex portion 564b, the second convex portion 564c, and the third convex portion 564d,
The distance dimension L13 (see FIG. 28A) between the front surface of the base plate 571 excluding the first recess 571h, the second recess 571i, and the third recess 571j is set to be smaller than the diameter of the game ball.
A game ball thrown between the opposing convex portion 564b, the second convex portion 564c, and the third convex portion 564d can be made to collide with the first convex portion 564b, the second convex portion 564c, and the third convex portion 564d.
As a result, the rolling (flowing) speed of the game ball can be slowed down.

In this case, the game ball that has come into contact with the first convex portion 564b, the second convex portion 564c, and the third convex portion 564d flows down the inside of the first recess 571h, the second recess 571i, and the third recess 571j.
1j in the recessed direction.

The step portion 571k protrudes from the inner wall on the rear side of the main path SK2 to the front side.
The step portion 571k is formed on the downstream side of the main path SK2. The upstream end of the step portion 571k is set at a position protruding from the front surface of the base plate 571 toward the front surface, and the downstream end is set at the same position as the back surface of the curved path WK1.
A gaming ball flowing down the main path SK2 can be caused to come into contact with the step portion 571k and moved to the front side.

In addition, the step portion 571k is formed as an inclined surface whose upstream end protrudes toward the front side from the upstream side toward the downstream side, so that the game ball that flows down the main path SK2 and abuts against the upstream end of the step portion 571k can be guided to the front side and flow downstream.

Furthermore, the upstream end of the step portion 571k is in contact with the first protrusion 564 formed on the front plate 564.
b on the upstream side of the main path SK2. This makes it possible for the game ball that comes into contact with the step portion 571k and is guided to the front side to easily come into contact with the first convex portion 564b.

The first recess 571h is recessed into the base plate 571 constituting the main path SK2, and is formed in an elliptical shape that is long in the horizontal direction (arrow L-R direction) when viewed from the front. The first recess 571h is formed in the base plate 571 at a position protruding toward the front side by the step portion 571k. The recess depth toward the rear side at the center of the first recess 571h in the vertical direction is 1/100th of the recess of the step portion 571k.
The height dimension L22 (see FIG. 27B) of the first recess 571h toward the front side of the first recess 571h is set to be approximately the same as the height dimension L22 (see FIG. 27B) toward the front side of the first recess 571h. This allows the game ball, which is sent along the main path SK2 without moving wildly, to flow into the inside of the first recess 571h without being displaced in the concave direction of the first recess 571h (to the rear side (the direction of the arrow B)).

On the other hand, the game ball sent along the main path SK2 in a wild state comes into contact with the upstream end of the step 571k, is guided to the front side of the main path SK2, and comes into contact with the first convex portion 564b of the front plate 564. This makes it possible to send the game ball to the inside of the first concave portion 571h while suppressing the game ball from wildly moving.

Furthermore, the first recess 571h has a height dimension Y8 (see FIG. 25 ) from the rolling surface of the game ball on the upstream side of the main path SK2 (the surface of the fourth wall portion 573 on the arrow U direction side) to the recessed bottom surface in the perpendicular direction.
(a)) is set to the radius of the game ball, and the height dimension Y from the rolling surface of the game ball on the downstream side of the main path SK2 (the surface on the arrow U direction side of the fourth wall portion 573) to the recessed bottom surface in the perpendicular direction
9 (see FIG. 25(a)) is set higher than the radius of the game ball.
When the game ball flowing down K2 is sent along the first recess 571h, the ball is directed upward in the direction of gravity (arrow U
The ball is then applied with resistance in the direction of lifting (the direction side) to reduce the rolling speed of the ball. As a result, the rolling speed of the ball flowing into the curved path WK1 can be sufficiently reduced, making it easier for the ball to flow smoothly down the path.

The radius X11 (see FIG. 27(b)) of the cross section of the first recess 571h is set to a value larger than the radius of the game ball, so that when the game ball is sent inside the first recess 571h, the game ball can abut against its inner wall. This prevents the game ball from abutting against the first recess 571h in two places, and prevents the resistance to the rolling of the game ball from increasing due to an increase in the number of abutment points. As a result, the game ball can be prevented from stopping on the main path SK2.

The first convex portion 564b formed at a position facing the first concave portion 571h is
It is formed at a position spaced from the upstream end of the main path SK2 in the throwing direction of the game ball (the direction of arrow R in Figure 27 (b)), and the distance is set to a dimension smaller than the radius of the game ball.
As a result, the game ball flowing down the main path SK2 is brought into contact with the first convex portion 564b, and the first concave portion 5
This makes it easier to throw the ball inside 71h.

The second recess 571i is recessed in the base plate 571 of the curved path WK1, and has an outer shape in a front view that is elongated in the direction of gravity (the direction of the arrows U and D).
The center position of the second recess 571i in the vertical direction (direction of arrows U-D) in front view is set to the middle position of the curved path WK1. Furthermore, the center position of the second recess 571i in the horizontal direction (direction of arrows L-R) in front view is formed at the center position of the curved path WK1 in the direction perpendicular to the ball throwing direction.

In addition, the main path SK1, the curved path WK1 and the main path SK2 all have the same width dimension L18 (see Figure 25 (a)) perpendicular to the throwing direction of the game ball when viewed from the front, and the width dimension L18 is set to approximately 1.1 times the diameter of the game ball.

In addition, the first recess 571h, the second recess 571i, and the third recess 571j have a maximum width dimension in the short side direction when viewed from the front set to approximately 1/2 of the above-mentioned width dimension L18. This allows the center of the game ball passing through each path (main path SK1, curved path WK1, and main path SK2) to pass through the front side of the first recess 571h, the second recess 571i, and the third recess 571j, making it easier to send the game ball to the inside of the first recess 571h, the second recess 571i, and the third recess 571j.

The step portion 571m protrudes from the inner wall on the rear side of the main path SK3 to the front side.
The step portion 571m is formed on the upstream side of the main path SK3. The step portion 571m is set at a position where the downstream end of the main path SK3 protrudes toward the front side of the base plate 571.
The upstream end is set at the same position as the back surface of the curved path WK1.
It is possible to prevent the game ball flowing down K3 from flowing back (bounced) upstream beyond the step 571m after being sent downstream of the step 571m.

The third recess 571j is formed in the base plate 571 constituting the inner wall of the main path SK3, and is formed in an elliptical shape that is long in the horizontal direction (arrow L-R direction) when viewed from the front.
The depth of the recess on the back side at the vertical center of the third recess 571j is set to be approximately the same as the height dimension L23 (see FIG. 27(c)) of the step portion 571m on the front side. This makes it easier for the game ball sent along the main path KR3 to flow from the inside to the outside of the third recess 571j.

Furthermore, the end of the third recess 571j on the downstream side of the main path SK3 is a sub-path H
The first variable plate 583b is disposed above (in the direction of arrow U) the end portion (the end portion on the direction of arrow R) on the upstream side of the main path SK3 of the first variable plate 583b that switches the path that flows down to K1.
When the first variable plate 583b is disposed above the downstream end of the curved wall portion 565b, the game ball passing through the main path SK3 is sent along the inner surface of the third recess 571j, so that the first variable plate 583b
As a result, in the portion where the first wall portion 565 and the first variable plate 583b are adjacent to each other, it is not necessary to dispose the first variable plate 583b below, and it is possible to prevent the vertical dimension of the first unit 551 from becoming large.

In this case, the third recess 571j has a longitudinal direction in a front view that is parallel to the horizontal direction (arrow L
Since the first wall portion 565 is formed in the -R direction and is spaced upward from the game ball flowing down the main path SK3, a resistance in a direction lifting the game ball upward can be applied to the game ball sent from the first wall portion 565 to the first variable plate 583b. As a result, the game ball sent from the first wall portion 565 to the first variable plate 583b can be prevented from getting caught on the first variable plate 583b.

Furthermore, the first unit 551 is disposed on one side (
a main path SK2 for sending the game ball in a direction indicated by an arrow R; and a main path SK3 for sending the game ball sent from the main path SK2 to the other side in the horizontal direction opposite to the guiding direction of the main path SK2.
and a curved path WK1 connecting one side of the main path SK2 and one side of the main path SK3, and the curved path WK1 is provided with guide means (second convex portion 564c and second concave portion 571i) on the inner walls on the front and rear sides of the game board for sending the game ball to at least one of the front and rear sides of the game board, so that the game ball passing through the curved path WK1 can be moved to the front side or rear side (forward/backward direction of the game board 13 when viewed from the front).

Therefore, the flow speed of the game ball that has accelerated by rolling on the main path SK2 (first path) can be slower than when the sending path of the game ball passing through the curved path WK1 is formed on the same plane in the front-rear direction in the front view. Therefore, the flow speed of the game ball can be slowed down, and the game ball that has collided with the inner wall of the curved path WK1 can be prevented from returning to the main path SK2, or from swaying (vibrating) inside the curved path WK1 in the sending direction of the main path SK2 (horizontal direction (arrow L-R direction) in the front view). This allows the player's line of sight to follow the game ball passing through the curved path WK1 in a fixed direction. As a result, the game ball sent to the curved path WK1 can be easily visually recognized by the player.

In addition, since the game ball can be prevented from swaying (vibrating) in the horizontal direction (left and right direction when viewed from the front) relative to the game board 13 when viewed from the front, it is no longer necessary to lengthen the curved path WK1 connecting the main path SK2 and the main path SK3 to prevent the game ball from swaying.
The path of the curved path WK1 can be shortened. As a result, the first unit 551 can be accommodated within a predetermined area with respect to the game board 13, and the first unit 551 with respect to the game board 13 can be
This allows for more space to be secured.

Furthermore, the width of the first recess 571h is increased toward the upstream side of the main path SK2 in a direction perpendicular to the flow direction of the main path SK2 (the direction of the arrows U-D). This makes it easier for the first recess 571h to receive a game ball flowing down the main path SK2. Also, since the width of the first recess 571h is set to be smaller toward the downstream side of the main path SK2, it is easier for a game ball received in the first recess 571h to escape from the same position. That is, the first recess 5
71h can easily receive the game ball on the upstream side of the main path SK2 and can easily allow the game ball to escape from the same position on the downstream side of the main path SK2. As a result, it is possible to easily send the game ball to the second recess 571i of the curved path WK1 that is connected to the downstream of the main path SK2.

In this case, the recessed end of the first recess 571h in the flow direction (arrow R direction) of the main path SK2 is in contact with the rolling surface (fourth
The first recess 571h is formed at a position exceeding the upper surface of the wall portion 573. Therefore, the game ball that escapes from the first recess 571h is less likely to be affected by the rolling surface of the main path SK2. As a result, the game ball that escapes from the first recess 571h can be easily sent to the second recess 571i of the curved path WK1.

The main path SK2 is formed from the fourth opening 571d side toward the curved wall portion 565b side (i.e., from the left side (arrow L direction) in front view to the right side (arrow R direction) in front view), with the internal space of the path inclined toward the front plate 564 side (front side (arrow F direction)).
K2 is formed with its rolling surface (the surface on the upper side in the gravity direction of the fourth wall portion 573) inclined downward toward the front side. This makes it easier for the game ball flowing down the main path SK2 to roll on the front plate 564 side, and makes it easier for the game ball to abut against the first convex portion 564b formed on the front plate 564. As a result, the first convex portion 564b can easily slow down the rolling speed of the game ball, and the game ball flowing down the main path SK2 can be pushed down the main path SK2 by the reaction force of the game ball colliding with the curved wall portion 565b.
As a result, the game ball can be made to flow stably downward at the point where the direction of the game ball changes.

The second recess 571i is formed at a position where its upper end (the end on the side in the direction of the arrow U) is in contact with an imaginary line IL3 (see FIG. 25(a)) that is drawn in a straight line along the rolling trajectory of the center of the game ball rolling on the main path SK2 (the fourth wall portion 573). This makes it easier for the second recess 571i to receive the game ball that is sent at a relatively high speed on the main path SK2 and flows into the curved path WK1.

The second recess 571i and the second convex portion 564c are formed at the change point (curved path WK1) of the throwing direction of the game ball. As described above, the first convex portion 564b, the second convex portion 564c, and the third convex portion 564c are formed at the change point (curved path WK1) of the throwing direction of the game ball.
The protruding tip surface of the convex portion 564d, the first concave portion 571h, the second concave portion 571i, and the third concave portion 571
The distance dimension L13 (see FIG. 28(a)) between the front surface of the base plate 571 excluding j is set to be smaller than the diameter of the game ball, so that the game ball flowing down between the second recess 571i and the second convex portion 564c can be pushed into the inside of the second recess 571i by abutting against the second convex portion 564c.
The game ball (which escapes from between the first recess 571i and the second recess 571i) can be made to flow down along the arc of the inner surface of the second recess 571i.

Here, the game ball sent from the main path SK2 to the curved path WK1 is likely to flow down a position close to the rolling direction of the game ball on the main path SK2. Therefore, the game ball flowing down the inside of the second recess 571i abuts on the inner surface of the area on the right side (arrow R direction side) of the second recess 571i when viewed from the front and flows down. Therefore, the sending direction of the game ball flowing into the main path SK3 can be easily directed to the flow-down direction of the main path SK3 (from the curved wall portion 565b side to the recessed portion 571g (see FIG. 21) side). As a result, it is possible to suppress the game ball colliding with the curved wall portion 565b at the point where the sending direction of the game ball changes and the flow-down temporarily stopping (see FIG. 28).

Furthermore, the throwing direction of the game ball sent from the curved path WK1 to the main path SK3 is
Since the balls can be directed in the direction toward the downstream direction of the curved wall portion 565b, the force with which the game balls collide with the curved wall portion 565b can be reduced. As a result, damage to the curved wall portion 565b caused by repeated collisions of the game balls with the curved wall portion 565b can be suppressed.

The first protrusion 564b is formed on the first path member 560 disposed on the front side.
The recess 571h is formed in the second path member 570 disposed on the rear surface side.

Here, the recessed portion formed on the first path member 560 toward the front side (the second path member 570
When a recess corresponding to the first recess 571h is formed, the first path member 56
It is necessary to increase the plate thickness of the first path member 560. Therefore, as the plate thickness of the first path member 560 increases, the transparency of the first path member 560 decreases, making it difficult for the player to visually recognize the gaming ball passing through the first unit 551.

Furthermore, when a recessed portion is formed on the back surface of the bulging portion that partially bulges out toward the front surface of the first path member 560, it is necessary to increase the gap between the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) disposed on the front surface of the game board 13 by the amount of the bulging portion on the front surface side of the first path member 560. Therefore, as the first path member 560 is separated from the glass unit 16, it becomes difficult for the player to visually recognize the game ball passing through the inside of the first path member 560.

In contrast, since the first convex portion 564b is formed in the first path member 560 disposed on the front side, and the first concave portion 571h is formed in the second path member 570 disposed on the rear side, the thickness of the first path member 560 disposed on the front side can be made thin. Also, since no part that partially protrudes is formed on the front side of the first path member 560, the first path member 560 can be disposed close to the glass unit 16. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the game ball passing through the inside of the first path member 560.

The second convex portion 564c is located below the main path SK2 (upper surface of the fourth wall portion 573) in the direction of gravity (arrow D direction) and is formed with a downward inclination in approximately the same direction as the rolling direction of the main path SK2 in a front view. As a result, the game ball flowing down between the opposing second convex portion 564c and the second recess 571i can be guided to the area on the right side (arrow R direction side) of the second recess 571i in a front view by the inclination of the second convex portion 564c. As described above, since the recessed surface of the second recess 571i is curved, the game ball that abuts against the inside of the area on the right side (arrow R direction side) of the front view of the second recess 571i and flows down can be sent toward the flow-down direction of the main path SK3 (from the curved wall portion 565b side to the recessed portion 571g (see FIG. 21) side). As a result, the curved path WK
This allows the flow of game balls from 1 to the main path SK3 to be smoother.

In addition, the second recess 571i has an end portion on the lower side (the side in the direction of the arrow D) in a front view that is parallel to the main path S
A virtual line IL4 (FIG. 25) drawn in a straight line along the rolling path of the center of the game ball rolling on K3
As a result, the height of the center of the game ball discharged from the downstream end of the second recess 571i can be set on the imaginary line IL4. As described above, in this embodiment, the game ball discharged from the second recess 571i can be sent in the flow-down direction of the main path SK3 (from the curved wall portion 565b side to the recessed portion 571g (see FIG. 21) side), so that the game ball discharged from the second recess 571i can be sent in the flow-down direction of the main path SK3 (from the curved wall portion 565b side to the recessed portion 571g (see FIG. 21) side).
This prevents a game ball that comes into contact with the inner surface of the curved path WK1 and is sent to the main path SK3 from colliding with the inner wall of the curved path WK1 and becoming stuck inside those paths.

The flow direction of the game ball flowing into the main path SK3 can be directed to the ball throwing direction of the main path SK3 at a position close to the rolling surface of the main path SK3.
It is possible to prevent the game ball flowing into the main path SK3 from being thrown in a direction perpendicular to the throwing direction of the game ball on the curved path WK1.
This can prevent the liquid from colliding with the inner wall of K1 and becoming stuck.

<The first member to which a high gaming value is imparted is disposed on the front side>
Next, the configuration of the second unit 552 will be described with reference to Fig. 29 to Fig. 31. Fig. 29(a) is a front view of the second unit 552, and Fig. 29(b) is a schematic view of the second unit 552.
30 is an exploded perspective front view of the second unit 552, and FIG.
FIG. 13 is an exploded perspective rear view of the second unit 552.

As shown in Figures 29 to 31, the second unit 552 mainly comprises a fourth path member 610 arranged on the first unit 551 side (front side (arrow F direction)), a fifth path member 620 arranged on the back side (arrow B direction) of the fourth path member 610, a sixth path member 630 arranged on the back side of the fifth path member 620 and forming a ball sending path for the game ball between the fifth path member 620 and the sixth path member 630, and a decorative member 650 arranged on the side of the second unit 552.

The fourth path member 610 is connected to the first unit 551 via the center frame 86 described above.
The fourth path member 610 is attached to the back side (arrow B direction side) of the first unit 551. The fourth path member 610 includes an attachment plate 611 formed in a vertically elongated rectangular plate shape when viewed from the front, a side wall portion 612 erected from an end portion of the attachment plate 611 toward the first unit 551 side (the front side (arrow F direction side)), and a first communication passage 615 and a second communication passage 616 whose internal spaces communicate with the second rolling portion 577 and the third rolling portion 578 of the first unit 551.

The mounting plate 611 has an insertion portion 617 that is recessed in a circular shape on the first unit 551 side (the front side (the side in the direction of the arrow F)) and has a through hole formed in the bottom surface of the recess, and a through hole formed in the insertion portion 617 on the fifth path member 620 side (
The mounting plate 611 is provided with a path side fastening portion 618 and a decorative side fastening portion 619 which protrude in a circular shape on the back side (the side in the direction of arrow B) and have holes in their protruding tip surfaces into which screws can be screwed, an opening 613 which is opened in the center of the mounting plate 611, and a second insertion portion 614 which is opened to the outside of the opening 613.

The insertion portions 617 are portions through which the tips of screws for fastening the first unit 551 and the second unit 552 are inserted, and are formed at a plurality of locations on the attachment plate 611 (three locations in this embodiment).

The path-side fastening portion 618 is a portion into which a screw is screwed to be inserted into an insertion hole 632 of a sixth path member 630 described later, and is formed at a position opposite the insertion hole 632.
The pathway member 630 may be fastened to the fourth pathway member 610 .

The decorative side fastening portion 619 is a portion into which a screw is screwed to be inserted into a fastening hole 652 formed in a decorative member 650 described later, and is formed at a position facing the fastening hole 652. This allows the decorative member 650 to be fastened to the fourth path member 610.

The opening 613 is formed at a position facing the first solenoid 583a and the second solenoid 584a arranged in the first unit 551. This allows the first solenoid 583a and the second solenoid 584a to be arranged inside the opening 613 when the fourth path member 610 is arranged on the back surface of the first unit 551. Therefore, when the fourth path member 610 is arranged on the back surface of the first unit 551, it is possible to prevent the fourth path member 610 from becoming large in the front-rear direction, and the periphery of the first solenoid 583a and the second solenoid 584a can be prevented from becoming large in the front-rear direction.
It may be surrounded by a pathway member 610 .

The first communication passage 615 and the second communication passage 616 are formed in a U-shape that is open upward (in the direction of the arrow U) when viewed from the front, and extend in the front-rear direction (in the direction of the arrows F-B).
The first communication passage 615 and the second communication passage 616 have their front end portions abutted against the rear side of the second rolling portion 577 and the third rolling portion 578 of the first unit 551, and their rear end portions abut against the front side of the ends of the first inlet 625 and the second inlet 626 of the fifth path member 620 described later.
The fifth path member 620 is formed with a downward incline. As a result, the game ball sent from the second rolling portion 577 and the third rolling portion 578 of the first unit 551 to the first communication passage 615 and the second communication passage 616 can be made to roll through the first communication passage 615 and the second communication passage 616 and flow into the first inlet 625 and the second inlet 626 of the fifth path member 620.

The second insertion portion 614 is a hole through which a screw that screws into the screw hole 86b4 of the protruding portion 86b is inserted when fastening the fourth path member 610 to the protruding portion 86b of the center frame 86, and is formed at a position corresponding to the screw hole 86b4 (see FIG. 35 ) formed in the protruding portion 86b. This allows the fourth path member 610 to be disposed on the back surface of the protruding portion 86b of the center frame 86.

The side wall portion 612 is a plate member that covers the side of the first solenoid 583a and the side of the second solenoid 584a arranged on the back side (arrow B direction side) of the first unit 551 when the first unit 551 and the second unit 552 are fastened, and is erected from the entire end of the mounting plate 611 to the first unit 551 side (front side (arrow F direction side)). The erection dimension of the side wall portion 612 on the front side (first unit 551 side) is set to a length that abuts against the protruding portion 86b of the center frame 86. As a result, the side wall portion 612 is arranged between the first unit 551 and the second unit 552, so that it is possible to prevent a gap from being formed between the first unit 551 and the second unit 552. As a result, it is possible to prevent an illegal object from being inserted between the first unit 551 and the second unit 552.

The fifth path member 620 includes a plate member 621 formed of a plate having a generally rectangular shape when viewed from the front, a first inlet 625 and a second inlet 626 opened in the plate member 621, and a sixth path member 630 side (rear side (arrow B direction side)) extending from the periphery of the second inlet 626 to below the second inlet 626.
a second erected wall 623 erected on the sixth path member 630 side from the periphery of the first inlet 625 to below the first inlet 625;
The main components include a fastening portion 627 protruding toward the pathway member 630 .

The plate member 621 is formed to have an outer shape smaller than the outer shape of the fourth path member 610 in a front view, and is disposed on the rear side (the side in the direction of the arrow B) of the fourth path member 610. The plate member 621 also has a central opening 622 that opens in the center when viewed from the front. This central opening 622 is formed to be larger than the outer shape of the second solenoid 584a when viewed from the rear, and is formed in a position corresponding to the second solenoid 584a. As a result, the plate member 621 (
When the fifth path member 620 is disposed on the rear side of the fourth path member 610,
A second solenoid 584 a can be disposed inside the central opening 622 , the second solenoid 584 a being inserted through the inside of the opening 613 .

The first inlet 625 and the second inlet 626 are, as described above, the first inlet of the fourth path member 610.
This is a portion (opening for allowing the game balls to flow in) that connect the communication passage 615 and the second communication passage 616 between the opposing fifth path member 620 and sixth path member 630 .

The fastened portion 627 is a portion into which a tip of a screw inserted through a fastening hole 633 formed in a sixth path member 630 (described later) is screwed, and is formed at a position corresponding to the fastening hole 633. In this way, the fifth path member 620 and the sixth path member 630 are fastened together.
The protruding dimension of No. 7 toward the sixth path member 630 is set to be larger than the diameter of the game ball. As a result, a gap is formed between the fifth path member 620 and the sixth path member 630 through which the game ball can flow down.

The first standing wall 624 is a wall extending from the first inlet 625 to the fifth path member 620 and the sixth path member 63
The second standing wall 623 is a wall that guides the game balls that flow into the space between the opposing ends of the plate member 621 and extends downward and is connected to the second standing wall 623. The second standing wall 623 is a wall that guides the game balls that flow into the fifth path member 620 from the second inlet, and extends in the vertical direction of the plate member 621.
The ball throwing path formed by first upright wall 624 and second upright wall 623 will be described later.

The sixth path member 630 includes a base plate 631 formed of a plate having a generally rectangular shape when viewed from the front, a second central opening 634 opened in the base plate 631 at a position opposite to the central opening 622 of the fifth path member 620, and an insertion hole 635 formed around the second central opening 634 of the base plate 631.
32 and fastening holes 633.

The second central opening 634 is formed to have approximately the same size as the central opening 622 of the fifth path member 620 in a front view, and is communicated with the central opening 622 of the fifth path member 620 when the fifth path member 620 and the sixth path member 630 are combined. This allows the first solenoid 583a of the first unit 551 to be disposed inside the second central opening 634 when the second unit 552 is disposed on the back side of the first unit 551.

Next, a ball throwing path formed by the fifth path member 620 will be described with reference to Figure 32. Figure 32 is a cross-sectional view of the second unit 552 taken along line XXXII-XXXII in Figure 29.

As shown in FIG. 32 , the second unit 552 includes a first standing wall 624 of the fifth path member 620.
and a sub-path HK4 surrounded by the second upright wall 623.
It is equipped with K5.

The sub-path HK4 extends downward from the first inlet 625, then bends toward the sub-path HK5 (described later) and communicates with the sub-path HK5. A detection device SE7 that detects the passage of a gaming ball is disposed in the downward extension of the sub-path HK4. This makes it possible to detect the passage of a gaming ball through the sub-path HK4. When the detection device SE7 detects the passage of a gaming ball,
A predetermined gaming value is awarded to the player (in this embodiment, a prize gaming ball).

In this embodiment, the number of game balls (for example, three) awarded to the player as the game ball passes through the detection device SE7 is determined by the detection devices SE3 to SE7 of the first unit 551.
The number of game balls awarded to the player as the game ball passes through SE6 (for example, 15 balls)
In other words, the game value given to the player as the game ball passes through the detection device SE7 is set to be higher than the game value given to the player as the game ball passes through the detection devices SE3 to SE6 arranged in the first unit 551. This makes it easier to draw attention to the game ball passing through the first unit 551. As a result, it is easier to arouse interest in the player.

The sub-path HK5 extends downward from the second inlet 626 and is connected to the second unit 552.
The sub-path HK4 is connected to the collection path of the pachinko machine 10 below the sub-path HK5. Therefore, the game balls flowing down the sub-path HK5 are collected without being awarded game value to the player. Also, the game balls flowing down the sub-path HK4 and detected by the detection device SE7 are sent to the sub-path HK5 and collected in the pachinko machine 10.

The special winning device 550 includes a first unit 551 formed of a light-transmitting material and disposed on the front side of the game area, and a second unit 552 disposed on the rear side of the first unit 551. The first unit 551 includes a first receiving section 561 into which a game ball can enter.
The second unit 552 includes a second receiving portion 562 and a third receiving portion 563 that can receive game balls.
63, and a gaming ball entering the first receiving portion 561 is given a higher gaming value (payout of gaming balls) to the player than a gaming ball entering the second receiving portion 562 and the third receiving portion 563.

Therefore, compared to a case where the ball throwing paths of the first unit 551 and the second unit 552 are formed in a complex manner (for example, the ball throwing path of the first unit 551 and the ball throwing path of the second unit 552 intersect in the front-to-rear direction when viewed from the front), when the balls are thrown down the first unit 551 and the second unit 552 at the same time, it is easier for the player to focus on the balls flowing down the first unit 551.
It is possible to allow the player to easily see the game ball flowing down the first unit 551 having the ball bearing 61. As a result, the player can see the game ball passing through a path that provides the player with a high game value, which makes it easier to increase the interest of the player.

In addition, the inlet (first receiving portion 561) of the ball sending path for sending the game ball to the first unit 551
In addition, the inlets (second receiving section 562 and third receiving section 563) of the ball sending path for sending the game ball to the second unit 552 are formed in adjacent positions, so that it is difficult for the player to judge whether the game ball will flow into the first unit 551 which is awarded a high game value, or into the second unit 552 which is awarded a low game value, until the game ball flows in. As a result, it is possible to keep the player interested until just before the game ball flows into the special winning device 550.

Next, referring to FIG. 33 to FIG. 37, the special prize winning device 550 is inserted into the center frame 86.
The arrangement of the center frame 86 will be described. FIG. 33(a) is a front view of the center frame 86.
Fig. 33(b) is a side view of the center frame 86. Fig. 34(a) is a perspective front view of the center frame 86, and Fig. 34(b) is a perspective rear view of the center frame 86. Fig. 35 is an exploded perspective rear view of the center frame 86. Fig. 36 is an exploded perspective rear view of the center frame 86.
FIG. 37(a) is a cross-sectional view of the center frame 86 taken along line XVI-XXXVI.
37(a) and 37(b) are schematic cross-sectional views of the game board 13, and FIG. 37(b) is a schematic exploded cross-sectional view of the game board 13.
37(a) and 37(b) correspond to the cross section of FIG. 36.

<Fixing Means for Pressing First Member Toward Base Member>
As shown in Figures 33 to 37, the special prize device 550 is composed of a first unit 551 that is removable on the front side of the center frame 86, and a second unit that is removable on the back side of the center frame 86, with the center frame 86 sandwiched between them.

The first unit 551 is disposed on the front side of the protruding portion 86b with a first solenoid 583a and a second solenoid 584a disposed on the rear side of the first unit 551 inserted into an opening 86b1 of the center frame 86. The first unit 551 also includes a columnar body 551a that protrudes in a cylindrical shape toward the second unit 552 side.

The columnar body 551 a is inserted into the insertion portion 61 formed in the fourth path member 610 of the second unit 552.
7 and has a hole at its tip into which the screw inserted through the insertion portion 617 screws.

The first unit 551 is fixed to the center frame 86 by a screw inserted through an insertion portion 617 and a second insertion portion 614 formed in the fourth path member 610 of the second unit 552. To explain in detail, the first unit 551 is disposed between the fourth path member 610 disposed on the back side (arrow B direction side) with the protruding portion 86b of the center frame 86 interposed therebetween. In addition, the first unit 551 is fastened to the second unit 552 by a screw inserted through the insertion portion 617 of the fourth path member 610 being screwed into the columnar body 551a.

Furthermore, in a state where the first unit 551 and the second unit 552 are fastened together, a screw inserted into a second insertion portion 614 formed in the second unit 552 is screwed into a screw hole 86b4 (see FIG. 35 ) recessed in the protruding portion 86b, thereby fastening the protruding portion 86b and the fourth path member 610. As described above, the fourth path member 610 and the first unit 551 are fastened and fixed, so that the first unit 551 can be fastened to the fourth path member 610 by fastening the fourth path member 610 to the protruding portion 86b.
is fastened to the protruding portion 86b.

As shown in FIG. 37, the opening dimension Y1 (see FIG. 37B) of the first opening 60a of the base plate 60 in the vertical direction is set to be slightly smaller than the vertical dimension Y2 (see FIG. 37B) of the first unit 551 (second path member 570).
The distance Y4 (see FIG. 37B) from the contact surface of the first unit 551 with the front surface of the base plate 60 to the contact surface of the second unit 552 with the base plate 60 is
When these are fastened together, the thickness Y3 of the base plate 60 (see FIG. 37B) is set to be slightly smaller than this thickness Y3.

As a result, when the first unit 551 and the second unit 552 are fastened together, the first unit 551 can be biased toward the base plate 60 (rear side).
Therefore, it is not necessary to fasten the first unit 551 to the front side of the base plate 60 with a screw.
Since the fastening space for the screw is not required on the front side of the first unit 551, the area on the front side of the first unit 551 can be used as a throwing space for the game ball.
A space for throwing game balls formed in unit 551 can be secured.

In addition, the fastening portion (columnar body 551 a) between the first unit 551 and the second unit 552 is
Since it is formed to protrude from the back side of the first unit 551, a space for throwing game balls can be secured in the first unit 551 compared to when the fastening part is formed on the front side of the base plate 60.

In addition, since the second unit 552 can be biased toward the base plate 60 (the front side), it is possible to prevent a gap from being formed between the second unit 552 and the base plate 60.
This makes it possible to prevent tampering with the first solenoid 583a and the second solenoid 584a of the first unit 551 by inserting a tampering object such as a wire or piano wire between the opposing second unit 552 and the base plate 60.

Furthermore, because first unit 551 is attached to base plate 60 by screws inserted from the rear side of base plate 60, there is no need to form a fastening margin (an extended portion in which an opening through which the screw is inserted) with base plate 60 on the front side of first unit 551. As a result, the entire outer shape of first unit 551 in a front view can be used as a ball throwing path, and the ball throwing path of first unit 551 can be enlarged.

In addition, since the fastening portion between the base plate 60 and the first unit 551 is on the rear side of the base plate 60, it is possible to prevent the fastening portion between the base plate 60 and the first unit 551 from being detached due to tampering performed from the front side of the game board 13. As a result, it is possible to prevent tampering with the first unit 551. Furthermore, since the fastening portion between the base plate 60 and the first unit 551 is on the rear side of the base plate 60, it is possible to make it difficult for a player to notice the head of a screw. As a result, it is possible to prevent tampering with the first unit 551.
The structure for fixing the unit 551 to the base plate 60 is recognized by the player,
This can prevent the player's interest from declining.

The first unit 551 is fixed to the base plate 60 from the rear side by a fixing means (screw).
, the sensor 10 is disposed on the base plate 60 in a state where it is biased toward the rear side of the base plate 60.
The biasing force acting on the first unit 551 toward the rear side allows the first unit 551 and the base plate 60 to be disposed in a state of close contact with each other.

Furthermore, the first unit 551 and the second unit 552 are disposed on the center frame 86 with a ball throwing path formed therein for throwing the game ball.
The ball sending path of the first unit 551 and the ball sending path of the second unit 552 can be prevented from being misaligned when the first unit 551 and the second unit 552 are assembled. As a result, the game ball flowing down the inside of the first unit 551 and the second unit 552 can be prevented from being misaligned when the first unit 551 and the second unit 552 are assembled.
This prevents the ball from stopping on the throwing path of 2.

In addition, the first unit 551 is provided with rolling surfaces (a second rolling portion 577 and a third rolling portion 578 ) for causing the game ball sent to the first unit 551 to flow into the second unit 552 .
Therefore, each of the first unit 551 and the second unit 552 is a center frame 8
If the first unit 551 were to be fastened to the protrusion 86b of the center frame 86, an assembly error of the first unit 551 relative to the center frame 86 would occur, and the game ball would not be able to be thrown smoothly from the first unit 551 to the second unit 552.

In contrast, in this embodiment, as described above, the first unit 551 is
52, it is possible to minimize the error when fastening the first unit 551 and the second unit 552 (minimizing the places where an error may occur when fastening). As a result, it is possible to smoothly throw a game ball from the first unit 551 to the second unit 552.

The fifth and sixth path members 620, 630 fastened to the fourth path member 610 are disposed at positions overlapping at least a portion of the insertion portion 617 and the second insertion portion 614 of the fourth path member 610 in a rear view. This allows the first unit 551 to be removed from the center frame 86 only after the fifth and sixth path members 620, 630 fastened to the fourth path member 610 have been removed. This allows the first units 551 forming the main paths SK1 to SK6 to be removed from the center frame 86 only after the fifth and sixth path members 620, 630 fastened to the fourth path member 610 have been removed.
This can prevent fraudulent acts on the main paths SK1 to SK6 by removing the card No. 1 from the center frame 86.

Furthermore, the protruding portion 86b has an end portion 86b5 that stands (folds back) on the second unit 552 side (see FIG. 33B). As a result, when the first unit 551 and the second unit 552 are disposed on the center frame 86 with the protruding portion 86b of the center frame 86 therebetween, the standing portion 86b5 surrounds the first solenoid 583a and the second solenoid 584a disposed on the back side of the first unit 551.

Therefore, with the first unit 551 and the second unit 552 disposed on the center frame 86, it is possible to prevent an illegal object such as a wire or a piano wire from being inserted between the opposing first unit 551 and the second unit 552. As a result, with the first unit 551 and the second unit 552 disposed on the center frame 86, it is possible to prevent illegal tampering with the first solenoid 583a and the second solenoid 584a of the first unit 551.

In addition, a first solenoid 583a is provided between the first unit 551 and the second unit 552.
The first solenoid 583a and the second solenoid 584a are disposed in the space between the first solenoid 583a and the first solenoid 584a, and the standing portion 86b5 is interposed therebetween.
Therefore, the first solenoid 583a and the second solenoid 584a can be partially disposed between the first unit 551 and the second unit 552 by the amount that the front sides of the first solenoid 583a and the second solenoid 584a are accommodated between the first unit 551 and the second unit 552.
As a result, the periphery of the rear side of the first solenoid 583a and the second solenoid 584a can be easily surrounded by the second unit 552, and the second unit 552 can prevent tampering with the first solenoid 583a and the second solenoid 584a from the rear side.

Furthermore, a first solenoid 583 is provided between the first unit 551 and the second unit 552.
Since a part of the front side of the first solenoid 583a and the second solenoid 584a is arranged, the game ball flowing down the second unit 552 can be hidden by the first solenoid 583a and the second solenoid 584a, making it difficult for the player to see. This makes it possible to make the player easily see the game ball flowing down the first unit 551 even if the flow line of the game ball flowing down the first unit 551 and the flow line of the game ball flowing down the second unit 552 overlap when viewed from the front. As a result, it is possible to make the player see the game ball flowing down the first unit 551, which is given to the player a game value higher than the game value given to the player by the game ball flowing down the second unit 552, and this makes it easier to give the player interest.

Furthermore, when the first unit 551 and the second unit 552 are disposed in the center frame 86, the decorative member 650 is disposed in a state of covering the inner side surface of the base frame 86a of the center frame 86. This makes it possible to prevent an illegal object such as a wire or a piano wire from being inserted into the special prize device 550 via (through) an opening in the base frame 86a of the center frame 86.

As shown in FIG. 36 and FIG. 37, the first solenoid 58 disposed in the first unit 551
3a is inserted into the inside of the central opening 622 and the second central opening 634 formed in the fourth path member 610 and the fifth path member 620 of the second unit 552.
The second unit 552 can be prevented from bulging out toward the rear side (the direction of the arrow B).
This can prevent unauthorized access to the solenoid 583a using wire, piano wire, or other such objects.

In addition, since the load of the first solenoid 583a can be supported by the second unit 552, the second path member 570 of the first unit 551 in which the first solenoid 583a is disposed can be supported by the second unit 552.
As a result, the passage of the game ball through the first unit 551 can be stabilized.

Furthermore, as described above, the opening 8 of the protrusion 86b formed in the center frame 86
Since the first solenoid 583a and the second solenoid 584a are surrounded by the opening 86b1, the first solenoid 583a and the second solenoid 584a, which have a relatively large (heavy) load, can be supported by the opening 86b1 (protruding portion 86b). As a result, the protruding portion 86b can be prevented from being deflected by the load of the special prize-winning device 550.

Therefore, the center frame 86 disposed on the base plate 60 can be prevented from bending (warping), so that the arrangement of the first unit 551 disposed on the center frame 86 can be prevented from bending (warping) on the base plate 60.
As a result, the game balls can be smoothly guided from the game area of the game board 13 into the first unit 551 (the special winning device 550).

In addition, a second rolling portion 57 that sends the game ball from the first unit 551 to the second unit 552
The first solenoid 583a and the second solenoid 583b are disposed on the inner side of the opening 86b1.
The electromagnetic force generated by the driving of 84a causes the first unit 551 to move to the second unit 552.
In other words, the protrusion 86b can prevent the electromagnetic force generated by the driving of the first solenoid 583a and the second solenoid 584a from acting on the outside of the protrusion 86b. As a result, the sending of the game ball from the first unit 551 to the second unit 552 can be stabilized.

As described above, the first solenoid 583a is disposed with its rear surface inserted into the central opening 622 and the second central opening 634 of the second unit 552. This allows the wiring of the detection devices SE3 to SE6 of the first unit 551 and the first solenoid 583a to be disposed by passing through the central opening 622 and the second central opening 634. Furthermore, since these wirings can be disposed along the first solenoid 583a, tangling of the wirings can be prevented.

Furthermore, since the load of the first solenoid 583a can be supported by the central opening 622 and the second central opening 634 of the second unit 552, the bending of the protruding portion 86b on which the first unit 551 is disposed can be suppressed. Therefore, since the bending (bending) of the center frame 86 disposed on the base plate 60 can be suppressed, the position of the first unit 551 disposed on the center frame 86 can be suppressed from shifting relative to the base plate 60. As a result, the game balls can be smoothly flowed from the game area of the game board 13 into the first unit 551 (the special winning device 550).

<Displacement member for mounting the fixing member of the board unit on the rear member>
Next, the connection structure between the rear case 300 and the board unit 110 will be described in detail with reference to Figs. 38 to 42. First, with reference to Figs. 38 and 39,
The structure of 0 will now be described.

FIG. 38(a) is a front view of the rear case 300, and FIG.
39A is an exploded perspective front view of the rear case 300.
1B is an exploded perspective rear view of the rear case 300. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 38 and 39 , the rear case 300 includes an engagement member 310 disposed on the front side (the open side (the side in the direction of the arrow F) formed in a box shape) of the bottom wall portion 301, and the rear case 300
The above-mentioned board box 100 (main control device 110) is disposed on the rear side (arrow B direction side) of the
and a fixing member 320 for fixing the fixing member 320.

The rear case 300 has a bottom wall 301 and two protruding portions 30
1b, a first opening 301c that opens at a position opposite to the fixing member 320, and an engagement member 31
and a second opening 301d that opens at a position opposite to the first opening 301c.

The protruding portion 301b is a shaft for holding the engaging member 310 in a slidable state.
The protrusion 30 is inserted into a slide groove 314 that opens into an engagement member 310, which will be described later.
Therefore, after the protrusion 301b is inserted into the inside of the sliding groove 314, a screw having a head diameter larger than the groove width of the sliding groove 314 is screwed into the protrusion 301b, whereby the engagement member 310 is fixed to the rear case 3
It can be placed at 00.

The first opening 301c is an opening for inserting a part of the fixing member 320 (an engaging portion with the engaging member 310) described later, and the engaging portion of the fixing member 320 (an engaged portion 332 described later)
This allows fixing member 320 disposed on the rear side of rear case 300 (bottom wall portion 301) to be engaged with engaging member 310 disposed on the front side of rear case 300 (bottom wall portion 301).

In addition, first opening 301c has a protruding wall 301c1 protruding toward the rear side at an end portion that is the opposite side (arrow R direction side) to the engagement side (arrow L direction side) between fixing member 320 and engaging member 310. Protruding wall 301c1 is formed into a hook shape with a protruding tip on the rear side bent at approximately 90 degrees, and the bending direction is set in the direction away from first opening 301c (arrow R direction).

The tip of the protruding wall 301c1 is inserted into a locking portion 331 of the fixing member 320, which will be described later. This allows the opposite side (the side in the direction of the arrow R) of the engagement portion between the fixing member 320 and the engagement member 310 to be locked. As a result, the fixing member 320 disposed on the rear case 300 can be moved left and right (
The fixing member 320 and the engaging member 310 can be supported (engaged) at both ends (in the direction of the arrows L and R).
The arrangement of the fixing member 320 in the first opening 301c will be described in detail later.

The second opening 301d is an opening for inserting a part (operator 315) of the engaging member 310 described later into the rear side of the rear case 300, and this allows the engaging member 310 to be operated from the rear side of the rear case 300. Therefore, as described above, after the fixing member 320 is placed on the rear side of the rear case 300, the engaging member 310 can be operated from the rear side of the rear case 300 to engage the fixing member 320 and the engaging member on the front side of the rear case 300 (bottom wall portion 301).

The engaging member 310 has a crank-shaped outer shape in a front view, and is made up of a first piece 311 and a second piece 312 that extend in parallel to each other.
and a third piece 313 that connects the ends of the first and second pieces 311 and 312 in a direction perpendicular to the extension direction of the first and second pieces 311 and 312.

The above-mentioned two sliding grooves 314 are formed in one location each on the first piece 311 and the second piece 312, and open in the shape of a long slot in the extension direction (the direction of the arrows L-R) of the first piece 311 and the second piece 312. This allows the engaging member 310 to slide in the extension direction (the direction of the arrows L-R) of the first piece 311 and the second piece 312.

The first piece 311 has an end on one side (arrow R direction) opposite to the other side (arrow L direction) to which the third piece 313 is connected, which is formed as an engagement portion with a fixing member 320 described later, and is equipped with an engagement portion 316 that protrudes outward on both sides in the up and down direction (arrow U-D direction), which is a direction approximately perpendicular to the extension direction of the first piece 311, a recess 317 that is recessed in the extension direction of the first piece 311 (arrow L-R direction) from approximately the midpoint between the two engagement portions 316, and an operator 315 that protrudes toward the bottom wall portion 301 side of the rear case 300 (the rear side (arrow B direction)).

The engaging portion 316 is formed in a substantially triangular shape when viewed from the front, and one side (the side in the direction of the arrow R)
The outer surface of the first piece 311 is formed as an inclined surface that protrudes outward from the first piece 311 as it moves from one end toward the other side (arrow L direction side), while the outer surface of the other side is formed as an inclined surface that protrudes outward from the first piece 311 in the extension direction (arrow L-R
The casing 12 extends in an up-down direction (direction of arrows U-D) which is a direction substantially perpendicular to the casing 12.

The recess 317 is formed by cutting out the first piece 311 in the thickness direction.
The recess is formed from one end (arrow R direction side) of the bearing toward the other end (arrow L direction side).
One side of the first piece 311 is split into two. This allows the rigidity of one side of the first piece 311 to be lower than the other side. As a result, the one side of the first piece 311 can be easily elastically deformed, making it easier for the engaging member 310 to engage with the fixing member 320. The engagement between the engaging member 310 and the fixing member 320 will be described in detail later.

The operator 315 is an operating part for operating the engaging member 310, and is formed on the other end of the first piece 311, with a protruding dimension set to a value greater than the plate thickness of the bottom wall 301 of the rear case 300, and protruding toward the rear side of the rear case 300 by at least a dimension that allows an operator to grasp it with his/her fingers. This allows the operator 315 to protrude from the second opening 301d of the bottom wall 301, and allows the operator to grasp and operate the protruding portion (the tip of the operator 315).

The second piece 312 has a fastening hole 318 formed in a circular recess on the front side. The fastening hole 318 is
This is a portion into which a screw is inserted into a hole (see FIG. 89 ) that penetrates a rear base 720 of the rotation unit 700 described later. As a result, the inside of the rear case 300 (the bottom wall portion 301
After the rotating unit 700 is disposed on the front side of the rotating unit 700, the engaging member 310 disposed on the rear side of the rotating unit 700 can be operated to move the engaging member 310 to a specified position (an engaging position with a fixing member 320 described later), and a screw can be screwed into the fastening hole 318 to fasten the engaging member 31
0 and the rotation unit 700 (rear base 720). Therefore, the engagement member 310 arranged at the specified position is connected to the operation element 315 protruding from the rear side of the rear case 300.
As a result, when the pachinko machine 10 is assembled, the operator 315 may be illegally operated to cause the fixed member 320 and the base box 100 (
This can prevent the main control device 110 from being easily replaced with an unauthorized board box.

In this case, the fastening hole 318 is inserted through the hole in the rear base 720 of the rotation unit 700.
The screw fastened to the rear case 300 may be operable through a hole formed by removing the first winning hole 64 disposed on the game board 13. In this case, since it is not necessary to release the fastening between the game board 13 and the rear case 300, it is possible to prevent the work of replacing the board box 100 with a normal one from becoming complicated. As a result, the work of replacing the board box 100 with a normal one can be simplified.

The fixing member 320 is composed of a separate member from the rear case 300. This allows the board box 100 to be crimped and fixed to the fixing member 320, which has a smaller outer shape than the rear case 300, making it easier to arrange the board box 100 than when the fixing member 320 is formed integrally with the rear case 300. As a result, it is easier to arrange the board box 100 in the rear case 300 in a state in which the board box 100 is not easily removed from the fixing member 320.

In addition, while the rear case 300 can be reused as a part of the same shape for each type of pachinko machine, the board box 100 has a different shape and size for each type of pachinko machine 10, so the fixing member 320 on which the board box 100 is disposed cannot be reused for another pachinko machine. Therefore, compared to when the fixing member 320 is formed integrally with the rear case 300, the mold for molding the rear case 300 can be the same as that for another pachinko machine. As a result, it is only necessary to form a mold for the fixing member 320, which has a smaller outer shape than the rear case 300, and therefore manufacturing costs can be reduced.

The fixing member 320 is composed of an interposed member 330 that engages with the engaging member 310 described above, and a pivot member 340 that is fastened to the interposed member 330. This allows the pivot member 340 to be used as a reusable item having the same shape as a fixing member of another gaming machine.

The intermediate member 330 is formed in a box shape that is open on the front side (the side in the direction of the arrow F) and on the other side (the side in the direction of the arrow L).
The box-shaped bottom surface of the rear case 300 is mainly composed of a locking portion 331 protruding from the side surface of the rear case 300 (the side in the direction of arrow L), a frame-shaped engaged portion 332 protruding from the side surface of the other side (the side in the direction of arrow L) toward the rear case 300 (the front side), an insertion hole 333 opening in a circular shape in the bottom surface of the box, and a protrusion 334 protruding from the rear case 300 toward the shaft support member 340.

The locking portion 331 has an opening for engaging the other side (the side in the direction of the arrow L) of the fixing member 320 with the bottom wall portion 301, and a protruding wall 301c1 protruding in an L-shaped cross section from the periphery of the above-mentioned first opening 301c is inserted into the opening, thereby engaging with the bottom wall portion 301. Thereby, when the interposed member 330 (fixed member 320) is disposed in the rear case 300, the protruding wall 301c1 can be inserted into the locking portion 331 of the interposed member 330 to lock one side (the side in the direction of the arrow R) of the interposed member 330 with the rear case 300.

Engaged portion 332 is a portion that engages with engaging member 310, and its protruding dimension toward rear case 300 (arrow F direction) is set to a dimension that exceeds engaging member 310 disposed on rear case 300, and the distance dimension from the inner surface on the front side (arrow F direction) of the enclosed space to the front of bottom wall portion 301 is set to be greater than the distance from the front of engaging member 310 to the front of bottom wall portion 301. As a result, the space enclosed by engaged portion 332 and engaging member 310 are positioned to overlap in the front-to-rear direction (arrow F-B direction).

The insertion hole 333 is a through hole through which a screw is inserted to fasten the intermediate member 330 to a pivotal support member 340 (described later), and is set coaxially with a fastening hole 343 of the pivotal support member 340 .

The protrusion 334 is formed with a generally L-shaped cross section, and the distance between the tip of the bent side and the bottom surface of the interposition member 330 is set to be greater than the plate thickness of an insertion portion 344 of the axial support member 340 described later.
As a result, the insertion portion 3 is inserted between the tip end of the bent side of the protrusion 334 and the bottom surface of the interposition member 330.
44 can be inserted and arranged.

The axial support member 340 is mainly formed with a main body portion 341 formed in a box shape that is open on the rear case 300 side (the side in the direction of arrow F), and a support portion 342 that bulges out from the rear side (the side in the direction of arrow B) of the main body portion 341 into an approximately U-shaped cross section.

The main body 341 has an insertion section 3 protruding upward from the side surface on the upper side (the side in the direction of the arrow U).
44, and a fastening hole 343 recessed from the bottom side (arrow D direction side) of a box-shaped main body portion 341 toward the back side (arrow B direction side).

As described above, the insertion portion 344 is a plate member that is inserted between the opposing tip end portion of the bent side of the protrusion 334 and the bottom surface of the interposition member 330. This makes it possible to prevent the upper side of the pivot support member 340 from tilting toward the rear side of the rear case 300.

The fastening hole 343 is disposed on the lower side (the side in the direction of the arrow D) biased toward the end opposite to the insertion portion 344. As described above, the fastening hole 343 is disposed in the insertion hole 333 of the interposed member 330 ( FIG. 39
The shaft support member 340 is a hole for fastening a screw that passes through the upper side (see FIG. 1(b)).
Insertion portion 344 (on the side of arrow U) is inserted into protrusion 334 of interposed member 330, and the lower side is fastened and fixed to interposed member 330. Therefore, since pivot support member 340 is fixed to interposed member 330 only by fastening the screws on the lower side, the number of fastening parts can be reduced and the manufacturing process can be simplified.

The support portion 342 is a portion that is crimped and fastened to the bearing portion 117 of the above-mentioned board box 100 (main control device 110), and is formed in a hollow shape in which a crimping metal fitting can be disposed inside. Note that the board box 100 is held in a rotatable state relative to the shaft support member 340 by being fastened to the board box 100 by the crimping metal fitting.

Next, referring to FIG. 40( a ) to FIG. 41( b ), the engaging member 310 and the fixing member 320
Fig. 40(a) is a front view of the rear case 300 before the engagement between the engaging member 310 and the fixing member 320, and Fig. 40(b) is a rear view of the rear case 300 before the engagement between the engaging member 310 and the fixing member 320.
41(b) is a front view of rear case 300 after engagement of engaging member 310 and fixing member 320, and FIG. 41(b) is a rear view of rear case 300 after engagement of engaging member 310 and fixing member 320. Note that in FIG. 40(b) and FIG. 41(b), a part of the outer shape of engaging member 310 that overlaps with rear case 300 is shown by a dashed line.

As shown in Figures 40(a) and 40(b), before the engagement of the engagement member 310 and the fixing member 320, the interposed member 330 and the axial support member 340 are fastened and assembled by a screw inserted from the interposed member 330 side (the front side (the side in the direction of the arrow F)).
It is also possible to prevent the pivot member 340 from being fraudulently disassembled (the fastened screws from being removed) from the rear side of the rear case 300. As a result, it is possible to prevent the board box 100 that is fixed to the pivot member 340 by crimping from being replaced with an unauthorized board box.

In the fastened state, the interposed member 330 and the axial support member 340 (fixed member 320) are fixed to the protruding wall 30 formed in the first opening 301c on the inner side of the locking portion 331 of the interposed member 330 as described above.
In this case, the intermediate member 330 and the pivot support member 340 (
The fixing member 320 is inserted into the first opening 301c from the bent side (the side in the direction of the arrow R) of the protruding wall 301c1.
are arranged in.

When fixing member 320 is arranged in rear case 300, the space surrounded by engaged portion 332 is arranged in a position facing one end (engaging portion 316 side) of engaging member 310. As a result, by sliding and displacing engaging member 310, one end (arrow R direction side) of engaging member 310 can be inserted into the space surrounded by engaged portion 332.

Here, the outer dimensions in the up-down direction (direction of arrows U-D) of the two engaging portions 316 of engaging member 310 are set to be larger than the opening dimensions in the up-down direction of the space surrounded by engaged portion 332 of fixing member 320 described above. This poses the problem that engaging member 310 cannot be disposed in the space surrounded by engaged portion 332.

In contrast, as described above, the recess 317 recessed into one side (the side in the direction of arrow R) of the first piece 311 of the engaging member 310 makes it easier for the first piece 311 to elastically deform, and the triangular shape of the engaging portion 316 allows the force generated when the engaging member 310 is slidably displaced and comes into contact with the inner edge of the engaged portion 332 to be applied to the recess 317 side of the engaging member 310. As a result, the first piece 311 formed in two branches can be elastically deformed and inserted into the space surrounded by the engaged portion 332.

As shown in FIG. 41( a ) and FIG. 41 ( b ), the engagement member 310 and the fixing member 320 are
The engaging member 310 is slidably displaced, and the first piece 311 of the engaging member 310 is inserted into the intermediate member 33
When the engaging portion 316 is inserted into the space surrounded by the engaged portion 332 of the first piece 311, the elastically deformed first piece 311 is returned to its original shape.
Therefore, the force that causes the engaging member 310 to slide in the opposite direction alone does not act to elastically deform the first piece 311 toward the recess 317.
The other side of the engagement portion 316 (the side in the direction of the arrow L) can be easily inserted into the space surrounded by the engagement portion 316.
The side surface of the engaging portion 332 makes it difficult for the first piece 311 inserted into the space surrounded by the engaged portion 332 to come out. As a result, it is possible to prevent the fixing member 320 from being removed from the rear side of the rear case 300 due to fraudulent acts by the player, and it is possible to prevent the board box 100 (main control device 110) that is crimped and fastened to the fixing member 320 from being replaced with an illegal board box.

The rear case 300 is provided with an engagement member 310 which is disposed between the base plate 60 and the rear case 300 and can be operated from the outside between the base plate 60 and the rear case 300 (bottom wall portion 301) on the rear side (the side in the direction of arrow B) of the base plate 60. The fixing member 320 is
It has an engaged portion 332 that protrudes toward the front side (in the direction of arrow F) of the rear case 300, and the engaged portion 332 engages with the engaging member 310 and is arranged on the rear case 300.Therefore, with a role-play device (in this example, a rotating unit 700) arranged between the base plate 60 and the rear case 300, the engaging member 310 can be operated from the outside between the base plate 60 and the rear case 300 to engage the engaging member 310 with the fixed member 320.

Therefore, the fixing member 320 can be disposed on the rear case 300 without being hindered by the accessory device disposed between the opposing base plate 60 and the rear case 300. As a result, the fixing member 320 can be easily disposed on the rear case 300.

In addition, since the engaging member 310 is engaged with the engaged portion 332 disposed on the front side (the side in the direction of the arrow F) of the rear case 300, the engaging portion between the rear case 300 and the fixing member 320 can be disposed between the opposing portions of the base plate 60 and the rear case 300.
As a result, it is difficult to access the engagement portion between the engagement member 310 and the fixing member 320 from the rear side of the base plate 60 (the side in the direction of the arrow B).
20 is released, thereby preventing tampering with the fixing member 320 (e.g., replacement with an unauthorized fixing member).

Further, the rear case 300 is provided with a first opening 301c that opens in a portion where the fixing member 320 is disposed, and a second opening 301d that opens in a portion where the engaging member 310 is disposed, the engaging member 310 is disposed on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the rear case 300 and can be operated from the rear side (arrow B direction side) of the rear case 300 via (inserted through) the second opening 301d, and the engaged portion 332 of the fixing member 320 that has passed through the first opening 301c is disposed on the front side of the rear case 300, making it difficult to access the engaging portion between the engaging member 310 and the engaged portion 332 of the fixing member 320 from the rear side of the rear case 300. As a result,
The fixing member 320 can be fixed to the rear case 300 regardless of the size of the role device arranged in the rear case 300, and the board box can be prevented from being replaced with an illegal one by operating it from the rear side of the game board 13.

Furthermore, the engaging member 310 is provided with an operator 315 that passes through the second opening 301d and protrudes to the rear side (arrow B direction) of the rear case 300, making it easy to operate the engaging member 310 when it is disposed on the front side (arrow F direction) of the rear case 300.
As a result, the engagement operation between the engaging member 310 and the engaged portion 332 of the fixing member 320 can be easily performed.

Furthermore, since the engaging member 310 is slidably displaceable on a plane parallel to the front side of the rear case 300 (bottom wall portion 301), the engaging member 310 is not displaced in the front-rear direction (arrow F-B direction) relative to the rear case 300, and therefore the front side (arrow F direction side) of the engaging member 310 can be easily used as an arrangement space for a special device arranged in the rear case 300. As a result, the area on the front side of the rear case 300 (bottom wall portion 301) can be easily used as an arrangement space for a special device.

Next, the operation for removing fixing member 320 from rear case 300 from the state shown in FIG. 41 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 41, the first opening 301c is opened in a roughly L-shape when viewed from the front, and the recess 317 of the engaging member 310 in an engaged state with the engaged portion 332 of the fixing member 320 can be operated from the rear side (the side in the direction of arrow B) of the rear case 300 through the first opening 301c.

Therefore, by elastically deforming the outer portion of recess 317 of engaging member 310 toward the recessed side of recess 317 with a dedicated tool or the like, the engagement between engaging portion 316 of engaging member 310 and engaged portion 332 is released. In this disengaged state, engaging member 310 is displaced in a direction (direction of arrow L) in which it is pulled out of the internal space engaged by engaged portion 332, and then the deformation of engaging member 310 is returned to its original state, whereby the engagement between engaging member 310 and engaged portion 332 can be released.

It is preferable that the gap between the outer portion of the recess 317 of the engagement member 310 and the first opening 301c is as small as possible.
This makes it impossible for the finger of the person removing 20 to be inserted, but allows the insertion of a special tool.
As a result, only workers with dedicated tools can replace the board box 100 (main control device 110), thereby preventing the board box 100 from being replaced with an unauthorized one.

Next, with reference to Figures 42(a) and 42(b), the board box 100 (main control device 110) that is crimped and fastened to the pivot support member 340 will be described. Figure 42(a) is a perspective rear view of the rear case 300 and the board box 100 (main control device 110), and Figure 42(b) is a perspective rear view of the rear case 300 and the board box 100 (main control device 110).
42(b) is a rear view of the rear case 300 and the board box 100 (main control device 110). Note that in Fig. 42(b), the outline of the engagement member 310 that overlaps with the board box 100 is shown by a chain line.

As shown in FIG. 42( a ) and FIG. 42( b ), the board box 100 is
The bearing portion 117 is provided with a bearing portion 117 protruding from an end portion in the up-down direction (arrow U
A pair of bearings 117 are disposed at a predetermined interval in the U-D direction. The pair of bearings 117 are parts that are crimped and fastened to the support parts 342 of the pivot support member 340 as described above, and the dimensions of the support parts 342 in the up-down direction (arrow U-D direction) and the distance between the opposing parts are set to be approximately the same. As a result, the board box 100 is fastened to the pivot support member 340 by disposing the support parts 342 between the opposing parts of the pair of bearings 117 and inserting a crimping pin from above the bearing parts 117 and crimping and fastening them.

According to the board box 100 configured as described above, the board box 100 is rotatably held relative to the pivot support member 340 and is disposed on the rear side of the engaging member 310. Therefore, as described above, when the operating element 315 is operated to engage the engaging member 310 with the fixed member 320, the operating element 315 can be easily operated by rotating the board box 100. In addition, after the engaging member 310 is engaged with the fixed member 320, the board box 10
By disposing the engaging member 310 on the rear side of the engaging member 310, it is possible to make it difficult to operate the operating member 315 from the rear side of the rear case 300. As a result, after the pachinko machine 10 is assembled, the operating member 3
This can prevent the board box 15 from being manipulated and replaced with an unauthorized board box.

The other end side (arrow L direction side) of the board box 100 is the bottom wall portion 3 of the rear case 300.
01, the board box 100 is inserted from the rear side (the side in the direction of the arrow B) of the board box 100 and fixed to the rear case 300 by a screw that is fastened to the rear case 300. As a result, the board box 100 is disposed on the rear side of the rear case 300 in a state in which it cannot rotate (move).

Next, a detailed configuration of the lower displacement unit 400 will be described with reference to Figures 43 to 69. First, a structure for displacing the lower displacement member 440 will be described with reference to Figures 43 to 46.

Fig. 43 is a front view of the lower displacement unit 400, and Fig. 44 is a rear view of the lower displacement unit 400. Fig. 45 is an exploded perspective front view of the lower displacement unit 400, and Fig. 46 is an exploded perspective rear view of the lower displacement unit 400. Note that Figs. 43 to 14 show a state in which the lower displacement member 440 is disposed in the retracted position (the position disposed lowest relative to the base member 410).

As shown in Figures 43 to 46, the lower displacement unit 400 is mainly formed by a base member 410 arranged on the bottom wall portion 301 (see Figure 6) of the rear case 300, a transmission member 420 arranged on the base member 410, a link member 430 connected to the base member 410 and displaced in accordance with the displacement of the transmission member 420, and a lower displacement member 440 having one end slidably connected to the base member 410 and the other end connected to the link member 430 and displaced by the transmission of a driving force from the link member 430.

The base member 410 is formed by combining two plate members each having a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the front in the front-rear direction, and includes a front base 411 disposed on the front side and a rear base 412 disposed on the rear side. A transmission member 420 and a link member 430 are disposed between the opposing front base 411 and rear base 412.

The front base 411 has two sliding grooves 411 penetrating in the front-rear direction (the depth direction of the paper in FIG. 43 ).
a and 411b, two cylindrical pivot pins 411c and 411d protruding from the rear side, and a curved wall portion 411e protruding in an arc shape with the pivot pin 411d as its axis.

The sliding grooves 411a and 411b are formed by two projections 47 protruding from the rear surface side of the lower displacement member 440.
The slide grooves 411a and 411b are formed to extend long in the left-right direction.
2, 473 can be displaced along the sliding grooves 411a, 411b, so that the lower displacement member 440 can be slid in the left-right direction.

The sliding grooves 411a and 411b are each formed to be curved in an arc shape, and extend upward (see FIG. 43 ) from the left end (left side in FIG. 43 ) of the front base 411 to the right end (right side in FIG. 43 ).
Furthermore, the sliding grooves 411a, 411b are disposed such that the axes of their respective arcs are different from each other, and the gap between them in the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 43) narrows from the left end to the right end.

The distance between the projections 472 and 473 of the base member 470 of the lower displacement member 440 described later does not change, so when the lower displacement member 440 is slid along the slide groove, the lower displacement member 440 can be displaced while rotating.
By changing the distance between the lower displacement member 440 and the lower displacement member 440, the lower displacement member 440 can be rotated in conjunction with the sliding without applying a rotational driving force to the lower displacement member 440. The detailed displacement mode of the lower displacement member 440 will be described later.

The pivot pin 411c is a protrusion that is inserted into a shaft portion 422a of a cam member 422 of a transmission member 420, which will be described later, and is formed in a cylindrical shape with an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the shaft portion 422a.
The pivot pin 411c is formed of a metal rod-shaped body and is fitted onto the front base 411. Therefore, when a force acts on the cam member 422 from its outer circumferential surface in the axial direction, the pivot pin 411c is
This can prevent the member 11c from breaking (breaking).

The pivot pin 411d is inserted through a through hole 431 formed at one end of a first link member 431, which will be described later.
a and is formed in a cylindrical shape with an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the through hole 431a. The pivot pin 411d is formed from a metal rod-shaped body and fitted onto the front base 411. Therefore, when a force is applied to the first link member 431 in the direction of the through hole 431a, the pivot pin 411d can be prevented from breaking (being damaged).

The curved wall portion 411e protrudes from the rear side of the front base 411 and supports the pivot pin 411.
The curved wall portion 411e is curved about the axis d. The protruding distance of the curved wall portion 411e is set to a distance at which the curved wall portion 411e abuts against a protruding tip surface of a plate-shaped protrusion 431b of the first link member 431, which will be described later. This prevents the first link member 431 from shifting forward.
is curved around the axis of the pivot pin 411d, so that even when the first link member 431 is rotated around the axis of the pivot pin 411d, the plate-shaped protrusion 431 of the first link member 431
b can be brought into contact with the protruding tip surface of the curved wall portion 411e.

The recovery port 411f is an opening for recovering the balls discharged from the discharge opening 471 by the movement of the ball receiving portion 467 of the lower displacement member 440 described later. The downstream side of the recovery port 411f is connected to a ball recovery path. The recovery port 411f is connected to the front base 41
It is a hole formed protruding from the right end portion of the lower displacement member 440 in the retracted state and a surface located below, in the direction of gravity, the exit opening 471 of the lower displacement member 440 in the first extended state.

In addition, the ejection opening 471 of the lower displacement member 440 in the retracted state is disposed above the recovery port 411f. Therefore, the balls ejected from the ejection opening 471 can be received by the recovery port 411f and quickly collected.

The rear base 412 is mainly formed with groove portions 412a, 412b recessed from the front side (the front side of the paper in Figure 44) toward the rear side, and a locking portion 412c formed near groove portion 412b and protruding toward the front side.

The groove 412a is a hole into which the tip end of the pivot pin 411c of the front base 411 is inserted, and is formed in a circular shape with an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the pivot pin 411c, and is recessed at a position facing the pivot pin 411c. Thus, the cam member 422 is held in such a way that it cannot fall off the base member 410 by combining the front base 411 and the rear base 412 after the pivot pin 411c is inserted into the shaft portion 422a. In addition, since the rear base 412 can hold the tip end of the pivot pin 411c, when a force is applied to the cam member 422 from its outer circumferential surface in the axial direction, the pivot pin 411c can be prevented from bending and breaking at the connection portion with the front base 411.

The groove 412b is a hole into which the tip end of the pivot pin 411d of the front base 411 is inserted, and is formed in a circular shape with an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the pivot pin 411d, and is recessed at a position facing the pivot pin 411d.
After the pivot pin 411d is inserted through the pivot pin 411a, the front base 411 and the rear base 412 are combined, so that the front base 411 and the rear base 412 are held in place so as not to fall off the base member 410.
However, since the tip of the pivot pin 411d can be held, when a force acts on the first link member 431 in the direction of the through hole 431a, the pivot pin 411d can be prevented from bending and breaking at the connection portion with the front base 411.

The locking portion 412c is a plate that locks one end of the urging spring SP1, which will be described later.
The spring SP1 is formed on the outer side of the spring P1. This allows one end of the spring SP1 to be locked. The spring SP1 will be described in detail later.

The transmission member 420 is formed mainly by a transmission gear 421 that is connected to the shaft of the drive motor KM1 that is attached to the front side of the front base 411, and a cam member 422 that is meshed with the transmission gear 421 and rotates in association with the driving of the transmission gear 421.

The transmission gear 421 is a gear having a meshing surface over the entire outer circumferential surface, and is fitted onto the shaft of the drive motor KM1. Therefore, when power is applied to the drive motor KM1 to rotate the shaft, the transmission gear 421 is also rotated in the same manner.

The cam member 422 is formed in a shape in which the outer shape in a front view is formed by combining one end of two semicircles of different sizes, and is formed from a plate-like body having a predetermined thickness in the front-rear direction.
22b is engraved, and a shaft portion 422a is formed through the center of the semicircle.
The large semicircular portion of the outer shape of the second support 422 is formed with a sliding groove 422c recessed on the rear side thereof facing a link member 430 which will be described later.

As described above, the shaft portion 422a is a hole through which the pivot pin 411c is inserted.
The shaft portion 422a is rotatably supported by the shaft support pin 411c, so that the cam member 422 is supported by the shaft support pin 411c.
The shaft is supported so as to be rotatable about the axis.

The cam member 422 is rotated by the base member 410 with the tooth surface 422b meshing with the transmission gear 421.
Therefore, when the transmission gear 421 is rotated, the cam member 422 can rotate about the axis of the shaft portion 422a.

The sliding groove 422c is recessed along the outer periphery of the semicircular portion having a large radius of the cam member 422. Therefore, the distance from the shaft portion 422a increases from one end side to the other end side. The sliding groove 422c also includes a step portion 422c1 extending from the sliding protrusion 431d of the first link member 431 in the direction of the through hole 431a when the lower displacement member 440 is in a retracted state described below, a step portion 422c3 extending from the sliding protrusion 431d in the direction of the through hole 431a when the lower displacement member 440 is in a second overhanging state described below, and a step portion 422c2 extending from the sliding protrusion 431d in the direction of the through hole 431a when the lower displacement member 440 is in a first overhanging state that is an intermediate state between the retracted state and the second overhanging state.

The link member 430 is formed of two link members, a first link member 431 and a second link member 432. The link member 430 is formed by rotatably connecting the respective ends of the first link member 431 and the second link member 432.

The first link member 431 is bent in a generally dogleg shape in front view and is formed in a plate shape having a predetermined thickness in the front-rear direction. The first link member 431 is a link that is displaced in accordance with the displacement of the cam member 422, and has a through hole 431a penetrating in the front-rear direction on one end side, a cylindrical connecting protrusion 431c protruding toward the rear side on the other end side, a plate-like protrusion 431b protruding at a position opposite the curved wall portion 411e described above, and a cylindrical sliding protrusion 431c protruding toward the front side of the bent portion.
31d.

The through hole 431a is a through hole into which the pivot pin 411d is inserted as described above.
The link member 431 is rotatably held relative to the base member 410 by combining the front base 411 and the rear base 412 with the pivot pin 411d inserted into the through hole 431a.

The plate-like projection 431b is a projection that prevents the first link member 431 from shifting in the front-rear direction and prevents the first link member 431 from colliding with the cam member 422 disposed in front of it, and is formed in a plate-like body that protrudes in a curved shape with the through-hole 431a as its axis, and the protruding length is set to be greater than the front-rear thickness of the cam member 422. This makes it possible to prevent the rear surface of the cam member 422 and the front surface of the first link member 431 from colliding with each other.

The protruding dimension of the plate-like protrusion 9431b is set to be larger than the thickness (dimension in the direction of the arrow F-B) of the cam member 422. Furthermore, a slight gap (distance X14 (see FIG. 55(a)) is provided between the protruding tip surface of the plate-like protrusion 431b and the opposing base member 410 (curved wall portion 411e).
) are placed between them.

The cam member 422 is disposed in a displaceable state in the area between the front surface of the first link member 9431 excluding the plate-like protrusion 431b and the protruding surface (rear surface) of the curved wall portion 411e. The size of the two gaps, the gap between the cam member 422 and the first link member 431 and the gap between the cam member 422 and the base member 410, is the above-mentioned distance X1.
It is set to be greater than 4.

As a result, the first link member 9
When the first link member 9431 is bent, the protruding tip surface of the plate-like protrusion 431b can be brought into contact with the opposing base member 410 (the curved wall portion 411e). Therefore, the cam member 422 is disposed between the front surface of the first link member 9431 excluding the plate-like protrusion 9431b and the protruding surface (back surface) of the curved wall portion 411e.
This can prevent the displacement from being restricted by being pinched.

The connecting protrusion 431c is a shaft portion that is connected to a second link member 432 described later. The connecting protrusion 431c is inserted into a through hole 432a of the second link member 432, and the outer diameter of the head portion is set to be equal to or larger than the through hole 432a from the rear side.
A screw or the like larger than the screw 32a is fastened to the first link member 431. As a result, the first link member 431 and the second link member 432 are rotatably connected to each other.

A wall portion 431f protruding toward the rear side is formed at the edge of the through hole 431a.
Reference character f denotes a wall surface for fitting and holding a biasing spring SP1 (described later) onto the outer circumferential surface thereof.

The link side engaging portion 431e is a protrusion that engages the other end side of the biasing spring SP1 fitted into the wall portion 431f, and is formed so as to protrude in a hook shape from the rear side of one end side of the first link member 431.
Thus, one end of the biasing spring SP1 is engaged with the locking portion 412c of the back base 412, and the other end is engaged with the link side engaging portion 431e of the first link member 431. Therefore, the biasing force of the biasing spring SP1 can be applied in a direction that rotates the other end of the first link member 431 upward relative to the base member 410. As a result, when the lower displacement member 440 is rotationally displaced, the biasing force of the biasing spring SP1 acts, so that the drive motor K
The energy consumption of M1 can be reduced.

The sliding protrusion 431d is formed at a position spaced from the through hole 431a by approximately the same distance as the spaced distance between the through hole 431a and the shaft portion 422a of the cam member 422. The tip portion of the sliding protrusion 431d is inserted into the inside of the sliding groove 422c. That is, the sliding protrusion 431d is formed so that its outer diameter is smaller than the width dimension between the opposing sliding grooves 422c.

The sliding protrusion 431d is disposed inside the sliding groove 422c, and is displaced by sliding inside the sliding groove 422c in accordance with the rotational displacement of the cam member 422. That is, the first link member 431 is rotationally displaced about the axis of the through hole 431a by the displacement of the cam member 422. The displacement of the first link member 431 will be described in detail later.

In addition, since the sliding protrusion 431d and the plate-like protrusion 431b are formed in close proximity to each other, the plate-like protrusion 431b suppresses the forward displacement of the first link member 431. This prevents the sliding protrusion 431d from pushing the cam member 422 forward. As a result, it is no longer necessary to deepen the recess depth of the sliding groove 422c recessed in the cam member 422, and the cam member 422 can be prevented from being pushed forward.
This ensures the rigidity of the frame 2 without increasing its thickness in the front-rear direction.

The second link member 432 is formed in a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and in a plate shape having a predetermined thickness in the front-rear direction. The second link member 432 is mainly formed with a through hole 432a formed to penetrate in the front-rear direction on one end side, and a through hole 432b formed to penetrate in the front-rear direction on the other end side.

As described above, the through hole 432a is a hole for coupling to the first link member 431, and the coupling protrusion 431c is inserted into the through hole 432a. As a result, the second link member 432 is rotatably coupled to the first link member 431.

The through hole 432b is connected to a lower displacement member 440, which will be described later, and can transmit the displacement of the link member 430 to the lower displacement member 440.
2a is inserted into the through hole 432b, and its inner diameter is formed to be larger than the outer diameter of the protrusion 482a. Therefore, by inserting the protrusion 482a into the through hole 432b and fastening a screw or the like having a head larger than the inner diameter of the through hole 432b to the tip of the protrusion 482a, the lower displacement member 440 is rotatably held relative to the second link member 432. Therefore, when the cam member 422 is rotationally displaced, the drive of the lower displacement member 440 is transmitted via the link member 430.

Next, the displacement operation of the lower displacement member 440 will be described with reference to Fig. 47 to Fig. 52. Fig. 47 is a front view of the lower displacement unit 400 in the retracted state, Fig. 48 is a front view of the lower displacement unit 400 in the first extended state, and Fig. 49 is a front view of the lower displacement unit 400 in the second extended state. Fig. 50 is a front view of the lower displacement unit 400 in the retracted state.
50, FIG. 51 is a rear view of the lower displacement unit 400 in the first extended state, and FIG. 52 is a rear view of the lower displacement unit 400 in the second extended state.
50 to 52, the rear base 412 is shown in a transparent state. Also, in Figures 50 to 52, a plate-like projection 431b and a part of the curved wall portion 411e of the first link member 431 are shown by dashed lines.

The retracted state is when the sliding protrusion 431d arranged on the inside of the sliding groove 422c is in the stepped portion 4
The second protruding state is a state in which the sliding protrusion 431d is disposed between the opposing step portions 442c3 and the lower displacement member 440 is disposed below.
The first protruding state is a state in which the sliding protrusion 431d is disposed between the opposing step portions 442c2, and the lower displacement member 440 is disposed in an intermediate state between the retracted state and the second protruding state.

As shown in FIGS. 47 and 50, in the retracted state, the lower displacement unit 400 is in the first position when the cam member 422 is rotated by the transmission gear 421 and moves to the other end side (the step portion 422
In this case, the sliding protrusion 431d of the first link member 431 is guided along the inner wall of the sliding groove 422c to be positioned at the step portion 422c1. Thus, the first link member 431 is in a state in which the other end side (the connecting protrusion 431c side) is positioned at the right side of the through hole 431a on the one end side in a rear view (right side in FIG. 50) (a state in which the other end side is rotated about the through hole 431a and positioned at the lower end of the rotatable range (first driven position)).

The second link member 432 is connected to the first link member 431.
50 ). As a result, the lower displacement member 440 connected to the second link member 432 is positioned on the right side in rear view (the right side in FIG. 50 ).
The protrusions 472 and 473 connected to the slide grooves 411a and 411b are located on the right side of the slide grooves 411a and 411b when viewed from the rear (FIG. 5).
As described above, the distance between the opposing sliding grooves 411a and 411b in the vertical direction is set to be larger on the right side than on the left side when viewed from the rear.
0 is disposed with its longitudinal direction substantially parallel to the left-right direction. That is, it is disposed in front of the front base 411.

The transition from the retracted state shown in FIGS. 47 and 50 to the first extended state shown in FIGS. 46 and 51 is achieved by the displacement of the cam member 422.

In the first extended state, the transmission gear 421 is rotated by the driving force of the drive motor KM1, and the cam member 422 is rotated approximately 90 degrees from the position of the retracted state to the third position. As a result, the other end side (the step portion 422c3 side) of the cam member 422 is positioned above the shaft portion 422a. This rotational displacement causes the first link member 43 guided by the inner wall of the sliding groove 422c to move in a direction perpendicular to the axis of the shaft 422a.
The first sliding protrusion 431d is displaced in accordance with the displacement of the sliding groove 422c and is disposed at the third driven position.
The nozzle is guided between the opposing inner walls of the two nozzles.

Therefore, the first link member 431 is rotated approximately 30 degrees around the through hole 431a due to the displacement of the sliding protrusion 431d, and the other end side (the connecting protrusion 431c side) is displaced from the retracted position to the upper left when viewed from behind (upper left in Figure 51).

Due to the rotational displacement of the first link member 431, the second link member 432 connected to the first link member 431 is displaced, and the lower displacement member 440 connected to the second link member 432 is displaced. In this case, the lower displacement member 440 is displaced along the shape of the sliding grooves 411a, 411b because the protrusions 472, 473 are slidably connected to the sliding grooves 411a, 411b of the front base 411. As described above, the distance between the opposing sliding grooves 411a, 411b in the vertical direction narrows from the right side to the left side in rear view, so the lower displacement member 440 is slidably displaced to the right side in front view (the right side in FIG. 48 ) while the tip side is rotationally displaced upward.

In addition, in the first extended state, the recovery port 411f is positioned on the lower side of the tip side in the direction of gravity. That is, when the lower displacement member 440 transitions from the retracted state to the first extended state, the tip side of the lower displacement member 440 can be displaced without protruding to the right side of the base member 410 in a front view by sliding and rotating the lower displacement member 440. As a result, it is easy to form a displacement area different from the variable areas of other displacement parts. Collisions with other displacement parts can be suppressed.

In addition, since the recovery port 411f is positioned below one end side of the lower displacement member 440 (the side opposite the protrusions 472, 473 connected to the front base 411), when the ball receiving portion 467 of the lower displacement member 440 described later performs a firing operation and the ball falls directly downward from the exit opening 471, the ball can be sent to the recovery port 411f.

The transition from the first extended state shown in FIGS. 48 and 51 to the second extended state shown in FIGS. 49 and 52 is achieved by further displacing the cam member 422 from the first extended state.

In the second extension state, the transmission gear 42 is driven by the driving force of the drive motor KM1 from the first extension state.
1 is rotated, and the cam member 422 is disposed at a second position rotated approximately 90 degrees from the position of the first extended state (third position). Thus, the other end side (step portion 422c3 side) of the cam member 422 is disposed at a state where it is located above the shaft portion 422a. Also, due to this rotational displacement, the sliding protrusion 431d of the first link member 431 guided by the inner wall of the sliding groove 422c is displaced in accordance with the displacement of the sliding groove 422c, and disposed at a second driven position. Note that in the second extended state, the sliding protrusion 431d
is guided between the opposing inner walls of the step portion 422c1 of the slide groove 422c.

Therefore, the first link member 431 is rotated approximately 30 degrees around the through hole 431a due to the displacement of the sliding protrusion 431d, and the other end side (the connecting protrusion 431c side) is displaced from the position of the first protruding state to approximately the upper left when viewed from behind (upper left in Figure 52).

Due to the rotational displacement of the first link member 431, the second link member 432 connected to the first link member 431 is displaced, and the lower displacement member 440 connected to the second link member 432 is displaced. In this case, the lower displacement member 440 is displaced along the shape of the sliding grooves 411a, 411b because the protrusions 472, 473 are slidably connected to the sliding grooves 411a, 411b of the front base 411. As described above, the distance between the opposing sliding grooves 411a, 411b in the vertical direction narrows from the right side to the left side in rear view, so the lower displacement member 440 is slidably displaced to the right side in front view (the right side in FIG. 49 ) while the tip side is rotationally displaced upward.

In the second extended state, similarly to the first extended state, the recovery port 41 is located on the lower side of the tip side in the direction of gravity.
1f is positioned. That is, when the lower displacement member 440 transitions from the retracted state to the second extended state, the tip side of the lower displacement member 440 can be displaced without protruding to the right side of the base member 410 in a front view by sliding and rotating the lower displacement member 440. As a result, it is easy to form a displacement area different from the variable areas of other displacement parts, and collision with other displacement parts can be suppressed.

Next, the positional relationship between the first link member 431 and the cam member 422 in each state will be described with reference to Figure 53. Figure 53(a) shows the positional relationship between the first link member 431 and the cam member 422 in the retracted state, Figure 53(b) shows the positional relationship between the first link member 431 and the cam member 422 in the first extended state, and Figure 53(c) shows the positional relationship between the first link member 431 and the cam member 422 in the second extended state.
53(a) to 53(c) are views of the first cam member 422.
The portion overlapping with the link member 431 is shown by a chain line.

As shown in FIG. 53A, in the retracted state, the sliding protrusion 431d of the first link member 431
are disposed between the opposing inner walls of the step portion 422c1 of the sliding groove 422c. As described above, the sliding protrusion 431d is formed at a position spaced apart from the through hole 431a by substantially the same distance as the distance between the through hole 431a and the shaft portion 422a of the cam member 422. Therefore, when a force that rotates around the axis of the through hole 431a acts on the first link member 431 in the retracted state,
The force can be applied to the shaft portion 422a of the cam member 422 from the sliding protrusion 431d. Therefore, the rotational force of the first link member 431 can be prevented from rotating the cam member 422. As a result, in the retracted state, the first link member 431 can be rotated via the second link member 432.
Therefore, the lower displacement member 440 connected to the lower displacement member 440 can be prevented from being displaced.

As shown in FIG. 53B, in the first extended state, the sliding protrusion 43 of the first link member 431
1d, and is disposed between the opposing inner walls of the step portion 422c2 of the sliding groove 422c. Thus, similarly to the retracted state, when a force acting to rotate about the through hole 431a acts on the first link member 431 positioned in the first protruding state, the force is transmitted from the sliding protrusion 431d to the shaft portion 422a of the cam member 422.
Therefore, the rotational force of the first link member 431 can be applied to the cam member 422.
As a result, in the first extended state, the second link member 432
This can prevent the lower displacement member 440 connected to the first link member 431 via the lower link member 440 from being displaced.

Here, in order to maintain the stopped state at the first extension position, which is an intermediate position of the displacement of the lower displacement member 440, it is necessary to maintain the drive motor KM1 in a stopped state. Therefore, there is a problem in that energy consumption increases when the lower displacement member 440 is stopped at the first extension position (intermediate position of the displacement).

In contrast, in this embodiment, in the first extended state, the sliding protrusion 4 of the first link member 431
Since the lower displacement member 440 is disposed between the opposing inner walls of the step portion 422c2 of the sliding groove 422c, as described above, it is possible to suppress the lower displacement member 440 from being displaced. Therefore, even if the power of the drive motor KM1 is stopped when the lower displacement member 440 is stopped in the middle of its displacement, it is possible to suppress the lower displacement member 440 from being displaced. As a result, it is possible to suppress an increase in the energy consumption of the drive motor KM1 when the lower displacement member 440 is stopped in the middle of its displacement.

As shown in FIG. 53C, in the second extended state, the sliding protrusion 43 of the first link member 431
1d, and the inner walls of the step portion 422c2 of the slide groove 422c are opposed to each other. Therefore, the through hole 4
When a force acting to rotate about the axis of 31a acts, the force can be applied from the sliding protrusion 431d to the shaft portion 422a of the cam member 422. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the cam member 422 from rotating due to the rotational force of the first link member 431. As a result, in the second extended state, it is possible to prevent the lower displacement member 440 connected to the first link member 431 via the second link member 432 from being displaced.

In addition, each of the step portions 422c1, 422c2, and 422c3 is connected to the slide protrusion 431d and the through hole 43
1a, the width dimension of the sliding groove 422c in the direction in which the sliding protrusion 431d of the first link member 431 is displaced can be reduced. Therefore, the gap between the sliding groove 422c and the sliding protrusion 431d, through which the first link member 431 can be rotated and displaced around the axis of the through hole 431a, can be reduced in the retracted position, the first protruding position, and the second protruding position. Therefore, the gap through which the first link member 431 can be rotated and displaced around the axis of the through hole 431a in each state can be reduced. As a result, the width by which the lower displacement member 440 in each state sways due to vibration or inertial force when the displacement stops can be reduced, making it easier for the player to visually recognize the stopped state.

Therefore, the transmission member 420 and the link member 430 (drive mechanism) that drive the lower displacement member 440 can restrict the lower displacement member 440 from being displaced in the direction of the reaction when the game ball is released from the ball receiving portion 467, and therefore the lower displacement member 440 can be prevented from being displaced relative to the base member 410 due to the reaction. As a result, rattling of the lower displacement member 440 can be suppressed.

Next, the relationship between the link member 430 and the cam member 422 in the front-rear direction will be described with reference to Figure 54. Figure 54(a) shows the lower displacement unit 4
54(a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the lower displacement unit 400 taken along the line LIVb-LIVb in FIG. 51. In addition, in FIG. 51 and FIG. 52, the rear base 412
54(a) and (b) show cross-sectional views of the lower displacement unit 400 in a non-transparent state.

As shown in FIG. 54A, the link member 43 of the lower displacement unit 400 in the retracted state
0 is disposed between the rear base 412 and the cam member 422.
That is, since the other end side of the first link member 431 is connected to the lower displacement member 440, which is formed by combining a plurality of fixtures, via the second link member 432, there is a risk of bending in the front-rear direction due to the load of the lower displacement member 440, but since the cam member 422 is disposed forward, it is possible to prevent the first link member 431 from bending forward. As a result, it is possible to prevent the first link member 431 from moving forward, so that the lower displacement member 440 can be prevented from bending forward.
This can prevent the 0 from swinging back and forth.

54(b), the link member 430 of the lower displacement unit 400 in the first extended state is disposed between the rear surface base 412 and the cam member 422, similarly to the case of the retracted state. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the lower displacement member 440 from swinging in the front-rear direction.

Furthermore, in the retracted state and the first extended state, the cam member 422 is disposed on the front side of the connecting portion between the first link member 431 and the second link member 432 of the link member 430. Therefore, if the link member 430 is formed from two members, the connecting portion needs to be rotatable, and the rigidity of the connecting portion is weaker than other portions by the gap, making it easier to bend. However, since the cam member 422 is disposed on the front side, bending of the connecting portion of the link member 430 can be suppressed. As a result, the lower displacement member 440 can be suppressed from swaying in the front-rear direction.

<Restricting the displacement of the displacement member by restricting the displacement of the driven member>
Next, the relationship between the cam member 422 and the curved wall portion 411e will be described with reference to Figures 55 and 56. Figure 55(a) shows the relationship between the lower displacement unit 422 and the curved wall portion 411e taken along the line LVa-LVa in Figure 50.
55(b) is a cross-sectional view of lower displacement unit 400 taken along line LVb-LVb in FIG. 51, and FIG. 55(c) is a cross-sectional view of lower displacement unit 400 taken along line LVc-LVc in FIG.

55(a), when the lower displacement unit 400 is in the retracted state (first position), the cam member 422 and the curved wall portion 411e are disposed at different positions in the front-rear direction (the direction of the arrows F-B). Therefore, when the lower displacement unit 400 is displaced from the retracted state (first position) to the first protruding state (third position), it is possible to suppress an increase in the resistance acting on the cam member 422. As a result, it is possible to stabilize the start of displacement of the lower displacement member 440.

As shown in FIG. 55( b ) and FIG. 55( c ), the lower displacement unit 400 is in the first extension state (
When the cam member 422 is in the third position, a part of the cam member 422 is disposed at a position separated by a predetermined gap from the front side (the side in the direction of the arrow F) of the curved wall portion 411e. As a result, when the cam member 422 is displaced in the front direction, the side surface in the axial direction of the cam member 422 is brought into contact with the curved wall portion 411e, thereby preventing the cam member 422 from being displaced in the front direction.

The surface of the cam member 422 on the front base 411 side (the side in the direction of the arrow F) is
The cam member 422 is formed on a flat surface parallel to the back surface of the curved wall portion 411e (see FIG. 45). This allows the flat surface of the cam member 422 to abut against the curved wall portion 411e when the cam member 422 is displaced toward the curved wall portion 411e. This prevents the cam member 422 from abutting partially against the curved wall portion 411e, thereby preventing the concentration of force in one area. As a result, the cam member 422 is prevented from being damaged.

Here, as described above, when the lower displacement member 440 is displaced from the retracted state (first position) to the first extended state (third position), the tip side (the side opposite the protrusion 473 connected to the front base 411 in the longitudinal direction) is rotationally displaced upward (in the direction of the arrow U). Therefore, the force component that tilts the lower displacement member 440 in the front-rear direction is increased by the amount that the longitudinal direction component of the lower displacement member 440 approaches the direction of gravity. Therefore, when the lower displacement member 440 is in the first extended state (third position), the force in the front-rear direction acting on the link member 430 supporting the lower displacement member 440 is increased compared to when the lower displacement member 440 is in the retracted state (first position). As a result, the cam member 422 connected to the link member 430 is easily displaced in the front-rear direction.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the lower displacement unit 400 moves from the retracted state (first position) to the first position.
When the cam member 422 is displaced beyond the extended state (third position), a part of the cam member 422 contacts the curved wall portion 41
Since the lower displacement member 440 is disposed on the front side of the lower projection 1e, it is possible to restrict the displacement of the cam member 422 to the front side. As a result, it is possible to suppress the lower displacement member 440 from swinging in the front-rear direction between the first projection state (third position) and the second projection state (second position), and it is possible to make the displacement of the lower displacement member 440 easily visible to the player.

As described above, the displacement of the link member 430 toward the rear side can be restricted by disposing the link member 430 between the rear base 412 and the cam member 422. That is, when the link member 430 swings toward the rear side, the link member 430 is brought into contact with the rear base 412 to restrict the displacement of the link member 430. As a result, the lower displacement member 440 can be prevented from swinging in the front-rear direction.

Further, the front base 411 includes a restricting means (curved wall portion 411e) for restricting the swinging of the link member 430 in a direction other than the driven direction, and the cam member 422 is displaced between the first position and the second position, and is capable of being displaced between a first displacement region in which the link member 430 is displaced from the first position to a third position which is an intermediate position between the first and second positions, and a second displacement region in which the link member 430 is displaced from the third position to the second position. The link member 430 is driven from the first driven position to the second driven position by the cam member 422 being displaced from the first position to the second position, and is capable of being displaced between a first driven region in which the link member 430 is displaced from the first driven position to a third driven position which is an intermediate position between the first driven position and the second driven position, and a second driven region in which the link member 430 is displaced from the third driven position to the second driven position, and a part of the second displacement region and the first driven region are set to the same region, and when the cam member 422 is displaced through the second displacement region, the restricting means (curved wall portion 4
Since the cam member 422 is restricted from swinging in directions other than the displacement direction by the curved wall portion 411e, the swinging of the link member 430 and the cam member 422 can be restricted by utilizing the same portion of the restricting means (curved wall portion 411e).

Therefore, since it is sufficient to form the restricting means (the curved wall portion 411e) at one location, the cam member 42
In comparison with the case where restricting means for restricting displacement are formed on both the link member 430 and the movable member 2, the shape of the restricting means can be simplified, and manufacturing costs can be reduced.

In addition, the link member 430 and the cam member 422 are regulated by a means (curved wall portion 411e).
Since the same part of the curved wall portion 411e can be used for the restriction, the curved wall portion 411e can be used for the restriction.
Since it is not necessary to form the link member 430, the cam member 422, and the restricting portion, respectively, the restricting means (curved wall portion 411e) can be made smaller accordingly.

Furthermore, when the lower displacement unit 400 is displaced from the retracted state to the second protruding state, the protrusions 472, 473 (collars C (see FIG. 14) disposed on the protrusions 472, 473) of the lower displacement member 440 inserted into the sliding grooves 411a, 411b formed in the front base 411 are moved to the front side (arrow F direction side) of the other end side (step portion 422c3 side) of the cam member 422 in accordance with the displacement of the cam member 422 (see FIGS. 50 to 52). As a result, when the other end side (step portion 422c3 side) of the cam member 422 is pushed out to the rear side by the protrusions 472, 473 (collars C disposed on the protrusions 472, 473), the cam member 422 may be rotated and displaced in the front-rear direction around the shaft portion 422a and may come into contact with the link member 430.

In contrast, in this embodiment, as described above, the displacement of the cam member 422 toward the front side can be restricted by abutting against the curved wall portion 411e.
As a result, the link member 430 and the cam member 422 can be prevented from coming into contact with each other.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the cam member 422 is displaced beyond the first protruding state (third position), the displacement is restricted by the curved wall portion 411e, so that it is possible to prevent the cam member 422 from coming into contact with the curved wall portion 411e during the initial operation, thereby preventing an increase in frictional resistance. As a result, it is possible to stabilize the initial operation of the cam member 422.

Next, with reference to Figure 56, the cam member 422 and the first link member 431 when the lower displacement unit 400 is in the second displacement state will be described.
56(b) is a front view of the first link member 431 and the cam member 422 of the lower displacement unit 400 in the second extended state (second position). In FIG. 56(b), the outer shape of the base member 410 is shown by a dashed line.

56, when the lower displacement unit 400 is in the second displacement state, an end of the cam member 422 abuts against the plate-shaped protrusion 431b of the first link member 431. This makes it possible to restrict the rotational displacement of the cam member 422 in the direction in which the lower displacement unit 400 is displaced from the retracted state (first position) to the second displacement state. As a result, the operation of stopping the rotational displacement of the cam member 422 can be distributed to the meshing portion of the transmission gear 421 and the tooth surface 422b and the abutting portion of the cam member 422 and the first link member 431, and the operation of stopping the rotational displacement of the cam member 422 can be distributed to the meshing portion of the transmission gear 421 and the tooth surface 422b and the abutting portion of the cam member 422 and the first link member 431.
This can prevent the tooth surface of 2b from being damaged.

When the lower displacement unit 400 is in the second displacement state, the first link member 431
The abutment surface between the plate-like projection 431b and the cam member 422 is set in a direction perpendicular to an imaginary line KS1 passing through the shaft portion 422a of the cam member 422 and the abutment portion thereof. This makes it possible to prevent a force acting in a direction rotating the first link member 431 around the axis of the shaft portion 422a of the cam member 422 when the force acts around the axis of the first link member 431 to displace the first link member 431 from the second displacement state to the retracted state (first position). As a result, it is possible to prevent the cam member 422 from rotating due to the force acting on the first link member 431.

Here, as described above, the tip side (the side opposite the projection 473 connected to the front base 411 in the longitudinal direction) of the lower displacement member 440 is rotated and displaced upward (in the direction of the arrow U).
Since the rotational force acting around the axis of the through hole 431a of the link member 431 is at its maximum, the transmission of force from the first link member 431 to the cam member 422 is suppressed, making it easier to maintain the lower displacement member 440 in the second displacement state position.

Furthermore, when the cam member 422 is disposed in the second displacement state position, the lower displacement member 440
In this case, a force PW1 (see FIG. 56B) in a direction in which the end of the cam member 422 is pushed out by the plate-shaped protrusion 431b and the cam member 422 rotates around the axis of the shaft portion 422a is applied to the first link member 431 by the load of the plate-shaped protrusion 431b.
The inner wall of the sliding groove 422c of the cam member 422 is pushed out by the sliding protrusion 431d, and the cam member 422 is moved toward the shaft portion 4
As a result, the cam member 422 can be prevented from rotating due to the force applied from the first link member 431.

Next, the configuration of the lower displacement member 440 will be described in detail with reference to Figures 57 to 60. Figure 57(a) is a front view of the lower displacement member 440, and Figure 57(b) is a rear view of the lower displacement member 440. Figure 58 is an exploded perspective front view of the lower displacement member 440, and Figure 59 is an exploded perspective rear view of the lower displacement member 440. Figures 60(a) and (b) show the configuration of the lower displacement member 440.
40 is a front view.

In addition, Figure 60 (a) illustrates a state in which the decorative member 450 of the lower displacement member 440 is viewed transparently, and Figure 60 (b) illustrates a state in which the decorative member 450 of the lower displacement member 440 and the front case 481 are viewed transparently.

As shown in Figures 57 to 60, the lower displacement member 440 is formed mainly by including a base member 470 connected to the front base 411, a case member 480 covering the front and rear of the base member 470, a transmission mechanism 460 displaceably arranged between the case member 480 and the base member 470, and a decorative member 450 formed in a manner covering the front and rear of the case member 480.

The base member 470 is a plate member formed in a horizontally elongated rectangle when viewed from the front, and is mainly formed with protrusions 472, 473 protruding toward the back side of one end, a standing wall 471a standing toward the front side from the edge of the other end, a protruding wall 477 protruding in an upside-down U-shape toward the front side from the upper end of the center in the left-right direction (left-right direction in Figure 57), a rack gear 476 engraved on the upper end of the base member 470 from the end of the protruding wall 477 to one end side, shaft portions 474, 475 protruding toward the front side, a rectangular wiring engagement portion 478 attached to the back side of one end of the base member 470, and an opening 479 recessed in the vertical center of the base member 470 extending from one end side to the other end side.

As described above, the protrusions 472 and 473 are aligned with the sliding grooves 411a and 411b of the front base 411.
This is a connecting portion that is inserted into the lower displacement member 440 and connects the lower displacement member 440 and the front base 411. Therefore, it is formed into a cylindrical shape with an outer diameter smaller than the dimension between the opposing inner walls of the sliding grooves 411a, 411b.

The erected wall 471a is a wall portion for forming a gap between the opposing front case 481 and the base member 470 when the front case 481 described later is attached to the base member 470.
The erection dimension is set to be larger than the diameter of the sphere.

The shaft portions 474 and 475 are projections that are inserted onto shafts of transmission gears 462 and 463 of a transmission mechanism 460 (to be described later) and that rotatably hold the transmission gears 462 and 463.
The bearing is formed in a cylindrical shape with an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the axial hole.

The rack gear 476 has a tooth surface that meshes with a transmission gear 465 (described later). As a result, when a movable rack 464 (described later) slides relative to the base member 470,
The transmission gear 465 can be rotated.

When a ball is received in front of the base member 470 through the opening 451 a of the decorative member 450 from the ball-throwing unit 600 described later, the protruding wall 477 is disposed in such a manner that the ball is deflected by the lower displacement member 440
The wall surface is for preventing the ball from falling outside, and the space between the opposing wall portions formed in a roughly U-shape is larger than the diameter of the ball.

The wiring locking portion 478 is a member for locking a flexible wiring (not shown) to a control board arranged on the back side of the base member 470, and is attached to the back side of the base member 470 with one end of the flexible wiring interposed between the base member 470. This makes it possible to prevent the flexible wiring from becoming entangled even if the lower displacement member 440 is arranged to be displaceable relative to the base member 410.

The wiring locking portion 478 is provided with a cylindrical protrusion 478a on the rear side. The protrusion distance of the protrusion 478a is set to a distance that protrudes rearward beyond the link member 430 connected to the rear side, and is set to a distance that allows the protrusion 478a to abut against the front surface of the rear base 412. This makes it possible to prevent the lower displacement member 440 from swinging rearward, and also to prevent the link member 430 from swinging rearward.
This can prevent the rear surface base 412 from colliding with the rear surface base 412.

The opening 469 is an opening that defines the sliding displacement direction of the movable rack 464 disposed on the front side, and a guide plate 464d of the movable rack 464, which will be described later, is inserted inside.

The transmission mechanism 460 is a member disposed in front of the base member 470, and includes a transmission gear 461.
, 462, 463, a drive motor KM2 whose shaft portion is connected to the transmission gear 461, a movable rack 464 having a tooth surface that meshes with the transmission gear 463 and disposed slidably in front of the base member 470, a transmission gear 465 that is rotatably disposed on the movable rack 464 and meshed with the rack gear 476, and a rack 466 having a tooth surface that meshes with the transmission gear 465 and disposed slidably in front of the movable rack 464,
The rack 466 is formed mainly with a ball receiving portion 467 rotatably disposed on one end side of the rack 466 .

The transmission gear 461 is a gear in which the shaft portion of the drive motor KM2 is fitted into a shaft hole, and is disposed on the base member 470 by attaching the drive motor KM2 to the base member 470 while being connected to the drive motor KM2.

As described above, the transmission gears 462 and 463 are fitted to the shaft holes of the shaft portions 474 and 475 of the base member 470.
The transmission gears 461 to 465 are inserted and rotatably held by the base member.
Reference numeral 3 denotes a gear train in which the transmission gears 461 and 463 are meshed with each other, and when the transmission gear 461 is rotated by the drive motor KM2, the transmission gear 463 at the end is rotated.

The movable rack 464 is formed in a horizontally elongated rectangular plate shape when viewed from the front, and includes a rack gear 464a engraved on the lower end surface, a shaft portion 464b protruding cylindrically from the front side, a contact plate 464c protruding upward from one end side of the upper end surface, a guide plate 464d protruding from one end to the other end at approximately the center in the vertical direction, and a rack guide portion 464e protruding on the front side opposite the guide plate 464d.
The other end of the protruding portion 464 is formed with a collision portion 464f.

The rack gear 464a has a tooth surface that meshes with the transmission gear 463.
By arranging the rack gear 464a and the transmission gear 463 in mesh with each other on the shaft 70, the movable rack 464 can be displaced by driving the drive motor KM2.

The shaft portion 464b is a shaft portion on which the transmission gear 465 is rotatably held.
The shaft hole 5 is formed in a cylindrical shape with an outer diameter smaller than that of the shaft hole 5.

The contact plate 464c is a contact portion that contacts a sorting member 540 of a sorting unit 500 (described later) to displace the sorting member 540. That is, the sorting member 540 can be displaced by the displacement of the movable rack 464. The manner in which the contact plate 464c and the sorting member 540 contact each other will be described later.

As described above, the guide plate 464d is a plate-like body that is inserted into the opening 479 of the base member 470, and can regulate the displacement direction of the movable rack 464 that is displaced by the drive of the drive motor KM2.
64 can be displaced along the extension direction of the opening 479.
Since the opening 479 extends in the left-right direction, the movable rack 464 can be slidably displaced in the left-right direction relative to the base member 470 .

The rack guide portion 464e is a protruding wall for regulating the displacement direction of a rack 466, which will be described later, and is provided so as to protrude from one end to the other end in the left-right direction.

The collision portion 464f abuts against a protrusion 492b of a displacement member 492, which will be described later.
The collision portion 464f is a wall portion that displaces the protrusion 464 of the displacement member 492 and is formed to protrude from the lower end of the movable rack 464. The collision portion 464f is formed in a state in which the other end side is inclined.
92b can be displaced by sliding it along the inclined surface.

The rack 466 is formed of a rod-shaped body that is rectangular when viewed from the front, and includes a rack gear 466a engraved on the upper end surface, a shaft portion 466b that protrudes cylindrically from the end on the other end side toward the rear side, two sliding plates 466c that protrude toward the front side, and a recessed portion 466a recessed from one end to the other end on the rear side.
d.

The rack gear 466 a is meshed with a transmission gear 465 attached to the movable rack 464 .
As a result, when the rack 466 is disposed in front of the movable rack 464, the movable rack 464 slides and displaces, causing the transmission gear 465 to rotate in accordance with the sliding displacement, and a driving force is transmitted to the rack 466. Therefore, the rack 466 can be displaced relative to the movable rack 464.

The shaft portion 466b is a protrusion to be inserted into a shaft hole 467b of the ball receiving portion 467, which will be described later, and is formed in a cylindrical shape with an outer diameter larger than the inner diameter of the shaft hole 467b. This allows the ball receiving portion 467 to be rotatably held.

The sliding plate 466c is a protrusion that is inserted into an opening 481a of a front case 481, which will be described later, and is formed of a plate-like body having a predetermined thickness.
When a driving force is transmitted from the movable rack 464 to the movable rack 464, the rack 466 is displaced relative to the movable rack 464.
The displacement direction of the rack 466 can be determined in the direction in which the opening 481a extends.

When the rack 466 is disposed in front of the movable rack 464, the recessed portion 466d is in a state in which the rack guide portion 464e is disposed on the inside.
When a driving force is transmitted from 65 and the rack 466 is displaced relative to the movable rack 464, the displacement direction of the rack 466 can be regulated to the extending direction of the rack guide portion 464e.

Here, in order to regulate the displacement direction of the rack 466, if the recessed portion 466d and the rack guide portion 464e are formed, the displacement direction of the rack 466 can be regulated to the extending direction of the rack guide portion 464e. However, since the lower displacement member 440 is displaced in a rotational manner while sliding in the left and right directions, depending on the displacement state of the lower displacement member 440, the meshing state of the transmission gear 465 and the rack 466 changes due to its own weight, and the transmission gear 465 may be displaced from the rack 466 to the rack 466.
There was a risk that the driving force would not be transmitted properly to 6.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the location that determines the displacement direction of the rack 466 is the sliding plate 46
6c, the opening 481a, the recessed portion 466d, and the rack guide portion 464e are formed in two places. Therefore, when the displacement state of the lower displacement member 440 is changed, the transmission gear 465 and the rack 466
As a result, it is possible to prevent the transmission of the drive force from the transmission gear 465 to the rack 466 from being hindered.

In addition, the sliding plate 466c is formed to protrude from two points on the left and right sides of the rack 466 (left and right sides in Figure 57 (a)), and the sliding plate 466c on the other end side (opposite the shaft portion 466b) is positioned below the transmission gear 465 (lower side in Figure 57) at the displacement end position of the rack (the position where the rack 466 is most protruded relative to the movable rack 464).

At the displacement end position, as described below, the ball receiving portion 467 disposed on the shaft portion 466b of the rack 466 performs a launching motion (rotational displacement), so that the inertial force caused by the displacement of the ball receiving portion 467 disposed on one end side of the rack 466 tends to displace the other end side of the rack. Therefore, a load is easily applied to the meshing surfaces of the transmission gear 465 and the rack 466, and the transmission gear 465 and the rack 466
There was a risk of it being damaged.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the sliding plate 466c on the other end side (opposite side to the shaft portion 466b) is
Since the rack is disposed below the transmission gear 465 (lower side in FIG. 57) at the end of its displacement (the position where the rack 466 is most protruded relative to the movable rack 464), it is possible to prevent the rack 466 from being displaced at the position where it meshes with the transmission gear 465 and the rack 466 when the ball receiving portion 467 performs a launching motion (rotational motion). As a result, it is possible to prevent the transmission gear 465 and the rack 466 from being damaged.

The ball receiving portion 467 is a portion that holds a game ball, and is formed in a roughly U-shape when viewed from the front, and is formed so that a ball can be received in the inside portion of the U. That is, the inside of the U-shape of the ball receiving portion 467 is formed to be slightly larger than the outer shape of a ball. This allows one ball to be received in the inside portion of the ball receiving portion 467. The ball receiving portion 467 also has an axis hole 467b that penetrates in the front-rear direction at the bottom end position of the U-shape,
It is mainly formed with a leg portion 467a protruding downward from the lower outer circumferential surface.

As described above, the shaft hole 467b is a shaft hole for holding the ball receiving portion 467 in a rotatable state on the rack 466, and is formed with an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the shaft portion 466b of the rack 466. Therefore, the ball receiving portion 467 can be rotatably held by inserting the shaft portion 466b of the rack 466 into the shaft hole 467b. After the shaft portion 466b is inserted into the shaft hole 467b, the biasing spring SP2 is disposed around the axis of the shaft portion 466b, and a screw or the like having a head larger than the inner diameter of the shaft hole 467b is fastened to the shaft portion 466b. As a result, the ball receiving portion 467 is disposed on the rack 466 in a state in which it is biased clockwise when viewed from the front. The form of the ball receiving portion 467 will be described in detail later.

Leg 467a is a protrusion that biases ball receiving portion 467 to rotate by biasing spring SP2, and is set in a position where its tip abuts against bottom wall portion 481b of front case 481, which will be described later, with the open portion of the U-shape of ball receiving portion 467 facing upward. This makes it possible to restrict ball receiving portion 467 from rotating.

The case member 480 is a member that covers the front and rear of the base member 470.
4. The main components of the portable computer 10 include a front case 481 disposed on the front side of the portable computer 10 and a rear case 482 disposed on the rear side of the portable computer 10.

The front case 481 is formed in the shape of a rectangular plate that is long from the front, and is mainly formed with an opening 481a that extends in the left-right direction at approximately the middle position in the direction of gravity, a bottom wall portion 481b that protrudes from the lower end surface on the rear side, and an axial hole 481c that penetrates in the front-to-rear direction at the lower edge.

The opening 481a is formed to penetrate in the front-rear direction, and as described above,
When the front case 481 is disposed on the rack 466, the sliding plate 466c of the rack is inserted therein.

The bottom wall portion 481b is formed to protrude toward the rear side from the lower end portion of the front case 481 and extends in the left-right direction. When the front case 481 is disposed on the base member 470, the leg portion 467a of the ball receiving portion 467 abuts against the upper surface of the bottom wall portion 481b.

The rear case 482 is a plate member for arranging the control board 491 on the rear side of the base member 470, and is formed into a horizontally elongated rectangle whose outer shape in a front view is smaller than the outer shape of the base member 470. In addition, the rear case 482 is provided with a protrusion 482a that protrudes toward the rear side.

As described above, the protrusion 482a is a connecting portion that is connected to the through hole 432b of the second link member 432, and is formed in a cylindrical shape with an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the through hole 432b. Therefore, after the protrusion 482a is inserted into the through hole 432b, the tip of the protrusion 482a is inserted into the through hole 432b.
By fastening a screw or the like having a head larger than the inner diameter of the rear case 482, the rear case 482 and the second link member 432 can be rotatably connected to each other.

The decorative member 450 is formed into an external shape imitating a pattern or a character, and a picture of the pattern or character is drawn on the surface. The decorative member 450 is made up of a front side decorative part 451 disposed on the front side of the front case 481 and a rear side decorative part 452 disposed on the rear side of the rear case 482.
In this embodiment, the decorative member 450 has a shark pattern (character) drawn on it.

The front decorative part 451 is formed with an outer diameter larger than the outer shape of the front case 481 when viewed from the front, and is attached to the front case 481. This makes it possible to make the members (case member 480, base member 470, etc.) arranged on the back side of the front decorative part invisible to the player.

The rear decorative part 452 is disposed at the rear of the upper end of the front decorative part 451. This makes it possible for the player to not be able to see the members disposed on the rear side of the front decorative part 451 from above the rear decorative part 452.

In addition, a displacement member 492 is disposed on the same front-rear plane as the front decorative portion 451. The displacement member 492 is formed mainly by including a shaft portion 492a protruding toward the rear side and a protrusion 492b.

The shaft portion 492a is formed in a cylindrical shape with an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the shaft hole 481c of the front case 481. Therefore, by inserting the shaft portion 492a into the shaft hole 481c, the displacement member 492 can be rotatably connected to the front case.
A biasing spring SP3 is disposed on the tip side of the a. This allows the displacement member 492 to be disposed in a biased state. The displacement of the displacement member 492 will be described in detail later.

The shaft portion 492a can transmit a driving force for rotating about the axis of the shaft portion 492a to the displacement member 492 by colliding with the collision portion 464f of the movable rack 464 described above. In other words, the movable rack 464 can rotationally displace the displacement member 492 in accordance with its displacement.

Therefore, the lower displacement member 440 is provided with a displacement member 492 (arrangement member) that is displaceably arranged on the lower displacement member 440 (base member), the ball receiving portion 467 (displacement member) is formed so as to be able to hold and eject a game ball, and the displacement member 492 is displaceable when a game ball is ejected from the ball receiving portion 467, thereby suppressing the occurrence of rattling of the lower displacement member 440.

That is, when a game ball is launched from the ball receiving portion 467, the lower displacement member 440
In the case where the position of the center of gravity of the ball is changed, for example, by adopting a configuration in which the displacement member 492 is displaced in a direction that offsets the change in the position of the center of gravity associated with the launch of the game ball, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of rattling of the lower displacement member 440 associated with the change in the position of the center of gravity. In addition, when the game ball is launched from the ball receiving portion 467, the lower displacement member 440 receives a reaction force associated with the launch of the game ball, for example, by adopting a configuration in which the displacement member 492 is displaced in a direction that offsets the reaction force associated with the launch of the game ball, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of rattling of the lower displacement member 440 associated with the reaction force.

Also, as described above, when the cam member 422 is disposed at the position of the second displacement state, the force PW1 (see FIG. 56(b)) in the direction in which the cam member 422 rotates around the axis of the shaft portion 422a and the force PW2 (see FIG. 56(b)) in the direction in which the cam member 422 rotates around the axis of the shaft portion 422a act in a direction that cancels each other out, thereby preventing the cam member 422 from rotating due to the force applied from the first link member 431. Therefore, in the second displacement state, the cam member 422 and the link member 430 can be disposed in a stable state. Therefore, when a game ball is launched from the ball receiving portion 467 of the lower displacement member 440 at the position of the second displacement state, the first link member 431 or the cam member 422 can be prevented from swinging due to the inertial force caused by the launch of the game ball.

Furthermore, since the displacement of the displacement member 492 is achieved by the collision of the collision portion 464f with the shaft portion 492a due to the displacement of the ball receiving portion 467, there is no need to provide a separate driving means for displacing the displacement member 492.
The lower displacement member 440 can also be used as a drive means for displacing the displacement member 492. Therefore, the weight of the lower displacement member 440 can be reduced accordingly, and rattling thereof can be easily suppressed.

In addition, since the displacement member 492 can be displaced in mechanical synchronization with the displacement of the ball receiving portion 467, it is possible to eliminate the need for, for example, detecting the position of the ball receiving portion 467 with a sensor device and controlling the displacement member 492 with a driving means in accordance with the detection result, which in turn enables reduction in product costs and ensures reliability of the displacement operation of the displacement member 492 relative to the ball receiving portion 467.

Next, the transition of the transmission mechanism 460 will be described with reference to FIGS.
Fig. 61 is a front view of the lower displacement member 440 in the first position, Fig. 62 is a front view of the lower displacement member 440 in the second position, and Fig. 63 is a front view of the lower displacement member 440 in the third position. Figs. 64(a) to (c) are partial enlarged views of the lower displacement member 440.

The first position is a position where ball receiving portion 467 is located at approximately the center in the left-right direction (left-right direction in FIG. 61) with respect to base member 470. The second position is a position where ball receiving portion 467 is located below protruding wall 477 in the direction of gravity (lower side in FIG. 62). The third position is a position where ball receiving portion 467 is located at the right end of base member 470 in the left-right direction.

61 to 64, the decorative member 450 of the lower displacement member 440 and the front case 48
64(a) and 64(b) show the transition state immediately before the lower displacement member 440 is displaced to the third position, and FIG.

61 , in the first position, the lower displacement member 440 has the movable rack 464 positioned at the left end in the left-right direction relative to the base member 470. Also, in the first position, the rack 466 is disposed in front of the movable rack 464, and the rack 466 and the movable rack 464 overlap in the front-rear direction. That is, like the movable rack 464, the rack 466 is also positioned at the left end in the left-right direction relative to the base member 470. Therefore, the ball receiving portion 467 connected to the rack 466 is positioned at approximately the center in the left-right direction relative to the base member 470.

In the first position, as described above, the movable rack 464 and the rack 466 are aligned with the base member 470.
Here, since the lower displacement member 440 undergoes rotational displacement while sliding (displacing from the retracted state to the first and second protruding states), it is desirable that the center of gravity of the lower displacement member 440 be disposed near the axis of rotation.

According to this embodiment, the transmission mechanism 460 that displaces the ball receiving portion 467 has the movable rack 464 and the rack 466 stacked front to back (two-stage rack), so that the center of gravity position can be brought closer to the sliding grooves 411a, 411b of the front base 411 (the rotation axis side of the lower displacement member 440).

Therefore, when the lower displacement member 440 is displaced from the retracted state position to the first and second extended states as described above, the lower displacement member 440 is set to the first position.
Therefore, the energy consumption of the drive motor KM1 that displaces the lower displacement member 440 can be reduced.

The displacement from the first position shown in FIG. 61 to the second position shown in FIG. 62 is performed by driving the drive motor KM2.

When the drive motor KM2 is driven from the first position, the transmission gear 461 connected to the shaft of the drive motor KM2 is rotated. This rotates the transmission gears 462 and 463. When the transmission gear 463 is rotated, a driving force is transmitted from the rack gear 464a meshing with the transmission gear 463 to the movable rack 464, and the movable rack 464 is slid rightward relative to the base member 470.

When the movable rack 464 is slidably displaced, the movable rack 46
The transmission gear 465 disposed on the movable rack 464 is rotated by the rack gear 476 of the base member 470. As a result, the driving force is transmitted to the rack 466 by the rack gear 466a meshed with the transmission gear 465. As a result, the rack 466 is slid rightward in the left-right direction relative to the movable rack 464, and the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced to the second position.

The displacement from the second position shown in Fig. 62 to the third position shown in Fig. 63 is performed by driving the drive motor KM2, similar to the displacement from the first position to the second position. Note that the transmission of the drive from the drive motor KM2 to the rack 466 is similar to the displacement from the first position to the second position, and therefore a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 63 and 64 , when the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced to the third position, the ball receiving portion 46
7 is released from the abutment state between the leg portion 467a and the bottom wall portion 481b of the front case 481, and is rotated about the axis of the shaft hole 467b by the biasing force of the biasing spring SP2 arranged on the shaft portion 466b.

To explain in more detail, in the first and second positions (where the ball receiving portion 467 is positioned to the left of the ball receiving portion 467 in the third position when viewed from the front), the tip of the leg 467a of the ball receiving portion 467 is in contact with the upper surface of the bottom wall portion 481b of the front case 481, and clockwise rotation when viewed from the front is restricted around the axial hole 467b by the biasing force of the biasing spring SP2.

On the other hand, when the tip of the leg portion 467a of the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced to the third position, the tip of the leg portion 467a of the ball receiving portion 467 is in contact with the bottom wall portion 48
1b as viewed from the front, and the bottom wall portion 481b and the standing wall 4
71a.
7 is rotated around the axis of axial hole 467b by the biasing force of biasing spring SP2. When ball receiving portion 467 is rotated in the third position, the tip of leg portion 467a abuts against the end face of bottom wall portion 481b, restricting the rotation of ball receiving portion 467 around axial hole 467b. As a result, ball receiving portion 467 is stopped at a position rotated approximately 40 degrees around axial hole 467b. Note that, hereinafter, the rotational displacement of ball receiving portion 467 in the third position will be described as a firing operation.

In addition, the ball receiving portion 467 includes a recess 481b1 that is recessed in a track area when the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced from the first position to the third position direction (first direction).
81b1, and is formed so that its posture can be changed by engaging leg portion 467a with recess 481b1, thereby simplifying the structure for changing the posture of ball receiving portion 467.

Furthermore, when the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced from the second position to the third position, the collision portion 464f is slid and displaced to the right side in front view due to the displacement of the movable rack 464, and the protrusion 492 of the displacement member 492
As a result, the displacement member 492 is rotationally displaced about the axis of the shaft portion 492a.

That is, when the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced to the third position, the ball receiving portion 467 is rotationally displaced and the displacement member 492 is rotationally displaced. Therefore, the ball receiving portion 467 performs a shooting operation, the ball is discharged from the inside of the ball receiving portion 467, and the lower displacement member 440 becomes lighter, so that the lower displacement member 440
The force causing the lower displacement member 440 to swing and the inertial force causing the displacement member 492 to rotate and displace can be made to act in the opposite directions. As a result, it is possible to suppress the lower displacement member 440 from swinging when a ball is discharged from inside the lower displacement member 440.

Next, the operation of receiving a ball into the ball receiving portion 467 will be described with reference to FIG.
65(a) to (c) are front views of the lower displacement member 440.
3, the transition states of the receiving operation for receiving a ball into the ball receiving portion 467 are sequentially illustrated.

65(a) to 65(c), the decorative member 450 of the lower displacement member 440 and the front case 481 are seen transparently, and the outline of the bottom wall portion 481b of the front case 481 is shown by a chain line.

65(a) to 65(c), the horizontal direction of the lower displacement member 440 in the retracted state is shown by a two-dot chain line with the imaginary line H1 attached, and the horizontal direction of the lower displacement member 440 in the first extended state is shown by the imaginary line H2 attached. Also, the angle by which the lower displacement member 440 is rotated from the position in the retracted state to the position in the first extended state is shown with the imaginary line θ attached. The imaginary lines H1, H2, and angle θ are also shown in the figures following FIG. 65.

65(a), in the lower displacement unit 400 in the retracted state (the longitudinal direction of the lower displacement member 440 is parallel to the imaginary line H1), the ball receiving portion 467 of the lower displacement member 440 is displaced to the first position, whereby the game ball T1 is sent from the distribution unit 500, which will be described later, to an opening 451a formed in the front decorative portion 451 of the lower displacement member 440. The game ball T1 sent to the opening 451a is sent to the inside of the protruding wall 477, and then sent to the inside of the lower displacement member 440.

As shown in FIG. 65(b), when the game ball T1 is sent to the opening 451a, the lower displacement member 44
0 is displaced to the second position. Therefore, as described above, in the second position, the ball receiving portion 467 is disposed below the protruding wall 477, so that the game ball T1 sent to the inside of the protruding wall 477 can be sent to the inside of the ball receiving portion 467. By receiving the game ball T1 in the ball receiving portion 467, the game ball T1 can be displaced in accordance with the operation of the ball receiving portion 467.

As shown in FIG. 65C, when the game ball T1 is sent to the ball receiving portion, the lower displacement member 440 is displaced to the first position.
The ball receiving portion 467 can be placed in this position.

Here, a gaming machine is known that includes a base member, a base member having one side displaceably disposed on the base member, and a displacement member displaceably disposed on the base member. According to this gaming machine, in addition to a performance in which the base member is displaced between an extended position where the base member is extended into the play area and made visible to the player, and a retracted position where the base member is retracted from the play area, a performance in which the displacement member is displaced when the base member is disposed in the extended position can be performed.

However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, one side of the base member is disposed on the base member so as to be displaceable, so that when the displacement member is displaced, the base member is likely to rattle relative to the base member, with the one side being the dead point. In particular, when the displacement member is displaced from a stopped state, the change in acceleration is maximized, so that the base member is likely to rattle due to the influence of inertia force.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the ball receiving portion 467 starts to be displaced from the second position.
The lower displacement member 440 is formed so as to be capable of starting displacement from a first position that is closer to one side of the lower displacement member 440 (base member) than the first position, and since the displacement starts from the first position at least when the lower displacement member 440 is disposed at a predetermined position relative to the base member 410 (for example, a first protruding state in which the lower displacement member 440 protrudes into the play area and is visible to the player), rattling of the lower displacement member 440 of the base member can be suppressed. In other words, the first position is closer to one side of the lower displacement member 440 than the second position.
Since the first position is close to one side of the lower displacement member, by setting the displacement start position of ball receiving portion 467 at this first position, the weight of ball receiving portion 467 can be brought close to the dead center when lower displacement member 440 rattles relative to base member 410, and accordingly, the effect of the inertial force when ball receiving portion 467 is displaced from a stopped state can be made less likely to act on lower displacement member 440. As a result, rattling of lower displacement member 440 can be easily suppressed.

As described above, the lower displacement member 440 is rotated while being slidably displaced (displaced from the retracted state to the first and second extended states). Therefore, when the lower displacement member 440 is rotated while the game ball T1 is disposed far from the rotation axis, centrifugal force is easily generated in the game ball T1, and the game ball T1 moves, generating a collision sound due to the collision between the inner wall of the ball receiving portion 467 and the game ball T1.
Or there was a problem that the ball receiving portion 467 was damaged.

In contrast, in this embodiment, after the game ball T1 is received in the ball receiving portion 467, the lower displacement member 440 can be displaced to the first position, so that the game ball T1 can be placed (moved closer) to the vicinity of the rotation axis of the lower displacement member 440.
When the lower displacement member 440 is rotationally displaced (displaced from the retracted state to the first and second extended states) in a state in which the ball receiving portion 467 receives the game ball T1, it is possible to suppress the generation of centrifugal force on the game ball T1. As a result, it is possible to suppress the generation of a collision sound or damage to the ball receiving portion 467 when the game ball T1 collides with the ball receiving portion 467.

Further, in this embodiment, the lower displacement member 440 is a transmission mechanism 4 that operates the ball receiving portion 467.
Since 60 is formed of movable rack 464, transmission gear 465 (pinion gear) and rack 466 (rack member), and ball receiving portion 467 is disposed on rack 466, when displacement of ball receiving portion 467 begins from the first position, the weight of not only rack 466 but also movable rack 464 and rack 466 can be brought close to one side of lower displacement member 440 (the fulcrum when lower displacement member 440 rattles against base member 410). As a result, rattling of lower displacement member 440 when ball receiving portion 467 is displaced from a stopped state can be easily suppressed.

In addition, when the ball receiving portion 467 receives the game ball T1, the load of the lower displacement member 440 is increased by the load of the game ball T1. Therefore, as described above, by setting the lower displacement member 440 in the first position, the center of gravity of the lower displacement member 440 is aligned with the sliding groove 411 of the front base 411.
11a, 411b side (the rotation shaft side of the lower displacement member 440). Therefore, when the lower displacement member 440 is displaced from the retracted state position to the first and second extended states,
By setting the lower displacement member 440 in the first position, it is possible to reduce the driving force required to rotationally displace the lower displacement member 440. Therefore, the energy consumption of the drive motor KM1 that displaces the lower displacement member 440 can be reduced.

Next, the ball dispensing operation will be described with reference to Figure 66 (a) to (c).
FIG. 66 is a front view of the lower displacement member 440. In addition, in FIG. 66(a) to (c), the transition state of the lower displacement member 440 during the ball dispensing operation is illustrated in sequence.
), the decorative member 450 and the front case 481 of the lower displacement member 440 are seen transparently, and the outline of the bottom wall portion 481b of the front case 481 is shown by a dashed line. Furthermore, the ball payout operation is an operation of paying out the game ball T1 received in the ball receiving portion 467 of the lower displacement member 440 from the outlet opening 471 to the outside of the lower displacement member 440.

As shown in Figures 66 (a) to (c), the dispensing operation of dispensing the ball received in the ball receiving portion 467 of the lower displacement member 440 is performed by sequentially displacing the lower displacement member 440 from the first position to the third position.

That is, by receiving the game ball T1 inside the ball receiving portion 467 in the receiving operation and displacing the lower displacement member 440 arranged in the first position to the third position, the game ball T1 is carried toward the exit opening 471 as the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced. The game ball T1 moved toward the exit opening 471 is given an inertial force toward the exit opening 471 by the sliding displacement of the ball receiving portion 467 and the launching operation of the ball receiving portion 467 at the third position, and is thrown out from inside the ball receiving portion 467. This allows the ball to be paid out from inside the lower displacement member 440.

Here, the displacement direction when the ball receiving portion 467 (displacement member) starts to be displaced from the first position is a direction away from the position side of the lower displacement member 440, so that when the ball receiving portion 467 is arranged in the first position, the rack 466 (rack member) can be moved closer to the base member 410 from one side of the lower displacement member 440. That is, in order for the ball receiving portion 467 (rack 466) to be displaced in a direction away from one side of the lower displacement member 440, the rack 466 must be moved closer to the rack gear 466a with which the transmission gear 465 (pinion gear) is engaged after the displacement of the ball receiving portion 467 starts.
The portion of the rack 466 facing the lower displacement member 440 faces one side of the lower displacement member 440. Therefore, the weight of the rack 466 can be brought closer to one side of the lower displacement member 440 (the fulcrum when the lower displacement member 440 shakes against the base member 410), and as a result, it is possible to easily suppress the rattling of the lower displacement member 440 when the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced from the stopped state.

The ball receiving portion 467 is displaced toward the third position (first direction), and is formed so that its posture can be changed when it reaches the third position. This makes it easier for the ball receiving portion 467 to maintain a state in which one game ball T1 is held, and prevents the game ball T1 from falling out of the ball receiving portion 467, while preventing the game ball T1 from falling out of the ball receiving portion 467 when it reaches the second position.
When the ball receiving portion 467 reaches the position, the game ball T1 is transferred to the ball receiving portion 467 by utilizing the change in the attitude of the ball receiving portion 467.
This makes it easier to dispense from the inside.

In addition, when the dispensing operation of the ball receiving portion 467 shown in Figures 66(a) to 66(c) is performed with the lower displacement member 440 in a retracted state (the longitudinal direction of the lower displacement member 440 is positioned horizontally with the imaginary line H1), the game ball dispensed to the outside of the lower displacement member 440 is sent inside the recovery port 411f.

On the other hand, when the lower displacement member 440 performs the dispensing operation of the ball receiving portion 467 in the position of the first overhanging state (a state in which the longitudinal direction of the lower displacement member 440 is rotated by an angle θ from the imaginary line H1),
The game balls dispensed outside 40 are sent to the top of the ball receiving base 710 of the rotation unit 700.

Next, referring to Figures 67 and 68, a description will be given of the discharge operation when two or more balls are thrown inside the lower displacement member 440.
) is a front view of the lower displacement member 440.

43(a) to (c) and 44(a) to (c) sequentially show transition states of the ejection operation. Also, in Fig. 43(a) to (c) and 44(a) to (c), the decorative member 450 of the lower displacement member 440 and the front case 481 are seen transparently, and the outline of the bottom wall portion 481b of the front case 481 is shown by a two-dot chain line.

As shown in Figures 67 (a) to (c), when two or more balls are sent in succession from the distribution unit 500 described later, the lower displacement member 440 can be operated to receive the second game ball T2, so that it can fall onto the displacement path of the ball receiving portion 467.

That is, the first game ball T1 can be sent to the inside of the ball receiving portion 467 by displacing the ball receiving portion 467 from the first position to the second position, and the second game ball T2 can be abutted against the first game ball T1 and retained inside the protruding wall 477 (see FIG. 67(b)). By displacing the ball receiving portion 467 to the first position after receiving the first game ball T1 at the second position, the ball receiving portion 467 can be displaced to the first position with the first game ball T1 received in the ball receiving portion 467, causing the second game ball T2 to fall on the displacement path of the ball receiving portion 467.

In a gaming machine in which a ball received by the ball receiving section 467 at the second position is displaced to a third position by the displacement of the ball receiving section 467, if a malfunction occurs in the displacement of the distribution member 540 of the distribution unit 500 described later, more than the specified number of game balls may be sent to the trajectory area of the ball receiving section 467. In this case, there is a problem that a malfunction may occur due to the game balls exceeding the specified number. For example, if the game balls exceeding the specified number are
60 and get caught in the moving parts, which may cause damage. Alternatively, the game balls exceeding the prescribed number may end up outside the game area (for example, on the back side of the game board 13 or the back case 3).
There was a risk of the water leaking out into the interior of the building (inside 00).

In contrast, according to this embodiment, the ball receiving portion 467 is formed so as to be displaceable from the second position to the first position, which is the opposite direction to the ball's throwing direction, and the trajectory area of the ball receiving portion 467 can be expanded accordingly. Therefore, even if, for example, a malfunction occurs in the sorting member 540 and more than the specified number of game balls are thrown, the trajectory area of the ball receiving portion 467 has been expanded, so that the trajectory area can receive the game balls in excess of the specified number. As a result, the game balls in excess of the specified number can be received in the trajectory area.
The ball receiving portion 467 can be moved in association with the displacement of the ball receiving portion 467 to the third position. This makes it possible to prevent game balls exceeding the specified number from entering the transmission mechanism 460 that drives the ball receiving portion 467 or flowing out of the game area, and as a result, it is possible to prevent malfunctions caused by game balls exceeding the specified number from occurring.

In addition, the ball receiving portion 467 is capable of receiving and holding one game ball T1 sent from the distribution unit 500 described later at the second position, and is formed to be displaceable at least a distance that exceeds the diameter of the game ball in the direction from the second position to the first position (second direction).
After receiving one game ball at the second position, the ball receiving portion 467 is moved from the second position in a third direction (
The ball receiving portion 467 is displaced in the first direction (
The ball can be thrown to a region in the first direction from the ball receiving portion 467. Therefore, the second and subsequent game balls T2 can be moved in accordance with the displacement of the ball receiving portion 467 toward the third position (the first direction).

In this case, the first game ball T1 is held by the ball receiving portion 467, and the second and subsequent game balls T2 can be sent to the trajectory area of the ball receiving portion 467.
Therefore, for example, by displacing the ball receiving portion 467 toward the third position (first direction), the ball receiving member can be separated from the second ball T1 while maintaining the state in which the ball receiving member holds the first ball T2.
It becomes possible to discharge only the game balls T2 from the th ball onwards from the trajectory area.

In addition, in the case where the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced to the second position to receive the first ball, and then displaced to the third position to discharge the game ball T1 from the inside of the ball receiving portion 467, the second game ball T2
The second game ball T2 falls onto the top of the rack 466, and the ball receiving portion 467 and the transmission gear 465
There is a risk that the second game ball T2 will be thrown between the lower displacement member 440 and the lower displacement member 440, making it impossible to eject the second game ball T2 outside the lower displacement member 440.

In contrast to this, in this embodiment, the receiving action of receiving a ball into the ball receiving portion 467 can be performed by receiving the game ball T1 inside the ball receiving portion 467 at the second position, and then displacing it to the first position opposite the exit opening 471, thereby preventing the second game ball T2 from being unable to be discharged outside the lower displacement member 440.

In other words, in a gaming machine equipped with a device that performs an ejection operation to eject a gaming ball sent into the device, if the operation of the member that ejects the ball (the ball receiving portion 467 in this embodiment) is merely displaced between a position that receives the ball (the second position) and a position that ejects the ball (the third position), when two or more gaming balls are sent into the device, the ejection port (the exit opening 471) of the member that ejects the ball will not be opened.
However, in this embodiment, after receiving the first game ball T1, the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced to a first position opposite the exit opening 471, so that the second game ball T2 can be sent between the ball receiving portion 467 and the exit opening 471.

As shown in FIG. 68(a) to (c), after the second game ball T2 is sent onto the displacement path of the ball receiving portion 467, the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced to the third position before the launch operation.
The second gaming ball T2 can be rolled toward the outlet opening 471 while being in contact with the ball receiving portion 467. As a result, the second gaming ball T2 can be discharged from the outlet opening 471.

In this case, the lower end surface of the U-shaped portion of the ball receiving portion 467 is positioned above (above in FIG. 68(a)) the center position of the second game ball T2 sent on the displacement path of the ball receiving portion 467. Also, when the leg portion 467a abuts against the upper surface of the bottom wall portion 481b, it is positioned in a state inclined at approximately 45 degrees with respect to the abutment surface with the bottom wall portion 481b. Furthermore, since the side surface on the right side of the U-shape of the ball receiving portion 467 (right side in FIG. 68(a)) is positioned at the same position in the vertical direction as the right end portion of the leg portion 467a, the outer surface of the second game ball T2 can be abutted against the leg portion 467a.

In addition, the leg portion 467a is inclined at approximately 45 degrees relative to the upper surface of the bottom wall portion 481b, so that it abuts against the outer surface of the lower hemisphere (the lower hemisphere on the bottom wall portion 481b side) of the second game ball T2.
As a result, when the second gaming ball T2 is rolled toward the emission opening 471, a force that lifts the second gaming ball T2 upward can be generated by the inclined surface of the leg 467a.
The frictional force between the second game ball T2 and the bottom wall portion 481b when the second game ball T2 rolls on the upper surface of the bottom wall portion 481b can be reduced. As a result, the ball receiving portion 467 can be prevented from being stopped when the second game ball T2 rolls toward the exit opening 471.

In other words, the leg 467a protrudes from the ball receiving portion 467 in the direction from the first position toward the third position (first direction), and the protruding tip is formed so as to be able to abut against the lower half of a game ball (i.e., the second or subsequent game ball T2) that is sent to the trajectory region of the ball receiving portion 467. Therefore, when the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced from the first position toward the third position (first direction), the game ball can be moved while its lower half is pushed by the leg 467a. As a result, the second or subsequent game balls T2 can be easily discharged from the trajectory region of the ball receiving portion 467.

Furthermore, by providing the legs 467a between the first game ball T1 held in the ball receiving portion 467 and the game balls (second and subsequent game balls T2) sent to the trajectory area of the ball receiving portion 467, a distance between the first game ball T1 and the second and subsequent game balls T2 can be secured by the protruding length of the legs 467a. This makes it possible to easily discharge only the second and subsequent game balls T2 from the trajectory area while maintaining the state in which the first game ball T1 is held by the ball receiving portion 467.

Furthermore, by engaging with recess 481b1, leg 467a serves both to change the posture of ball receiving portion 467 and to move the game ball while pushing its lower half, thereby reducing the number of parts and thereby reducing product costs.

In addition, the size of the recess 481b1 in the direction from the first position to the third position (first direction) is smaller than the diameter of the game ball, so that the game ball (i.e., the second or subsequent game ball T2) sent to the trajectory region of the ball receiving portion 467 can easily pass through the recess 481b1 when it moves with the displacement of the ball receiving portion 467 in the first direction. As a result, the second or subsequent game balls T2 can easily be discharged from the trajectory region.

As described above, when the lower displacement unit 400 is placed in the retracted state, the lower displacement member 440
The recovery port 411f is disposed below the ejection opening 471. Therefore, the game ball T2 discharged in the retracted state is sent to the recovery port 411f.

On the other hand, when the lower displacement unit 400 is disposed in the first protruding state, the recovery port 411f is positioned below the ejection opening 471. The upper side of the opening of the recovery port 411f is opened. Thus, the game ball T2 discharged is sent to the recovery port 411f.

That is, the recovery port 411f is disposed on the first direction side (the side of the standing wall 471a) of the base member 470.
Since the ball receiving portion 467 is disposed vertically below the end of the ball receiving portion 467 and has an opening vertically upward,
The ball receiving portion 467 moves in association with the movement of the ball receiving portion 467 toward the third position (first direction), and the game balls (i.e., the second and subsequent game balls T2) that are discharged from the trajectory area of the ball receiving portion 467 can be received and collected through the opening of the collection port 411f.

Furthermore, the opening of the recovery port 411f is disposed vertically below the end of the first direction side (the erected wall 471a side) of the base member 470 at least in each of the positions of the retracted state, the first protruding state, and the second protruding state. This allows the game balls discharged from the trajectory region of the ball receiving portion 467 (i.e., the second and subsequent game balls T2) to be received and recovered from the opening of the recovery member regardless of whether the lower displacement unit 400 is displaced to the retracted position, the first protruding state, or the second protruding state.

In addition, when the lower displacement member 440 is in the retracted state (the longitudinal direction of the lower displacement member 440 is arranged horizontally with the imaginary line H1) and the ball receiving portion 467 is discharged as shown in FIGS. 67(a) to (c) and 68(a) to (c), the game balls discharged to the outside of the lower displacement member 440 are
In addition, when the lower displacement member 440 performs the discharge operation of the ball receiving portion 467 in the position of the first protruding state (a state in which the longitudinal direction of the lower displacement member 440 is rotated by the angle θ from the imaginary line H1), the game ball that has been paid out to the outside of the lower displacement member 440 is sent to the recovery port 411f as described above.

Next, referring to Figure 69, a configuration when the second game ball T2 is discharged from the outlet opening 471 will be described. Figure 69(a) is a partial enlarged view of the lower displacement member 440 in the range LXIXa of Figure 68(b), and Figure 69(b) is a partial enlarged view of the lower displacement member 440 in the range LXIXb of Figure 68(a).

As shown in Figure 69, when the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced to the third position just before the launch operation, the game ball T2 can be abutted against the side of the ball receiving portion 467 on the upright wall 471a side and pushed outward from the lower displacement member 440 through the exit opening 471.

In this case, the leg 467a of the ball receiving portion 467 is inserted between the bottom wall portion 481b and the upright wall 471a, and the game ball T2 comes into contact with the ball receiving portion 467 when the ball receiving portion 467 rotates, thereby transmitting the rotational force of the ball receiving portion 467 to the game ball T2. As a result, the game ball T2 can be easily discharged from the discharge opening 471. In addition, the repulsive force generated when the ball receiving portion 467 comes into contact with the game ball T2 can be utilized to return the ball receiving portion 467 to the state it was in before the ball receiving portion 467 rotated. Therefore, when discharging the game ball T2 that has been sent into the trajectory area of the ball receiving portion 467, the ball receiving portion 467 can be easily discharging the game ball T2 by using the repulsive force generated when the ball receiving portion 467 comes into contact with the game ball T2.
This can prevent the first game ball T1 held in 7 from falling out.

Furthermore, the lower displacement member 440 is configured such that the ball receiving portion 467 is moved in a direction from the second position to the third position (first direction).
The concave portion 481b is provided at a height lower than the radius of the game ball in the trajectory region when the game ball is displaced to the
The ball receiving portion 467 is provided with a vertical wall 471a positioned on the first direction side of the ball receiving portion 467, and when the second or subsequent game balls thrown into the trajectory area of the ball receiving portion 467 move as the ball receiving portion 467 displaces in the first direction, the game ball T2 abuts against the vertical wall 471a and the ball receiving portion 467, so that the change in posture of the ball receiving portion 467 can be regulated. This makes it possible to easily discharge only the second or subsequent game balls from the trajectory area while maintaining the state in which the ball receiving portion 467 holds the first game ball T1.

That is, the standing wall 471a is erected at a height from the top surface of the bottom wall portion 481b to the standing tip which is lower than the radius of the game ball. Therefore, when the game ball T2 is moved by being pushed by the legs in accordance with the displacement of the ball receiving portion 467 in the first direction, the lower half of the game ball T2 is brought into contact with the standing wall 471a,
The game ball can easily climb over the erected wall 471a. In this case, the game ball T2 abuts against the ball receiving portion 467 (i.e., the game ball T2 is interposed between the ball receiving portion 467 and the erected wall 471a).
Since a reaction force can be applied from the game ball T2 to the ball receiving portion 467, the change in posture of the ball receiving portion can be regulated, and the first game ball held by the ball receiving portion 467 can be prevented from falling out.
As a result, the first game ball can be maintained in the ball receiving portion 467 while the second and subsequent game balls T2 can be easily discharged from the game area.

On the other hand, when the second or subsequent game ball T2 is not thrown into the trajectory area of the ball receiving portion 467, the game ball is not interposed between the erected wall 471a and the ball receiving portion 467, so that the leg 467a
The engagement of the recess 481b1 with the recess 481b2 allows the attitude of the ball receiving portion 467 to be changed. As a result, the change in the attitude of the ball receiving portion 467 is utilized to receive the first game ball T1 (i.e., the ball receiving portion 4
This makes it easier to discharge the game ball (held in ball receiving portion 467) from ball receiving portion 467.

Next, the sorting unit 500 will be described in detail with reference to Figures 70 to 72. Figure 70(a) is a top view of the sorting unit 500, and Figure 70(b) is a rear view of the sorting unit 500. Figure 71 is an exploded front perspective view of the sorting unit 500, and Figure 72 is an exploded rear perspective view of the sorting unit 500.

As shown in FIGS. 70 to 72 , the sorting unit 500 includes a base plate 520 formed into a plate-like body having a generally rectangular shape when viewed from the front, a path forming member 510 attached to the front side of the base plate 520 and forming a plurality of flow paths through which the balls can flow down between the base plate 520 and the path forming member 510, and
The ball flow path is formed mainly by a distribution member 540 rotatably attached to the rear side of the ball flow path forming member 510 and an extension path member 530 attached to the end face of the base plate 520 for extending the ball flow path formed between the opposing sides of the base plate 520 and the path forming member 510.

The base plate 520 is formed mainly by a cylindrical shaft portion 523 protruding toward the rear side, a first opening 521 formed in an arc shape centered on the axis of the shaft portion 523, a second opening 522 formed in an arc shape with a larger radius than the first opening 521, a rolling portion 525 formed on the side surface at the upper end with a U-shaped cross section that is open at the upper end and extends in the left-right direction, and a locking portion 524 protruding in a hook shape toward the rear side.

The shaft portion 523 is inserted into a shaft hole 545 of the sorting member 540 (to be described later) and is
0 to the base member in a rotatable state, and is formed with an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the shaft hole 545.

The first opening 521 and the second opening 522 are openings through which a regulating plate 541 and a storage plate 542 of the sorting member 540 described later are inserted, and are formed to have a width greater than the thickness of the regulating plate 541 and the storage plate 542. The sorting member 540 is rotatably attached to the base plate 5
20, the first opening 521 and the second opening 522 are formed with an arc length greater than the circumferential dimension of the restricting plate 541 and the storage plate 542 when viewed from the front.

The locking portion 524 is an engagement portion that locks the urging spring SP4 together with a locking portion 544 formed on the distribution member 540, and one end of the urging spring SP4 is locked.

The rolling part 525 is the bottom surface on which the ball rolls, and is formed to be inclined downward toward one end on the left side when viewed from the rear (left side in FIG. 70(b)), and the curved shape formed in a U-shape is formed to be larger than the outer shape of the ball. Therefore, the ball rolling on the rolling part 525 is prevented from stopping at the rolling part, and the ball can be rolled toward one end side.

The rolling portion 525 has a plurality of projections 525 protruding from the front and rear sides toward the inside of the U-shape.
b and an opening 525a at one end that opens to the rear side.

The protrusions 525b are formed at regular intervals on the front and rear side surfaces, and the protrusions 525b formed on the front side and the protrusions 525b formed on the back side are formed at positions that are staggered when viewed from the front. Therefore, the ball rolling on the rolling part 525 can be caused to collide with the protrusions 525b, so that the rolling speed of the ball rolling on the rolling part 525 can be slowed down.

As described above, the ball is sent to the ball receiving portion 467 of the lower displacement unit 400 with the ball receiving portion 467 positioned in the first position (see Figures 65(a) and 65(b)).
Therefore, if the throwing speed of the game ball rolling on the rolling portion 525 of the third ball throwing path KR3 is increased, there is a risk that the game ball will be thrown inside the lower displacement member 440 before the ball receiving portion 467 is moved to the second position.

In contrast, in this embodiment, a plurality of protrusions 525b are formed on the inner surface of the rolling portion 525 of the third ball sending path KR3, and resistance can be applied to the game ball passing through the rolling portion 525 of the third ball sending path KR3, so that the speed of the game ball passing through the third ball sending path KR3 can be slowed down. Therefore, the time required for the ball receiving portion 467 to move from the switching position (first position) to the receiving position (second position) can be lengthened accordingly, so that the ball receiving portion 467 can move at a slower speed.
In addition, since the displacement speed required for the ball receiving portion 467 can be slowed down, the output of the displacement speed of the drive motor KM2 can be reduced accordingly, and the manufacturing cost can be reduced.

The opening 525a is formed to open on the rear side of one end of the rolling part 525, and its outer shape in rear view is formed to be larger than the size of the ball. Therefore, the ball rolling on the one end side of the rolling part 525 is discharged from the opening 525a.

The path forming member 510 is formed as a rectangular, vertically elongated plate whose width in the left-right direction is smaller than that of the base plate 520, and multiple walls larger than the outer diameter of a game ball are formed on the rear side. By forming the space between opposing walls larger than the outer diameter of the ball, multiple paths for the balls to flow down are formed inside it.

The path forming member 510 has a first opening 511 opening on the upper end surface, a first ball throwing path KR1 formed between the opposing side walls of the first opening 511, a second ball throwing path KR2 and a third ball throwing path KR3 connected to the first ball throwing path KR1, a second opening 512 and a third opening 513 opening on the side surface of the path forming member 510 at the ends of the second ball throwing path KR2 and the third ball throwing path KR3, a plurality of openings 514, 515, 516 formed penetrating in the front-rear direction, and the openings 514, 515, 516.
The path forming member 510 is mainly formed with a fourth ball throwing path KR4 formed by the rear wall of the path forming member 510 and a fourth opening 517 that opens to the side of the path forming member 510 at the end of the fourth ball throwing path KR4.

The first opening 511 is an opening for allowing the ball thrown from the throwing unit 600 (described later) to flow into the inside of the sorting unit, and is formed on the side surface of the upper end of the path forming member 510 and has an outer shape larger than the ball.
0 and allows the ball thrown from the throwing unit 600 to flow in.

The first ball throwing path KR1 is a path that allows the ball flowing in from the first opening 511 to flow down between the opposing base plate 520 and the path forming member 510, and is formed by extending downward. The fourth ball throwing path KR4 is formed by extending approximately one-third of the way up and down the path forming member 510, and its downstream end is connected to the second ball throwing path KR2 and the third ball throwing path KR3. That is,
The ball passing through the first ball throwing path KR1 is formed so as to be able to flow down the second ball throwing path KR2 or the third ball throwing path KR3.

As described above, the second ball throwing path KR2 is a path formed by being connected to the first ball throwing path KR1, and the downstream end is connected to the second opening 512. That is, when the ball flows down from the first opening 511 and down the first ball throwing path KR1 into the second ball throwing path KR2, the ball flows down the second opening 512 and is thrown into the second ball throwing path KR2.
12 and discharged to the outside of the sorting unit 500.

The second opening 512 is connected to a collection path (not shown) for collecting the balls. Therefore, the balls discharged from the second opening are collected by the collection path.
A sensor device SE2 for detecting the passage of game balls is disposed at the downstream end of the ball sending path KR2. Therefore, the number of game balls passing through the third winning opening 82 is detected by the sensor device SE1, and the number of game balls passing through the second ball sending path KR2 is detected by the sensor device SE2, so that the number of game balls passing through the third ball sending path KR3 can be detected.

In other words, it is possible to detect whether a predetermined number of game balls (one ball) is stored upstream of the regulating plate 541 described later by the difference between the sensor device SE1 and the sensor device SE1. For example, when the third electric device 82a is opened once, if the number of balls passing through the third winning opening 82 (sensor device SE1) is eight and the number of balls passing through the second ball sending path KR2 (sensor device SE2) is seven,
It is possible to detect that one game ball has flowed down (stored) on the third ball sending path KR3.

As described above, the third ball throwing path KR3 is a path formed by being connected to the first ball throwing path KR1, and the downstream end is connected to the third opening 513. That is, when the ball flows down from the first opening 511 and down the first ball throwing path KR1 into the third ball throwing path KR3, the ball is thrown from the third opening 513.
It is discharged from 13.

The third opening 513 is formed above the other end side (opposite end side of the opening 525a) of the rolling portion 525 of the base plate 520. Therefore, the ball discharged from the third opening 513 is
That is, the ball thrown to the third ball throwing path KR3 is thrown to the rolling portion 525 via the third opening 513.

The openings 514 to 516 are formed on the rear side of the third winning hole 82 formed in the game board 13, and a ball that wins in the third winning hole 82 is sent to the openings 514 to 516. That is, when a ball flowing down the play area on the front side of the game board 13 wins in the third winning hole 82, the ball is sent to the inside of the distribution unit 500 from the openings 514 to 516.

The fourth ball sending path KR4 is formed by connecting the openings 514 to 516, and is 1
The fourth opening 517 is connected to the fourth path and is connected to a fourth opening formed on the lower end surface of the path forming member 510. The fourth opening is connected to a recovery path (not shown) for recovering the balls. Thus, the ball that has entered the third winning hole 82 of the game board 13 is sent to the fourth ball sending path KR4 of the sorting unit 500, and then discharged from the fourth opening 517 and collected.

The extension path member 530 is formed in a U-shaped cross section that is open on the bottom side, and is extended in the left-right direction. The inner diameter of the U-shape of the extension path member 530 is larger than the outer diameter of the ball. Therefore, by disposing the extension path member 530 on the upper part of the rolling part 525 of the base plate 520, the ball sent to the upper part of the rolling part 525 can be sent inside the rolling part 525 and the extension path member 530, and the ball rolling on the rolling part can be prevented from falling from the rolling part 525.

Furthermore, the extension path member 530 has protrusions 531 formed at regular intervals at the same positions in the left-right direction as the protrusions 525b formed on the rolling portion 525. This makes it possible to slow down the rolling speed of the ball rolling on the rolling portion 525 in the same manner as the protrusions 525b.

The distribution member 540 is formed in a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, with one end being longer than the other, and is formed with a predetermined thickness in the front-rear direction. The distribution member 540 includes a restricting plate 541 that protrudes in the form of a plate on the front side.
It is mainly formed with a storage plate 542, an axial hole 545 formed through one end side of the upper part, and a hook-shaped locking portion 544 formed on the back side.

As described above, the shaft hole 545 is a through hole into which the shaft portion 523 of the base plate 520 is inserted, and is formed to penetrate in the front-rear direction.
The screw or the like having a head larger than that of the shaft hole is inserted into the shaft hole 545 from the rear side.
5, the base plate 520 is rotatably attached thereto by fastening the base plate 520 to the base plate 520.

The regulating plate 541 is a plate member that is positioned at the connection between the first ball throwing path KR1 and the second ball throwing path KR2 through the first opening 521 and regulates the ball flowing down the first ball throwing path KR1 from flowing into the second ball throwing path KR2.The regulating plate 541 is formed to protrude toward the front side beyond the front end face of the shaft hole 545, and the protruding distance toward the front side from the base plate 520 is set to be greater than the radius of the ball.

In addition, the restricting plate 541 is formed to be curved in an arc shape centered on the axis of the shaft hole 545. As a result, when the sorting member 540 is rotated and displaced around the axis of the shaft hole 545, the restricting plate 54
The displacement area of 1 can be minimized.

The storage plate 542 is a plate member that is arranged on the second ball sending path KR2 through the second opening 522 and stores the balls flowing down the second ball sending path KR2 on the upstream side of the storage plate 542.The storage plate 542 is formed to protrude toward the front side beyond the front end face of the shaft hole 545, and the protruding distance toward the front side from the base plate 520 is set to be greater than the radius of the ball.

The storage plate 542 is curved in an arc shape centered on the axis of the shaft hole 545, and the radius of the arc is larger than the radius of the curved portion of the restriction plate 541.
The storage plate 542 is formed at a position farther away from the shaft hole 545 than the restricting plate 541. This allows the restricting plate 541 to protrude to the connecting portion between the first ball throwing path KR1 and the second ball throwing path KR2, and allows the storage plate 542 to be disposed on the second ball throwing path KR2.
Furthermore, the displacement area when the sorting member 540 is rotationally displaced about the axis of the shaft hole 545 can be minimized.

The protrusion 543 is a drive transmission member that applies a rotational driving force to the sorting member 540 by colliding with the above-mentioned contact plate 464c of the lower displacement member 440, and is formed to protrude from the other end side of the sorting member 540. That is, the protrusion 543 to which the driving force is transmitted is formed on the opposite side to the one end side where the shaft hole 545 that serves as the rotation shaft of the sorting member 540 is formed. This makes it possible to reduce the force with which the contact plate 464c of the lower displacement member 440 strikes.

Therefore, the driving force of the drive motor KM3 for displacing the contact plate 464c can be reduced, and the energy consumed by the drive motor KM3 can be reduced. Also, since the energy required when the contact plate 464c collides with the protrusion 543 during driving can be reduced, the impact sound when the contact plate 464c collides with the protrusion 543 can be reduced.
The detailed manner in which the contact plate 464c and the protrusion 543 collide will be described later.

Furthermore, a bulging portion 543a that bulges out in a circular shape is formed at the contact point of the protruding tip of the protrusion 543 with the contact plate 464c. By contacting the contact plate 464c with the bulging portion 543a, the contact area between the contact plate and the sorting member 540 can be reduced.
When the rotational displacement of the drive motor KM3 is performed, the frictional resistance between the protrusion 543 (the bulging portion 543a) and the contact plate 464c can be reduced. As a result, the energy consumption of the drive motor KM3 can be prevented from increasing.

As described above, the locking portion 544 is connected to the locking portion 524 of the base plate 520 by the biasing spring SP
Therefore, since a force that rotates the other end side of the sorting member 540 toward the locking portion 524 side can be constantly applied, it is possible to suppress the sorting member 540 from shaking due to vibrations of the pachinko machine 10, etc.

Next, the flow path of the balls in the sorting unit 500 will be described in detail with reference to Fig. 73. Fig. 73 is a cross-sectional view of the sorting unit 500 taken along line LXXIII-LXXIII in Fig. 70(a). In Fig. 73, the sorting member 540 is shown by a chain line. Fig. 73 also shows the state in which the sorting member 540 is placed in the storage position.

Here, the state in which the sorting member 540 is positioned in the storage position means that the sorting member 540 is rotated by the force of the spring SP4, and the storage plate 542 is positioned on the second ball sending path KR2.

As shown in FIG. 73, the first ball sending path KR1 is a path in which the lower end side of the flow path is connected to the base plate 52.
The first ball throwing path KR1 is inclined toward the center in the left-right direction of the ball throwing path KR0 (left-right direction in FIG. 73), and the inclined portion is curved in a gentle S-shape. The tip portion curved in an S-shape is connected to the third ball throwing path KR3, and the second ball throwing path KR2 is connected to the end of the first ball throwing path KR1 in a state inclined in the opposite direction to the inclination of the first ball throwing path KR1.

This causes the ball flowing down the first ball path KR1 to collide with the lower surface of the inclined portion,
The flow direction of the ball can be directed away from the direction of gravity toward the inclination of the first ball throwing path KR1.
Therefore, the ball can be made to flow down toward the entrance of the third ball throwing path KR3 (the connecting portion between the first ball throwing path KR1 and the third ball throwing path KR3). Therefore, when the sorting member 540 is not arranged, the ball flowing down the first ball throwing path KR1 can be sent to the third ball throwing path KR3.

Here, a gaming machine is known that has a flow path along which gaming balls flow, a first branch passage and a second branch passage branching off from the flow path, and that distributes gaming balls that have flowed down the flow path into either the first branch passage or the second branch passage.

However, in conventional gaming machines, the game balls flowing down the flow passage are alternately distributed one ball at a time to the first branch passage and the second branch passage, so that the game balls flowing down the flow passage are distributed evenly (i.e., half each) to the first branch passage and the second branch passage, which poses a problem that the number of game balls distributed to the first branch passage cannot be changed.

In contrast, in the present embodiment, a ball receiving portion 467 is provided that is formed to be displaceable and receives game balls from the third ball sending path KR3. When the contact plate 464c linked to the ball receiving portion 467 comes into contact with the sorting member 540 and is displaced, the sorting member 540 is displaced.
The number of game balls to be distributed to the third ball throwing path KR3 or the second ball throwing path can be changed depending on the displacement of the ball throwing path 7. That is, the number of game balls to be distributed to the third ball throwing path KR3 can be changed.

The displacement of the distribution member 540 is controlled by utilizing the displacement of the ball receiving portion 467.
Since it is possible to displace the sorting member 540, it is not necessary to separately provide a drive means or a transmission mechanism for displacing the sorting member 540. Therefore, the number of parts can be reduced accordingly, and the manufacturing cost can be reduced.

Furthermore, for example, in a structure in which the displacement of the distribution member 540 is controlled using position detection by a sensor device or drive by a drive means, malfunctions due to poor detection or control can lead to a decrease in the reliability of the distribution operation of the distribution member. However, according to this embodiment, the distribution destination of the distribution member 540 can be switched in mechanical synchronization with the displacement of the ball receiving portion 467, thereby improving the reliability of the distribution operation.

In particular, since the ball receiving portion 467 is a member that receives the game ball from the rolling portion 525 of the third ball sending path KR3, the distribution destination of the distribution member 540 is synchronized with the displacement of the ball receiving portion 467.
By switching to the third ball sending path, the game ball diverted to the third ball sending path KR3 can be reliably received by the displacement member.

Furthermore, in conventional gaming machines, the gaming balls flowing down the flow path are simply diverted to either the first branch passage or the second branch passage, which is insufficient to provide the player with any interest.

In contrast, according to the present embodiment, the distribution destination by the regulating plate 541 (distribution means) is the third
When the ball sending path is set to KR3 (first branch passage), the flow of the game ball down the third path is restricted, and when the destination of the distribution by the distribution member 540 is set to the second ball sending path KR2 (second branch passage), the storage plate 542 (flow state change means) allows the game ball to flow down the third ball sending path KR3, thereby providing interest to the player.

That is, when the ball is distributed to the third ball path by the restricting plate 541, the third ball path KR3
The flow of the game balls distributed to the third ball sending path KR3 is restricted to store the game balls in the third ball sending path KR3, and when the distribution destination by the restricting plate 541 is set to the second ball sending path KR2, the third ball sending path KR3 is
This allows the game balls to flow down the third ball sending path KR3, and allows the game balls stored in the third ball sending path KR3 to flow down (release). This allows the game balls flowing down the first ball sending path KR1 (flow down path) to be distributed to either the third ball sending path KR3 or the second ball sending path KR2,
The balls distributed to the third ball sending path KR3 can be flowed down (released). Furthermore, these storing and releasing operations can be alternately performed in conjunction with the distribution operation. As a result, it is possible to provide an interest to the player.

In addition, since the restricting plate 541 (distributing means) and the storage plate 542 (flow state changing means) are integrally formed as the distribution member 540 (integral member), the restricting plate 541 and the storage plate 542
This simplifies the structure for operating the two and improves the reliability of operation. In other words, if the regulating plate 541 and the storage plate 542 are formed separately, there will be two parts, which will complicate the structure for operating the two parts and lead to a decrease in the reliability of operation.

In contrast, according to this embodiment, the restricting plate 541 and the storage plate 542 can be formed as a single component, which allows the structure to be simplified accordingly, resulting in reduced product costs and improved operational reliability.

Further, the sorting member 540 has a storage position (first state position) and a restriction position (second state position).
When the sorting member 540 is displaced to the storage position, the regulating plate 5
When the distribution member 540 is displaced to the restricting position, the restricting plate 541 is disposed at a position to distribute the game ball to the second ball path KR2, and the storage plate 542 is disposed at a position to allow the game ball to flow down the third ball path KR3. Therefore, by displacing the distribution member 540 between two positions (the storage position and the restricting position), the game ball flowing down the first ball path KR1 (flow down path) is directed to the third ball path KR3.
Alternatively, in addition to the operation of distributing to one of the second ball sending paths, an operation of temporarily stopping (storing) the flow of the game balls distributed to the third ball sending path KR3 and an operation of allowing (releasing) the stopped (stored) game balls to flow down can be formed, and these storing and releasing operations can be performed alternately in conjunction with the distribution operation. In other words, the structure can be simplified, the product cost can be reduced, and the reliability of the operation can be improved.

The distribution member 540 (integral member) is formed to be rotatable, and the storage plate 542 (flow state changing means) is formed to be able to protrude into and retract from the third ball sending path KR3 (first branch passage), and by protruding into the third ball sending path KR3, it regulates the flow of the game balls down, and is formed in a shape that is curved like an arc centered on the rotation axis of the distribution member 540, so that the area of the hole (recess 519) opened in the inner wall of the third ball sending path KR3 for the regulating plate 541 to protrude and retract can be reduced.

The storage plate 542 (flow state change means) is arranged in a concave orientation on the side facing upstream of the third ball sending path KR3 (first branch passage), so that in the initial state when the storage plate 542 begins to protrude into the third ball sending path KR3 (i.e., when only the tip side of the flow state change means protrudes into the passage), the shape of the tip side of the storage plate 542 can be positioned in a direction that makes it easy to regulate the flow of game balls downward, making it easier to regulate the flow of game balls that have been allocated to the third ball sending path KR3.

In addition, when the storage plate 542 is protruded to the maximum extent into the third ball sending path to restrict the flow of the game ball downward, the concave portion of the storage plate 542 can stably hold the game ball, thereby suppressing the game ball from moving wildly.

The sorting unit 500 includes a spring SP4 (biasing means) that applies a biasing force to the sorting member 540 (integral member) to bias the restricting plate 541 in a direction in which the restricting plate 541 protrudes into the third ball sending path (first branch passage). The distance from the restricting plate 541 to the rotation axis of the sorting member 540 is set to be equal to or larger than the distance from the restricting plate 541 to the rotation axis of the sorting member 540.
Since the distance from the storage plate 542 to the rotation axis of the distribution member 540 is made larger, the biasing force of the biasing spring SP4 can be used to easily maintain the distribution member 540 in a position in which the storage plate 542 protrudes into the third emergency route (i.e., the storage position).

In this case, the distance from the storage plate 542 to the rotation axis of the distribution member 540 is made larger than the distance from the regulating plate 541 to the rotation axis of the distribution member 540. Therefore, when a game ball flows down and collides with the storage plate 542, the distance from the rotation axis is larger, so that the distance from the rotation axis is larger, and even if the same impact force is applied, the distance from the regulating plate 541 to the rotation axis of the distribution member 540 is larger.
The spring SP4 is biased in such a direction that the storage plate 542 is in the third ball sending path KR.
By setting the direction of protrusion toward the recess 519, the retention plate 542 can be prevented from sinking into the recess 519 by the amount of the urging force.

In addition, the distribution member 540 (integral member) rotates in a direction in which the storage plate 542 (flow state changing means) protrudes into the third ball sending path (first branch passage) due to its own weight, so that the distribution member 540 can be easily maintained in a position in which the storage plate 542 protrudes into the third ball sending path KR3 (i.e., the storage position) by utilizing the own weight. Therefore, when a game ball collides with the distribution member 540, the storage plate 542 can be prevented from sinking into the recess 519 by the weight of the game ball.

In addition, even if the biasing spring SP4 (biasing means) falls off, the weight of the distribution member 540 can maintain the regulating plate 541 in a position in which it protrudes into the third ball sending path KR3, thereby preventing the game ball from flowing down into the third ball sending path.

Furthermore, a biasing spring SP4 is provided which applies a biasing force to the sorting member 540 to maintain the destination of the sorting member 540 on either the third ball sending path KR3 or the second ball sending path KR2, and when the ball receiving portion 467 displaces the sorting member 540 in a direction against the direction of the biasing spring SP4, the destination of the sorting member 540 is switched to the other of the third ball sending path KR3 or the second ball sending path KR2, and the biasing force of the biasing spring returns the destination of the sorting member 540 to either the third ball sending path KR3 or the second ball sending path KR2.

Therefore, it is possible to prevent the distribution destination by the distribution member 540 from being inadvertently switched. In this case, the distribution member 540 is displaced in accordance with the displacement of the ball receiving portion 467, and after the distribution destination is switched, the distribution destination before the switching can be returned by the biasing force of the biasing spring SP4, so that the contact plate 464c linked to the ball receiving portion 467 is pressed against the distribution member 540.
That is, the abutment plate 464c that moves with the ball receiving portion 467 can be separated from the sorting member 540. This increases the degree of freedom in designing the movable range of the ball receiving portion 467.

Next, the displacement of the distribution member 540 will be described with reference to FIG.
74(a) and 74(b) are partial enlarged views of the sorting unit 500 in the range LXXIV of FIG. 73. Note that FIG. 74(a) shows a state in which the sorting member 540 is located at the storage position, and FIG. 74(b) shows a state in which the sorting member 540 is located at the storage position.
) show a state where sorting member 540 is located at the restricting position. The state where sorting member 540 is located at the restricting position means that contact plate 464c of lower displacement member 440 collides with protrusion 543 of sorting member 540, sorting member 540 is rotated about the axis of shaft hole 545, and restricting plate 541 is located at the connection portion between first ball throwing path KR1 and third ball throwing path KR3.

As shown in FIG. 74A, when the sorting member 540 is in the storing position, the storing plate 542 is located on the third ball sending path KR3, and the restricting plate 541 is located on the path forming member 51.
5. The substrate 510 is disposed inside a recess 518 formed in the rear wall of the substrate 510.

In this case, the distance L1 between the tip of the trapping plate 542 protruding inwardly of the third ball throwing path KR3 and the inner wall of the third ball throwing path KR3 facing the tip is set to be smaller than the diameter of the ball. Therefore, the ball thrown from the upstream of the third ball throwing path KR3 (the first ball throwing path KR1) is stopped on the upstream side of the trapping plate 542.

In addition, the first ball sending path KR1 and the third ball sending path KR2 are formed from the inside of the curved portion of the storage plate 542.
The distance L2 to the connecting portion with the trapping plate 542 is set to be larger than the radius of the ball and smaller than the diameter of the ball.
In the following description, the state of the sorting unit 500 in which one ball is stopped on the upstream side of the storage plate 542 is referred to as a storage state.

On the other hand, as shown in Figure 74 (b), when the distribution member 540 is positioned in the regulating position, the regulating plate 541 is positioned at the connection portion between the first ball sending path KR1 and the third ball sending path KR3, and the storage plate 542 is positioned inside the recess 519 formed in the wall portion on the rear side of the path forming member 510.

In this case, the distance L3 between the tip end of the restricting plate 541 protruding inward from the first ball throwing path KR1 and the inner wall of the entrance of the third ball throwing path KR3 is set to be smaller than the diameter of the ball.
The ball flowing down the first ball throwing path KR1 collides with the restricting plate 541 and is thrown to the second ball throwing path KR2.

That is, by switching the sorting member 540 between the restricting position and the storing position, the first ball sending path K
It is possible to create a state in which a ball thrown through R1 is thrown to the third ball throwing path KR3 and stopped on the third ball throwing path KR3, and a state in which a ball flowing down the first ball throwing path KR1 is unable to flow into the third ball throwing path KR3 and is thrown to the second ball throwing path KR2.

Therefore, when the balls branch from flow path 1 to flow path 2 by displacing one of the distributing members 540, the balls' flow path can be reliably switched to one of the two paths.

In addition, the biasing spring SP4 applies a biasing force to the distribution member 540, thereby maintaining the distribution destination of the distribution member 540 on the second ball sending path KR2, thereby preventing the distribution destination of the distribution member 540 from being switched to the third ball sending path when the ball receiving portion 467 is in a state where it is unable to receive a game ball.

Furthermore, the restricting plate 541 (distributing means) is formed so as to be able to appear and disappear from the first ball sending path KR1 (flow passage) or the third ball sending path KR3 (first branch passage), and the appearance and disappearance position is as follows:
Since the restricting plate 541 is the inner wall on the extension line of the flow direction at the downstream end of the first ball sending path KR1, the restricting plate 541 can be protruded at a position close to the game ball flowing down from the lower end side of the first ball sending path KR1. Therefore, it is possible to shorten the time required from when the restricting plate 541 starts to protrude into the flow-down passage or the third ball sending path KR3 (first branch passage) until the game ball can be distributed. As a result, the distribution destination can be reliably switched by the restricting plate 541.

In addition, the restricting plate 541 (distributing means) is projected into the third ball sending path KR3 (first branch path) to distribute the game ball flowing down the first ball sending path KR1 (flow passage) to the second ball sending path (second branch path), and the projecting direction of the restricting plate 541 is set to a direction pointing to the upstream end of the second ball sending path KR2, so that when the game ball flowing down the first ball sending path KR1 hits the restricting plate in the middle of the projecting motion, the game ball can be pushed into the second ball sending path KR by the projecting motion of the restricting plate. As a result, the distribution to the second ball sending path KR2 can be performed more reliably.

In this embodiment, the restricting plate 541 of the sorting member 540 is disposed closer to the shaft hole 545 than the storage plate 542, but the restricting plate 541 may be disposed farther away from the shaft hole 545 than the restricting plate 542. That is, the shaft hole 545 of the sorting member 540 may be disposed closer to the shaft hole 545 than the restricting plate 542.
Alternatively, the axis of the sorting member 540 may be located at point P on the rear surface of the downstream side of the third ball sending path KR3 shown in FIG. 74(b). In this case, the restricting plate 54 formed on the sorting member 540 may be
The positions of the reservoir plate 542 and the nozzle 543 are the same as those of the present embodiment.

With the shaft hole 545 positioned at point P, the displacement speed of the regulating plate 541 when the distribution member 540 is rotationally displaced can be made faster than that of the storage plate 542. Therefore, when the distribution member 540 is displaced from the storage position to the regulating position as described below, the regulating plate 541 can be made to protrude onto the flow path quickly. As a result, at the timing when the distribution member 540 is switched from the regulating position to the storage position, it is possible to prevent the game balls flowing down the first ball sending path KR1 from flowing into the third ball sending path KR3.

In this case, the shape of the regulating plate 541 and the storage plate 542 in a front view is such that the point P
In this way, the displacement area of restricting plate 541 and storage plate 542 can be minimized when sorting member 540 is displaced from the restricting position to the storage position (or the opposite). Furthermore, recesses 518, 519 that receive restricting plate 541 and storage plate 542 outside third ball sending path KR3 are formed in a recessed shape that follows the displacement trajectory of restricting plate 541 and storage plate 542.

Next, referring to Figures 75 and 76, a case where two or more balls are sent from the ball sending path when the sorting member 540 is placed in the storage position will be described. Figures 75(a) and (b) are partial enlarged views of the sorting unit 500. Figures 76(a) and (b) are partial enlarged views of the sorting unit 500.

78(a) and (b) correspond to the partial enlarged view of the sorting unit 500 in FIG. 74(a). Also, FIG. 75(a) to FIG. 76(b) sequentially show the transition state of the balls when they flow in. Furthermore, FIG. 75(a) to FIG. 76(b) show the state in which the sorting member 540 is placed in the storage position.

As shown in Figures 75 (a) and (b), when the distribution member 540 is positioned in the storage position and the first game ball T1 is sent to the first ball sending path KR1, as described above, the game ball T1 is sent to the third ball sending path KR3 and stopped above the storage plate 542.

In this case, the storage plate 542 is located downstream of the upper end of the third ball sending path KR3 by a distance between the radius and the diameter of the ball, so that a part of the ball stopped at the top of the storage plate 542,
It is in a state of being protruded toward the first ball throwing path KR1 (see FIG. 75).

Therefore, as described above, the third ball sending path KR3 (first branch passage) is formed with a downward incline toward the downstream side, and the inner wall on the gravity direction side is formed so that the game balls can roll along it, and the storage plate 542 (flow state change means) is formed so that it can appear and disappear into the third ball sending path KR3 from the inner wall on the lower side in the gravity direction, so that the time required from when the storage plate 542 starts to protrude into the third ball sending path KR3 until it reaches a state where it can regulate the flow of the game balls down can be shortened.
The distribution destination of the restriction plate 541 is from the second ball sending path KR2 (second branch passage) to the third ball sending path KR
When the switch is switched to 3 and the game ball is distributed to the third ball sending path KR3, it is possible to easily adjust the protrusion of the storage plate 542 in time to regulate the flow of the game ball downstream.

In addition, the regulating plate 541 is formed so as to be able to protrude and retract into the third ball sending path KR3, and when it is in a state where it protrudes to the maximum extent into the third ball sending path KR3, a force component in the protruding direction is applied from the game ball to the storage plate 542. Therefore, when regulating the flow down of the game ball sorted into the third ball sending path KR3, the storage plate 542 can be prevented from sinking into the recess 519 due to the impact of the game ball colliding with it.
This makes it easier to regulate the flow of game balls downward.

76(a) and 76(b), when the sorting unit 500 is in a storage state and a second game ball T2 is sent to the first ball sending path KR1, the game ball T2 is sent from the first ball sending path KR1 to the upper end of the third ball sending path KR3. Since the game ball T1 is stopped at the upper end of the third ball sending path KR3, the game ball T2 collides with the game ball T1 and is sent to the second ball sending path KR2.

In this case, as described above, the game ball T1 is in a state of protruding toward the first ball throwing path KR1, so the game ball T2 is not thrown to the inside of the third ball throwing path KR3, but is thrown along the second ball throwing path KR4.
Since the ball T2 can be guided to the third ball throwing path KR3, the game ball T2 can be thrown to the second ball throwing path KR2 without remaining inside the third ball throwing path KR3. Therefore, the throwing of the ball on the first ball throwing path KR1 and the second ball throwing path KR2 can be stabilized.

That is, the second ball sending path KR2 (second branch path) in the first ball sending path KR1 (flow passage)
The inner wall on the side facing the first ball sending path KR1 is configured to direct the game ball flowing down the first ball sending path KR2 (the first
The last game ball among the specified number (one ball) of game balls stored in the branch passage is sent to the third ball sending path K
Since it is formed so as to be guided to the side of R3, it is possible to easily make a game ball flowing down the first ball sending path KR1 collide with the last game ball among the specified number of game balls and then flow down the second ball sending path KR2.

In addition, the last game ball among the specified number of game balls means the game ball located on the upstream side (opposite the regulating plate 541). In this embodiment, the specified number is set to 1 ball. In this case, the last game ball means the game ball stored in the third ball sending path KR3 itself.

As described above, the lower end of the first ball sending path KR1 (flow passage) is inclined toward the center of the left-right direction of the base plate 520 (left-right direction in FIG. 73), and the inclined portion is curved in a gentle S-shape. That is, the flow direction of the downstream end of the first ball sending path KR1 (flow passage) is formed in the flow direction of the upstream end of the third ball sending path KR3, so that when a game ball flowing down the first ball sending path KR1 collides with the last game ball of the specified number of game balls stored in the third ball sending path, the direction of the repulsive force acting on the last game ball can be made different from the flow direction of the upstream end of the third ball sending path KR3. As a result, the repulsive force at the time of the collision causes the last game ball to fly out from the upstream end of the third ball sending path KR3 and flow into the second ball sending path KR2.
This can prevent the water from flowing into the

Furthermore, the upper end of the third ball sending path KR3 is formed inclined in the inclination direction of the lower end of the first ball sending path KR1, so that the position where the game ball T2 collides with the game ball T1 can be the upper hemisphere of the game ball T1 and can be on the second ball sending path KR2 side. Therefore, the rebound direction of the game ball T2 that collides with the game ball T1 can be the entrance (upper end) side of the second ball sending path KR2. Therefore, the game ball T2 that collides with the game ball T1 can be easily sent to the second ball sending path KR2. As a result, it is possible to suppress the ball from stagnation on the first ball sending path KR1 and the second ball sending path KR2.

In addition, the distribution destination by the regulating plate 541 is the third ball sending path KR3 (first branch passage), and the flow of the game ball in the third ball sending path KR3 is a storage plate 542 (flow state changing means).
When the specified number of game balls (one ball) is stored in the third ball sending path KR3,
Since the first ball sending path KR1 (flow passage) is formed so that the game balls flowing down the first ball sending path KR2 (second branch passage) can flow down the second ball sending path KR2 (second branch passage), when a specified number or more of game balls flow down the flow passage, the game balls exceeding the specified number (the second and subsequent game balls T2) can be prevented from being stuck on the first ball sending path KR1.
However, it is possible to prevent the ball from being obstructed by a game ball stuck on the first ball sending path KR1.

Next, referring to Figure 77, a case where a ball is thrown to the ball throwing path when the sorting member 540 is placed in the restricting position will be described.
FIG.

77(a) and (b) correspond to the partially enlarged view of the sorting unit 500 in FIG. 74(a). Also, FIG. 77(a) and (b) respectively show the transition state of the ball when the ball flows in. Furthermore, FIG. 77(a) and (b) show the state where the sorting member 540 is placed in the regulating position.

As shown in FIG. 77(a) and (b), when a ball is thrown to the first ball throwing path KR1 with the sorting member 540 being placed in the regulating position, the thrown game ball T1 is
1, the lower end of the game ball T1 collides with the regulating plate 541. As a result, the game ball T1 is guided to the second ball sending path KR2 and flows down the second ball sending path KR2.

Next, the operation of causing the ball to flow downstream of the third ball sending path KR3 will be described with reference to Fig. 78. Figs. 78(a) and (b) are partial enlarged views of the sorting unit 500.

78(a) and (b) correspond to the partial enlarged view of the sorting unit 500 in FIG. 74(a). Also, FIG. 78(a) and (b) respectively show the transition state of the balls when the balls flow in. Furthermore, FIG. 78(a) shows the state where the sorting member 540 is arranged in the storing position, and FIG. 78(b) shows the state where the sorting member 540 is arranged in the restricting position.

As shown in FIG. 78(a) and (b), the sorting unit 500 is in a storage state (FIG. 78(a)
)), when the sorting member 540 is displaced and placed in the regulating position,
The game ball T1 that is stuck above the storage plate 542 flows down the downstream side of the third ball sending path KR3.

That is, only balls that are stuck above the retention plate 542 are allowed to flow down the third ball sending path KR3. Also, as described above, balls that are stuck above the retention plate 542 are set to 1.
The balls can be sent down the ball throwing path KR3 one by one. Therefore, the third ball throwing path KR3
This stabilizes the number of balls flowing downstream, thereby preventing an unintended number of balls from flowing down the third ball sending path KR3.

Therefore, the sorting member 540 (sorting means) is displaced in accordance with the displacement of the sorting member 540.
The ball sending path (first branch passage) is provided with a restricting plate 541 (first recessed portion) and a storage plate (second recessed portion) that are formed so as to be able to appear and disappear from the ball sending path (first branch passage). The restricting plate 541 protrudes into the third ball sending path, thereby
The storage plate 542 is formed so that the game ball flowing down the ball sending path KR1 (flow passage) can be distributed to the second ball sending path KR2 (second branch path), and the storage plate 542 is located downstream of the third ball sending path KR3 from the regulating plate 541, and is formed so that the game ball distributed to the third ball sending path KR3 can be restricted from flowing down by protruding into the third ball sending path KR3, and the regulating plate 541 and the storage plate 542
When one of the balls protrudes into the passage of the third ball sending path KR3, the other is retracted outside the passage of the third ball sending path KR3 (inside the recesses 518, 519). Therefore, by displacing the distribution member 540 in conjunction with the displacement of the ball receiving portion 467 (displacement member), only the specified number of game balls (one ball) can be distributed to the third ball sending path KR3 and received by the ball receiving portion 467.

That is, the first state in which the restricting plate 541 protrudes to distribute the game ball flowing down the first ball sending path KR1 to the second ball sending path, and the second state in which the restricting plate 541 retracts to distribute the game ball flowing down the first ball sending path KR1 to the second ball sending path.
a second state in which the game balls flowing down the second inlet/outlet portion are distributed to the third ball sending path KR3, and a third state in which the game balls flowing down the second inlet/outlet portion are restricted from flowing down the third ball sending path KR3 (the game balls are stored).
A fourth state in which the second inflow/outflow section is retracted to cause the game balls stored in the third ball sending path to flow down and be received by the ball receiving section can be formed. By combining these states, only the specified number (one ball) of game balls are distributed to the third ball sending path KR3 and are received by the ball receiving section 46.
7 can receive it.

In addition, since the sorting member 540 includes the regulating plates 541 and 542, that is, is formed as a single component, the structure of the sorting member 540 (operating the regulating plate 541 and the storage plate 542,
This simplifies the structure for achieving these functions. Furthermore, since restricting plate 541 and storage plate 542 are in a state where one of them protrudes into the passage of third ball throwing path KR3, while the other is retracted outside the passage of third ball throwing path KR3, it is sufficient for distributing member 540 to be formed so as to be displaceable to two positions according to the two positions (first position and second position) of ball receiving portion 467. In other words, distributing member 540 can be displaced to two positions to form the first to fourth states described above. Therefore, the structure of distributing member 540 and the displacement of ball receiving portion 467 allow distributing member 540 to move in two positions.
The structure for displacing 0 can be simplified, thereby improving the reliability of the game ball distribution operation.

Next, referring to FIG. 79 to FIG. 80, the distribution unit 500 and the lower displacement unit 40
79 is a front view of the sorting unit 500 and the lower displacement unit 400. FIG 80 is a top view of the sorting unit 500 and the lower displacement unit 400.
The lower displacement unit 400 is shown in a state where it is placed in the retracted position.

79 and 80, the sorting unit 500 is disposed on the front side (lower side in FIG. 80) of the lower displacement unit 400. In this case, an opening 525a formed in the rolling portion 525 of the sorting unit 500 and an opening 451a formed in the decorative member 450 of the lower displacement member 440 are
Therefore, the ball rolling on the rolling portion 525 is sent into the inside of the lower displacement member 440 through the opening 525a and the opening 451a.

In other words, the ball is sent to the lower displacement member 440 by the ball flowing down the playing area in front of the game board 13 from the third winning hole 82 formed on the game board 13 via the ball sending unit 600 and the distribution unit 500.

Therefore, the distribution unit 500 has a rolling portion 525 that is connected to the track area of the ball receiving portion 467.
Since the allocating member 540 regulates the passage of the game balls through the rolling portion 525, even if the allocating member 540 malfunctions and the second or subsequent game balls T2 are sent, the second or subsequent game balls T2 can be reliably sent to the trajectory area of the allocating member 540 via the rolling portion 525. As a result, malfunctions caused by the second or subsequent game balls T2 can be made less likely to occur.

Next, the relationship between the distribution member 540 and the lower displacement member 440 will be described with reference to Figures 81 to 86. Figures 81, 83 and 85 are front views of the lower displacement unit 400, and Figures 82, 84 and 86 are cross-sectional views of the distribution unit 500.
83 and 85, the decorative member 450 and the front case 481 of the lower displacement member 440 are seen in a transparent manner, and only the distribution member 540 of the distribution unit 500 disposed on the front side is shown. Also, in Figures 82, 84 and 86, the distribution member 540 is shown by a chain line, and the abutment plate 464c of the lower displacement member 440 disposed on the back side is shown by a chain line.

81 and 82 show a state in which the ball receiving portion 467 of the lower displacement member 440 is disposed in the first position and the distribution member 540 is disposed in the restricted position.
83 and 84 show a state in which ball receiving portion 467 of lower displacement member 440 is in the second position and distributing member 540 is in the storage position, respectively, and a state in which lower displacement member 440 is in the retracted state. Figures 85 and 86 show a state in which ball receiving portion 467 of lower displacement member 440 is in the first position and distributing member 540 is in the storage position, respectively, and a state in which lower displacement member 440 is in the first overhanging state.

As shown in Figures 81 and 82, when the lower displacement member 440 is in a retracted state and the ball receiving portion 467 of the lower displacement member 440 is in a first position, the rack 466 that drives the ball receiving portion 467 is positioned on the other end side of the lower displacement member 440 (the left side when viewed from the front of the lower displacement member 440) as described above, and the movable rack 464 is positioned on the rear side in a state where it is overlapped in the fore-and-aft direction.

That is, movable rack 464, like rack 466, is disposed on the other end side of lower displacement member 440 (on the left side as viewed from the front of lower displacement member 440). Thus, abutment plate 464c formed on movable rack 464 is positioned on the other end side of lower displacement member 440. In this case, the side surface on the other end side of abutment plate 464c (the surface on the left side as viewed from the front) is in abutment with protrusion 543 of sorting member 540. As a result, a driving force for rotation is applied to sorting member 540 about the axis of shaft hole 545, and sorting member 540 is displaced to a position (restriction position) where restricting plate 541 protrudes into first ball throwing path KR1.

Therefore, when the lower displacement member 440 is in the retracted state and the ball receiving portion 467 is in the first position, a ball sent to the first ball sending path KR1 of the sorting unit 500 is sent to the second ball sending path KR2 without flowing down to the third ball sending path KR3.
By displacing the sorting member 540 from a storage state in which balls are stored above the storage plate 542 to a regulating position, the game ball can be sent downstream of the third ball sending path KR3 (downstream of the storage plate 542). At this time, the game ball can be sent to the inside of the ball receiving portion 467 by performing a ball receiving operation on the ball receiving portion 467.

In addition, a third electric device 82a for storing the game balls in the distribution unit 500
The opening operation of the third electric device 82a is performed before the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced to the first position, and when the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced to the first position, the third electric device 82a is closed. As a result, when the distribution member 540 is displaced from the storage position to the restriction position, the flow of the game balls passing through the first ball sending path KR1 is not restricted by the restriction plate 541 and the storage plate 542, and unintended game balls are prevented from flowing down the third ball sending path KR1.
It is possible to prevent the ball from being thrown downstream of the ball throwing path KR3.

In addition, since the sorting member 540 is formed to be operable in conjunction with the displacement of the ball receiving portion 467, it is possible to restrict or permit the sending of the game ball to the trajectory area of the ball receiving portion 467 according to the displacement of the ball receiving portion 467. In other words, since it is possible to switch between restricting and permitting the sending of the game ball in mechanical synchronization with the displacement of the ball receiving portion 467, it is possible to eliminate the need for, for example, a drive means for driving the sorting member 540 according to the detection result of a sensor that detects the position of the sorting member 540, or the control of each of these means, which accordingly allows for a reduction in product costs and an improvement in operational reliability.

Furthermore, the distribution member 540 is configured such that the ball receiving portion 467 moves in a direction from the second position to the first position (second direction).
In conjunction with the displacement of the ball receiving portion 467, the game ball T2 is allowed to be thrown into the trajectory region of the ball receiving portion 467, so that the game ball can be reliably thrown into the trajectory region of the ball receiving portion 467, in the region on the first direction side of the ball receiving portion 467.

In addition, the ball receiving portion 467 is formed to be displaceable between a switching position that switches the sorting member 540 and a receiving position (second position) that is set at a position different from the switching position (first position). When the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced to the switching position, the sorting destination by the sorting member 540 is switched to the third ball sending path KR3, and when the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced to the receiving position, the ball receiving portion 467 is able to receive a game ball from the third ball sending path, and
Since the distribution destination of the distribution member 540 can be switched to the second ball sending path KR2, it is possible to prevent game balls exceeding the specified number (one ball in this embodiment) that the ball receiving portion 467 can receive from being distributed to the third ball sending path KR3.

That is, when the switching position and the receiving position are set to the same position, the sorting member 5
Since the ball receiving section 467 receives game balls while the distribution destination by the ball receiving section 467 remains switched to the third ball sending path KR3, there is a risk that game balls will be distributed to the third ball sending path KR3 in excess of the specified number that the ball receiving section 467 can receive. If a separate means for restricting the inflow of game balls into the third ball sending path KR3 is provided, the structure will become more complex, reducing reliability and increasing product costs.

In contrast, in the embodiment, the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced to the switching position, and after a specified number of game balls (one ball in the present embodiment) are distributed to the third ball sending path KR3, the distribution member 540
When the ball is displaced to the receiving position, the distribution destination is switched to the second ball sending path KR2, so that more than one game ball is prevented from flowing down the third ball sending path.
The ball receiving section 467 can prevent game balls that exceed the specified number (one ball) that can be received from being distributed to the third ball sending path KR3. In addition, since there is no need to separately provide the above-mentioned means (means for restricting the inflow of game balls into the third ball sending path KR3), it is possible to improve reliability and reduce product costs.

In addition, when the power is turned on, the pachinko machine 10 starts from the position where each operating unit was turned off. Furthermore, when the power is turned off, there is a possibility that only the control is reset. In that case, if the distribution member 540 is equipped with a driving means, when the power is turned on, the distribution unit 500 in the storage state operates during the initial operation to cause the game ball to flow down the third ball sending path KR3, and the game ball may be sent to the retreat side (first position side) of the ball receiving part 467 arranged at the third position.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the displacement of the sorting member 540 and the displacement of the ball receiving portion 467 are synchronized, so that even if the power is turned off when the pachinko machine 10 is not positioned at the predetermined reference position, it is possible to prevent unintended game balls from being sent to the trajectory area of the ball receiving portion 467 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. As a result, it is possible to prevent game balls from getting stuck inside the lower displacement member 440.

Furthermore, when the power is turned off while game balls remain in the orbit area of the lower displacement member 440, the ball receiving portion 467 can be made to perform the above-mentioned ejection operation, thereby ejecting the game balls remaining in the orbit area of the ball receiving portion 467 outside the lower displacement member 440 and collecting them from the collection port 411f.

Next, a description will be given with reference to Figures 83 and 84. As shown in Figures 83 and 84, in a state where the lower displacement member 440 is arranged in the retracted state and the ball receiving portion 467 of the lower displacement member 440 is in the second position,
When the lower displacement member 440 is positioned at the first position or the third position (a position other than the first position), as described above, the rack 466 that drives the ball receiving portion 467 is positioned at approximately the center position in the left-right direction (left-right direction in Figure 83) of the lower displacement member 440, and the movable rack 464 is positioned at a position moved from the end on the other end side (left side in the left-right direction in Figure 83) of the lower displacement member 440 to one end side.

Therefore, the contact plate 464c formed on the movable rack 464 is disposed at a position spaced from the end of the other end side of the lower displacement member 4440 toward one end side. In this case, the surface of the other end side of the contact plate 464c (the surface on the left side when viewed from the front) is spaced from the protrusion 543 of the sorting member 540. As a result, the sorting member 540 is rotated about the axis of the shaft hole 545 by the biasing force of the biasing spring SP4 interposed between the sorting member 540 and the base plate 520, and moves the storage plate 542 to the third position.
It is displaced to a position (storage position) protruding into the ball throwing path KR3.

Therefore, when the lower displacement member 440 is in the retreated state and the ball receiving portion 467 is in the second position or the third position (a position other than the first position), the first ball of the sorting unit 500
The ball thrown along the ball throwing path KR1 is stopped above the storage plate 542.
As described above, when the sorting unit 500 is in a storage state, a ball sent to the first ball sending path KR1 collides with a ball stopped above the storage plate 542 and is sent to the second ball sending path KR2.

Next, a description will be given with reference to Figures 85 and 86. As shown in Figures 85 and 86, when lower displacement member 440 is disposed in the first or second overhanging state, lower displacement member 440 is slidably displaced and rotated with respect to front base 411 as described above. Thus, contact plate 464c formed on movable rack 464 is displaced with the displacement of lower displacement member 440 and is separated from protrusion 543 of distribution member 540. As a result, distribution member 540 is rotated around the axis of shaft hole 545 by the biasing force of biasing spring SP4 interposed between distribution member 540 and base plate 520, and is displaced to a position (storage position) where storage plate 542 is protruded into third ball sending path KR3.

Therefore, when the lower displacement member 440 is in the first or second extended state, the ball sent to the first ball sending path KR1 of the distribution unit 500 is stopped above the storage plate 542. Also, as described above, when the distribution unit 500 is in the storage state, the ball sent to the first ball sending path KR1 collides with the ball stopped above the storage plate 542 and is sent to the second ball sending path KR2.

That is, the lower displacement member 440 is in the first protruding state and the second protruding state (a state other than the retracted state).
In this case, the position of the opening 451a of the decorative member 450 is displaced with the displacement of the lower displacement member 440, and the communication state of the ball between the opening 451a and the opening 525a of the distribution unit 500 is released. Therefore, when the ball flows down the third ball sending path KR3, there is a risk that the ball will be discharged from the opening 451a into the inside of the rear case 300. In this embodiment, however, by setting the distribution member 540 to the storage position, it is possible to prevent the ball from flowing down the downstream side of the third ball sending path KR3. As a result, it is possible to prevent the ball from being discharged into the inside of the rear case 300.

In other words, the lower displacement member 440 of the lower displacement unit 400 is formed to be displaceable among a retracted state, a first extending state, and a second extending state, and since the ball receiving portion 467 is disposed on the lower displacement member 440 when the lower displacement member 440 is located in the retracted state, it is possible to form a mode in which the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced when the lower displacement member 440 is disposed in the retracted state, and a mode in which the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced when the lower displacement member 440 is disposed in the first or second extending state. Therefore, the presentation effect can be enhanced accordingly.

In this case, when the lower displacement member 440 is disposed in the first or second protruding state, the ball receiving portion 4
67 cannot receive the game ball from the rolling portion 525 of the third ball sending path KR3 (the third ball sending path KR
In this state, the rolling portion 525 of the ball receiving portion 467 and the opening 451a of the lower displacement member 440 are not connected to each other. In this state, the abutment plate 464c linked to the ball receiving portion 467 is unable to abut against the distribution member 540. Therefore, when the ball receiving portion 467 is in a state where it cannot receive game balls (the lower displacement member 440 is arranged in the first protruding state or the second protruding state), the distribution destination by the distribution member 540 can be prevented from being switched to the third ball sending path KR3.

In addition, since the sorting member 540 is disposed on the base plate 520 of the sorting unit 500 which is formed as a separate member from the base member 470 of the lower displacement member 440,
This makes it possible to prevent the base member 470 of the device 40 from becoming large.

Here, the displacement of the lower displacement member 440 from the first protruding state to the retracted state involves not only a rotational displacement in the left-right direction but also a rotational displacement, so that when the inclined contact plate 464c undergoes this rotational displacement, the protrusion 543 of the sorting member 540 comes into contact with the upper surface of the contact plate 464c, and the sorting member 540
There is a risk that the rotational displacement may not be possible.

In contrast, in this embodiment, when the lower displacement unit 400 is displaced from the first extended position shown in FIG. 85 to the retreated state, the ball receiving portion 467 is moved to a position other than the first position (
The lower displacement member 440 is displaced to the retracted position (the second position or the third position). This makes it possible to prevent the contact plate 464c of the lower displacement member 440 displaced to the retracted position from colliding with the protrusion 543. As a result, the protrusion 543 of the sorting member 540 comes into contact with the upper surface of the contact plate 464c, and the sorting member 540 is displaced to the retracted position (the second position or the third position).
This can prevent the rotational displacement of the rotor 40 from becoming impossible.

In addition, since the distribution member 540 has the bulging portion 543a formed thereon as described above, even if the protrusion 543 of the distribution member 540 abuts against the upper surface of the abutment plate 464c when the lower displacement unit 400 is displaced from the first protruding state to the retracted state due to a control failure or the like, the distribution member 540 can be moved in the same manner as the distribution member 540.
40 can be rotated and displaced.

That is, the bulging portion 543a can reduce the contact area with the abutment plate 464c, so that the bulging portion 543a can slide easily along the surface when the abutment plate 464c abuts against it. This makes it easier to rotate and displace the sorting member 540. As a result, it is possible to prevent the protrusion 543 of the sorting member 540 from abutting against the upper surface of the abutment plate 464c, preventing the sorting member 540 from being unable to rotate and displace.

Next, the configuration of the drive transmission portion of the rotation unit 700 will be described with reference to Fig. 87 to Fig. 90. Fig. 87 is a front view of the rotation unit 700, Fig. 88 is a rear view of the rotation unit 700, Fig. 89 is an exploded perspective front view of the rotation unit 700, and Fig. 90 is a perspective view of the rotation unit 700.
FIG. 7 is an exploded rear perspective view of the rotation unit 700.

As shown in FIG. 87 to FIG. 90, the rotation unit 700 includes a decoration unit 750 composed of a plurality of displacement members and a ball receiving base 71 disposed above the decoration unit 750 in the direction of gravity.
0, and a rear base 720 arranged on the rear side of the ball receiving stand 710 and the decoration unit 750.
The decorative unit 750 is mainly formed with a left-side transmission member 730 arranged on the left side of the decorative unit 750 when viewed from the front, and a right-side transmission member 740 arranged on the right side of the decorative unit 750 when viewed from the front.

The ball receiving base 710 is a member that drops the game balls that are ejected from the ejection opening 471 on one side of the lower displacement member 440 of the lower displacement unit 400 described above. This allows the balls that are sent to the inside of the lower displacement member 440 to be sent to the rotation unit 700.
The detailed configuration of 0 will be described later.

The decoration unit 750 is a block body with a substantially D-shape with a curved portion disposed at the top in a side view, and the front side is decorated with characters and patterns. The decoration unit 750 is composed of a plurality of members, and is configured to be displaceable by transmission of a drive force, which will be described later. The configuration of the decoration unit 750 will be described later.

The rear base 720 is a plate member that connects the rear side of the ball receiving stand 710 and the rear side of the decorative unit 750, and is formed in a generally rectangular shape when viewed from the front.
Because the decorative unit 750 is composed of multiple movable parts, the fastening parts are limited; however, by connecting the decorative unit 750 and the ball receiving base 710 on the rear side in a position that is not visible to the player, the decorative unit 750 and the ball receiving base 710 can be assembled as a single unit while maintaining the range of motion of the decorative unit 750.

The left transmission member 730 includes a drive motor KM4 disposed on the left side surface (left side of FIG. 87) of the decorative unit 750, a transmission member 730 that transmits the driving force of the drive motor KM4, a motor base 732 to which the drive motor KM4 is attached, and a gear cover 732 that covers the transmission member 730.
33 and a ball throwing path cover 734 that is attached to the gear cover 733 and forms a predetermined gap between itself and the gear cover 733.

The drive motor KM4 is a drive source for moving each member of the decorative unit 750 (described later). The drive of the drive motor KM4 is transmitted by a transmission member 730 (described later).

The transmission member 730 is mainly formed with a transmission gear 731a attached to the shaft of the drive motor KM4, a transmission gear 731b meshing with the transmission gear 731a, a transmission gear 731c meshing with the transmission gear 731b, a transmission gear 731d arranged adjacent to the transmission gear 731c and coaxially disposed by a shaft 735, and a load gear 731e meshing with the transmission gear 731d.

The transmission gear 731a is attached to the drive motor KM4 as described above, and rotates when the drive motor KM4 is driven to rotate.

The transmission gear 731b has a one-way clutch OW1 disposed therein, and the inner ring of the one-way clutch OW1 is connected to the shaft portion JB1 which transmits the rotational driving force of the ornamental unit 750 to the right-side transmission member 740 on the right side.

The one-way clutch OW1 is a cam-type clutch that includes an inner ring that is arranged on the inside and has a cam surface formed on its outer peripheral surface, an outer ring that is disposed on the outside of the inner ring, and a number of springs and rollers between the inner and outer rings. When the outer ring attempts to rotate in one direction relative to the inner ring, the contact pressure between the cam surface and the rollers increases, creating resistance and transmitting power to the inner ring, and when the outer ring rotates in the other direction relative to the inner ring, the contact pressure between the cam surface and the rollers decreases, causing slippage and cutting off the power transmission.

Therefore, when a driving force in one direction is transmitted from the driving motor KM4 to the transmission gear 731b,
A rotational driving force can be transmitted to the shaft portion JB1, and when a driving force in the other direction is transmitted from the drive motor KM4, the outer ring slips relative to the inner ring, and the transmission of the driving force to the shaft portion JB1 is interrupted.

The one-way clutch OW1 is disposed inside the transmission gear 731c, similar to the transmission gear 731b. A shaft 735 is disposed inside the one-way clutch OW1 of the transmission gear 731c.

Therefore, when a driving force in one direction is transmitted from the driving motor KM4 to the transmission gear 731c,
When a driving force in the other direction is transmitted from the driving motor KM4 to the shaft 735, the outer ring slips relative to the inner ring, and the transmission of the driving force to the shaft 735 is interrupted.
The transmission gear 731c is meshed with the transmission gear 731b, and the rotation directions of the transmission gears 731c and 731b are opposite to each other. Therefore, when the transmission gear 731b is rotated in one direction, the transmission gear 731c
When the transmission gear 731b is rotated in the other direction, the transmission gear 731b is rotated in one direction. That is, by switching the rotation direction of the drive motor KM4, the shaft portion JB1 is rotated or the shaft 735 is rotated.

The transmission gear 731d is attached to the shaft 735. As described above, the shaft 735 is
Therefore, the transmission gear 731c rotates in one direction only when the transmission gear 731c is rotated in one direction, and is not rotated in the other direction.

The load gear 731e is connected to a shaft portion 791a of a resistance member 791 whose shaft hole is attached to the box member 760.
The resistance member 791 is formed with a shaft portion 791a that is rotatable with respect to a base portion that is fastened to the box member 760. The resistance member 791 is formed so that a predetermined amount of resistance acts when the shaft portion 791a rotates with respect to the base portion. In other words, a predetermined amount of force is required to rotate the shaft portion 791a, so that the load gear 73 connected to the shaft portion 791a
Similarly, a force of at least a predetermined amount is required to rotate 1e.

This makes it possible to suppress the rotation of the rotating body 800 meshed with the transmission gear 731d due to the inertial force when the rotating body 800 is rotated and stopped by the rotation of the transmission gear 731d.
The resistance when the shaft portion 791a rotates relative to the base portion is set to be larger than the inertial force acting around the axis of the rotating body 800 when the rotating body 800 stops rotating.

The load gear 731e is connected to a transmission gear 731d that is disposed coaxially with the transmission gear 731c.
That is, the transmission gear 731c can rotate in only one direction.
When the transmission gear 731b is rotated in the other direction, the transmission of the drive force between the transmission gear 731c and the transmission gear 731d is interrupted, so that the resistance of the load gear 731e can be suppressed. As a result, when the transmission gear 731b is rotated in one direction, the resistance of the load gear 731e can be suppressed.

The motor base 732 is formed in a box shape that opens on the decorative unit 750 side, and the drive motor KM4 is disposed on the outside of the bottom part of the box (left side of FIG. 87) with the shaft inserted inside the box.
That is, the depth dimension of the box of the motor base 732 is the same as that of the transmission gear 731a.
As a result, the motor base 732 can be mounted on the decorative unit 750 with the drive motor KM4 and the transmission gear 731a attached thereto, and the transmission gear 731a can be prevented from colliding with the decorative unit 750.

The gear cover 733 is formed in a vertically long rectangle when viewed from the rear, and is fastened to the decorative unit 750 with the left transmission member 730 disposed therebetween. A through hole 733a is formed through the decorative unit 750 at a position opposite to an axial hole of the rotating body 800, which will be described later. This allows balls rolling inside the rotating body 800 to be discharged to the outside through the through hole 733a. The balls sent to the rotating body 800 will be described later.

Ball throwing path cover 734 is a member disposed on the outside of gear cover 733 (left side of FIG. 87), and is formed from a plate-like body with a wall portion protruding from its edge toward gear cover 733. This allows a gap to be formed between gear cover 733 and ball throwing path cover 734, and a ball that has passed through through hole 733a of gear cover 733 can be passed through the gap and discharged to the outside of rotation unit 700. The ball discharged from the gap between gear cover 733 and the ball throwing path cover is sent to a recovery path (not shown) and collected.

The right transmission member 740 includes a rotation member 741 connected to the other end of the shaft portion JB1.
It is mainly formed with an arm member 742 having one end connected to the rotating member 741 , and a crank cover 743 that is disposed on the decorative unit 750 while covering the rotating member 741 and the arm member 742 .

The rotating member 741 includes a main body 741b formed in a disk-like plate shape and a
The one-way clutch OW1 is fitted to the shaft of the decoration unit 750 on the opposite side (FIG. 87
The recess 741 is formed mainly with a cylindrical protrusion 741a protruding to the right side.

The one-way clutch OW1 attached to the rotating member 741 has an axial hole of an inner ring inserted into the other end side of the shaft portion JB. The one-way clutch OW1 is disposed such that the inner ring and the outer ring are not transmitted when a rotation in the opposite direction to the rotation direction of the shaft portion JB1 is input to the inner ring.

With this, when a driving force having a rotational speed faster than the rotational speed transmitted from the shaft portion JB1 to the rotating member 741 is input to the outer ring of the one-way clutch OW1, only the outer ring is rotated, and the rotating member 741 can be rotated by a driving force other than that of the drive motor KM4. As a result, the rotating member 741 can be rotated at two or more different speeds.

The arm member 742 has a shape that combines a C-shape and an I-shape when viewed from the side, and has an I-shape at one end.
The arm member 742 is formed by connecting the C-shaped portion and the I-shaped portion to each other at the other end thereof. The arm member 742 is mainly formed with a shaft hole 742a formed through the connecting portion between the C-shaped portion and the I-shaped portion, a first elliptical sliding groove 742b formed through one end of the I-shaped portion, and a second elliptical sliding groove 742c formed through the other end of the C-shaped portion.

The shaft hole 742a is a shaft portion 764a formed on a right side plate 764 of a box member 760 described later.
is inserted into the shaft hole 742a, and is formed with an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the shaft portion 764a. Therefore, the arm member 742 is disposed on the decorative unit 750 with the shaft portion 764a inserted into the shaft hole 742a, and is therefore rotatable relative to the decorative unit 750.

The first sliding groove 742b is a hole into which the protrusion 741a of the rotating member 741 is inserted, and the width dimension in the short direction of the elliptical shape is set to be larger than the outer diameter of the protrusion 741a.
The protrusion 741a can be inserted into the inside of the first sliding groove 742b, and the arm member 742 can be rotationally displaced by the rotation of the rotating member 741.

Furthermore, the rotating member 741 is formed so that its outer diameter is smaller than the longitudinal dimension of the I-shaped portion of the arm member 742, and its axis is disposed at a position spaced apart from the axis hole 742a of the arm member 742 by more than half the distance of the longitudinal dimension of the I-shaped portion. This allows the arm member 742 to perform reciprocating motion around the axis of the axis hole 742a by rotating the rotating member 741.

The second sliding groove 742c is a hole into which a protrusion 773a of the right cover portion 773 described later is inserted, and the width dimension in the short direction of the elliptical shape is set to be larger than the outer diameter of the protrusion 773a.
Therefore, the protrusion 773a can be inserted into the inside of the second sliding groove 742c.
is formed to be rotatably displaceable with respect to the box member 760. Therefore, as described above, when the rotating member 741 is rotated and the arm member 742 performs a reciprocating rotational motion, the right side cover portion 773 connected to the other end of the arm member 742 can be rotated with respect to the box member 760.

The crank cover 743 is mainly formed with an elliptical portion 743a that is elliptical in rear view, and a ball throwing portion 743b that is connected to the rear side of the elliptical portion 743a.

The elliptical portion 743a is a cover that covers the arm member 742, and its outer shape in a side view is formed to be larger than the arm member 742 and the displacement area of the arm member 742, and a wall portion is formed that protrudes from the edge toward the decorative unit 750 larger than the thickness of the arm member 742. This allows the arm member 742 to be disposed between the opposing crank cover 743 and the decorative unit 750 when the crank cover 743 is disposed on the decorative unit 750.

The ball throwing section 743b is a path member for sending a ball flowing down the flow area in front of the game board 13 to a recovery path when the ball is collected from a predetermined collection port, and is formed in a rod shape with a predetermined size of space inside. The upper end side of the ball throwing section 743b is opened and connected to the collection port of the game board 13, and the lower end side is connected to an opening formed in the decorative unit 750. This allows the ball collected on the game board 13 to be guided through the ball throwing section 743b to the inside of the decorative unit 750 and to a recovery path not shown.

Next, the decorative unit 750 will be described with reference to Fig. 91 to Fig. 95. Fig. 91 is a front view of the decorative unit 750. Fig. 92(a) is a side view of the decorative unit 750 as viewed in the direction of the arrow XCIIa in Fig. 91, and Fig. 92(b) is a side view of the decorative unit 750 as viewed in the direction of the arrow XCIIb in Fig. 91.
91(b) and 91(c) are side views of the decorative unit 750 as viewed from the direction of the arrow A. Fig. 93 is an exploded perspective front view of the decorative unit 750, and Fig. 94 is an exploded perspective rear view of the decorative unit 750. Note that Figs. 91(b) and 91(c) show the right side panel 764 and the left side panel 76
5 and the state in which it is viewed transparently.

As shown in Figures 91 to 94, the decorative unit 750 includes a box member 760 which is an outer decorative portion of the decorative unit 750, a lid member 770 which is disposed on the upper side of the box member 760 in the direction of gravity (upper side in Figure 91 (a)), and a rotating body 80 which is disposed inside the box member 760 and the lid member 770.
It is formed mainly with 0.

The box member 760 is mainly formed with a base member 762 arranged below the rotating body 800, a front panel 761 arranged in front of the base member 762, a bottom panel 763 located on the bottom surface of the base member 762, a right side panel 764 arranged on the right side of the base member 762 when viewed from the front, and a left side panel 765 arranged on the left side of the base member 762 when viewed from the front.

The base member 762 is formed in a horizontally elongated rectangular shape larger than the rotating body 800 in a top view, and is formed with a thickness in the direction of gravity that is greater than the outer diameter of a sphere. The upper surface of the base member 762 is formed into a curved surface coaxial with the axis of the rotating body 800. This makes it possible to suppress collision between the base member 762 and the rotating body 800 when the base member 762 is disposed near the rotating body 800.

The base member 762 is formed mainly by a recess 762a recessed downward in the left-right direction on the upper surface, and a ball throwing portion 762b recessed in a substantially L-shape on the bottom surface.

The recess 762a is a groove in which the shaft portion JB1 described above is disposed, and the decorative unit 75
7. The shaft JB1 is recessed on the shaft of the transmission gear 731b disposed on the side surface of the drive motor KM4. This allows the driving force of the drive motor KM4 to be transmitted via the shaft JB1.

The ball throwing portion 762b is recessed in an L-shape on the bottom surface, and one end side is connected to the right side panel 7
The ball-throwing section 762b is connected to the opening 764b of the box member 760 and the other end is connected to the rear side of the winning hole 761a of the front plate 761. The width of the recess in the ball-throwing section 762b is made larger than the diameter of the ball. This allows the ball to be thrown into the box member 760 by disposing the lower plate 763 on the lower side.

The front plate 761 is formed in a horizontally long rectangle when viewed from the front, and is formed with a predetermined thickness on the rear side. The front plate 761 also has a winning opening 761a formed on the front side that is large enough to insert a ball. The winning opening 761a is connected to the ball throwing section 762b of the base member 762 disposed on the rear side as described above. Therefore, the ball thrown inside the winning opening 761a is thrown to the ball throwing section 762b of the base member 762.

The right side panel 764 is formed in a D-shape with an upward curved outer shape in a side view. The right side panel 764 includes a shaft portion 764a that protrudes outward from the decorative unit 750, a bearing portion 764c formed below the shaft portion 764a, a curved opening 764d formed in a curved shape on the same axis as the rotation axis of the rotating body 800, and a ball throwing portion 762b of the crank cover 743.
and an engagement portion 764e that is formed in a semicircular shape in a side view on the axis of the rotation shaft of the rotating body 800.

The opening 764b allows the ball thrown from the ball throwing portion of the crank cover 743 to pass through the base member 76
2, and is formed to be larger than the outer diameter of the ball. This allows the ball thrown to the crank cover 743 to be sent to the base member 762.

The bearing portion 764c is a hole into which the shaft portion JB1 described above is inserted, and is formed with an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the shaft portion JB1. This enables the driving force to be transmitted to the right transmission member 740 described above.

The curved opening 764d is an opening into which the protrusion 773a protruding from the right cover portion 773 is inserted.
The projection 773a is formed in an arc shape coaxial with the rotation axis of the cover member 770. This makes it possible to prevent the projection 773a and the curved opening 764d from colliding with each other when the cover member 770 is rotationally displaced.

The engaging portion 764e is a member that engages with the end portion on the right side in a front view of the base plate 810 disposed inside the rotating body 800, and holds the base plate 810 non-rotatable. That is, the tip portion 811a of the right end portion 811 of the base plate 810 is inserted into the engaging portion 764e.
The base plate 810 is made non-rotatable.

The left side panel 765 is formed so that its outer shape in a side view is substantially the same as that of the right side panel 764 .
In addition, the left side side plate 765 is formed mainly with a through hole 765a formed on the axis of the rotating body 800, an axis portion 765b protruding toward the rotating body 800, and a through hole 765c into which the axis portion 791a of the resistance member 791 is inserted.

The through hole 765a is an opening for inserting the ball discharged from the opening on the left side of the rotating body 800 when viewed from the front into the through hole 733a of the motor base 732 described above.
65a is formed on the axis of the rotating body 800, and the size of its inner diameter is set to be the same as the inner diameter of the opening on the left side of the rotating body 800 when viewed from the front.

The shaft portion 765b is inserted into a shaft hole 781 formed in a rotation restricting member 780, which will be described later.
The rotation restricting member 780 can be held in a rotatable state. The displacement of the rotation restricting member 780 will be described later.

The through hole 765c is a hole through which the shaft portion 791a of the resistance member 791 is inserted as described above, and is formed at a position facing the side surface of the load gear 731e described above.

The lower panel 763 is a plate member that is disposed on the lower surface of the base member 762, so that the ball throwing portion 762b of the base member 762 and the lower panel 763 form a throwing path through which a ball can pass.
Further, an opening 763a is formed in the lower plate 763, penetrating the lower plate 763 in the vertical direction.
is an opening for sending the ball sent inside the ball sending section 762b to a recovery path (not shown). Therefore, the ball that has entered the winning opening 761a of the front panel 761 and the ball sent from the play area to the ball sending section 743b of the right transmission member 740 can be discharged from inside the decorative unit 750.

The lid member 770 is mainly formed with a curved lid portion 771 formed in a curved shape coaxial with the axis of the rotating body 800, a right side lid portion 773 fastened to the right side surface of the curved lid portion 771 when viewed from the front, and a left side lid portion 772 fastened to the left side surface of the curved lid portion 771 when viewed from the front.

As described above, the curved lid portion 771 has an outer shape in a side view that is curved coaxially with the axis of the rotating body 800 and has a larger radius than the rotating body 800. The curved lid portion 771 includes a transparent portion 771a formed from a transparent plate on a part of the front side.

The transparent portion 771a is a plate that allows the player to see the patterns and characters drawn on the outer circumferential surface of the rotating body 800.
Even if the upper end side of the rotating body 800 is covered by the transparent portion 771a, the display of the rotating body 800 can be seen through the transparent portion 771a.

The right cover portion 773 is formed in a circular shape in a side view, and the radius of the outer side of the circle is set to be approximately the same as the radius of the curved cover portion 771. The inner diameter of the right cover portion 773 is formed to be larger than the size of the outer shape of the right end portion 811 of the rotating body 800 in a side view. As a result, the right cover portion 773 is
The right end 811 of the rotating body 800 is inserted into the inner portion of the annular shape.

Furthermore, the right cover portion 773 is formed mainly with a protrusion 773a protruding outward (to the right side when viewed from the front) of the decorative unit 750 and a recess 773b recessed radially inwardly in the outer circumferential edge portion. As described above, the protrusion 773a is a protrusion that is inserted into the second sliding groove 742c of the arm member 742.

A protrusion 871 of the opening/closing member 870, which will be described later, is inserted into the recess 773b, thereby allowing the opening/closing member 870 to rotate. Therefore, the recess width of the recess 773b is set to be larger than the outer shape of the protrusion 871. In addition, the recess 773b is formed at a position substantially opposite to the edge of the right-side cover portion 773 on which the curved cover portion 771 is disposed.

The left side cover portion 772 is formed in a circular ring shape in a side view, and the radius of the outside of the ring is set to be approximately the same as the radius of the curved cover portion 771. The inner diameter of the left side cover portion 772 is formed to be larger than the outer diameter of a tooth surface 881a of a left rotating portion 880, which will be described later. As a result, the left side cover portion 772 is disposed in a state in which the left rotating portion 880 of the rotating body 800 is inserted into the inner portion of the circular ring shape.

The left side cover 772 is formed with a plate-shaped sensor plate 772a that protrudes outward (left side when viewed from the front) of the decorative unit 750. The sensor plate 772a is disposed between two opposing forked sensors (not shown) so that the position of the left side cover 772 can be detected.

Here, the cover member 770 for the rotating body 800 will be described. When the rotating body 800 is assembled, the cover member 770 is disposed in such a manner that the left and right ends of the rotating body 800 are inserted inside the right cover part 773 and the left cover part 772 (separate members) before assembly.
The rotating body 800 and the lid member 770 are connected by assembling the right lid portion 773, the left lid portion 772 and the curved lid portion 771. Thus, the lid member 770 is rotatable relative to the rotating body 800 around the axis of the rotating body.

The rotation restricting member 780 is bent into a generally L-shape in side view. The rotation restricting member 780 is mainly provided with an axial hole 781 penetrating the bent portion, a protrusion 782 protruding in the bending direction on one end side, and a contact surface 783 formed flat on the tip of the other end side.

As described above, the shaft portion 765b of the left side plate 765 is inserted into the shaft hole 781. This allows the rotation restricting member 780 to be rotatable relative to the left side plate 765. In addition, the biasing spring SP5 is inserted into the shaft portion. As a result, a rotational force in one direction is applied to the rotation restricting member 780.

The protrusion 782 engages with an engagement protrusion 882 of the left rotating part 880, which will be described later, to rotate the rotating body 8
The abutment surface 783 is a surface against which the end portion on the rear side of the cover member 770 described above abuts, and the abutment of the cover member 770 allows the rotation restricting member 780 to rotate. The restricting manner between the rotation restricting member 780 and the rotating body 800 will be described later.

Next, a transmission path of the driving force when the drive motor KM4 is rotated will be described with reference to Figures 95 to 96. Figures 95(a) and 96(a) show the rotation unit 700 as viewed in the direction of the arrow XCVa in Figure 89, and Figures 95(b) and 96(b) show the rotation unit 700 as viewed in the direction of the arrow XCVa in Figure 89.
The rotary unit 700 in Vb.

In Fig. 95, the displacement direction of each member when the shaft of the drive motor KM4 is rotated in the positive direction (clockwise) is shown by a two-dot chain line, and in Fig. 96, the displacement direction of each member when the shaft of the drive motor KM4 is rotated in the negative direction (counterclockwise) is shown by a two-dot chain line.

95(a) and 95(b), when the drive motor KM4 is driven in the positive direction, the transmission gear 731a is rotated in the positive direction. When the transmission gear 731a is rotated in the positive direction, the transmission gear 731b is rotated in the negative direction and the transmission gear 731c is rotated in the positive direction.

In this case, the one-way clutch OW1 disposed on the transmission gear 731b does not transmit the rotation of the outer ring to the inner ring, and the shaft portion JB1 does not rotate. Therefore, the driving force is not transmitted to the rotating member 741 connected to the shaft portion JB1, and the arm member 742 is stopped.

On the other hand, the one-way clutch OW1 disposed on the transmission gear 731 is in a state in which the rotation of the outer ring is transmitted to the inner ring, and the shaft 735 is rotated.
As a result, the load gear 731e meshed with the transmission gear 731d and the tooth surface 881a of the rotating body 800 are rotated. That is, when the drive motor KM4 rotates in the forward direction, the driving force to the cover member 770 is not transmitted, and the driving force to the rotating body 800 is transmitted.

96(a) and 96(b), when the drive motor KM4 is driven in the negative direction, the transmission gear 731a is rotated in the negative direction. When the transmission gear 731a is rotated in the negative direction, the transmission gear 731b is rotated in the positive direction and the transmission gear 731c is rotated in the negative direction.

In this case, the one-way clutch OW1 disposed on the transmission gear 731b is in a state in which it transmits the rotation of the outer ring to the inner ring, and the shaft portion JB1 is rotated. Thus, the driving force is transmitted to the rotating member 741 connected to the shaft portion JB1, and the rotating member 741 is rotated. As a result, the arm member 742 performs a rotary reciprocating motion about the axis of the shaft hole 742a, and the cover member 770 is displaced.

On the other hand, the one-way clutch OW1 disposed on the transmission gear 731 does not transmit the rotation of the outer ring to the inner ring, and the shaft 735 does not rotate.
In other words, when the drive motor KM4 rotates in the negative direction, the drive force is transmitted to the cover member 770 and the drive force is not transmitted to the rotor 800.

Therefore, the transmission gear 731c which transmits the driving force from the driving motor KM4 to the rotating body 800
By disposing a one-way clutch OW1 between a transmission gear 731c (rotation side drive means) and a transmission gear 731b (displacement side transmission means) that transmits the rotational force to an opening/closing member 870 described later via a cover member 770, the rotational force of the drive motor KM4 is transmitted to the transmission gear 731c or the transmission gear 731b according to the rotation direction of the drive motor KM4.
As a result, the power of the drive motor K can be transmitted to one side and the power of the drive motor K can be cut off.
By simply switching the rotation direction of the drive motor KM4, the drive target driven by the rotational drive force can be switched. In other words, depending on the rotation direction of the drive motor KM4, it is possible to switch between rotation of the rotating body 800 and stopping of the rotation, and displacement of the opening/closing member 870 and stopping of the displacement.
The structure can be simplified while allowing multiple configurations to be formed.

Here, in a structure in which the one-way clutch OW1 is used to switch the driven object (the rotating body 800 or the opening/closing member 870 (the cover member 770)) depending on the rotation direction of the driving means, when the transmission of the driving force from the driving motor KM4 is interrupted, the rotating body 800 can freely rotate or displace in the direction in which it was driven by the driving force.
When the drive force is switched from the rotational member 770 (lid member 770) to the opening/closing member 870 (lid member 770) and the transmission of the driving force is interrupted, the rotating body 800 becomes freely rotatable and there is a risk that the rotation will continue (spin on its own axis) due to inertial force.

In contrast, in this embodiment, a load gear 731e (load gear) is provided that meshes with a transmission gear 731d driven by a transmission gear 731c, so that even if the transmission of rotational driving force from the drive motor KM4 is cut off, the load (resistance) generated when rotating the load gear 731e can be utilized to prevent the rotating body 800 from continuing to rotate.

Next, the displacement of the cover member 770 will be described with reference to Figures 97 and 98.
97(a) and 98(c) are side views of the decorative unit 750 and right side transmission member 740 in a closed state, FIG. 97(b) and FIG. 98(b) are intermediate states, and FIG. 97(c) and FIG. 98(a) are open states.

97(a) to 97(c) and 98(a) to 98(c) show the state in which the crank cover 743 of the right-side transmission member 740 is removed. The closed state of the decorative unit 750 is a state in which the lid member 770 is arranged to cover the upper half of the rotating body 800 (upper side in FIG. 97(a)), and the open state is a state in which the lid member 770 is rotated and displaced and arranged on the rear side of the rotating body 800 (right side in FIG. 97(c)). The intermediate state is a state in which the lid member 770 is arranged in a position between the closed state and the open state.

Further, Figures 97(a) to 97(c) sequentially illustrate states in which the state is changed from a closed state to an open state, and Figures 98(a) to 98(c) sequentially illustrate states in which the state is changed from an open state to a closed state.

First, the displacement of the cover member 770 when it is displaced from the closed state to the open state will be described with reference to Figure 97. The driving force is transmitted to the arm member 742 by the driving motor K
This is done by rotating M4 in the negative direction.

In the closed state, the protrusion 741a of the rotating member 741 is disposed on the rear side (right side in FIG. 97A) of the shaft hole 742a of the arm member 742.
The first slide groove 742b into which the protrusion 741a is inserted is disposed on the rear side of the shaft hole 742a.

The shaft hole 742a, the first sliding groove 742b, and the second sliding groove 742c of the arm member 742 are formed on approximately the same straight line. Therefore, the second sliding groove 742c formed at the end opposite to the first sliding groove 742b is disposed on the front side (left side in FIG. 97(a)) of the shaft hole 742a. As a result, the protrusion 773a protruding from the right side surface of the cover member 770 is guided by the second sliding groove 742c, and the curved cover portion 771 of the cover member 770 is disposed above the rotating body 800.

Next, as shown in FIG. 97B, the rotating member 741 is rotated approximately 90 degrees to move the protrusion 741
a is positioned below the axis of the rotating member 741, the first sliding groove 742b of the arm member 742
However, as the protrusion 741a is displaced, it is displaced downward in the gravity direction of the shaft hole 742a (the lower side in FIG. 97(b)).

Therefore, the second sliding groove 742c formed at the end opposite to the first sliding groove 742b is disposed on the upper side of the shaft hole 742a in the direction of gravity (upper side in FIG. 97(b)). As a result, the protrusion 773a of the cover member 770 is guided by the second sliding groove 742c, and the curved cover portion 771 of the cover member 770 is disposed in a position rotated and displaced toward the rear side of the rotating body 800.

In this case, the center of gravity of the cover member 770 is located behind the rotation axis of the cover member 770 (the center position of the cylindrical rotor 800). Therefore, the load of the cover member 770 applies a rotational force in a direction that displaces the cover member 770 from the closed state to the open state. As described above, the rotating member 741 is provided with the one-way clutch OW1, and is configured so that the outer ring can rotate prior to the inner ring. Therefore, the load of the cover member 770 rotates the drive motor KM
4 can be stopped and the cover member 770 can continue to rotate.

As shown in FIG. 97(c), when the cover member 770 is displaced to the rear side of the rotating body, the protrusion 741a of the rotating member 741 is stopped at a position rotated approximately 90 degrees from the intermediate state position.
That is, it is the leftmost end (left side in FIG. 97) of the displacement region of the projection 741a. Therefore, the rotation of the arm member 742 is restricted, and the rotation of the cover member 770 is stopped.

That is, the displacement of the cover member 770 from the closed state to the open state is achieved by driving the drive motor KM4 to displace the cover member 770 to the intermediate state, and then by the cover member 770 dropping under its weight.

As a result, when the cover member 770 is displaced from the closed state to the open state, the drive motor KM
Since the section in which the drive motor KM4 is driven can be reduced to half of the entire section, the energy consumption of the drive motor KM4 can be reduced.

Furthermore, the displacement speed from the closed state to the intermediate state can be set to a mode that follows the rotation speed of the drive motor KM4, and the displacement speed from the intermediate state to the open state can be set to a mode that follows the load of the cover member 770, so that the displacement speed from the closed state to the open state can be changed in two stages. Therefore, since the displacement speed of the cover member 770 can be changed without changing the displacement speed of the drive motor KM4, there is no need to complicate the control. As a result, the control can be simplified and the occurrence of control failures can be suppressed.

The displacement section in which the cover member 770 moves in accordance with the rotation speed of the drive motor KM4 is referred to as the first section.
The displacement section in which the cover member 770 is displaced according to the load of the cover member 770 is called the second section, and the first section includes D
The first section will be labeled with the symbol K1, and the second section will be labeled with the symbol DK2.

Next, the displacement of the cover member 770 when it is displaced from the open state to the closed state will be described with reference to Figure 98 .

As described above, in the open state, the protrusion 741a of the rotating member 741 is connected to the arm member 742.
98A ) on the front side of the shaft hole 742 a of the cover member 77
In this state, the curved cover portion 771 of the rotating body 800 is disposed on the rear side of the rotating body 800.

Next, as shown in FIG. 98B, the rotating member 741 is rotated approximately 90 degrees to move the protrusion 741
a is positioned above the axis of the rotating member 741, the first sliding groove 742b of the arm member 742
is displaced downward in the gravity direction of the shaft hole 742a (the lower side in FIG. 98(b)) in accordance with the displacement of the projection 741a.

Therefore, the second sliding groove 742c formed at the end opposite to the first sliding groove 742b is disposed on the upper side of the shaft hole 742a in the direction of gravity (upper side in FIG. 98(b)). As a result, the protrusion 773a of the cover member 770 is guided by the second sliding groove 742c, and the curved cover portion 771 of the cover member 770 is disposed in a position rotated and displaced upward by approximately 45 degrees from the state in which the curved cover portion 771 is positioned on the rear side of the rotating body 800.

Moreover, the lid member 770 displaced to the closed position (position in FIG. 97(a)) is disposed in the play area (the front side of the play board 13), and the lid member 770 displaced to the open position (position in FIG. 97(c)) is disposed outside the play area (the rear side of the play board 13). This prevents the game balls flowing down the play area from colliding with the rotating body 800 and causing the rotating body 800 to rotate. In particular, in this embodiment, as described later, the rotating body 800 is provided with an opening/closing member 870 that is displaced toward the play area, so that it is possible to prevent the game machine flowing down the play area from colliding with the opening/closing member 870 and causing the opening/closing member 870 to open (protrude).

In addition, since the cover member 770 is disposed outside the play area when in the open position, the displacement of the cover member 770 to the open position can secure space for the opening/closing member 870 to protrude into the play area. Therefore, the outer surface of the rotating body 800 can be brought closer to the play area, making it easier for the player to see the opening/closing member 870.

Furthermore, the cover member 770 is formed to be rotatable around an axis approximately parallel to the rotation axis of the rotating body 800, and is formed in a curved plate shape along the outer surface of the rotating body 800, so that the space required for displacement between the closed state position (covered position) and the open state position (retracted position) can be reduced, and therefore, space for arranging other members can be secured. Also, by forming the cover member 770 in a curved shape in this manner, the game balls flowing down the game area can be prevented from
This prevents the liquid from remaining on the lid member 770 when it is in the closed position, allowing the liquid to flow smoothly down.

Next, as shown in FIG. 98( c ), the rotating member 741 is rotated further by approximately 90 degrees to remove the protrusion 7
1a is displaced to the right of the axis of the rotating member 741, the first sliding groove 742 of the arm member 742
b is displaced toward the rear side (right side in FIG. 98(c)) beyond the shaft hole 742a in accordance with the displacement of the projection 741a.

Therefore, the second sliding groove 742c formed at the end opposite to the first sliding groove 742b is disposed on the front side (left side in FIG. 98(c)) of the shaft hole 742a. As a result, the protrusion 773a of the cover member 770 is guided by the second sliding groove 742c, and the curved cover portion 771 of the cover member 770 is disposed above the rotating body 800.

In this case, as the cover member 770 is displaced, the center of gravity of the cover member 770 is displaced toward the front side from the rotation axis of the cover member 770.
The load of 0 acts to rotate the lid member 770 in a direction that displaces the lid member 770 from the open state to the closed state. Therefore, even when the driving motor KM4 is stopped, the load of the lid member 770 can continue to rotate the lid member 770.

Therefore, the load of the lid member 770 can place the lid member 770 in the closed state.
The cover member 770 can be reliably placed in the closed state.

Here, if the rotational displacement of the cover member 770 is caused only by the drive motor KM4, if the drive stop operation of the drive motor KM4 is delayed, there is a risk that the cover member 770 will not be able to be stopped in the correct position. Also, in the case of the present embodiment where the rotational member 741 has only one rotation direction, if the stopping operation of the drive motor KM4 is delayed, one rotation is required to return to the correct position.

In contrast, in the present embodiment, the position at which the lid member 770 is stopped can be mechanically stopped by utilizing the load of the lid member 770, so that the stopping position of the lid member 770 can be prevented from shifting.

Here, a gaming machine is known that includes a driving means for generating a driving force, a displacement member displaced by the driving force of the driving means, and a transmission means for transmitting the driving force to the displacement member. However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, the transmission state of the driving force from the driving means to the displacement member by the transmission means is always constant, so when the driving means is driven at a constant driving speed, the displacement member is also displaced at a constant speed, and it is not possible to give a change to the displacement mode of the displacement member. Therefore, there is a problem that the presentation effect of the presentation accompanying the displacement of the displacement member is insufficient.

It should be noted that the displacement speed of the displacement member can be changed by increasing or decreasing the drive speed of the drive means. However, in order to make the displacement speed in a predetermined section of the displacement section of the displacement member different from the displacement speed in other sections, it is necessary to dispose a sensor device that detects the position of the displacement member and to control the increase or decrease in output of the drive means in accordance with the detection result of the sensor device.
This leads to an increase in product and control costs, and also to a complex structure and control, resulting in a decrease in reliability.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the transmission means (the rotating member 741 and the arm member 742) is
The one-way clutch OW1 is provided, and when the inner ring (first member) of the one-way clutch OW1 is displaced in one direction relative to the outer ring (second member) of the one-way clutch OW1, rollers engage with the inner ring and the outer ring to transmit the driving force, and when the inner ring is displaced in the other direction relative to the outer ring, the rollers are disengaged from the inner ring and the outer ring to interrupt the transmission of the driving force, and in the second section DK2 (predetermined section) of the displacement section of the cover member 770 (displacement member), the outer ring is displaced in one direction relative to the inner ring, so that the displacement speed of the cover member 770 in the second section DK2 can be made faster than the displacement speed of the cover member 770 in other sections, regardless of the driving state of the rotating member 741. Thus, by imparting a change to the cover member 770, the performance effect accompanying the displacement of the cover member 770 can be enhanced.

In addition, since the outer ring can be made to lead the inner ring in one direction regardless of the driving state of the drive motor KM4, for example, the drive motor KM4 can be driven at a constant driving speed in all sections of the displacement section of the cover member 770, and there is no need to increase or decrease the driving speed of the drive motor KM4 in the middle of the displacement section of the cover member 770 (i.e., depending on whether it is the first section DK1 or the second section DK2). As a result, the control can be simplified, the control cost can be reduced, and the reliability of the operation can be improved. Alternatively, the operation of the drive means can be stopped in the second section DK2, in which case energy consumption can be reduced.

In addition, in a driving state in a direction in which the inner ring is displaced in the other direction relative to the outer ring, the rollers are disengaged and the transmission of the driving force is interrupted, so that the displacement member can be brought into a stopped state (driven state). In this driving state, the driving force of the driving means (driving motor KM4) is transmitted to the rotating body 8.
00. That is, by switching the driving direction of the driving means (driving motor KM4), it is possible to displace the two members, the cover member 770 and the rotating body 800, respectively.

In addition, the cover member 770 is formed to be rotatable, and its center of gravity is disposed at a position eccentric to the center of rotation, and in the second section DK2, the weight of the cover member 770 is formed to be able to act in a direction to displace the outer ring in one direction, so that the weight of the cover member 770 can be used to displace the outer ring in one direction prior to the inner ring. That is, the displacement speed of the cover member 770 in the second section DK2 can be made faster than the displacement speed of the cover member 770 in the first section DK1. As a result, the displacement mode of the cover member 770 can be changed, and the performance effect associated with the displacement of the displaceable member can be enhanced.

Furthermore, the driving force is transmitted through a main body 741 to which the outer ring of the one-way clutch OW1 is attached.
The rotational member 741 (crank member) has a protrusion 741a (pin portion) that protrudes from the main body portion 741b and is displaced from the center of rotation of the main body portion 741c, and an arm member 742. Therefore, the outer ring rotates the rotational member 741, and the protrusion 741a
along the first sliding groove 742b, the other end side (the second sliding groove 742c side) of the rotating member 741 can be reciprocated. In this case, the other end side of the arm member 742 can reciprocate the cover member 770 between the open state position and the closed state position in accordance with the reciprocating movement of the cover member 770. In other words, the displacement direction of the cover member 770 can be switched without switching the drive direction of the drive motor KM4.

Also in this case, since the section of the second section DK can be formed for both reciprocating movements, when the lid member 770 is reciprocating, the displacement speed of the lid member 770 can be increased midway through the displacement when it is displaced in either direction. As a result, it is possible to change the displacement mode of the lid member 770 and enhance the presentation effect associated with the displacement of the lid member.

Next, the displacement of the rotation restricting member 780 will be described with reference to FIG.
99(a) is a side view of the decorative unit 750 in a closed state, and FIG. 99(b) is a side view of the decorative unit 750 in an open state. Note that in FIG. 99(a) and FIG. 99(b), the left side panel 765 of the box member 760 is shown in a transparent state.

As shown in FIG. 99( a ), when the cover member 770 is in the closed state, the rotation restricting member 780 is in a state in which the protrusion 782 side is pressed downward (
99(a) ) in a state where the shaft is rotated clockwise around the axis of the shaft hole 781.

Therefore, the distance L4 from the rotation shaft of the rotating body 800 to the outside of the engagement protrusion 882 is made smaller than the distance L5 from the rotation shaft of the rotating body 800 to the tip of the protrusion 782 of the rotation restricting member 780 (L4<L5).

Therefore, the rotating body 800 and the rotation restricting member 780 are not engaged with each other, and the rotating body 800 is allowed to rotate.

On the other hand, as shown in Figure 99 (b), when the cover member 770 is in the open state, the abutment surface 783 of the rotation regulating member 780 abuts against the cover member 770 which is displaced toward the rear side of the rotating body 800, and the abutment surface 783 is pressed downward (a state in which the rotation is rotated counterclockwise around the axis of the shaft hole 781 in Figure 99 (b)).

Therefore, the distance L4 from the rotation shaft of the rotating body 800 to the outside of the engagement protrusion 882 is made larger than the distance L6 from the rotation shaft of the rotating body 800 to the tip of the protrusion 782 of the rotation restricting member 780 (L6<L4).

As a result, in the rotating body 800 in a state in which the engagement protrusion 882 of the left rotating portion 880 is disposed at the lowest position in the direction of gravity, the protrusion 782 of the rotation restricting member 780 can be inserted inside the engagement protrusion 882. In other words, since the rotating body 800 and the rotation restricting member 780 are engaged with each other, the rotating body 800 can be rotated in a direction
In this embodiment, the position at which the rotating body 800 cannot rotate (the position at which the protrusion 782 is inserted into the inner side of the engagement protrusion 882) is set to a position at which an opening/closing member 870 of the rotating body 800, which will be described later, is in an open state.

That is, the rotation restricting member 780 (rotation restricting means) restricts the rotation of the rotating body 800 when the opening/closing member 870 (displacement member) is displaced to the open position (second position) and the other side of the displacement member is extended into the play area. Therefore, when the rotating body 800 rotates with the opening/closing member 870 extended, the opening/closing member 87 is in contact with other members located on the rotation trajectory.
In addition, it is possible to prevent the rotor 800 from being rotated by the load acting when the displacement member receives the game ball flowing down the game area or the weight of the game ball rolling on the upper surface of the displacement member.

Here, a gaming machine is known that includes a first member and a second member that are displaceable, and the first member is formed to be displaceable between a covering position in which the first member covers at least a part of the second member so as to be invisible, and a retracted position in which the area of the second member that is invisibly covered is reduced compared to the state in which the first member is disposed in the covering position. According to this gaming machine, by displacing the first member from a state in which the first member is disposed in the covering position and the second member is invisibly covered by the player to the retracted position, it is possible to perform an effect in which the second member is exposed and visible to the player.

However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, since the second member is formed to be displaceable, there is a risk that the second member will be displaced when the second member is exposed. Therefore, there is a problem that the player cannot visually recognize the second member in an appropriate state, and the presentation effect is reduced.

In contrast, according to this embodiment, the lid member 770 (first member) is formed so as to be capable of restricting the displacement of the rotating body 800 (second member) when displaced to the open position (retracted position), so that the rotating body 800 can be viewed by the player in the correct state, ensuring the desired presentation effect. In other words, when displacing the lid member 770 to the open position to expose the rotating body 800, the displacement of the lid member 770 to the open position, which is unavoidable for the purpose of this presentation, is utilized as a means for restricting the displacement of the rotating body 800. Therefore, there is no need to provide a separate mechanism or control for restricting the displacement of the rotating body 800, and as a result,
The structure can be simplified.

In addition, the rotating body 800 has an outer peripheral surface that is asymmetrically formed with respect to the center of rotation, as described later (see FIG. 101). Thus, the rotating body 800 is formed to be rotatable, and the center of gravity is eccentric from the center of rotation, so that the degree of freedom in designing the rotating body 800 can be increased. That is, the rotating body 800 does not need to be shaped so that its center of gravity is located at the center of rotation, and a shape that is asymmetric with respect to the axis of rotation can be adopted, so that the presentation effect of the rotating body 800 can be improved. On the other hand, if the center of gravity of the rotating body 800 is eccentric in this way, the rotating body 800 rotates around the center of rotation (there is a risk of it rotating on its own axis) due to its gravity, so that the cover member 770 displaced to the closed position is particularly effective in being formed to be able to regulate the displacement of the rotating body 800, and this allows the player to view the rotating body 800 in an appropriate state, ensuring presentation effects.

The rotor 800 may be formed symmetrically about the axis.
By forming the 00 from two or more materials with different specific gravities, the center of gravity can be located at a position different from the rotation axis. For example, by forming one half of the 00 from a metal material and the other half from a flexible material, the center of gravity can be located on the side of the metal material, which generally has a higher specific gravity than the flexible material.

Next, the configuration of the rotating body 800 will be described with reference to FIGS.
Fig. 100(a) is a front view of the rotating body 800, Fig. 100(b) is a side view of the rotating body 800 as viewed in the direction of the arrow Cb in Fig. 100(a), and Fig. 100(c) is a side view of the rotating body 800 as viewed in the direction of the arrow Cc in Fig. 100(a). Fig. 101 is an exploded perspective front view of the rotating body 800, and Fig. 102 is an exploded perspective rear view of the rotating body 800.

100 to 102, the rotating body 800 is formed into a cylindrical shape by combining a plurality of members. The rotating body 800 is mainly formed by including a base plate 810 disposed on the shaft portion, a first display unit 830, a second display unit 840, a third display unit 850, and a fourth display unit 860 disposed around the base plate 810 and combined in an annular shape, a right rotating unit 89 disposed at one end in the axial direction, a left rotating unit 880 disposed at the other end in the axial direction, and an opening/closing member 870 disposed inside the first display unit 830.

The base plate 810 has a cross section that is generally L-shaped when viewed in the axial direction and is formed in a shape that extends in the axial direction. The base plate 810 is formed with a right end portion 811 and a left end portion 812 that protrude outward from both left and right ends.

The right end portion 811 is formed to protrude in an annular shape from the right side in a front view (the right side in FIG. 100(a)) of the base plate 810. The right end portion 811 is mainly formed to include a tip portion 811a that partially protrudes from the protruding tip of the right end portion 811 and a communication hole 811b in the inner portion of the annular shape.

The tip portion 811a protrudes further in the axial direction from the tip portion of the right end portion 811.
The protruding area in the right side view (direction view in FIG. 100(c)) is the engaging portion 7 of the right side plate 764.
64e. The tip 811a is inserted inside the engaging portion 764e of the right side panel 764 as described above. This brings the base plate 810 and the right side panel 764 (cover member 770) into an engaged state. As a result, the base plate 810 can be stopped against the rotational displacement of each display surface (first display unit 830, second display unit 840, third display unit 850, and fourth display unit 860) described below.

The communication hole 811b is an opening through which wiring (not shown) connected to an LED board 820 described later is inserted, and is formed through the side surface on the right side as viewed from the front of the base plate 810. This allows the wiring to be inserted.

The left end portion 812 is formed in a circular ring shape and protrudes from the left side of the base plate 810 when viewed from the front (the left side in FIG. 100( a )).
12a and a communication hole 812b in the annular inner portion.

The tip portion 812a protrudes further in the axial direction from the tip portion of the left end portion 812.
The protruding shape in left side view (viewed from the direction of FIG. 100(b)) is a lower semicircle of a circular ring.

The communication hole 812b is a path for discharging the ball, which has been sent to the inside of the rotating body 800 by an opening/closing member 870 described later, to the outside of the rotating body 800. The communication hole 812b has an inner diameter set to be larger than the ball and to be approximately the same as the through hole 733a formed in the gear cover 733.

Moreover, the communication hole 812b is an opening connected to the through hole 733a of the gear cover 733, and the protruding distance of the left end 812 is set to a distance at which it abuts against the through hole 733a. Furthermore, a protrusion 733b is formed on the upper hemisphere of the end surface of the through hole 733a. The protruding distance of the protrusion 733b is set to be approximately the same as the protruding distance of the tip end 812a. This allows the base plate 810 and the gear cover 733 (left side transmission member 730) to be engaged with each other. As a result, the base plate 810 can be stopped against the rotational displacement of each display surface (first display unit 830, second display unit 840, third display unit 850, and fourth display unit 860) described later.

A reverse rotation prevention member 813 is rotatably disposed on the bottom surface of the base plate 810. The reverse rotation prevention member 813 is formed in a generally circular shape when viewed from above, and has a protrusion 813a inclined toward one end.
In addition, the reverse rotation prevention member 813 is provided with a biasing spring SP6 between the reverse rotation prevention member 813 and the base plate 810.
As a result, the protrusion 813a is always on the left side as viewed from the front (the left side in FIG. 100(a)).
The switch is in a biased state.

The right rotating part 890 is formed in a plate shape of a predetermined thickness and is formed in a circular ring shape in a side view. The right rotating part 890 is formed so that the inner diameter of the ring is larger than the size of the right end part 811 of the base plate 810. As a result, the right end part 811 of the base plate 810 is disposed inside the right rotating part 890.
The right rotating part 890 has a shaft hole 891 penetrating therethrough in the left-right direction and a
The groove 892 is formed by curving around the groove 91 and opening.

The shaft hole 891 is a hole into which a shaft portion 872 of an opening/closing member 870 (to be described later) is inserted.
2. In this way, it is possible to prevent the shaft portion 872 of the opening/closing member 870 from being displaced relative to the first display portion 830.

The sliding groove 892 is formed in a curved shape centered on the shaft hole 891, and the radius of the curved shape is set to be the same as the distance between the protrusion 871 and the shaft portion 872 of the opening/closing member 870. As a result, by inserting the protrusion 871 of the opening/closing member 870 into the sliding groove 892, the protrusion 871 can slide inside the sliding groove 892 when the opening/closing member 870 is displaced.

The left rotating part 880 is formed in a plate shape of a predetermined thickness and is formed in a circular shape in a side view. The left rotating part 880 is formed so that the inner diameter of the circular shape is larger than the size of the left end part 812 of the base plate 810. As a result, the left end part 81 of the base plate 810 is disposed inside the left rotating part 880.
2 can be inserted into the left rotating portion 880. The left rotating portion 880 is mainly formed with a wall portion 881 protruding in an annular shape from the inner edge portion, an engagement protrusion 882 protruding from the side wall, and a locking portion 883 having a series of inclined surfaces arranged on the inner edge portion.

The wall portion 881 is formed to protrude to the left side when viewed from the front of the rotating body 800. The wall portion 881 has a gear tooth surface 881a engraved on the outer circumferential surface of the protruding tip, and a communication hole 881b opening to the inside.
As described above, the tooth surface 881a is meshed with the transmission gear 881d. This allows the driving force of the drive motor KM4 to be transmitted to the rotating body 800.

The communication hole 881b is an opening that connects the internal space of the rotating body 800 with the external space, and can discharge a ball sent to the inside of the rotating body 800 by opening an opening/closing member 870 described later.

As described above, the engagement protrusion 882 is a protrusion with which the rotation restricting member 780 engages. The engagement protrusion 882 is formed to protrude from the left side surface of the left rotating part 880 when viewed from the front. Two engagement protrusions 882 are formed at positions spaced a predetermined distance apart, and are formed so that the protrusion 782 of the rotation restricting member 780 can be inserted between them.

The locking portion 883 has a sawtooth cross section.
When the left rotating part 880 is disposed in the reverse rotation prevention member 813, the tip of the protrusion 813a of the reverse rotation prevention member 813 described above is brought into contact with the locking part 883. As a result, when a rotational force acts to rotate the left rotating part 880 in one direction, the protrusion 813a slides along the inclined surface of the locking part 883, and the left rotating part 880
However, when a rotational force is applied to rotate the left rotating portion 880 in the other direction, the surface of the locking portion 883 gets caught on the protrusion 813a and the rotation is suppressed.

This prevents the rotating body 800 from rotating in the opposite direction to the direction in which it is rotated by the rotational driving force of the drive motor KM4, thereby preventing the rotating body from rotating in the opposite direction due to, for example, a misalignment of the center of gravity of the rotating body 800 or a collision with a game ball.

The first display unit 830 to the fourth display unit 860 are each formed in the same curved shape, and are formed into a single ring shape by connecting the end faces of each unit. The inner diameter of the first display unit 830 to the fourth display unit 860 formed into a single ring is set to be approximately the same as the outer diameter of the left and right rotating units 880, 890. This allows the display units 830 to 860 to be connected to the left and right rotating units 880, 890.
0, the first display unit 830 to the fourth display unit 860 can be formed into a single cylindrical shape.

In addition, the first display unit 830 to the fourth display unit 860 each have a character or pattern drawn on them, and as described above, they rotate when a driving force is transmitted from the left rotation unit 880, allowing the player to view each character or pattern.

The first display portion 830 is formed mainly by including an opening 831 that opens on the curved surface thereof, and a bearing portion 832 that opens to the shaft side and is formed to protrude in a U-shape.

The opening 831 is an opening in which an opening/closing member 870, which will be described later, is disposed.
The bearing portion 832 is formed in an opening having an inner diameter substantially the same as the outer shape of the opening. The bearing portion 832 is formed in a size that allows the shaft portion 872 of the opening/closing member 870 to be inserted into the open U-shaped portion. Thus, by inserting the opening/closing member 870 into the opening 831 and inserting the shaft portion 872 of the opening/closing member 870 into the bearing portion 832, the opening/closing member 870 can be rotationally displaced relative to the first display portion 830. The displacement mode of the opening/closing member 870 will be described later.

When power is supplied to the LED board 820, the LEDs mounted on the LED board 820 are
The LED board 820 is attached to the rear side of the base plate 810 so as to emit light.

Next, the opening and closing of the opening/closing member 870 will be described with reference to FIG.
103(b) is a side view of the rotating body 800 when the opening/closing member 870 is in a closed state.
103 is a side view of the rotating body 800 when the opening/closing member 870 is in an open state. Note that in Fig. 103, when the opening/closing member 870 overlaps with another member, the outer diameter thereof is illustrated by a chain line.

The closed state of the opening/closing member 870 means that the outer peripheral surface of the opening/closing member 870 is in contact with the first display unit 830.
On the other hand, the open state of the opening/closing member 870 is a state in which the outer circumferential surface of the opening/closing member 870 intersects with the outer circumferential surface of the first display portion 830.

As shown in FIG. 103A, when the opening/closing member 870 is in the closed state, the rotating body 800 is in a state in which the protrusion 871 of the opening/closing member 870 is in contact with one end side of the sliding groove 892 of the right rotating portion 890 (FIG. 103A).
In the example shown in FIG.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 103B, when the opening/closing member 870 is in the open state, the rotating body 800
In other words, the protrusion 871 of the opening/closing member 870 is positioned on the other end side of the sliding groove 892 of the right rotating part 890. That is, the opening/closing member 870 is displaced by the protrusion 871 sliding inside the sliding groove 892 of the right rotating part 890.

Next, the displacement of the protrusion 871 will be described with reference to Fig. 104. Fig. 104(a) and (b) are side views of the decorative unit 750.
In FIG. 7B, the right side panel 764 of the box member 760 is shown in a transparent state.

104(a) shows the decorative unit 750 in a closed state and the opening/closing member 870 in a closed state, while FIG. 104(b) shows the decorative unit 750 in an open state and the opening/closing member 870 in an open state.

As shown in FIG. 104( a ), when the decorative unit 750 is in the closed state, the right cover portion 7
The outer edge of right cover 773 is in contact with protrusion 871. When decorative unit 750 is in the closed state, outer diameter L7 from the rotation axis of lower half of right side cover 773 is smaller than distance L8 from the axis of right rotation part 890 to one end of slide groove 892 (L7<L8).

The difference between the dimensions L7 and L8 is set to be approximately equal to the outer diameter of the protrusion 871.
When the outer edge of the right cover 773 abuts against the protrusion 871, the protrusion 871 is displaced toward one end of the sliding groove 892. As a result, the opening/closing member 870 is closed. That is, when the decorative unit 750 is closed, the opening/closing member 870 can be prevented from being displaced to the open state.

As shown in FIG. 104(b), when the decorative unit 750 is in the open state, the right cover portion 7
As the recess 773b is displaced, the recess 773b is displaced.
The protrusion 871 is inserted into the inner side of the first display unit 830. This allows the protrusion 871 to be displaced to the other side of the sliding groove 892. As a result, the opening/closing member 870 is put into the open state by the biasing force of the biasing spring SP7 disposed between the shaft portion 872 and the first display unit 830.

As described above, the opening/closing member 870 can be displaced to the open state in accordance with the displacement of the cover member 770. Therefore, since there is no need to provide a drive source for driving the opening/closing member 870 in the rotating body 800, the rotating body 800 can be made small.

Furthermore, the drive motor KM4 for displacing the opening/closing member 870 can also be used as drive means for displacing the lid member 770. In this case, if the opening/closing member 870 and the lid member 770 are displaced by the drive forces of separate drive means, there is a risk that the opening/closing member 870 and the lid member 770 may interfere with each other if a control failure occurs. However, since the opening/closing member 870 and the lid member 770 can be mechanically linked to synchronize their displacements, the opening/closing member 870 and the lid member 770 can be mechanically linked to synchronize their displacements.
This can suppress interference between the two.

104(b), when the opening/closing member 870 is opened, the tip of the rotation is positioned above the winning opening 761a of the box member 760. This allows a ball sent from a ball sending section 711c of the ball receiving stand 710 (described later) to fall onto the upper surface of the opening/closing member 870.

In this case, the rotating tip side of the opening/closing member 870 is disposed above the shaft portion 872. Therefore, the balls that fall onto the upper surface can be made to roll toward the inside of the rotating body 800.
A game ball rolling into the interior of the rotor 800 rolls on the upper surface of a base plate 810 disposed inside the rotor 800. Furthermore, since the base plate 810 is inclined downward toward the left end 812, the ball rolling on the upper surface of the base plate 810 can be made to roll toward the left end 812 and discharged from the inside to the outside of the rotor 800. In other words, the interior of the rotor 800 can be used as a path for sending the ball.

In addition, as described above, the rotating body 800 is provided with a rotation restricting member 780 that restricts the rotation of the rotating body 800. When the cover member 770 is displaced to the open position to expose the rotating body 800, the opening and closing member 870 is further displaced to enhance the effect of the presentation. On the other hand, there is a risk that the rotating body 800 will rotate (spin). Therefore, it is particularly effective to configure the cover member 770 displaced to the open position so as to be capable of restricting the displacement of the rotating body 800, thereby allowing the player to view the rotating body 800 in the appropriate state and ensuring the presentation effect.

Here, a gaming machine is known that includes a rotating member that is formed to be rotatable and that is arranged so that the outer surface around the rotation axis is visible to the player. According to this gaming machine, the rotating member is formed in a cylindrical shape, and the display (pattern) on the outer circumferential surface can be made visible to the player while rotating the rotating member or by stopping the rotating member. However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, there is a problem that the rotating member is only used as a member for holding the display on its outer surface for the player to see, and the utilization of the rotating member is insufficient. That is, the rotating member is formed relatively large because it needs to hold the display that is visible to the player. Therefore, the space it occupies is large, while the parts other than its outer surface are not utilized.

In contrast, according to this embodiment, the rotating body 800 (rotating member) has an internal space formed therein that communicates with the outside, and is provided with an opening 831 and a communication hole 881b (communication port) through which game balls can pass, so that game balls flowing down the game area can flow into or out of the internal space via the opening 831 and the communication hole 881b. Therefore, the internal space of the rotating body 800, which is a dead space, can function as a storage space for game balls or a ball sending passage, and the rotating body 800 can be utilized accordingly.

Furthermore, in the conventional gaming machines described above, the only way to create a presentation pattern is to allow the player to see the display on the outer peripheral surface when the rotating member is stopped, so there is little variation in the presentation pattern and the presentation effect is insufficient.

In contrast, according to this embodiment, an opening/closing member 870 (displacement member) is provided which is displaceably arranged on the outer surface of the rotating body 800 (rotating member). Therefore, in addition to a presentation mode in which the player can visually recognize the display on the outer surface as the rotating body 800 rotates or stops, a presentation mode in which the opening/closing member 870 is displaced can be created, and therefore, the presentation mode can be varied to enhance the presentation effect.

When the cover member 770 (displacement member) is displaced to the closed position (first position), the rotating body 800 (
Since a part of the outer surface of the rotating body 800 (the opening and closing member 870) is formed by the opening and closing member 870, the outer shape of the rotating body 800 can be made small, and the space required for the rotating body 800 to rotate can be reduced accordingly. On the other hand, when the opening and closing member 870 is displaced to the open position (second position), the opening and closing member 870 is protruded radially outward from the rotating body 800, so that the player can easily visually recognize the displacement of the opening and closing member 870, and the performance effect can be enhanced. In addition, by rotating the rotating body 800 with the opening and closing member 870 disposed in the closed position, and disposing (displacing) the opening and closing member 870 in the open position when the rotation is stopped, a mode can be formed in which the part (the opening and closing member 870) that was visually recognized as the outer surface of the rotating body 800 protrudes radially outward from the rotating body 800, and the interest can be enhanced.

Also, an LED board 820 that emits light to the base plate 810 is disposed in the internal space of the rotating body 800. Thus, by setting the opening/closing member 870 to the open position, the outer surface of the rotating body 800 is opened and the internal space is connected to the outside, allowing the light emitted from the LED board 820 to be emitted to the outside. On the other hand, by setting the opening/closing member 870 to the closed position, the outer surface of the rotating body 800 is closed and the light emitted from the LED board 820 can be blocked from being emitted to the outside. As a result, the presentation effect can be enhanced.

Here, in order to make the rotating body 800 rotatable and to displaceably dispose the opening/closing member 870 on the rotating body 800, a driving means is required for each of the rotating body 800 and the opening/closing member 870, which increases the production cost. Furthermore, if a driving means for displacing the opening/closing member 870 is mounted on the rotating body 800, the weight of the rotating body 800 increases, making it difficult to smoothly start or stop the rotation of the rotating body 800.

In contrast, according to this embodiment, the opening/closing member 870 is displaced in accordance with the displacement of the cover member 770, and the cover member 770 and the rotating body 800 are displaced by the same drive motor KM4, so that one drive motor KM4 can be used to rotate the rotating body 800 and displace the opening/closing member 870. This makes it possible to reduce product costs. In addition, since there is no need to mount a drive means for displacing the opening/closing member on the rotating body 800, the weight of the rotating body 800 can be reduced, and the rotation of the rotating body 800 can be started or stopped smoothly.

In addition, since the opening 831 (first communication port) and the communication hole 881b (second communication port) are formed at different positions, the opening 831 can be used as an inlet port for allowing game balls to flow from the outside into the internal space, and the communication hole 881b can be used as an outlet port for allowing game balls to flow from the internal space to the outside.
Even if the rotating body 800 (rotating member) is not rotated (kept in a stopped state), the rotating body 8
00 can be used as a passageway for throwing game balls.

Furthermore, since the opening 831 is formed on the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 800 and the communicating hole 881b is formed on the axial end surface of the rotating body 800, it is possible for the player to easily visually observe the flow of game balls into the internal space of the rotating body 800 (rotating member), and the game balls can be discharged while the rotating body 800 is maintained in a stopped state.

That is, the rotating body 800 is disposed so that the outer surface thereof is visible to the player.
Since the opening 831 (inlet) is formed, it is possible to make it easier for the player to see the inflow of the game balls. On the other hand, if a communication hole 881b is formed on the outer surface of the rotating body 800, and the rotating body 800 is placed in a rotational position where the communication hole 881b is at the top, the game balls cannot flow out from the internal space. However, since the communication hole 881b (outlet) is formed on the end surface of the rotating body 800 in the rotational axis direction, it is possible to create a state where the game balls can flow out from the internal space regardless of the rotational position of the rotating body 800.

In addition, a displaceable opening/closing member 870 (displacement member) is provided on the inside of the opening 831 (first communication port).
When the opening/closing member 870 is displaced to a closed position (first position), the opening 831 is blocked by the opening/closing member 870, and when the opening/closing member 870 is displaced to an open position (second position),
Since the opening 831 is opened, the inflow of game balls through the opening 831 can be switched between a blocked state and a permitted state.

Furthermore, one side of the opening/closing member 870 (displacement member) is rotatably supported by the rotating body 800 (rotation member), and when the opening/closing member 870 is displaced to the open position (second position), the other side opposite to the one side is extended into the play area, so that the game balls flowing down the play area can be received on the upper surface of the opening/closing member 870. Therefore, when the opening 831 is formed as an inlet,
By utilizing the opening and closing member 870, game balls flowing down the game area can be made to flow more easily into the internal space of the rotating body 800.

Also, game balls flowing down the play area can be easily stopped on the upper surface of the opening/closing member 870. Therefore, for example, if an inlet for game balls is formed in the rotating body 800, the opening/closing member 870 can be used to make it easier for game balls flowing down the play area to flow into the inlet. In this case, if the opening/closing member 870 is made to catch game balls flowing down the play area, there is a risk that the rotating body 800 will rotate due to the load acting at that time or the weight of the game balls rolling on the upper surface of the displacement member. Therefore, when the cover member 770 is displaced to the open position, the rotation restricting member 78
The configuration in which the rotational member 800 is formed so that the displacement of the rotational member 800 can be regulated by displacing 0 is particularly effective, which makes it easier to maintain the opening/closing member 870 in a protruding state at a specified position in the play area.

The shaft 872 of the opening/closing member 870 is disposed on the rotation direction side of the rotating body 800. In other words, one side of the opening/closing member 870 (displacement member) is positioned further forward in the rotation direction of the rotating body 800 (rotating member) than the other side. Therefore, even if the opening/closing member 870 interferes with a member disposed around the rotating member when the rotating body 800 is rotated, the force generated by such interference can be applied in the direction of closing the opening/closing member 870 (displacing it to the closed position).
That is, when the rotating body 800 rotates, the opening and closing member 870 interferes with other members and protrudes (second
In addition, it is possible to prevent the opening/closing member 870 from engaging with another member, thereby preventing the rotation of the rotating body 800 from being hindered.

In addition, a base plate 810 (fixing member) disposed in the internal space of the rotating body 800 is
Since the box member 760 (base member) is rotatably disposed at the box member 760, the box member 760 is made non-rotatable.
By rolling the game ball flowing into the internal space of the rotating body 800 from the opening 831 along the upper surface of the base plate 810 toward the communicating hole 881b, it is possible to prevent the game ball from moving wildly in the internal space as the rotating body 800 rotates, or from being hindered from rolling and remaining in the internal space.

As described above, the opening and closing operation of the opening and closing member 870 is regulated by the displacement of the cover member 770, so that the opening and closing member 870 displaced to the open state (second position) can be prevented from interfering with the surrounding members of the rotating body 800.

As described above, the rotating body 800 has the communication hole 811b through which the wiring to the LED board 820 attached to the back side of the base plate 810 is inserted, and the rotating body 800 has the communication hole 881b formed therein.
0. This makes it easier to ensure that there is sufficient space for each of the communication holes 881b and 811b.

That is, when electrical wiring is performed on the LED board disposed inside the rotating body 800,
If the wiring is inserted from the outer peripheral surface of the rotor 800, the wiring will become tangled due to the rotation of the rotor 800, so it is preferable to wire it from the axial end face of the rotor 800.However, if an opening through which the game balls flow in and an opening through which the game balls flow out are formed on both axial end faces of the rotor 800, it becomes difficult to secure space to insert the wiring.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the inlet for game balls of the rotating body 800 can be made into its outer peripheral surface, so that one of the axial end faces of the rotating body 800 can be made into an outlet for game balls and the other can be made into an insertion port for wiring, making it easier to secure space for inserting wiring.

As a result, the game balls can be discharged smoothly through the communication hole 881b, and the electrical connection wires (the wires to the LED board 820) can be easily wired to the opening. In addition, the communication hole 881b and the communication hole 811b can be separated from each other as far as possible, so that interference between the game balls rolling in the internal space of the rotating body 800 toward the communication hole 881b and the electrical connection wires can be easily suppressed.

Next, referring to FIG. 105 and FIG. 106, the lower displacement unit 400 and the rotation unit 7
105 is a front view of the lower displacement unit 400 and the rotation unit 700, and FIG. 106 is a top view of the lower displacement unit 400 as viewed in the direction of the arrow CVI in FIG. 105. In FIG. 105 and FIG. 106, the lower displacement unit 400 in the retracted state is shown.
0 is shown.

105 and 106, the lower displacement unit 400 and the rotation unit 700 are disposed adjacent to each other in the left-right direction. In addition, the lower displacement unit 400 and the rotation unit 700 in the front-rear direction (the up-down direction in FIG. 106) are disposed such that the outlet opening 471 of the lower displacement member 440 is disposed at approximately the center of the ball receiving base 710 in the front-rear direction.

Next, referring to Fig. 107, a manner of sending a ball from the lower displacement unit 400 to the rotation unit 700 will be described. Fig. 107 is a front view of the lower displacement unit 400 and the rotation unit 700. Note that Fig. 107 illustrates a state in which the lower displacement unit 400 is disposed in the first protruding state.

As shown in FIG. 107, the lower displacement unit 400 is in the first extended state, and the lower displacement member 4
When the firing operation is performed with the ball receiving portion 467 arranged inside the lower displacement member 440 receiving a ball inside (the ball receiving operation is performed), the ball arranged inside the ball receiving portion 467 is expelled outside the lower displacement member 440 through the exit opening 471 of the lower displacement member 440, as described above.

The ball discharged from the outlet opening 471 of the lower displacement member 440 falls freely onto the ball receiving stand 710 of the rotation unit 700 disposed on the right side as viewed from the front. As a result, the ball can be sent from the lower displacement unit 400 to the rotating body 800.

Next, the configuration of the ball receiving stand 710 will be described with reference to Figures 108 and 109. Figure 108(a) is a top view of the ball receiving stand 710, Figure 108(b) is a front view of the ball receiving stand 710, and Figure 108(c) is a cross-sectional view of the ball receiving stand 710 taken along line CVIIIc-CVIIIc in Figure 108(a). Figure 109 is an exploded perspective view of the ball receiving stand 710.

As shown in FIGS. 108 and 109, the ball receiving base 710 has a dish receiving portion 711 formed in a box shape.
The plate receiving portion 711 is mainly formed of a solenoid 712 disposed inside the plate receiving portion 711 , a displacement member 713 connected to the solenoid 712 , and a cover member 714 covering the solenoid 712 .

The dish receiving portion 711 is mainly formed by a bottom plate 711a that forms the bottom surface, an upright portion 711b that is erected on the edge of the bottom plate 711a, a ball throwing portion 711c that protrudes from a part of the outer edge of the bottom plate 711a, and an axial hole 711d that is formed through the upright portion 711b that is erected on the edge of the ball throwing portion 711c.

The bottom plate 711a is formed in a shape that is bent downward toward the ball throwing section 711c, which will be described later. This allows the ball thrown to the upper part of the bottom plate 711a to be deflected (inclined) toward the ball throwing section 711c.
It can be rolled to the side.

The bottom plate 711a is made of a flexible material, and the lower surface of the bottom plate 711a (FIG. 10
The lower surface 8(c) is textured to form fine irregularities on the surface.
When the bottom plate 711a is molded, the ratio of thermal shrinkage is made different between the top and bottom surfaces, so that the bottom plate can be easily bent. That is, the bottom plate, which is textured, is less susceptible to a force acting in a direction that causes the bottom plate to bend convexly when thermally shrunk due to the unevenness. On the other hand, the top plate is formed as a flat surface, so that a horizontal pulling force acts on the top plate when thermally shrunk, and the end portion is easily changed upward (the top plate is more likely to bend concavely). Therefore, the bottom plate can be easily bent in a direction that makes it easier for the ball to roll when thermally shrunk. As a result, the bottom plate 711a can be prevented from being a defective product when molded.

The standing portion 711b is located above the outer edge of the ball throwing portion 711c in the direction of gravity (upper side in FIG. 108(c)).
The standing distance of the standing portion 711b is set to be greater than the outer diameter of the ball. This makes it possible to prevent the ball thrown to the upper part of the bottom plate 711a from falling downward from the edge of the bottom plate 711a. In this embodiment, the standing dimension of the standing portion 711b is set to be approximately 1.5 times the diameter of the ball.
is set to double.

The standing portion 711b is a central standing portion 711b1 that divides the area of the bottom plate 711a into two.
The central upright portion 711b1 divides the upper area of the bottom plate 711a into an area where a ball is thrown on one side and an area where a solenoid 712 (described later) is disposed on the other side.

The ball throwing section 711c is formed on the front side of the bottom plate 711a.
The position of the ball throwing section 711c (in the left-right direction) is located to the right of the approximate center of the bottom plate 711a (right side in FIG. 108). Furthermore, the ball throwing section 711c protrudes from the bottom plate and is therefore curved downward. This allows the ball thrown from the bottom plate 711a to fall downward through the ball throwing section 711c. In addition, the winning hole 761a of the cover member 770 is disposed below the ball throwing section 711c (see FIG. 106), and the ball falling from the ball throwing section 711c can be thrown into the winning hole 761a.

A shaft portion 713a of a displacement member 713 (described later) is inserted into the shaft hole 711d.
The displacement member 713 can be rotated and displaced around the axis of the shaft hole 711d.

When power is applied to the solenoid 712, the solenoid 712 can perform piston-like displacement of a shaft inserted inside the solenoid 712. A transmission member 712a is attached to the shaft of the solenoid 712. The transmission member 712a is a member that transmits the driving force of the solenoid 712 to a displacement member 713 described later, and has a communication hole 712a1 formed through its tip.

The displacement member 713 is formed in a C-shaped cross section, and has a protrusion 71 protruding outward from the C-shape at one end.
3b and shaft portions 713a protruding inwardly from both ends of the C-shape.

The protrusion 713b is a protrusion that is inserted into the communication hole 712a1 of the solenoid 712, and is formed in a cylindrical shape with an outer diameter larger than the inner diameter of the communication hole 712a1.
The displacement of 12 is transmitted to a displacement member 713 via a transmission member 712a.

The shaft portion 713a is a shaft that is inserted into the shaft hole 711d. By inserting the shaft portion 713a into the shaft hole 711d, the displacement member 713 can rotate about the axis of the shaft portion 713a. That is, the displacement of the solenoid 712 drives the displacement member 713.

The cover member 714 is formed to have an outer shape larger than the outer shape of the solenoid 712, and is disposed above the solenoid 712 disposed on the upper portion of the bottom plate 711a.
1. In this way, the solenoid 712 can be fixed in place.

Next, the ball dropping into the ball receiving stand 710 will be described with reference to FIG.
110(a) and 110(b) are cross-sectional views of the ball receiving stand 710. Note that Fig. 110(a) and Fig. 110(b) correspond to the cross-section of the ball receiving stand 710 in Fig. 108(c).

As shown in Fig. 110, the ball sent from the lower displacement member 440 of the lower displacement unit 400 falls freely in the direction of gravity and is displaced toward the rotation unit 700 (the right side in Fig. 110(a)) by the launching operation of the ball receiving part 467. That is, the ball falls toward the lower right when viewed from the front against the bottom plate 711a of the ball receiving stand 710.

In this case, as described above, bottom plate 711a is formed to bend downward toward ball throwing section 711c, and ball throwing section 711c is formed on the right side of bottom plate 711a, so that the upper surface of bottom plate 711a on which the ball falls can be made to be an inclined surface that slopes downward toward the right side. Therefore, the displacement direction of the ball and the inclination direction of bottom plate 711a on which the ball falls can be made closer to parallel.

As a result, as shown in FIG. 110(b), the ball that has fallen onto the bottom plate 711a moves upward (see FIG. 1
Therefore, the ball sent from the lower displacement member 440 of the lower displacement unit 400 to the ball receiving stand 710 of the rotation unit 700 can be prevented from bouncing in the upward direction (upward direction).
It is possible to prevent the value from dropping from 0.

Furthermore, the ball that has fallen onto the bottom plate 711a can be made to roll toward the throwing section 711c by the force of the fall, thereby shortening the rolling time of the ball to the throwing section 711c.
As a result, the ball can be sent smoothly from the lower displacement member 440 to the ball receiving stand 710.

Next, the light emission of the ball receiving stand 710 will be described with reference to FIG.
111(a) and 111(b) are schematic cross-sectional views of the rotating unit 700 taken along the line CXI-CXI in Fig. 87. In Fig. 111(a), the decorative unit 750 is in a closed state, and in Fig. 111(b),
The decorative units 750 are shown in an open position, respectively.

As shown in Figure 111 (a), when the decorative unit 750 is in the closed position, light is emitted to the ball receiving stand 710 by an LED board 721 arranged on the rear side of the rear base 720.

More specifically, the light emitted from the LED 721 a of the LED board 721 is guided by the cover member 77
The light is reflected off the rear surface of the ball receiving stand 710, and is incident on the bottom plate 711a of the ball receiving stand 710. As described above, the bottom surface of the bottom plate 711a is textured, so that the unevenness of the texture can diffuse the incident light. This allows the entire bottom surface of the ball receiving stand 710 to emit light.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 111(b), when the decorative unit 750 is placed in the open state, the transparent portion 771a is formed in the cover member 770 as described above, so that the LED board 7
The LED 721a of No. 21 is transmitted through the cover member 770 without being reflected by it. Since the rotating body 800 is formed inside the cover member 770, the light can be reflected by the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 800 and can be made to enter the ball receiving base 710.

In this case, by rotating the third display unit 850 of the rotating body 800 toward the ball receiving stand 710 (upper side in FIG. 111(b)), the LEDs of the LED board 820 arranged on the back side of the base plate 810 are
The light emitted from D821 can be reflected by the inner wall of the rotating body 800 and emitted from the third display unit 850.

As described above, the inner wall of the third display unit 850 is textured to form multiple projections and recesses on the surface. Therefore, the third display unit 850 can more easily emit light to the outside of the rotating body 800 than the other display units. Therefore, it is preferable to arrange the third display unit 850 on the ball receiving stand 710 side.

Next, a detailed configuration of the upper displacement unit 900 will be described with reference to Figures 112 to 118. First, a structure for displacing the upper displacement member 940 will be described with reference to Figures 112 to 114.

FIG. 112 is a front view of the upper displacement unit 900. FIG. 113 is a front view of the upper displacement unit 900.
114 is an exploded perspective front view of the upper displacement unit 900. FIG.
112 to 114 show a state in which the upper displacement member 940 is disposed in the retracted position (the uppermost position relative to the base member 910).

As shown in Figures 112 to 114, the upper displacement unit 900 is mainly formed by a base member 910 arranged on the bottom wall portion 301 (see Figure 6) of the rear case 300, a transmission member 920 arranged inside the base member 910, a rotating member 930 that is rotatably connected to the base member 910 and displaced in accordance with the displacement of the transmission member 920, and an upper displacement member 940 whose one end is slidably connected to the base member 410 and is connected to the rotating member 930 so as to be displaced by the transmission of a driving force from the rotating member 930.

The base member 910 is formed by combining two plate members each having a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the front in the front-rear direction, and includes a front base 911 disposed on the front side and a rear base 912 disposed on the rear side. A transmission member 920 and a rotation member 930 are disposed between the front base 911 and the rear base 912, facing each other.

The front base 911 has three sliding grooves 91 extending in the front-rear direction (the depth direction of the paper in FIG. 112).
1c, 911d, and 911e, and a pivot pin 911b protruding from the rear side at the circumferential center position,
It is mainly formed with a shaft portion 911f that protrudes to the front from one end side (left side when viewed from the front) of the front base, and an opening 911a that penetrates the one end side in the front-rear direction.

The opening 911a is an opening for inserting the shaft of the drive motor KM5 disposed on the front base 911 to the rear side. This allows the shaft of the drive motor KM5 disposed on the front side of the front base 911 to be inserted to the rear side of the front base 911.

The journal pins 911g, 911b are inserted into shaft holes of the transmission gears 922 and 923 described below, and can rotatably hold the transmission gears 922 and 923. That is, the journal pins 911g, 911b are formed in a cylindrical shape with an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameters of the shaft holes of the transmission gears 922 and 923.

The sliding groove 911c is formed in an arc shape centered on the axis of the pivot pin 911b. The sliding groove 911c is an opening through which a pivot pin 923a of a transmission gear 923 described later is inserted, and the radius of the arc is set to be approximately the same as the distance from an axial hole of the transmission gear 923 described later to the pivot pin 923a. This makes it possible to prevent the pivot pin from colliding with the inner wall of the sliding groove 911c when the transmission gear 923 is rotated with the pivot pin 923a inserted inside the sliding groove 911c.

The sliding grooves 911d, 911e are grooves into which pivot pins 951, 952 of an upper displacement member 940, which will be described later, are inserted, and the width dimension in the short side direction of the grooves is set to be larger than the outer diameter of the pivot pins 951, 952.

The sliding groove 911e is formed linearly in the longitudinal direction of the front base 911 (left-right direction when viewed from the front). On the other hand, the sliding groove 911d is formed in an arc shape centered on the lower part of the front base 911. That is, the sliding groove 911e and the sliding groove 911d are formed non-parallel. Therefore, the two sliding grooves 911e, 911d are formed in a state where the distance dimension between the opposing sliding grooves in the up-down direction is different at different positions in the left-right direction. As a result, the insides of the sliding grooves 911e, 911d are supported by the pivot pin 9
When the upper and lower members 51 and 952 are caused to slide, the upper displacement member 940 is caused to slide while rotating due to the difference in the distance dimension between the opposing members in the vertical direction.

The shaft portion 911f is formed to protrude in a cylindrical shape on the front side. The shaft portion 911f can be inserted into a through hole 931 formed in one end of the rotating member 930 described later, and can hold the rotating member 930 in a rotatable state. In other words, the shaft portion 911f is formed to have an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the through hole 931 of the rotating member 930.

The rear base 912 is a plate member attached to the rear side of the front base 911 at a predetermined distance. The rear base 912 is made of a metal material.
As a result, the rigidity of the entire base member 90 formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape can be improved.
When the upper displacement member 940, which is relatively heavy, is disposed on the base member 910, the base member 910 can be prevented from twisting.

The transmission member 920 is disposed between the front base 911 and the rear base 912. The transmission member 920 includes a transmission gear 921 connected to the shaft of the drive motor KM5 and a transmission gear 922 connected to the shaft of the drive motor KM5.
The transmission gear 922 is formed as a main component of the transmission gear 923 .

As described above, the transmission gear 921 is connected to the drive motor KM5 by inserting the shaft of the drive motor KM5 disposed on the front side of the front base 911 into the shaft hole.
21 can be rotated and displaced by the driving force of a driving motor KM5.

The transmission gear 922 is meshed with the transmission gears 921 and 923 as described above.
This allows the rotational driving force of the transmission gear 921 to be transmitted to the transmission gear 923 .

The transmission gear 923 is formed with a pivot pin 923a that protrudes to the front side on the outer circumferential edge thereof. Therefore, when the transmission gear 923 is rotated, the pivot pin 923a is rotationally displaced around the axis of the transmission gear 923.

The rotating member 930 is formed in a long rod shape on one side, and is mainly equipped with a through hole 931 formed in the front-to-rear direction at the end of one end, and an opening 932 extending in the longitudinal direction at approximately the center position in the longitudinal direction.

As described above, the through hole 931 is an opening into which the shaft portion 911f of the front base 911 is inserted, and by inserting the shaft portion 911f, the rotating member 930 can be held in a rotatable state relative to the front base 911. In addition, a biasing spring SP is attached to the tip of the shaft portion 911f.
8 is disposed on the front base 911. As a result, the rotation member 930 is biased in a direction that lifts the other end side upward relative to the front base 911.

The opening 932 is a groove into which the pivot pin 923a of the transmission gear 923 is inserted, and is formed so that the pivot pin 923a can slide inside. As described above, when the transmission gear 923 is rotated and displaced, the pivot pin 923a is displaced inside the opening 932. Therefore, since the rotating member 930 is disposed with one end rotatably supported,
The displacement of the pivot pin 923a causes rotation about one end.

Further, at the other end side of the rotating member 930, a circular member 933 is disposed which is formed in a circular shape when viewed from the front and is formed in a plate shape with a predetermined thickness on the rear side.

The front side of the circular ring member 933 is formed with two sliding grooves 933a recessed at symmetrical positions along the outer periphery. The circular ring member 933 is a part that is connected to the upper displacement member 940 described later, and a shaft portion 953 of the upper displacement member 940 is inserted inside. The circular ring member 933 and the upper displacement member 940 are rotatably connected, so that the upper displacement member 940 can be displaced as the rotating member 930 rotates and displaces.

A protrusion 961 of the upper displacement member 940 is inserted into the sliding groove 933a on the inside, and the upper displacement member 940 is rotationally displaced relative to the rotating member, allowing the protrusion 961 to slide inside the sliding groove 933a.

In addition, the arc axis of the sliding groove 933a is disposed at a position different from the rotation axis of the upper displacement member 940 relative to the rotating member 930. This allows the first opening portion 960 to be displaced when the upper displacement member 940 undergoes rotational displacement relative to the rotating member 930. The first opening portion 960 will be described in detail later.

A shaft cover 913 and a deformation restricting cover 914 made of a plate-like body are disposed on one end side (rotation shaft side) of the rotating member 930.
The deformation restricting cover 914 is disposed at a position spaced a predetermined distance from the rotation shaft, and can restrict the deformation of the rotation member 930 in the front-rear direction due to the weight of the upper displacement member 940 disposed on the other end side.

The upper displacement member 940 is a base body 95 connected to the front base 911 and the rotating member 930.
0, and two first openings 960 rotatably disposed on the rear side of the base body 950,
It is mainly formed with two second opening portions 970 rotatably disposed on the front side of the base body 950, and a variable portion 980 disposed on one end side.

The base body 950 has two pivot pins 951 and 952 formed on the rear surface of one end thereof,
The shaft portion 953 is formed so as to protrude from the rear surface of the other end.

As described above, the pivot pins 951 and 952 are fitted into the slide grooves 911e and 911f of the front base 911.
1d. Therefore, when the upper displacement member 940 is driven by the rotating member 930, the pivot pins 951, 952 slide along the sliding grooves 911e, 911d, thereby causing the upper displacement member 940 to be slidably displaced in the left-right direction and the other end side to be rotated downward.

As described above, the shaft portion 953 is a protrusion that is inserted into the circular member 933 and connected to the rotating member 930, and is formed in a cylindrical shape with an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the circular member 933. This allows the upper displacement member 940 to be rotatably connected to the rotating member 930.
When the driving force of the driving motor KM5 rotates the circular member 933 about one end of the shaft,
Due to the displacement of the upper displacement member 940, a driving force is transmitted to the upper displacement member 940. As a result, the upper displacement member 940 can be displaced along the slide grooves 911e and 911d.

The first opening 960 is a plate member having a predetermined thickness in the front-rear direction, and two pieces are disposed on the rear side of the base body 950. The first opening 960 is disposed on the other end side of the base body 950 so as to be rotatably supported by a shaft. The first opening 960 also protrudes on the rear side and is fixed to the annular member 9
The upper displacement member 940 has a protrusion 961 disposed on the inside of the sliding groove 933a of the rotary member 930. As a result, when the upper displacement member 940 is rotationally displaced relative to the rotary member 930 due to the displacement of the rotary member 930, the protrusion 961
61 can slide inside the sliding groove 933a.

In this case, as described above, the curved axis of the sliding groove 933a is positioned at a position different from the rotation axis of the upper displacement member 940 relative to the rotating member 930, so that as the protrusion 961 slides inside the sliding groove 933a, the first opening portion 960 supported by the base body 950 can be rotationally displaced.

The second opening portion 970 is a plate member having a predetermined thickness in the front-rear direction, and two pieces are arranged on the front side of the base body 950. The second opening portion 970 is rotatably supported on the other end side of the base body 950. Also, the second opening portion 970 is formed with an engagement protrusion (not shown) that engages when the first opening portion 960 is displaced by a predetermined amount. As a result, when the upper displacement member 940 is displaced by a predetermined amount, the first opening portion 960 is displaced by rotation about the support portion, and engages with the second opening portion 970 to displace the second opening portion 970.

Next, the displacement of the upper displacement member 940 will be described with reference to Figures 115 to 117. Figure 115 shows the upper displacement unit 940 in a state where the upper displacement member 940 is disposed at the retracted position.
116 is a front view of the upper displacement unit 900 in a state in which the upper displacement member 940 is disposed at the intermediate position. Fig. 117 is a front view of the upper displacement unit 900 in a state in which the upper displacement member 940 is disposed at the extended position.

The retreated position of the upper displacement member 940 is the position where the pivot pins 951 and 952 are in contact with the front base 91.
The extended position is a position where the pivot pins 951 and 952 are disposed on the other end side of the slide grooves 911d and 911e of the front base 911 when viewed from the front.
The intermediate position is a position in which the upper displacement member 940 is disposed on one end side of the sliding grooves 911d, 911e (on the left side as viewed from the front of the front base 911). Furthermore, the intermediate position is a position in which the upper displacement member 940 is displaced to a position intermediate between the retracted position and the extended position.

As shown in Figures 115 to 117, when the upper displacement member 940 is displaced relative to the front base 911, the upper displacement member 940 is rotationally displaced in its longitudinal direction from a substantially horizontal direction (left-right direction in Figure 115) to a substantially vertical direction (up-down direction in Figure 117).

In addition, with the rotational displacement, the position of one end side of the upper displacement member 940 is changed to the position of the front base 911.
When the rotating member 930 is rotated by the driving force of the driving motor KM5 as described above, the upper displacement member 940 is rotationally displaced while being slidably displaced.

117, a first opening portion 960 disposed on the upper displacement member 940 is rotationally displaced relative to the base body 950, and therefore a second opening portion 970 which engages with and displaces due to the rotational displacement of the first opening portion 960 is also rotationally displaced relative to the base body 950. Thus, at the extended position, the longitudinal direction of the upper displacement member 940 is oriented in the vertical direction, and the first opening portion 960 and the second opening portion 970 are in a displaced state.

In this embodiment, the upper displacement member 940 is formed in a shape that imitates the shape of a human arm (including a hand).
By displacing the open portion 970, the player can visually recognize a displacement that resembles a human arm becoming thicker.

Next, the variable portion 980 will be described in detail with reference to FIG.
118(a) is a front view of the variable portion 980, and FIG. 118(b) is a rear view of the variable portion 980. FIG.

As shown in Figures 118(a) and 118(b), the variable portion 980 is formed in a shape that resembles a human hand, and is mainly comprised of a main body portion 981 that forms the rear part of the hand, and finger portions 982 to 986 that are connected to the main body portion 981 and form the finger portions of the hand.

A drive motor (not shown) is disposed inside the main body 981, and a variable plate (not shown) disposed inside can be piston-displaced in the front-to-rear direction (up-down direction in Figure 118 (a)).

The finger portion 982 is a portion that corresponds to the thumb, and the base side is connected to the variable plate of the main body portion 981. This allows the finger portion 982 to be displaced by the variable plate making a piston-like movement.

Each of the finger portions 983 to 986 is mainly formed with a first link RB1 disposed on the base side on the inside thereof and a second link RB2 disposed on the tip side.

The first link RB1 is rotatably connected at its tip end to the second link RB2 and at its base end to the variable plate of the main body 981. Therefore, when the variable plate of the main body 981 makes a piston movement, the first link RB1 and the second link RB2 are rotated via the first link RB1.
2 can be displaced. This causes the finger portions 983 to 986 to be displaced. In this embodiment, by displacing the finger portions 982 to 986, the player can visually recognize the action of opening and closing the fingers of the hand.

The front base 411 has two sliding grooves 411 penetrating in the front-rear direction (the depth direction of the paper in FIG. 43 ).
a and 411b, two cylindrical pivot pins 411c and 411d protruding from the rear side, and a curved wall portion 411e protruding in an arc shape with the pivot pin 411d as its axis.

The sliding grooves 411a and 411b are formed by two projections 47 protruding from the rear surface side of the lower displacement member 440.
The slide grooves 411a and 411b are formed to extend long in the left-right direction.
2, 473 can be displaced along the sliding grooves 411a, 411b, so that the lower displacement member 440 can be slid in the left-right direction.

The sliding grooves 411a and 411b are each formed to be curved in an arc shape, and extend upward (see FIG. 43 ) from the left end (left side in FIG. 43 ) of the front base 411 to the right end (right side in FIG. 43 ).
Furthermore, the sliding grooves 411a, 411b are disposed such that the axes of their respective arcs are different from each other, and the gap between them in the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 43) narrows from the left end to the right end.

Since the distance between the protrusions 472, 473 of the base member 470 of the lower displacement member 440 does not change, when the lower displacement member 440 is slid along the slide groove, the lower displacement member 440 can be displaced while rotating. In other words, by changing the distance between the two slide grooves 411a, 411b, the lower displacement member 440 can be displaced without applying a rotational driving force to the lower displacement member 440.
0 can be rotated with sliding.

The pivot pin 411c is a protrusion that is inserted into a shaft portion 422a of a cam member 422 of a transmission member 420, which will be described later, and is formed in a cylindrical shape with an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the shaft portion 422a.
The pivot pin 411c is formed of a metal rod-shaped body and is fitted onto the front base 411. Therefore, when a force acts on the cam member 422 from its outer circumferential surface in the axial direction, the pivot pin 411c is
This can prevent the member 11c from breaking (breaking).

Next, referring to FIG. 119 to FIG. 121, a lower displacement member 2440 in the second embodiment will be described.
In the first embodiment, the movable rack 464 and the rack 466 are displaced in the same direction by the driving force of the drive motor KM2, but in the lower displacement member 2440 in the second embodiment, the movable rack 2464 and the rack 466 are displaced in opposite directions by the driving force of the drive motor KM2. Note that the same reference numerals are used for the same parts as in the first embodiment, and the description thereof will be omitted.

First, the overall configuration of the lower displacement member 2440 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to Figs. 119 and 120. Fig. 119 is an exploded perspective front view of the lower displacement member 2440 in the second embodiment. Fig. 120 is a front view of the lower displacement member 2440.
, the decorative member 450 and the front case 481 of the lower displacement member 2440 are shown in a transparent state.

As shown in FIGS. 119 and 120 , the lower displacement member 2440 in the second embodiment includes a base member 2470 connected to the front base 411, a case member 480 covering the front and rear of the base member 2470, a transmission mechanism 2460 displaceably disposed between the case member 480 and the base member 2470, and a decorative member 4440 formed to cover the front and rear of the case member 480.
50 and is formed primarily with

The base member 2470 is a plate member formed in a horizontally elongated rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and is formed mainly by protrusions 472, 473 protruding from the back surface of one end, a standing wall 471a standing from the edge of the other end to the front side, a protruding wall 477 protruding in an opposite U-shape in the up-down direction from the upper end of the center in the left-right direction (left-right direction in Figure 120) to the front side, shaft portions 474, 475 protruding to the front side, and shaft portions 2470a, 2470b protruding upward from the shaft portions 474, 475.

The shaft portion 2470a is a shaft member on which a transmission gear 2468a (described later) is rotatably supported, and is formed smaller than the shaft hole of the transmission gear 2468a.

The shaft portion 2470b is a shaft member on which a transmission gear 2468b (described later) is rotatably supported, and is formed smaller than the shaft hole of the transmission gear 2468b.
The shaft portion 2470a and the transmission gear 2470b are disposed in a state in which the gear teeth formed on the outer circumferential surface of the shaft portion 2470a and the shaft portion 2470b are engaged with each other.
The distance is set to the radius of the transmission gear 2468a and the transmission gear 2468b.

The transmission mechanism 2460 is disposed in front of the base member 470 and includes transmission gears 461 and 462.
62, 463, a drive motor KM2 whose shaft portion is connected to the transmission gear 461, a movable rack 2464 having a tooth surface that meshes with the transmission gear 463 and is arranged so as to be slidably displaceable in front of the base member 470, a transmission gear 2468a that meshes with the movable rack 2464, a transmission gear 2468b that meshes with the transmission gear 2468a, a rack 46 that meshes with the transmission gear 2468b, and a ball receiving portion 467 that is rotatably arranged on one end side of the rack 466.

The movable rack 2464 is formed into a rectangular plate-like body when viewed from the front, and is mainly formed with a rack gear 464a engraved on the lower end surface, a rack gear 2464g engraved on the upper end surface, and a collision portion 464f protruding from the lower end.

The rack gear 2464g is meshed with a transmission gear 2468a, which will be described later. As a result, when the drive is transmitted from the drive motor KM4 and the rack 466 is displaced, the transmission gear 2468a can be rotated in accordance with the displacement.

The transmission gears 2468a, 2468b are supported by the shafts 2470a, 2470b of the base member 2470 in a state where they are meshed with each other as described above.
When the transmission gear 468a is rotated, the transmission gear 2468b is rotated.
When the transmission gear 2468b is rotated, a driving force is transmitted to the rack 466, and the rack 466 is displaced.

That is, the rack 466 can be driven by the driving force of the drive motor KM4. The transmission gears 2468a, 2468b are disposed at positions partially shifted in the front-rear direction, so that the transmission gear 2468a is prevented from colliding with the rack 466, and the transmission gear 2468b is prevented from colliding with the movable rack 2464.

Next, the displacement of the lower displacement member 2440 will be described with reference to FIG.
121 is a front view of the lower displacement member 2440. Note that in Fig. 121, similar to Fig. 120, the decorative member 450 and the front case 481 of the lower displacement member 2440 are shown in a transparent state.

As shown in FIG. 121, power is applied to the drive motor KM2, and the above-mentioned transmission mechanism 24
When the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced to the launch position by the movable rack 464 and the rack 46
6 are displaced in different directions.

More specifically, when the drive motor KM4 is rotated, the movable rack 464 is displaced to the other end side (left side in FIG. 121) of the lower displacement member 440.
68a, 68b are rotated, and the rack 466 is displaced to one end side (the right side in FIG. 3), whereby the ball receiving portion 467 can be displaced to the third position.

Therefore, when ball receiving portion 467 is displaced from the first position, a displacement component can be formed in the opposite direction to the displacement direction of ball receiving portion 467, so that the change in the center of gravity of lower displacement member 2440 caused by the displacement of ball receiving portion 467 can be reduced by the displacement of movable rack 464. As a result, rattling of lower displacement member 2440 caused by the change in the center of gravity can be suppressed.

Next, referring to FIG. 122 to FIG. 127, a lower displacement member 3440 in a third embodiment will be described.
In the first embodiment, the ball receiving portion 467 is slidably displaced by a rack and pinion mechanism. In the third embodiment, the lower displacement member 3440 has the ball receiving portion 467 slidably displaced by a link mechanism.
The same reference numerals are used and the description thereof is omitted.

First, the overall configuration of the lower displacement member 3440 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 122 to 125. FIG. 122(a) shows the lower displacement member 3440 in the third embodiment.
122(a) and 122(b) are front and rear views of the lower displacement member 3440. Fig. 123 is an exploded perspective front view of the lower displacement member 3440, and Fig. 124 is an exploded perspective rear view of the lower displacement member 3440. Figs. 125(a) and 91(b) are front views of the lower displacement member 3440.

In addition, Figure 125 (a) illustrates a state in which the decorative member 450 of the lower displacement member 3440 is viewed transparently, and Figure 125 (b) illustrates a state in which the decorative member 450 of the lower displacement member 3440 and the front case 3481 are viewed transparently.

As shown in FIGS. 122 to 125 , the lower displacement member 3440 in the third embodiment includes a base member 3470 connected to the front base 411, a case member 480 covering the front and rear of the base member 3470, a transmission mechanism 3460 displaceably disposed between the case member 480 and the base member 3470, and a decorative member 45 formed to cover the front and rear of the case member 480.
It is formed mainly with 0.

The base member 3470 is a plate member formed in a horizontally elongated rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and is mainly formed by protrusions 472, 473 protruding from the back surface of one end, a standing wall 471a erected from the edge of the other end toward the front side, a sliding wall 3470c formed continuous with the base end side of the erect wall 471a and erected on the lower edge of the base member 3470, a protruding wall 477 protruding in an opposite U-shape in the up-down direction from the upper end of the center in the left-right direction (left-right direction in Figure 122 (a)) toward the front side, and an opening 479 recessed in the center of the up-down direction of the base member 470, extending from one end to the other end.

The sliding wall 3470c is a wall that abuts against the leg portion 467a of the ball receiving portion 467 to regulate the position (state) of the ball receiving portion 467. In other words, it is formed to protrude to a position below the ball receiving portion 467. This allows the ball receiving portion 467 to be held with the opening of its U-shaped portion facing upward.

The sliding wall 3470c has a recess 3470 formed below the end on the side of the standing wall 471a.
A recess 3470c1 is formed. The recess 3470c1 is a groove that receives the tip of the leg 467a of the ball receiving portion 467 therein. This allows the ball receiving portion 467 to be received in the recess and rotated when the ball receiving portion 467 is slid toward the upright portion by the transmission mechanism 3460 described later. As a result, the ball receiving portion 467 can be caused to perform a firing operation (an operation of discharging the ball held inside the U-shape to the outside of the lower displacement member 3440).

The transmission mechanism 3460 includes a drive motor KM2 attached to a front case 3480, which will be described later.
It is mainly formed with a first link member 3468 that is rotatably connected to the shaft of the drive motor KM2, a second link member 3469 that is rotatably connected to the first link member 3468, and a ball receiving portion 467 that is connected to one end side of the second link member 3469.

The first link member 3468 is formed from a rectangular, horizontally elongated plate-like body and is mainly equipped with an axial hole 3468b formed through one end, a connecting hole 3468a connected to the shaft of the drive motor KM2, and a load portion 3468c formed by bulging out on the other end.

The shaft hole 3468b is a through hole through which a rotating shaft 3469a of a second link member 3469 described later is inserted, and is formed penetrating in the front-rear direction with an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the rotating shaft 3469a.

The connecting hole 3468a is a hole to which the shaft of the driving motor KM2 is fastened as described above, and is formed with an inner diameter that is substantially the same as the outer diameter of the shaft of the driving motor KM2.
It can be rotated by a driving force of 2.

The load portion 3468c is formed to bulge outward from the connecting hole 3468a toward the other end side.
Reference numeral 46c denotes a member for applying a load to position the center of gravity of the first link member 3468 on the other end side relative to the connecting hole 3468a, and is formed so as to bulge outward from one end side.

The second link member 3469 is formed in a rectangular shape that is long from side to side, and is connected to the first link member 34
The second link member 3469 has a rotation shaft 3469a that protrudes in a cylindrical shape from the other end side toward the front side, and a through hole 3469b that is formed on one end side and penetrates in the front-rear direction.
It is formed primarily with this in mind.

As described above, the rotating shaft 3469a is inserted into the shaft hole 3468b of the first link member 3468. This allows the first link member 3468 and the second link member 3469 to be connected in a rotatable state.

The through hole 3469b is an opening for connecting the ball receiving portion 467 to the second link member 3469. The through hole 3469b is formed to be smaller in diameter than the inner diameter of the shaft hole 467b of the ball receiving portion 467. Therefore, the shaft hole 467b of the ball receiving portion 467 and the through hole 3469b are arranged coaxially, and a screw having a head larger than the width of the opening 469 in the short direction is inserted through the opening 479 and the shaft hole 467b from the rear side of the base member 3470 and fastened to the through hole 3469b, thereby allowing the ball receiving portion 467 to be fixed in place.
67 is rotatably connected to the second link member.

The case member 480 is a member that covers the front and rear of the base member 470.
The main components of the portable computer 3480 include a front case 3481 disposed on the front side of the portable computer 3480 and a rear case 482 disposed on the rear side of the portable computer 3480.

The front case 3481 is formed in a rectangular plate shape when viewed from the front, and has an opening 3481d penetrating at a position opposite to the drive motor KM2, and a bottom wall portion 481b formed on the lower end surface on the rear side.
and a shaft hole 481c penetrating the lower edge in the front-rear direction.

The opening 3481d is a hole for inserting the shaft of the drive motor KM2 disposed on the front side of the front case 3481 to the rear side, and is formed with an outer diameter larger than that of the shaft of the drive motor KM2. This allows the drive force of the drive motor KM2 disposed on the front side of the front case 3481 to be transmitted to the first link member 3468 disposed on the rear side.

Next, the displacement of the lower displacement member 3440 will be described with reference to Figures 126 and 127. Figure 126(a) is a front view of the lower displacement member 440 in the first position.
Fig. 127(a) is a front view of the lower displacement member 440 in the third position, and Fig. 127(b) is a front view of the lower displacement member 440 in the second position.

126(a) to 127(b) sequentially illustrate the transition states of the lower displacement member 440.
7(b) illustrates a state in which the decorative member 450 and the front case 481 of the lower displacement member 3440 are viewed transparently.

As shown in FIGS. 126 and 127 , in the first position, the lower displacement member 440 is disposed such that the first link member 3468 and the second link member 3469 are aligned in the longitudinal direction (the left-right direction in FIG. 126( a )).
is approximately parallel to the longitudinal direction of the base member 3470 (the left-right direction in FIG. 126( a )), and the first link member 3468 and the second link member 3469 are arranged so as to overlap in the front-rear direction.

That is, the connecting portion between the first link member 3468 and the second link member 3469 is disposed on one end side (left side in FIG. 126( a )) of the base member 3470. This causes the second link member 3469 to be disposed on the one end side. As a result, the ball receiving portion 467 is disposed in the first position.

126(b), when the drive motor KM2 is rotated from the first position and the first link member 3468 is rotationally displaced, one end of the first link member 3468 is displaced relative to the base member 3470. As a result, the second link member 3469 connected to the one end of the first link member 3468 is displaced. In this case, the second link member 346
One end of the second link member 3469 is connected to the ball receiving portion 467 and is slidable along the opening 479 of the base member 3470, so that one end of the second link member 3469 is pushed out toward the other end of the base member 3470. As a result, the ball receiving portion 46
7 can be displaced to a second position.

Next, as shown in Fig. 127(a) , when the drive motor KM2 is further rotated from the second position and the first link member 3468 is rotated approximately 180 degrees from the first position, the connecting portion between the first link member 3468 and the second link member 3469 is disposed on the other end side of the base member 3470 with respect to the rotation axis.
One end side of 69 is further pushed out toward the other end side of the base member 3470, and the ball receiving portion 467 is disposed in the third position.

In this case, the tip of the leg 467a of the ball receiving portion 467 is positioned inside the recess 3470c1, so that the ball receiving portion 467 is rotated by the biasing spring SP2 and performs the firing operation.

Furthermore, the load portion 3468c of the first link member 3468 is displaced toward one end of the base member 3470. This makes it possible to prevent the center of gravity of the lower displacement member 3440 from being changed when the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced relative to the base member. As a result, rattling of the lower displacement member 3440 can be suppressed.

That is, when ball receiving portion 467 is displaced from the first position, a displacement component can be formed in the opposite direction to the displacement direction of ball receiving portion 467, so that the displacement of load portion 3468c can reduce the change in the center of gravity of lower displacement member 3440 that accompanies the displacement of ball receiving portion 467. As a result, rattling of lower displacement member 440 caused by the change in the center of gravity can be suppressed.

127(b), the ball receiving portion 467 can be retreated to the second position and the first position by continuing the rotation of the first link member 3468. Therefore, there is no need to switch the control of the drive motor KM2, and the ball receiving portion 467 can be quickly displaced to the second position or the first position.

Therefore, when a game ball is discharged from the inside of the ball receiving portion 467, the position of the center of gravity of the lower displacement member 440 changes, making the lower displacement member 3440 prone to rattling. However, by quickly retracting the ball receiving portion 467 and quickly bringing the position of its center of gravity closer to the rotation axis of the lower displacement member 440, the rattling of the lower displacement member 3440 can be suppressed.

Furthermore, by immediately displacing the ball receiving portion 467, it is possible to suppress wobbling of the lower displacement member 3440 caused by the reaction force of the ejection action when the game ball is ejected from the inside of the ball receiving portion 467.

In other words, when a game ball is discharged from the inside of the ball receiving portion 467, the load on the lower displacement member 440 is lightened by the amount of the discharged game ball, and the lower displacement member 3440 is likely to be displaced upward as a reaction; however, by immediately displacing the ball receiving portion 467, a force is applied to displace the base member 470 downward as a reaction due to the rotational displacement of the ball receiving portion 467, thereby counteracting the reaction when the ball is discharged from the lower displacement member 3440.

Next, referring to FIG. 128 to FIG. 130, the lower displacement unit 44 in the fourth embodiment will be described.
In the first embodiment, the lower displacement member 440 arranged in the retracted state is formed to be capable of firing.
At 0, the launching operation of the lower displacement member 440 arranged in the retracted state is restricted. Note that the same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are given the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted.

First, the overall configuration of the lower displacement unit 4400 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 128. Fig. 128 is a front view of the lower displacement unit 4400 in the fourth embodiment. In Fig. 128, the decorative member 450 and the front case 481 of the lower displacement member 440 are shown in a transparent state, and the bottom wall portion 481b of the front case 481 is shown by a chain line. Fig. 128 also shows the state in which the lower displacement member 440 is in a retracted state and the ball receiving portion 467 is arranged in the first position.

As shown in FIG. 128 , in a lower displacement unit 4400 in the fourth embodiment, an opening 4471 b is formed in a base member 470 of a lower displacement member 440 between an opposing standing wall 471 a and a bottom wall portion 481 b of a front case 481 .

A tip portion 4411g1 of an engagement wall 4411g, which will be described later, is inserted into the opening 4471b. That is, the opening 4471b is opened larger than the tip portion 4411g1.

The front base 411 is formed with an engagement wall 4411g that is formed in a substantially L-shape and continues to the bottom surface of the recovery port 411f.

The engagement wall 4411g can restrict the ball receiving portion 467 from rotating (firing) at the third position by inserting the tip portion 4411g1 bent into the opening 4471b. That is, the tip position of the tip portion 4411g1 is set to be substantially the same as the height of the upper surface of the bottom wall portion 481b of the lower displacement member 440 in the retracted state.

Next, a state in which each member of the lower displacement unit 4400 is displaced will be described with reference to Fig. 129 and Fig. 130. Fig. 129 and Fig. 130 are front views of the lower displacement unit 4400. Note that Fig. 129 and Fig. 130 show the decorative member 450 and the front case 481 of the lower displacement member 440 in a transparent state, as in Fig. 128, and show the front case 48 in a transparent state.
One bottom wall portion 481b is shown in dashed lines.

129 illustrates a state in which the lower displacement member 440 is in the retracted state and the ball receiving portion 467 is in the third position, and FIG 130 illustrates a state in which the lower displacement member 440 is in the first protruding state and the ball receiving portion 467 is in the first position.

As shown in FIG. 129, when the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced to the third position, the tip of the leg portion 467a of the ball receiving portion 467 abuts against the upper surface of the tip portion 4411g1 of the engagement wall 4411g, forming a recess 481.
The ball receiving portion 467 is prevented from entering the opening 4471b.

Therefore, when the ball receiving portion 467 is caused to perform a discharging operation in order to discharge the ball sent onto the trajectory area of the ball receiving portion 467 outward from the lower displacement member 440, the ball receiving portion 467 rotates in the third position,
It is possible to prevent the game ball held inside the ball receiving portion 467 from being discharged.

That is, when game balls exceeding the specified number (one ball) are discharged from the trajectory area of the ball receiving portion 467 as the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced to the third position, it is possible to restrict the change in the attitude of the ball receiving portion 467. Therefore, it is possible to easily discharge only the game balls exceeding the specified number from the trajectory area.

130, when the lower displacement member 440 is displaced to the position of the first extended state (a position other than the position of the retracted state), the lower displacement member 440 is displaced with respect to the base member 470, so that the opening 4471b of the lower displacement member 440 and the engagement wall 4411g are separated from each other. Therefore, in the first extended state, the ball receiving portion 467 can be displaced to the third position to perform the firing operation.

That is, when the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced to the third position, and more than the specified number (one ball) of game balls are discharged from the trajectory area of the ball receiving portion 467, the attitude of the ball receiving portion 467 is prevented from changing, and it is easy to maintain the state in which the ball receiving portion 467 holds the specified number of game balls. On the other hand, when the lower displacement member 440 is displaced to the first and second protruding positions, the engagement wall 4411g opens the opening 4471b.
467a is moved away from the internal space of the ball receiving portion 467.
When engaged with the opening 4471b, the posture of the ball receiving portion 467 is changed, making it easier to discharge the specified number of game balls from the ball receiving portion 467.

Next, referring to FIG. 131 to FIG. 135, the distribution unit 55 in the fifth embodiment will be described.
In the first embodiment, the case where the sorting member 540 rotates to form the storage state and the restriction state has been described, but in the fifth embodiment, the sorting member 540 slides to form the storage state and the restriction state. Note that the same parts as those in the above embodiments are given the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted.

First, the overall configuration of the distribution unit 5500 in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 131 to 134. Figure 131(a) is a top view of the distribution unit 5500 in the fifth embodiment, and Figure 131(b) is a rear view of the distribution unit 5500.
Fig. 132 is an exploded perspective front view of the sorting unit 5500, and Fig. 133 is an exploded perspective rear view of the sorting unit 5500.
134 is a cross-sectional view of the sorting unit 5500 taken along line XXXIV. Note that in FIG. 134, the outer shape of the sorting member 540 is shown by a chain line.

As shown in FIGS. 131 to 133, the sorting unit 5500 in the fifth embodiment includes a base plate 5520 formed in a generally rectangular shape when viewed from the front, a path forming member 510 attached to the front side of the base plate 5520 and forming a plurality of flow paths through which the balls can flow down between the base plate 5520 and the path forming member 510, and a sorting member 5540 slidably attached to the rear side of the base plate 5520.
and an extension path member 530 attached to an end surface of the base plate 5520 to extend the ball flow path formed between the opposing sides of the base plate 5520 and the path forming member 510.

The base plate 5520 is formed mainly by two cylindrical shaft portions 5526 protruding toward the rear side, a first opening 5521 and a second opening 5522 formed in a rectangular shape, a rolling portion 525 formed in a U-shaped cross section with an open upper end on the side surface at the upper end and extending in the left-right direction, and a locking portion 524 protruding like a hook toward the rear side.

The shaft portion 5526 is formed so as to protrude from the rear surface side in two directions, and each of the shaft portions 5526 is inserted into two sliding grooves 5546 described later.

The first opening 5521 and the second opening 5522 are provided by a restricting plate 54 of a sorting member 5540 described later.
The first opening 5521 and the second opening 5522 are openings through which the restricting plate 5541 and the storage plate 5542 are inserted, and are formed with an opening width larger than the thickness of the restricting plate 5541 and the storage plate 5542. In addition, since the sorting member 5540 is attached to the base plate 5520 in a slidable state, the first opening 5521 and the second opening 5522 are formed with openings larger than the restricting plate 5541 and the storage plate 5542 in the sliding direction of the sorting member 5540.

The sorting member 5540 is formed in a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, with one end being longer than the other, and is formed with a predetermined thickness in the front-rear direction.
41 and a storage plate 5542, a sliding groove 5546 formed as a long hole in the same direction as the extending direction of the restriction plate 5541 and the storage plate 5542, and a hook-shaped locking portion 544 formed on the back side.
It is formed primarily with this in mind.

The restricting plate 5541 is connected to the first ball throwing path KR1 and the second ball throwing path KR2 through the first opening 5521.
R2, the game ball flowing down the first ball sending path KR1 is sent to the second ball sending path K
It is a plate member that restricts the flow of ball into R2, and the distance that it protrudes from the first opening 5521 is set to a distance greater than the radius of the game ball.

Moreover, the restricting plate 5541 is formed in a straight line when viewed from the front, and the extending direction is set to be substantially the same as the sliding direction of the sorting member 540. This makes it possible to minimize the displacement area of the restricting plate 5541 when the sorting member 5540 is slid and displaced. As a result,
The opening area of the first opening 5521 can be minimized, and the rigidity of the base plate 5520 can be ensured.

The storage plate 5542 is a plate member that is disposed on the second ball sending path KR2 through the second opening 5522 and causes the game balls flowing down the second ball sending path KR2 to flow down to the upstream side of the storage plate 5542.
The distance protruding from the second opening 5522 is set to a distance greater than the radius of the game ball.

Moreover, the storage plate 5542 is formed in a straight line when viewed from the front, and the extending direction is set to be substantially the same as the sliding direction of the sorting member 540. This makes it possible to minimize the displacement area of the storage plate 5542 when the sorting member 5540 is slid and displaced. As a result,
The opening area of the second opening 5522 can be minimized, and the rigidity of the base plate 5520 can be ensured.

The sliding groove 5546 is an elongated hole formed penetrating in the front-rear direction. The shaft portion 5526 of the base plate 5520 is inserted into the sliding groove 5546.
46 and fastening a screw or the like to the tip of the shaft portion 5526 from the rear side, the sorting member 5540 can be held in a state in which it can be slidably displaced relative to the base plate 5520.

The sliding grooves 5546 are formed in two locations, and their longitudinal directions are parallel to each other. This allows the sorting member 5540 to be slidably displaced while preventing the sorting member 5540 from being rotated or displaced.

Next, the displacement of the distribution member 5540 will be described with reference to FIG.
135(a) and 135(b) show the distribution unit 550 in the range CXXXV of FIG.
135(a) shows a state in which the sorting member 5540 is arranged in the storing position, and FIG. 135(b) shows a state in which the sorting member 5540 is arranged in the restricting position.

As shown in Figure 135 (a), when the distribution member 5540 is positioned in the regulating position, the storage plate 5542 is positioned in the shape of the third ball sending path KR3, and the regulating plate 5541 is positioned inside the recess 518 formed in the rear wall of the path forming member 510.

In this case, the distance L9 between the tip of the storage plate 5542 protruding inward of the third ball sending path KR3 and the inner wall of the third ball sending path facing the tip is made smaller than the diameter of the game ball.
It is stopped upstream of 42.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 135(b), when the sorting member 5540 is disposed in the regulating position, the regulating plate 5541 is disposed at the connecting portion between the first ball throwing path KR1 and the third ball throwing path KR3, and the storage plate 5542 ...
It is placed inside 19.

In this case, the distance L10 between the tip end of the restricting plate 5541 protruding inward from the first ball throwing path KR1 and the inner wall of the entrance of the third ball throwing path KR3 is set to be smaller than the diameter of the game ball. Therefore, the ball flowing down the first ball throwing path KR1 collides with the restricting plate 5541 and is thrown to the second ball throwing path KR2.

That is, by switching the sorting member 5540 between the restricting position and the storing position, a ball sent along the first ball sending path KR1 is sent to the third ball sending path KR3 and stopped on the third ball sending path KR3, and a ball flowing down the first ball sending path KR1 is prevented from flowing into the third ball sending path KR3,
It is possible to create a state in which the ball is thrown along the second ball throwing path KR2.

Therefore, when the balls branch from flow path 1 to flow path 2 by sliding and displacing one of the distribution members 5540, the balls' flow path can be reliably switched to one of the two paths.

In addition, the regulating plate 5541 (distributing means) is formed so as to be able to appear and disappear from the first ball sending path KR1 (flow passage) or the third ball sending path KR3 (first branch passage), and the appearance and disappearance position is as follows:
The inner wall is an extension of the flow direction at the downstream end of the first ball sending path KR1. Therefore, the restricting plate 5541 can be protruded at a position close to the game ball flowing down from the lower end side of the first ball sending path KR1. Therefore, the time required from when the restricting plate 5541 starts to protrude into the flow-down passage or the third ball sending path KR3 (first branch passage) until the game ball can be distributed can be shortened. As a result, the distribution destination can be reliably switched by the restricting plate 5541.

In addition, the regulating plate 5541 (distribution means) is protruded into the third ball sending path KR3 (first branch passage) to distribute the game ball flowing down the first ball sending path KR1 (flow passage) to the second ball sending path (second branch passage). Since the protruding direction of the regulating plate 5541 is set in a direction pointing toward the upstream end of the second ball sending path KR2, when a game ball flowing down the first ball sending path KR1 abuts against the regulating plate in the middle of the protruding motion, the game ball is directed to the second ball sending path (second branch passage) in accordance with the protruding motion of the regulating plate.
As a result, the ball can be more reliably distributed to the second throwing path KR2.

Next, referring to FIG. 136 to FIG. 140, a rotation unit 670 according to a sixth embodiment will be described.
In the first embodiment, the load gear 731e is connected to the drive of the rotating body 800, and the rotating body 800 is restricted from moving due to inertial force. However, in the sixth embodiment, the load gear 731e is removed from the rotating body 800. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

First, the overall configuration of the rotation unit 6700 in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 136 to Fig. 138. Fig. 136 is a front view of the rotation unit 6700 in the sixth embodiment, and Fig. 137 is an exploded perspective front view of the rotation unit 6700. Fig. 138 is an exploded perspective rear view of the sorting unit 6500.

As shown in FIG. 136 to FIG. 138, the rotation unit 6700 includes a rotating body 8 that is rotationally displaceable.
A decorative unit 6750 equipped with a ball receiving stand 710, a ball receiving stand 710 arranged on the upper side of the decorative unit 6750 in the direction of gravity, a rear base 720 arranged on the rear side of the ball receiving stand 710 and the decorative unit 6750, and a left transmission member 7
30 and a crank cover 743 arranged on the right side of the decorative unit 6750 when viewed from the front.

The decorative unit 6750 is a box member 760 formed in a box shape with an open upper side in the direction of gravity.
and a rotor 800 rotatably disposed inside the box member.
That is, in the first embodiment, the decorative unit 750 has a rotating body 800 disposed inside the box member 760 and the lid member 770, but in the sixth embodiment, the decorative unit 750 is formed in a state where the lid member 770 is removed.

The left side transmission member 730 is mainly formed by a drive motor KM4 arranged on the left side surface (left side of Figure 136) of the decorative unit 750, a transmission member 6731 that transmits the driving force of the drive motor KM4, a motor base 732 to which the drive motor KM4 is attached, a gear cover 733 that covers the transmission member 6731, and a ball sending path cover 734 that is attached to the gear cover 733 and is formed with a predetermined gap between it and the gear cover 733.

The transmission member 6731 is mainly formed with a transmission gear 731a attached to the shaft of the drive motor KM4, a transmission gear 6731b meshing with the transmission gear 731a, a transmission gear 731c meshing with the transmission gear 6731b, and a transmission gear 731d arranged adjacent to the transmission gear 731c and coaxially disposed by a shaft 735.

The transmission gear 6731b is a gear that transmits a driving force to the transmission gear 731c.
In the embodiment, the one-way clutch OW1 is attached inside the transmission gear 731b, but the one-way clutch OW1 is removed from the transmission gear 6731b in the sixth embodiment. In addition, the transmission gears 731c and 731d are the same as those in the first embodiment, so
A detailed explanation will be omitted.

Therefore, when a driving force in one direction is transmitted from the drive motor KM4, a rotational driving force can be transmitted to the shaft 735, and when a driving force in the other direction is transmitted from the drive motor KM4, the outer wheel slips (spins freely) relative to the inner wheel of the one-way clutch OW1, and the transmission of the driving force to the shaft 735 is cut off.

Next, the rotation of the rotating body 800 will be described with reference to Figures 139 and 140. Figures 139(a) to 139(c) are side views of the decorative unit 6750 as viewed in the direction of the arrow CXXXIX in Figure 138, and Figures 140(a) to 140(c) are side views of the decorative unit 6750 as viewed in the direction of the arrow CXXXIX in Figure 138.

139 and 140, the left side panel 765 of the box member 760 is shown in a transparent state.
140(a) to 140(c) sequentially illustrate the manner in which the center of gravity G of the rotating body 800 displaces in the first section DK1.

As shown in FIG. 139, when a driving force in one direction is transmitted from the driving motor KM4, the rotating body 800 is rotationally displaced in the right direction (clockwise) when viewed in the left direction (when viewed in the direction of FIG. 139).

As described above, the rotating body 800 is formed asymmetrically with respect to the rotation axis, and the center of gravity G is disposed at a position different from the rotation axis. Therefore, when the rotating body 800 is rotated from a state in which the center of gravity G is disposed above the rotation axis as shown in Fig. 140(a) and the center of gravity G as shown in Fig. 140(b) begins to displace to a position approximately horizontal to the rotation axis, a rotating force is applied in the rotation direction due to the load.

Therefore, the rollers interposed between the outer and inner rings of the one-way clutch OW1 arranged on the transmission gear 731c are disengaged, and the outer ring (the rotating body 800 side) is driven prior to the inner ring (the drive motor side). That is, in the second section, the rotating body 800 can be rotated at a rotation speed faster than the rotation speed of the drive motor KM4.

In addition, the rotor 800 rotating in the second section DK2 under the load is rotated in the manner shown in FIG.
9(c) is rotated to a position where the center of gravity G is located below the rotation axis.

On the other hand, as shown in Fig. 140, when the center of gravity G of the rotating body 800 is displaced in the first section DK1, the load of the rotating body 800 acts in the opposite direction to the direction of rotation of the rotating body 800. Therefore, the rotating body 800 is rotated according to the rotation speed of the drive motor KM4.

Therefore, in the sixth embodiment, the displacement speed of the rotating body 800 in the second section DK2 can be made faster than the displacement speed of the rotating body 800 in the first section DK1. As a result, the displacement mode of the rotating body 800 can be changed, and the presentation effect according to the displacement of the rotating body 800 can be improved.

Next, the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 141 to Fig. 144. In the first embodiment described above, the cover member 770 uses its own weight to move the outer ring of the one-way clutch OW1 ahead of the inner ring (i.e., to increase the displacement speed of the cover member 770), but the displacement member 7710 in the seventh embodiment uses the weight of the game ball to move the outer ring of the one-way clutch OW1 ahead of the inner ring (i.e., to increase the displacement speed of the displacement member 7710). Note that the same parts as those in the above-mentioned embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and their description will be omitted.

141 and 142 are schematic side views of the displacement unit 7700 in the seventh embodiment. In FIG. 141, the displacement member 7710 is in the raised position, whereas in FIG.
7A and 7B are schematic views showing a state in which the displacement member 7710 is disposed in the lowered position.

As shown in Figures 141 and 142, the displacement unit 7700 mainly comprises a displacement member 7710 that is formed to be able to slide and displace, a transmission member 7720 that transmits the rotational driving force of a driving means (not shown, for example, an electric motor) to the displacement member 7710, and a load gear 7730 that rotates in conjunction with the sliding displacement of the displacement member 7710.

The displacement member 7710 is a member supported by a support mechanism (not shown) so as to be capable of linear displacement along the imaginary line L1.
The displacement member 7710 mainly comprises a rack gear 7712 engraved along an imaginary line L1 on the underside of the displacement member 7710, and a ball receiving member 7713 rotatably supported on the tip of the displacement member 7710.

The imaginary line L1 is set as a straight line that slopes downward from the raised position shown in Fig. 141 to the lowered position shown in Fig. 142. That is, at the raised position, the displacement member 7710 is located higher in the direction of gravity than at the lowered position.

The driven pin 7711 is inserted into a driving groove 772 in an arm member 7723 of a transmission member 7720.
3b, and is formed as a cylindrical body having an outer shape slightly smaller than the groove width of the drive groove 7723b. A load gear 7730 is meshed with the rack gear 7712, and the load gear 7730 is rotated in accordance with the sliding displacement of the displacement member 7710.

The ball receiving member 7713 is a member for holding a game ball on the upper surface of the displacement member 7710, and can be rotated around the rotation axis 7713a to form an upright state shown in Fig. 141 and a tilted state shown in Fig. 142. In the upright state, one end side protrudes from the upper surface of the displacement member 7710, so that the game ball can be held (see Fig. 143). On the other hand, in the tilted state, one end side is positioned below the upper surface of the displacement member 7710, so that the game ball can be discharged from the upper surface of the displacement member 7710 (see Fig. 144).

The ball receiving member 7713 is maintained in an upright position by the biasing force acting from a biasing spring (e.g., a torsion spring) not shown. An engagement pin 7740 is fixed on the track of the displacement member 7710 (ball receiving member 7713), and when the displacement member 7710 is slidably displaced to the lowered position, the engagement pin 7740 engages with the other end side of the ball receiving member 7713, causing the ball receiving member 7713 to rotate and become inclined. On the other hand, when the displacement member 7710 is slidably displaced to the raised position, the ball receiving member 7713 is rotated by the elastic recovery force of the biasing spring,
It is returned to the tilted state.

The transmission member 7720 includes a disk-shaped rotating member 7721 that is rotated by the driving means (not shown) described above, and a rotating member 77
A cylindrical driving pin 7722 is positioned eccentrically from the center of rotation of the drive pin 772.
2 is slidably inserted into one end of the driven groove 7723a.
It mainly comprises 23.

A one-way clutch OW1 is interposed between the rotating member 7721 and the driving means. In detail, the one-way clutch OW1 has an inner ring connected to the driving means and an outer ring connected to the rotating member 7721, and when the inner ring is rotationally driven by the driving means in the direction of arrow A (clockwise in FIG. 141), the one-way clutch OW1 transmits the rotational driving force to the outer ring (i.e., rotates the rotating member 7721 in the direction of arrow A), whereas when the inner ring is rotationally driven by the driving means in the direction opposite to the direction of arrow A (counterclockwise in FIG. 141), the one-way clutch OW1 cuts off the power transmission to the outer ring (rotating member 7721).

The arm member 7723 has a driving groove 7723a at the other end opposite to the one end where the driven groove 7723a is formed and opened. The driving groove 7723a is inserted into the driven pin 7711 of the displacement member 7710 so as to be slidable therethrough.
23b is formed with an opening, and the driven groove 7723a and the driving groove 7723b (
The intermediate portion is rotatably supported by a rotating shaft 7723c.

The driving pin 7722 is formed as a cylindrical body having an outer shape slightly smaller than the groove width of the driven groove 7723a.
723 is formed as a linear groove along the longitudinal direction of the plate 723.

According to the displacement unit 7700 formed as described above, the displacement member 7710 is
When the rotating member 7721 is rotated in the direction of arrow A (clockwise in FIG. 141) from the raised position shown in FIG. 142, the driving pin 7722 acts on the inner wall surface of the driven groove 7723a, and the arm member 7723 is rotated clockwise in FIG. 141 around the rotation shaft 7723c. With this clockwise rotation of the arm member 7723, the inner wall surface of the driving groove 7723b acts in a direction to press down the driven pin 7711, and the displacement member 7710 is slid and displaced along the imaginary line L1 and is disposed in the lowered position shown in FIG.

On the other hand, when the displacement member 7710 is moved from the lowered position shown in FIG.
When 721 is further rotated in the direction of arrow A (clockwise in FIG. 141), the driving pin 7722 acts on the inner wall surface of the driven groove 7723a, and the arm member 7723 is rotated counterclockwise in FIG. 141 around the rotation shaft 7723c. With this counterclockwise rotation of the arm member 7723, the inner wall surface of the driving groove 7723b acts in a direction pushing up the driven pin 7711, so that the displacement member 7710 is slid and displaced along the imaginary line L1 and is disposed in the raised position shown in FIG.

Here, the load gear 7730 is formed so as to generate a predetermined amount of resistance when rotating, similar to the load gear 731e in the first embodiment. As a result, the weight (own weight) of the displacement member 7710 acts on the arm member 7723, and rotates the rotating member 7721 in the direction of the arrow A (FIG. 141
By rotating the one-way clutch OW1 in a clockwise direction, the outer ring of the one-way clutch OW1 can be prevented from leading the inner ring in one direction (the direction of the arrow A). In other words, when the game ball is not being held, the displacement speed of the displacement member 7710 when moving from the raised position to the lowered position can be prevented from being increased.

That is, the rotary member 7721 is rotated in the direction of the arrow A (FIG. 141 and FIG. 1
While the rotary drive means 77 is rotating in a clockwise direction (clockwise direction of the rotary drive means 77), the displacement member 7710 reciprocates (slides) between the raised position and the lowered position at a slide speed corresponding to the rotational drive speed of the rotary drive means.
will be done.

143 and 144 are schematic side views of the displacement unit 7700 when a game ball is held by the displacement member 7710. Note that FIG. 143 shows a state in which the displacement member 7710 is arranged in the raised position, and FIG. 144 shows a state in which the displacement member 7710 is arranged in the lowered position.
Each is illustrated diagrammatically.

As shown in Figures 143 and 144, the displacement member 7710 is formed so as to be able to hold game balls on its upper surface. That is, in this embodiment, the displacement unit 7700 is disposed in an area in the game area where game balls flow down, and the displacement member 7710 is formed so as to be able to receive the game balls that flow down on its upper surface. In Figure 143, four game balls indicated by the symbol T are held by the displacement member 7
7 shows a state in which the ink is held on the upper surface of 710.

In this case, when the displacement member 7710 holds a game ball, the weight of the displacement member 7710 as a whole can be increased (heavier) by the weight of the game ball, and the resistance caused by the rotation of the load gear 7730 can be exceeded. That is, the weight of the entire displacement member 7710 (including the game ball) can be applied to the arm member 7723, and the rotating member 7721 can be rotated in the direction of the arrow A (clockwise in FIG. 143), so that the outer ring of the one-way clutch OW1 can be made to lead the inner ring in one direction (the direction of the arrow A). As a result, the displacement speed of the displacement member 7710 when moving from the raised position to the lowered position can be made faster than the displacement speed when the displacement member 7710 does not hold a game ball (see FIG. 141).

In addition, the weight of the displacement member 7710 as a whole can be made different depending on the number of game balls held. This makes it possible to make the displacement speed of the displacement member 7710 different (changeable) depending not only on whether or not game balls are held by the displacement member 7710, but also on the number of game balls held. As a result, it is possible to increase the variation in the displacement speed of the displacement member 7710, and accordingly, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect of the presentation accompanying the displacement of the displacement member 7710.

As described above, the ball receiving member 7713 is disposed at the tip (the end on the downward inclined side) of the displacement member 7710. Therefore, when the displacement member 7710 (its upper surface or the ball receiving member 7713) receives a game ball flowing down the game area, the game ball is transferred from the displacement member 7710 to the
In other words, this force can be applied via the arm member 7723 and the rotating member 7721 in a direction in which the outer ring of the one-way clutch OW1 leads the inner ring in one direction (the direction of arrow A).

As a result, the game balls flowing down are guided by the displacement member 7710 (its upper surface or the ball receiving member 771
3) When the game ball is received, the kinetic energy of the game ball can be utilized to increase the displacement speed of the sliding displacement in the direction toward the lowered position of the displacement member 7710.

In this case, the flowing game balls have different flowing directions and flowing speeds.
The force (magnitude of kinetic energy) acting on the displacement member 7710 can be varied according to the difference in the flow state (flow direction and flow speed) of the game balls being received. This allows not only whether or not the displacement member 7710 is holding a game ball and the number of game balls being held, but also
The displacement speed of the displacement member 7710 is made different (changed) according to the flow state of the game ball.
As a result, the variation in the displacement speed of the displacement member 7710 can be increased, and the presentation effect of the presentation accompanying the displacement of the displacement member 7710 can be improved accordingly.

Furthermore, in the seventh embodiment, the rotation direction of the rotating member 7721 is set to one direction, so there is no need to switch the drive direction of the drive means. In other words, by continuously rotating the rotating means in one direction, the displacement member 7710 can be displaced back and forth. This eliminates the time required to switch the drive direction of the drive means. As a result, the displacement member 7710 can be displaced immediately since there is no need to switch the drive means.

In this case, by immediately displacing the displacement member 7710, it is possible to suppress rattling of the displacement member 7710 caused by the reaction force when the ball receiving member 7713 rotates and displaces to drop the game ball received by the displacement member 7710 (its upper surface or the ball receiving member 7713).

That is, when a game ball is dropped from the displacement member 7710 (ball receiving member 7713), the load of the displacement member 7710 is lightened by the amount of the dropped game ball, and the displacement member 7710 is likely to be displaced upward by a reaction force. However, by immediately displacing the displacement member 7710, the ball receiving member 77
The reaction caused by the displacement of 13 acts to displace the displacement member 7710 downward, thereby canceling out the reaction caused when the ball is dropped from the displacement member 7710.

In addition, the game balls flowing down the game area are not limited to game balls moving along the direction of gravity on the front surface of the game board 13, but also include game balls moving in a direction different from the direction of gravity. Examples of game balls moving in a direction different from the direction of gravity include game balls that collide with nails, tulips, or accessories and move in a direction different from the direction of gravity, and game balls that roll on a stage, then fly out of the stage and move in a direction different from the direction of gravity.

Here, in this embodiment, by providing the load gear 7730, when the displacement member 7710 is not holding a game ball (see FIG. 141), the outer ring of the one-way clutch OW1 moves in one direction (arrow A) relative to the inner ring when the displacement member 7710 is slid toward the lowered position.
direction) (i.e., the displacement speed of the displacement member 7710 does not increase).

In contrast to this, the load gear 7730 may be omitted or the resistance of the load gear 7730 may be set to a small value so that when the displacement member 7710 is slid and displaced toward the lowered position, the outer ring of the one-way clutch OW1 precedes the inner ring in one direction (the direction of the arrow A) (i.e., the displacement speed of the displacement member 7710 becomes faster). In other words, only the weight (own weight) of the displacement member 7710 acts on the arm member 7723, and the rotating member 7721 is moved in the direction of the arrow A (FIG. 1
Even when the one-way clutch OW1 is rotated in a clockwise direction (clockwise direction of the rotor 41), the outer ring of the one-way clutch OW1 may be arranged to precede the inner ring.

Next, the upper tray 8017 in the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 145 to 148. The upper tray 8017 in the eighth embodiment is provided with a rotation operation unit 8650 at approximately the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. Note that the same parts as those in the above embodiments are given the same reference numerals and their description will be omitted.

First, the overall configuration of the rotary operation unit 8650 in the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.
The eighth embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 145 and Fig. 147. Fig. 145 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 in the eighth embodiment. Fig. 146 is an exploded perspective front view of the rotary operation unit 8650.
7 is a schematic cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine 10 taken along line CXLVII-CXLVII in FIG. 145.

As shown in Figures 145 to 147, the rotation operation unit 8650 is placed in the internal space of the upper tray 8017 of the pachinko machine 10, and is arranged in a state in which the outer peripheral surface of the rotation operation part 8654 described later protrudes outward from the upper tray 8017.

The rotary operation unit 8650 includes a drive motor KM6, a transmission gear 8651 connected to the shaft of the drive motor KM6, and a transmission gear 8652 meshed with the outer peripheral surface of the transmission gear 8651.
52, a shaft portion 8653 that is fitted into the shaft hole of the transmission gear 8652, a one-way clutch OW1 whose inner ring is fitted onto the shaft portion 8653, and a rotation operating portion 8654 into which the outer ring of the one-way clutch OW1 is fitted.

The transmission gear 8651 is connected to the shaft of the drive motor KM6.
When a rotational driving force is applied to the transmission gear 8651, the transmission gear 8651 can be rotated.
A transmission gear 8652 is disposed in mesh with the transmission gear 8651. Therefore, when a rotational driving force is applied to the drive motor KM6, the rotational force is transmitted to the transmission gear 865 through the transmission gear 8651.
2 can be rotated.

The shaft portion 8653 is a rod member formed in a cylindrical shape, and its axial length is equal to that of the rotation operation portion 86
54. As described above, one end of the shaft portion 8653 is fitted into the shaft hole of the transmission gear 8652, and the other end is inserted into the inner ring of the one-way clutch OW1. This allows the driving force generated when the transmission gear 8652 is rotated to be transmitted to the one-way clutch OW1.

As described above, the one-way clutch OW1 is formed of an inner ring, an outer ring, and a roller engaged between them. When the inner ring rotates in one direction, the rotation of the inner ring can be transmitted to the outer ring, and when the inner ring rotates in the other direction, the rotation of the inner ring can be non-transmitted to the outer ring.

The rotation operation part 8654 is formed in an annular shape, and is disposed with a portion of its outer circumferential surface protruding from the upper dish 8017. The outer ring of the one-way clutch OW1 is fitted into the inner circular portion of the rotation operation part 8654. That is, the inward inclination of the rotation operation part 8654 is formed to be approximately the same as the outer diameter of the one-way clutch OW1. Therefore, the rotation operation part 8654 transmits rotation when the outer ring of the one-way clutch OW1 is rotated.

As a result, when the drive motor KM6 is driven and rotated in one direction, the rotation is transmitted to the outer ring of the one-way clutch OW1 via the transmission gears 8651 and 8652 and the inner ring of the one-way clutch OW1, and the rotation operation unit 8654 is rotated.
is driven and rotated in the other direction, the inner and outer rings of the one-way clutch OW1 are disengaged and the transmission of the rotational drive to the rotation operation unit 8654 is cut off.

Next, referring to Fig. 148, a case where a player operates the rotary operation unit 8654 will be described. Fig. 148 is a schematic cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine 10. Note that the cross section of Fig. 148 is the same as that of Fig. 147.
corresponds to:

As described above, the rotation operation unit 8654 can be configured to rotate when the drive motor KM6 is rotated, and can be configured to stop the rotational displacement of the rotation operation unit 8654 when the drive motor KM6 is stopped from rotating.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 148, the drive motor KM6 is rotated in one direction, and the rotary operation unit 8
When the player operates the outer circumferential surface of the rotation operation part 8654 to generate a rotational force in the same direction as the rotation A direction, the one-way clutch O
The outer peripheral surface of W1 and the rotary operation part 8654 are rotated first.
4 can be operated by the player to rotate at a speed faster than the rotation speed of the drive motor KM6.

In addition, when the rotation operation unit 8654 is not rotating (the drive motor KM6 is not rotating), the player can apply a driving force to the rotation operation unit 8654 in the rotation A direction to cause the rotation operation unit 8654 to be rotationally displaced.

Therefore, in the eighth embodiment, the rotation operation unit 8654 can not only be in a non-rotating or rotating state by driving the drive motor KM6, but can also be in a state in which the rotation operation unit 8654 rotates from a stopped state by the player's operation, and a state in which the rotation operation unit 8654 rotates at an even faster speed from a rotating state by the player's operation.

As a result, it is possible to form a plurality of patterns that allow the player to visually recognize the displacement pattern of the rotation operation unit 8654, which can provide interest to the player. Also, by forming a plurality of rotation patterns of the rotation operation unit 8654, it is possible to form a plurality of presentation patterns of the pachinko machine 10, which can provide interest to the player by increasing the number of presentation patterns.

In addition, a sensor device or the like that measures the number of rotations is arranged on the side of the rotation operation unit 8654, and it is possible to create effects that change based on the number of rotations and rotation speed of the rotation operation unit 8654.

Next, a first link member 9431 in the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 149. The plate-like projection 9431b of the first link member 9431 in the ninth embodiment has an inclined surface 9431b1 formed by inclining the abutment surface with the cam member 422. Note that the same parts as those in the above embodiments are given the same reference numerals and their description will be omitted.

Fig. 149(a) is a perspective front view of a first link member 9431 in the ninth embodiment, and Fig. 149(b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of a lower displacement unit 400.
corresponds to the schematic cross-sectional view of FIG.

In addition, like the lower displacement unit 400 in the first embodiment, the lower displacement unit 400 in the ninth embodiment includes a base member 410 disposed on the bottom wall portion 301 (see FIG. 6 ) of the rear case 300, a transmission member 420 disposed on the base member 410, and a transmission member 420.
The lower displacement unit 400 in the ninth embodiment includes a link member 94 that is connected to the base member 410 and the lower displacement member 440 and is displaced as the transmission member 420 is driven.
30, and the lower displacement member 440 is displaced by the displacement of the link member 9430.

As shown in Fig. 149, the first link member 9431 in the ninth embodiment is bent in a generally dogleg shape when viewed from the front, and is formed in a plate shape having a predetermined thickness in the front-rear direction. The first link member 9431 includes a through hole 431a penetrating in the front-rear direction at one end (the side in the direction of the arrow D in Fig. 149(a)), a cylindrical connecting protrusion 431c (see Fig. 46) protruding from the back side at the other end (the side in the direction of the arrow U in Fig. 149(a)), a plate-like protrusion 9431b protruding at a position opposite to the curved wall portion 411e of the base member 410, and a cylindrical sliding protrusion 431d protruding from the front side of the bent portion.

The plate-like protrusion 9431b extends in a curved shape around the axis of the through hole 431a and protrudes toward the front side (the front base 411 side (the direction of the arrow F)).
The protruding dimension of 31b is set to be larger than the thickness (dimension in the direction of arrow F-B) of cam member 422. Furthermore, the protruding tip surface of plate-like projection 9431b and the opposing base member 410 (curved wall portion 411e) are disposed with a slight gap (distance X14 (see FIG. 149(b))).

The cam member 422 is disposed in a displaceable state in the region between the front surface of the first link member 9431 excluding the plate-like protrusion 9431b and the protruding surface (rear surface) of the curved wall portion 411e. The dimensions of the two gaps, including the gap between the cam member 422 and the first link member 9431 and the gap between the cam member 422 and the base member 410, are set to be larger than the above-mentioned distance X14.

As a result, the first link member 9
When the first link member 9431 is bent, the protruding tip surface of the plate-like protrusion 9431b can be brought into contact with the opposing base member 410 (the curved wall portion 411e). Therefore, the cam member 42 is disposed between the front surface of the first link member 9431 excluding the plate-like protrusion 9431b and the protruding surface (back surface) of the curved wall portion 411e.
2 is pinched and the displacement is restricted.

The plate-like projection 9431b has an inclined surface 9431b1 on the circumferential side surface on the cam member 422 side (the side in the direction of the arrow L in FIG. 149(b) ) that protrudes toward the front side as it approaches the cam member 422. As shown in FIG. 149(b) , the inclined surface 9431b1 is
The projection 14 is formed at an angle of approximately 45 degrees toward the center of the projection 14.

As a result, when the lower displacement unit 400 is in the second displacement state and the end of the cam member 422 abuts against the plate-shaped protrusion 9431b, the cam member 422 can be pressed (displaced) against the back surface (surface on the side in the direction of the arrow F) of the first link member 9431.
The protruding tip surface (the surface on the side in the direction of the arrow F) of the plate-like protrusion 9431b of No. 31 can be pressed against the curved wall portion 411e. As a result, the cam member 422 and the first link member 9431 can be prevented from swinging in the front-rear direction (the direction of the arrows F-B), and the lower displacement member 440 can be easily maintained in the second displacement state.

In this case, it is preferable that a flat surface parallel to the inclined surface 9431b1 is formed at the end of the cam member 422 at the portion where the cam member 422 abuts against the inclined surface 9431b1.
When the inclined surface 9431b1 comes into contact with the inclined surface 9431b2, the cam member 422 can be easily displaced toward the rear side (in the direction of arrow B).

Next, referring to FIG. 150, a general winning port unit 10150 in the tenth embodiment
In the first embodiment, the general winning port unit 150 is a
In the above description, the adhesive tape 10154a is attached to the end of the decorative member 154, but in the tenth embodiment, the adhesive tape 10154a is attached to the inside of the end of the decorative member 10154 at a predetermined distance. Note that the same parts as those in the above embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals and their description will be omitted.

FIG. 150 is a cross-sectional view of the game board 13 in the tenth embodiment.
It corresponds to the cross-sectional view of FIG. 16. In addition, the general winning port unit 1015 in the tenth embodiment
Like the general winning port unit 150 in the first embodiment, the general winning port unit 10150 is disposed in the game area (in front of the base plate 60) of the game board 13, and is capable of changing the path of the game ball flowing down the game area. The general winning port unit 10150 is disposed in a position along the end of the game area surrounded by the inner rail 76 and the outer rail 77 on the lower side in the direction of gravity (the side in the direction of arrow D) when viewed from the front (as viewed in the direction of arrow B).

Furthermore, the general winning port unit 10150 comprises a main body 151 which is formed in a crescent shape when viewed from the front, a first upright portion 152 (see Figure 12) which stands upright from the end of the main body 151 toward the front side (arrow F direction), a second upright portion 153 (see Figure 12(a)) which extends from the end of the first upright portion 152 on the upper side in the direction of gravity (arrow U direction) toward the center of the game area, and multiple (three in this embodiment) general winning ports 63 (see Figure 12(a)) formed on the front side of the main body 151.

As shown in Fig. 150, the general winning port unit 10150 in the tenth embodiment includes a decorative member 10154 disposed on the back surface of a main body 10151. The decorative member 10154 has an adhesive tape 10154a, which is attached to the main body 151, attached to the inside at a predetermined distance from the end of the decorative member 10154. This allows the thickness of the adhesive tape 10154a to be
A predetermined gap (space) is formed between the main body 151 and the decorative member 10154 at the end of the decorative member 10154. As a result, when a player approaches the decorative member 10154 at a predetermined angle or more (for example, when the player turns the pachinko machine 10 (FIG. 1)
When the general winning port unit 10150 is viewed from a viewpoint at the same height as the upper end of the general winning port unit 10150 in the direction of gravity (see reference), it is possible to make it difficult for the player to see the boundary between the decoration of decorative member 60c and the decoration of decorative member 10154.

To explain in more detail, by forming an air layer between the end of the decorative member 10154 and the main body 151, it is possible to prevent the light L that is reflected inside the main body 151 and emitted to the player from the end (inclined surface 151a) of the main body 151 from being affected by the decoration at the end of the decorative member 10154 (making it difficult for the wavelength of the light L to be changed). Also, the light that passes through the inside of the adhesive tape 10154a and is affected by the decoration of the decorative member 10154 is repeatedly reflected inside the main body 151 and emitted to the outside of the main body 151, so that the influence of the decoration of the decorative member 10154 can be reduced when it is reflected toward the player's viewpoint.

Therefore, the change in the wavelength of the light L emitted to the player can be reduced, and when the player views the general winning port unit 10150 from a predetermined angle or more, the boundary between the decoration of the decorative member 60c and the decoration of the decorative member 10154 can be made difficult to recognize. As a result, from a normal angle (for example, a viewpoint at the same height as the approximately center position in the gravity direction of the game board 13), the decoration of the decorative member 60c can be made difficult to recognize.
When the player visually recognizes the decoration of the decorative member 10154 and the decoration of the decorative member 60c of the base plate, the player can easily recognize the decoration of the decorative member 10154 as one decoration, and the player can easily recognize the decoration of the decorative member 60c of the base plate and the decoration of the decorative member 10154 as one decoration from a predetermined angle (for example, a viewpoint at the same height as the upper end of the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1) in the direction of gravity).
When viewed from the outside, the decoration at the boundary portion can be made hard to see, making it difficult for the player to understand that the decoration is divided.

Next, referring to FIG. 151 to FIG. 153, the lower displacement member 114 in the eleventh embodiment will be described.
In the above-mentioned first embodiment, the case where the control board 491 arranged on the back side of the lower displacement member 440 irradiates the decorative member 450 with light has been described, but the lower displacement member 11440 of the eleventh embodiment can allow the player to recognize the position of the game ball inside by the light irradiated from the control board 491. Note that the same parts as those in the above-mentioned embodiments are given the same reference numerals and their description will be omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 151 and FIG. 152, the lower displacement member 114 in the eleventh embodiment will be described.
The overall configuration of the lower displacement member 11 in the eleventh embodiment will be described below.
152(a) and 152(b) are exploded perspective front views of the lower displacement member 11.
152(a) is a front view of the control board 491. In addition, in Fig. 152(a), the outline of the light-emitting body 11491a disposed on the control board 491 is illustrated by a dashed line, and in Fig. 152(b), a state in which the decorative member 11450 has been removed is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 152(a) and 152(b), the lower displacement member 11440 in the eleventh embodiment includes a base member 470 connected to a front base 411 (see FIG. 45), a case member 480 covering the front and rear of the base member 470, and a housing 480 and a base member 480.
70 and a decorative member 11450 formed in a manner to cover the front and rear of case member 480 (in the direction of arrows FB).

The decorative member 11450 is formed into an outer shape imitating a pattern or character, and a picture of the pattern or character is drawn on the surface. The decorative member 11450 is mainly formed with a front side decorative part 11451 arranged on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the front case 481, and a rear side decorative part 452 arranged on the rear side (arrow B direction side) of the rear case 482. In this embodiment, a shark pattern (character) is drawn on the decorative member 11450.

The front decorative part 11451 is formed with an outer shape larger than that of the front case 481 when viewed from the front, and is attached to the front case 481. This makes it possible to make the members (case member 480, base member 470, etc.) arranged on the back side of the front decorative part 11451 invisible to the player. In addition, the front decorative part 11451 has a transparent part 11451b formed from a light-transmitting material on the inside when viewed from the front.

The transmission portion 11451b is a light emitting portion including a plurality of light emitting bodies 11491 arranged on a control board 491 described later.
The light transmitting portion 11451b is formed on the front side (the side in the direction of the arrow F) and is capable of guiding the light emitted from the light emitting bodies 11491a to the player side.
The light emitting portion 11451b is curved toward the rear side (the direction of the arrow B) toward the outer end in the up-down direction (the direction of the arrows U-D).
When the light passes through the inside of 451b and is emitted from the front side, it is easily diffused.

The transmission mechanism 11460 is a member arranged on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the base member 470, and includes transmission gears 461, 462, 463, a drive motor KM2 whose shaft portion is connected to the transmission gear 461, a movable rack 464 having a tooth surface that meshes with the transmission gear 463 and disposed so as to be slidably displaceable on the front side of the base member 470, a transmission gear 465 rotatably disposed on the movable rack 464, a rack gear 476 formed on the base member 470 and having a tooth surface with which the transmission gear 465 meshes, and a movable rack 465 having a tooth surface that meshes with the transmission gear 465.
A rack 11466 is provided on the front side of the rack 11466 so as to be slidably displaceable.
and a ball receiving portion 467 rotatably disposed on one end side of the ball receiving portion 467 .

The rack 11466 is formed from a rod-shaped body that is rectangular when viewed from the front and includes a rack gear 466a engraved on the upper end surface, a shaft portion 466b that protrudes cylindrically from the end of the other longitudinal end (arrow L direction) to the rear side (arrow B direction), two sliding plates 466c that protrude to the front side (arrow F direction), a recessed portion 466d (see Figure 59) recessed into the rear side from one longitudinal end (arrow R direction) to the other end, and a shielding plate 11466e that protrudes upward (arrow U direction) from the front side of the rack gear 466a.

The shielding plate 11466e is made of a non-light-transmitting material and is capable of blocking the light emitted from the light emitter 11491a.
The height of the light emitting body 11491a (in the direction of the arrow U) is set to a position higher than that of the light emitting body 11491a disposed on the rear side (position on the side of the arrow U).
By displacing 6e in the forward and backward directions (directions of arrows FB), the light emitted from light emitter 11491a can be blocked.

The control board 491 is disposed on the back side (arrow B direction side) of the base member 470, and includes a plurality of light emitters 11491a capable of irradiating light to the front side. The plurality of light emitters 11491a are arranged in parallel in the longitudinal direction (arrow L-R direction) of the lower displacement member 11440, and are disposed above (arrow U direction) the ball receiving portion 467 disposed on the front side (arrow F direction side) via the base member 470. This makes it possible to prevent the ball receiving portion 467 from blocking the light emitted from the light emitters 11491a.

Next, referring to Fig. 153, a state in which the game ball has been sent to the inside of the ball receiving portion 467 will be described. Fig. 153(a) is a front view of the lower displacement member 11440, Fig. 153(b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the lower displacement member 11440 taken along line CLIIIb-CLIIIb in Fig. 153(a), and Fig. 153(c) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the lower displacement member 11440 taken along line CLIIIc-CLIIIc in Fig. 153(a).

153, when a game ball is received by the ball receiving section 467, the received game ball is positioned so as to overlap the front side (the direction of the arrow F) of the light emitting body 11491a. This allows the game ball received by the ball receiving section 467 to block the light irradiated from the light emitting body 11491a to the player. As a result, the player can recognize the position of the game ball sent inside the lower displacement member 11440 by the shadow cast by the light being blocked.

In the eleventh embodiment, a control board 491 is provided on the rear side of the decorative member 11450 and capable of emitting light toward the displacement area of the ball receiving portion 467.
7, and the light emitted from the control board 491 is blocked by the ball receiving section 467 or the game ball received by the ball receiving section 467, causing the amount of light emitted from the decorative member 11450 to differ partially.By making the amount of light emitted from the decorative member 11450 located on the front side of the ball receiving section 467 or the game ball received by the ball receiving section 467 different from the amount of light emitted from the decorative member 11450 in other positions (by darkening to form a shadow), the player can recognize that the ball receiving section 467 or the game ball received by the ball receiving section 467 is located on the back side of the part with different light amounts.

To explain in more detail, when the control board 491 is disposed on the back side of the ball receiving section 467, the light emitted from the control board 491 can be blocked by the ball receiving section 467 or the game ball received in the ball receiving section 467, so that the amount of light emitted from the decorative member 11450 on the front side of the ball receiving section 467 or the game ball received in the ball receiving section 467 can be made darker than other parts of the decorative member 11450. As a result, the player can be made aware that the ball receiving section 467 or the game ball received in the ball receiving section 467 is located on the back side of the part where the amount of light emitted from the decorative member 11450 is low (darker).

The ball receiving portion 467 is formed in a shape that receives the lower hemisphere of the game ball, and the light emitting body 1149
1a is disposed at a position higher than the center of the game ball received in the ball receiving portion 467,
It is possible to make it difficult for the light emitted from the light emitting body 11491a to be irradiated onto the ball receiving portion 467. Therefore, the light emitted from the light emitting body 11491a can prevent the ball receiving portion 467 from receiving the game ball.
This can prevent a shadow from being formed on the transparent portion 11451b due to a shadow cast by the outer shape of the rack 11466 which slides and displaces the ball receiving portion 467 and the game ball received by the ball receiving portion 467. As a result, a shadow can be formed on the transparent portion 11451b only by the game ball received by the ball receiving portion 467, so that when the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced without receiving a game ball, it is possible to prevent the player's line of sight from being drawn to the ball receiving portion 467.

Next, referring to FIG. 154 and FIG. 155, the ball receiving portion 12467 in the twelfth embodiment
In the eleventh embodiment, the case where the light irradiated from the light emitting body 11491a is blocked by the game ball received in the ball receiving portion 467 is described, but in the twelfth embodiment, the light irradiated from the light emitting body 11491a is blocked by the third piece 12467e disposed in the ball receiving portion 12467. Note that the same parts as those in the above embodiments are given the same reference numerals and their description will be omitted.

First, the configuration of the ball receiving portion 12467 in the twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 154. Fig. 154(a) is an exploded perspective front view of the ball receiving portion 12467 in the twelfth embodiment, and Fig. 154(b) is a front view of the ball receiving portion 12467.
) a portion of the ball receiving portion 12467 is shown in dashed lines.

In addition, the lower displacement member 12440 in the twelfth embodiment, like the lower displacement member 11440 in the eleventh embodiment, includes a base member 470 connected to the front base 411 (see FIG. 45), a case member 480 covering the front and rear of the base member 470, and a case member 480.
The lower displacement member 12440 in the twelfth embodiment is formed mainly by a decorative member 11450 formed in a manner to cover the front and rear (in the direction of the arrows F-B) of the case member 480.
and a transmission mechanism 12460 that is displaceably disposed between the base member 470 and has a ball receiving portion 12467c that can be deformed by receiving a game ball.

As shown in Figure 154, the ball receiving portion 12467 in the 12th embodiment comprises a first piece 12467c formed by bending in an approximately L shape when viewed from the front, a second piece 12467d connected to the first piece 12467c, and a third piece 12467e connected to the second piece 12467d and arranged on the back side of the first piece 12467c and the second piece 12467d.

The first piece 12467c and the second piece 12467d are portions for holding the game ball sent from the opening 451a (see FIG. 57) to the inside of the lower displacement member 12440.
When a game ball is thrown between the opposing first and second pieces 12467c and 12467d, the second piece 12467d is displaced in a direction away from the first piece 12467c, and a part of the first piece 12467c and the second piece 12467d are displaced in a direction away from the first piece 12467c.
467d are arranged in a U-shape when viewed from the front, and a game ball can be held in the inner part of the U.

The first piece 12467c comprises a receiving piece 12467c4 which forms one extended side formed into an L shape when viewed from the front, a leg 467a which forms the other extended side, a circular bent portion 12467c5 in which an axial hole 467b which penetrates in the front-to-back direction (arrow F-B direction) is formed at the connecting portion (bent portion) between the receiving piece 12467c4 and the leg 467a, and a connecting portion 12467c1 which protrudes to the opposite side with the bent portion 12467c5 in between.

The receiving piece 12467c4 is a part that forms the side surface on the other side (the side in the direction of arrow R) that is formed in a U-shape when viewed from the front by one piece 12467c and the second piece 12467d, and is formed in a crescent shape from the front and in a curved shape that is concave in the direction away from the second piece 12467d.

The connecting portion 12467c1 protrudes from two points at a predetermined distance in the axial direction (the direction of the arrow F-B) of the bent portion 12467c5.
This is a part that connects the third piece 12467d and the third piece 12467e, and has a connecting hole 12467c2 that extends along the axial direction of the shaft hole 467b and opens to a circular cross section.

The connecting hole 12467c2 is a shaft portion 12467e protruding from a third piece 12467e described later.
The connecting hole 12467c2 is an opening into which the shaft portion 12467e3 inserted into the insertion hole 12467d3 formed in the second piece 12467d described later faces the rear side (the direction of the arrow B).
The shaft portion 12467e3 is fastened by a screw inserted from the opposite side (the front side (the side in the direction of the arrow F)) to the insertion side of the connecting hole 12467c2. This allows the second piece 12467d and the third piece 12467e to be fastened to the first piece 12467c.

The first piece 12467c also has a recess 12467c3 recessed downward in the direction of gravity (arrow D direction) on the protruding base end side of the connecting portion 12467c1. The recessed bottom surface of the recess 12467c3 is formed at the lowest position (lowest part) among the bottom surfaces where the game ball is held by the first piece 12467c and the second piece 12467d. This allows the first piece 12467c and the second piece 12467d to
The game ball held in the recess 12467c3 rolls inside the recess 12467c3.

The second piece 12467d is a receiving piece 12467c4 of the first piece 12467c and a second piece 124
The first piece 12467c and the second piece 12467d are formed in a U-shape on the other side (the side in the direction of the arrow L) of the U-shape in front view, and are formed in a crescent shape in front view and in a curved shape that is concave in the direction away from the receiving piece 12467c4.
a circular through hole 12467d3 that opens in the front-rear direction (arrow F-B direction) at the connecting portion;
It mainly comprises a recessed portion 12467d2 that is recessed in a circular cross section from the rear side (arrow B direction side) toward the front side (arrow F direction side).

The second piece 12467d is inserted into the insertion hole 12467d3 by inserting the shaft portion 1246 of the third piece 12467e.
7e3 is inserted, and the connecting shaft 12467e of the third piece 12467e is inserted into the recessed portion 12467d2.
4 is inserted. Therefore, when the second piece 12567d is displaced, the third piece 12467e is similarly displaced. Therefore, when the second piece 12567d is rotationally displaced relative to the first piece 12467c, the third piece 12567e is also rotationally displaced relative to the first piece 12467c.

Furthermore, the second piece 12467d is a connecting portion 12 protruding from two points of the first piece 12467c.
467c1 and is connected to the first piece 12467c.
When the piece 12467d is twisted in the axial direction of the insertion hole 12467d3, the connecting portion 12467c
The second piece 12467d can be abutted against the opposing side of shaft portion 12467e3 to prevent the shaft portion 12467e3 from breaking.

The recessed portion 12467d2 is a hole into which a connecting shaft 12467e4 of the third piece 12467e described later is inserted, and is recessed into approximately the same shape as the connecting shaft 12467e4.

The third piece 12467e includes a shielding plate 12467e1 formed in a substantially semicircular plate shape when viewed from the front,
The shaft portion 124 protrudes from the shielding plate 12467e1 toward the front side (the direction of the arrow F).
67e3 and a connecting shaft 12467e4.

The shielding plate 12467e1 is made of a non-light-transmitting material, and the light emitter 11491a
When the shielding plate 12467e1 is disposed on the front side of the light emitting body 11491a, the shielding plate 12467e1 can block the light emitted from the light emitting body 11491a. Note that the shielding of the light from the light emitting body 11491a by the shielding plate 12467e1 will be described later.

As described above, the shaft portion 12467e3 is a cylindrical body that is inserted into the connecting hole 12467c2 of the first piece 12467c and the insertion hole 12467d3 of the second piece 12467d.
The protruding tip surface of the shaft portion 12467e3 is provided with a connecting hole 124 from the opposite side to the insertion side of the shaft portion 12467e3.
Therefore, in a state where the shaft portion 12467e3 is inserted into the connecting hole 12467c2 and the insertion hole 12467d3,
By fastening a screw to the insertion tip surface of each of the first and second pieces 12467c, 12467d, and 12467e, the first piece 12467c, the second piece 12467d, and the third piece 12467e can be connected to each other, and the third piece 12467e can be connected to the first piece 1246
7c.

As described above, the connecting shaft 12467e4 is connected to the recessed portion 12467d of the second piece 12467d.
2. As a result, the second piece 12467d is inserted into the shaft portion 12467c relative to the first piece 12467c.
When the third piece 12467e is rotated around the second piece 12467e3, the connecting shaft 12467e4 can be displaced in accordance with the displacement of the second piece 12467d.
It can be displaced according to the displacement of d.

Next, the displacement of the ball receiving portion 12467 in the twelfth embodiment will be described in detail with reference to Fig. 155. Fig. 155(a) and Fig. 155(b) are front views of the lower displacement member 12440, and Fig. 155(c) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the lower displacement member 12440 taken along the line CLVc-CLVc in Fig. 155(b). Note that in Fig. 155(a) and Fig. 155(b), a part of the lower displacement member 12440 and the light emitter 11491a are shown by dashed lines. Also, Fig. 155
FIG. 155(a) illustrates a state before the game ball is received (held) in the ball receiving portion 12467, and FIG. 155(b) illustrates a state after the game ball is received (held) in the ball receiving portion 12467.
The state is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 155, before the game ball is received between the first piece 12467c and the second piece 12467d, the second piece 12467d is moved closer to the first piece 12467c by the load of the third piece 12467e.
is positioned lower than the light-emitting body 11491a disposed on the back side of the ball receiving portion 12467. Therefore, before the game ball is received by the ball receiving portion 12467, the light irradiated from the light-emitting body 11491a can be emitted toward the player.

On the other hand, when a game ball is received between the opposing first piece 12467c and the second piece 12467d, the received game ball rolls on the receiving surface (the inner side surface formed in a U-shape when viewed from the front) of the first piece 12467c and the second piece 12467d and enters the recess 12 located at the bottom end of the receiving surface.
467c3. As a result, the second piece 12467d is guided by the outer surface of the game ball to the shaft portion 124
As a result, the third piece 12467e, which moves in accordance with the displacement of the second piece 12467d, can be rotated around the ball receiving portion 1246
7, the light-emitting element 11491a is disposed on the rear side of the light-emitting element 11491.

Therefore, the light emitted from the light emitter 11491a is blocked by the shielding plate 1246 of the third piece 12467e.
As a result, the light emitted from the light emitter 11491a can be easily blocked only when a game ball is received in the ball receiving portion 12467, so that the position of the game ball received in the lower displacement member 12440 can be recognized by the position of the shadow that blocks the light from the light emitter 11491a.

In addition, the second piece 12467d has a connecting shaft 12467e4 inserted into a recessed portion 12467d2, and the load of the third piece 12467e is always applied to the second piece 12467d.
54(b)) is set on the opposite side of the shaft portion 12467e3 from the connecting portion between the second piece 12567d and the third piece 12567e. With this, in a state in which no force other than gravity is acting on the second piece 12467d and the third piece 12467de, the load of the third piece 12467e can rotate the second piece 12467d toward the first piece 12467c4.

Therefore, when the game ball is discharged (taken out) from the ball receiving portion 12467, the third piece 124
The load of 67e can displace the second piece 12467d toward the ball receiving piece 12467c4 of the first piece 12467c.

Furthermore, similar to the ball receiving portion 467 in the first embodiment, the ball receiving portion 12467 is rotated around the shaft hole 12467b by the action of sliding and displacing the inside of the lower displacement member 12440, and the game ball received from the exit opening 471 (see Figure 66) of the lower displacement member 12440 is discharged to the outside.

Here, as a structure for discharging the game ball received in the ball receiving portion 12467,
In the structure in which the ball receiving portion 12467 rotates around the shaft hole 467b in accordance with the sliding movement of the ball receiving portion 12467, the ball receiving portion 12467 rotates around the shaft hole 467b depending on the sliding speed of the ball receiving portion 12467.
The rotation speed of the ball receiving portion 12467 is changed. Therefore, since the rotation speed depends only on the sliding speed of the ball receiving portion 12467, there is a problem that the discharge speed of the game ball from the ball receiving portion 12467 is not stable.

In contrast, in the twelfth embodiment, the load of the third piece 12467e causes the second piece 12467
The direction in which the second piece 12467d rotates and the direction in which the ball receiving portion 12467 rotates about the shaft hole 467b when the game ball is released are set to be substantially the same, so that a driving force can be applied to the game ball released from the release opening 471 when the second piece 12467d is displaced.
The speed of the game ball being ejected can be maintained even if the force acting on the game ball from the ball receiving portion 12467 when displacing the ball receiving portion 12467 to eject the game ball from the ejection opening 471 is reduced. As a result, the ejection speed of the game ball being ejected from the ball receiving portion 12467 can be stabilized.

Next, referring to FIG. 156 to FIG. 158, the special prize winning device 13 in the thirteenth embodiment will be described.
In the first embodiment, the first unit 5 of the special prize-winning device 550 will be described.
In the above description, the ball sending path of the game ball flowing into the inside of the special winning device 13550 is switched by the first and second drive units 583, 584 of the third path member 580, but in the thirteenth embodiment, the distance between the sending paths of the special winning device 13550 is changed to adjust the flow path of the game ball flowing down inside the special winning device 13550. Note that the same parts as those in the above embodiments are given the same reference numerals and their description is omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 156 and FIG. 157, the special prize winning device 13 in the thirteenth embodiment will be described.
The overall configuration of the special prize winning device 13550 will be described. Fig. 156(a) is a front view of the special prize winning device 13550 in the thirteenth embodiment, Fig. 156(b) is a perspective front view of the special prize winning device 13550, and Fig. 156(c) is a cross-sectional view of the special prize winning device 13550 taken along line CLVIc-CLVIc in Fig. 156(a). Fig. 157 is an exploded perspective front view of the special prize winning device 13550.

As shown in FIG. 156 and FIG. 157, a special prize winning device 13550 in the 13th embodiment
The optical fiber 1351 includes a first path member 13560 disposed on the front side, and a second path member 13570 disposed on the rear side of the first path member 13560.

The first path member 13560 mainly comprises a front plate 13564 formed in a plate shape along the front of the playing area of the game board 13, and a first wall portion 13565 protruding from the left and right ends of the front plate 13564 to the rear side (base plate 60 side).

The front plate 13564 is a plate member that serves as a wall portion on the front side of the flow path of the game balls formed between the front plate 13564 and the second path member 13570 described later, and is made of a light-transmitting member. This allows the player to see the game balls flowing down inside the special winning device 13550 through the front plate 13564. The front plate 13564 also has a first convex portion 13564b and a second convex portion 13564c that protrude toward the second path member 13570, and the first convex portion 13564b and the second convex portion 13564c protrude toward the second path member 13570.
The third protrusion 135 is located below the protrusion 13564c and protrudes toward the second path member 13570.
64d.

The first convex portion 13564b and the second convex portion 13564c are protrusions for guiding the game ball flowing down inside the special winning device 13550, and are located on the outer side in the left and right direction of the front plate 13564 (indicated by the arrow L).
The front plate 13564 is formed with a downward incline from the outer side in the -R direction toward the center in the left-right direction.

The third protrusion 13564d is located at the center of the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction) of the front panel 13564 and extends in the direction of gravity (arrow U-D direction). In the thirteenth embodiment, in the game area of the game board 13, the ball sending path of the game ball flowing down from the special winning device 13550 is different on the left and right of the approximate center position in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction) of the special winning device 13550.
The game ball flowing down from the left side of 3550 as viewed from the front is sent to the first winning hole 64 (see FIG. 2 ),
The game balls thus sent are used to award a specific game value to the player (a predetermined number of game balls are paid out). On the other hand, the game balls flowing down from the right side of the special winning device 13550 as viewed from the front are sent to the outlet 71 of the game board 13 and collected by the pachinko machine 10.

In the thirteenth embodiment, the lower left side (arrow L direction side) of the special prize winning device 13550 (
The first winning opening 64 is disposed on the direction side of the arrow D. This allows game balls flowing down from the left side of the special winning device 13550 as viewed from the front to flow into the first winning opening 64.

The first wall portion 13565 is a portion that connects the base plate 60 of the game board 13 and the special winning device 13550, and is provided with two connecting plates 13565a that protrude outward to the left and right at the protruding tip portion on each of the left and right first wall portions 13565.

The connecting plate 13565a has a through hole 13565a1 through which a screw for fastening the special winning device 13550 to the base plate 60 of the game board 13 is inserted.
The special prize winning device 13550 can be fastened to the base plate 60 by a screw inserted through 565a1.

The second path member 13570 comprises a plate-shaped base plate 13571 that faces the front plate 13564 of the first path member 13560, and a fourth wall portion 13573 that protrudes from the left and right ends (in the direction of the arrows L-R) of the base plate 13571 toward the front plate 13564 of the first path member 13560.

The base plate 13571 is a member that forms a ball sending path in the gap between the first path member 13560 and the front plate 13564, and is formed so that its outer shape in a front view is smaller than that of the front plate 13564.
Since the base plate 13571 can be covered with 4, it is possible to make the base plate 13571 difficult to see from the player's side.

In addition, the base plate 13571 has a fourth convex portion 1357 protruding toward the first path member 13560.
1b, the fifth convex portion 13571c, and the fourth convex portion 13571b and the fifth convex portion 13571c
and a sixth convex portion 13571d located below and protruding toward the front plate 13564.

The fourth convex portion 13571b and the fifth convex portion 13571c are protrusions for guiding the game ball flowing down inside the special winning device 13550, and are formed by slanting downward from the outer left-right sides of the base plate 13571 (arrows (outside in the L-R direction)) toward the center of the base plate 13571.

The sixth convex portion 13571d is formed at a position facing the third convex portion 13564d described above, and is formed to a length that has a predetermined gap between the tip of the third convex portion 13564d and the tip of the third convex portion 13564d.
The gap between the opposing convex portion 13564d and the sixth convex portion 13571d is set to a dimension smaller than the diameter of the game ball.

The fourth wall portion 13573 has two fastening holes 13573a for fastening the screws inserted through the first path member 13560 drilled in each of the left and right fourth wall portions 13573. This causes the first path member 13560 and the second path member 13570 to be fastened and fixed together.

In addition, a first path member 13560 is provided around the fastening hole 13573a of the fourth wall portion 13573.
A shim member SI is provided to adjust the gap between the opposing first path member 13570 and the second path member 13570.

The shim member SI is made of a thin plate-like transparent material, and is difficult to see from the player side. In this embodiment, the shim member SI is disposed at the end on the left side as seen from the front, and the gap between the facing front plate 13564 and the base plate 13571 on the left side as seen from the front is made large.

Next, referring to Fig. 158, a description will be given of a game ball flowing down inside the special prize-winning device 13550 in the thirteenth embodiment. Fig. 158(a) is a top view of the special prize-winning device 13550, and Fig. 158(b) is a cross-sectional view of the special prize-winning device 13550 taken along the line CLVIIIb-CLVIIIb in Fig. 158(a).

As shown in FIG. 158, the special winning device 13550 has a shim member SI at the end on the left side as viewed from the front.
A distance L14 (see FIG. 158(a)) between the front plate 13564 and the base plate 13571 on the left side as viewed from the front is set to be equal to or larger than the distance L14 between the front plate 13564 and the base plate 13571 on the right side as viewed from the front.
3571 (see FIG. 158(a)) (L1
4>L15).

The distance L14 is the distance between the left end (arrow L direction side) of the front plate 13564 and the base plate 13571 at the position where they face each other. The distance L15 is the distance between the right end (arrow R direction side) of the front plate 13564 and the base plate 13571 at the position where they face each other. Furthermore, the distance L15 is set to be larger than the diameter of a game ball, and the special prize-winning device 1355
A gaming ball flowing down from above L14 can be caused to flow into the special winning device 13550 from any position in the left or right direction (L14>L15>diameter of the gaming ball).

In addition, the downstream side of the special winning device 13550 is divided into left and right by the third convex portion 13564d and the sixth convex portion 13571d. As a result, game balls flowing down the main path SK1 (see FIG. 158(b)) on the upstream side of the special winning device 13550 flow into either the main path SK2 formed on the left side of the special winning device 13550 when viewed from the front, or the sub-path HK1 formed on the right side when viewed from the front. As described above, the game area downstream of the special winning device 13550 is
The ball path is formed differently at approximately the center position in the left-right direction of the special prize-winning device 13550.
Therefore, a game ball sent from the main path SK2 to the game area is sent to a specific winning hole, and a game ball sent from the sub path HK1 to the game area is sent to the outlet 71 of the game board 13.

Furthermore, the first convex portion 13564b and the second convex portion 13564c of the front plate 13564 described above
The protruding dimensions of the fourth protruding portion 13571b and the fifth protruding portion 13571c of the base plate 13571 are set to be substantially the same. That is, the protruding dimensions of the first protruding portion 13565b and the second protruding portion 13564c protruding from the front plate 13564 toward the back side are set to be the same.
A fourth protrusion 13571b and a fifth protrusion 13571b protruding from the base plate 13571 toward the front side.
The first protrusion 13565b and the fourth protrusion 13565c are set to have the same protruding dimension.
The protruding dimension is set to be the same as that of the convex portion 13571b.

In addition, the first convex portion 13564b and the second convex portion 13564c, and the fourth convex portion 13571b and the fifth convex portion 13571c are disposed at positions having different heights in the up-down direction.
The first convex portion 13565b and the second convex portion 13564c protruding from the base plate 13571 toward the rear side are protruding from the same height. Also, the fourth convex portion 13571b and the fifth convex portion 13571c protruding from the base plate 13571 toward the front side are protruding from the same height. Furthermore, the first convex portion 13565b and the fourth convex portion 13571b are disposed at different heights, and the fourth convex portion 13571b is disposed below the first convex portion 13565b. Also, the lower side of the first convex portion 13565b protruding from two points in the gravity direction is disposed at the intermediate position of the fourth convex portion 13571b protruding from two points in the gravity direction.

As a result, the game ball flowing down inside the special winning device 13550 is guided to the first convex portion 13564b.
and the fourth convex portion 13571b or the second convex portion 13564c and the fifth convex portion 13571c in sequence. As a result, the game ball can be caused to flow down while colliding with the first convex portion 13564b and the second convex portion 13564c and the fifth convex portion 13571c in sequence.
It can flow down along the extending direction of the convex portion 13564c, the fourth convex portion 13571b, and the fifth convex portion 13571c.

The front plate 13564 and the fourth protrusion 1357 on the left side of the special winning device 13550 when viewed from the front
The distance dimension L16 (see FIG. 158(a)) between the opposing base plate 13571 and the first convex portion 13564b is set to be larger than the diameter of the game ball by the shim member SI, and the front plate 13564 and the fifth convex portion 1357 on the right side of the special winning device 13550 when viewed from the front
1c, or the distance dimension L17 between the base plate 13571 and the second convex portion 13564c is,
It is set smaller than the diameter of the game ball.

The distance L16 is the distance between the fifth convex portion 13571b and the first convex portion 13564b.
571c and the end of the front plate 13564 at the second protrusion 13564c side (arrow R direction side)
The distance L17 is the distance between the fifth protrusion 13571 and the base plate 13571.
3571c and the fourth convex portion 13571b and the first convex portion 13564b of the second convex portion 13564c
This is the distance dimension between the end portion on the side (arrow L direction side) facing the front plate 13564 or the base plate 13571.

Furthermore, in the thirteenth embodiment, the first winning port 64 is arranged below (in the direction of arrow D) the left side (in the direction of arrow L) of the special winning device 13550. This allows game balls flowing down from the left side of the special winning device 13550 when viewed from the front to flow into the first winning port 64.

Therefore, the special prize winning device 13550 is inserted from the right side (arrow R direction) of the front view of the special prize winning device 13550.
The game ball flowing into the main path SK1 of 550 passes through the second convex portion 13564c and the fifth convex portion 135
71c, and is guided down along the extending direction of the second convex portion 13564c and the fifth convex portion 13571c to the sub-path HK1 side.
A game ball flowing into the main path SK1 of the special winning device 13550 from the left side of the front view of 0 (the direction of the arrow L) is made less likely to collide with the first convex portion 13564b and the fourth convex portion 13571b, and is more likely to be sent directly to the sub path HK1. As a result, the flow direction of the game ball flowing into the inside of the special winning device 13550 can be changed.

In this embodiment, the first convex portion 13564b, the second convex portion 13564c, and the fourth convex portion 13
571b and the fifth convex portion 13571c are connected to the sixth convex portion 13571d and the third convex portion 13564d.
The sub-path SK6 is formed above (in the direction of the arrow U) the inlet of the game balls for the main path HK1 and the sub-path SK6. Therefore, most of the game balls flowing down the main path SK1 can be made to flow down to the sub-path HK1, and a relatively smaller number of game balls can be made to flow down to the main path SK6 than the sub-path HK1.

In the thirteenth embodiment, the distance between the first path member 13560 and the second path member 13570 is adjusted by the shim member SI and made non-parallel.
The position of the game ball flowing down between the opposing pathway members 13570 (the direction in which the game ball flows down) can be adjusted.

Therefore, compared to a case where the angle of the nails hammered into the front surface of the base plate 60 is changed with respect to the front surface of the base plate 60 to adjust the direction in which the game balls tend to flow down, the special winning device 13550
As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from realizing that the game is at a disadvantage before playing the game on the gaming machine, and the operating rate of the gaming machine can be improved.

In addition, since the flow direction of the game ball flowing down inside the special winning device 13550 can be changed simply by changing the two opposing directions (front-back directions (arrows F-B directions)) of the first path member 13560 and the second path member 13570, the adjustment can be made more easily than with nails that can be adjusted in all directions relative to the front of the game board 13 (base plate 60). As a result, it is possible to easily make the game ball flow down in the direction intended by the adjuster.

The direction intended by the adjuster may be, for example, a direction in which the distance between the first path member 13560 and the second path member 13570 on the sub-path HK1 side (arrow L direction side) is made larger than a distance between the first path member 13560 and the second path member 13570 on the main path SK6 side (arrow R direction side) so that game balls flowing down inside the special winning device 13550 flow down the sub-path HK1, or a direction in which the distance between the first path member 13560 and the second path member 13570 on the main path SK6 side (arrow R direction side) is made larger than a distance between the first path member 13560 and the second path member 13570 on the sub-path HK1 side (arrow L direction side).
The distance between the special winning device 13550 and the ball is set to be larger than the distance between the special winning device 13550 and the ball, which flows down the inside of the special winning device 13550, flows down the main path SK6.

Furthermore, since the second path member 13570 disposed on the rear side can be moved in the front-rear direction (the direction of the arrow F-B) by sandwiching the shim member SI with respect to the first path member 13560 disposed on the front side, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the distance between the opposing first path member 13560 and the second path member 13570. In other words, since the second path member 13570 disposed on the far side from the player is moved in the front-rear direction, the distance between the first path member 13560 and the second path member 13570 is smaller than when the first path member 13560 closer to the player is displaced.
This makes it difficult for a player to grasp the distance between the opposing balls 0. As a result, the operating rate of the gaming machine can be improved.

Next, the engaging member 14310 in the fourteenth embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 159. In the above-mentioned first embodiment, the case where the operating element 315 of the engaging member 310 is formed to protrude toward the bottom wall portion 301 side (rear side (arrow B direction side)) of the rear case 300 has been described, but the operating element 14315 in the fourteenth embodiment is formed with a protruding tip surface inclined toward the base end side. Note that the same parts as those in the above-mentioned embodiments are given the same reference numerals and their description will be omitted.

FIG. 159A is a rear view of the rear case 300 in the fourteenth embodiment.
159(b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of rear case 300 taken along line CLIXb-CLIXb in FIG. 159(a).

In addition, the rear case 14300 in the 14th embodiment, like the rear case 300 in the first embodiment, has a bottom wall portion 301 that is generally rectangular when viewed from the front, and an outer wall portion 302 that is erected from the outer edges of the four sides of the bottom wall portion 301 toward the front, and is formed into a box shape with one side (front side) open by each of the walls 301, 302. The bottom wall portion 301 has an opening 301a that is rectangular when viewed from the front at its center, and the third pattern display device 81 (see FIG. 2) arranged on the back side of the bottom wall portion 301 can be seen through the opening 301a.

In the fourteenth embodiment, the rear case 14300 has an engagement member 14310 disposed on the front side (the open side formed in a box shape (the side in the direction of the arrow F)) of the bottom wall portion 301, and an engagement member 14310 disposed on the rear side (the side in the direction of the arrow B) of the rear case 14300.
0) and a fixing member 320 for fixing the fixing member 320.

As shown in FIG. 159, the engaging member 14310 in the fourteenth embodiment has a crank-shaped outer shape in a front view, and first pieces 143 extend in parallel to each other.
The ends of the first piece 14311 and the second piece 312 are connected to each other by the first piece 14311 and the second piece 312.
It is composed of a third piece 313 that is connected in a direction perpendicular to the extension direction of the second piece 312 and a third piece 311 .

The first piece 14311 is on the side opposite to the other side to which the third piece 313 is connected (the side in the direction of the arrow R).
The end of the first piece 14311 is formed as an engaging portion with the engaged portion 332 of the fixing member 320 (see FIG. 41(a)).
The engaging portions 316 protrude outward on both sides of the first piece 14311 (in the direction of the arrows L-R) from approximately the middle position of the two engaging portions 316, and the operating element 143 protrudes toward the bottom wall portion 301 side of the rear case 300 (the rear side (in the direction of the arrow B)).
15 and is provided.

The operation element 14315 is formed at the end of the other side (arrow L direction side) of the first piece 14311, and its protruding dimension is set to a value larger than the plate thickness of the bottom wall portion 301 of the rear case 300, and protrudes toward the rear side of the rear case 14300 (bottom wall portion 301) by at least a dimension that can be grasped by an operator's fingers. This allows the operation element 14315 to protrude from the second opening portion 301d of the bottom wall portion 301, and allows the operator to grasp and operate the protruding portion (the tip of the operation element 14315).

In addition, the protruding tip surface of the operation element 14315 is on the engagement portion 316 side (the other side of the first piece 14311 (
The inclined surface 14315a is formed so as to approach the base end side of the operation element 14315 in the direction (the direction of the arrow L) toward the base end side of the operation element 14315. As a result, when an operator operates the operation element 14315 in the direction (the direction of the arrow L) to release the engagement between the engagement member 14310 and the fixed member 320, the force acting in the direction to release the engagement between the engagement member 14310 and the fixed member 320 can be reduced.

That is, the inclined surface 14315a can disperse the force exerted by the operator when operating the operation element 14315. This makes it difficult to release the engagement between the engagement member 14310 and the fixing member 320 by operating the operation element 14315 from the rear side of the rear case 300. As a result,
This prevents a worker who is attempting to fraudulently replace the board box 100 arranged on the fixed member 320 from operating the operator 14315 from the rear side of the rear case 300 and removing the fixed member 320 from the rear case 300.

The end of the inclined surface 14315a on the side of the engagement portion 316 is in contact with the bottom wall portion 30 of the rear case 300.
1. The engaging member 14310 is disposed on the front side (the side in the direction of the arrow F) of the rear surface of the engaging member 14310.
The hand of an operator who operates the operating element 14315 for the purpose of releasing the engagement between the fixing member 320 and the rear case 300 can be brought into contact with the inclined surface 14315a. As a result, it is possible to make the operating element 14315 difficult to operate, and to prevent an operator who is attempting to illegally replace the board box 100 disposed on the fixing member 320 from operating the operating element 14315 from the rear side of the rear case 300 to remove the fixing member 320 from the rear case 300.

Next, an engaging member 15310 according to the fifteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.
In the above description, the operating element 15315 is formed to protrude toward the bottom wall portion 301 side (the rear side (the side in the direction of arrow B)) of the operating element 15315 of the fifteenth embodiment, but the operating element 15315 in the fifteenth embodiment is supported by a first piece 15311 of the engaging member 15310. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals and their description will be omitted.

Fig. 160(a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the rear case 300 according to the fifteenth embodiment. The cross section of Fig. 160(a) corresponds to the cross section of Fig. 159(b).

The rear case 15300 in the fifteenth embodiment, like the rear case 300 in the first embodiment, is provided with a bottom wall portion 301 that is generally rectangular when viewed from the front, and outer wall portions 302 that stand upright from the outer edges of the four sides of the bottom wall portion 301 toward the front, and is formed into a box shape with one side (front side) open by the walls 301, 302. The bottom wall portion 301 has an opening 301a (see FIG. 5) that is rectangular when viewed from the front at its center, and the bottom wall portion 30
A third pattern display device 81 (see Figure 2) arranged on the back of 1 is made visible.

In the fifteenth embodiment, the rear case 15300 has an engagement member 15310 disposed on the front side (the open side formed in a box shape (the side in the direction of the arrow F)) of the bottom wall portion 301, and an engagement member 15310 disposed on the rear side (the side in the direction of the arrow B) of the rear case 15300.
41) for fixing the fixing member 320 (see FIG. 41).

As shown in FIG. 160A, the engaging member 15310 in the fifteenth embodiment has a crank-shaped outer shape in a front view, and includes a first piece 15311 and a second piece 312 (see FIG. 41) that extend in parallel to each other, and the first piece 14311 and the second piece 312
and a third piece 313 (see Figure 41) that connects the ends of the first piece 15311 and the second piece 312 in a direction perpendicular to the extension direction of the first piece 15311 and the second piece 312.

The first piece 15311 has an end on one side (arrow R direction) opposite to the other side (arrow L direction) to which the third piece 313 is connected, which is formed as an engaging portion with the engaged portion 332 of the fixed member 320 (see Figure 41 (a)), and mainly comprises an engaging portion 316 (see Figure 41) that protrudes outward on both sides in the up and down direction (arrow U-D direction), which is a direction approximately perpendicular to the extension direction of the first piece 15311, a recess 317 (see Figure 41) that is recessed in the extension direction of the first piece 15311 (arrow L-R direction) from approximately the midpoint between the two engaging portions 316, an operator 15315 that is inserted into the second opening 301d of the rear case 300, and a bearing portion 15319 on which the operator 15315 is journalled.

The bearing portion 15319 is provided to protrude from the first piece 15311 on the other side (the side in the direction of the arrow L) to which the third piece 313 of the first piece 15311 is connected.
A recess is formed in which a cylindrical shaft member 15315c is inserted by inserting the shaft member 15315 in the direction of gravity (direction of arrows UD).

The operation element 15315 is formed in a rod shape, and has a through hole 15315b penetrating in the direction of gravity at the end on the first piece 15311 side, and a shaft member 1531
5c.

Therefore, the operation element 15315 is held in a state in which it can be rotated and displaced with respect to the first piece 15311 by inserting the shaft member 15315c inserted into the through hole 15315b into the recess of the bearing portion 15319.
160(a) is disposed closer to the front than the first piece 15311. As a result, the rightward (clockwise) rotation of the operation element 15315 when viewed from above in the state shown in FIG. 160(a) can be restricted by abutting it against the other end of the first piece 15311, while allowing the operation element 15315 to rotate leftward (counterclockwise).

Therefore, when the operator operates the operation element 15315 in the direction (the direction of the arrow L) to release the engagement between the engagement member 15310 and the fixing member 320 (the operation element 153 in the state shown in FIG. 160( a )),
When the rear case 300 is rotated counterclockwise, the force acting in the direction of disengaging the engaging member 15310 from the fixed member 320 (the direction of the arrow L) can be reduced.
20. As a result, it is possible to prevent a player who attempts to illegally replace the board box 100 disposed on the fixed member 320 from removing the fixed member 320 from the rear case 300 by operating the operating element 15315 from the rear side of the rear case 300.

Next, an engagement member 15310 in the sixteenth embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 160(b). In the above-described first embodiment, the sliding operation of the engagement member 310 is performed by the operation element 315. In the sixteenth embodiment, however, the first engagement member 16310 is moved in the direction of the arrow A.
This is done by operating the end of the piece 16311. Note that the same parts as those in the above-mentioned embodiments are given the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted.

Fig. 160(b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the rear case 300 in the sixteenth embodiment. The cross section in Fig. 160(b) corresponds to the cross section in Fig. 160(a). Similarly to the rear case 300 in the first embodiment, the rear case 16300 in the sixteenth embodiment includes a bottom wall 301 that is generally rectangular when viewed from the front, and outer wall 302 that stands from the outer edges of the four sides of the bottom wall 301 toward the front, and is formed into a box shape with one side (front side) open by the walls 301, 302. The bottom wall 301 has a rectangular opening 301a (see Fig. 5) in the center when viewed from the front.
An opening 301a is formed in the bottom wall portion 301, and a third pattern display device 81 (see FIG. 2) arranged on the back surface of the bottom wall portion 301 can be seen through the opening 301a.

Furthermore, the rear case 16300 in the sixteenth embodiment has an engagement member 16310 disposed on the front side (the open side formed in a box shape (the side in the direction of the arrow F)) of the bottom wall portion 301, and an engagement member 16310 disposed on the rear side (the side in the direction of the arrow B) of the rear case 16300.
10) and a fixing member 320 (see FIG. 41).

As shown in FIG. 160B, the engaging member 16310 in the sixteenth embodiment has a crank-shaped outer shape in a front view, and includes a first piece 16311 and a second piece 312 (see FIG. 41) that extend in parallel to each other.
and a third piece 313 (see FIG. 41 ) that connects the ends of the first piece 16311 and the second piece 312 in a direction perpendicular to the extending direction of the first piece 16311 and the second piece 312.
The finger 6310 can be slidably displaced by inserting a finger from the rear side into a second opening 301d formed in the rear case 300.

The first piece 16311 has an end on one side (arrow R direction) opposite to the other side (arrow L direction) to which the third piece 313 is connected, which is formed as an engaging portion with the engaged portion 332 (see Figure 41) of the fixing member 320, and mainly comprises an engaging portion 316 (see Figure 41) that protrudes outward on both sides in the up and down direction (arrow U-D direction), which is a direction approximately perpendicular to the extension direction of the first piece 311, and a recess 317 (see Figure 41) that is recessed in the extension direction of the first piece 16311 (arrow L-R direction) from approximately the midpoint between the two engaging portions 316.

160(b), when the engaging portion 316 of the engaging member 16310 and the engaged portion 332 of the fixing member 320 are engaged with each other, the end portion on the other side (the side in the direction of the arrow L) of the first piece 16311 is disposed horizontally outward from the opening of the second opening 301d.
The operator rotates the engaging member 1 in a direction (the direction of the arrow L) to release the engagement between the engaging member 1 and the fixing member 320.
When operating the 6310, a finger is inserted through the second opening 301d of the rear case 300,
It is possible to make it difficult for the engaging member 16310 to be displaced in a direction that releases the engagement between the engaging member 16310 and the fixing member 320. As a result, the board box 1 disposed on the fixing member 320 can be easily displaced.
When a worker is replacing the rear case 300, the worker pushes the engagement member 1631 from the rear side of the rear case 300.
This can prevent the fixing member 320 from being removed from the rear case 300 by unauthorized manipulation of the locking member 320 .

Next, a rear case 17300 in the seventeenth embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 161. In the above-described first embodiment, the case where the operation element 315 of the engagement member 310 protrudes from the second opening 301d of the rear case 300 has been described, but in the seventeenth embodiment, the operation element 315 protruding from the second opening 301d of the rear case 17300 is covered at a predetermined position by a part of the rear case. Note that the same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 161(a) is a rear view of a rear case 17300 in the seventeenth embodiment, and FIG. 161(b) is a rear view of a rear case 17300 taken along line CLXIb-CLXIb in FIG.
This is a cross-sectional view of 00.

161, the rear case 17300 in the seventeenth embodiment includes a bottom wall 17301 that is generally rectangular when viewed from the front, and outer walls 302 that stand upright from the outer edges of the four sides of the bottom wall 17301 toward the front, and is formed into a box shape with one side (front side) open by the walls 17301 and 302. The bottom wall 17301 has a rectangular opening 301 in the center when viewed from the front.
An opening 301a is formed, and through this opening 301a, the third pattern display device 81 (see Figure 2) arranged on the back surface of the bottom wall portion 17301 can be seen.

In addition, the rear case 17300 is provided with protrusion portions 301b protruding from two points on the front side of the bottom wall portion 17301, a first opening 301c opening at a position opposite the fixing member 320, a second opening 301d opening at a position opposite the engaging member 310, and a covering portion 17301e covering the rear surface of the second opening 301d on the first opening 301c side (the side in the direction of arrow R).

The covering portion 17301e is disposed on the first opening 301c side (the direction of the arrow R) of the second opening 301d.
The covering portion 17301e is provided with a bent portion 17301e1 whose end is bent toward the inside of the opening of the second opening 301d in rear view.
The housing 10 is formed in a box shape that is open on the opposite side (the side in the direction of the arrow L) and the side in the direction of the arrow R.

In addition, the erection distance of the covering portion 17301e (from the back surface of the bottom wall portion 17301c to the bent portion 1730
The distance between the cover portion 17301e and the front surface of the cover portion 17301c is set to be larger than the protruding dimension of the operation element 315 protruding from the bottom wall portion 17301c.
The left-right dimension of 301e1 (in the direction of the arrows LR) is set to be larger than the left-right dimension of the operation element 315 when viewed from behind.

As a result, in a state in which the engaging portion 316 of the engaging member 310 and the engaged portion 332 of the fixed member 320 are engaged with each other, the operating element 315 is disposed inside the covering member 17301e as shown in FIG.
When an operator operates the engaging member 310 in the direction of the arrow L), it is possible to make it difficult to grasp the operator 315 from the rear side of the rear case 17300. This makes it possible to prevent the engaging member 310 from being displaced in the direction of releasing the engagement between the engaging member 310 and the fixed member 320 (the direction of the arrow L). As a result, it is difficult for an operator (player) attempting to illegally replace the board box 100 disposed on the fixed member 320 to grasp the engaging member 315 from the rear side of the rear case 17300.
0 can be operated to prevent fixing member 320 from being removed from rear case 17300.

Next, referring to FIG. 162 to FIG. 164, a rear case 183 according to an eighteenth embodiment will be described.
In the first embodiment, the engaging member 310 is oriented in a linear direction (arrow L-
In the above description, the engaging member 18310 is slidably displaced in the R direction, whereas in the eighteenth embodiment, the engaging member 18310 is rotated relative to the rear case 18300. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 162 and FIG. 163, a rear case 183 according to the eighteenth embodiment will be described.
The configuration of the 18300 and the operation of the engagement member 18310 will be described with reference to FIG.
FIG. 162( a ) is a front view of a rear case 18300 in the eighteenth embodiment.
FIG. 162(b) and FIG. 163(b) are rear views of the rear case 18300.
162(a) and 162(b) show a state in which the engaging member 18310 and the fixing member 18320 are engaged with each other, and FIGS. 163(a) and 163(b) show a state in which the engaging member 18310 and the fixing member 18320 are disengaged from each other.

162 and 163, the rear case 18300 in the 18th embodiment includes a bottom wall portion 18301 having a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and outer wall portions 18302 erected from the outer edges of the four sides of the bottom wall portion 18301 toward the front, and is formed into a box shape with one side (front side) open by the walls 18301 and 18302. The rear case 18300 also includes an engagement member 18310 disposed on the front side (the open side formed into the box shape (the side in the direction of the arrow F)) of the bottom wall portion 18301, and a fixing member 18320 disposed on the rear side of the rear case 18300 and fixing the board box 100 (the main control device 110).

The bottom wall portion 18301 has a rectangular opening 301a in the center when viewed from the front, through which the third pattern display device 81 (see FIG. 2) disposed on the back surface of the bottom wall portion 18301 can be seen. The bottom wall portion 18301 also has a first opening 18301c that opens at a position opposite the fixing member 18320, and a protruding portion 18301b that is located below the first opening 18301c (in the direction of the arrow D) and protrudes toward the front surface.

The first opening 18301c is an opening for inserting an engaged portion 18332 of the fixing member 18320 described later, and is formed in a shape larger than the engaged portion 18332 when viewed from the front. This makes it possible to position the engaging portion of the fixing member 18320 on the front side of the rear case 18300 from the rear side of the rear case 18300 after disposing the role device (rotation unit 700) inside the rear case 18300.

The protruding portion 18301b is a member that supports an engaging member 18310, which will be described later, and is
The engaging member 18310 is provided in a cylindrical shape protruding from the front surface of the rear case 183. A hole for screwing is provided in the protruding tip surface of the protruding portion 18301b.
00, a screw is screwed into the protruding portion 18301b, thereby forming an engaging member 1831
0 can be prevented from slipping out of the protruding portion 18301b.

The outer wall portion 18302 has a right side (arrow R direction side) in a front view and a left-right side (arrow L
The rear case 18300 has an opening 18302a that opens in a direction (-R direction) of the rear case 18300. The opening 18302a is formed on a rotation trajectory of an engaging member 18310, which will be described later. Thereby, after the engaging member 18310 is disposed inside the rear case 18300, the engaging member 18310 can be rotated to cause the engaging member 18310 to protrude outside the rear case 18300.

The fixing member 18320 is composed of an interposed member 18330 that engages with an engaging member 18310 described below, and a shaft support member 340 that is fastened to the interposed member 18330.

The interposing member 18330 is formed in a box shape that is open on the front side, and has a locking portion 18331 that protrudes from the side surface on the other side (the side in the direction of the arrow L) and a locking portion 18332 that is fixed to the rear case 300 from the side surface on one side (the side in the direction of the arrow R).
The engaging portion 18332 is formed in a frame shape protruding toward the side, the through hole 333 (see FIG. 39B) is opened in a circular shape on the bottom surface (side surface on the arrow B direction side) of the box shape, and the protrusion 33
4 and are mainly equipped with.

The locking portion 18331 has an opening for engaging the other side (the side in the direction of arrow L) of the fixing member 320 with the bottom wall portion 18301, and is engaged with the bottom wall portion 18301 by inserting a protruding wall 18301c1, which protrudes in an L-shaped cross section from the periphery of the above-mentioned first opening 18301c, into the opening.

As a result, when interposition member 18330 (fixing member 18320) is arranged in rear case 18300, protruding wall 18301c1 can be inserted into engagement portion 18331 of interposition member 18330 to engage the other side (the side in the direction of arrow L) of interposition member 18330 with rear case 18300.

The engaged portion 18332 is a portion that engages with the engaging member 18310, and is disposed on the rear case 183.
The projection dimension toward the 00 side (arrow F direction side) is the same as that of the engagement member 18300 disposed on the rear case 18300.
The distance dimension from the inner surface of the front side (arrow F direction side) of the enclosed space to the front side of the bottom wall portion 18301 is set to a dimension exceeding 8310.
1. As a result, the space surrounded by the engaged portion 18332 and the engaging member 18310 are disposed at a position overlapping in the front-rear direction (the direction of the arrows FB).

The engaging member 18310 is formed in an approximately L-shape when viewed from the front, and is composed of a second piece 18312 that is pivotally supported on the protrusion 18301b of the rear case 18300, and a first piece 18311 that is formed by bending from one end of the second piece 18312.

The second piece 18312 has a shaft support hole 18312a that opens in a circular shape in the front-rear direction (the direction of the arrows F-B) at the end opposite to the side where the first piece 18311 is formed.
is a hole into which the protrusion 18301b of the rear case 18300 described above is inserted, thereby allowing the engagement member 18310 to be disposed in a state in which it is axially supported inside the rear case 18300.

The first piece 18311 extends in an arc shape centered on the axis of the shaft support hole 18312a described above. This makes it possible to minimize the displacement area of the first piece 18311 when the engaging member 18310 is rotated centered on the axis of the shaft support hole 18312a. In addition, the first piece 18311 has, at the end opposite to the side connected to the second piece 18312, engaging portions 18316 protruding from the shaft support hole 18312a on both sides in the radial direction, and a first piece 18311 extending from an approximately midpoint between the two engaging portions 316.
and a recess 18317 recessed in the extension direction of 311.

The two engaging portions 18316 are formed to have an outer shape of a substantially triangle when viewed from the front.
One of the two engaging portions 18316 is formed with an outer shape that protrudes radially outward from the first piece 18311 from the end opposite the connecting portion with the second piece 18312 toward the connecting portion with the second piece 18312.
The first piece 18311 is formed with an outer shape that protrudes radially inward from the end opposite the connection portion with the second piece 18312 toward the connection portion with the second piece 18312.

The recess 18317 is formed by cutting out the first piece 18311 in the thickness direction.
The first piece 18311 is recessed from the end of the piece 18311 opposite to the connection side with the second piece 18312 toward the connection side with the second piece 18312 along the extension direction of the first piece 18311.
The end of first piece 18311 is split into two. This makes the end of first piece 18311 opposite the connection side with second piece 18312 easier to elastically deform than the connection side with second piece 18312, making it easier to engage engaging member 18310 with fixing member 18320.

Next, the engagement between the engaging member 18310 and the fixing member 18320 will be described.
As shown in FIG. 3 , the interposition member 18330 and the axial support member 340 are fastened together by a screw inserted from the interposition member 18330 side before engaging with the engaging member 18310 .

As described above, the engagement member 18310 is attached to the protruding portion 1830 of the rear case 18300.
1b, and the connection portion between the first piece 18311 and the second piece 18312 is
It is disposed in a state where it protrudes from an opening 18302 a of the rear case 18300 .

The engaging member 18310 pivotally supported by the rear case 18300 has a center of gravity that is substantially parallel to the rear case 1.
8300的凸出部18302a侧，而在没有外部力应用，负量对连续地发生在开口18302a的开口18302a的开口部发生力应用到连续部18310。 In the absence of external force, gravity causes the engaging member 18310 to rotate in the direction in which the connecting portion between the first piece 18311 and the second piece 18312 protrudes from the opening 18302a of the rear case 18300. In this way, when the engagement between the engaging member 18310 and the fixing member 18320 is incomplete, the engaging member 18310 is caused to protrude outside the rear case 18300, thereby preventing forgetting to engage the engaging member 18310 and the fixing member 18320.

The interposed member 18330 and the pivot support member 340 (fixing member 18320) in the fastened state are
A protruding wall 18301c1 protruding from the periphery of the first opening 18301c is inserted into the locking portion 18331 of the interposed member 18330, and the left side (arrow L direction side) of the fixed member 18320 in a front view is locked to the rear case 18300.
2 is inserted into the inside of the first opening 18301 c , and the space surrounded by the engaged portion 18332 is disposed at a position opposite to the tip of the first piece 18311 of the engaging member 18310 .

Next, the worker who engages the engagement member 18310 with the fixing member 18320
The engaging member 18310 (the connection between the first piece 18311 and the second piece 18312) protruding from the opening 18302a of the rear case 18300 is pushed toward the inside of the rear case 18300 (the direction of the arrow R1) (see Figure 163), thereby rotating the engaging member 18310 around the protrusion 18301b.

As a result, as shown in FIG. 162, the tip of the engaging member 18310 is brought into contact with the engaged portion 1833.
In this case, the distance between the outer ends of the two engaging portions 18316 is set to be larger than the vertical opening dimension of the internal space of the engaged portion 18332, but the recess 18317 of the engaging member 18310 makes it easier for the first piece 18311 to be elastically deformed, so that the end of the first piece 18311 can be elastically deformed toward the inside of the recess 18317 to make the distance between the outer ends of the two engaging portions 18316 smaller than the vertical opening dimension of the internal space of the engaged portion 18332, and the end of the first piece 18311 can be inserted into the inside of the engaged portion 18332.

In addition, the connecting portion between the first piece 18311 and the second piece 18312 of the engaging member 18310 is inserted into the inside of the opening 18302a of the rear case 18300.
However, in the engaged state, the engaging member 18310 can be prevented from being operated from the outside of the rear case 18300. As a result, it is possible to prevent the engaging member 18310 from being improperly operated and the fixing member 183
This can prevent the board box 100 (main control device 110) connected to the board box 20 from being replaced with an unauthorized board.

Next, a description will be given of the release of engagement between the engaging member 18310 and the fixing member 18320 in the eighteenth embodiment. As shown in Fig. 163(a), the first opening 18301c is opened in a generally L-shape when viewed from the front, and the recess 18317 of the engaging member 18310 in an engaged state with the engaged portion 18332 of the fixing member 18320 can be operated from the rear side (arrow B direction side) of the rear case 1300 via the first opening 18301c.

Therefore, the outer portion of the recess 18317 of the engagement member 18310 is pressed against the recess 18314 with a dedicated tool or the like.
317, the engagement between the engaging portion 18316 and the engaged portion 18332 of the engaging member 18310 is released.
The engaging member 310 is displaced in a direction (arrow L direction) in which the engaging member 18310 is pulled out from the internal space engaged by the engaged portion 18332, and then the deformation of the engaging member 310 is returned to its original state.
2 can be disengaged.

It is preferable that the gap between the outer portion of the recess 18317 of the engagement member 18310 and the first opening 18301c is formed as small as possible. This makes it impossible to insert the fingers of a person removing the fixing member 18320 from the rear case 300, while allowing the insertion of a dedicated tool. As a result, only a worker having a dedicated tool can replace the board box 100 (main control device 110), and replacement with an unauthorized board box 100 can be suppressed.

Next, referring to Fig. 164, a case where the engaging member 18310 is forgotten to be engaged with the fixing member 18320 will be described. Fig. 164(a) is a schematic top view of the game board 13.
164(a) and 164(b) are schematic top views of the pachinko machine 10.
164(b) illustrates a state in which the engaging member 18310 has been forgotten to engage with the engaged portion 18332. Also, Fig. 164(a) and Fig. 164(b) illustrate a state in which an upper piece of the outer frame 11 formed in a frame shape in front view has been removed.

As described above, when the engagement between the engaging member 18310 and the engaged portion 18332 is incomplete, the engaging member 18310 can be protruded to the outside of the rear case 18300 by gravity. In this case, the engaging member 18310 in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction) of the game board 13 can be
10 to the right end (arrow R direction side) of the rear case 18300.
1 (see FIG. 164(a)) is set to be larger than the inner left-right dimension LR2 (see FIG. 164(b)) of the outer frame 11 in which the game board 13 is arranged. This allows the back side of the engagement member 18310 to abut against the front side of the outer frame 11 when an attempt is made to insert the game board 13 into the inside of the outer frame 11 when the engagement member 18310 and the fixing member 18320 are disengaged. As a result, when the engagement member 18310 and the fixing member 18320 are disengaged,
The game board 13 is prevented from being disposed in the outer frame 11, and the engagement member 18310 and the fixing member 18
This makes it possible to prevent forgetting to engage with 320.

Next, referring to FIG. 165 and FIG. 166, an engaging member 1931 in the 19th embodiment
In the above-described 18th embodiment, the engaging member 18310 is disposed inside the outer frame 11 to prevent the engaging member 18310 from being operated improperly, but in the 19th embodiment, the rotation of the engaging member 19310 in the release direction is restricted to prevent the engaging member 18310 from being operated improperly. Note that the same reference numerals are used for the same parts as those in the above-described embodiments, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Fig. 165 is an exploded perspective front view of an engaging member 19310 in the nineteenth embodiment. Fig. 166(a) is a front view of a rear case 18300, and Fig. 166(b) is a cross-sectional view of a one-way 19350 taken along line CLXVIb-CLXVIb in Fig. 165.

As shown in FIG. 165, the engaging member 19310 in the 19th embodiment is formed in an approximately L-shape when viewed from the front, and is composed of a second piece 19312 having a rotation axis relative to the rear case 19300, and a first piece 18311 formed by bending from one end of the second piece 19312.

The second piece 19312 has a fitting hole 19312b that opens in a circular shape in the front-rear direction (the direction of the arrows F-B) at the end opposite to the side where the first piece 18311 is formed. The fitting hole 19312b is a hole into which the one-way 19350 described later is fitted.
It is formed with approximately the same inner diameter as 9351.

The one-way 19350 includes an inner ring 19352 having a cam surface formed on its outer circumferential surface, and the inner ring 19352
19352) and a plurality of springs 19353 and rollers 19354 arranged between the outer ring 19351 and the inner ring 19352 (see FIG. 166 (b)). When the inner ring 19352 attempts to rotate in one direction relative to the outer ring 19351, the contact pressure between the cam surface and the rollers 19354 increases, creating resistance and transmitting power to the outer ring, and when the inner ring rotates in the other direction relative to the outer ring 19351, the contact pressure between the cam surface and the rollers 19354 decreases, causing them to slip and cut off the power transmission.
A detailed explanation of the one-way 19350 will be given later.

An operating element 19360 is inserted into the center of the inner ring 19352 of the one-way 19350. The operating element 19360 mainly includes an operating portion 19361 disposed on the rear side (arrow B direction side) of the rear case 19300, and an insertion portion 19362 protruding from the front side (arrow F direction side) of the operating portion 19361.

The operation unit 19361 is a portion where an operator operates the operation element 19360 from the rear side of the rear case 19300, and is formed in a circular shape, and its outer shape is formed to be larger than an opening through which an insertion portion 19362 described later is inserted.
When the operation unit 19361 is disposed from the rear side of the rear case 19300, the operation unit 19361 can be prevented from slipping out to the front side of the rear case 19300 (the direction of the arrow F).

The insertion portion 19362 is formed in a cylindrical shape coaxial with the axis of the operation portion 19361, and protrudes toward the front side (the direction of the arrow F). The insertion portion 19362 also includes a protruding wall 19362a protruding radially from the outer circumferential surface thereof.

The protruding wall 19362a is configured to connect the inner ring 1935 of the one-way 19350 to the insertion portion 19362.
The recess 1935 formed in the inner ring 19352 is an engagement portion that prevents the inner ring 1935 from rotating freely.
2a. This makes it possible to prevent the rotational force acting on the operation element 19360 from being not transmitted to the inner ring 19352.

Furthermore, a recess that is circular when viewed from the front is formed on the protruding tip surface of the insertion portion 19362, and the operator 19360 can be connected to the one-way 19350 by screwing a screw into this recess from the front side to the rear side.

Next, the arrangement of the rear case 19300 and the engaging member 19310 will be described with reference to Fig. 166. The rear case 19300 includes a bottom wall portion 19301 that is generally rectangular when viewed from the front, and outer wall portions 302 that are erected toward the front from the outer edges of the four sides of the bottom wall portion 19301, and is formed into a box shape with one side (front side) open by the walls 19301 and 302.
The rear case 19300 is provided with a front side (a box-shaped open side (
An engaging member 19310 disposed on the side of the rear case 19300 in the direction of the arrow F), a fixing member 18320 disposed on the rear side of the rear case 19300 and fixing the board box 100 (main control device 110),
Equipped with.

The bottom wall portion 19301 has a rectangular opening 301a in the center when viewed from the front, through which the third pattern display device 81 (see FIG. 2) disposed on the back surface of the bottom wall portion 19301 can be seen. The bottom wall portion 19301 also has a first opening 18301c that opens at a position opposite the fixing member 18320, and a second opening 18301c below the first opening 18301c (indicated by an arrow D).
1936 ) and is open in the front-rear direction and has the insertion portion 1936 of the above-mentioned operation element 19360 on the inside.
2 is inserted into an opening (not shown).

The above-mentioned engaging member 19310 is arranged on the front side of the bottom wall portion 10301 with the one-way 19350 being inwardly viewed inside the fitting hole 19312b, and then the insertion portion 19362 of the operating member 19360 is inserted into the rear case 1930 from the rear side of the rear case 19300.
10 through the opening of the one-way 19350 and inserted into the inside of the inner ring 19352 of the one-way 19350, whereby the one-way 19350 is disposed in the bottom wall portion 19301.

Next, the operation of the one-way 19350 will be described.
9350 is switched between allowing and blocking the transmission of power to the outer ring 19351 depending on whether the inner ring 19352 rotates in one direction or the other.

First, a case where the power of the inner ring 19352 is transmitted to the outer ring will be described.
As shown in FIG. 166(b), when the inner ring 19352 is rotated in one direction (the direction of the arrow LK (see FIG. 166(b))), the roller 193 is inserted between the cam surface of the inner ring 19352 and the inner peripheral surface of the outer ring 19351.
The rollers 19354 are pressed against each other, and the contact of the rollers 19354 creates resistance, so that the power of the inner ring 19352 is
9351. In this case, one rotation direction is set to the direction in which the engaging member 19310 is engaged with the fixing member 18320.

Next, a case where the power of the inner ring 19352 is interrupted will be described. When the inner ring 19352 is rotated in the other direction (the direction of the arrow RK (see FIG. 166(b))), the rollers 19354 are displaced radially inward of the inner ring 19352 due to the resistance of contact with the inner peripheral surface of the outer ring 19351. This reduces the contact surface pressure between the inner peripheral surface of the outer ring 19351 and the rollers 19354, causing the rollers 19354 to slide relative to the outer ring 19351 and interrupting the power transmission. In this case, the rotation direction in the other direction is set to a direction that releases the engagement of the engagement member 19310 with the fixed member 18320.

With this, in a state where the engaging member 19310 is disposed in the rear case 19300, the operating element 1
9360 can be rotated to cause the engaging member 19310 to engage with the fixed member 18320. Furthermore, from the state in which the engaging member 19310 and the fixed member 18320 are engaged with each other, the operation element 19
360 to release the engagement between the engagement member 19310 and the fixed member 18320. As a result, it is possible to prevent the engagement member 19310 (operator 19360) from being improperly operated,
This makes it possible to prevent the board box 100 (main control device 110) connected to the fixing member 18320 from being replaced with an unauthorized board.

Next, referring to FIG. 167 to FIG. 169, the engaging member 2031 in the twentieth embodiment will be described.
In the first embodiment, the movement of the engagement member 310 is performed by the rotation unit 70.
The case where the screw is inserted into the rear base 720 of the second embodiment is described.
In one embodiment, when the engaging member 20310 is engaged with the fixing member 320, the engaging member 20
The movement of the engaging portion 20310 is formed on the rear base 20720 of the rotating unit 20700.
The movement is restricted by being engaged with 724a. Note that the same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are given the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 167 and FIG. 168, an engaging member 2031 in the twentieth embodiment will be described.
167 is an exploded perspective view of a rear case 20300 and a rotation unit 20700 in the twentieth embodiment.
168(a) is a front view of the engagement member 20310, and FIG. 168(b) is a rear view of the rotation unit 20700 and the engagement member 20310.

The rear case 20300 in the twentieth embodiment, like the rear case 300 in the first embodiment, is provided with a bottom wall portion 301 that is generally rectangular when viewed from the front, and outer wall portions 302 that stand upright from the outer edges of the four sides of the bottom wall portion 301 toward the front, and is formed into a box shape with one side (front side) open by the walls 301, 302. The bottom wall portion 301 has an opening 301a (see FIG. 5) that is rectangular when viewed from the front at its center, and the bottom wall portion 30300 can be inserted through the opening 301a.
A third pattern display device 81 (see Figure 2) arranged on the back of 1 is made visible.

In the twentieth embodiment, the rear case 20300 has an engagement member 20310 disposed on the front side (the open side formed in a box shape (the side indicated by the arrow F)) of the bottom wall 301, and an engagement member 20310 disposed on the rear side (the side indicated by the arrow B) of the rear case 20300.
20. Furthermore, in the rear case 20300 of the twentieth embodiment, a rotation unit 20700 is disposed in front of the bottom wall portion 301.

As shown in FIGS. 167 and 168 , the engaging member 20310 disposed on the front side (the side in the direction of the arrow F) of the bottom wall portion 301 of the rear case 20300 in the twentieth embodiment is formed in a crank shape when viewed from the front, and has first pieces 31 extending in directions parallel to each other.
It is composed of a first piece 311 and a second piece 20312, and a third piece 313 that connects the ends of the first piece 311 and the second piece 20312 in a direction perpendicular to the extension direction of the first piece 311 and the second piece 20312.

The first piece 311 and the second piece 20312 are each formed with a sliding groove 314 that is elongated in the extending direction thereof.
The guide 0312 is slidable in the extending direction (the direction of the arrows L and R).

The second piece 20312 also has a recess 20312c recessed into a side surface parallel to the sliding direction of the engaging member 20310. The recess 20312c is a recess into which a tip of an engaging portion 20724a of a rear base 20720 of a rotation unit 20700 described later is inserted.
It is formed in substantially the same shape as the outer shape of 24a.

To explain in detail, the recess 20312c has a dimension SH1 (see FIG. 168(a)) from the end of the second piece 20312 on the opposite side (the side in the direction of the arrow L) to the side where the second piece 20312 is connected to the third piece 313, and a dimension SH2 (see FIG. 168(b)) that allows the protrusion 301b to slide inside the sliding groove 314 of the engagement member 20310.
The recess 20312c is recessed into a right-angled triangle when viewed from the front, with the right-angled portion being set on the connection side (the side in the direction of arrow R) of the second piece 20312 with the third piece 313.

The rotating unit 20700 is inserted into the opening 301 of the bottom wall 301 of the rear case 20300.
A rear base 20720 having a rectangular shape when viewed from the front and disposed on the right side (the direction of the arrow R) of the lower part of the rear base 20720a and a rotating body 800 (FIG. 9) disposed on the front side (the direction of the arrow F) of the rear base 20720.
3), and the player can visually recognize the effect of the rotational displacement of the rotating body 800 through a light-transmitting center frame 86 arranged on the game board 13.

The rear base 20720 is a plate member that connects the rear surface of the ball receiving stand 710 and the rear surface side (the side in the direction of arrow B) of the decorative unit 750, and is disposed on the rear surface side of the ball receiving stand 710 and the decorative unit 750. The rear base 20720 also includes an erect wall 20724 that erects from the rear surface.

The standing wall 20724 is provided so as to extend in a shape surrounding the outer edge of the engaging member 20310 disposed on the rear case 20300.
312c and has an engaging portion 20724a whose tip is inserted into the inside of the recess 20312c.

The engaging portion 20724a protrudes from the erected wall 20724 in a direction (arrow R direction) in which the engaging member 20310 is engaged with the fixed member 320, and is formed at a predetermined gap from the erected wall 20724 in a direction perpendicular to the sliding direction of the engaging member 20310.
By reducing the rigidity of the engaging portion 20724a, it is possible to easily cause the engaging portion 20724a to elastically deform.
The gap between the standing wall 20724 and the engaging portion 20724a ensures an area in which the engaging portion 20724a can elastically deform.

In addition, the engaging portion 20724a has a bent portion 2 that is bent toward the engaging member 20310 at the protruding tip.
The shape of the bent portion 20724a1 in a front view is the same as that of the recess 2031 described above.
2c. As a result, the engaging member 20310 is formed in a triangular shape having substantially the same shape as the bent portion 20312c of the recess 20312c of the engaging member 20310 before engaging with the fixing member 320.
Therefore, the engaging member 20310 is moved in the displacement direction (arrow L-R
In this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the plate to slide in the opposite direction (see FIG. 168(b)).

Therefore, it is possible to prevent the engaging member 20310 from vibrating due to a force such as vibration or swinging relative to the rear case 20300 and moving in the direction of engagement with the fixed member 320 (the direction of the arrow R).
0 from coming into contact with the engaging member 20310.
When the fixing member 320 is disposed on the rear case 20300, the engaging portion 33 of the fixing member 320
167) is disposed in the direction of disengagement of the engaging member 20310 from the fixed member 320. As a result, it is not necessary to operate the engaging member 20310 in the direction of disengaging the engaging member 20310 from the fixed member 320, and therefore the workability in engaging the engaging member 20310 with the fixed member 320 can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 169, the engaging member 20310 and the rotating unit 20700 in a state in which the engaging member 20310 and the fixing member 320 are engaged with each other will be described.
169( a ) is a rear view of the rotation unit 20700 and the engagement member 20310 .
169(a) and 169(b) are rear views of the rear case 20300.
169(b) illustrates a state in which the engaging member 20310 and the fixing member 20320 are engaged with each other. In addition, in Fig. 169(b), a part of the engaging member 20310 and the outline of the standing wall 20724 are illustrated by dashed lines.

As shown in FIG. 169 , the operation element 3 is inserted into the rear case 20300 from the rear side (the side in the direction of the arrow B).
15 is operated so that the engaging member 20310 is disposed on the left side (the side in the direction of the arrow L) of the bottom wall portion 301 of the rear case 20300 as viewed from the front.
When the engaging member 20310 is displaced to the right side (the direction of the arrow R) in a front view with respect to the engaging member 20310, the recess 20
The bent portion 20724a1 disposed on the inside of the recess 20312c is pushed into the recess 20312c by the inclined surface of the recess 20312c.

As described above, the recess 20312c has a distance SH1 (see FIG. 168(a) ) from the end of the second piece 20312 opposite to the connection side with the third piece 313 (the side in the direction of the arrow L) to the end of the second piece 20312, which is a distance SH2 (
168(b)), the engagement member 20310 is set to the fixing member 320
When the engaging member 20310 is displaced to a position where it engages with the third piece 31
The end portion on the opposite side (the side in the direction of the arrow L) to the connection side with the engaging member 20
The engaging member 20310 is disposed adjacent to the engaging member 20310 in the displacement direction (arrow L-R direction) of the fixing member 320. This makes it possible to prevent the engaging member 20310 from being improperly displaced in the direction (arrow L direction) that releases the engagement with the fixing member 320.

As in the first embodiment, the engaging member 20310 has an engaging portion 316 that engages with the fixing member 3.
The engaging member 20310 is hooked (engaged) with the engaged portion 332 of the rear case 300, thereby restricting the displacement of the engaging member 20310 in the direction of releasing the engagement with the fixed member 320. However, since the engaged portion 332 of the fixed member 320 is inserted through the first opening 301c of the rear case 300, the engaged portion 3
There is a risk that the engagement between the locking member 32 and the engagement portion 316 may be illegally released through the first opening 301c.

In contrast, in the twentieth embodiment, the displacement of the engaging member 20310 in the direction of releasing the engagement with the fixed member 320 is prevented by the engaging portion 316 of the engaging member 20310 engaging with the fixed member 320.
Since the end of the engaging member 20310 opposite to the bent portion 20724a1 can be abutted against the bent portion 20724a1, it is possible to prevent an illegal object from being inserted through the first opening 301c and the end of the engaging member 20310 and the bent portion 20724a1 from coming into contact with each other.
As a result, the engagement between the engagement member 20310 and the fixing member 31 can be prevented from being released.
This can prevent the engagement with the fixing member 320 from being fraudulently released, thereby preventing the board box 100 (main control device 110) connected to the fixing member 320 from being replaced with an unauthorized board.

The engagement between the fixed member 320 and the engaging member 20310 can be released by removing the rotating unit 20700 arranged on the inside (bottom wall portion 301) of the rear case 20300 from the rear case 20300, releasing the engagement between the end of the engaging member 20310 and the bent portion 20724a1, and then elastically deforming the end of the first piece 311 of the engaging member 20310 to pull the end of the engaging member 20310 out of the internal space of the engaged portion 332.

Therefore, when removing the fixing member 320 from the rear case 20300, it is necessary to remove the rotating unit 20700 from the front side of the rear case 20300.
This can prevent the engagement between the fixing member 320 and the board box 100 (main control device 110) connected to the fixing member 320 from being fraudulently released, thereby preventing the board box 100 (main control device 110) from being replaced with an unauthorized board.

Furthermore, since the engaging member 20310 is formed so that its shape in front view is bent in a crank shape as described above, it is possible to restrict an illegal object such as a wire or wire inserted from the first piece 311 side from being sent in a straight line to the end of the second piece 20312. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an illegal object inserted from the first piece 311 side from being sent accurately to the engaging portion between the second piece 20312 and the bent portion 20724a1. As a result, it is possible to prevent the engagement between the engaging member 20310 and the fixing member 320 from being illegally released, and the board box 100 (main control device 110) connected to the fixing member 320 from being replaced with an illegal board.

Next, referring to FIG. 170 to FIG. 173, a rotating unit 21 according to a 21st embodiment will be described.
In the first embodiment, the rear base 72 of the rotation unit 700 is
In the above description, the movement of the engaging member 310 is restricted by the screw inserted into the engaging member 310.
In the twenty-first embodiment, the movement of the engaging member 310 is restricted by inserting the first piece 311 into the insertion portion 21724b formed on the rear base 21720 of the rotation unit 21700. Note that the same parts as those in the above embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the overall configuration of the engagement member 310 and the rotation unit 21700 in the twenty-first embodiment will be described with reference to Figs. 170 and 171. Fig. 170 is an exploded perspective view of the rear case 300 and the rotation unit 21700 in the twenty-first embodiment.
171(b) is a rear view of the rotation unit 21700 and the engagement member 310, and FIG. 171(c) is a rear view of the rotation unit 21700 and the engagement member 310.
A schematic cross-sectional view of the rotation unit 21700 taken along line CLXXIb-CLXXIb in Figure 171 (a).

In addition, the rear case 21300 in the 21st embodiment is similar to the rear case 300 in the first embodiment in that it has a bottom wall portion 301 that is generally rectangular when viewed from the front and an outer wall portion 302 that is erected from the outer edges of the four sides of the bottom wall portion 301 toward the front, and is formed into a box shape with one side (front side) open by each of the walls 301, 302. The bottom wall portion 301 has an opening 301a that is rectangular when viewed from the front at its center, and the third pattern display device 81 (see FIG. 2) arranged on the back side of the bottom wall portion 301 can be seen through the opening 301a.

In the twenty-first embodiment, the rear case 21300 includes an engagement member 310 disposed on the front side (the open side (the side in the direction of the arrow F) formed in a box shape) of the bottom wall portion 301 and a rear case 21
300 (arrow B direction side), and the board box 100 (main control device 110)
and a fixing member 320 for fixing the rear case 21300. Furthermore, a rotation unit 21700 is disposed on the front side of the bottom wall portion 301 of the rear case 21300 in the twenty-first embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 170 and FIG. 171, a rotation unit 21700 according to the 21st embodiment
The rear base 21720 has a rectangular shape when viewed from the front and is arranged on the right side (arrow R direction side) of the lower part (arrow D direction side) of the opening 301a of the bottom wall portion 301 of the rear case 300, and a rotating body 800 (see Figure 93) arranged on the front side of the rear base 21720, and allows the player to visually recognize the effect of the rotating body 800 being rotationally displaced through a light-transmitting center frame 86 arranged on the game board 13.

The rear base 21720 is a plate member that connects the rear surface of the ball receiving stand 710 and the rear surface side of the decorative unit 750, and is disposed on the rear surface sides of the ball receiving stand 710 and the decorative unit 750. The rear base 21720 also includes an erected wall 21724 that is erected on its rear surface.

The standing wall 21724 is provided so as to extend in a shape surrounding the outer edge of the engaging member 310 when the engaging member 310 is disposed in the rear case 300.
0 (the engaging member 310 and the fixing member 320
3 toward the recess 317 of the engagement member 310 (in the state where the engagement with the
It has an insertion portion 21724b that protrudes (toward the direction).

The insertion portion 21724b is in the displacement direction (arrow L-R) of the engagement member 310 from the erected wall 21724.
The insertion portion 21 extends in a direction parallel to the gravity direction (direction indicated by the arrow U-B) and is set to a dimension that overlaps with the engagement member 310 in a state in which the insertion portion 21 is engaged with the fixing member 320.
A bent portion 21724b1 that is bent toward the rear side (the engaging member 310 side) is formed at the tip of 724b, and the bent tip of the bent portion 21742b1 is set to a length that overlaps with the engaging member 310 in the front-to-rear direction of the pachinko machine 10 (the direction of the arrow F-B).

Furthermore, the width dimension of the insertion portion 21742b in the vertical direction (arrow U-D direction) is set to be smaller than the width dimension in the vertical direction of the recess 317 of the engagement member 310. Therefore, when the engagement member 310 is engaged with the fixing member 320, the insertion portion 21724b
The bent portion 21724b1 is inserted into the inside of the recess 317. This makes it possible to prevent the first piece 311 of the engaging member 310 from being elastically deformed toward the inside of the recess 317 when the engaging member 310 and the fixing member 320 are engaged with each other. As a result,
This can prevent the engagement between the fixing member 320 and the board box 100 (main control device 110) connected to the fixing member 320 from being fraudulently released, thereby preventing the board box 100 (main control device 110) from being replaced with an unauthorized board.

Next, with reference to Figures 171 to 173, the operation of the insertion portion 21724b when the engagement member 310 is engaged with the fixing member 320 will be described.
Fig. 172(a) is a rear view of the rotating unit 21700 and the engaging member 310. Fig. 172(b) and Fig. 173(b) are schematic cross-sectional views of the rear case 300 and the rotating unit 21700. Figs. 172(a) and 172(b) show a state in which the engaging member 310 and the fixing member 320 are disengaged, and Figs. 173(a) and 173(b) show a state in which the engaging member 310 and the fixing member 320 are disengaged.
10 is shown in the process of being engaged with a fixing member 320.

As shown in FIGS. 172 and 173 , when the engaging member 310 is in a released state from the fixed member 320, the end of the first piece 311 of the engaging member 310 contacts the engaged portion 3 of the fixed member 320.
When the first piece 311 is inserted into the internal space of the recess 317, the end of the first piece 311 is elastically deformed toward the inside of the recess 317. As a result, the width dimension of the recess 317 in the vertical direction (the direction of the arrows U-D) is made smaller than the width dimension of the insertion portion 21724b in the vertical direction.

When the engaging portion 316 is located in the internal space of the engaged portion 332 (the position shown in FIG. 173(a)), the end of the first piece 311 is disposed at a position that exceeds the protruding tip of the insertion portion 21724b.
724 b to the end of the engaged portion 332 of the fixing member 320.

Therefore, when the engaging portion 316 is pushed out from the internal space of the engaged portion 332, the end portion on the first piece 311 side of the engaging member 310 can be brought into contact with the bent portion 21724b1 of the insertion portion 21724b. In this case, the tip of the insertion portion 21724b is pushed out toward the front side (the direction of the arrow F) along the inclined surface of the bent portion 21724b1. This allows the engaging member 310 to be displaced to a position where it engages with the fixing member 320.

As shown in FIG. 171 , when the engaging portion 316 is pulled out of the internal space of the engaged portion 332, as described above, the width dimension of the insertion portion 21724b in the vertical direction becomes larger than the width dimension of the recess 317 in the vertical direction of the first piece 311.
The bent portion 21724b1 is inserted inside the

Therefore, as described above, it is possible to prevent the first piece 311 of the engagement member 310 from being elastically deformed toward the inside of the recess 317. As a result, the engagement between the engagement member 20310 and the fixing member 320 may be illegally released, and the board box 100 (main control device 1) connected to the fixing member 320 may be damaged.
10) can be prevented from being replaced with an unauthorized board.

The engaging member 310 and the fixing member 320 are disposed on the inside of the rear case 300 (the bottom wall portion 301
) is removed from the rear case 21300, and the engagement between the end of the engagement member 310 and the rear case 20300 is released. Then, the first
The engagement between the two can be released by elastically deforming the end of the piece 311 and pulling the end of the engaging member 310 out of the internal space of the engaged portion 332.

Therefore, when removing the fixing member 320 from the rear case 21300, it is necessary to remove the rotating unit 21700 from the front side of the rear case 21300.
10 and the fixing member 320 are illegally released from the rear side of the rear case 21300,
This makes it possible to prevent the board box 100 (main control device 110) connected to the fixing member 320 from being replaced with an unauthorized board.

Next, referring to FIG. 174 to FIG. 176, the engaging member 2231 in the 22nd embodiment will be described.
In the above-described first embodiment, the engaging portion 316 of the engaging member 310 is engaged with the engaged portion 332 of the fixing member 320.
In the twenty-second embodiment, the fixing member 22 is inserted into a recess 22311 a formed in the engaging member 22310 .
320 is engaged with a bent portion 22332a1 formed in the connector 320. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

174 to 176(a), an engagement member 22310 in the twenty-second embodiment
The configuration of the engaging member 22310 and the fixing member 22320 will be described. Fig. 174 is a perspective front view of the engaging member 22310 and the fixing member 22320. Figs. 175(a) and 175(b) are front views of the rear case 22300. Fig. 176(a) is a perspective front view of the engaging member 22310 and the fixing member 22320 of Fig. 175(b).
A schematic cross-sectional view of the rear case 22300 taken along line CLXXVIa.
FIG. 1a illustrates a state before the engagement member 22310 and the fixing member 22320 are engaged with each other.
In FIG. 75(b), the engaging member 22310 and the fixing member 22320 are shown in an engaged state.

As shown in FIG. 174 to FIG. 176(a), a rear case 223 in the 22nd embodiment
The rear case 22300 includes a bottom wall 301 having a generally rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and outer wall 302 extending from the outer edges of the four sides of the bottom wall 301 toward the front, and is formed into a box shape with one side open by the walls 301 and 302. The rear case 22300 includes an engagement member 22310 disposed on the front side (the open side formed into the box shape (the side in the direction of the arrow F)) of the bottom wall 301, and an engagement member 22310 disposed on the bottom wall 301.
01 and is provided with a fixing member 22320 for fixing the board box 100 (main control device 110).

The engaging member 22310 has a crank-shaped outer shape when viewed from the front, and is made up of a first piece 22311 and a second piece 312 that extend in parallel to each other.
and a third piece 313 that connects the ends of the first and second pieces 311 and 312 in a direction perpendicular to the extension direction of the first piece 22311 and the second piece 312.

In addition, the first piece 22311 and the second piece 312 have a sliding groove 31 that is elongated in the extending direction.
4 are formed on the engaging member 22310, thereby allowing the engaging member 22310 to slide in the extending direction of the first piece 22311 and the second piece 312 (the direction of the arrows L and R).

The first piece 22311 has a recess 22311a recessed toward the rear side (arrow B direction) on the front side (arrow F direction) of the end opposite the side to which the third piece 313 is connected.

The recess 22311a is a bent portion 22332a1 formed in the fixing member 22320 described later.
is inserted to engage the engaging member 22310 and the fixing member 22320. As described below, when an end portion on one side (the side in the direction of the arrow R) of the first piece 22311 of the engaging member 22310 is accommodated in the internal space of the engaged portion 22332 of the fixing member 22320, the engaging member 223
It is formed at a position opposite to 22332a of 20.

In addition, the internal shape of the recess 22311a has a cross section formed into an approximately right-angled triangle, with the right angle portion set on the end side of the first piece 22311 (the side in the direction of arrow R), and the bottom surface of the recess is formed as an inclined surface that becomes deeper toward the back side (in the direction of arrow B) toward the end side of the first piece 22311.

The fixing member 22320 is composed of an interposed member 22330 that engages with the engaging member 22310 described above, and a shaft support member 340 that is fastened to the back side of the interposed member 22330.

The interposed member 22330 is formed in a box shape that is open on the front side (arrow F direction side) and mainly comprises a locking portion 331 protruding from the side surface on one side (arrow R direction side), a frame-shaped engaged portion 22332 protruding from the side surface on the other side (arrow L direction side) toward the bottom wall portion 301 of the rear case 22300 (rear side (arrow B direction side)), a circular insertion hole 333 (see Figure 39 (b)) that opens into the bottom surface of the box shape (side surface on the arrow B direction side), and a protrusion 334 protruding from the rear surface.

The engaged portion 22332 is provided with a first piece 2231 of the engaging member 22310 in an enclosed internal space.
The end of the first piece 22 on one side (the side in the direction of the arrow R) of the first piece 22 is inserted into the first piece 22.
The engaged portion 22332 is set to be slightly larger than the outer shape of the engaging member 22310. The engaged portion 22332 is formed in a frame shape.
The connector 22332 has a protrusion 22332a that protrudes in the insertion direction (the direction of arrow R).

The protrusion 22332a has a bent portion 2233 at the end of the tip, which is bent toward the front side (the direction of the arrow F).
2a1, and the bent portion 22332a1 is fitted to the recess 223 of the engaging member 22310 described above.
11a, the engaging member 22310 and the fixing member 22320 can be engaged with each other.
The recess 22311a is formed at a position opposite to the recess 22311a when the connector 223 is inserted into the connector 223.

In this case, as shown in Figure 176 (a), the engagement portion between the engagement member 22310 and the fixing member 22320 is formed on the front side of the bottom wall portion 301 of the rear case 22300, sandwiching the engagement member 22310. Therefore, the engagement portion between the engagement member 22310 and the fixing member 22320 can be separated from the first opening 301c formed in the bottom wall portion 301, so that the first
It is possible to prevent unauthorized insertion of a wire or other unauthorized member through the opening 301c, thereby preventing unauthorized release of the engagement between the engaging member 22310 and the fixing member 22320.

Furthermore, since the first piece 22311 of the engaging member 22310 can be disposed between the bottom wall portion 301 and the engaging portion of the engaging member 22310 and the fixing member 22320,
This can prevent a wire or the like that is improperly inserted through an opening such as the first opening 301c formed in the bottom wall portion 301 from linearly reaching the engagement portion between the engaging member 22310 and the fixing member 22320. As a result, it can prevent an unauthorized member (a wire or the like) from being inserted through an opening in the bottom wall portion 301 and improperly releasing the engagement between the engaging member 22310 and the fixing member 22320.

In this embodiment, the protrusion 22332a is provided to protrude in the direction in which the engaging member 22310 is inserted into the internal space of the engaged portion 22332.
20 is set on the front side of the fixing member 22320.
When an unauthorized object such as a wire or the like is inserted through the first opening 301c of the bottom wall 301, the insertion direction of the unauthorized object that reaches the engagement portion between the engagement member 22310 and the fixing member 22320 is controlled by the bottom wall 301.
301c of the bottom wall 301. This makes it possible to make it difficult for a force to be transmitted from the tip of an unauthorized member in a direction to release the engagement between the engaging member 22310 and the fixed member 22320. As a result, it is possible to prevent an unauthorized member from being inserted through the first opening 301c of the bottom wall 301 and unauthorized release of the engagement between the engaging member 22310 and the fixed member 22320.

Next, an engaging member 23310 and a fixing member 23320 in the 23rd embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 176(b). In the 22nd embodiment, a protrusion 22332a that engages the engaging member 22310 in the insertion direction of the engaging member 22310 into the engaged portion 22332 is provided.
A protrusion 23332a is provided to protrude in the direction opposite to the insertion direction of the connector 332. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Fig. 176(b) is a cross-sectional view of a rear case 23300 in the 23rd embodiment. The cross-sectional view of Fig. 176(b) corresponds to the cross-sectional view of Fig. 176(a). As described above, the 23rd embodiment is similar to the 22nd embodiment in that the engagement member 22310 and the fixing member 223 are connected to each other.
20 only differs in the engagement position, and other than the engagement portion between the engagement member 23310 and the fixing member 23320, the twenty-second embodiment is the same as the twenty-second embodiment, and therefore description thereof will be omitted.

The rear case 22300 in the twenty-third embodiment has a bottom wall portion 233 that is generally rectangular when viewed from the front.
The box-shaped structure has a bottom wall 23301 and an outer wall 302 extending from the outer edges of the four sides of the bottom wall 23301 toward the front, and is formed into a box shape with one side (front side) open by the walls 23301 and 302. The bottom wall 301 has a rectangular opening 301a (see FIG. 5) in the center when viewed from the front, and the third pattern display device 81 (see FIG. 2) arranged on the back side of the bottom wall 301 can be seen through the opening 301a.

In the twenty-third embodiment, the rear case 23300 has a front side (
The rear case 23300 mainly comprises an engaging member 23310 arranged on the open side (arrow F direction side) formed in a box shape, and a fixing member 23320 arranged on the rear side (arrow B direction side) of the rear case 23300 and fixing the board box 100 (main control unit 110).

As shown in FIG. 176(b), in the twenty-third embodiment, the engaged portion 2333 is
The protruding direction of the protrusion 23332a protruding from the 2332b is the same as that of the protrusion 22332a of the 22nd embodiment (
176(a)) (the direction of the arrow L), and a bent portion 23332a1 is formed at the protruding tip of the protrusion 23332a, which is bent toward the rear side (the direction of the arrow B).

The engaging member 23310 has a bent portion 23332a1 at a position opposite the bent portion 23332a1.
As a result, a rectangular opening 23310b that is larger than the outer shape of the engagement member 23 is formed.
When the engaging portion 23332 of the fixing member 23320 is inserted into the internal space of the engaging portion 23332 of the fixing member 23320, the opening 2
The bent portion 23332a1 is inserted into the inside of 3310b, and the engaging member 23310 and the fixing member 23320 are engaged with each other.

Further, in the bottom wall 23301 of the rear case 23300 in the twenty-third embodiment, a third opening 23301e is formed at a position facing the fixing member 23320. This third opening 23301e allows an operator to release the engagement between the engagement member 23310 and the fixing member 23320 from the rear side of the bottom wall 23301. As a result, the rear case 23300
This makes it possible to easily remove the fixing member 23320.

Next, referring to FIG. 177 and FIG. 178, a rear case 243 according to the twenty-fourth embodiment will be described.
In the eighteenth embodiment, the fixing member 18320 is fixed to the bottom wall portion 1830.
In the above description, the engagement between the fixing member 18320 and the engaging member 18310 is released when removing the fixing member 24320 from the bottom wall portion 24301. However, in the 24th embodiment, when removing the fixing member 24320 from the bottom wall portion 24301, the portion of the engaging member 24310 inserted into the fixing member 24320 is cut.
In addition, the same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are given the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Fig. 177(a) is a front view of the rear case 24300 in the twenty-fourth embodiment, and Fig. 177(b) is a cross-sectional view of the rear case 24300 taken along line CLXXVIIb-CLXXVIIb in Fig. 177(a).
A cross-sectional view of the rear case 24300 taken along line LXXVIII.

As shown in FIG. 177 and FIG. 178, a rear case 24300 in the twenty-fourth embodiment
The rear case 24300 includes a bottom wall portion 24301 having a generally rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and outer wall portions 302 extending from the outer edges of the four sides of the bottom wall portion 24301 toward the front, and is formed into a box shape with one side (front side) open by the walls 24301 and 302.
The engagement member 2 is disposed on the front side of the 4301 (the open side formed in a box shape (the side in the direction of the arrow F)).
4310 and the board box 100 (main control device 1
and a fixing member 24320 for fixing the fixing member 24320 (FIG. 10).

The bottom wall portion 24301 has an opening 301a formed in a rectangular shape in a front view at its center, and the third pattern display device 81 (FIG. 2) disposed on the back surface of the bottom wall portion 24301 can be inserted through the opening 301a.
In addition, the bottom wall portion 24301 has a first opening 24301c that opens at a position facing the fixed member 24320, and an operating element 24 (described later) that is located on the left side (the arrow L direction side) of the first opening 24301c and opens in the front-rear direction (the arrow F-B direction) and faces inward.
and an opening (not shown) into which the insertion portion 24362 of 360 is inserted.

The engaging member 24310 has a second piece 24312 formed in a T-shape when viewed from the front, and the second piece 24312
The second piece 24312 has a through hole 24311 that penetrates in the front-rear direction at the connecting portion between the two perpendicular extending portions.
312d, and the distances from the through holes 24312d to the outside of the extended portion of the second piece 24312 are set to be approximately the same.

The through hole 24312d is a portion into which an insertion portion 24362 of an operator 24360 described later is inserted, and is formed in a circular shape that is substantially the same as the outer shape of the insertion portion 24362. Thereby, when the operator 24360 is rotated, the engagement member 24310 is rotationally displaced around the through hole 24312d.

The first piece 24311 is formed in an arc shape centered on the through hole 24312d, and the second piece 2
4312.
Each first piece 24311 has an engagement portion 24316 that protrudes on both radial sides centered on the axis of the through hole 24312d at the protruding tip, and a recess 24317 that is recessed from the protruding tip surface toward the connection side with the second piece 24312.

The engagement portion 24316 is a portion that is engaged with a fixing member 24320 described later, and
317, the protruding tip portion of the first piece 24311 (the portion where the engaging portion 24316 is formed) can be elastically deformed to engage with the engaged portion 24332 formed on the fixing member 24320. The shapes of the engaging portion 24316 and the recessed portion 24317 will be described in detail later.

The operation element 24360 is an operation member that transmits an operation from the rear side (arrow B direction side) of the bottom wall portion 24301 to the engagement member 24310 disposed on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the bottom wall portion 24301, and includes a cylindrical operation portion 24361 and an insertion portion 24362 that protrudes coaxially with the operation portion 24361. The operation portion 24361 is formed on the bottom wall portion 24301, and has an outer diameter set to a dimension larger than an opening through which the insertion portion 24362 is inserted. This makes it possible to prevent the entire operation element 24360 from being displaced toward the front side of the bottom wall portion 24301.

As described above, the insertion portion 24362 is a portion that is inserted into the through hole 24312d of the engagement member 24310, and thereby, the rotational force input from the operation portion 24361 is transmitted to the engagement member 24
310.

The fixing member 24320 is composed of an interposed member 24330 that engages with the engaging member 24310 described above, and a shaft support member 340 that is disposed on the back side of the interposed member 24330.

The interposing member 24330 is formed in a box shape that is open on the front side (the side in the direction of the arrow F).
The intermediate member 24330 includes a housing portion 24335 that is protruded from the front and is formed in a box shape with an open lower side (the side in the direction of the arrow D).
This is a portion into which the engaging portion of 4310 (the tip portion of first piece 24311) is inserted, and the lower open portion is disposed on the displacement trajectory of first piece 24311 of engaging member 24310 described above. This allows the engaging member 24310 to be rotated and the end portion of the first piece 24311 of engaging member 24310 to be accommodated in the internal space of accommodation portion 24335.

The accommodating portion 24335 is formed so that its internal space is larger than one of the engaging portions of the engaging member 24310. This allows the cut portion of the engaging member 24310 to be accommodated in the internal space of the accommodating portion 24335 when the engaging member 24310 is cut, as described below.
The length of the engagement portion of the housing 24 is set to approximately three times the length of the engagement portion of the housing 24 (the tip portion of the first piece 24311).
At least three or more engaging members 24310 can be accommodated in the internal space of 335 .

178, the accommodation portion 24335 is opened on the lower side, and a step portion 24335a protrudes in a stepped shape from the opening portion, and the step portion 24335a engages with the engagement portion 24316 of the engagement member 24310 accommodated inside the accommodation portion 24335. As a result, when the engagement member 24310 is rotated, the tip portion of the first piece 24311 can be inserted inside the accommodation portion 24335, and the engagement member 24310 and the fixing member 24320 can be engaged with each other.

In this case, the recess depth SH3 of the recess 24317 (see FIG. 178) is
35 to the lower end of the accommodation portion 24335.
The recess 24317 formed in the first piece 24311 is accommodated inside the accommodation portion 24335. As a result, the end of the first piece 24311 is elastically deformed to connect the engagement member 24310 and the fixing member 24311 to each other.
320 can be prevented from being disengaged.

Therefore, in the twenty-fourth embodiment, the first piece 24311 inserted into the inside of the accommodation portion 24335
The first piece 24311 protruding from the housing portion 24335 of the bottom wall portion 24301 is cut off.
The fixing member 24320 can be removed from the fixing member 24320.

In this case, the distance dimension SH5 (see FIG. 178) from the upper inner edge of the storage section 24335 to the tip end of the first piece 24311 is set to be greater than the above-mentioned distance dimension SH4. This allows the cut portion of the first piece 24311 to be moved above the storage section 24335, and allows another first piece 24311 to be inserted from the open side (arrow F direction side) of the storage section 24335 to engage with the step portion 24335a.

Therefore, the number of times the fixing member 24320 has been detached from the bottom wall portion 24301 is counted by the engagement member 24
This can be determined based on the number of remaining first pieces 24311 of the fixing member 2432 or the number of cut first pieces 24311 accommodated in the accommodation portion 24335.
When the fixing member 24320 is illegally removed from the bottom wall portion 24301 and the board box 100 (main control device 110) connected to the fixing member 24320 is replaced with an illegal board, the engaging member 24
The number of remaining first pieces 24311 of 310 or the number of cut first pieces 24311 stored in the storage portion 24335 can enable an operator to recognize that the fixing member 24320 has been fraudulently removed.

As described above, the second piece 24312 of the engaging member 24310 is formed in a T-shape when viewed from the front, and the engaging member 24310 can be rotated by utilizing the area on the side where the first piece 24311 is not formed (the upper side of the T) to insert the first piece 24311 into the fixing member 24320. When the first piece 24311 is cut, the engaging member 24310 can be rotated by utilizing the cut area of the first piece 24311, and the next (other) first piece 24311 can be inserted into the fixing member 24320. This allows the receiving portion 2433 of the first piece 24311 to be inserted into the fixing member 24320.
Therefore, the worker can determine the order in which the first uncut
By visually checking the position of piece 24311, it is possible to determine whether fixing member 24320 has been tampered with or not, making it less likely that the worker will overlook signs of tampering than if the worker were to count the number of first pieces 24311.

Next, a game board 25013 in the 25th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 179. In the first embodiment, the decorative member 154 of the general winning port unit 150 is attached to the main body 1.
In the above embodiment, the decorative member 154 is adhered to the front side of the base plate 60. However, in the twenty-fifth embodiment, the decorative member 154 is adhered to the front side of the base plate 60. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

179(a) and 179(b) are cross-sectional views of a game board 25013 according to the 25th embodiment. Note that Fig. 179(a) and Fig. 179(b) correspond to the cross-sectional view of Fig. 14.
In addition, Figure 179 (b) shows the general winning port unit 25150 disassembled from the base plate 60.

In addition, the game board 25013 in the 25th embodiment is the same as the game board 13 in the first embodiment.
Similarly, the game board 25013 includes a base plate 60 formed from a plate member having a generally rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and a center frame 86 disposed in an opening portion formed in the base plate 60 .
The game board 25013 is provided with a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, and is provided with a number of nails (not shown) for guiding balls, a windmill, rails 76, 77, a general winning hole 63, a first winning hole 64, a second winning hole 66, a third winning hole 68, a fourth winning hole 69, a fifth winning hole 61, a sixth winning hole 62, a sixth winning hole 63, a sixth winning hole 64, a sixth winning hole 65, a sixth winning hole 66, a sixth winning hole 67, a sixth winning hole 68, a sixth winning hole 69 ...
4, the second winning opening 640, the variable winning device 65, the first through gate 66, the variable display unit 80, etc. (see FIG. 2) are assembled, and the peripheral portion is attached to the back side of the inner frame 4 (see FIG. 1).
A general prize winning port unit 25150 is disposed in the opening of the prize winning port 25150 (see FIG. 1).

As shown in FIG. 179, the general winning port unit 25150 disposed on the front side of the base plate 60 of the game board 25013 in the 25th embodiment includes a main body portion 151 disposed along the front side of the base plate 60, a first standing portion 152 erected at an end of the main body portion 151, and a second standing portion 152 erected from the front side of the main body portion 151 and having one end connected to the first standing portion 152.
53, a decorative member 25154 arranged on the rear side of the main body 151, and a plurality of (three in this embodiment) general winning ports 63 formed in the main body 151.

The decorative member 25154 is formed in a plate shape from a light-transmitting material, and is decorated with a pattern or letters (pictures) that are connected to the decorative member 60c disposed on the front side of the base plate 60.
The shape of the outer edge of the decorative member 25154 is formed to be slightly smaller than the shape of the inner edge of the recess 151 b formed in the main body portion 151 .

Additionally, the decorative member 25154 includes an adhesive tape 25154a at the end of the rear surface of the decorative member 25154, which is attached to the front surface of the base plate 60 (decorative member 60c). This allows the decorative member 25154 to be attached to the base plate 60. Therefore, when placing the decorative member 25154 on the base plate 60, the worker can attach the decorative member 25154 to the front surface of the base plate 60 while visually checking the decoration of the decorative member 60c on the base plate 60. Thus,
This makes it easier to align the decoration positions of the decorative member 25154 and the decorative member 60c of the base plate 60. As a result, it is possible to prevent the decoration positions of the decorative member 25154 and the decorative member 60c of the base plate 60 from being misaligned, making it easier for the player to visually recognize the decorative member 25154 and the decorative member 60c of the base plate 60 as a single decoration.

Furthermore, since the decorative member 25154 is directly attached to the front surface of the base plate 60 (decorative member 60c), the arrangement of the decorative member 25154 and the decorative member 60c in the front-rear direction (the direction of the arrows F-B) can be closer than when the decoration is applied to the front side of the main body 151. As a result, when the player views the decorative member 25154 from an oblique angle, the arrangement of the decorative members 25154, 6
As a result, the player can feel the decoration member 25
154 and the decorative member 60c of the base plate 60 can be easily recognized by the player as a single decoration.

In the 25th embodiment, the recess dimension X1 of the recess 151b of the main body 151 is set smaller than the width dimension X2 of the decorative member 25154 and the adhesive tape 25154a in the front-rear direction (arrow F-B direction). As a result, when the main body 151 is disposed from the front side (arrow F direction) of the decorative member 25154, the decorative member 25154 is inserted into the recess 151b.
This can prevent the front of the decorative member 25154 from abutting against the recessed bottom surface 151b2.

Therefore, the rear surface portion 151d forming the rear surface of the main body portion 151 excluding the recessed portion 151b can be abutted against the front surface of the base plate 60, and it is possible to prevent a gap from being formed between the rear surface portion 151d and the base plate 60. As a result, it is possible to prevent dust or the like from entering between the rear surface portion 151d and the base plate 60, making it difficult to view the decoration of the decorative member 60c of the base plate 60.

Next, a game board 26013 in the 26th embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 180. In the above-mentioned first embodiment, a linear inclined surface 151a is formed at the end of the main body 151 of the general winning port unit 150. In the 26th embodiment,
An inclined surface 26151a formed at an end of 151 is formed to have an arcuate cross section that bulges outward. Note that the same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are given the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

180(a) and 180(b) are cross-sectional views of a game board 26013 according to the 26th embodiment. Note that Fig. 180(a) and Fig. 180(b) correspond to the cross-sectional view of Fig. 14.
Also, in FIG. 180(a), the player places the game board 26013 at a higher position than usual (for example,
In Figure 180 (b), the line of sight when viewed from a viewpoint at the same height as the upper end of the pachinko machine 10 (see Figure 1) in the direction of gravity is illustrated by a dotted line, and in Figure 180 (c), the line of sight when viewed from a normal position (for example, a viewpoint at the same height as approximately the middle position of the game board 26013 in the direction of gravity) is illustrated by a dotted line.

In addition, the game board 26013 in the 26th embodiment is the same as the game board 13 in the first embodiment.
Similarly, the game board 26013 includes a base plate 60 formed of a plate member having a generally rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and a center frame 86 (see FIG. 2) disposed in an opening portion formed in the base plate 60. The game board 26013 also includes a base plate 60 machined into a generally square shape when viewed from the front.
In addition to the numerous nails (not shown) for guiding the balls and the windmill, rails 76, 77, the general winning hole 63,
It is configured by assembling the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, the variable winning device 65, the first through gate 66, the variable display unit 80, etc. (see FIG. 2), and its peripheral portion is attached to the back side of the inner frame 4 (see FIG. 1). Furthermore, in the 26th embodiment, a general winning opening unit 26150 is disposed at the opening portion of the second opening 60b (see FIG. 11) of the base 60.

As shown in Figure 180, the general winning port unit 26150 arranged on the front side of the base plate 60 of the game board 26013 in the 26th embodiment comprises a plate-shaped main body 26151 that conforms to the front side of the base plate 60, and a decorative member 154 arranged on the back side of the main body 26151.

The main body 26151 is made of a transparent resin material and is provided with a decorative member 15 on the rear side.
The decoration of the main body 261 such as patterns and letters (pictures) can be seen by the player.
The end of the main body 26151 is inclined toward the rear side when viewed from the front, and the inclined surface 26151a bulges out in an arc-shaped cross section. The recess 151 is recessed from the rear side of the main body 26151 toward the front side.
51b.

The inclination angle θ1 of the imaginary line IL1 connecting the connection point with the flat surface on the front side of the main body 26151 and the end portion on the rear side of the main body 26151 with respect to the front surface of the base plate 60 is set to be smaller than 45 degrees. As a result, the light traveling in the horizontal direction through the main body 26151 is more easily reflected from the inclined surface 26151a to the main body 26151 than when the inclination angle θ1 is set to be larger than 45 degrees.
The angle of incidence when the light enters the outside of the main body 26151 is increased. Therefore, when the light is emitted to the outside of the main body 26151, the traveling direction of the light can be easily bent upward. Therefore, when the player enters the general winning port unit 2615 from a position higher than the normal position with respect to the game board 26013,
When the player visually recognizes the number 0, the connecting portion of the decorative members 154 and 60c can be easily visually recognized from the front side. As a result, the difference in the front-rear position of the connecting portion of the decorative members 154 and 60c can be made difficult for the player to recognize.
This, together with the decorative member 60c of the base plate 60, can be easily recognized as a single decoration.
In this embodiment, the angle θ1 is set to 40 degrees.

In addition, as described above, the inclined surface 26151a is formed in a cross-sectional arc shape that bulges outward, so that the inclined surface 26151a becomes smaller toward the center of the main body 26151 (the lower side in FIG. 180(a)).
180(a) )。 Therefore, the light traveling in the horizontal direction in the main body 26151 is incident on the main body 26151 from the inclined surface 26151a toward the center of the main body 26151 (the lower side of FIG. 180(a) ) at an angle of incidence larger than the ...
The angle of incidence when entering the outside of 51 is increased.

Therefore, when a player views the decoration below the horizontal line HR1 (see Figure 180 (a)) passing through the midpoint between the connection point with the front plane of the main body 26151 and the end on the rear side through the inclined surface 26151a, the angle of the player's line of sight passing through inside the main body 26151 can be made to approach a direction perpendicular to the front of the base plate 60 (horizontal direction).

Furthermore, the decorative member 154 disposed inside the recess 151b has an end position that is aligned with a horizontal line H
The decoration is set below the horizontal line HR1 (see FIG. 180(a)) and on the rear side of the inclined surface 26151a. As described above, when a player views the decoration below the horizontal line HR1 (see FIG. 180(a)) through the inclined surface 26151a, the angle of the player's line of sight passing through the main body 26151 can be easily brought closer to a direction perpendicular to the front of the base plate 60 (horizontal direction).

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 180(a), even when the player views the general winning port unit 26150 and the base plate 60 from a position higher than usual on the game board 26013, the inclined surface 26
151a, the decoration of the decorative member 60c of the base plate 60 and the general winning port unit 2615
The decoration member 154 of the general winning port unit 26150 and the decoration member 60c of the base plate 60 can be easily recognized by the player in combination as one decoration.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 180(b), when a player views the general winning port unit 26150 and the base plate 60 from a normal height of the game board 26013, the bulging shape of the inclined surface 26151a makes the angle of incidence of light traveling horizontally through the main body 26151 when it enters the outside of the main body 26151 from the inclined surface 26151a approximate a right angle, making it difficult to refract the light emitted to the outside of the main body 26151. This prevents the direction of the player's line of sight from bending when passing through the inclined surface 26151a, and the decorative member 15 of the general winning port unit 26150
This makes it difficult for a player to recognize the positional misalignment in the front-rear direction between the decorative member 154 of the general winning port unit 26150 and the decorative member 60c of the base plate 60. As a result, it is easy to visually recognize the decorative member 154 of the general winning port unit 26150 and the decorative member 60c of the base plate 60 as a single decoration.

Next, a game board 27013 in the 27th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 181. In the above-mentioned first embodiment, a linear inclined surface 151a is formed at the end of the main body 151 of the general winning port unit 150. In the 27th embodiment,
An inclined surface 27151a formed at an end of 6151 is formed to have a cross-sectional arc shape recessed inwardly of the main body portion 27151. Note that the same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are given the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Figures 181(a) and 181(b) are cross-sectional views of a game board 27013 according to the 27th embodiment. Note that Figures 181(a) and 181(b) correspond to the cross-sectional view of Figure 14.
Also, in FIG. 181(a), the player places the game board 27013 at a higher position than usual (for example,
The line of sight when viewed from a viewpoint at the same height as the upper end of the pachinko machine 10 (see Figure 1) in the direction of gravity is illustrated by a dotted line, and in Figure 181 (b) the line of sight when the player views the game board 27013 from a normal position (for example, a viewpoint at the same height as approximately the middle position of the game board 27013 in the direction of gravity) is illustrated by a dotted line.

In addition, the game board 27013 in the 27th embodiment is the same as the game board 13 in the first embodiment.
Similarly, the game board 27013 includes a base plate 60 formed of a plate member having a generally rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and a center frame 86 (see FIG. 2) disposed in an opening formed in the base plate 60. The game board 27013 also includes a base plate 60 machined into a generally square shape when viewed from the front.
In addition to the numerous nails (not shown) for guiding the balls and the windmill, rails 76, 77, the general winning hole 63,
It is configured by assembling the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, the variable winning device 65, the first through gate 66, the variable display unit 80, etc. (see FIG. 2), and its peripheral portion is attached to the back side of the inner frame 4 (see FIG. 1). Furthermore, in the 27th embodiment, a general winning opening unit 27150 is disposed at the opening portion of the second opening 60b (see FIG. 11) of the base 60.

As shown in Figure 181, the general winning port unit 27150 arranged on the front side of the base plate 60 of the game board 27013 in the 27th embodiment comprises a plate-shaped main body 27151 that conforms to the front side of the base plate 60, and a decorative member 154 arranged on the back side of the main body 27151.

The main body 27151 is made of a transparent resin material and is provided with a decorative member 15 on the rear side.
The decoration of the main body 271 such as patterns and letters (pictures) can be seen by the player.
51 is formed mainly by an inclined surface 27151a having an arc-shaped cross section whose end when viewed from the front is inclined toward the rear side and which is recessed toward the inside of the main body portion 27151, and a recess 151b recessed from the rear side of the main body portion 27151 toward the front side.

The inclination angle θ2 of the imaginary line IL2 connecting the connection point with the flat surface on the front side of the main body 27151 and the end portion on the rear side of the main body 27151 with respect to the front surface of the base plate 60 is set to be greater than 45 degrees. This makes it possible to reduce the outward protruding distance of the inclined surface 2751a and to prevent the outer shape of the main body 27151 from becoming large.

As described above, the inclined surface 27151a is formed in a circular arc shape in cross section and recessed into the inside of the main body 27151, so that the player can touch each of the decorative members 60c through the inclined surface 27151a.
When the decoration members 60c, 154 are visually recognized, the concave shape of the main body 27151 can expand the area in which the decoration of each of the decoration members 60c, 154 can be visually recognized through the inclined surface 27151a.
The decorative members 60c and 154 are recessed toward the inside of the inclined surface 2.
The light incident on the inclined surface 27151a can be refracted and focused toward the player's viewpoint. As a result, the patterns and characters (pictures) visible through the inclined surface 27151a can be made smaller, making it difficult for the player to understand the connection between the decorative members 60c, 154. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the misalignment of the decorative members 60c, 154, and it is possible to prevent the player's interest from being lost.

Furthermore, the decorative member 154 disposed inside the recess 151b has an end position that is aligned with a horizontal line H
It is set higher than R2 and on the rear side of the inclined surface 27151a.

As a result, as shown in FIG. 181(a), when a player views the general winning opening unit 27150 and the base plate 60 from a position higher than normal on the game board 26013, the angle of incidence of light traveling horizontally through the main body 26151 on the front side of the connecting portion between the decorative member 60c and the decorative member 154 is increased when it enters the outside of the main body 26151 from the inclined surface 26151a. Therefore, since light traveling horizontally through the main body 27151 on the front side of the connecting portion with the decorative member 154 is more likely to be refracted toward the player's viewpoint, when a player views the general winning opening unit 27150 from a position higher than normal relative to the game board 27013, it is easier to view the connecting portion of the decorative members 154, 60c from the front side. As a result, the decorative member 15
Since the difference in the front-rear position of the connecting portion of the decorative member 154 of the general winning port unit 27150 and the decorative member 6 of the base plate 60 can be made difficult to be recognized by the player,
When combined with 0c, it can be made easier to see as a decoration for 1.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 181(b), when a player views the general winning port unit 27150 and base plate 60 from a normal height of the game board 27013, the concave shape of the inclined surface 27151a makes the angle of incidence of light traveling horizontally through the main body 27151 on the front side of the connection portion with the decorative member 154 when it enters the outside of the main body 27151 from the inclined surface 27151a approximate a right angle, making it difficult for light emitted to the outside of the main body 27151 to be refracted.
By suppressing bending of the direction of the player's line of sight when passing through the inclined surface 27151a, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the misalignment in the front-rear direction between the decorative member 154 of the general winning port unit 27150 and the decorative member 60c of the base plate 60. As a result, it is possible to easily visually recognize the decorative member 154 of the general winning port unit 27150 and the decorative member 60c of the base plate 60 as a single decoration.

Next, a game board 28013 in the 28th embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 182(a). In the above-mentioned first embodiment, the inner surface of the end of the recess 151b recessed in the main body 151 of the general winning port unit 150 is parallel to the plate thickness direction of the main body 151.
The inward inclination is toward the b2 side. Note that the same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are given the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 182(a) is a cross-sectional view of a game board 28013 in the twenty-eighth embodiment.
Fig. 182(a) corresponds to the cross-sectional view of Fig. 14. Also, in Fig. 182(a), the line of sight when the player views the game board 28013 from a normal position (for example, a viewpoint at the same height as the approximately center position of the game board 28013 in the gravity direction) is illustrated by a two-dot chain line.

In addition, the game board 28013 in the 28th embodiment is the same as the game board 13 in the first embodiment.
Similarly, the game board 28013 includes a base plate 60 formed of a plate member having a generally rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and a center frame 86 (see FIG. 2) disposed in an opening formed in the base plate 60. The game board 28013 also includes a base plate 60 machined into a generally square shape when viewed from the front.
In addition to the numerous nails (not shown) for guiding the balls and the windmill, rails 76, 77, the general winning hole 63,
It is configured by assembling the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, the variable winning device 65, the first through gate 66, the variable display unit 80, etc. (see FIG. 2), and its peripheral portion is attached to the back side of the inner frame 4 (see FIG. 1). Furthermore, in the 28th embodiment, a general winning opening unit 28150 is disposed at the opening portion of the second opening 60b (see FIG. 11) of the base 60.

As shown in FIG. 182(a), the base plate 6 of the game board 28013 in the 28th embodiment
The general winning port unit 28150 disposed on the front side of the base plate 60 comprises a plate-shaped main body 28151 that fits along the front side of the base plate 60 , and a decorative member 154 disposed on the back side of the main body 28151 .

The main body 28151 is made of a transparent resin material and is provided with a decorative member 15 on the rear side.
The decoration of the number 4, such as patterns and letters (pictures), can be seen by the player.
The connector 51 mainly comprises an inclined surface 151a whose end is inclined toward the rear side, and a recess 28151b recessed from the rear side of the main body 28151 toward the front side.

As described above, the inner surface 28151b3 of the recess 28151b is inclined from the recessed bottom surface 151b2 side toward the recessed opening side (from the arrow F direction toward the arrow B direction) outwardly.
In this case, the inclination angle θ3 ( FIG. 182 ) of the inner side surface 28151b3 in the cross section of the recess 28151b with respect to the front surface of the base plate 60 is
(a) is the inclination angle θ4 (
182(a)).

As a result, as shown in FIG. 182(a), the player can move the inclined surface 2815 of the main body 28151.
When the decorative member 60c is viewed through the main body 28151, the decorative position of the virtual image that is bent as it passes through the main body 28151 and viewed by the player is different from the decorative position of the decorative member 60c that is not viewed through the main body 28151.
That is, the decorative member 60 that is refracted by the inclined surface 28151a of the main body 28151 and the inner surface 28151b3 of the recess and is visually recognized can be brought closer to the actual decorative position.
The position of c can be positioned on an extension of the line of sight of the player. As a result, when the player is allowed to view the decorative member 60c through the main body 28151, the positional deviation of the decoration caused by the refraction of light is suppressed, and the loss of interest of the player can be suppressed.

Next, a game board 29013 according to the twenty-ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 182(b). In the twenty-eighth embodiment, the inner surface 2915 in the cross section of the recess 29151b is
In the above description, the inclination angle θ3 of the inclined surface 151a relative to the front surface of the base plate 60 is set smaller than the inclination angle θ4 of the inclined surface 151a relative to the base plate 60, but in the twenty-ninth embodiment, the inclination angle θ5 of the inner side surface 29151b3 in the cross section of the recess 29151b relative to the front surface of the base plate 60 is set larger than the inclination angle θ6 of the inclined surface 151a relative to the base plate 60. Note that the same parts as those in the above embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 182(b) is a cross-sectional view of a game board 29013 in the twenty-ninth embodiment.
Fig. 182(b) corresponds to the cross-sectional view of Fig. 14. Also, in Fig. 182(b), the line of sight when the player views the game board 29013 from a normal position (for example, a viewpoint at the same height as the approximately center position of the game board 29013 in the gravity direction) is illustrated by a two-dot chain line.

In addition, the game board 29013 in the 29th embodiment is the same as the game board 13 in the first embodiment.
Similarly, the game board 29013 includes a base plate 60 formed of a plate member having a generally rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and a center frame 86 (see FIG. 2) disposed in an opening formed in the base plate 60. The game board 29013 also includes a base plate 60 machined into a generally square shape when viewed from the front.
In addition to the numerous nails (not shown) for guiding the balls and the windmill, rails 76, 77, the general winning hole 63,
It is configured by assembling the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, the variable winning device 65, the first through gate 66, the variable display unit 80, etc. (see FIG. 2), and its peripheral portion is attached to the back side of the inner frame 4 (see FIG. 1). Furthermore, in the twenty-ninth embodiment, a general winning opening unit 29150 is disposed at the opening portion of the second opening 60b (see FIG. 11) of the base 60.

As shown in FIG. 182(b), the base plate 6 of the game board 29013 in the 29th embodiment
The general winning port unit 29150 disposed on the front side of the base plate 60 comprises a plate-shaped main body 29151 that fits along the front side of the base plate 60 , and a decorative member 154 disposed on the back side of the main body 29151 .

The main body 29151 is made of a transparent resin material and is provided with a decorative member 15 on the rear side.
The decoration of the main body 291 such as patterns and letters (pictures) can be seen by the player.
The connector 51 mainly comprises an inclined surface 151a whose end is inclined toward the rear side, and a recess 29151b recessed from the rear side of the main body 29151 toward the front side.

As described above, the inner surface 29151b3 of the recess 29151b is inclined from the recessed bottom surface 151b2 side toward the recessed opening side (from the arrow F direction toward the arrow B direction) outwardly.
In this case, the inclination angle θ5 ( FIG. 182 ) of the inner side surface 29151b3 in the cross section of the recess 29151b with respect to the front surface of the base plate 60 is
(b) is the inclination angle θ6 (
182(b)).

As a result, as shown in FIG. 182(b), the player can move the inclined surface 151a of the main body 29151.
When the decorative member 60c is viewed through the inclined surface 151a, the light emitted from the decorative member 60c and the decorative member 154 to the viewpoint of the player through the inclined surface 151a is reflected by the inner surface 2915 of the recess 29151b.
Therefore, when light is incident on the inner surface 29151b3 of the recess 29151b from the decorative member 60c and the decorative member 154, the refraction of the light can be suppressed.
When light is incident on the decorative member 60c and the decorative member 154, the light is refracted.
This prevents the connecting portion from being viewed from above in the direction of gravity, making it easier for the player to view decorative member 60c and decorative member 154 as a single decoration.

Furthermore, since a predetermined gap is provided between the inner surface 29151b3 of the recess 29151b and the end of the decorative member 154, this gap can absorb dimensional errors that occur when the decorative member 154 is formed.

Next, referring to FIG. 183(a), the general winning port unit 30 in the 30th embodiment
In the twenty-eighth embodiment, the inner surface 2815 of the recess 28151b is
In the above description, the recess 301 is formed at an incline.
An inner surface 30151b3 of the recess 28151b bulges inwardly of the recess 28151b and is curved to have an arc-like cross section. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In addition, the game board 30013 in the 30th embodiment is the same as the game board 13 in the first embodiment.
Similarly, the game board 30013 includes a base plate 60 formed of a plate member having a generally rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and a center frame 86 (see FIG. 2) disposed in an opening formed in the base plate 60. The game board 30013 also includes a base plate 60 machined into a generally square shape when viewed from the front.
In addition to the numerous nails (not shown) for guiding the balls and the windmill, rails 76, 77, the general winning hole 63,
It is configured by assembling the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, the variable winning device 65, the first through gate 66, the variable display unit 80, etc. (see FIG. 2), and its peripheral portion is attached to the back side of the inner frame 4 (see FIG. 1). Furthermore, in the 30th embodiment, a general winning opening unit 30150 is disposed at the opening portion of the second opening 60b (see FIG. 11) of the base 60.

Fig. 183(a) is a cross-sectional view of the general winning port unit 30150 in the 30th embodiment. Fig. 183(a) corresponds to the cross-sectional view of Fig. 14. Also, in Fig. 183(a), the line of sight when the player views the game board 30013 from a normal position (for example, a viewpoint at the same height as the approximately middle position of the game board 30013 in the gravity direction) is illustrated by a two-dot chain line.

As shown in FIG. 183(a), the base plate 6 of the game board 30013 in the 30th embodiment
The general winning port unit 30150 disposed on the front side of the base plate 60 comprises a plate-shaped main body 30151 that fits along the front side of the base plate 60 , and a decorative member 154 disposed on the rear side of the main body 30151 .

The main body 30151 is made of a transparent resin material and is provided with a decorative member 15 on the rear side.
The decoration of the main body 301 such as patterns and letters (pictures) can be seen by the player.
The connector 51 mainly comprises an inclined surface 151a whose end is inclined toward the rear side, and a recess 30151b recessed from the rear side of the main body 30151 toward the front side.

The inner surface 30151b3 of the recess 30151b is formed to slope outwardly from the recess bottom surface 151b2 side toward the recess opening side (from the direction of arrow F toward the direction of arrow B) toward the end side of the main body portion 30151, and bulges in an arc-shaped cross section toward the inside of the recess 30151b.
This makes it easier for the player, who is viewing the decorative member 60c through the recess 30151b, to direct his/her gaze in a direction perpendicular to the decorative surface of the decorative member 60c (horizontal direction).
When the decoration of the game board 30013 is viewed through 151b, the ends of the decorative member 154 are prevented from being seen, making it easier for the player to view the decorative members 60c and 154 as a single decoration.

Next, referring to FIG. 183(b), the general winning port unit 311 in the 31st embodiment
In the above-described first embodiment, the inclined surface 151a is formed as a linear surface in cross section, but the inclined surface 31151a in the 31st embodiment includes a plurality of recesses 31151a1. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Fig. 183(b) is a cross-sectional view of the general winning port unit 31150 in the 31st embodiment. Note that Fig. 183(b) corresponds to the cross-sectional view of Fig. 14. In addition, the game board 31013 in the 31st embodiment has the same structure as the game board 13 in the first embodiment.
The game board 3 includes a base plate 60 formed of a plate member having a generally rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and a center frame 86 (see FIG. 2) disposed in an opening formed in the base plate 60.
1013 is a base plate 60 machined into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, on which are mounted numerous nails (not shown) for guiding balls, a windmill, rails 76, 77, a general winning opening 63, a first winning opening 64, a second winning opening 640, a variable winning device 65, a first through gate 66, a variable display unit 80, etc. (see FIG. 2).
The 31st embodiment is configured by assembling a general winning port unit 31150 and a peripheral portion of the general winning port unit 31150, and the peripheral portion of the general winning port unit 31150 is attached to the back side of the inner frame 4 (see FIG. 1). Furthermore, in the 31st embodiment, a general winning port unit 31150 is disposed in the opening portion of the second opening 60b (see FIG. 11) of the base 60.

As shown in FIG. 183(b), the base plate 6 of the game board 31013 in the 31st embodiment
The general winning port unit 31150 disposed on the front side of the base plate 60 comprises a plate-shaped main body 31151 that fits along the front side of the base plate 60 , and a decorative member 154 disposed on the rear side of the main body 31151 .

The main body 31151 is made of a transparent resin material and is provided with a decorative member 15 on the rear side.
The decoration of the main body 311 such as patterns and letters (pictures) can be seen by the player.
The main body 31151 mainly comprises an inclined surface 31151a whose end is inclined toward the rear side, and a recess 151b recessed from the rear side of the main body 31151 toward the front side.

The inclined surface 31151a has a plurality of recesses 311 formed in a direction perpendicular to the inclination direction.
The recesses 31151a1 are arranged in parallel in the inclination direction of the inclined surface 31151a and extend along the end of the main body 31151 in a front view.
Therefore, the player can view the decoration through the inclined surface 31151a in a blurred state.

Here, the end of the decorative member 154 disposed on the main body 31151 is disposed on the rear side of the inclined surface 31151a in the same manner as in the first embodiment, so that the decoration of the decorative member 154 and the decorative member 60
This allows the player to view the connecting portion of the decoration of decorative member 60c in a blurred state. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the connection between the decorative members, and it is possible to make the player easily recognize the decoration of decorative member 60c and the decoration of decorative member 154 as a single decoration.

<Means for adjusting the distance between opposing portions to change the flow direction>
Next, referring to FIG. 184 to FIG. 186, the special prize winning device 32 in the 32nd embodiment will be described.
In the thirteenth embodiment, the opposing distance between the first path member 13560 and the second path member 13570 is adjusted by sandwiching the shim member SI between the first path member 13560 and the second path member 13570. In the thirty-second embodiment,
A case will be described in which the opposing distance between the first path member 32560 and the second path member 32570 is adjusted by the fastening position of the screw. Note that the same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 184 and FIG. 185, the special prize winning device 32 in the 32nd embodiment will be described.
FIG. 184 shows the configuration of the special prize winning device 32 in the 32nd embodiment.
185(a) is a front view of the special prize winning device 32550, FIG. 185(b) is a top view of the special prize winning device 32550, and FIG. 185(c) is an exploded perspective front view of the special prize winning device 32550.
This is a cross-sectional view of the special prize device 32550 taken along line CLXXXVc-CLXXXVc in Figure 185 (a).

As shown in FIG. 184 and FIG. 185, a special prize winning device 32550 in the 32nd embodiment
The optical fiber 3251 includes a first path member 32560 disposed on the front side, and a second path member 32570 disposed on the rear side of the first path member 32560.

The first path member 32560 is formed from a non-light-transmitting material.
560 is a front plate 32564 formed in a plate shape and disposed on the front side of the play area, and a first wall portion 3256 protruding from the left and right ends of the front plate 32564 to the rear side (base plate 60 side).
5 and is provided.

The front plate 32564 is a plate member that becomes the front wall of the flow path of the game balls formed between the opposing second path member 32570 described later, and is made of a non-light-transmitting material. This makes it possible to prevent the player from seeing the game balls flowing down inside the special winning device 33550. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from knowing the flow direction of the game balls inside the special winning device 33550, and to prevent the player from quitting the game.

The first wall portion 32565 is a portion that is connected (fastened) to the second path member 32570, and has a through hole 32565c that penetrates in a circular shape in the left-right direction (plate thickness direction) and a second first wall portion 32565
A plurality of one-side projections 32565d are arranged in parallel on the opposing surfaces of the first and second terminals 32565 and project in a triangular cross section.
It mainly comprises an upright portion 32565e which is uprightly provided on the opposing surface side of the second wall portion 32566 from both the upper and lower ends of the first wall portion 32565.

The through holes 32565c are through holes through which screws for fastening the first path member 32560 to the second path member 32570 are inserted, and one through hole 32565c is formed in each of the first wall portions 32565.

The one-side protrusion 32565d is a portion that is inserted into the other-side recess 32573c of the second path member 32570 described later to position the first path member 32560 relative to the second path member 32570, and is arranged in parallel in the front-rear direction (arrow F-B direction) and in the up-down direction (arrow U-D direction).
It is extended in the direction.

The standing portion 32565e covers the one-side protrusion 32565d, and prevents the one-side protrusion 32565d from being seen by the player.
65d is a part that makes the one-side protrusion 32565d invisible, and is set to be greater than the protruding distance of the one-side protrusion 32565d. This makes it possible to suppress the position where the one-side protrusion 32565d is inserted into the other-side recess 32573c from being visually recognized, and to suppress the player from recognizing the position of the first path member 32560 relative to the second path member 32570. As a result, it is possible to suppress the player from deciding that he or she is at a disadvantage and giving up playing the pachinko machine 10.

The second path member 32570 comprises a plate-shaped base plate 32571 that faces the front plate 32564 of the first path member 32560, and a fourth wall portion 32573 that protrudes from the left and right ends (in the direction of the arrows L-R) of the base plate 32571 toward the front plate 32564 of the first path member 32560.

The base plate 32571 is a member that forms a sending path for a game ball in the gap between the first path member 32560 and the front plate 32564, and the size of the base plate 32571 in the up-down direction (arrow U-D direction) when viewed from the front is made smaller than that of the front plate 32564. This makes it possible to prevent the base plate 32571 from being seen by the player. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from visually checking the distance between the base plate 32571 and the front plate 32564 and judging that the game is advantageous or disadvantageous.

In addition, the base plate 32571 has a fourth protrusion 3257 protruding toward the first path member 32560.
1b and the fifth convex portion 32571c, and the fourth convex portion 32571b and the fifth convex portion 32571
and a sixth protrusion 32571d located below the first protrusion 32571c and protruding toward the front plate 32564.

The fourth convex portion 32571b and the fifth convex portion 32571c are protrusions for guiding the game ball flowing down inside the special winning device 32550, and are formed with a downward slope from the outer left-right direction of the base plate 32571 (outer side in the direction of arrows L-R) toward the center of the base plate 32571.
As a result, the liquid flows down between the base plate 32571 and the front plate 32564 and reaches the fourth protrusion 3
The game ball that collides with the fourth convex portion 32571b or the fifth convex portion 32571c is deflected by the fourth convex portion 32571b.
Alternatively, it is possible to make it easier for the liquid to flow down in the inclined direction of the fifth convex portion 32571c.

The sixth convex portion 32571d is formed below the fourth convex portion 32571b and the fifth convex portion 32571c, and is formed at approximately the center position in the left-right direction of the base plate 32571. The sixth convex portion 32571d extends in the direction of gravity. As a result, the liquid flows down between the opposing base plate 32571 and the front plate 32564 and reaches the fourth convex portion 32571b or the fifth convex portion 32571.
The game ball guided to c is distributed to either the left or right side of the sixth convex portion 32571d.

The two opposing fourth wall portions 32573 are provided with a plurality of other-side recesses 32573c recessed toward the inside in the opposing direction on the outer side surface in the opposing direction, and adjustment holes 32573
b, and adjustment holes 32573 are formed on the inner side of the opposing direction of the fourth wall portions 32573.
and a storage portion 32573d surrounding b.

The other-side recesses 32573c are arranged in a row in the front-rear direction (the direction of the arrows F-B) of the fourth wall portion 32573 and extend in the direction of gravity. The other-side recesses 32573c are formed to have a substantially triangular cross section, and the cross-sectional shape is set to be substantially the same as that of the one-side protrusion 32565d. As a result, the one-side protrusion 32565d is inserted into the other-side recesses 32573c to fix the first path member 3
2560 can be positioned.

The adjustment hole 32573b is a portion where the tip of the screw inserted through the through hole 32565c of the first path member 32560 described above is inserted into the accommodation portion 32573d side.
3 b is formed as a long hole that is long in the front-rear direction (the direction of the arrows FB), and this allows the first path member 32560 to move relative to the second path member 32570.

The accommodating portion 32573d is formed to have a U-shaped cross section when viewed from the front, and both ends thereof are connected to the fourth wall portion 32573. The accommodating portion 32573d extends from the front surface of the base plate 32571 to the end portion on the front side of the fourth wall portion 32573.
A screw plate 32590 for screwing in the screw inserted through the through hole 32565c and the adjustment hole 32573b can be accommodated in the space surrounded by 2573d.

The screw plate 32590 is set to a size that allows it to be inserted into the space formed by the storage portion 32573d, and its width in the front-rear direction (arrow F-B direction) is set to be smaller than the front-rear direction dimension of the space formed by the storage portion 32573d (the protruding dimension of the fourth wall portion 32573 toward the front side). This allows the screw plate 32590 to be inserted inside the storage portion 32573d and to be movable in the front-rear direction.

The screw plate 32590 has a screw hole 32591 into which a screw inserted through the through hole 32565c and the adjustment hole 32573b is screwed, and the screw hole 32591 has a screw hole 32591 extending in the front-rear direction (the direction of the arrow F-B).
The guide protrusions 3259 are provided on both ends of the fourth wall portion 32573 and protrude toward the opposing surfaces of the fourth wall portion 32573 at two locations.
It is equipped with 2.

The screw holes 32591 are formed in two places and are arranged side by side in the vertical direction.
The screw holes 32591 at the locations are formed at positions where the distance dimension from the upper end of one screw hole 32591 is the same as the distance dimension from the lower end of the other screw hole 32591. As a result, if the thread groove of one of the screw holes 32591 is damaged, the screw plate 32590 can be turned upside down to use the other screw hole 32591 to fasten the screw.

The guide protrusions 32592 are provided to protrude from both front and rear end portions toward both outer sides in the left and right direction by a predetermined amount, and have inclined surfaces that are inclined toward the screw hole 32591 side.
The tip of the screw that has been inserted through the adjustment hole 32573b and the screw hole 32591 can be guided to the screw hole 32591. In particular, in this embodiment, if the screw hole 32591 is damaged, a new screw hole 32591 can be used by turning it upside down. In this case, the screw hole 32591 relative to the tip of the screw can be guided to the screw hole 32591.
Since the position of the screw 591 is easily misaligned, the tip of the screw is inserted into the screw hole 32 as in this embodiment.
The configuration of guiding to 591 is particularly effective.

The method of adjusting the first path member 32560 relative to the second path member 32570 of the special winning device 32550 configured as above is as follows:
5c and the screw that is screwed into the screw plate 32590 is loosened.
The first path member 32560 is permitted to move relative to the path member 32570.

Next, the first wall portion 32565 is elastically deformed outward in the left-right direction relative to the front plate 32564, so that the first path member 32570 inserted into the other-side recess 32573 c of the second path member 32570 is deformed.
After the one-side protrusion 32565d of the 560 is pulled out from the other-side recess 32573c, the position in the front-rear direction is adjusted, and the elastic deformation of the first wall portion 32655 is returned to the adjusted position, and the one-side protrusion 32565d is pulled out again.
2565d is inserted into the other side recess 32573c.
The first path member 32560 can be temporarily fixed (positioned) relative to the first path member 32560.

Finally, the screw plate 32 is inserted into the through hole 32565c of the first path member 32560 and
590 is retightened to reattach the first path member 32570 to the second path member 32570.
The adjustment of the pathway member 32560 is completed.

According to this, as described above, the one-side protrusion 32565d and the other-side recess 32573c are formed in corresponding shapes, so that the one-side protrusion 32565d and the other-side recess 32573c are temporarily fixed and then the screws are fastened to fix the one-side protrusion 3256
5d can be pushed into the other-side recess 32573c. Therefore, the one-side protrusion 32565d can be adjusted to always be in the same position at each position where it can be inserted into the other-side recess 32573c. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of variation in the flow of the game balls depending on the operator performing the adjustment, and the adjustment can be simplified.

Next, the position adjustment of the second path member 32570 of the first path member 32560 will be described with reference to Fig. 186. Fig. 186(a) is a cross-sectional view of the special prize-winning device 32550.
Figure 186 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the special winning device 32550 taken along line CLXXXVIb-CLXXXVIb in Figure 186 (a).

As shown in Fig. 186, when the first path member 32560 on the left side (arrow L direction side) is pulled out toward the front side (arrow F direction side) relative to the second path member 32570, the distance between the left front plate 32564 and the base plate 32571 is made wider than the right side as shown in Fig. 185. In this case, a game ball flowing down between the facing front plate 32564 and the base plate 32571 is less likely to collide with the fourth convex portion 32571b on the left side, so that the game ball can flow down the facing space on the left side more easily. This allows the front plate 32564 and the base plate 32571 to move in the opposite direction.
This makes it easier for game balls flowing down between the opposing sides to be discharged from the bottom left side.

Next, a special prize-winning device 33550 in the 33rd embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 187. In the 32nd embodiment, the position of the second path member 32570 relative to the second path member 32570 is adjusted in a state in which the first wall portion 32565 of the first path member 32560 is elastically deformed. In the 33rd embodiment, however, the first wall portion 33565 is fixed to the front plate 32560.
The same parts as those in the above embodiments are
The same reference numerals are used and detailed explanations are omitted.

FIG. 187(a) is an exploded perspective front view of the first path member 33560 in the thirty-third embodiment, and FIG. 187(b) is a cross-sectional view of the special winning device 33550.
FIG. 186(b) corresponds to the cross-sectional view of FIG. 186(c).

As shown in FIG. 187 , the special prize winning device 33550 in the thirty-third embodiment includes a first path member 33560 arranged on the front side, and a second path member 32570 arranged on the rear side of the first path member 33560.

The first path member 33560 is a front plate 33 formed in a plate shape and disposed on the front side of the play area.
564 and a first wall portion 33565 pivotally supported on the left and right ends of the front plate 33564.

The front plate 32564 is a plate member that serves as a wall on the front side of the flow path of the game balls formed between the opposing second path member 32570 described later, and is made of a non-light-transmitting material. This makes it possible to prevent the player from seeing the game balls flowing down inside the special winning device 33550. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from understanding the flow direction of the game balls inside the special winning device 33550, and to prevent the player from quitting the game.

The holding portion 33564e is a member for holding the rod RD which supports the first wall portion 33565 described later, and is set to a size that allows the rod RD to be inserted into the inner portion formed in an annular shape. The holding portion 33564e is formed at two locations separated by a predetermined distance in the vertical direction, and the axes of the annular portions of the holding portions 33564e are coaxial in the vertical direction. Of the two holding portions 33564e, the holding portion 33564e formed on the lower side is connected to the front plate 33564.
The lower end of the rod RD is formed in the holding portion 3.
When the rod RD is inserted into the inside of the holding portion 33564e from the upper side of 3564e, the rod RD can be prevented from falling off (coming out) from the lower end of the holding portion 33564e.

The first wall portion 33565 is a portion that is connected (fastened) to the second path member 32570, and has a through hole 32565c that penetrates in a circular shape in the left-right direction (plate thickness direction) and two first wall portions 325
A plurality of projections 32565d are arranged in parallel on the opposing surface of the 65 and project in a triangular cross section.
The first wall portion 32565 mainly comprises an upright portion 32565e which is uprighted from both the upper and lower ends (in the direction of the arrows U-D) of the first wall portion 32565 toward the opposing surface of the second wall portion 32566, and a supported portion 33565f which protrudes in a circular cross-sectional shape toward the front plate 33564.

The supported shaft portion 33565f is a portion into which the rod RD is inserted to be inserted into the holding portion 33564e of the front plate 33564, and the inner portion formed in an annular shape is set to a size that allows the rod RD to be inserted. The supported shaft portion 33565f is formed at two locations separated by a predetermined distance in the vertical direction, and the axes of the annular portions of the supported shaft portion 33565f are coaxial in the vertical direction. The two supported shaft portions 33565f are connected to the holding portion 33564e described above between them.
A holding portion 33564e is provided at the upper portion of the support 33564e.

As a result, the connection between the front plate 33564 and the first wall portion 33565 is performed by the holding portion 33564
The front plate 3356e and the axially supported portion 33565f are arranged coaxially, and the rod RD is inserted from above between the holding portion 33564e and the axially supported portion 33565f.
A first wall portion 33565 is rotatably disposed on the support member 33564.

As a result, as shown in FIG. 187( b ), the base plate 325 of the second path member 32570
When the front plate 33564 of the first path member 33560 is disposed non-parallel to the front plate 33564, the angle of the first wall portion 33565 with respect to the front plate 33564 can be changed.

That is, in the above-described thirty-second embodiment, when the front plate 32564 of the first path member 32560 is disposed non-parallel to the base plate 32571 of the second path member 32570,
In addition, when adjusting the position of the first path member 32560 with respect to the second path member 32570, the first wall portion 32565 is elastically deformed outward in the left-right direction with respect to the front plate 32564 to hold the first wall portion 32565 in an elastically deformed state with respect to the front plate 32564.
The one-side protrusion 325 of the first path member 32560 is inserted into the other-side recess 32573c of the first path member 32570.
65d must be pulled out from the other side recess 32573c.
There was a possibility that the connecting portion between the first wall portion 32565 and the first wall portion 32565 would be damaged.

In contrast, in the thirty-third embodiment, the first wall portion 33565 can be rotated relative to the front plate 33564, thereby eliminating the need to elastically deform the first path member 33560, and preventing damage to the connecting portion between the front plate 33564 and the first wall portion 33565.

The method of adjusting the first path member 33560 relative to the second path member 32570 of the special winning device 33550 configured as above is as follows:
5c and the screw that is screwed into the screw plate 32590 is loosened.
The first path member 33560 is permitted to move relative to the path member 32570.

Next, the first wall portion 33565 is rotated outward in the left-right direction relative to the front plate 33564, so that the first path member 3356 inserted into the other-side recess 32573c of the second path member 32570 is rotated outward in the left-right direction relative to the front plate 33564.
After the one-side protrusion 32565d of the first wall portion 33565 is pulled out from the other-side recess 32573c, the position in the front-rear direction is adjusted, and the rotation of the first wall portion 33565 is returned to the adjusted position, and the one-side protrusion 32565 is pulled out again.
d is inserted into the other-side recess 32573 c. This makes it possible to temporarily fasten the first path member 32560 to the second path member 32570.

Finally, the screw plate 32 is inserted into the through hole 32565c of the first path member 33560 and
590 is retightened to reattach the first path member 32570 to the second path member 32570.
The adjustment of the pathway member 33560 is completed.

Next, referring to FIG. 188 to FIG. 190, the special prize winning device 345 in the 34th embodiment will be described.
In the above thirteenth embodiment, the direction in which the game ball flows down is adjusted by adjusting the distance between the front and rear plates of the special winning device 13550.
In the thirty-fourth embodiment, the direction in which the game ball flows down can be adjusted by changing the position of the protrusion that protrudes toward the inside of the flow path.
The same reference numerals are used and detailed explanations are omitted.

First, the overall configuration of the special prize-winning device 34550 will be described with reference to Figures 188 and 189. Figure 188(a) is a front view of the game board 34013 in the thirty-fourth embodiment, and Figure 188(b) is a front view of the CLXXXVIIIb-CLXXXVIIIb in Figure 188(a).
189 is an exploded perspective front view of the game board 34013. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 188 and FIG. 189, a special prize winning device 34550 in the 34th embodiment
is disposed above the first winning opening 64 disposed on the game board 34013. In addition, the special winning device 34550 is disposed such that the center line in the left-right direction of the first path member 34560 disposed on the front side is aligned in the same straight line as the center line in the left-right direction of the first winning opening 64 when viewed from the front.

Furthermore, the special winning device 34550 and the first winning port 64 are aligned in the direction of gravity (the direction of the arrows U-D).
In this way, the game balls discharged from the special winning device 34550 can be visually recognized by the player.

The special winning device 34550 is a first path member 345 disposed on the front side (the side in the direction of the arrow F).
60, a second path member 34570 disposed on the rear side (the direction of arrow B) of the first path member 34560, and a fixing device 34553 screwed into the rear side of the second path member 34570.

The first path member 34560 is a plate member that forms the front wall of the flow path of the game ball formed between the opposing second path member 34570 described later, and is formed from a non-light-transmitting material.
This makes it possible for the player to be unable to see the game balls flowing down inside the special winning device 34550. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the direction in which the game balls flow down inside the special winning device 34550, and to prevent the player from quitting the game.

In addition, the first path member 34560 is formed in a plate shape and includes a front plate 34564 arranged on the front side of the play area (in the direction of arrow F), and a first wall portion 34565 erected from the left and right ends of the front plate 34564 to the rear side (in the direction of arrow B).

The front plate 34564 is a plate member that becomes a wall portion on the front side of the flow path of the game ball formed between the opposing second path member 32570 described later, and is formed to have a larger outer shape in a front view than a base plate 34571 of the second path member 34570 described later. As a result, the second path member 34570 disposed on the back side (arrow B direction side) of the first path member 34560 is fixed to the front plate 34564.
Therefore, the second path member 3457 can be made difficult to see from the player side.
It is possible to prevent the number 0 from being visually recognized. Therefore, when the position of the second path member 34570 is changed, it is possible to prevent the change from being recognized by the player.

The first wall portion 34565 is a portion that is fastened to the base plate 34060 of the game board 13, and is formed to have a substantially L-shaped cross section.
64 and a fourth protrusion 34571b of a base plate 34571 described later (FIG. 18
8(b)) is set to a value slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball.

The first wall portion 34565 has a bent portion 34565g that is bent from the upright tip portion in a direction parallel to the front surface of the base plate 34060, and a through hole 34565g1 that penetrates the bent portion 34565g in the front-rear direction is formed in the bent portion 34565g. The through hole 34565g1 is a hole through which a screw is inserted, and the first wall portion 34565 is formed by screwing the screw inserted into the through hole 34565g1 into the base plate 34060.
The pathway member 34560 can be fastened to the base plate 34060 .

The second path member 34570 includes a plate-shaped base plate 34571 that faces the front plate 34564 of the first path member 34560 , and a support portion 34579 that is cylindrically protrudes from the rear surface side of the base plate 34571 .

The base plate 34571 is a member that forms a ball sending path in the gap between the first path member 34560 and the front plate 34564, and is formed at a position spaced a predetermined distance from the front plate 34564. The base plate 34571 also has a fourth protrusion 345 that protrudes toward the front plate 34564.
This allows the game ball flowing down between the opposing base plate 34571 and the front plate 34564 to collide with the fourth convex portion 34571b and change the direction of the flow.

The support portion 34579 is a portion that axially supports the second path member 34570, and has a cylindrical shaft.
The support portion 34579 is formed at a position (the center of the base plate 34571) that is coaxial with the axis of the base plate 34571. In addition, a circular through hole 34060d is opened in the base plate 34060 of the game board 34013 at a position corresponding to the support portion 34579, and the support portion 34579 is formed on the inside of the through hole 34060d.
579 is inserted. As a result, the second path member 34570 is pivotally supported by the base plate 34060.

The support portion 34579 has a fastening hole 34579a recessed at its protruding tip.
79a is recessed coaxially with the axis of the support portion 34579, and has an internal thread machined on its inner circumferential surface. This allows the screw portion 34553b of the fixing device 34553, which is inserted into the through hole 34060d from the rear surface side of the base plate 34060, to be screwed into the fastening hole 34579a.

The fixing device 34553 is a fastening member for fastening the above-mentioned second path member 34570 to the base plate 34060 of the game board 34013, and includes an operating portion 34553a formed in a cylindrical shape, and a screw portion 34553b protruding from the front side of the operating portion 34553a.

The operation portion 34553a is a portion that is gripped by an operator who arranges the second path member 34570 on the base plate 34060, and is formed to have an outer shape larger than the through hole 34060d formed in the base plate 34060.
The outer diameter is set to be larger than the inner diameter of 060d.

With this, when the screw portion 34553b of the fixing device 34553 is screwed into the fastening hole 34579a and the second path member 34570 is disposed on the base plate 34060,
This can prevent the wire 34060 from leaking out to the front side of the base plate 34060 through the through hole 34060d.

The screw portion 34553b is formed in a cylindrical shape coaxial with the axis of the operating portion 34553a.
The threaded portion 34553b is a portion that is screwed into the fastening hole 34579a of the second path member 34570 as described above, and is set to an outer diameter smaller than the through hole 34060d of the base plate 34060. The threaded portion 34553b is inserted through the through hole 34060d and screwed into the fastening hole 34579a of the second path member 34570.

According to the special winning device 34550 configured as described above, when changing the discharge position of the game ball discharged from the special winning device 34550, the operator
A hand (arm) is inserted from the front side (arrow F direction side) of the game board 13 to the back side (arrow B direction side) of the base plate 34060 through a first opening 60a (center frame 86) formed in the base plate 34060 to access the operating portion 34553a of the fixing device 34553.

Next, the operating portion 34553a is rotated to fasten the fastening hole 34579 of the second path member 34570.
The screw portion 34553b screwed into the support portion 34579 is loosened. This allows the second path member 34570 to be rotatably displaced about the support portion 34579, and the second path member 34570 is rotated to change the position of the fourth convex portion 34571b of the second path member 34570.
When the position of 71b is changed, the position at which the game ball flowing down inside the special winning device 34550 collides with the fourth convex portion 34571b is changed, and therefore the discharge position of the game ball discharged from the special winning device 34550 can be changed.

In this case, as described above, the base plate 34571 of the second path member 34570 is formed in a circular shape in a front view, and the support portion 34579 is formed coaxially with the axis of the base plate 34571. Therefore, when the second path member 34570 is rotated, the arrangement of the second path member 34570 relative to the base plate 34060 in a front view is prevented from changing. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from noticing that the second path member 34570 has been rotated. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from deciding that he or she is at a disadvantage and giving up playing the game.

Next, referring to FIG. 190, a change in the discharge position of the game ball when the position of the fourth convex portion 34571b (the second path member 34570) is changed will be described.
90(d) is a cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine 34010 taken along line CXC-CXC in FIG. 188.

As shown in Fig. 190, the fourth convex portion 34571b is formed so that the protruding shape in the front view is substantially V-shaped. Therefore, as shown in Fig. 190(a), when the bent side of the V-shape is disposed on the lower side, the game ball flowing in from above the special winning device 34550 can be easily sent to the center part along the inclination of the V-shape. As a result, the game ball can be easily flowed into the winning port 64 disposed below the special winning device 34550.

On the other hand, as shown in Fig. 190(b), when the bent side of the V shape is disposed on the upper side, the game balls flowing in from above the special winning device 34550 can be easily sent to both the left and right ends along the inclination of the V shape. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the game balls to flow into the winning port 64 disposed below the special winning device 34550.

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 190(c) and 190(b), when the bent side of the V is positioned at either the left or right end, game balls flowing in from above the special winning device 34550 can be easily sent along the slope on the upper side of the V, and game balls that do not collide with the upper side of the V and are sent to the lower side of the V can be sent along the slope on the lower side of the V. Therefore,
The direction in which the game ball is thrown can be changed by the difference between the area where the game ball collides between the upper side of the V-shape and the lower side of the V-shape.

Although detailed description is omitted, it is also possible to dispose the bent portion of the fourth convex portion 34571b at a position other than the positions shown in Figures 190(a) to 190(d).
When the second pathway member 34570 is rotated 10 degrees to the right when viewed from the front from the position shown in 0(a), the game balls flowing in from above the special winning device 34550 are made to flow down along the V-shaped slope, making it easier for the game balls to be discharged from a position slightly shifted to the left (in the direction of arrow L) from the upper side of the winning port 64 located below the special winning device 34550.

Next, referring to FIG. 191 to FIG. 193, the special prize winning device 355 in the 35th embodiment will be described.
In the above-described thirty-fourth embodiment, the case where the position of the fourth convex portion 34571b is changed by rotating the second path member 34570 has been described. In the thirty-fifth embodiment,
The position of the fourth convex portion 35571b is changed by sliding the second path member 35570. Note that the same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 191 and FIG. 192, the special prize winning device 35 in the 35th embodiment will be described.
FIG. 191(a) shows a game board 35013 in the 35th embodiment.
191(b) is a cross-sectional view of the game board 35013 taken along line CXCIb-CXCIb in Fig. 191(a). Fig. 192 is an exploded perspective view of the special prize-winning device 35550.

As shown in FIG. 191 and FIG. 192, a special prize winning device 35550 in the 35th embodiment
is disposed above (on the direction of arrow U) a first winning opening 64 disposed on the game board 35013. In addition, the special winning device 35550 is disposed such that a center line in the left-right direction of a first path member 35560 disposed on the front side (on the direction of arrow F) is aligned in the same straight line as a center line in the left-right direction of the first winning opening 64 when viewed from the front.

Furthermore, the special winning device 35550 and the first winning port 64 are aligned in the direction of gravity (the direction of the arrows U-D).
In this way, the game balls discharged from the special winning device 35550 can be visually recognized by the player.

The special winning device 34550 includes a first path member 355 disposed on the front side (the side in the direction of the arrow F).
60, a second path member 35570 disposed on the rear side (the side in the direction of arrow B) of the first path member 35560, and a fastener 34553 screwed into the rear side of the second path member 35570.

The first path member 35560 is a plate member that forms the front wall of the flow path of the game ball formed between the opposing second path member 35570 described later, and is formed from a non-light-transmitting material.
This makes it possible to make it impossible for the player to see the flow direction of the game ball inside the special winning device 35550. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the flow direction of the game ball inside the special winning device 35550, and to prevent the player from quitting the game.

In addition, the first path member 35560 is formed in a plate shape and includes a front panel 34564 arranged on the front side of the play area, and a first wall portion 35565 erected from the left and right ends of the front panel 34564 on the rear side (in the direction of arrow B).

The front plate 35564 is a plate member that serves as a wall portion on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the flow path of the game ball formed between the opposing portion and the second path member 35570 described later, and is formed to have a larger outer shape in a front view than a base plate 35571 of the second path member 35570 described later.
570 can be made difficult to see by the front plate 35564.
It is possible to suppress the path member 35570 from being visually recognized. Therefore, when the position of the second path member 35570 is changed, it is possible to suppress the change from being recognized by the player.

The first wall portion 35565 is a portion that is fastened to the base plate 60 of the game board 35013. The first wall portion 34565 is formed to have a substantially L-shaped cross section. The dimension of the first wall portion 34565 that is erected on the rear side is equal to the dimension of the front plate 3556.
191 and a fourth protrusion 35571b of the base plate 35571 described later.
(b) is set to a value slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball.

In addition, the first wall portion 35565 has a bent portion 35565g that is bent from the upright tip portion in a direction parallel to the front surface of the base plate 60, and a through hole 35565g1 that penetrates in the front-to-back direction (arrow F-B direction) is formed in the bent portion 35565g, and a recessed portion 35565g2 that is recessed from the back surface of the bent portion 35565g toward the front side (arrow F direction).

The through hole 35565g1 is a hole through which a screw is inserted, and the first path member 35560 can be fastened to the base plate 60 by screwing the screw inserted into the through hole 35565g1 into the base plate 60.

The recessed portion 35565g2 is a portion that accommodates the left and right ends (arrow L-R direction side) of the base plate 35571 of the second path member 35570 described later inside, and is recessed from the base end of the bent portion 35565g and recessed in the vertical center of the bent portion 35565g. As a result, when the left and right ends of the base plate 35571 are accommodated inside the recessed portion 35565g2, the left and right ends of the base plate 35571 can be hidden by the bent portion 35365g. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from recognizing the position of the base plate 35571. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from deciding that it is disadvantageous and stopping playing.

The recessed portion 35565g2 is set to have a depth greater than the thickness of the base plate 35571, and the distance X5 between the left and right ends of the bent portion 35565g (FIG. 191) is set to 1/2.
191(b)) is set to be larger than the width dimension X6 (see FIG. 191(b)) of the base plate 35571 in the left-right direction. This allows the base plate 35571 (second path member 35570) to be displaced in the left-right direction.
The method of displacement of the position (a) will be described later.

The second path member 35570 includes a plate-shaped base plate 35571 that faces the front plate 35564 of the first path member 35560, and a support portion 35579 that protrudes in a rectangular shape when viewed from behind from the rear side (the side in the direction of arrow B) of the base plate 35571.

The base plate 35571 is a member that forms a ball sending path in the gap between the first path member 35560 and the front plate 35564, and is formed at a position spaced a predetermined distance from the front plate 35564. The base plate 35571 also includes a fourth protrusion 35571b that protrudes toward the front plate 35564 (the direction of the arrow F).
The direction in which a game ball flows down between the opposing convex portions 35571a and 35571b can be changed by colliding the game ball with the fourth convex portion 35571b.

The support portion 35579 is a portion that pivotally supports the second path member 35570 and is connected to the base plate 345
A cylindrical shaft is formed at a position (the center of the base plate 34571) coaxial with the axis of 71.
Further, in the base plate 60 of the game board 34013, a sliding hole 35060e having a long hole shape that is long in the left-right direction is opened at a position corresponding to the support portion 35579, and the support portion 35579 is inserted into the inside of the sliding hole 35060e. As a result, the second path member 35570 is supported by the base plate 60.

The sliding hole 35060e has a width dimension in the short direction (direction of arrows U-D) set to be approximately the same as the vertical dimension (direction of arrows U-D) of the support portion 35579, and a width dimension in the long direction (direction of arrows L-R) set to be larger than the left-right dimension (direction of arrows L-R) of the support portion 35579. This allows the support portion 35579 inserted inside the sliding hole 35060e to slide in the long direction of the sliding hole 35060e.

Further, the support portion 35579 has a fastening hole 35579a recessed at its protruding tip. The fastening hole 35579a has an inner peripheral surface that can be female-threaded, and the screw portion 34553b of the fixing device 34553 can be screwed into the fastening hole 35579a. The protruding dimension of the support portion 34579 is as follows:
The thickness of the base plate 60 is set smaller than the thickness of the base plate 60.
The second path member 35570 is fixed to the base plate 6 by screwing the screw portion 34553b of the second path member 35570 to the base plate 6.
It can be fixed at 0.

According to the special winning device 35550 configured as described above, when changing the discharge position of the game ball discharged from the special winning device 35550, the operator can change the position of the game ball discharged from the special winning device 35550 by inserting the ball into the game board 3501 through the first opening 60a (center frame 86) formed in the base plate 60 of the game board 35013.
A hand (arm) is inserted from the front side (arrow F direction) of 3 through the rear side (arrow B direction) of base plate 60 to access operating portion 34553 a of fixing device 34553 .

Next, the operating portion 34553a is rotated to fasten the fastening hole 35579 of the second path member 35570.
The screw portion 34553b screwed into the fourth protrusion 35571b is loosened. This allows the second path member 35570 to be slidably displaced in the left-right direction, and the second path member 35570 is slidably displaced to change the position of the fourth protrusion 35571b of the second path member 35570.
When the position of 1b is changed, the position at which the game ball flowing down inside the special winning device 35550 collides with the fourth convex portion 35571b is changed, and therefore the discharge position of the game ball discharged from the special winning device 35550 can be changed.

Next, referring to FIG. 193, a change in the discharge position of the game ball when the position of the fourth convex portion 35571b (the second path member 35570) is changed will be described.
93(c) is the game board 3501 on the line CXCIII-CXCIII in FIG. 191(b).
193(a) to 193(c), the position of the second pathway member 35570 in Fig. 193(b) is taken as a reference position, and Fig. 193(a) illustrates a state in which the second pathway member 35570 is displaced from the reference position to the left as viewed from the front, and Fig. 193(c) illustrates a state in which the second pathway member 35570 is displaced from the reference position to the right (the direction of arrow R) as viewed from the front.

As shown in FIG. 193, the fourth convex portion 35571b has a protruding shape when viewed from the front, which is formed in an approximately V-shape, and the game ball flowing in from above the special winning device 35550 is guided along the slope of the V to the central portion (the bend of the V).

Therefore, as shown in Figure 193 (b), when the V-shaped bent portion of the fourth convex portion 35571b is arranged above the first winning opening 64, it becomes easier for the game balls discharged from below the special winning device 35550 to flow into the first winning opening 64.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 193( a) and FIG. 193(c), when the second path member 35570 is moved from the reference position (the position shown in FIG. 193(b)), the V
Since the bent portion of the character is disposed at a position shifted to the left or right from the top of the first winning port 64, the special winning device 3555 is located closer to the left or right than when the second path member 35570 is disposed at the reference position.
The game balls discharged from below the ball hole 61 are made less likely to flow into the first winning opening 64.

Next, a special prize-winning device 36550 in the thirty-sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 194. In the first embodiment, the first unit 5 is disposed on the front side of the base plate 60.
In the above description, the first unit 36551 is fastened to the second unit 552 disposed on the rear side of the base plate 60 and held in a state in which it is biased toward the rear side of the base plate 60, but in the thirty-sixth embodiment, the first unit 36551 is biased toward the rear side of the base plate 60 by the elastic recovery force of the fastening portion 36551b formed on the first unit 36551. Note that the same parts as those in the above embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 194(a) is an exploded perspective front view showing a game board 36013 in the 36th embodiment, and FIG. 194(b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the game board 36013.
94 corresponds to the cross-sectional view of FIG.

As shown in FIG. 194, the special prize-winning device 36550 in the thirty-sixth embodiment is slid from the inside of the first opening 60a in which the center frame 86 is disposed, and is attached to the base plate 6
The first unit 36551 is disposed at 0.

The first unit 36551 has a space inside which game balls can be sent, and the space is disposed on the front side (the side in the direction of the arrow F) of the base plate 60. This allows game balls flowing down the front of the base plate 60 to flow into the inside of the first unit 36551.
The unit 36551 has a fastening portion 36551b that protrudes from the side surface (rear surface) adjacent to the front surface of the base plate 60 toward the rear surface side (the direction of the arrow B).

The fastening portion 36551b is a portion through which a screw for fastening the first unit 36551 to the base plate 60 is inserted, and is provided to protrude toward the rear side (the side in the direction of the arrow B) and is connected to the base plate 60.
The protruding tip is bent in a direction parallel to the back surface of the protruding tip.

In addition, the fastening portion 36551b has a bulge portion 36551b2 that bulges toward the front side (arrow F direction) on the side surface of the bent side, and a through hole 36551b1 that penetrates in the plate thickness direction (arrow FB direction) toward the bent tip side of the bulge portion 36551b2.

In addition, the fastening portion 36551b has a distance dimension X7 (see Figure 194 (b)) from the base end (the rear surface of the first unit 36551) to the front surface of the bent portion when the first unit 36551 is not attached to the base plate 60, which is set to be larger than the thickness dimension of the base plate 60.
In addition, the fastening portion 36551b has a distance dimension X8 (see Figure 194 (b)) from the base end (the rear surface of the first unit 36551) to the bulging tip position of the bulging portion 36551b2 when the first unit 36551 is not attached to the base plate 60, which is set to be the same as or slightly smaller than the thickness dimension of the base plate 60.

The bulge portion 36551b2 is a portion that converts the force of the screw being fastened into a force that presses (urges) the first unit 36551 against the rear side (in the direction of arrow F) of the base plate 60 when a screw is fastened into the through hole 36551b1, and is formed between the base end of the bent portion of the fastening portion 36551b and the through hole 36551b1.

As a result, when a screw inserted through the fastening portion 36551b is fastened to the rear surface of the base plate 60, the bulging portion 36551b2 abuts against the rear surface of the base plate 60, and the force of the screw pushing the tip end side of the bent portion toward the base plate 60 can be converted into a force pulling the base end side of the bent portion toward the rear surface (the direction of arrow B) by the amount of the gap between the bent portion and the base plate 60. As a result, it is possible to prevent a gap from being formed between the rear surface of the first unit 36551 and the front surface of the base plate 60.

As a result, it is no longer necessary to fasten the screw that has been inserted through the first unit 36551 from the front side to the base plate 60, and the first unit 36551 can be easily formed large by the amount of the fastening margin.
6551 can be slidably displaced to facilitate attachment to the first opening 60 a of the base plate 60 .

Next, a special prize-winning device 37550 according to the thirty-seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.
In the above description, the first unit 37551 is fastened to the second unit 552 disposed on the rear side of the base plate 60 and held in a state where it is biased toward the rear side of the base plate 60, but in the 37th embodiment, the first unit 37551 is fastened by a screw inserted from the rear side of the base plate 60 and held in a state where it is biased toward the rear side of the base plate 60. Note that the same parts as those in the above embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 195(a) is an exploded perspective front view showing a game board 37013 in the 37th embodiment, and FIG. 195(b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the game board 37013.
95(b) corresponds to the cross-sectional view of FIG.

As shown in FIG. 195 , the special winning device 37550 in the thirty-seventh embodiment is formed from a first unit 37551 arranged on the front side of the base plate 60 .

The first unit 37551 has a space inside which game balls can be sent, and the space is disposed on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the base plate 60. This allows game balls flowing down the front of the base plate 60 to flow into the inside of the first unit 37551.
The unit 37551 has a plurality of annular projections 3 protruding in an annular shape on the rear side (the side in the direction of the arrow B).
7551b.

The annular protrusion 37551b is a portion into which a screw inserted from the rear surface side of the base plate 60 is screwed, and has an inner circumferential surface formed with a female thread. In this embodiment, the annular protrusion 37551b is formed at four locations on the rear surface of the first unit 37551.

In addition, a circular recess 37060d is formed in the base plate 60 at a position facing the annular convex portion 37551b. The recess 37060d is a portion into which the annular convex portion 37551b is inserted, and is formed with an inner diameter that is approximately the same as the outer diameter of the annular convex portion 37551b. The recess depth of the recess 37060d is set to be larger than the protruding dimension of the annular convex portion 37551b.

Further, a through hole 37060d1 is formed in the bottom surface of the recess 37060d so as to penetrate the recess 37060 in a circular shape on the same axis as the recess 37060. The through hole 37060d1 is formed by the annular protrusion 3755.
The hole is formed with an inner diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the recess 37060d, through which the tip of the screw that is screwed into the recess 37060b is inserted, and this allows the screw to be fastened from the rear side (arrow B direction) of the base plate 60 to the first unit 37551 disposed on the front side (arrow F direction) of the base plate 60.

In this case, as described above, the recess depth of the recess 37060d is set to be larger than the protruding dimension of the annular convex portion 37551b, so that by screwing the screw into the annular convex portion 37551b, the first unit 37551 can be disposed on the base plate 60 with the annular convex portion 37551b (first unit 37551) biased toward the rear surface side (the direction of arrow B). This makes it possible to prevent a gap from being formed between the rear surface of the first unit 37551 and the front surface of the base plate 60.

As a result, it is no longer necessary to fasten the screw that has been inserted through the first unit 37551 from the front side to the base plate 60, and the first unit 37551 can be easily formed large by the amount of the fastening. Also, in the 37th embodiment, the fastening portion of the first unit 37551 can be accommodated inside the recess 37060d of the base plate 60, so that the first unit 37551 can be formed large by the amount of the fastening.
This makes it possible to enlarge the space formed for throwing the game ball.

<Changing the amount of light emitted to the front side depending on the game ball>
Next, referring to FIG. 196 and FIG. 197, the lower displacement member 384 in the thirty-eighth embodiment will be described.
In the eleventh embodiment, a case has been described in which a shadow is formed at the position of the game ball accommodated in the lower displacement member 11440 by the light irradiated from the control board 491, and the position of the game ball is recognized from the position of the shadow.
440 reflects the light emitted from the control board 491 on the outer surface of the game ball, and the position of the game ball is recognized at the position where the amount of light is increased. Note that the same parts as those in the above embodiments are given the same reference numerals and detailed explanations thereof are omitted.

FIG. 196 is an exploded perspective front view of the lower displacement member 38440 in the thirty-eighth embodiment.
FIG. 197(a) is a front view of the lower displacement member 38440, and FIG.
FIG. 197(a) is a cross-sectional view of the lower displacement member 38440 taken along line CXCVIIb-CXCVIIb, and FIG. 197(c) is a cross-sectional view of the lower displacement member 38440 taken along line CXCVIIc-CXCVIIc in FIG. 197(a).
51 and the front case 38481 are removed, and the front case 38
The LED 38483b disposed in the LED 38481 is shown by a two-dot chain line.
FIG. 197(c) shows the state where the front decorative part 451 has been attached.

As shown in FIGS. 196 and 197, the lower displacement member 38440 in the thirty-eighth embodiment includes a base member 470 connected to a front base 411 (see FIG. 46) and the base member 470.
The case member 38480 mainly comprises a case member 38480 covering both sides of the case member 38480 in the front-to-rear direction (the direction of arrows F-B), a transmission mechanism 460 displaceably disposed between the case member 38480 and the base member 470, and a decorative member 11450 formed in a manner covering the front and rear of the case member 38480.

The case member 38480 is a member that covers both sides of the base member 470 in the front-rear direction (arrow F-B direction), and is a front case 38480 that is disposed on the front side (arrow F direction) of the base member 470.
The main components of the device are a power supply unit 8481 and a rear case 482 disposed on the rear side (the side in the direction of arrow B).

The front case 38481 is formed in a rectangular plate shape when viewed from the front.
The LED board 38 is provided on the rear side of the housing 481. ...
483 and mainly.

The LED board 38483 is a member that illuminates the inside of the lower displacement member 38440 (the front case 38481), and includes a main body portion 38483a formed in a plate shape and a
and a plurality of LEDs 38483b arranged on the light source 384 and emitting light.

The main body 38483a is a base on which wiring for conducting electricity to the plurality of LEDs 38483b is laid, and extends in the displacement direction (arrow L-R direction) of the ball receiving portion 467.
The recesses 83b are disposed at predetermined intervals in the extension direction (the direction of the arrows LR) of the main body portion 38483a.

In addition, each LED 38483b is set in a direction toward the center of the game ball when the game ball passes the rear side (arrow B direction side) of each LED 38483b.
When the game ball is located on the back side of the lower displacement member 38440, the light of the LED can be reflected on the outer surface of the game ball and irradiated on the front decorative part 11451. Therefore, as described above, the front decorative part 11451 has a light-transmitting part 11451b that can transmit light, so that the light reflected on the outer surface of the game ball and irradiated on the front decorative part 11451 can be emitted to the player side (arrow F direction side) through the light-transmitting part 11451b. Therefore, the light visible from the player side through the light-transmitting part 11451b can be made to have a larger amount of light in the part reflected by the game ball than in other parts. As a result, by increasing (changing) the amount of light, the player can be made to recognize the position of the game ball sent inside the lower displacement member 38440.

In this embodiment, the intervals at which the LEDs 38483b are arranged are set to be smaller than the diameter of the game ball. This allows the light emitted from the LEDs 38483b to be irradiated onto at least a part of the game ball even if the game ball received in the ball receiving section 467 is displaced. Therefore, the light emitted from the LEDs 38483b can be constantly irradiated onto the game ball received in the ball receiving section 467.

According to the thirty-eighth embodiment, the base member 470, the transmission mechanism 460, and the rear case 482, which are disposed on the rear side (the side in the direction of the arrow B) of the LED 38483b, are preferably made of materials having a high light absorption rate. For example, the outer surfaces of the respective members are configured in a black color scheme.
It is possible to prevent the light emitted from the lower displacement member 39440 from being reflected inside the case member 38480 (the lower displacement member 38440) and being emitted from the transparent portion 11451b of the front decorative portion 11451. As a result, it is possible to increase the difference in the amount of light emitted between the front side where the game ball is placed and the other front sides, making it easier for the player to recognize the position of the game ball received inside the lower displacement member 39440.

Next, referring to FIG. 198 and FIG. 199, the lower displacement member 3944 in the thirty-ninth embodiment will be described.
In the above thirty-eighth embodiment, the case where the light is reflected by the gaming ball to allow the player to recognize the position where the gaming ball is placed is described. In the thirty-ninth embodiment, however, the ball receiving portion 3
The light is reflected by the reflecting member disposed at 9467, so that the position of the game ball can be recognized.
The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are given the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 198 is an exploded perspective rear view of the lower displacement member 39440 in the thirty-ninth embodiment.
FIG. 199(a) is a front view of the lower displacement member 39440, and FIG.
199(b) and 199(c) are cross-sectional views of the lower displacement member 39440.
198(c) corresponds to the cross section of FIG. 198(c).

As shown in FIGS. 198 and 199, the lower displacement member 39440 in the thirty-ninth embodiment includes a base member 470 connected to a front base 411 (see FIG. 46) and the base member 470.
70, a transmission mechanism 39460 displaceably disposed between the case member 38480 and the base member 470, and a decorative member 11450 disposed in a manner covering the front and rear of the case member 38480.

The transmission mechanism 39460 is a member disposed on the front side of the base member 470, and includes transmission gears 461, 462, and 463, and a drive motor KM2 whose shaft portion is connected to the transmission gear 461.
a movable rack 464 having a tooth surface that meshes with the transmission gear 463 and disposed so as to be slidably displaceable on the front side of the base member 470; a transmission gear 465 rotatably disposed on the movable rack 464 and meshed with the rack gear 476; a rack 39466 having a tooth surface that meshes with the transmission gear 465 and disposed so as to be slidably displaceable on the front side of the movable rack 464; and a ball receiving portion 39467 rotatably disposed on one end side of the rack 39466.
It is formed primarily with this in mind.

The rack 39466 is formed from a rod-shaped body that is rectangular when viewed from the front, and is mainly formed by a rack gear 466a engraved on the upper end surface, a shaft portion 39466b that protrudes cylindrically from the end on the other end side toward the front side, two sliding plates 466c that protrude toward the front side, and a recessed portion 466d that is recessed from one end to the other end on the rear side.

The shaft portion 39466b is a protrusion that is inserted into a shaft hole 467b of the ball receiving portion 39467, which will be described later, and is formed in a cylindrical shape with an outer diameter larger than the inner diameter of the shaft hole 467b.
67 can be rotatably held.

The ball receiving portion 39467 comprises a first piece 39467c formed by bending in an approximately L shape when viewed from the front, a second piece 39467d connected to the first piece 39467c, and a third piece 39467e connected to the second piece 39467d and arranged on the front side (in the direction of arrow F) of the first piece 39467c and the second piece 39467d.

The first piece 39467c and the second piece 39467d are portions for holding the game ball sent from the opening 451a (see FIG. 57) to the inside of the lower displacement member 39440.
When a game ball is thrown between the opposing first and second pieces 39467c and 39467d, the second piece 39467d is displaced in a direction away from the first piece 39467c, and a part of the first piece 39467c and the second piece 39467d are displaced in a direction away from the first piece 39467c.
467d are arranged in a U-shape when viewed from the front, and a game ball can be held in the inner part of the U.

The first piece 39467c comprises a receiving piece 39467c4 which forms one extended side formed in an L shape when viewed from the front, a leg 467a which forms the other extended side, a circular bent portion 39467c5 in which an axial hole 467b which penetrates in the front-to-back direction (arrow F-B direction) is formed at the connecting portion (bent portion) between the receiving piece 39467c4 and the leg 467a, and a connecting portion 39467c1 which protrudes to the opposite side with the bent portion 39467c5 in between.

The receiving piece 39467c4 is a part that forms the side surface on the other side (the side in the direction of arrow R) that is formed in a U-shape when viewed from the front by one piece 39467c and the second piece 39467d, and is formed in a crescent shape from the front and in a curved shape that is concave in the direction away from the second piece 39467d.

The connecting portion 39467c1 protrudes from two positions at a predetermined distance in the axial direction (the direction of the arrow F-B) of the bent portion 39467c5.
This is a part that connects the third piece 39467d and the third piece 39467e, and has a connecting hole 39467c2 that extends along the axial direction of the shaft hole 467b and opens to a circular cross section.

The connecting hole 39467c2 is a shaft portion 39467e protruding from a third piece 39467e to be described later.
The connecting hole 39467c2 is an opening into which the shaft portion 39467e3 inserted into an insertion hole 39467d3 formed in a second piece 39467d described later faces the front side (the side in the direction of the arrow F).
The shaft portion 39467e3 is fastened by a screw inserted from the opposite side (the arrow B direction side) to the insertion side of the connection hole 39467c2.
The second piece 39467d and the third piece 39467e can be fastened to c.

The first piece 39467c also has a recess 39467c3 recessed downward in the direction of gravity (arrow D direction) on the protruding base end side of the connecting portion 39467c1. The recessed bottom surface of the recess 39467c3 is formed at the lowest position (lowest part) of the side surfaces on which the game ball is held by the first piece 39467c and the second piece 39467d. This allows the first piece 39467c and the second piece 39467d to
The game ball held in the recess 39467c3 rolls on the inside of the recess 39467c3. As a result, the load of the game ball can easily displace the second piece 39467d relative to the first piece 39467c.

The second piece 39467d is a receiving portion 39467c4 of the first piece 39467c and a receiving portion 39467c5 of the second piece 394
The second piece 39467d is a portion that forms the side surface on the other side (the side in the direction of the arrow L) of the U-shape formed by the first piece 39467c and is formed in a crescent shape in front view and is formed in a curved shape that is concave in the direction away from the first piece 39467c.
The connecting portion mainly comprises an insertion hole 39467d3 that opens in a circular shape in the front-to-rear direction, and a recessed portion 39467d2 that is recessed in a circular shape from the front side (arrow F direction) to the rear side (arrow B direction).

The second piece 39467d has an insertion hole 39467d3, and the shaft portion 3946 of the third piece 39467e is inserted into the insertion hole 39467d3.
7e3 is inserted, and the connecting shaft 39467e of the third piece 39467e is inserted into the recessed portion 39467d2.
4 is inserted. Therefore, when the second piece 39567d is displaced, the third piece 39467e is similarly displaced. Therefore, when the second piece 39567d is rotationally displaced relative to the first piece 39467c, the third piece 39567e is also rotationally displaced relative to the first piece 39467c.

Furthermore, the second piece 39467d has a connecting portion 39
467c1 and is connected to the first piece 39467c.
When the piece 39467d is twisted in the axial direction of the insertion hole 39467d3, the connecting portion 39467c
The second piece 39467d abuts against the opposing side surface of the shaft portion 39467e3 to prevent the shaft portion 39467e3 from breaking.

The recessed portion 39467d2 is a hole into which a connecting shaft 39467e4 of the third piece 39467e described later is inserted, and is recessed into substantially the same shape as the connecting shaft 39467e4.

The third piece 39467e includes a reflector 39467e1 formed in a substantially semicircular plate shape when viewed from the front,
The shaft portion 394 protrudes from the reflector 39467e1 toward the rear side (the direction of the arrow B).
67e3 and a connecting shaft 39467e4.

The reflector 39467e1 is made of a resin material and has a plated coating applied to its outer surface. This allows the reflector 39467e1 to reflect light emitted from the LED 38483b when the reflector 39467e1 is irradiated with the light.
The entire surface is curved in an arc shape toward the front side (the direction of the arrow F). This allows the light irradiated from the front side to be focused on a specific portion when it is reflected. The light shielding of the light emitter 11491a by the reflector 39467e1 will be described later.

As described above, the shaft portion 39467e3 is a cylindrical body that is inserted into the connection hole 39467c2 of the first piece 39467c and the insertion hole 39467d3 of the second piece 39467d.
The protruding tip surface of the shaft portion 39467e3 is provided with a connecting hole 394 from the opposite side to the insertion side of the shaft portion 39467e3.
Thus, in a state where the shaft portion 39467e3 is inserted into the connecting hole 39467c2 and the insertion hole 39467d3,
By fastening a screw to the insertion tip surface of each of the first and second pieces 39467c, 39467d, and 39467e, the first piece 39467c, the second piece 39467d, and the third piece 39467e can be connected to each other.
7c.

As described above, the connecting shaft 39467e4 is connected to the recessed portion 39467d of the second piece 39467d.
2. As a result, the second piece 39467d is inserted into the shaft portion 33 with respect to the first piece 39467c.
When the third piece 39467e is rotated around the second piece 39467e3, the connecting shaft 39467e4 can be displaced in accordance with the displacement of the second piece 39467d.
It can be displaced according to the displacement of d.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 199, when a game ball is received between the opposing first piece 39467c and the second piece 39467d, the received game ball is transferred to the first piece 39467c.
The roller 39467c rolls on the receiving surface (the inner side surface formed in a U-shape when viewed from the front) of the second piece 39467d and is guided to a recess 39467c3 located at the bottom end of the receiving surface.
The second piece 39467d can be rotated around the shaft 39467e3 on the outer surface of the game ball in a direction away from the first piece 39467c. As a result, the third piece 39467e, which moves in accordance with the displacement of the second piece 39467d, can be displaced upward and positioned under the irradiation of the light from the LED 38483b.

Therefore, the light emitted from the LED 38483b is reflected by the reflector 394 of the third piece 39467e.
67e1, and is reflected toward the front side (arrow F direction) of the lower displacement member 39440.
This allows the amount of light emitted from the transmitting portion 11451b to be partially increased, allowing the player to recognize the position of the game ball that has been sent inside the lower displacement member 39440.

In addition, the second piece 39467d has a connecting shaft 39467e4 inserted into a recessed portion 39467d2, so that the load of the third piece 39467e is always applied to the second piece 39467d. The center of gravity G of the third piece 39467e is set on the opposite side of the connecting portion between the second piece 39567d and the third piece 39567e, across the shaft portion 394673e. As a result, when no force other than gravity is acting on the second piece 39467d and the third piece 39467de, the load of the third piece 39467e causes the second piece 39467d to move.
467e can be rotated toward the first piece 39467c4.

Therefore, when the game ball is discharged (taken out) from the ball receiving portion 39467, the third piece 394
The load of 67e can displace the second piece 39467d toward the ball receiving piece 39467c4 of the first piece 39467c. Therefore, only when a game ball is received in the ball receiving portion 39467, the amount of light reflected by the reflector 39467e1 and emitted from the transmitting portion 11451b can be partially increased. As a result, the positioning operation of the ball receiving portion 39467 can suppress the reflection of light by the reflector 39467e1.

Furthermore, similar to the ball receiving portion 467 in the first embodiment, the ball receiving portion 39467 is rotated around the shaft hole 39467b by the action of sliding and displacing the inside of the lower displacement member 39440, and the game ball received from the exit opening 471 (see Figure 66) of the lower displacement member 39440 is discharged to the outside.

Here, as a structure for discharging the game ball received in the ball receiving portion 39467,
In the structure in which the ball receiving portion 39467 rotates around the shaft hole 467b in accordance with the sliding movement of the ball receiving portion 39467, the ball receiving portion 39467 rotates around the shaft hole 467b depending on the sliding speed of the ball receiving portion 39467.
The rotation speed of ball receiving portion 39467 is changed. Therefore, since the rotation speed depends only on the sliding speed of ball receiving portion 39467, there is a problem that the discharge speed of the game ball from ball receiving portion 39467 is not stable.

In contrast, in the thirty-ninth embodiment, the load of the third piece 39467e causes the second piece 39467
The direction in which the second piece 39467d rotates and the direction in which the ball receiving portion 39467 rotates about the shaft hole 467b when the game ball is released are set to be substantially the same, so that a driving force can be imparted to the game ball released from the release opening 471 when the second piece 39467d is displaced.
The speed of the game ball being ejected can be maintained even if the force acting on the game ball from the ball receiving portion 39467 when displacing the ball receiving portion 39467 to eject the game ball from the ejection opening 471 is reduced. As a result, the ejection speed of the game ball being ejected from the ball receiving portion 39467 can be stabilized.

Next, the first unit 40551 in the 40th embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 200. In the above-mentioned first embodiment, a case where a malfunction is reported when a game ball gets stuck in the curved portion 581a of the main path SK1 has been described, but in the 40th embodiment, it is possible to report a tampering when a game ball of a size other than a specified size passes through the main path SK1. Note that the same parts as those in the above-mentioned embodiments are given the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 200(a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the first unit 40551 in the fortieth embodiment, and FIG. 200(b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the first unit 40551 taken along line CCb-CCb in FIG. 200(a).
200(a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the semiconductor device 51. The cross-sectional view of Fig. 200(a) corresponds to the cross-sectional view of Fig. 25.

As shown in FIG. 200, the first unit 40551 in the fortieth embodiment has a front side (
The light-transmitting passage 405 is mainly formed by a first path member 560 arranged on the rear side (the side in the direction of arrow F), a second path member 570 arranged on the rear side (the side in the direction of arrow B) of the first path member 560, and a third path member 40580 arranged on the rear side of the second path member 570.

The third path member 40580 includes a first covering member 40581 disposed on the rear surface of the upper side (arrow U direction side) of the second path member 570, a second covering member 582 (see FIG. 19 ) disposed on the rear surface of the lower side (arrow D direction side) of the second path member 570, and a second covering member 582 (see FIG. 19 ) disposed on the rear surface of the lower side (arrow D direction side) of the second path member 570.
It mainly comprises a first drive unit 583 (see FIG. 19) disposed between the covering members 582 and a second drive unit 584 (see FIG. 19) disposed on the back surface of the second covering member 582 .

The first covering member 40581 is a member that forms a ball sending path that is curved in a substantially U-shape on the rear side (the direction of the arrow B), and includes a curved portion 40581a that connects the rear sides of the first opening 571a and the fourth opening 571d, and a plate-shaped mounting portion 40581b that is connected to the lower side of the curved portion 40581a.
0581b.

The curved portion 40581a is connected to the first opening 571a and the fourth opening 571d (the second path member 5
The curved portion 40581a is curved in a U-shape in cross section with the side 40581a (main path SK1) open, and the first rolling portion 576 is disposed inside the curved portion 40581a. The width dimension of the curved portion 40581a in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction) is smaller toward the back side (arrow B direction), and the width dimension X10 (see FIG. 200(a)) in the left-right direction at the curved portion of the U-shaped cross section is formed to be 1.1 times or less the diameter of the game ball. This allows the game ball to be stopped inside the curved portion 40581a (main path SK1) when a game ball with a diameter 1.1 times or more larger than the specified game ball is thrown.

Similarly to the curved portion 581a in the first embodiment, the curved portion 40581a is disposed inside the recess 86b2 (see FIG. 17) of the center frame 86.
A game ball stopped inside 581a can be detected by a detection device 86b3 (see Figure 17) and the pachinko machine 10 can be notified of an error (fraud).

Further, the curved portion 40581a has an opening 40581a1 that opens into the curved portion of the U-shaped cross section, and a storage portion 40481a1 that is protruding from the end of the rear side of the opening 40481a1 in a box shape that opens upward.
0581a2.

The opening 40581a1 is an opening for discharging balls having a diameter smaller than the diameter of a specified game ball from the main path SK1, and has an opening dimension X15 (indicated by arrows L-R in FIG. 200 (
a) is formed to a size greater than 0.9 times the diameter of the game ball.
The opening 581a1 is formed on the back side of the curved portion 40581 which is the rolling direction of the game ball rolling on the first rolling portion 576, and can send the game ball passing through the main path SK1 to the opening 40581a1. In this way, when a game ball whose diameter is 0.9% or more smaller than the diameter of a specified game ball is sent, the game ball can be discharged from the opening 40581a1 to the outside of the main path SK1.

The storage section 40581a2 is a box that stores the game balls discharged from the opening 40581a1, and the inner space is formed to be larger than the diameter of the game ball.
The game balls discharged from 581a1 can be stored in the storage section 40581a2, and the stored game balls can be detected by the detection device 86b3 to notify the pachinko machine 10 of an error (fraud).

In the fortieth embodiment, the width dimension X10 and the opening dimension X11 are formed to have a different size of 0.1 times the standard diameter (11 mm) of a gaming ball, but this is not necessarily limited to this, and the size multiplier with respect to the gaming ball may be changed.

Next, referring to FIG. 201 and FIG. 202, the first unit 415 in the 41st embodiment will be described.
In the first embodiment, the first recess 571h, the second recess 571i, and the third recess 571j formed in the main path SK2, the curved path WK1, and the main path SK3 are formed substantially symmetrically above and below (in the direction of the arrows U and D) with the curved portion of the curved path WK1 as the center.
and the third recess 41571j are each formed in an irregular shape. Note that the same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are given the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 201(a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the first unit 41551 in the 41st embodiment, and FIG. 201(b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the first unit 41551 taken along the line CCIb-CCIb in FIG.
FIG. 202(a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of CCIIa-CCI 1551 in FIG.
FIG. 202(b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the first unit 41551 taken along line Ia in FIG.
1(a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of a first unit 41551 taken along line CCIIb-CCIIb in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 201 and FIG. 202, the first unit 41551 in the 41st embodiment
The optical fiber 4151 is mainly formed by including a first path member 41560 arranged on the front side, a second path member 41570 arranged on the rear side of the first path member 41560, and a third path member 580 (see FIG. 19 ) arranged on the rear side of the second path member 41570.

The first path member 41560 includes a front plate 41564 formed in a plate shape along the front of the play area of the game board 13 (see FIG. 2 ), and a first receiving portion 561, a second receiving portion 562, and a third receiving portion 563 formed in a generally U-shaped cross section with an open upper side (arrow U direction side) and protruding from the upper end (arrow U direction side) of the front plate 41564 to the back side (arrow B direction side) (see FIG. 21 ).
The lower side (arrow D direction side) of the first receiving portion 561, the second receiving portion 562, and the third receiving portion 563
The front plate 41564 mainly comprises a first wall portion 41565 which is protruding in series with the front plate 41564 and extends along one end of the front plate 41564, and two sets of second wall portions 566 and third wall portions 567 (see Figure 21) which are formed below the first wall portion 565 and protrude from two locations spaced a predetermined distance apart.

The front plate 41564 is a plate member that serves as a wall portion on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the flow path of the game ball formed between the opposing second path member 41570 and the third path member 580 described later.
This allows the player to see the game balls flowing down inside the first unit 551 through the front panel 41564.

In addition, the front plate 564 has a first convex portion 41564b, a second convex portion 41571i, and a third concave portion 41571j at positions facing the first concave portion 41571h, the second concave portion 41571i, and the third concave portion 41571j, which will be described later.
64c and a third convex portion 41564d are provided to protrude.

The second path member 41570 includes a plate-shaped base plate 41571 facing the front plate 41564 of the first path member 41560, a fourth wall portion 573 (see FIG. 21 ) protruding from the front surface (arrow F direction side) of the base plate 41571 toward the first path member 41560, and the fourth wall portion 573.
The wall 570 is mainly formed by a fifth wall portion 574 (see FIG. 21) protruding downward from the fifth wall portion 574 at a predetermined distance, and a sixth wall portion 575 (see FIG. 21) protruding downward from the fifth wall portion 574 at a predetermined distance.

The base plate 41571 and the front plate 41564 form a ball sending path (
A first recess 41571h recessed in the main path SK2, the curved path WK1, and the main path SK3;
It has a second recess 41571i and a third recess 41571j.

The first recess 41571h, the second recess 41571i, and the third recess 41571j are formed in a curved shape toward the rear surface side.
The opposing dimension between 1564b, the opposing dimension between the second recess 41571i and the second convex portion 41564c, and the opposing dimension between the third recess 41571j and the third convex portion 41564d are each set to the same opposing dimension L19 (see Figure 201 (b)).

In addition, the opposing dimension L19 is set to a value larger than the diameter of the game ball and smaller than the opposing dimension L20 (see FIG. 201(b)) between the rear surface of the front plate 41564 and the front surface of the base plate 571.
The game ball sent between the first recess 41571h, the second recess 41571i and the third recess 41571j and the first convex portion 41564b, the second convex portion 41564c and the third convex portion 41564d is guided to the first recess 41571h, the second recess 41571i and the third recess 41571j.
1571i and the third recess 41571j, the first convex portion 41564b, and the second convex portion 41564c.
And by abutting against the third convex portion 41564d, the rolling (flowing) speed of the game ball can be slowed down.

Furthermore, the first convex portion 41564b, the second convex portion 41564c, and the third convex portion 41564d are set to have the same protruding dimension toward the base plate 41571.
The distance dimension L21 (see FIG. 201(b)) between the front surface of the base plate 41571 excluding the second recess 41571i and the third recess 41571j is set to be smaller than the diameter of the game ball.
The game ball sent between the first convex portion 41564b, the second convex portion 41564c, and the third convex portion 41564d is guided by the first convex portion 41564b, the second convex portion 41564c, and the third convex portion 41564d.
64d. As a result, the rolling (flowing) speed of the game ball can be slowed down.

The first recess 41571h is formed in the base plate 41571 of the main path SK2, and is recessed long along the direction in which the game ball is thrown on the main path SK2.
When the game ball sent to the inside of the first recess 41571h is sent inside the first recess 41571h, an increase in frictional resistance with the first recess 41571h can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to suppress the game ball flowing down the main path SK2 from coming into contact with the first recess 41571h and stopping.

The first protrusion 41564b protruding from the surface facing the first recess 41571h is
571h. Thus, when a game ball sent along the main path SK2 comes into contact with the first convex portion 41564b, the game ball is guided to the first concave portion 41571h.
This makes it easier to throw the ball to the inside.

The second recess 41571i is formed in the base plate 41571 of the curved path WK1, and is recessed long along the direction of gravity (arrow U-D direction). The second recess 41571i is formed in an ellipse long in the vertical direction when viewed from the front, and the middle position of the ellipse in the horizontal direction is set to the middle position in the horizontal direction of the curved path WK1 extending in the vertical direction. The center of curvature on the upper side (main path SK2 side) of the ellipse of the second recess 41571i is placed on the throwing trajectory of the center of the game ball thrown on the main path SK2. Therefore, since the second recess 41571i is recessed above the throwing trajectory of the game ball thrown from the main path SK2, even if the game ball is thrown on the main path SK2 at a relatively high speed, the center of the game ball is not located in the second recess 41571.
As a result, the game ball passing through the main path SK2 can be guided to the second path SK3.
The game ball can be sent to the inside of the recess 41571i to make it easier to slow down its speed, and the game ball can be prevented from going wild on the curved path WK1.

The second convex portion 41564c protruding from the surface facing the second concave portion 41571i is bent in a substantially L-shape in front view. The bent portion of the second convex portion 41564c is set on the front side of the curved center on the upper side of the ellipse of the second concave portion 41571i in front view. The bent portion on one side of the second convex portion 41564c is extended in a direction perpendicular to the throwing direction of the game ball on the curved path WK1, and the bent portion on the other side is extended in a direction perpendicular to the throwing direction of the game ball on the main path SK2. This makes it possible to make the game ball sent from the main path SK2 to the curved path WK1 abut against the second convex portion 41564c on the other side and send it to the inside of the second concave portion 41571i, and to make it easier to reduce the sending speed of the game ball sent along the curved path WK11 by abutting against the second convex portion 41564c on one side. As a result, the game ball sent to the curved path WK1 can be prevented from becoming unruly, and the game ball can be sent smoothly.

The third recess 41571j is formed in the base plate 41571 of the main path SK3, and is recessed in an elliptical shape that is long in the throwing direction of the game ball on the main path SK3.
When the game ball is thrown inside the third recess 41571j, the third
It is possible to suppress an increase in frictional resistance with the recess 41571j. As a result, it is possible to suppress the game ball flowing down the main path SK3 from coming into contact with the third recess 41571j and stopping.

In addition, the third recess 41571j is set such that the curved center of the upstream end of the ball sending path of the game ball is set below the center position in the left-right direction of the second recess 41571i.
This makes it easier for the game ball that flows down the inside of the second recess 41571i to be received by the second recess 41571i, and makes it easier to send the game ball from the curved path WK1 to the main path SK3.

The third convex portion 41564d protruding from the surface facing the third concave portion 415671j is bent in a substantially L-shape in front view. The bent portion of the third convex portion 41564d is set on the front side of the curved center of the upstream end of the third concave portion 41571j in front view. The bent portion on one side of the third convex portion 41564d is extended in a direction perpendicular to the throwing direction of the game ball on the main path SK3, and the bent portion on the other side is extended in a direction perpendicular to the throwing direction of the game ball on the curved path WK1. This allows the game ball sent from the curved path WK1 to the main path SK3 to abut against the third convex portion 41564d on the other side and sent to the inside of the third concave portion 41571j, and the speed of the game ball sent along the main path SK3 to abut against the third convex portion 41564d on one side can be reduced. As a result, the game ball sent from the curved path WK1 to the main path SK1 can be prevented from becoming unruly, and the game ball can be sent smoothly.

Next, referring to FIG. 203 to FIG. 206, a game board 42013 in the 42nd embodiment will be described.
In the above-described first embodiment, the other end side of the board box 100 (main control device 110) disposed in the rear case 300 is fixed to the rear case 300 by a screw inserted from the rear side of the board box 100. In the forty-second embodiment,
A case where the second engagement member 42370 arranged on the rear case 42300 engages with the board box 42100 will be described.

First, referring to FIG. 203 and FIG. 204, a rear case 423 in the 42nd embodiment will be described.
203 shows the overall configuration of the rear case 42 in the 42nd embodiment.
Fig. 204(a) is a front view of the rear case 42300, and Fig. 204(b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the rear case 42300 taken along line CCIVb-CCIVb in Fig. 204(a). Note that the same parts as those in the above embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in Figures 203 and 204, the rear case 42300 in the 42nd embodiment has a bottom wall portion 42301 that is approximately rectangular when viewed from the front, and an outer wall portion 42302 that extends from the outer edges of the four sides of the bottom wall portion 42301 toward the front, and is formed into a box shape with one side (front side) open by each of these walls 42301, 42302.

The rear case 42300 includes an engagement member 310 disposed on the front side (the open side formed in a box shape (the side in the direction of the arrow F)) of the bottom wall portion 42301, a fixing member 320 disposed on the rear side of the rear case 42300 and fixing one end side of the board box 42100, and a bottom wall portion 4230.
A second engagement member 423 is disposed on the front side of the board box 42100 and fixes the other end of the board box 42100.
70.

The bottom wall portion 42301 has an opening 301a formed in the center thereof, which is rectangular when viewed from the front. Through the opening 301a, the third pattern display device 81 (FIG. 2) disposed on the back surface of the bottom wall portion 42301 can be inserted.
In addition, a cylindrical projection is provided on the front side of the bottom wall portion 42301.
The protrusion 301b is inserted into the slide groove 314 of the engagement member 310, the first opening 301c is opened at a position facing the fixing member 320, and the second opening 301b is opened at a position facing the engagement member 310.
The opening 301d and the second protrusion 42301f are cylindrically protruding from the front side (arrow F direction side) of the bottom wall portion 42301 and are inserted into a sliding groove 42372 of a second engagement member 42370 described later.
and a third opening 42301g formed above the second protruding portion 42301f (in the direction of the arrow U) and penetrating in the plate thickness direction (in the direction of the arrows FB).

The second protrusions 42301f are protrusions that determine the displacement direction of the second engagement member 42370, and are formed side by side at two locations in the gravity direction. The outer diameter of the second protrusions 42301f is set to a dimension that is slightly smaller than the groove width in the short direction of the sliding groove 42372 of the second engagement member 42370, which will be described later. Furthermore, the distance between the centers of the two second protrusions 42301f is set to a dimension that is smaller than the groove width in the long direction of the sliding groove 42372. This allows the sliding groove 4
The second protruding portions 42301f can be inserted and arranged at two locations inside the inner circumferential surface of the support 2372.

The third opening 42301g has a protruding portion 4211 of the board box 42100, which will be described later, on the inside.
The third opening 42301g is an opening into which the engaging member 310 is inserted, and is opened with a dimension larger than the outer shape of the protruding portion 42118 in a front view. In addition, the third opening 42301g is an opening through which the engaging member 310 is inserted into the fixing member 320 when the engaging member 310 and the fixing member 320 are engaged with each other (the state shown in FIG. 204(a)).
The protrusion 42118 is formed at a position adjacent to the fixing member 320 in the direction (arrow L direction) in which the engagement between the protrusion 42118 and the fixing member 320 is released. This makes it impossible to release the engagement between the engaging member 310 and the fixing member 320 when the protrusion 42118 is inserted into the third opening 42301g. The positional relationship between the protrusion 42118 and the engaging member 310 will be described in detail later.

The outer wall portion 42302 has a second opening 42302b that opens in the up-down direction (arrows U-D direction) on the side surface on the lower side (arrow D direction side) when viewed from the front. The second opening 42302b is
The opening is formed in the displacement region of the second engagement member 42370.
2370 can be displaced.

The outer shape of the board box 42100 when viewed from the front is formed into a horizontally long rectangular shape, and the main control device 110 is disposed inside. The board box 42100 also includes a bearing portion 117 (see FIG. 206(a)) protruding from an end portion on one end side (the side in the direction of the arrow R) and a protruding portion 42118 protruding from one surface on the front side of the board box 42100.

As described above, the protrusion 42118 is disposed in the third opening 42301 of the rear case 42300.
g, and is set to a length such that an opening 42118a (described later) is disposed on the front side of the bottom wall 42301 of the rear case 42300 when the front surface of the board box 42100 and the rear surface of the rear case 42300 are parallel to each other.
The board box 42100 is provided with an opening 42118a that opens in the direction of gravity, and a second engagement member 42370 (described later) is disposed in a state of being inserted inside the opening 42118a. This prevents the board box 42100 from rotating around the fixing member 320,
0 can be disposed on the rear side (arrow B direction side) of the rear case 42300 in a state where it cannot be displaced.

Further, the third opening 42301g into which the protrusion 42118 is inserted is formed at a position adjacent to the direction in which the engagement member 310 is released from the fixed member 320 (the direction of the arrow L) when the engagement member 310 and the fixed member 320 are engaged as described above (the state shown in FIG. 204(a)), so that the protrusion 42118 is disposed at a position adjacent to the engagement member 310. Further, the insertion dimension Y6 (see FIG. 204(b)) of the protrusion 42118 into the third opening 42301g is set to be equal to the separation distance Y7 (see FIG. 204(b)) between the front face of the engagement member 310 and the front face of the bottom wall portion 42301.
204(b), the engaging member 310 and the protruding portion 42118 are disposed at a position where they overlap in the front-rear direction (the direction of the arrows FB).

Therefore, in a state where the second engaging member 42370 is inserted into the opening 42118a of the protruding portion 42118, the engaging member 310 is moved in a direction in which the engaging member 310 releases the engaging member 320 from the fixing member 320 (the protruding portion 42
As a result, the second opening 42118a is regulated in displacement in the direction in which the second opening 42118a is disposed.
With the engaging member 42370 inserted, the engaging member 310 can be prevented from being illegally released from engagement with the fixing member 320, and the board box 42100 (main control unit 110) can be prevented from being replaced with an unauthorized board.

In addition, the opening 42118a of the protruding portion 42118 is opened in the direction of gravity, and the second engagement member 42370 inserted into the opening 42118a is displaced in the direction of gravity and inserted. Therefore, the displacement direction of the second engagement member 42370 (gravity direction) is set perpendicular to the displacement direction of the engagement member 310 (horizontal direction), so that the force when the engagement member 310 is forcibly operated by a player due to fraud is borne by the second engagement member 423 inserted into the opening 42118a.
This makes it easier for the engaging member 310 to be received by the fixing member 320. As a result, when the engaging member 310 is forcibly operated by a player in an illegal manner, the engaging member 310 can be prevented from being released from the engagement with the fixing member 320.

The second engagement member 42370 includes a plate member 42371 formed in a vertically elongated rectangular plate shape when viewed from the front, a recessed portion 42374 recessed downward (in the direction of arrow D) from an end portion on the upper side (the side in the direction of arrow U) of the plate member 42371, a second engagement portion 42373 protruding horizontally outward (in the direction of arrows L-R) from the end portion on the upper side (the side in the direction of arrow U) of the plate member 42371, and a recessed portion 42374.
4 and a slide groove 42372 that opens in the front-rear direction (the direction of the arrows F-B).

As described above, the sliding groove 42372 is an opening for displacing the second engagement member 42370, and is open long in the direction of gravity (the direction of the arrows U and D).
The width dimension of the second protrusion 42301f in the short direction (arrow L-R direction) of the slide groove 42372 is set to be approximately the same as the diameter of the second protrusion 42301f disposed inside the slide groove 42372.
When the second protrusion 42301 f is inserted into the sliding groove 42372 , the sliding direction of the second engagement member 42370 is determined to be the longitudinal direction of the opening of the sliding groove 42372 .

The recessed portion 42374 is an opening for facilitating elastic deformation of the upper end portion of the plate member 42371, and is recessed downward and cut out in the front-rear direction, thereby reducing the rigidity of the upper end portion of the plate member 42371 and facilitating elastic deformation.

The second engaging portion 42373 is a portion that engages with the end of the opening 42118a of the protruding portion 42118 described above, and is provided to protrude from both side surfaces in a direction perpendicular to the cutout direction of the recessed portion 42374. The distance X12 (see FIG. 204(a)) between the ends of the protruding ends on both sides is set to be equal to or larger than the distance X12 between the opening 42118a and the recessed portion 42374.
The dimension X13 (see FIG. 204(b)) of the opening 42118a in the left-right direction is set to be larger than the dimension X13 (see FIG. 204(b)) of the opening 42118a in the left-right direction. Thereby, when the second engaging member 42370 is inserted into the opening 42118a, the second engaging portion 42373 engages with the end of the opening 42118a, thereby preventing the second engaging portion 42373 from slipping out of the opening 42118a.

The second engagement portion 42373 is formed in a shape that protrudes outward in the horizontal direction from the upper side to the lower side of the plate member 42371.
When the plate member 42371 is inserted into the opening 42118a, the second engagement portion 42373 can be brought into contact with the inner side of the opening 42118a, making it easier to elastically deform the upper side of the plate member 42371.

In addition, the second engaging member 42370 is inserted into the opening 42118a (the engaging portion 42
373 is engaged with the protruding portion 42118), the lower end portion is
This makes it possible to prevent the second engagement portion 42370 from being operated from the outside of the rear case 42300. As a result, the second engagement portion 42370 is disposed inside the second opening 42302b of the rear case 42300.
This can prevent the engagement between 2373 and the protrusion 42118 from being illegally released, thereby preventing the board box 42100 (main control device 110) from being replaced with an unauthorized board.

Next, referring to FIG. 204 and FIG. 205, the board box 4 is attached to the rear case 42300.
A method of arranging the board box 42100 will be described. Fig. 205(a) is a front view of the rear case 42300, and Fig. 205(b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the rear case 42300 taken along the line CCVb-CCVb in Fig. 205(a). Figs. 204(a) and 204(b) show the state after the board box 42100 has been arranged on the rear case 42300, and Fig. 205(b) shows the state after the board box 42100 has been arranged on the rear case 42300.
205(a) and 205(b) show the state before the board box 42100 is disposed on the rear case 42300. FIG.

The board box 42100 in the 42nd embodiment is similar to the first embodiment described above.
First, the fixing member 320 is engaged with the engaging member 310 and one side is disposed on the rear side of the rear case 42300 .

As shown in FIG. 205( a ) and FIG. 205 ( b ), the engagement member 310 is fixed to the fixing member 3
20 (before displacement), the tip of the second piece 312 of the engaging member 310 is disposed on the front side of the third opening 42301g.
As a result, the board box 42100 can be prevented from being disposed in the rear case 42300 only by the engagement between the protrusion 42118 and the second engagement portion 42370.

Next, the other side of the board box 42100 is rotated around the connecting portion between the fixing member on one side and 320, and the protrusion 42118 is inserted into the inside of the third opening 42301g of the rear case 42300. As a result, the protrusion 42118 is disposed at a position where it can engage with the second engagement member 42370.

In addition, before being inserted into the inside of the third opening 42301g, the second engagement member 42370 is inserted into the second opening 42302b at its lower side and disposed outside the rear case 42300 (see FIG. 205(a)).
An operator installing the rear case 42300 can operate the second engagement member 42370 from the outside of the rear case 42300, and insert the second engagement member 42370 into the inside of the third opening 42301g.

In addition, since the second engagement member 42370 has its displacement direction set to the direction of gravity, it is disposed at the lower end by the action of gravity before being inserted inside the third opening 42301g.
When the second engaging member 42370 is inserted into the inside of the second engaging member 42370, it is possible to prevent the second engaging member 42370 from colliding with the second engaging member 42370. As a result, the work efficiency of the worker can be improved.

Furthermore, in the event that the second engaging member 42370 is forgotten to be engaged with the protruding portion 42118, the second engaging member 42370 can be disposed on the outside of the rear case 42300, making it easier for the operator to recognize that an abnormality is occurring. As a result, forgetting to engage the second engaging member 42370 with the protruding portion 42118 can be prevented.

Next, the rear case 42300 and the base plate 42060 will be described with reference to Fig. 206. Fig. 206(a) is a rear view of the game board 13, and Fig. 206(b) is a schematic diagram of the game board 13.
1A is a cross-sectional view of the game board 13 taken along line CCVIb-CCVIb in FIG.

206, a standing member 42060f is disposed on the back surface of the base plate 42060 in the forty-second embodiment. The standing member 42060f stands toward the back surface side (the direction of the arrow B) of the base plate 42060.
The bottom wall portion 42301 of the second casing 42060f is set on the same plane as the bottom wall portion 42301 of the second casing 42060f.
The protruding portion 42118 is disposed below the engaging member 42370 and outside the rear case 42300. In this way, if the rear case 42300 is disposed on the game board 42013 without engaging the second engaging member 42370 with the protruding portion 42118, the protruding portion 42060f can collide with the lower side of the second engaging member 42370. As a result, the second engaging member 42
This prevents the rear case 42300 from being disposed on the base plate 42060 in a state in which the engagement between the projection 42118 and the rear case 42300 is forgotten, or in a state in which the board box 42100 is forgotten to be disposed on the rear case 42300.

In this embodiment, a light emitting substrate that irradiates the inside of the rear case 42300 is disposed on the erected portion 42060f. This allows the erected portion 42060f to function both as a portion that irradiates light and as a portion that prevents the rear case 42300 and the base plate 42060 from engaging with each other in an abnormal state. As a result, the external shape of the base plate 42060 can be prevented from becoming large.

The present invention has been described above based on the above embodiment, but the present invention is not limited to the above form in any way, and it can be easily inferred that various modifications and improvements are possible within the scope that does not deviate from the spirit of the present invention.

In the first embodiment, the ball receiving portion 467 is retracted from the third position to the second position or the first position by the driving of the drive motor KM2, but the retraction from the third position to the second position or the first position may be driven by a biasing spring. For example, a biasing spring is disposed between the rack 466 or the movable rack 464 and the base member 470, and an elastic force is applied in accordance with the displacement of the rack 466 or the movable rack 464.

In this case, when the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced to the third position and performs the dispensing operation, the driving motor K
By turning off the drive of M3, the ball receiving portion 467 can be displaced toward the second position or the first position by the biasing force of the biasing spring.

Therefore, the time until the driving force of the driving motor KM2 is switched to the third position is utilized,
Since the ball receiving portion 467 can be displaced, wobbling of the lower displacement member 440 caused by the reaction of the ejection action when a game ball is ejected from the inside of the ball receiving portion 467 can be suppressed.

In other words, when a game ball is discharged from the inside of the ball receiving portion 467, the load on the lower displacement member 440 is lightened by the amount of the discharged game ball, and the lower displacement member 440 is likely to be displaced upward as a reaction; however, by immediately displacing the ball receiving portion 467, a force is applied to displace the base member 470 downward as a reaction due to the rotational displacement of the ball receiving portion 467, thereby countering the reaction when the ball is discharged from the lower displacement member 440.

In the first embodiment, the engagement protrusion 882 that restricts the rotation of the rotating body 800 is
In the above description, two of the rotors 800 are formed on the side of the rotor 800 at a predetermined interval, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a plurality of the rotors 800 may be provided in series at a predetermined interval on the side wall of the rotor 800. In this case, the rotation of the rotor 800 can be restricted at any position, and the rotor 800 can be restricted from rotating due to an external force when the cover member 770 is in the open state.

In the above-described first embodiment, the opening 831 is formed on the outer circumferential surface of the rotating body 800, and the game ball is sent from the opening 831.
b may be formed on the side opposite to ...

In the above first embodiment, the rotating body 800 is described as having a cylindrical outer shape, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the rotating body 800 may be polygonal, elliptical, or a combination of these. In this case, the shape of the rotating body 800 can be made complex, so that the player can easily visually recognize that the performance has been changed by the rotational displacement of the rotating body 800.

In the above eighth embodiment, the outer circumferential surface of the rotation operation unit 8654 is formed so as to be operable by the player, but a push-type button may be disposed on the outer circumferential surface of the rotation operation unit 8654. In this case, the player can perform not only the operation of applying a rotational force to the rotation operation unit 8654, but also the operation of pressing the push button, or the operation of combining the rotation operation and the pushing operation of the rotation operation unit 8654. As a result, a plurality of operation forms of the rotation operation unit 8654 can be formed, which can provide interest to the player.

In the above eighth embodiment, the case where the transmission gear 8651 and the transmission gear 8652 are in mesh with each other has been described, but this is not necessarily limited to this.
A torque limiter or the like that blocks the transmission of driving force when an overload is applied may be interposed between the transmission gear 8652 and the transmission gear 8653.

In this case, when the player stops the rotation of the rotation operation part 8654 in a rotating state, the transmission of the rotational driving force from the drive motor KM6 is interrupted, and it is possible to prevent the rotation of the rotation operation part 8654 from continuing. As a result, it is possible to prevent the rotation operation unit 8650 from being broken when the player inputs a rotation in the direction opposite to the A direction to the rotation operation part 8654.

Furthermore, when a player operates the rotary operation unit 8654, if the player's finger or clothing is caught between the rotary operation unit 8654 and the upper tray 8017 on the rotation direction side of the rotary operation unit 8654, the rotation is stopped,
This can prevent the player's fingers or clothes from being further pinched.
This can prevent injury from being pinched between 654 and the upper plate 8017.

In the above eighth embodiment, the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 8654 is the A direction, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 8654 may be the left-right direction with respect to the pachinko machine 10. In this case, the player can perform an action associated with the performance of the game machine, and the performance effect can be improved. For example, by hitting the rotation operation unit 8654 with the left hand so that it rotates in the right direction, a performance of hitting (slapping) the character displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be performed.

In the above first embodiment, a case was described in which the substrate box 100 is arranged on the fixed member 320 and the fixed member 320 is engaged with the engaging member 310 to prevent the substrate box 100 from being replaced with an unauthorized substrate. However, this is not necessarily limited to this, and other members (for example, a third pattern display device 81 or a detection device capable of detecting unauthorized input such as unauthorized radio waves or vibrations) may be used as long as they are arranged on the fixed member 320 and have the effect of preventing unauthorized removal.

In the first embodiment, the first recess 571h, the second recess 571i, and the third recess 571j formed in the first unit 551, and the first convex portion 564b, the second convex portion 564c, and the third convex portion 564d are formed in the first unit 551.
In the above description, the first convex portion 564b, the second convex portion 564c, and the third convex portion 564d are formed at positions facing each other, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example,
d may be positioned upstream of the first recess 571h, the second recess 571i, and the third recess 571j, so that the game ball flowing downstream abuts against the first recess 564b, the second recess 564c, and the third recess 564d, and then is received by the first recess 571h, the second recess 571i, and the third recess 571j.

In the first embodiment, the thickness of the decorative member 154 is equal to or larger than the recess 151 of the main body 151.
In the above description, the depth of the recess in the main body 15 is smaller than the depth of the recess in the main body 15 b. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the decorative member 154 may be made of an elastically deformable material.
The recess 151b may be formed thicker than the recess depth of the recess 151b of the first embodiment. In this case, the general winning port unit 150 may be compressed and elastically deformed when it is disposed on the base plate 60, so that the main body 151 can be disposed in a state of abutting against the base plate 60.

In the above first embodiment, when the cam member 422 is positioned in the second displacement state, the forces PW1 and PW2 acting on the cam member 422 from the first link member 431 act in directions that cancel each other out, but this is not necessarily limited to this.
For example, the direction of the force input to the cam member 422 from the point where the end of the cam member 422 and the plate-like protrusion 431b come into contact with each other may be set to the direction from the contact point toward the axis of the shaft portion 422a. This makes it possible to prevent the force acting on the cam member 422 in the direction of rotation about the shaft portion 422a.

In the first embodiment, the other end of the board box 100 is attached to the rear case 300 by a screw.
In the above description, the board box 100 is disposed on the rear side of the rear case 300, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the other end side of the board box 100 may be fixed by a sealing tool that cannot be removed when engaged with the rear case 300. To explain in detail, a cylindrical sealing tool is inserted through openings formed at multiple locations on the other end side of the rear case 300 into insertion portions recessed at multiple locations on the rear side of the rear case 300, and the insertion portions and the sealing tool are engaged, thereby disposing the board box 100 on the rear side of the rear case 300 in a state in which it cannot rotate (move).

When removing the board box 100 , the other end of the board box 100 can be removed from the rear case 300 by cutting the engagement portion between the insertion portion and the sealing tool.
Furthermore, when again placing the other end side of the substrate box 100 in the rear case 300, a new sealing device can be inserted into an unused opening in the substrate box 100 and engaged with an unused insertion portion in the rear case 300, thereby placing the other end side of the substrate box 100 in the rear case 300.

In the first embodiment, the outer shape of the decorative member 154 in a front view is formed to be larger than the opening shape of the second opening 60b, and the end of the decorative member 154 is formed on the decorative member 60c of the base plate 60.
In the above description, the decorative member 154 is disposed so as to overlap the second opening 60b in the front-rear direction, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the outer shape of the decorative member 154 in a front view may be set to be substantially the same as the opening shape of the second opening 60b.

In this case, the decorative member 154 of the general winning port unit 150 and the decorative member 6 of the base plate 60
By forming the decorative member 154 and the decorative member 60c from the same material, the decorative member 154 and the decorative member 60c are formed from a single sheet, and the decorative member 154 is cut from the sheet.
Therefore, it is not necessary to form the decorative member 154 in a separate process, and the yield rate when forming the decorative member 154 can be improved.

In addition, when the outer shape of the decorative member 154 in a front view is formed to be substantially the same as the opening shape of the second opening 60b, the decorative member 154 is disposed inside the second opening 60b.
It is preferable that the front faces of the decorative member 154 and the decorative member 60c are arranged on the same plane. In this case, the decorative surfaces of the decorative member 154 and the decorative member 60c coincide in the front-to-rear direction when viewed from the front, so that the player can recognize the decorations of the decorative member 154 and the decorative member 60c as one decoration.

In the first embodiment, a first convex portion 571h, a second convex portion 571i, and a third convex portion 571k are formed on the inner surface of the front side (arrow F direction side) of the throwing path of the game ball of the first unit 551, the first convex portion 571h, the second convex portion 571i, and the third convex portion 571k are formed to protrude toward the rear side (arrow B direction side), and a first recessed portion 571h, a second recessed portion 571i, and the third recessed portion 571k are formed to recess toward the rear side on the inner surface of the rear side of the throwing path of the game ball of the first unit 511.
Although the case where the recess 571j is provided has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this.

For example, the first recess 571h, the second recess 571i, and the third recess 571j and the first protrusion 571
The second convex portion 571i and the third convex portion 571k may be formed on the inner surface on the opposite side in the front-rear direction when viewed from the front.

In addition, a recess may be formed on the inner surface of the front side at a position opposite to the second recess 571i, the recess being recessed toward the front image. In this case, the recess is recessed in the ball throwing space of the curved path WK1,
The ball throwing space can be enlarged. Therefore, the flow of the game ball can be prevented from becoming too slow on the curved path WK1. As a result, the game ball can be prevented from remaining on the curved path WK1.

In the ninth embodiment, the inclined surface 9431b1 protrudes toward the front side as it approaches the cam member 422. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example,
The inclined surface 9431b1 may be formed so as to have an inclination such that the amount of protrusion toward the front surface becomes smaller toward the cam member 422.

In this case, when the lower displacement unit 400 is in the second displacement state and the end of the cam member 422 abuts against the plate-shaped protrusion 9531a, the cam member 422 is moved toward the curved wall portion 411e of the front base 411.
As a result, it is possible to suppress the cam member 422 from swinging in the front-rear direction, and it is possible to easily maintain the lower displacement member 440 in the position of the second displacement state.

In the above eleventh embodiment, the light emitting body 11491a is formed at a position higher than the center of the game ball received in the ball receiving portion 467 (in the direction of the arrow U). However, this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the light emitting body 11491a may be disposed at approximately the same height as the center of the game ball received in the ball receiving portion 467. In this case, the transparent portion 11451
It is preferable that the height position of b is formed from the center of the game ball received in the ball receiving portion 467 to above the center.

According to this, when a part of the light emitted from the light emitter 11491a is blocked by the game ball, the shadow of the game ball formed on the transmission part 11451b can be formed in a semicircular shape by the upper hemisphere of the game ball. As a result, the shadow formed on the transmission part 11451b can be formed in a round shape of the game ball, so that the player can easily recognize the position of the game ball received in the ball receiving part 467.

In the above twelfth and thirty-ninth embodiments, the displacement of the third piece 12467e, 39467e is explained as being caused by the load of the game ball, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a sensor that detects the passage of a game ball along the ball sending path may be attached to the ball receiving portion 12467, 39467, and the third piece 12467e, 39467e may be displaced independently due to the detection of the game ball by the sensor. In this way, the second piece 12
Since it is no longer necessary to displace the ball receiving portion 12
In this case, the reliability of the displacement of the third piece 12467e can be improved.
A driving device for displacing ball receiving portions 12467, 39467e alone is provided in ball receiving portions 12467, 39467.

In the twelfth and thirty-ninth embodiments, the rotation axis for the rotational displacement of the third pieces 12467e and 39467e is formed on the first pieces 12467c and 39467c, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the shaft portions 12467e3 and 39467e3 of the third pieces 12467e and 39467e are inserted into the openings formed in the rack 466, and the third pieces 1
The third pieces 12467e and 39467e may be rotated and displaced with respect to the rack 466. In this case, the distance between the rotation axis and the connecting portion of the second pieces 12467d and 39467d can be easily increased, so that the amount of displacement of the third pieces 12467e and 39467d with respect to the amount of displacement of the second pieces 12467d and 39467d can be reduced.
As a result, the displacement amount of the shielding plate 124 of the third piece 12467e can be increased.
In this case, the opening formed in the rack 466 is formed as an elongated hole through which the shafts 12467e3 and 39467e3 can slide.

In the thirteenth embodiment, the case where the second path member 13570 is moved in the front-rear direction relative to the first path member 13560 has been described. However, this is not necessarily limited to this.
For example, the first path member 13560 may be moved in the front-rear direction relative to the second path member 13570. In this case, the relative positional relationship between the second path member 13570 and the front of the base plate 60 (game board 13) can prevent the player from understanding the distance between the facing first member and the facing second member. As a result, the operation rate of the game machine can be improved.

In the above first, tenth and twenty-fifth embodiments, the decorative members 154, 10154 and 25154 are attached using adhesive tape 154a, 10154a and 25154a, respectively. However, this is not necessarily limited to this, and for example, an adhesive made of a liquid material may be used.

In the thirteenth, thirty-second, thirty-third, thirty-fourth and thirty-fifth embodiments, the first
The first path members 13560, 32560, 33560, 34560, and 35560 are formed of a non-light-transmitting material.
Although a case has been described in which the opposing gap between 560 and the second path members 13570, 32570, and 34570 is made difficult for the player to recognize, this is not necessarily limited to this.

For example, the first path members 13560, 32560, 33560, 34560, and 35560
The first path member 13560, 32560, 33560, 34560, 35560 and the second path member 1357 are connected to each other by forming a slit-shaped opening having a width smaller than the diameter of the game ball.
The player may be allowed to visually recognize through the openings the game ball flowing down between the opposing 0, 32570, and 34570. In this case, the distance to the adjacent openings of the multiple openings formed in a slit shape is set to be smaller than the diameter of the game ball.

As a result, the first path members 13560, 32560, 33560, 34560, and 355
The game ball flowing down between the opposing second path members 13570, 32570, and 34570 can be recognized by the player through the opening.

In addition, circular openings smaller than the diameter of the game ball are formed in the first path members 13560, 32560, 33560, 34560, and 35560, so that the first path members 13560,
32560, 33560, 34560, 35560 and second path members 13570 and 3257
The game ball flowing down between the opposing first path members 13560, 32560, 33560, 34570 may be visually recognized by the player through the opening. In this case, the width dimension between adjacent openings is formed smaller than the diameter of the game ball. Therefore, the openings can be made smaller than when the openings are formed in a slit shape, and the game ball can be visually recognized through the opening.
This prevents the player from noticing the distance between the opposing second path members 13570, 32570, 34570 and 560, 35560.

In the eighteenth embodiment, the portion to which the displacement member 18310 is engaged (the engaged portion 18332
In the above description, the engaging portion 18332 with which the displacement member 18310 is engaged may be formed on the board box 100 that is fixed to the fixing member 18320 by crimping.

In this case, when the board box 100 is not disposed in the rear case 18300,
The displacement member 18310 cannot be disposed inside the rear case 18300.
The cover 8310 can be made to protrude outside the rear case 18300 due to its own weight.

As a result, if the board box 100 is forgotten to be attached to the rear case 18300, when the game board 18013 is placed on the outer frame 11, the displacement member 18310 can be hooked onto the outer frame 11 (see Figure 164 (b)), thereby making the worker aware that the board box 100 has been forgotten to be attached.

In the twenty-first embodiment, the front side (arrow F direction side) of the bottom wall portion 302 of the rear case 300
The insertion portion 21724b of the rotation unit 21700 disposed in the recess 31 of the displacement member 310
In the above description, the insertion portion 21724b is inserted into the recess 317 of the displacement member 310 to prevent unauthorized release of the engagement between the displacement member 310 and the fixed member 320, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the insertion portion 21724b may be formed on the board box 100 disposed on the fixed member 320.

In this case, the insertion portion 21724b is disposed on the front side of the bottom wall portion 302 through an opening formed in the fixing member 320. Furthermore, the insertion portion 21724b is formed in a portion into which a shaft to be fixed to the fixing member 320 by crimping is inserted. This prevents the insertion portion 21724b from being damaged if the bearing portion 117 of the board box 100 is cut and illegally removed from the rear case 21300.
724b can be left inside the recess 317 of the displacement member 310. As a result, it can be made difficult to remove the fixing member 320 from the rear case 21300.

Therefore, when replacing the fixing member 320, it is necessary to correctly fix the crimped portion between the board box 100 and the fixing member 320 (cut the crimped portion).
Since it is possible to make it difficult to illegally remove the board box 21300 from the rear member 21300, it is possible to prevent the fixing member 320 from being removed and replaced with an unauthorized board box.

In the above-mentioned 42nd embodiment, a light-emitting substrate that emits light is arranged on the upright portion 42060f, but this is not necessarily limited to this, and for example, it may be formed as a control substrate that controls a drive member arranged on the base plate 42060, or as a passage for throwing game balls.

<First control example>
Next, a first control example of the present invention will be described with reference to Figs. 207 to 287. Note that the first control example is a control example in which some configurations are changed from the above-mentioned embodiments, and detailed descriptions of the configurations similar to those of the above-mentioned embodiments will be omitted. Note that, in the configurations used in this control example, some configurations that are the same as those of the above-mentioned embodiments are given different reference numerals, but this is for the purpose of easily explaining the invention of this control example, and the specific contents of the configurations are the same as those of the corresponding configurations of the above-mentioned embodiments, so detailed descriptions of those configurations will be omitted.

Conventionally, there has been a pachinko machine 10 that allows a player to play with the aim of winning a jackpot game by executing a jackpot game when a jackpot is won in a lottery for a special symbol, and making it easier for the ball to win a prize in a winning device (e.g., a variable prize winning device) during the jackpot game. In this way, with pachinko machine 10, when a player goes through a lottery to win a jackpot and plays the jackpot game, there has been a problem in that if the rate at which the ball wins the prize winning device (variable prize winning device) is low, this reduces the player's motivation to play.

This problem is caused by the fact that as the balls flow down the play area formed on the play board 13, they collide with multiple obstacles (e.g., nails) on the play board 13, changing the direction in which the balls flow, causing an increase or decrease in the number of balls that win in the variable winning device 65, and is therefore an unavoidable problem in the pachinko machine 10.

In contrast to this, in this first control example, the pseudo attacker (performance attacker) 165 (see FIG. 208) is driven in synchronization with the attacker (variable winning device) 65, which is opened during a jackpot game, and the pseudo attacker 165 is configured so that in addition to balls that have won the variable winning device 65, balls that have won the specific general winning port 163 (see FIG. 208) and the specific out port 166 (see FIG. 208) also flow into the pseudo attacker 165. The pseudo attacker 165 is configured to be easier for the player to see than the variable winning device 65.

By configuring it in this way, when the jackpot game starts, the player plays the jackpot game while watching the balls entering the pseudo attacker 165. Therefore, it is possible to make the player believe that more balls are entering the variable winning device 65 during the jackpot game than actually entered the variable winning device 65 during the jackpot game.

In addition, among the balls shot in a right-hand hit game (a game in which a game ball is shot toward a flow path in a game area provided to the right of the variable display unit 80 (to the right from the viewpoint of FIG. 208)) executed during a jackpot game, balls that have not won in the variable winning device 65 (balls that have won in other winning (ball) ports before reaching the variable winning device 65) are configured to win in the pseudo attacker 165. Therefore, if the number of winning balls in the variable winning device 65 decreases, the number of winning (balls) in other winning (ball) ports (hereinafter referred to as winning ports, etc.) tends to increase, so that a predetermined number of balls can be stably won in the pseudo attacker 165 regardless of an increase or decrease in the number of winning balls in the variable winning device 65.

In addition, in this first control example, the winning effect is executed in accordance with the timing at which a ball that has won (entered) each winning port (specific winning port 65a, specific general winning port 163, specific out port 166) enters the pseudo attacker 165.

This allows a winning performance based on the ball's entry into the variable winning device 65 to be executed at the timing when the ball enters the pseudo attacca 165, so that the player can believe that the pseudo attacca 165 is a real attacca (variable winning device 65). The winning performance executed based on the ball's entry into the variable winning device 65 is, for example, a winning sound notification performance for notifying the player that the ball has entered the variable winning device 65, or a winning ball number display performance for displaying information (acquired information) on the third pattern display device 81 to indicate the amount of benefits (prize balls) given to the player based on the ball's entry into the variable winning device 65. Also, when a ball enters the pseudo attacca 165 after entering a winning port other than the variable winning device 65, the winning sound notification performance is executed in accordance with the timing of the ball's entry into the pseudo attacca 165.

In addition, in this control example, in order to allow balls that have entered different winning holes to enter the pseudo attacker 165, a guide channel 690 (see FIG. 208) is provided so that the balls that have passed through each winning hole are guided above the pseudo attacker 165. However, since the distance from each winning hole to the pseudo attacker 165 is different, the order in which the balls enter each winning hole may differ from the order in which the balls enter the pseudo attacker 165. Therefore, in this first control example, the order in which the balls enter the pseudo attacker 165 can be determined based on the type of winning hole through which the balls entered and the timing of entry. Then, if the number of balls exceeds a predetermined number (the number at which the closing condition of the variable winning device 65 is met (for example, 10 balls)) during the period in which the pseudo attacker 165 is continuously open, a specific winning effect (overflow effect) is executed.

In this way, in a configuration in which balls that enter each winning port flow down the guide flow path 690, the order in which the balls enter the pseudo attacker 165 is calculated, rather than the order in which they entered each winning port, and a specific winning effect (overflow effect) is executed based on the calculation result, making it possible to execute the winning effect without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

In addition, in this control example, the above-mentioned winning effects are executed based on the detection results of the detection sensors 65s1, 65s2, 163s, 166s (see FIG. 208) for detecting that a ball has entered each winning slot, etc., so there is no need to provide a dedicated detection sensor for executing the winning effects using a ball that enters the pseudo attacker 165. This allows the number of detection means (sensors) attached to the pachinko machine 10 to be reduced, thereby reducing design costs.

Next, a brief description will be given of the characteristic presentation content used in the pachinko machine 10 of this first control example. Conventionally, there have been pachinko machines 10 that have a configuration capable of reserving and storing a predetermined number (for example, four) of drawing rights for special symbols, and that perform a process (so-called pre-reading process) to determine (predict) the result of the jackpot drawing in advance using information (winning information) contained in the reserved and stored drawing rights during the period from when the drawing rights are reserved and stored to when the special symbol drawing is actually performed, and then perform a presentation (so-called pre-reading presentation) based on the result of this pre-determination.

In conventional gaming machines using such a configuration, for example, a look-ahead effect may be executed in which the display mode of identification information (so-called reserved symbols) indicating the reserved lottery right is changed to execute a look-ahead effect that notifies the player of the lottery result in advance. When the display mode of the reserved symbols is changed, executing such a look-ahead effect can keep the player in anticipation of winning the jackpot in the special symbol lottery corresponding to the reserved symbol during the period until the special symbol lottery corresponding to the reserved symbol is executed (the special symbol lottery period executed before the corresponding reserved symbol).

However, in the case of the above-mentioned look-ahead performance, when a special pattern lottery corresponding to a reserved pattern whose display mode has been changed (variable reserved pattern) is executed, the display of the variable reserved pattern disappears, making it difficult for the player to easily determine whether the currently executing special pattern lottery (variable) corresponds to the variable reserved pattern. In response to this, in this control example, the currently executing display mode is configured to be displayed based on the variable display mode of the reserved pattern that corresponded to the currently executing special pattern lottery (variable). This allows the player to easily determine whether the currently executing special pattern lottery (variable) corresponds to the variable reserved pattern.

In addition, as described above, when a pre-reading effect in which the display mode of the reserved symbols is changed to notify the player of the lottery results for special symbols in advance is configured to notify multiple types of effect results (for example, when configured to notify multiple effect results with different expectations for winning the jackpot), it is necessary to clearly differentiate the variable display modes so that each effect can be easily distinguished, which creates the problem of making it difficult to notify a lot of information in advance.

In contrast to this, in this control example, in addition to the above-mentioned look-ahead performance, a performance is executed in which the display mode of a performance device (treasure chest device 750 (see FIG. 210)) provided separately from the third pattern display device 81 is changed. Among the multiple pieces of information acquired by the look-ahead process, the information to be notified to the player in advance by changing the display mode of the reserved patterns (for example, advance look-ahead information to show the result of the determination of whether or not a jackpot has been won) is different from the information to be notified to the player in advance by changing the display mode of the treasure chest device 750 (for example, advance look-ahead information to show the type of jackpot that has been won).

In this way, by providing multiple objects to be performed (reserved patterns displayed on the third pattern display device 81, treasure chest device 750) for the look-ahead performance and varying the type of information notified in advance by each object to be performed, it is possible to make it easier to notify the player of a lot of information in advance. In addition, because this control example uses a performance device other than the third pattern display device 81, it is possible to make it easier to continuously notify the results of the look-ahead performance.

Also, in the past, there have been machines that execute a variable presentation in which identification information (third symbol) for indicating the lottery result of the special symbol is displayed (dynamically displayed) on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 and then stopped and displayed. With such a pachinko machine 10, it is possible to predict whether the lottery result of the current special symbol is a jackpot or not based on the variable presentation mode of the third symbol, which can increase the excitement of the game. However, because the variable presentation mode of the third symbol is determined solely based on the lottery result of the special symbol, there is a problem that players who play for long periods of time can easily determine the lottery result of the special symbol based on the variable presentation mode that is executed.

In addition, in order to execute a specific variable presentation mode (a stopped display mode of the third symbol) that indicates that the result of the special symbol drawing is a lottery result that is advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot), the condition is that the result of the special symbol drawing is a lottery result that is advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot), so there is a problem in that the frequency with which that variable presentation mode is executed is low.

In contrast to this, in this first control example, the variable presentation mode of the third symbol, which is used to indicate the lottery result of the special symbol, is configured to make it possible to notify the lottery result of a symbol other than the special symbol (e.g., a normal symbol). By configuring it in this way, the variable presentation mode of the third symbol can be set based on information other than the lottery result of the special symbol (e.g., the lottery result of the normal symbol), so it is possible to prevent the lottery result of the special symbol from being easily determined by the variable presentation mode that is executed.

Furthermore, since the specific variable presentation mode can be executed even when the result of the lottery for the normal symbol is advantageous to the player (e.g., a win), the frequency of execution of the specific variable presentation mode can be increased.

In addition, in this first control example, in order to show the result of the lottery for the normal pattern using a variable presentation that is set based on the variable time (special pattern variable time) that is set based on the lottery result for the special pattern, the third pattern is temporarily stopped (actually moving (oscillating) but in a nearly stopped state) at the timing when the variable time for the normal pattern has elapsed. This makes it possible to make the third pattern appear to be stopped in line with the stopping timing of the normal pattern.

In addition, in this control example, when the third symbol is temporarily stopped at the timing when the normal symbol stops during a variable effect corresponding to the variable time (special symbol variable time) set based on the lottery result of the special symbol, the presentation mode of the remaining time effect executed during the remaining time is changed based on the remaining time from the temporary stop timing (the time from the temporary stop timing to when the special symbol is stopped and displayed). For example, if the remaining time is less than 3 seconds, a remaining time effect is executed in which the temporary stop display of the third symbol continues, and if the remaining time is 3 seconds or more, the third symbol that is temporarily stopped is displayed again.

This prevents the third symbol that is temporarily stopped from changing again even when the remaining time is short (e.g., 0.5 seconds), resulting in an effect that is difficult for the player to understand. It also prevents the player from becoming bored with the game by continuing to display the temporary stop even when the remaining time is long (e.g., 10 seconds).

Furthermore, in this first control example, the remaining time is roughly divided (for example, into 3-second intervals) and a re-changing performance corresponding to that division is executed. This makes it easier to execute a re-changing performance corresponding to the remaining time. Also, the performance modes that can be set as re-changing performances have performance periods preset at 3-second intervals, such as 3 seconds, 6 seconds, 9 seconds, and so on, and after setting the performance period corresponding to the remaining time, a re-changing performance is executed in which the first half of the performance mode is deleted by a predetermined amount in order to correspond to the detailed remaining time.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to execute a re-changing effect that corresponds to the remaining time that is randomly calculated using a preset presentation period at regular intervals, thereby reducing the amount of presentation data used for re-changing. Although detailed explanations are omitted, in this control example, a presentation in which the third symbol oscillates is set as the first half (1 second) of the presentation mode that is preset to correspond to the remaining time. This makes it possible to prevent the execution of an effect that gives the player a sense of discomfort, even if part of the first half of the presentation mode is deleted to correspond to the actual remaining time.

In addition, in this control example, if the result of the special pattern lottery is not a jackpot but a small jackpot, which is a lottery result that can give the player a smaller number of bonuses (prize balls) than in a jackpot game, the above-mentioned specific variable presentation is also executed.

The small win game that is executed when a small win is won is configured to have the same game content as the winning game that is executed during the initial period (the round game period of the first round) of the big win game that is executed when the above-mentioned big win is won.

As a result, even if a winning game is executed after a specific variable presentation is executed, it is difficult for the player to tell at that point whether the current winning game is a winning game based on a big win or a winning game based on a small win, so the player can have a sense of anticipation for a big win for a long period of time.

In addition, in this first control example, a notification effect is executed to notify the player whether the winning game being played is a big win game or a small win game, using the period during which the same game content is executed for the big win game and the small win game. By configuring it in this way, information that is difficult to determine from the content of the winning game alone can be notified by the effect, thereby enhancing the presentation effect.

Conventionally, as a performance (preview performance) to suggest to the player the result of the lottery for the special symbol, there is a performance (operation performance) in which the player operates the operation means (frame button 22) to display the preview content. When performing such an operation performance, it is common to set a period during which the operation of the operation means can be effectively identified (operation valid period), and configure it so that the preview content is displayed if the operation means is operated within the operation valid period. In order to inform the player that the above-mentioned operation valid period has been set, for example, a display mode (button display) imitating the operation means and a display mode indicating the operation valid period (for example, a time gauge display) are displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Furthermore, in order to have the player operate the operation means multiple times in one operation performance, there is a display mode in which a time gauge is attached to each of multiple button displays.

With a gaming machine having such a configuration, the player can grasp multiple preview contents by operating the operating means within the effective operation period corresponding to each button display, which allows the player to actively participate in the presentation. However, when multiple button displays with set effective operation periods are displayed at the same time, if the player temporarily neglects to operate the frame button 22, it becomes difficult to operate the operating means appropriately for each of the individually set effective operation periods, resulting in a problem that the player's motivation to participate in the presentation decreases while the effective operation periods are being set.

In contrast to this, the first control example is configured to be able to execute multiple operation effects whose effective operation periods overlap, and is further configured to execute a fused operation effect that fuses the operation effects when the effective operation periods of the operation effects satisfy a predetermined condition. Specifically, the fused operation effect is executed when the display state of the time gauge that indicates the remaining period of the effective operation period becomes the same between the multiple operation effects.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to make it possible for multiple operation presentations to change into one fusion operation presentation, which makes it possible to preserve the possibility of completing the operation presentation to the end. This makes it possible to prevent a decrease in motivation to participate in the operation presentation during the operation presentation.

In addition, some conventional pachinko machines 10 are configured to display specific advance notice content even if the operation means is not operated within the effective operation period set for the operation presentation. In such pachinko machines 10, specific advance notice content can be displayed even if the player does not operate the operation means, which can prevent a decrease in the motivation of a player who is unable to operate the operation means within the effective operation period to play. However, with such a configuration, there is a problem in that the correlation between operating the operation means within the effective operation period and the display of the advance notice content is low, which reduces the presentation effect.

In contrast to this, in this first control example, if the operating means has not been operated when a predetermined period of the effective operation period has elapsed, an effect (automatic press effect) is executed in which a display mode (button display) that imitates the operating means displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 is automatically operated. This strengthens the correlation between operating the operating means during the effective operation period and the display of the preview content, thereby enhancing the effect of the effect.

Furthermore, in this first control example, if the player operates the operating means during the automatic press effect, the presentation mode of the automatic press effect can be changed in response to the player's operation. This makes it possible to provide the player with the enjoyment of operating the operating means until the end of the period during which the operation validity period is set.

The configuration of the pachinko machine 10 used in this first control example will now be described with reference to FIG. 207. FIG. 207 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example. As shown in FIG. 207, the pachinko machine 10 in this first control example differs from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment described above (see FIG. 2) in that a through gate 67 is provided in the left area of the game board 13 (the game area formed to the left of the variable display unit 80), but is otherwise the same. The same components are given the same reference numerals and detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 207, the pachinko machine 10 of this first control example is provided with a through gate 67 in the left area, and is configured so that all balls shot when the player plays a left-handed game (a game to make the ball flow down to the left area of the game board 13) pass through the through gate 67. This configuration makes it possible for the player to play a left-handed game (a game to make the ball flow down to the left area of the game board 13) and have the ball enter the first winning hole 64, and while the first special symbol is being drawn, the lottery for the normal symbol can be executed. This makes it possible to show the lottery result for the normal symbol using a variable presentation (special symbol 1 variable presentation) that dynamically displays identification information (third symbol) for showing the lottery result for the first special symbol on the third symbol display device 81.

The details of the special symbol 1 variable presentation will be described later with reference to FIG. 212, but in this first control example, the third symbol is temporarily displayed as a stopped symbol (the third symbol is oscillated to the extent that the player believes that the third symbol is stopped) during the dynamic display period of the special symbol (while the third symbol is changing) in accordance with the timing when the lottery result of the normal symbol is stopped and displayed. This makes it possible to notify the player of the lottery result of the normal symbol using the third symbol, providing the player with an unexpected presentation.

In addition, this first control example is configured to execute an effect (charge effect (see FIG. 212)) in which the third symbol is stopped (temporarily stopped) in the same winning display mode in the case of a winning normal symbol and a winning special symbol. This makes it difficult for the player to tell whether the winning display mode that is stopped is a display mode showing the lottery result of the special symbol or the lottery result of the normal symbol. This makes it easier for the player to have a sense of anticipation for the winning game that is executed after the third symbol is stopped and displayed.

Furthermore, because the charge effect is configured to be executed when either a normal symbol or a special symbol is won, the frequency of execution of the charge effect can be increased compared to when the charge effect is executed only when a special symbol is won. This makes it easier for players to experience a variety of effects, preventing them from becoming bored with the game too quickly.

Returning to Figure 207, we will continue the explanation. A play area (lower right play area) covered with a resin outer edge member 73 (73b) is formed in the right area of the game board 13. This lower right play area is covered with the outer edge member 73b, which is transparent and has a surface treatment (e.g., embossing) that causes light to be diffusely reflected, making it more difficult for the player to see than the other play areas.

A detailed explanation will be given later with reference to FIG. 208, but the lower right play area is provided with a special winning device 550 having a flow path for letting the balls flow down and various winning holes through which the balls can win, and furthermore, an ejection flow path is formed so that the balls that win in the various winning holes can be used for simulated effects. The balls that flow down the lower right play area are then configured to enter an outlet (not shown) and be ejected outside the pachinko machine 10.

Next, referring to FIG. 208, the types of ball entrances (winning holes) provided in the special winning device 550 and the flow paths of the game balls that enter each ball entrance will be described. The flow paths (main paths SK1 to SK6) of the game balls that flow into the inside of the first unit 551 of the special winning device 550 have already been described with reference to FIG. 22 and the like in the first embodiment, so details will be omitted here. FIG. 208 is a schematic cross-sectional view of the special winning device 550. As shown in FIG. 208, a specific out hole 166 is provided in the upper right corner of the special winning device 550 when viewed from the front, and a specific general winning hole 163 is provided on the left side of the specific out hole 166 when viewed from the front. The specific general winning hole 163 corresponds to the second receiving section 562 (see FIG. 22) in the description of the first embodiment described above, and the name has been changed to make the description easier to understand (to make it clear that it is a ball entrance). Similarly, the specific out port 166 is a renamed version of the third receiving section 563 (see FIG. 22) in the description of the first embodiment described above. The specific general winning port 163 and the out port 166 are provided with a general winning sensor 163s and an out ball entry sensor 166s capable of detecting the entry of a game ball, as shown in FIG. 208. The specific general winning port 163 is configured as a winning port in which three prize balls are awarded for one winning (entering) game ball, and three prize balls are paid out each time the general winning sensor 163s detects the entry of a game ball. On the other hand, the specific out port 166 is configured as a ball entry port in which no prize balls are awarded even if a game ball enters (it simply discharges the entered game ball to the outside), and no prize balls are paid out even if the out ball entry sensor 166s detects the entry of a game ball.

As shown in FIG. 208, the special winning device 550 is provided at its approximate center with a variable winning device 65 having a specific winning port 65a through which a game ball can enter. This variable winning device 65 is composed of the first variable plate 583b, the first receiving recess 574a, and the second receiving recess 574b described in the above-mentioned first embodiment, and in order to clarify that it is a winning port (ball entry port), in the description of this first control example, the first variable plate 583b is referred to as the opening and closing door 65f1, and the first receiving recess 574a and the second receiving recess 574b are simply referred to as the specific winning port 65a. When a big win is won by the big win lottery, the opening and closing door 65f1 is opened a predetermined number of times (6 to 16 rounds) (shifting from a state in which it is extended to the front side to a state in which it is retracted to the back side), and the game ball can enter the specific winning port 65a.

As shown in FIG. 208, the specific winning opening 65a is provided with specific winning sensors 65s1 and 65s2 (detection devices SE3 and SE4 in the description of the first embodiment) capable of detecting the entry of a game ball. The specific winning opening 65a is configured as a winning opening to which 15 prize balls are awarded for the entry (entry of a game ball), and 15 prize balls are paid out each time the specific winning sensors 65s1 and 65s2 detect the entry of a game ball. In each round of the jackpot, the specific winning opening 65a is opened (the opening and closing door 65f1 is retracted to the back) for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have passed or until 10 game balls have been entered), so that a large number of prize balls can be paid out by shooting a game ball aimed at the specific winning opening 65a during the jackpot (shooting a game ball toward the flow path on the right side when viewed from the front of the variable display unit 80). This can increase the player's interest in the game when they win the jackpot.

Also, as shown in FIG. 208, the second ball entrance (second winning entrance) 640 (the third receiving recess 575a and the fourth receiving recess 575b in the description of the first embodiment, see FIG. 22) and the first electric device 640a (the second variable member 584b in the description of the first embodiment) that opens and closes the second ball entrance (second winning entrance) 640 are provided at the lower left of the variable winning device 65 in the special winning device 550. When a game ball enters the second ball entrance 640, a jackpot lottery (a lottery for a special symbol) is executed, and when a jackpot is won, a jackpot game in which the specific winning entrance 65a is opened and closed multiple times is executed. Also, as described above, the first electric device 640a is in an operating state for a predetermined time only when a winning lottery for a normal symbol executed based on the game ball passing through the through gate 67 is won. Although detailed explanation is omitted, in this control example, a right through gate (not shown) is provided at a predetermined position through which a ball shot by right-hand play can pass when flowing down the right-hand area. This right through gate has the same function as the through gate 67 provided in the left-hand area. This allows the lottery for normal symbols to be efficiently executed even when right-hand play is being performed. The position of this right through gate may be upstream of the special winning device 550, may be within the special winning device 550, or may be a position through which a ball discharged from the special winning device 550 can pass. For example, if the right through gate is provided upstream of the second ball entrance 640 in the special winning device 550, the ball that passes through the right through gate can enter the second ball entrance 640, and if the right through gate is provided downstream of the second ball entrance 640 in the special winning device 550, the ball that passes through the right through gate cannot enter the second ball entrance 640.

A game ball that enters the specific general winning port 163 (second receiving section 562) is guided to the back side when viewed from the front (the back side of the base plate 60) by rolling on the second rolling section 577 (see FIG. 20). The game ball guided to the back side when viewed from the front flows into the guide flow path 690 shown by the dashed line in FIG. 208. Similarly, a game ball that enters the specific out port 166 is guided to the back side of the base plate 60 by rolling on the third rolling section 578 (see FIG. 20) and flows into the guide flow path 690. In addition, a game ball that enters the specific winning port 65a is guided to the back side of the base plate 60 by rolling on the sub-path HK1 (see FIG. 22) and flows into the guide flow path 690. That is, the game balls that enter the specific general winning port 163, the game balls that enter the specific out port 166, and the game balls that enter the specific winning port 65a all flow down the guide flow path 690.

208, the guide flow path 690 is composed of at least a general ball throwing section 690a for causing a game ball that has entered the specific general winning port 163 to flow into the guide flow path 690, an out ball throwing section 690b for causing a game ball that has entered the specific out port 166 to flow into the guide flow path 690, a specific ball throwing section 690c for causing a game ball that has entered the specific winning port 65a to flow into the guide flow path 690, and a merging path 690d that is provided at the most downstream of the specific flow path 690 and causes the game ball to flow (merge) from the back side of the base plate 60 to the performance flow path 691 (the sub-path HK3 in the description of the first embodiment). The game ball that has flowed into the guide flow path 690 via any of the general ball throwing section 690a, the out ball throwing section 690b, and the specific ball throwing section 690c is guided to the performance flow path 691 via the merging path 690d. The game balls guided to the performance flow path 691 fall from the discharge portion 691a at the lower end of the performance flow path 691 toward the pseudo-attacker 165 (the decoration unit 750 in the description of the first embodiment, see FIG. 91). This pseudo-attacker 165 is at least composed of a pseudo winning opening 165a through which the game balls can enter, and a pseudo door 165f1 (the opening and closing member 870 in the description of the first embodiment, see FIG. 104(b)) that is configured to be variable between an open state in which the game balls can enter the pseudo winning opening 165a and a closed state in which the game balls cannot enter the pseudo winning opening 165a. In addition, an outlet 167 (the winning opening 761a in the description of the first embodiment) is arranged on the front side of the pseudo-attacker 165 to discharge the game balls that have reached the pseudo-attacker 165 to the outside when the pseudo door 165f1 is closed. As shown in FIG. 207, a cover member is provided so that the inside of the special winning device 550 provided in the lower right game area of the pachinko machine 10 of this control example is difficult to see. This cover member is configured so that when a specific game state is set, a part of the special winning device 550 is visible to the player. Specifically, the cover member has an illumination means capable of irradiating light toward the back surface of the cover member inside, and is configured so that when the illumination means irradiates light toward the back surface of the cover member, the inside of the part irradiated with light is visible to the player. By configuring in this way, a game area that is normally difficult to see can be made easily visible when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, when a jackpot game is executed), so that a surprising performance can be provided to the player. In addition, the operation of this illumination means serves the purpose of showing the player the game area to be aimed at during a jackpot game, so that a game that is easy to understand can be provided to the player. In this control example, during a jackpot game, the performance flow path 691, which allows the balls flowing out from the guide flow path 690 to flow down, is configured to be easier for the player to see than the flow path (see main paths SK1 to SK6 in FIG. 22) through which the balls that flow into the special winning device 550 flow down. By configuring it in this way, the player can focus on the ball flow that flows down the performance flow path 691 as the ball flow during a jackpot game and wins the pseudo attacker 165.

Details will be described later, but in this first control example, the specific winning port 65a is opened and closed, and the pseudo door 165f1 of the pseudo attacker 165 is opened and closed in each round of the jackpot game. In this first control example, a performance (pseudo winning performance) suggesting the payout of a prize ball is executed in accordance with the timing of the game ball entering the pseudo winning port 165a. In other words, instead of executing a performance that notifies the payout of a prize ball based on the detection of the ball entering the specific winning port 65a, the pseudo winning performance is executed in accordance with the timing of the ball entering the pseudo winning port 165a. In other words, by using the pseudo attacker 165, which is easier to see than the specific winning port 65a covered by the first path member 560, it is possible to make it seem as if the prize ball will be paid out when the ball enters the pseudo attacker 165 during the jackpot game.

It takes about 0.5 seconds from when a ball is detected by either of the specific winning sensors 65s1 and 65s2 until the detected game ball flows down the guide flow path 690 and the performance flow path 691 and enters the pseudo winning hole 165a. For this reason, in this first control example, the timing at which the pseudo winning hole 165a is opened and closed is delayed by 0.5 seconds compared to the timing at which the specific winning hole 65a is opened and closed in each round of a jackpot. This allows all game balls that have won (entered) the specific winning hole 65a to enter the pseudo winning hole 165a.

In addition, in this first control example, as described above, the game balls that enter the specific general winning port 163 or the specific out port 166 are also configured to be able to reach the pseudo attacker 165. Since it is difficult for the player to distinguish which ball entry port the game ball entered and reached the pseudo attacker 165, the pseudo winning performance is executed for all balls that enter the pseudo winning port 165a, regardless of the type of ball entry port. As a result, the more game balls enter the specific general winning port 163 or the specific out port 166 during the jackpot round period, the more times the pseudo winning performance is executed, so that it is possible to create the illusion that more prize balls have been won than in reality. Therefore, the player's sense of satisfaction in the jackpot game can be increased. As described above, each round of the jackpot ends when the game ball enters the specific winning port 65a 10 times. On the other hand, the pseudo winning hole 165a is configured so that not only the game balls that have entered the specific winning hole 65a, but also the game balls that have entered the specific general winning hole 163 and the specific out hole 166 can enter the pseudo winning hole 165a, so that in each round of the jackpot, 10 or more game balls can easily enter the pseudo winning hole 165a. Therefore, in each round of the jackpot, the player can feel as if more game balls than usual have entered the specific winning hole 65a, so that the player can feel a greater sense of satisfaction. Here, in this first control example, the pseudo winning performance (pseudo winning sound) is configured to be different depending on whether or not the number of balls entering the pseudo winning hole 165a during the opening period of one pseudo door 165f1 exceeds the specified number of times (10 times). This allows the player to have the illusion that more than the set number of balls have entered the specific winning hole 65a (over-winning) when the pseudo winning sound changes, giving the player a greater sense of satisfaction.

In addition, in this first control example, the possibility of executing the pseudo winning performance and the execution timing are determined based on the timing of detecting the entry of a ball into each ball entry port (specific general winning port 163, specific out port 166, specific winning port 65a). That is, when the entry of a ball into each ball entry port is detected, it is predicted whether the timing when the game ball detected to enter the pseudo attacker 165 is during the opening period of the pseudo door 165f1, and if it is during the opening period (i.e., when the game ball detected to enter is predicted to enter the pseudo winning port 165a during the opening period of the pseudo door 165f1), the execution of the pseudo winning performance is determined. In other words, the possibility of executing the pseudo winning performance and the execution timing are determined only by the winning sensor originally installed in each ball entry port, without providing any configuration for detecting the entry of a game ball for the pseudo winning port 165a. This configuration makes it possible to reduce the number of sensors required to detect ball entry, thereby reducing the cost rate of the pachinko machine 10 by reducing the number of parts.

In this first control example, it takes about 1.5 seconds for the game ball whose entry is detected to reach the pseudo attacker 165 after the ball's entry into the specific general winning hole 163 is detected, about 1 second for the game ball whose entry is detected to reach the pseudo attacker 165 after the ball's entry into the specific out hole 166 is detected, and about 0.5 seconds for the game ball whose entry is detected to reach the pseudo attacker 165 after the ball's entry into the specific winning hole 65a is detected. Therefore, when a ball is detected in the specific general winning hole 163, it is determined (predicted) whether the pseudo door 165f1 is open after 1.5 seconds, and if it is predicted that the pseudo door 165f1 is open (the game ball whose entry is detected enters the pseudo winning hole 165a), the pseudo winning performance is set to be executed after 1.5 seconds. Similarly, when a ball is detected entering the specific out hole 166, it is determined (predicted) whether the pseudo door 165f1 is opened after 1 second, and when it is predicted that the pseudo door 165f1 is opened (the game ball detected entering enters the pseudo winning hole 165a), it is set so that the pseudo winning performance is executed after 1 second. When a ball is detected entering the specific winning hole 65a, it is determined (predicted) whether the pseudo door 165f1 is opened after 0.5 seconds, and when it is predicted that the pseudo door 165f1 is opened (the game ball detected entering enters the pseudo winning hole 165a), it is set so that the pseudo winning performance is executed after 0.5 seconds. This allows the pseudo winning performance to be executed in accordance with the timing of the game ball entering the pseudo winning hole 165a, so that in the case of a big win, the player can be more reliably given the illusion that a prize ball is awarded by entering the pseudo attacker 165. Therefore, in the event of a jackpot, players can focus on whether or not the game ball will land in the pseudo attacker 165, which can increase the player's interest in the game.

In addition, in this first control example, not only the game balls that entered the specific winning port 65a, but also the game balls that entered the specific general winning port 163 and the specific out port 166 are configured to be able to reach the pseudo attacker 165, but this is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured so that the game balls that entered at least one of the specific general winning port 163 and the specific out port 166 cannot reach the pseudo attacker 165. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress (prevent) the number of winning balls estimated from the number of pseudo winning performances from diverging from the number of winning balls actually paid out. In addition, in this first control example, the timing of executing the pseudo winning performance is set at the timing when a ball enters each winning port, but for example, if the timing of executing the pseudo winning performance is set to the timing after the pseudo attacker 165 during the opening operation closes, it is preferable to configure it so that the execution of the pseudo winning performance is prohibited. This prevents balls from flowing down each flow path in the special winning device 550 for a period that differs significantly from the predetermined period, and prevents the player from experiencing an unnatural effect even if the closing timing of the pseudo attacker 165 differs significantly due to the significantly different closing timing of the variable winning device 65.

In this first control example, the specific winning opening 65a is configured to be located downstream of the specific general winning opening 163 and the specific out opening 166, but the placement of each entry opening may be determined arbitrarily.

Returning to Figure 207, we will continue the explanation. A center frame 86 is arranged on the variable display device unit 80, which is provided in the approximate center of the game board 13, so as to surround the outer periphery of the third pattern display device 81. The third pattern display device 81 can be seen through an opening in the center of this center frame 86. The center frame 86 also protrudes toward the front side of the game board 13 and surrounds the periphery of the third pattern display device 81, preventing the game ball from coming into contact with the third pattern display device 81.

The third symbol display device 81 is configured with a large 9-inch liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), so that, for example, three symbol rows, left, center, and right, are displayed. Each symbol row is configured with a plurality of symbols (third symbols), and these third symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row, so that the third symbols are variably displayed (variably displayed) on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. The third symbol display device 81 of this embodiment performs decorative display according to the display of the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b, while the display of the game state associated with the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4) is performed by the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b. Note that, instead of a display device, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, a reel or the like.

Next, the display contents of the third pattern display device 81 in this control example will be explained with reference to Figure 209. Figure 209(a) is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 in this control example, and Figure 209(b) is a schematic diagram showing the display contents of the third pattern display device 81 in this control example. The third pattern display device 81 is composed of a 15-inch liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by the display control device 114 (see Figure 4), so that, for example, three pattern rows, left, center, and right, are displayed.

As shown in FIG. 209(a), the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 is roughly divided into two parts, top and bottom, with the upper 2/3 being the main display area Dm which displays the changing third pattern, and the remaining lower 1/3 being the secondary display area Ds which displays preview effects, characters, number of reserved balls, etc.

The third pattern (special pattern 1 or special pattern 2) displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 is composed of 10 main patterns that resemble the numbers "0" to "9". In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, if the result of the lottery by the main control device 110 (see Figure 4) is a jackpot, a variable display is performed in which the same main patterns are lined up (for example, "777"), and the jackpot occurs after the variable display has ended. In other words, the third pattern is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as a pattern to indicate the result of the lottery for special patterns by the main control device 110.

Specifically, the main display area Dm displays three pattern columns L1, L2, and L3 on the left, center, and right. The above-mentioned third patterns are displayed in a specified order in each of the pattern columns L1 to L3. That is, the main patterns are arranged in ascending or descending numerical order in each of the pattern columns L1 to L3, and the display changes by scrolling from top to bottom periodically for each of the pattern columns L1 to L3.

In addition, in the main display area Dm, the third symbol of each symbol row is displayed stopped on the pay line V1. If the third symbols are stopped on the pay line V1 in a jackpot symbol combination (a combination of the same main symbols in this first control example), a jackpot animation is displayed as a jackpot.

The manner of displaying the third pattern in the third pattern display device 81 is not limited to the above and is arbitrary, and the number of pattern rows, the direction of the display of the patterns in the pattern rows, the number of patterns in each pattern row, etc. can be changed as appropriate. The patterns displayed in the third pattern display device 81 are not limited to the above, and for example, a pattern combining an image such as a figure or a character with a number may be configured as the third pattern. Furthermore, the area in which the third pattern is displayed in a variable manner may be configured to be variable. For example, when a specific performance is executed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81, the variable display area of the third pattern may be made smaller or moved to a position that is difficult for the player to see (for example, a corner of the display screen), so that it is difficult for the player to know whether the third pattern is changing or not. In addition, the change of the third pattern may be temporarily stopped (temporarily stopped) during the period in which the special pattern is changing, and then changed again.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the display mode of the third pattern corresponding to the variation of the first special pattern and the display mode of the third pattern corresponding to the variation of the second special pattern are configured to be the same (including differences to the extent that the player has difficulty distinguishing between them), but the display mode or display area of the third pattern may be different to correspond to the type of special pattern that is varying.

In addition, in this first control example, a specific symbol can be displayed as a stopped symbol as the third symbol that is variably displayed in the middle symbol row Z2. Details of this specific symbol will be described later with reference to FIG. 212, but it is configured in a display mode with identification information (e.g., "charge") different from a number, and this specific symbol is displayed as stopped on the pay line V1, making it possible to notify that the result of the special symbol lottery is a specific lottery result.

In this control example, when a predetermined condition is met, for example when a third pattern showing the same number is stopped and displayed in both the left pattern column L1 and the right pattern column L3, a specific pattern is displayed by interrupting a specific location (for example, a location between the numbers "0" and "9") in the changing middle pattern column L2. This allows the specific pattern to suddenly appear after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the changing display of the third pattern, providing the player with a surprising change presentation.

The conditions for displaying the specific symbol may be other than those mentioned above. For example, the condition may be that the numbers indicated by the third symbol displayed in the left symbol column L1 and the right symbol column L3 are a specified combination, or that the player operates the operating means while the third symbol is being displayed in a variable manner. The condition may also be established based on the results of a lottery for a special symbol. In addition, a variable presentation in which a specific symbol is displayed a specified period of time after the display of the third symbol in a variable manner begins may be preset when the variable presentation is set (when the variation starts).

When displaying a specific symbol, a method other than interrupting a preset symbol row and displaying it may be used, for example, replacing it with one of the third symbols preset in the symbol row. In this case, for example, if a combination of third symbols that indicates a special jackpot win is displayed when a specific third symbol among the third symbols set in the middle symbol row L2 is displayed, that is, in a reach state, it is preferable to configure the specific symbol to be displayed by replacing it with the third symbols set before and after the specific third symbol. This allows the player to focus on the variable presentation while feeling a sense of expectation, since the lottery result will be favorable to the player no matter which of multiple consecutive third symbols is displayed.

In this control example, three types of special pattern lottery results can be set as the lottery results for the special pattern: "jackpot," "small win," and "miss." When a jackpot is won, one of multiple jackpot types is set, which differ in the content of the jackpot game to be played and the game state to be set after the jackpot game ends. The combination of third patterns stopped and displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is used to suggest (inform) the player of the lottery results for the special pattern and the type of jackpot when a jackpot is won.

For example, if the result of the special symbol lottery is "Big Win D," which is the type of big win most favorable to the player, a variable display is performed in which any of the odd-numbered main symbols "3, 7" are displayed in a sequence. Also, if the result of the special symbol lottery is "Big Win A," "Big Win B," "Big Win C," or "Big Win E," a variable display is performed in which any of the main symbols "0 to 9" are displayed in a sequence. Furthermore, if the result of the special symbol lottery is "Small Win," a chance symbol consisting of the combination "341" is displayed. Note that this chance symbol combination is configured not to be selected if the lottery result is a miss. In this embodiment, the chance symbol is configured to be displayed as a specific combination of third symbols, but it is not limited to this, and it may be configured to display one or more combinations of special symbols (e.g., goldfish symbols) different from the normal third symbols from 0 to 9, or to notify by displaying a letter such as "Chance."

As shown in FIG. 209(b), the sub-display area Ds is divided into two small areas, and in the display screen capable of executing the variable display of the special symbol, information for showing the winning information of the currently active special symbol (active symbol m0) is displayed in the small area Ds1, and information for showing the winning information of the reserved special symbol (special symbol 1 first reserved symbol m1 to special symbol 1 fourth reserved symbol m4, special symbol 2 first reserved symbol m5 to special symbol 2 fourth reserved symbol m8) is displayed in the small area Ds2. In addition, the information (content) displayed in the sub-display area Ds is configured to be switched depending on the game state, and for example, if a jackpot game is being played, a guide display mode for informing the game contents during the jackpot game is displayed, and even during the variable display of the third symbol, if a variable performance in which the expectation of winning the jackpot is set high is being executed, a display mode for showing the player the jackpot expectation of the variable performance is displayed. In addition, when performing a variable performance using the entire display screen of the third pattern display device 81, the secondary display area Ds is configured to be erased.

Next, the contents actually displayed on the third symbol display device 81 will be explained with reference to FIG. 209(b). As shown in FIG. 209(b), in the upper left corner of the main display area Dm as viewed from the front, there are formed a special symbol 1 display area Dm1a which displays the fourth symbol in a variable manner in conjunction with the variable display of the first special symbol, and a special symbol 2 display area Dm1b which displays the fourth symbol in a variable manner in conjunction with the variable display of the second special symbol, and in the upper right corner of the main display area Dm as viewed from the front, there is formed a normal symbol display area Dm2 which displays the normal symbol in a variable manner in conjunction with the variable display of the normal symbol, and is displayed stationary.

In the schematic diagram shown in FIG. 209(b), the special symbol 1 display area Dm1a, the special symbol 2 display area Dm1b, and the regular symbol display area Dm2 are shown large enough for the player to see, but in reality, they are formed to be large enough that the player has difficulty seeing them. By configuring them in this way, it is possible to have the player focus their attention on the changing performance of the third symbol executed in the main display area Dm.

In addition, in cases where a performance using the entire display screen is executed as a third pattern change performance, or where a movable performance device (e.g., lower displacement member 440 (see FIG. 9)) provided near the third pattern display device 81 moves and covers the display screen of the third pattern display device 81, the display areas of special pattern 1 display area Dm1a, special pattern 2 display area Dm1b, and regular pattern display area Dm2 may be reduced in size, their display positions may be changed, or they may be temporarily hidden. This allows for a powerful performance to be provided without any sense of incongruity.

Furthermore, instead of the special symbol 1 display area Dm1a, the special symbol 2 display area Dm1b, and the normal symbol display area Dm2, a fourth symbol that is dynamically displayed in conjunction with the variable display of the first special symbol, the second special symbol, and the normal symbol may be displayed outside the third symbol display device 81. In this case, it is recommended that LEDs for the fourth symbol be provided in the same locations as the numerous decorative LEDs provided on the pachinko machine 10 in correspondence with each symbol. This makes it possible to dynamically display the fourth symbol in correspondence with the variable display of each symbol in a way that is difficult for the player to understand.

<About the content of the first control example>
Next, the contents of various effects executed in this first control example will be described with reference to Fig. 210 to Fig. 218. First, with reference to Fig. 210 and Fig. 211, the pre-reading effect using the reserved symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the treasure box role 750, which is a role provided outside the third symbol display device, will be described.

In this first control example, when a ball enters the special pattern start port (first ball entrance port 64, second ball entrance port 640) during the variable display of the special pattern, a predetermined number of lottery rights for the special pattern (rights to execute a lottery for the special pattern using the values of various counters (winning information) obtained when the ball enters) are stored (reserved) up to a maximum of four for each special pattern. The reserved patterns are then displayed in the small area Ds2 of the sub-display area Ds of the third pattern display device 81 as a display mode to show the number of lottery rights that have been reserved.

Furthermore, the contents of the reserved winning information are preliminarily determined before the lottery for the special symbols is actually executed, and a performance (pre-reading performance) is executed in which the display mode of the reserved symbols and the display mode of the treasure chest device 750 are changed based on the result of the determination.

When this look-ahead performance is executed, the display mode of the reserved pattern displayed in the small area Ds2 of the sub-display area Ds of the third pattern display device 81 is changed. Then, when a special pattern lottery corresponding to the reserved pattern whose display mode has been changed is executed, the active pattern m0 is displayed in the small area Ds1 in a display mode corresponding to the reserved pattern whose display mode has been changed, as shown in FIG. 210(a). In other words, the active pattern m0 displayed in the small area Ds1 is configured to be able to notify the player of the display mode of the reserved pattern changed by the look-ahead performance even while the special pattern change based on that reserved pattern is being executed. In this control example, both the active pattern m0 and the reserved patterns m1 to m8 are displayed in a circular display mode, so the changed display mode of the reserved pattern is used as the display mode of the active pattern m0. However, it is sufficient if the player can grasp the change in the display mode of the reserved patterns. For example, even if the display mode of the active pattern m0 and the display mode of the reserved patterns are different, the color of each mode can be variably set, so that the change in the display mode of the reserved patterns (color change) can be grasped from the display mode (color) of the active pattern m0.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 211(b), this control example is configured so that the display mode of the treasure chest device 750 as well as the reserved symbols can be changed by the look-ahead performance. Even when a look-ahead performance that changes the display mode of the reserved symbols and a look-ahead performance that changes the display mode of the treasure chest device 750 are executed for the same winning information, the results of the look-ahead performance are configured to be different.

According to the example shown in FIG. 210, during the display of the special pattern change for which the lottery result is a jackpot D (16-round jackpot), the active pattern m0 is displayed in a "green" display mode (in FIG. 210(a), a checkered pattern display mode) indicating a high probability of winning the jackpot, suggesting to the player that the active special pattern change may be a jackpot change. And the treasure chest device 750 is displayed in a "red" display mode (in FIG. 210(b), a diagonal line display mode) indicating a high probability of the jackpot type being a jackpot D.

In the example shown in FIG. 211, during the display of the special pattern change for which the lottery result is a jackpot A (six-round jackpot), the active pattern m0 is displayed in a "green" display mode (in FIG. 211(a), a lattice pattern display mode) indicating that there is a high expectation of winning the jackpot, suggesting to the player that the active special pattern change may be a jackpot change. And the treasure chest device 750 is displayed in a "green" display mode (in FIG. 211(b), a lattice pattern display mode) indicating that there is a high expectation that the jackpot type is an A jackpot.

In other words, in this first control example, the look-ahead effect that changes the display mode of the reserved pattern sets the presentation mode of the look-ahead effect mainly based on the information indicating the result of the jackpot win/lose judgment among the target winning information, whereas the look-ahead effect that changes the display mode of the treasure chest device 750 is configured to set the presentation mode of the look-ahead effect mainly based on the information indicating the type of jackpot that will be selected if a jackpot is won among the target winning information.

This allows the player to carefully watch the various effects in order to comprehensively determine the display modes of multiple displayed objects, the display modes of which are changed by the pre-reading effects, and predict the lottery results for the special symbols based on the target winning information. This makes it possible to prevent the player from becoming bored with the game too early.

As shown in Figs. 210 and 211, the display mode of the treasure chest device 750 is configured to be changed at the latest before a part of the third pattern displayed in the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81 is stopped and displayed, so that a pre-reading effect is executed. That is, as described above, there is a correlation between the number of the third pattern and the type of big win, and when a big win is actually won, each of the third patterns is stopped and displayed in a predetermined combination (for example, a double number), so the number of the third pattern more directly suggests to the player the result of this special pattern lottery (type of big win), and therefore the display mode of the treasure chest device 750 is changed before the third pattern is stopped and displayed.

By configuring it in this way, the results of the special symbol lottery can be suggested to the player step by step, keeping the player interested in the various effects being performed until the very end.

In this control example, when the look-ahead performance is executed, the display mode of the reserved symbols and treasure chest device 750 is changed to a display mode that indicates the performance result of the look-ahead performance. However, it is sufficient if the display mode is changed to a display mode that indicates the performance result of the look-ahead performance in the end. For example, the display mode may be changed in stages with the performance result of the look-ahead performance being the final stage. In this case, it is preferable to configure the performance result of the look-ahead performance to be able to be set in multiple stages corresponding to the size of the benefit to be granted to the player. This allows the performance to be enjoyed while anticipating more changes in the display mode.

Furthermore, because the determination of whether or not to execute a look-ahead performance that changes the display mode of the reserved pattern is configured to be different from the determination of whether or not to execute a look-ahead performance that changes the display mode of the treasure chest device 750, it is possible to make it difficult to know at what point in time the display mode of which displayed object will change during the period from when the winning information is reserved and stored to when the special pattern corresponding to that winning information begins to change, and therefore it is possible to create expectations that the display mode will change further even when the performance result of the look-ahead performance has already been displayed.

As described above, in this control example, the display mode of multiple displayed objects can be randomly changed as a look-ahead effect, but the order in which the displayed objects will have their display mode changed as a look-ahead effect can also be determined in advance. This makes it easy for the player to know which displayed object will have its display mode changed next. Therefore, it is easy to tell that the display mode has changed.

In addition, when the display modes of multiple performed objects are randomly changed as in this control example, a similar effect can be achieved by configuring the system to notify which performed object's display mode will be changed just before the actual display mode is changed.

In addition, in this control example, the timing for varying the display mode of the presented object is set randomly, but the display mode may be varied at a specific predetermined timing, or may be varied based on the player's operation of the operating means.

Furthermore, in this control example, the display mode of the reserved symbols is changed to clearly notify the player of the winning information that is the subject of this pre-reading performance, and a pre-reading performance is executed in which the display mode of the treasure chest device 750, whose target winning information is difficult to understand, is changed. This provides the player with the fun of predicting which winning information the pre-reading performance is being executed for, for example, if the display mode of the treasure chest device 750 is changed before the display mode of the reserved symbols.

In this control example, the display mode of the reserved pattern corresponding to the winning information that is the target of the look-ahead performance is changed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the display mode of the reserved patterns before and after it may be changed. This makes it difficult for the player to know which reserved pattern (winning information) is the target of the look-ahead performance even when a look-ahead performance using a reserved pattern is executed. In addition, in the look-ahead performance in which the display mode of the treasure chest role 750 is changed, the target reserved pattern (winning information) may be notified to the player. In addition, as a look-ahead performance using the reserved patterns m1 to m8, the display mode of multiple reserved patterns may be changed at the same time. In this state, if the display mode of the treasure chest role 750 is changed, it is difficult for the player to know which reserved pattern the look-ahead performance in which the display mode of the treasure chest role 750 is changed is executed. In addition, for example, when the display mode of a plurality of reserved patterns is changed, if the display mode of the treasure chest device 750 is changed to correspond to the reserved pattern (winning information) for which the special pattern lottery is executed first among the plurality of reserved patterns whose display mode has been changed, the display mode of the treasure chest device 750 may be configured to continue to be changed even after the special pattern change corresponding to that reserved pattern (winning information) has ended until the special pattern change corresponding to the next reserved pattern (last reserved pattern) whose display mode has been changed has ended. By configuring in this way, the game can be continued with a high expectation for the pre-reading performance in which the display mode of the treasure chest device 750 has been changed, thereby improving the performance effect.

In addition, in this control example, multiple pre-reading effects are executed by using multiple performed objects for one winning information as a pre-reading effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. It is also possible to execute pre-reading effects for each of the multiple performed objects for different winning information. For example, it is possible to determine whether or not to execute a pre-reading effect using multiple performed objects for one winning information, and to set only the performed objects for which it is determined that a pre-reading effect will not be executed as a result of the determination as the pre-reading object for the other winning information. This makes it difficult for the player to tell whether the pre-reading effect is executed for one winning information or multiple pre-reading effects executed for multiple winning information when the display mode of multiple performed objects changes. This makes it possible to prevent the player from quickly becoming bored with the content of the pre-reading effect.

Next, referring to Fig. 212 and Fig. 213, the contents of the charge effect in which a specific symbol (charge symbol) is displayed as the third symbol will be described. Fig. 212(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed during the charge effect, and Fig. 212(b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a case in which the specific symbol Z4 is displayed in a provisionally stopped state during the charge effect.

This charge effect is an effect in which a specific pattern (charge pattern) Z4 is displayed by interrupting the middle pattern column L2 (see FIG. 210(a)) in which the middle pattern Z2 is being displayed in a changing state when the third pattern showing the same number is stopped on the left pattern Z1 and the right pattern Z3 (i.e., a reach state). When the specific pattern Z4 is displayed stopped in the middle pattern column L2, it becomes a combination of third patterns indicating that a special pattern big win or small win has been won. Furthermore, during this charge effect, if the normal pattern (second pattern) is displayed stopped in a display mode indicating a win, an effect is executed in which the specific pattern Z4 is temporarily stopped at the timing of the stop.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 212(a), the left pattern Z1 and the right pattern Z3 are displayed in a stopped state showing "7", and when the middle pattern column L2 is in a variable display state, i.e., when the "7" reach state is reached, the specific pattern Z4 is displayed in the middle pattern column L2, interrupting the normal middle pattern column L2. In this state, the special pattern 1 display area Dm1a is executing a variable display mode of the fourth pattern, which indicates that the first special pattern is being displayed, and the normal pattern display area Dm2 is displaying a variable display mode indicating that the normal pattern is being displayed.

Then, when the timing when the normal pattern is displayed stopped from the state shown in FIG. 212(a) is reached, the specific pattern Z4 is displayed temporarily stopped in the middle pattern row L2 as shown in FIG. 212(b). This temporary stop display is a display state in which the specific pattern Z4 is not actually displayed completely stopped, but is oscillating to the extent that the player can recognize that the specific pattern Z4 has stopped. In this state, the special pattern 1 display area Dm1a is executing a variable display mode of the fourth pattern indicating that the first special pattern is being displayed, and the normal pattern display area Dm2 is displaying a variable display mode indicating that the normal pattern has been displayed stopped in a display mode indicating a win. And, since FIG. 212(b) shows an example of a case where a win is won with a normal pattern, the first electric role 640a is opened after the specific pattern Z4 is temporarily stopped (after the normal pattern stops changing).

By configuring it in this way, when the specific pattern Z4 stops (temporarily stops) in the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81, it is possible to notify the player in a manner that makes it difficult to tell whether he or she has won a special pattern (big win, small win) or a normal pattern. This makes it possible to make the player interested in the game content that is executed after the specific pattern Z4 stops (temporarily stops).

In addition, the above-mentioned charge effect (the effect in which the specific pattern Z4 is displayed stopped (temporarily stopped)) can be executed when a special pattern is won and when a normal pattern is won, so the frequency of the charge effect can be increased, improving the effect of the performance.

Next, the above-mentioned charge effect is configured to be executed whether the result of the lottery for the special pattern is a big win or a small win, so that when the specific pattern Z4 is stopped and displayed based on the result of the lottery for the special pattern, the player can be made to expect a more favorable lottery result (a big win). However, if the game content of the big win game executed after the specific pattern Z4 is stopped and displayed is completely different from the game content of the small win game (for example, the attacker (variable winning device) that is opened is different), the player will immediately determine the result of the lottery for this special pattern, making it difficult to keep the player's sense of expectation.

In contrast to this, in this first control example, the initial game content of the big win game that is executed after the specific pattern Z4 is stopped and displayed (for example, the opening period until the start of the first round of round play and the round game content of the first round) is configured to be the same as the game content of the small win game. This makes it possible to prevent the player from easily determining what winning game is being executed immediately after the big win game or small win game is executed. Furthermore, it is configured to execute an effect (roulette effect) that notifies the player of the current winning result on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 using the period (common game period) in which the same game content is set.

Here, the contents of the roulette effect described above will be explained with reference to FIG. 213. FIG. 213(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 displayed during the execution of the roulette effect, and FIG. 213(b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display screen that displays the result of the roulette effect.

As shown in FIG. 213(a), when the roulette effect is executed, a character 811b modeled after a boy who is the protagonist of the roulette effect, a roulette 811c for indicating the result of the current special pattern lottery (big win or small win), and a sword 811k for announcing the result of the special pattern lottery using the roulette 811c are displayed in the main display area Dm.

The example shown in FIG. 213(a) is a roulette presentation that is executed when a small win of a special symbol is won, so the fourth symbol is displayed frozen in the special symbol 1 display area Dm1a in a "triangle" display mode, which indicates that a small win has been won. In other words, the roulette presentation shown in FIG. 213(a) is executed during a small win game.

The roulette 811c is formed with a big win area (area with a "circle") 811c1, which indicates that the result of the current special pattern lottery was a big win, and a small win area (area with a "X") 811c2, which indicates that it was a small win, all of which are the same size, and are displayed rotating to the right at a speed that allows the player to distinguish between the areas. After that, the roulette 811c is displayed rotating at a high speed (a speed at which it is difficult for the player to distinguish between the areas), and an effect is executed in which a sword 811k is thrown towards the roulette 811c.

When the sword 811k stabs into the roulette 811c, the rotation speed of the roulette 811c gradually decreases, and the roulette 811c is displayed as stopped as shown in FIG. 213(b). In this state, the player is notified that the area into which the sword 811k stabs is the result of the current special symbol lottery. Since FIG. 213(b) shows a roulette presentation that is executed after a small win is won (a roulette presentation that is executed during a small win game), a presentation in which the sword 811k stabs into the small win area 811c2 is executed.

In addition, since the above-mentioned roulette presentation is executed during the same period (common play period) in which the game content of the small win game and the game content of the big win game are executed, during the roulette presentation, it is not possible to determine the lottery result of the current special symbol from the game content of the win game. Therefore, a player who wants to know the lottery result of the current special symbol as soon as possible will pay close attention to the presentation mode of the roulette presentation being executed, which enhances the presentation effect.

In the above example, the jackpot area 811c1 and the small jackpot area 811c2 formed on the roulette 811c are formed to be the same size, but the present invention is not limited to this, and it is preferable to configure the size of each area to be variable depending on the lottery result of the special symbol. This allows the player to predict the lottery result of the special symbol this time by grasping the display mode (size of each area) of the roulette 811c at the start of the roulette performance (before the roulette 811c spins at high speed). In addition, in the above example, a display mode in which one jackpot area 811c1 and one small jackpot area 811c2 are formed is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, multiple jackpot areas 811c1 and multiple small jackpot areas 811c2 may be formed alternately.

In the above example, two types of areas, the big win area 811c1 and the small win area 811c2, are formed as areas showing the lottery results of the special pattern, but this is not limited to this. For example, the big win area 811c1 may be further divided according to the type of big win that is won.

In addition, the rotation display mode of the roulette 811c, the display mode of the sword 811k, and the display mode of the character 811b may be changed to indicate the result of the current special symbol lottery, and the sizes of the big win area 811c1 and the small win area 811c2 may be made different depending on the result of the special symbol lottery.

In this first control example, the above-mentioned roulette presentation is executed when a winning game is started, and the presentation result is automatically displayed, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the roulette presentation may be started based on the start of a winning game, and the presentation result of the roulette presentation may be displayed based on the ball winning the attacker that is opened during the common game period, or the presentation result of the roulette presentation may be displayed based on a predetermined operation being performed on the operating means during the common game period. This allows the player to be enthusiastic about participating in the presentation.

In addition, in this first control example, the roulette effect is configured to be executed during a winning game, but this is not limited to this, and for example, the roulette effect may be configured to be executed while the special symbol is changing. In other words, for example, if the performance period of the roulette effect is 10 seconds and the performance period of the charge effect is 15 seconds, the charge effect may be started 25 seconds before the timing when the special symbol stops changing, and the roulette effect may be executed 10 seconds before the timing when the change stops, so that the change performance corresponding to the special symbol change is set.

In this way, when the roulette effect is configured to be executable not during a winning game but during the display of the special symbol variation, the above-mentioned roulette effect can also be executed in the charge effect executed based on the winning of the normal symbol. In this case, for example, when it is determined that the normal symbol that has been won during the variable period of the special symbol is to be stopped, the stop timing is calculated, and the performance mode of the charge effect can be set so that the roulette effect is executed 10 seconds before the calculated stop timing (so that the specific symbol Z4 is temporarily stopped and displayed in the charge effect). Also, the roulette 811c displayed in the roulette effect can be set to form a normal symbol winning area indicating a win of the normal symbol in addition to the big win area 811c1 and the small win area 811c2. This makes it possible to execute the roulette effect even when a winning normal symbol is won, thereby increasing the frequency of execution of the roulette effect.

Next, referring to Fig. 214 and Fig. 215, the contents of the first operation presentation (button fusion presentation), which is one of the operation presentations in which the player operates the operation means, will be described. Fig. 214(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the presentation contents at the time when the first operation presentation (button fusion presentation) is started, Fig. 214(b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the presentation contents after a certain period of time has passed, Fig. 215(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the presentation contents when the player operates the operation means (frame button 22) once in the first operation presentation (button fusion presentation), and Fig. 215(b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the presentation contents after the buttons are fused in the first operation presentation (button fusion presentation).

Here, we will explain the content of the first operation presentation (button fusion presentation). In this first operation presentation (button fusion presentation), the player operates the operating means to display the lottery results for the current special symbol in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81. The player then operates the operating means a number of times (three times) corresponding to the number of third symbols (three in this control example) to show the lottery results for the special symbols.

Each operation of the operating means has a set valid operation period, and if the operating means is not operated within the valid operation period, the third symbol indicating the lottery result of the special symbol will not be displayed. In addition, when the display mode of the time gauge displayed corresponding to the valid operation period set for the operation of each operating means meets a predetermined condition (when the same display mode is achieved), the operations of each operating means are combined and multiple third symbols are displayed based on a single operation of the operating means. This makes it possible to display all the third symbols even when there is little time left in the valid operation period, so that the player is motivated to operate the operating means until the end.

As shown in FIG. 214(a), a left display area 81a, a middle display area 81b, and a right display area 81c are formed so as to cover the left pattern row L1, the middle pattern row L2, and the right pattern row L3 that are being displayed in a variable manner. The left display area 81a displays a first button 822a and a time gauge t1 that indicates the effective operation period of the first button 822a, the middle display area 81b displays a second button 822b and a time gauge t2 that indicates the effective operation period of the second button 822b, and the right display area 81c displays a third button 822c and a time gauge t3 that indicates the effective operation period of the third button 822c.

In this state, when the player operates the operating means (frame button 22), the display mode of the first button 822a first changes to a display mode indicating that the operating means has been operated, and the left third symbol Z1 is displayed in a stopped state in the left display area 81a (see FIG. 215(a)).

The valid operation periods corresponding to each of the buttons 822a-c are all configured to be the same length (5 seconds) and to have the same start timing for the valid operation periods, but in FIG. 214(a), the remaining time displays t1a-t3a of each of the time gauges t1-t3 are displayed on the display screen in a manner that indicates a different remaining time. Specifically, the remaining time display t1a is displayed in a manner that indicates that the remaining time is 4 seconds, the remaining time display t2a is displayed in a manner that indicates that the remaining time is 3.5 seconds, and the remaining time display t3a is displayed in a manner that indicates that the remaining time is 5 seconds.

In addition, in this control example, the gauge movement speed (length of the arrow in FIG. 214(a)) of each time gauge t1 to t3 is configured to be the same. In other words, when the same effective operation period is set, the movement start timing (subtraction display timing) of each time gauge t1 to t3 is configured to be different.

In this way, when multiple operation effects with the same effective operation period are executed, by displaying the apparent remaining time differently, it becomes possible for the player to visually distinguish the order of the operation effects. In addition, the player can be made to feel that they must operate the operation means as soon as possible depending on the decrease (subtraction) of the remaining time, which makes the player more motivated to operate the operation means.

Here, in this effect in which the same operation effective period is set and the gauge movement speed (length of the arrow in FIG. 214(a)) of each time gauge t1 to t3 is configured to be the same, if the movement start timing (decrement display timing) of each time gauge t1 to t3 is made different, there is a risk that the timing at which the remaining time reaches 0 will differ. Therefore, in this control example, an effect is executed in which the time gauge flashes as shown in FIG. 214(b), and the remaining time is not decreased during the period when the time gauge is off (not displayed). This makes it easy to unify the timing at which the remaining time of each time gauge t1 to t3 reaches 0 without preparing multiple timing movement speeds. Note that in this control example, the remaining time display of each time gauge t1 to t3 is set to be the same when the remaining time of the operation effective period set for each operation effect is 1 second.

In FIG. 214(b), the remaining time t1b of the time gauge t1 indicating the effective operation period of the first button 822a is displayed in a flashing display mode (display mode indicated by a dashed line) indicating 2.5 seconds, the remaining time t2b of the time gauge t2 indicating the effective operation period of the second button 822b is displayed in a flashing display mode (display mode indicated by a dashed line) indicating 3.5 seconds, and the remaining time t3b of the time gauge t3 indicating the effective operation period of the third button 822c is displayed in a display mode indicating 4.5 seconds. In other words, in the state shown in FIG. 214(b), the movement speeds of the time gauges t1 and t2 are displayed to be slower than the movement speed of the time gauge t3.

When the player operates the frame button 22 once in the state shown in FIG. 214(b), the left third symbol Z1 is displayed in the left display area 81a in a display mode showing "7" as shown in FIG. 215(a). Even in this state, the time gauge t2 is displayed in a flashing display mode, and the time gauge t3 is displayed in the normal display mode, as in FIG. 214(b).

When a predetermined period of time has elapsed in the state shown in FIG. 215(a), the remaining time displayed by the time gauge t2 and the time gauge t3 will be the same because the speed of movement of the time gauge t3 is faster than the speed of movement of the time gauge t2. When the remaining time display modes of the two time gauges t2 and t3 become the same, a fusion operation presentation is executed in which a fusion button 822d in which the second button 822b and the third button 822c are fused is displayed, as shown in FIG. 215(b), and a fusion time gauge t4 in which the time gauge t2 and the time gauge t3 are fused is displayed.

As described above, in this control example, the remaining time display of each time gauge t1 to t3 is set to be the same when the remaining time of the operation effective period set for each operation presentation is 1 second, so the remaining time display t4a of the combined time gauge t4 is displayed in a display mode indicating a remaining time of 1 second. When the player operates the operating means while this combined button 822d is displayed, the middle pattern Z2 is displayed in the middle display area 81b and the right pattern Z3 is displayed in the right display area 81c at the same time.

In the example described above with reference to Figures 214 and 215, the fusion button 822d is displayed when the left pattern Z1 is already displayed. However, if the operation means is not operated even once during the first operation presentation and the remaining time of the effective operation period reaches 1 second, the fusion button 822d is displayed using all of the left display area 81a to the right display area 81c.

In this way, the display area in which the fusion button 822d is displayed indicates the range of the effect that will be executed when the operating means is operated (the effect that displays the third symbol), so that an easy-to-understand operational effect can be provided to the player.

In this control example, when a fusion operation effect is set, the fusion button 822d is displayed to execute an effect that is easy for the player to understand. However, this is not limited to this, and for example, even after the fusion operation effect is set, the display screen shown in FIG. 214(a) may continue to be displayed, and the fusion operation effect may be executed based on the player's operation of the operating means. This makes it possible to provide the player with an unexpected effect.

In addition, in this control example, the fusion operation performance is configured to be executed when the display modes indicating the remaining time of the operation effective period set for each operation performance become the same, but the fusion operation performance may be configured to be executed under other conditions. For example, the fusion operation performance may be executed when the operation means is operated within a predetermined period (e.g., 0.5 seconds) after the start of multiple operation performances, or the fusion operation performance may be executed when all of the remaining times of the operation effective periods set for multiple operation performances satisfy predetermined timing conditions (e.g., all remaining times are odd numbers, a specific digit indicating the remaining time is 0, and the sum of the values of each digit of the numbers indicating the remaining time is 10). This makes it possible to provide an unexpected operation performance.

In this control example, we have described a case where multiple operation effects are executed simultaneously, but this is not limited to the above. As long as the effective operation periods set for multiple operation effects overlap, the start timing of each operation effect may be different, and the length of each effective operation period may be different.

Next, the content of the second operation presentation (automatic press presentation) in this control example will be described with reference to Figs. 216 to 218. Fig. 216 is a timing chart showing the flow of presentations executed in the second operation presentation, Fig. 217(a) is a schematic diagram showing the content of presentations executed in the initial period (first period) of the automatic press presentation, Fig. 217(b) is a schematic diagram showing the content of presentations executed in the intermediate period (second period) of the automatic press presentation, and Fig. 218(a) is a schematic diagram showing the content of presentations executed in the final period (third period) of the automatic press presentation.

Now, referring to FIG. 216, the contents of the automatic press effect in this control example will be explained. In this control example, a 10-second operation valid period (button operation valid period) is set as the operation effect in which the automatic press effect is executed, and a 2-second effect result display period is set after the operation valid period has elapsed. Of the 10-second operation valid period, the first 8 seconds are set as a button operation immediate response period in which the effect result is displayed immediately based on the operation of the frame button 22 (operation means), and the remaining 2 seconds are set as a button operation regular response period in which, when a predetermined period has elapsed, it is determined whether or not the frame button 22 (operation means) has been operated within the predetermined period, and if it has been operated, the effect result is displayed.

During the immediate button operation response period, the button display Z8 (see FIG. 217) corresponding to the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81 is displayed, and when the immediate button operation response period has elapsed, an automatic press effect is executed as shown in FIG. 216. This automatic press effect is executed during the remaining 2 seconds of the effective operation period (the 2 seconds from 8 seconds to 10 seconds after the effective operation period is set), and a detailed explanation will be given later with reference to FIG. 217 and FIG. 218, but an effect is executed in which a character that appears in the main display area Dm presses the button display Z8 (see FIG. 217(a)).

In this control example, the automatic button press performance is divided into three periods (first period, second period, and third period), and automatic performance 1 (automatic button press performance 1) is executed during the first period, automatic performance 2 (automatic button press performance 2) is executed during the second period, and automatic performance 3 (automatic button press performance 3) is executed during the third period.

In the second operation presentation thus configured, for example, when the frame button 22 is operated during the button operation immediate response period (see (Example 1) in FIG. 216), a display mode showing the presentation result is displayed in the main display area Dm from immediately after the button operation is performed until the presentation result display period ends. Also, when the frame button 22 is operated during the first period (see (Example 2) in FIG. 216), after a waiting period until the first period has elapsed, a display mode showing the presentation result is displayed in the main display area Dm from the timing when the second period begins until the presentation result display period ends. Furthermore, when the frame button 22 is operated during the third period (see (Example 3) in FIG. 216), a display mode showing the same presentation result as when the operating means is not operated during the effective operation period is displayed in the main display area Dm.

In this way, by setting the period during which the automatic press effect is being executed as the regular button operation response period, even if the frame button 22 is operated during the automatic press effect, it is possible to prevent the effect being suddenly interrupted and an unnatural effect being executed, and the automatic press effect can be canceled by operating the frame button 22. This makes it possible to motivate the player to participate in the operation effect.

In addition, during the standby period that occurs when the frame button 22 is operated while the automatic press effect is being executed, the automatic press effect continues to be executed in the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81, but the sound and light emitting means are configured to be set to a performance mode that indicates that a standby period is being executed. This allows the player to be reliably notified that the frame button 22 has been operated.

Now, with reference to Figures 217 and 218, the content of the effects during the automatic press effect will be explained. As shown in Figure 217(a), when the automatic press effect is executed and automatic button press effect 1 is executed, an effect is executed in which a bird-like character 811a appears in the main display area Dm and attempts to land on the button display Z8. In this state, the remaining time display t5a of the time gauge t5, which indicates the effective operation period for the button display Z8, indicates that it is 2 seconds (first period).

Then, when the remaining time of the valid operation period reaches 1.5 seconds (second period), automatic button press performance 2 shown in FIG. 217(b) is executed. In this automatic button press performance 2, a performance is executed in which character 811a stands on button display Z8 and looks around. In this state, the remaining time display t5b of time gauge t5, which indicates the valid operation period of button display Z8, shows that it is 1.5 seconds (second period). Next, when the remaining time of the valid operation period reaches 1 second (third period), automatic button press performance 3 shown in FIG. 218 is executed. In this automatic button press performance 3, a performance is executed in which character 811a standing on button display Z8 presses a button.

As described above, in this control example, character 811a appears as an automatic press effect, a button press effect is executed, and the operation result display period is set at the timing when the automatic press effect is completed (the timing when the operation valid period has elapsed) and the effect result of the operation effect is displayed, so that the player can relate to the operation effect and the effect result.

In addition, if the frame button 22 is operated during the automatic pressing performance, the performance result display is configured to be executed when the currently set period (first period to third period) has elapsed, and in this case, the start mode of the performance result display (the performance mode executed for 0.5 seconds after the start) is made to differ depending on the period during which the frame button 22 was operated. Specifically, if the frame button 22 is operated during the first period, a performance mode is set in which the flying character 811a falls and presses the button display Z8, and if the frame button 22 is pressed during the second period, a performance mode is set in which another character modeled after a bird lands on the button display Z8 and the button display Z8 is pressed by its weight.

By configuring in this way, the presentation mode of the automatic press presentation can be displayed without varying based on the operation of the frame button 22, and without causing any sense of incongruity. Note that in this control example, the presentation mode of the automatic press presentation executed in each period is configured not to vary depending on whether or not the frame button 22 is operated, but it may be configured, for example, to vary only elements of the presentation content that are easy to change (for example, changing the color or adding a comment), in which case it is advisable to change the presentation content only when the presentation result is advantageous to the player. This allows the player to enjoy operating the frame button 22 during the automatic press presentation, thereby increasing their motivation to play.

Next, referring to FIG. 219, the content of the presentation displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 during a jackpot presentation using the pseudo attacker 165 will be described. FIG. 219(a) is a schematic diagram showing the display screen when the ball enters the variable winning device 65 during a jackpot presentation using the pseudo attacker 165, and FIG. 219(b) is a schematic diagram showing the display screen when the ball enters the pseudo attacker 165.

As shown in FIG. 219(a), when a jackpot (jackpot D) is won and the variable winning device 65 provided in the special winning device 550 is opened, and the jackpot game is executed, a jackpot game screen is displayed on the third pattern display device 81. On this jackpot game screen, a jackpot display 830 indicating that a jackpot game is in progress is displayed in the main display area Dm, and winning information 831 indicating the number of winning balls acquired during the jackpot game is displayed. Then, in the sub-display area Ds, the small area Ds1 and the small area Ds2 are integrated, and a comment "Hit to the right" is displayed, indicating the playing method during the jackpot game.

Figure 219 (a) shows the display content when a ball shot by right-hand play enters a specific winning port 65a (a winning port that the ball can enter by opening the variable winning device 65) in the special winning device 550, but the winning information 831 is displayed without adding the number of prize balls awarded based on the ball entering the specific winning port 65a.

As shown in FIG. 219(b), the number of prize balls awarded based on the ball's entry into the specific winning port 65a is added in accordance with the timing at which the ball that entered the specific winning port 65a in the state shown in FIG. 219(a) enters the pseudo attacker 165. Specifically, when the specific winning sensors 65s1, 65s2 (see FIG. 208) detect that a ball has entered the specific winning port 65a, a display mode is displayed indicating that the prize ball has been awarded 0.5 seconds after the detection, that is, the period (0.5 seconds) required for the ball that entered the specific winning port 65a to reach the pseudo attacker 165 has elapsed.

This configuration makes the player believe that a prize ball has been awarded based on the ball having entered the pseudo attacker 165. In addition, the winning sound for audio notification that a ball has entered the variable winning device 65 is also configured to be delayed in accordance with the update timing of the acquisition information 831 described above, so that the winning sound is output from the audio output device 226 at the timing shown in FIG. 219(b).

<Electrical Configuration of the Pachinko Machine 10 in the First Control Example>
Next, as described above with reference to Fig. 4, the main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is a calculation device. The MPU 201 has a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, a RAM 203 that is a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202, and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit. In addition, in order to instruct the sub-control devices such as the dispensing control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113 to operate, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub-control devices by the data transmission/reception circuit, but such commands are transmitted only in one direction from the main control device 110 to the sub-control devices.

The main control device 110 executes the main processes of the pachinko machine 10, such as drawing the special symbols, drawing the normal symbols, setting the display on the first symbol display device 37, and setting the display on the second symbol display device 83. The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes.

Now, referring to FIG. 220, we will explain the counters and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. FIG. 220 is a schematic diagram showing the counters and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 in this first control example. These counters and the like are used by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to perform the drawing of special symbols, the drawing of normal symbols, the display settings on the first symbol display device 37, the display settings on the second symbol display device 83, and the display settings on the third symbol display device 81, etc.

The special winning random number counter C1 used for the drawing of the special symbols and the setting of the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 uses the special winning random number counter C1 used for drawing the special symbols, the special winning type counter C2 used for selecting the big winning type of the special symbols, the stop type selection counter C3 for determining the stop type of the special symbols (reach winning type, non-reach miss (long miss A, short miss A), reach miss type), the fluctuation type counter CS1 used for selecting the fluctuation pattern, and the initial value random number counter CINI1 used for setting the initial value of the special winning random number counter C1. In addition, the normal winning random number counter C4 is used for drawing the normal symbols, and the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the normal winning random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

Each counter is updated, for example, at 2 millisecond intervals, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 238), and some counters are updated irregularly during the main process (see FIG. 253), and the updated values are appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 is provided with a special pattern 1 reserved ball storage area 203a consisting of four reserved areas (reserved areas 1 to 4) for storing reserved balls of the first special pattern, and a special pattern 2 reserved ball storage area 203b consisting of four reserved areas (reserved areas 1 to 4) for storing reserved balls of the second special pattern, and a special pattern reserved ball execution area common to the first special pattern and the second special pattern is provided. In each area of the special pattern 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, the values of the special winning random number counter C1, the special winning type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the variable type counter CS1 are stored in accordance with the timing of the ball entering the first ball entrance 64. Similarly, similar values are stored in each area of the special pattern 2 reserved ball storage area 203b in accordance with the timing of the ball entering the second ball entrance 640.

The RAM 203 also has a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c, which consists of one execution area and four reserved areas (reserved areas 1 to 4). Each of these areas stores the value of the normal winning random number counter C4 when the ball passes through the second ball entrance (through gate) 67 on either the left or right side.

Next, each counter will be described in detail. The special win random number counter C1 is configured to increment by one within a predetermined range (e.g., 0 to 499) and return to 0 after reaching a maximum value (e.g., 499 for a counter that can take values from 0 to 499). In particular, when the special win random number counter C1 goes around once, the value of the initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the special win random number counter C1.

In addition, the initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the special win random number counter C1. That is, for example, if the special win random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take values from 0 to 499, the initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter with a range of 0 to 499. This initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 238) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 253).

The value of the special winning random number counter C1 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process) and is stored in the special pattern 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special pattern 2 reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640. The random number value that results in a jackpot for the special pattern is set by the special pattern jackpot random number table 202a (see FIG. 222(a)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and a jackpot for the special pattern is determined when the value of the special winning random number counter C1 matches the random number value that results in a jackpot set by the special pattern jackpot random number table 202a. In addition, this special symbol jackpot random number table 202a is divided into two types: one for when the probability of a special symbol is low (the period when the probability of a special symbol is low), and one for when the probability of a special symbol jackpot is higher than the low probability (the period when the probability of a special symbol is high), and the number of random numbers that result in a jackpot included in each type is set differently.

In this way, by varying the number of random numbers that result in a jackpot, the probability of a jackpot is changed when the probability of a special pattern is low and when the probability of a special pattern is high. Note that the special pattern jackpot random number table 202a (see FIG. 222(a)) for when the probability of a special pattern is high and the special pattern jackpot random number table 202a (see FIG. 222(a)) for when the probability of a special pattern is low are provided in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110.

The special win type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when a special symbol jackpot occurs, and is configured to be incremented by one within a predetermined range (e.g., 0 to 99) and return to 0 after reaching a maximum value (e.g., 99 in the case of a counter that can take values from 0 to 99). The value of the special win type counter C2 is updated, for example, periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640.

Here, if the value of the special winning random number counter C1 stored in the special pattern 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special pattern 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is not a random number that results in a big win for the special pattern, in other words, if it is a random number that results in a miss for the special pattern, the display mode corresponding to the stopped pattern displayed on the first pattern display device 37 will be that for a miss for the special pattern.

On the other hand, if the value of the special winning random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is a random number that results in a special symbol jackpot, the display mode corresponding to the stopped symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 will be that of the special symbol jackpot. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the jackpot will be the display mode indicated by the value of the special winning type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. In this embodiment, five types of jackpot types are set, namely, "jackpot A", "jackpot B", "jackpot C", "jackpot D", and "jackpot E", and one of them is determined by the special winning type counter C2. Then, the display mode indicating the jackpot type is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 as a jackpot pattern.

The special win random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 499. In this special win random number counter C1, when the probability of a special symbol is low, there are 5 random number values that result in a jackpot for the special symbol, and these random number values "0 to 4" are stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a for low probability. In this way, when the probability of a special symbol is low, the total number of random number values that result in a jackpot is 5 out of a total of 500, so the probability of a jackpot for a special symbol is "1/100".

On the other hand, when the probability of a special symbol is high, there are six random number values that result in a special symbol jackpot, and these values, "4 to 9," are stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a for high probability. In this way, when the probability of a special symbol is high, the total number of random number values that result in a jackpot is 6 out of a total of 500, so the probability of a special symbol jackpot is "6/500."

In this control example, the random number value for the jackpot stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table for low probability and the random number value for the jackpot stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table for high probability are set so that they do not overlap. If there is a value that is always used as the random number value for the jackpot regardless of the state of the pachinko machine 10, that random number value may be input from outside, making it easier to win a jackpot illegally. In contrast, by changing the random number value for the jackpot depending on the state (i.e., depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state for the special symbol or a low probability state for the special symbol) as in this control example, it is possible to make it difficult to predict the random number value for the jackpot for the special symbol, thereby preventing fraud.

The value of the special win type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. The value of the special win type counter C2 obtained when selecting the jackpot type is referenced using the jackpot type selection table 202d for determining the jackpot type. Here, the contents of the jackpot type selection table 202d will be explained with reference to FIG. 223(a). As shown in FIG. 223(a), the jackpot type selection table 202d for determining the jackpot type has a special win type selection table 202d1 for reference in response to the drawing of the first special symbol and a special win type selection table 202d2 for reference in response to the drawing of the second special symbol set.

The special pattern 1 jackpot type selection table 202d1 specifies a judgment value corresponding to the jackpot type for comparing (judging) with the value of the special jackpot type counter C2 set (acquired and stored) in the special pattern reserved ball execution area when the result of the lottery for the first special pattern is a jackpot.

Figure 223 (b) is a data table that shows the contents of this special chart 1 jackpot type selection table 202d1. In the special chart 1 jackpot type selection table 202d1, if the random number value in the special jackpot type counter C2 obtained is "0 to 49", the jackpot type is "jackpot A". In addition, if the value is "50 to 68", the jackpot type is "jackpot B", if the value is "69 to 98", the jackpot type is "jackpot C", and if the value is "99", the jackpot type is "jackpot D".

In this way, the pachinko machine 10 of this control example is configured so that when a jackpot is won with the first special symbol (special symbol 1), one of four types of winning is determined by the value of the random number indicated by the special winning type counter C2.

In addition, the special symbol 2 jackpot type selection table 202d2 specifies a judgment value that corresponds to the jackpot type and is used to compare (judge) the value of the special jackpot type counter C2 that is set (acquired and stored) in the special symbol reserved ball execution area when the lottery result for the second special symbol is a jackpot.

Figure 223 (c) is a data table that shows the contents of this special chart 2 jackpot type selection table 202d2. In the special chart 2 jackpot type selection table 202d2, if the random number value in the acquired special jackpot type counter is "0 to 49", the jackpot type is "jackpot D". Also, if the value is "50 to 99", the jackpot type is set to "jackpot E".

In this way, the pachinko machine 10 of this control example is configured to determine five types of winning types according to the value of the random number indicated by the special winning type counter C2. In addition, the selection ratio of the winning type selected when the judgment result is a winning type is different between the first special pattern and the second special pattern, so that the player can be interested in whether the lottery is being performed with the first special pattern or the second special pattern. In addition, the selection ratio of the winning type in which the winning type is given to the first special pattern and the second special pattern is the same (100%), so that the winning type ratio is different between the first special pattern and the second special pattern, and the problem that the winning type ratio is not constant as a whole gaming machine can be suppressed. In addition, the selection ratio of the winning type D in the second special pattern is set high, so that the probability of selecting the 16R winning type is set higher than that of the first special pattern, and it is configured to be advantageous to the player. In this control example, when a jackpot is won in the lottery for each special symbol, the jackpot type described above can be selected, but the jackpot type to be selected is not limited to the above, and multiple jackpot types with different numbers of rounds (number of rounds) executed during the jackpot game can be selected, or a jackpot type in which a game state other than a probability state (high probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols) after the jackpot is ended (for example, a normal state (low probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols), a time-saving state (low probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols), or a potential state (high probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols)) is set can be selected. In addition, the ratio of the high probability state of the special symbols and the ratio of the high probability state of the normal symbols can be set differently between the case where a jackpot is won with the first special symbol and the case where a jackpot is won with the second special symbol.

The variation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by one within the range of 0 to 198, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (i.e., 198). The stop type selection counter C3 and the variation type counter CS1 described above determine the general display mode, such as short-time miss, long-time miss, normal reach, and super reach. The display mode is determined, specifically, by the change time of the pattern change. Based on the change time determined by the stop type selection counter C3 and the change type counter CS1, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 determine the reach type and detailed pattern change mode of the third pattern displayed on the third pattern display device 81. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once each time the main process (see FIG. 253) described later is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time in the main process. In addition, a variation pattern selection table 202b (see FIG. 224) that stores random number values that determine the variation time of the pattern variation from the values (random number values) of the stop type selection counter C3 and the variation type counter CS1 is provided in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110.

As shown in FIG. 224, the variation pattern selection table 202b has a normal/latent probability variation pattern selection table 202b1 used in a game state (normal state, potential probability state) when the probability of determining whether a normal pattern is a hit or miss is low, and a probability variable variation pattern table 202b2 used in a game state (probability variable state) when the probability of determining whether a normal pattern is a hit or miss is high.

The pachinko machine 10 in this control example is configured to be able to set three game states: normal state (low probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols), probability state (high probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols), and potential state (high probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols). At the end of a jackpot game, the game state is set according to the type of jackpot that was won, or the game state that was set at the time the jackpot was won.

This will be explained in more detail later in the explanation of the selection of the fluctuation pattern in the voice lamp control device 113, but in the main control device 110, the rough content of the fluctuation pattern (reach, super reach, non-reach, etc.) and the fluctuation time are determined based on the result of the win/lose judgment, the number of reserved balls, the value of the stop type selection counter C3, and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, and a fluctuation pattern command indicating the determined content is set.

Next, referring to FIG. 225 and FIG. 226, the variation pattern selection table 202b used when the main control device 110 selects a variation pattern will be described. FIG. 225 is a data table that shows the contents of the normal/latent variation pattern selection table 202b1. In the normal/latent variation pattern selection table 202b1, various variation patterns are defined in accordance with the results of the lottery for the special symbols, and the values of the stop type selection counter C3 and the variation type counter CS1 are assigned to each of the variation patterns. In addition, when the result of the hit/miss judgment is a hit, a variation pattern is set in accordance with the determined jackpot type (the jackpot type determined by the jackpot type selection table 202d based on the value of the acquired special hit type counter C2). Specifically, when the type of special pattern (pattern type) is the first special pattern (special pattern 1), the hit/miss judgment result is a jackpot A, B, or D, the acquired value of the stop type selection counter C3 is "0 to 50", and the acquired value of the fluctuation type selection counter CS1 is "0 to 198", a normal reach jackpot A with a fluctuation time of 30 seconds is specified as the fluctuation pattern, when the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is "51 to 250" and the value of the fluctuation type selection counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 100", a super reach jackpot A with a fluctuation time of 60 seconds is specified as the fluctuation pattern, when the value of the fluctuation type selection counter CS1 is in the range of "101 to 159", a super reach jackpot B with a fluctuation time of 60 seconds is specified as the fluctuation pattern, and when the value of the fluctuation type selection counter CS1 is in the range of "160 to 198", a super reach jackpot C with a fluctuation time of 60 seconds is specified as the fluctuation pattern. In addition, when the type of the special symbol (symbol type) is the first special symbol (special symbol 1) and the hit/miss judgment result is a big hit C or a small hit, if the acquired value of the stop type selection counter C3 is "0 to 250" and the acquired value of the fluctuation type selection counter CS1 is "0 to 198", that is, regardless of the acquired value of the stop type selection counter C3 and the value of the fluctuation type selection counter CS1, a special reach hit with a fluctuation time of 30 seconds is specified as the fluctuation pattern. When this fluctuation pattern of the special reach hit is selected, a fluctuation pattern command for indicating the type of the selected fluctuation pattern is output to the voice lamp control device 113, and the "charge performance" described above in FIG. 212 is executed. Similarly, when the symbol type is special symbol 1 and the hit/miss judgment result is a miss, a miss fluctuation pattern in which a fluctuation time of 8 seconds to 60 seconds is set according to the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is specified. In addition, when the pattern type is special pattern 2, if the hit/miss judgment result is a hit (jackpot D, jackpot E) and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is "0 to 124", a hit long fluctuation A with a fluctuation time of 60 seconds is specified as the fluctuation pattern regardless of the value of the fluctuation type selection counter CS1, and when the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is "125 to 198", a hit long fluctuation B with a fluctuation time of 60 seconds is specified as the fluctuation pattern regardless of the value of the fluctuation type selection counter CS1, and when the hit/miss judgment result is a miss, a miss long fluctuation of 60 seconds is specified regardless of the value of the stop type selection counter C3 and the value of the fluctuation type selection counter CS1.

Next, referring to FIG. 226, a data table showing the contents of the time-saving fluctuation pattern table 202b2 is shown. In the time-saving fluctuation pattern table 202b2, various fluctuation patterns are set in correspondence with the results of the lottery for the special symbols, and the values of the stop type selection counter C3 and the fluctuation type counter CS1 are assigned to each of the fluctuation patterns. In addition, when the result of the hit/miss judgment is a hit, a fluctuation pattern is set in correspondence with the determined jackpot type (the jackpot type determined from the jackpot type selection table 202d by the value of the acquired special hit type counter C2). Here, in this control example, the probability variable fluctuation pattern selection table 202b2 shown in FIG. 226 specifies each fluctuation pattern so that a relatively short fluctuation time is easily set for the normal/latent probability variable pattern selection table 202b1 referred to during the normal state and the latent probability state shown in FIG. 225. By configuring in this way, during the probability variable state, it is possible to perform the lottery for the special symbols more efficiently than in other game states.

The normal win random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that increments by one within the range of, for example, 0 to 239, and returns to 0 after it reaches a maximum value (i.e., 239). When the normal win random number counter C4 goes around once, the value of the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the normal win random number counter C4. In this control example, the value of the normal win random number counter C4 is updated, for example, periodically, for each timer interrupt process, and is obtained when it is detected that the ball has passed through the second ball entrance (through gate) 67 on either the left or right side, and is stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203.

The value of the random number that results in a winning normal symbol is set by the normal winning random number table 202c (see FIG. 222(c)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device, and when the value of the normal winning random number counter C4 matches the value of the random number that results in a winning normal symbol set by the normal winning random number table 202c, it is determined that the normal symbol is a winning symbol. In addition, this normal winning random number table 202c (see FIG. 221(c)) is divided into two types: one for low probability of a normal symbol (period in which the normal symbol is in the normal state) and one for high probability of a normal symbol winning (period in which the normal symbol is in the time-saving state) when the probability of a normal symbol winning is higher than the low probability, and the number of random numbers that result in a big win included in each is set differently. Furthermore, the type of winning normal symbol is set to normal winning or long-time winning, and the value of the normal winning random number counter C4 is set for each.

In this control example, it is configured so that a long win can only be won during the low probability state of the normal pattern, and when a long win is won, a long win is executed in which the electric device 640a is opened with an opening time of 4 seconds. This makes it possible to temporarily execute the special drawing 2 lottery in the normal state. A normal win (short win) of a normal pattern other than the long win described above is a win in which the operation of operating the electric device 640a to the open state with an opening time of 0.2 seconds is executed once.

In this control example, the opening operation of the electric role 640a executed during a short win and the opening operation during a normal win during a high probability state of a normal pattern are set to be the same, but this is not limited to this and may be a different opening operation. Specifically, when the normal pattern is in a high probability state, the opening period of the electric role 640a is longer than that of a short win, and the operation to be in the open state may be performed once for, for example, 3 seconds. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to make the ball enter the second ball entrance 640 more easily during the high probability state of a normal pattern. Also, in this control example, as described above with reference to FIG. 208, the electric device 640a is disposed in the right area, so if a player wins a long hit with a normal pattern during normal play (while playing with the left hand), it is difficult for the player to get the ball to enter the open second winning hole 640. Therefore, for example, the second winning hole 640 and the associated electric device 640a may be configured to be disposed in a position where a ball shot by playing with the left hand can enter the second winning hole 640.

In this control example, as shown in FIG. 222(c), when the probability of a normal symbol is low, if the value of the acquired normal hit random number counter C4 is "5", it is determined to be a normal hit with a normal symbol, and if it is "6", it is determined to be a long hit. On the other hand, when the probability of a normal symbol is high, if the value of the acquired normal hit random number counter C4 is any value between 5 and 204, it is determined to be a normal hit with a normal symbol.

In this way, by making the number of winning random numbers different, the probability of winning is changed between when the normal pattern has a low probability and when the normal pattern has a high probability. Therefore, when the probability is low, the frequency with which the electric device 640a is operated can be reduced, and the frequency with which the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 can be reduced. Therefore, the player's consumption of game balls can be increased, and the profits of the gaming establishment can be increased. On the other hand, during the time-saving period and the probability-change period, when the probability is high, the electric device 640a can be given an opportunity to operate with a probability of "1/1.2", and the opportunity of the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 can be increased. Therefore, the consumption of game balls by the player can be suppressed, and a game state advantageous to the player can be set. Therefore, the player can play with the aim of playing with a high probability, and can play for a longer period of time.

The normal initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the normal hit random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once for each timer interrupt process (see Figure 238) and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see Figure 253).

In this way, various counters and the like are provided in the RAM 203, and the main control unit 110 can execute the main processes of the pachinko machine 10, such as drawing jackpots, setting the display on the first pattern display device 37 and the third pattern display device 81, and drawing the display results on the second pattern display device 83, depending on the values of these counters and the like.

Returning to FIG. 218, the explanation will continue. In addition to the various counters shown in FIG. 219, the RAM 203 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return addresses of the control programs executed by the MPU 201 are stored, and a working area (working region) in which various flags, counters, I/O values, etc. are stored.

The RAM 203 is configured so that it can retain (back up) data even after the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off by receiving a backup voltage from the power supply device 115, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up.

When the power supply is cut off due to a power outage or the like, the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of the power outage (including the occurrence of a power outage; the same applies below) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including the power turned on after the power outage is resolved; the same applies below), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power outage based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is performed by the main processing (see FIG. 255) when the power supply is turned off, and the restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is performed during the start-up processing (see FIG. 251) when the power supply is turned on. Note that the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power outage signal SG1 from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 when the power supply is cut off due to a power outage or the like, and when the power outage signal SG1 is input to the MPU 201, the NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 253) as the power outage processing is immediately executed.

As shown in FIG. 221(a), in addition to the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a (see FIG. 222), variable pattern selection table 202b (see FIG. 224), normal jackpot random number table 202c (see FIG. 222(c)), and jackpot type selection table 202d (see FIG. 223), the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 also contains a small jackpot random number table 202e, a jackpot scenario table 202f, and a small jackpot scenario table 202g. Although omitted in this control example, the ROM 202 also stores various data and programs necessary for the game in addition to the above.

The small prize random number table 202e is a table that is referenced when determining whether or not a player has won a small prize in a special symbol drawing, which may grant a player a smaller bonus than if the player had won a big prize. Here, the contents of the small prize random number table 202e will be explained with reference to FIG. 222(b). As shown in FIG. 222(b), this control example is configured so that a small prize can only be won in the drawing of special symbol 1. Specifically, the type of special symbol (symbol type) is special symbol 1, and the small prize is defined as being in the range of "200 to 209" for the value of the acquired special prize random number counter C1 (0 to 499).

The big win scenario table 202f and the small win scenario table 202g are data tables in which the game operation contents during the big win game and the game operation contents during the small win game are stored in association with the determined win type, and the game operation during each win is executed based on the information (scenario) stored in this data table. Although detailed explanation is omitted, this scenario table specifies the opening period as the period from the start of the win game to the opening of the corresponding winning device (variable winning device 65, third electric device 82a), the round game contents (type of winning device, game period, number of round games) of the winning device (variable winning device 65, third electric device 82a) corresponding to each win game, the interval period which is the period from the end of one round game to the start of the next round game, and the ending period which is the period from the end of the last round game to the end of each winning game, corresponding to the win type. In this control example, the big win scenario table 202f and the small win scenario table 202g are configured to store various scenario information corresponding to the winning type, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, even if the winning type is the same, different scenarios may be set depending on the game state set when the winning is won. In this case, for example, it is preferable to configure the scenario information to be set so that the length of the period (e.g., opening period) during which the winning device (variable winning device 65, third electric role 82a) corresponding to each winning game is closed is different. For example, when a probability variable state in which the lottery (variation) efficiency of the special pattern is better than other game states is set as the game state, it is preferable to configure the scenario information so that the period (e.g., opening period) during which the winning device is closed is shorter than when other game states are set. This allows the lottery (variation) of the special pattern and the winning game to be executed efficiently during the probability variable state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 221(b), the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 has a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, a special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c, a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d, a special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e, a normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f, a small win flag 203g, a time-saving counter 203j, a special bonus counter 203m, and a miscellaneous memory area 203z.

The special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a has one execution area for the first special symbol and four reserved areas (reserved area 1 to reserved area 4), and each of these areas stores the values of the special win random number counter C1, the special win type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3.

More specifically, when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 (initial entry), the values of the counters C1 to C3 are obtained, and the obtained data is stored in the available areas of the four holding areas (first holding area to fourth holding area) in order of the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth). In other words, the smaller the area number, the more data corresponding to older winning events is stored, and the first holding area stores data corresponding to the oldest winning event. Note that if data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing new is stored.

After that, when the main control device 110 performs a lottery for a special symbol, the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the first reserved area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a are shifted (moved) to the execution area, and a decision such as the lottery for the special symbol is made based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the execution area.

When data is shifted from reserved area 1 to the execution area, reserved area 1 becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process is performed to move the winning data stored in the other reserved areas (reserved area 2 to reserved area 4) to the reserved area with the area number one smaller (reserved area 1 to reserved area 3). In this control example, in special pattern 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, data is shifted only for the reserved areas in which winning data is stored (reserved area 2 to reserved area 4). Also, the only difference between special pattern 2 reserved ball storage area 203b and special pattern 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is that it is a storage area corresponding to the second special pattern.

The normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c, like the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, has one execution area and four reserved areas (reserved area 1 to reserved area 4). Each of these areas stores a normal winning random number counter C4.

More specifically, the value of counter C4 is obtained when the ball passes through either the left or right through gate 67, and the obtained data is stored in the available areas of the four reserved areas (reserved area 1 to reserved area 4) in order of lowest area number (1 to 4). In other words, just like the special pattern 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, the order in which the winning balls were won is maintained and data corresponding to the winning balls is stored. Note that if data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing new is stored.

After that, when the main control device 110 performs a lottery for a winning normal symbol, the value of the counter C4 stored in the first reserved area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is shifted (moved) to the execution area, and a determination such as the lottery for a winning normal symbol is made based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area.

When data is shifted from the reserved area 1 to the execution area, the reserved area 1 becomes empty, so a shift process is performed to move the winning data stored in other reserved areas to a reserved area with an area number one smaller, just like in the case of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a. Also, data shifting is only performed on the reserved area in which the winning data is stored.

The special pattern 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of waiting times) of the variable display (variable display performed by the third pattern display device 81) of the special pattern (first pattern) performed by the first pattern display device 37 based on a ball entering the first ball entrance 64 (initial winning), up to a maximum of four times. The initial value of this special pattern 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is set to zero, and each time a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and the number of reserved balls of the variable display increases, it is incremented by one up to a maximum value of four. On the other hand, the special pattern 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by one each time a new variable display of the special pattern is executed.

The value of this special pattern 1 reserved ball count counter 203d (the number of reserved times N of the variable display of the special pattern) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by a reserved ball count command. The reserved ball count command is a command sent from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 every time the value of the special pattern 1 reserved ball count counter 203d is changed.

The special pattern 2 reserved ball counter 203e is a counter that counts reserved balls based on winning balls entering the second ball entrance 640, and other configurations are the same as the special pattern 1 reserved ball counter 203d, so detailed explanations are omitted.

The voice lamp control device 113 can obtain the actual number of reserved balls of the variable display reserved in the main control device 110 by the reserved ball number command sent from the main control device 110 each time the value of the special pattern 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special pattern 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is changed. As a result, even if the reserved ball number of the variable display managed by the special pattern 1 reserved ball number counter 223a and the special pattern 2 reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 deviates from the actual reserved ball number of the variable display reserved in the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise, etc., the deviation can be corrected by the reserved ball number command received next.

The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command, and sends a reserved ball number display command to notify the display control device 114 of the number of reserved balls each time the number of reserved balls changes. The display control device 114 displays a reserved ball number pattern in the small area Ds1 of the third pattern display device 81 based on the reserved ball number notified by this reserved ball number display command.

The normal pattern reserved ball number counter 203f is a counter that counts up to a maximum of four reserved balls (number of waiting times) for the normal pattern (second pattern) variable display performed by the second pattern display device 83 based on the passage of a ball through the through gate 67. The normal pattern reserved ball number counter 203f is initially set to zero, and each time a ball passes through the through gate 67 and the number of reserved balls for the variable display increases, one is added up to a maximum value of four. On the other hand, the normal pattern reserved ball number counter 203f is decremented by one each time a new normal pattern (second pattern) variable display is executed.

When a ball passes through either the left or right through gate 67, if the value of this normal symbol reserved ball count counter 203f (the number of reserved normal symbol variable display times M) is less than 4, the value of the normal win random number counter C4 is obtained, and the obtained data is stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c. On the other hand, when a ball passes through either the left or right through gate 67, if the value of this normal symbol reserved ball count counter 203f is 4, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c.

The small win in progress flag 203g is a flag that is set to ON while a small win game is being played. The probability change counter 203m is a counter for measuring the period during which the high probability state of the special pattern continues, and is set to a predetermined value when the high probability state of the special pattern is set. The counter value is then updated when the result of the special pattern lottery is stopped and displayed, and when the updated value reaches a predetermined value, a process is executed to end the high probability state of the special pattern.

The time-saving counter 203j is a counter that indicates whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state of a normal symbol. If the value of the time-saving counter 203j is 1 or more, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state of a normal symbol, and if the value of the time-saving counter 203j is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a low probability state of a normal symbol. The time-saving counter 203j is initially set to zero, and whenever a lottery for a special symbol is performed in the main control device 110 and a jackpot for a special symbol is determined, a value corresponding to the jackpot type is set. In other words, when a jackpot for a special symbol is reached, a new value corresponding to the jackpot type is set regardless of the value of the time-saving counter 203j.

Other memory area 203z stores flags, counters, stored data, etc. required for other control processes executed by the MPU of main control unit 110, but details are omitted.

The MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is connected to an input/output port 205 via a bus line 204 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 205 is connected to the payout control device 111, the sound lamp control device 113, the first pattern display device 37, the second pattern display device 83, the second pattern reservation lamp 84, and solenoids 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for driving the specific winning port 65a to open and close forward around the lower edge of the opening/closing plate as an axis, and a solenoid for driving the electric role-playing device, and the MPU 201 transmits various commands and control signals to these via the input/output port 205.

In addition, the input/output port 205 is connected to various switches 208 consisting of a group of switches and sensors (not shown), and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 (described below) provided in the power supply device 115, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and loan balls. The MPU 211, which is a calculation device, has a ROM 212 that stores the control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory, etc.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return addresses of the control programs executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and a work area (working area) in which the values of various flags, counters, I/O, etc. are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (back up) data by receiving backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Note that, like the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive a power outage signal SG1 from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 when the power supply is cut off due to a power outage or the like, and when the power outage signal SG1 is input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 253) is immediately executed as a process during a power outage.

The MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 is connected to an input/output port 215 via a bus line 214 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, payout motor 216, launch control device 112, etc. are each connected to the input/output port 215. In addition, although not shown, a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid-out prize balls is connected to the payout control device 111. Note that the prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

When the main control device 110 issues an instruction to launch a ball, the launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the strength of the ball launch corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51. The ball launch unit 112a is equipped with a launch solenoid and electromagnet (not shown), and the launch solenoid and electromagnet are permitted to operate when certain conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 290 detects that the player is touching the operating handle 51, and on condition that the shot stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball is off (not operated), the launch solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51, and the ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operating handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 controls the output of audio from the audio output device (such as a speaker not shown) 226, the output of turning on and off the lamp display device (such as the illumination units 29-33 and the display lamp 34) 227, and the settings of the display mode of the third pattern display device 81 performed by the display control device 114, such as variable performance (variable display) and continuous preview performance. The MPU 221, which is a calculation device, has a ROM 222 that stores the control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 223 used as a work memory, etc.

The MPU 221 of the audio and lamp control device 113 is connected to an input/output port 225 via a bus line 224 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 225 is connected to the main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the frame button 22, etc.

The audio and lamp control device 113 monitors input from the frame button 22, and when the player operates the frame button 22, it controls the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227, and also instructs the display control device 114, to change the background mode displayed on the third pattern display device 81 or to change the content of the performance during a super reach.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines an error based on commands from the main control device 110 and the status of various devices connected to the voice lamp control device 113, and sends an error command including the type of error to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 controls the third pattern display device 81 to display without delay an error message image according to the error type (e.g., a vibration error) indicated by the received error command.

The ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 stores a variation pattern selection table 222a, a hold rank selection table 222b, a hold mode selection table 222c, and a treasure chest mode selection table 222d, as shown in FIG. 227(a).

The variation pattern selection table 222a is a selection table for determining a variation pattern based on a variation pattern command output from the main control device 110. Multiple variation patterns are set corresponding to the variation time and variation pattern type that correspond to the variation pattern command, and one variation pattern is determined by obtaining a selection counter value (not shown).

The reserved rank selection table 222b is a data table for selecting a rank (reserved rank) regarding whether or not to execute a pre-reading performance based on the winning information included in the winning command received from the main control unit 110. In this control example, a reserved rank is set for all winning information corresponding to the received winning command, and depending on the reserved rank that has been set, it is configured to determine whether or not to execute a pre-reading performance, or to set the performance mode in the case where a pre-reading performance is executed.

Now, with reference to FIG. 228(a), the contents defined in the reserved rank selection table 222b will be explained. FIG. 228(a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the reserved rank selection table 222b. As shown in FIG. 228(a), the reserved rank selection table 222b defines a number of reserved ranks (rank 1 to rank 4) that correspond to the type of winning/losing determination result included in the received winning command and the value of the reserved rank counter 223p1 of the performance counter group 223p.

Specifically, if the result of the win/loss determination is "jackpot D," which is the most favorable for the player, the value of the reserved rank counter 223p1 is set to the range of "0-69" for "Rank 2," "70-89" for "Rank 3," and "90-99" for "Rank 1." If the result of the win/loss determination is "jackpot A, B, E," the value of the reserved rank counter 223p1 is set to the range of "0-69" for "Rank 3," "70-89" for "Rank 2," and "90-99" for "Rank 3."

If the result of the win/loss determination is "Big Win C, Small Win", the reserved rank counter 223p1 is set to a value in the range of "0-69" for "Rank 3", in the range of "70-89" for "Rank 4", and in the range of "90-99" for "Rank 2". If the result of the win/loss determination is "Miss", which is the most disadvantageous result for the player, the reserved rank counter 223p1 is set to a value in the range of "0-69" for "Rank 4", in the range of "70-89" for "Rank 4", and in the range of "90-99" for "Rank 3".

In other words, in this control example, four types of reserved ranks, "Rank 1" to "Rank 4," can be selected for each winning information, and the more favorable the winning/losing judgment result is for the player, the more likely it is that a favorable rank (a rank with a lower value) will be selected.

In this way, when multiple pre-reading effects are executed, rather than setting the presentation mode of each pre-reading effect based on the result of the win/fail judgment of the winning information, a reserved rank is set based on the result of the win/fail judgment of the winning information, and the presentation mode of each pre-reading effect is set based on the reserved rank, making it possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with the presentation mode of the pre-reading effect being executed.

In other words, when executing a look-ahead performance when the result of the hit/miss determination is a miss, it is common to configure it so that a performance mode with a high expectation of a hit can be set to create a sense of hope for the player, but also to be able to set a performance mode with a low expectation of a hit in order to prevent the player from getting too hopeful and losing interest in playing. For example, when the hit/miss determination result is a miss and a look-ahead performance is executed, the performance mode with a low expectation of a hit is set approximately 90% of the time, and the performance mode with a high expectation of a hit is set approximately 10% of the time, so that the look-ahead performance can be executed without causing discomfort to the player.

In the pachinko machine 10 configured in this way, if the performance mode of each look-ahead performance is set based on the result of the hit/miss judgment, a performance mode with a low expectation of winning is set as the performance mode of one look-ahead performance, and a performance mode with a high expectation of winning is set as the performance mode of the other look-ahead performance, which causes a problem that the performance effect of the look-ahead performance cannot be enhanced. Specifically, when multiple types of look-ahead performances (for example, a first look-ahead performance (a performance that changes the display mode of the reserved pattern) that is executed first and a second look-ahead performance (a performance that changes the display mode of the comment display) that is executed after the first look-ahead performance) are set based on one winning information, if a performance mode with a high expectation of winning is set as the first look-ahead performance and a performance mode with a low expectation of winning is set as the second look-ahead performance, the player will have a sense of expectation that the winning information that is the target of the look-ahead performance contains information that will result in a jackpot (will he win a jackpot) by visually checking the performance content of the first look-ahead performance, and will be disappointed by visually checking the performance content of the second look-ahead performance that is executed next.

In response to this, by configuring the system to set a reserved rank in advance based on the hit/miss judgment result and set the presentation mode of each look-ahead performance according to the reserved rank that has been set, for example, when the hit/miss judgment result is a miss, the presentation mode of each look-ahead performance can be executed separately as a low expectation look-ahead performance in which the presentation mode is selected from presentation modes with a low expectation of a hit, and a high expectation look-ahead performance in which the presentation mode is selected from presentation modes with a high expectation of a hit, so that the appropriate presentation mode can be set for each look-ahead performance without causing the above-mentioned problems.

In addition, for example, by configuring it so that more reserved ranks can be set than the types of win/loss judgment results, a more diverse range of pre-reading effects can be executed without any awkwardness.

The reserved pattern selection table 222c is a data table for selecting the display mode of the reserved pattern displayed in the small area Ds2 of the sub-display area Ds of the third pattern display device 81. In this control example, it is configured so that the display mode of the reserved pattern can be changed when a winning command is received from the main control device 110 or when a new special pattern variation (lottery) starts.

Now, with reference to FIG. 228(b), the contents defined in the hold mode selection table 222c will be explained. FIG. 228(b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the hold mode selection table 222c. As shown in FIG. 228(b), the hold mode selection table 222c defines a number of hold modes corresponding to the hold rank selected using the hold rank selection table 222b and the value of the hold mode counter 223p2 possessed by the performance counter group 223p.

In this control example, the reserved pattern color is changed as a reserved mode, and the color of the reserved pattern, which is normally displayed as "white," is changed to "rainbow," "red," "green," "yellow," and "blue" in order of increasing probability of winning.

Specifically, for "reserved rank 1," which has the highest probability of winning (set only when the jackpot D has been won), the reserved status counter 223p2 is set to "red" in the range of "0-69," "- (no change)" in the range of "70-89," "green" in the range of "90-93," "yellow" in the range of "94-96," and "rainbow" in the range of "97-99." For "reserved rank 2," the reserved status counter 223p2 is set to "green" in the range of "0-69," "yellow" in the range of "70-79," "- (no change)" in the range of "80-89," "red" in the range of "90-96," and "blue" in the range of "97-99."

When the value of the reserved mode counter 223p2 is "0 to 69", the range is set to "- (no change)", when the value is "70 to 79", the range is set to "yellow", when the value is "80 to 89", the range is set to "green", when the value is "90 to 96", the range is set to "blue", and when the value is "97 to 99", the range is set to "red". When the value is "reserved rank 4", the range is set to "- (no change)", when the value is "0 to 89", the range is set to "blue", when the value is "90 to 93", the range is set to "yellow", when the value is "94 to 96", the range is set to "green", and when the value is "97 to 98", the range is set to "red".

In this control example, the reserved pattern is configured to have a variable color as the reserved pattern, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the reserved pattern may be configured to have a variable shape, or a display mode showing the result of the look-ahead performance may be displayed in the vicinity of the reserved pattern (within the range in which the player can identify the target reserved pattern). In addition, in this control example, the reserved pattern is configured to have a variable color as the look-ahead performance, but other display modes may be configured to be variable.

The treasure chest mode selection table 222d is a data table that is referenced when selecting the display mode (color) of the treasure chest device 750, and sets the display mode based on the jackpot type included in the corresponding winning information.

Now, the contents defined in the treasure chest mode selection table 222d will be explained with reference to FIG. 229. FIG. 229 is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the treasure chest mode selection table 222d. As shown in FIG. 229, the treasure chest mode selection table 222d defines a number of treasure chest modes corresponding to the jackpot type information (win/lose determination result) included in the winning information, whether or not there is a change in the display mode of the reserved pattern indicating the corresponding winning information (whether or not the reserved mode has already been changed), and the value of the treasure chest mode counter 223p3 of the performance counter group 223p.

Specifically, if the result of the hit/miss determination is "jackpot D" and the display mode of the corresponding reserved pattern has not changed, the value of the treasure chest mode counter 223p3 is set to "red" in the range of "0-69", "rainbow" in the range of "70-89", and "- (no change)" in the range of "90-99", and if the display mode of the corresponding reserved pattern has changed, the value of the treasure chest mode counter 223p3 is set to "red" in the range of "0-89", and "rainbow" in the range of "90-99".

In other words, in this control example, if the display mode of the reserved pattern corresponding to the winning information indicating that "Big Win D" has been won has already been changed, the display mode of the treasure chest device 750 is always changed as well, while if the display mode of the reserved pattern has not been changed, the display mode of the treasure chest device 750 may not be changed. This makes it possible to set a performance pattern in which the lottery result of the special pattern is displayed without changing the display mode of the reserved pattern or the display mode of the treasure chest device 750.

In addition, the system is configured so that the "rainbow" display mode, which has the highest probability of winning, is selected more frequently when the reserved mode is not changed than when the reserved mode is changed. This makes it easier for the treasure chest device 750 to be changed to the "rainbow" display mode, which has the highest probability of winning, without the display mode of the reserved symbols (reserved mode) being changed by the pre-reading performance, so it is possible to execute a surprising performance while providing the player with the fun of predicting which reserved symbol the display mode of the treasure chest device 750 has changed to.

Next, if the result of the hit/miss determination is "jackpot B" and the display mode of the corresponding reserved pattern has not changed, the value of the treasure chest mode counter 223p3 is set to "blue" in the range of "0 to 69", "- (no change)" in the range of "70 to 89", and "red" in the range of "90 to 99", and if the display mode of the corresponding reserved pattern has changed, the value of the treasure chest mode counter 223p3 is set to "blue" in the range of "0 to 69", and "red" in the range of "70 to 99".

If the result of the win/loss determination is "Big win A, C, E, or small win" and the display mode of the corresponding reserved pattern has not changed, the value of the treasure chest mode counter 223p3 is set to "- (no change)" in the range of "0 to 69", "blue" in the range of "70 to 89", and "- (no change)" in the range of "90 to 99", and if the display mode of the corresponding reserved pattern has changed, the value of the treasure chest mode counter 223p3 is set to "blue" in the range of "0 to 89" and "red" in the range of "90 to 99".

Finally, when the result of the hit/miss judgment is "miss" and the display mode of the corresponding reserved pattern is not changed, the value of the treasure chest mode counter 223p3 is set to "- (no change)" in the range of "0 to 89" and "blue" in the range of "90 to 99". When the display mode of the corresponding reserved pattern is changed, the value of the treasure chest mode counter 223p3 is set to "blue" in the range of "0 to 69" and "- (no change)" in the range of "70 to 99". As described above, in this control example, the condition for selecting the display (presentation) mode of the treasure chest role 750 is configured to be different from the condition for selecting the display (presentation) mode of the reserved pattern described above. This allows the player to predict the hit/miss judgment result this time by determining multiple performance modes to be executed in a composite manner. In addition, in this control example, the display (presentation) mode of the reserved pattern is set based on the set reserved rank level, and the display (presentation) mode of the treasure chest role 750 is set based on the hit/miss judgment result (jackpot type). By configuring in this way, the player can predict the result of the hit/miss judgment in advance by grasping the display mode of the reserved pattern, and can predict the type of the big win that will be set if the big win is won by grasping the display mode of the treasure box role 750. Therefore, the effect of the performance for showing the lottery result of the special pattern can be improved. In this control example, the treasure box role selection table 222d (see FIG. 229) is configured to select either "no change" or "blue" as the display mode of the treasure box role 750 when the lottery result of the special pattern is a miss, but the display mode may be selected at a predetermined rate, such as "red" or "rainbow". By configuring in this way, the player can predict the type of the big win that may be set if the big win is won, without knowing whether the big win is won or not. Furthermore, in this control example, the reserved mode selection table 222c and the treasure box mode selection table 222d described above are configured so that only when the game content that is most advantageous to the player (winning the jackpot D) is a display mode ("rainbow") that can notify that fact can be selected, and for other display modes, the selection ratio is varied based on the reserved rank, level, and hit/miss judgment result, but without being limited to this, it is also possible to configure it so that a dedicated display mode can be displayed for each game content (reserved rank, hit/miss judgment result).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 227(b), the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 is provided with at least a special symbol 1 reserved ball count counter 223a, a special symbol 2 reserved ball count counter 223b, a normal reserved ball count counter 223c, a fluctuation start flag 223d, a stop type selection flag 223e, a winning information storage area 223f, a status setting area 223g, an operation performance in progress flag 223h, an operation performance type storage area 223i, a pressed flag 223k, a reserved performance information storage area 223m, an operation valid timer 223n, a performance counter group 223p, a reserved performance in progress flag 223q, a treasure chest performance in progress flag 223r, a pseudo winning order memory area 223s, a normal symbol fluctuation start flag 223t, a normal symbol performance prohibition flag 223u, a normal symbol performance in progress flag 223v, and a miscellaneous memory area 223z.

The special pattern 1 reserved ball number counter 223a counts the number of reserved balls of the first special pattern, and when it receives a reserved ball number command set by the main control device 110, it is updated to a value based on the information indicating the reserved ball number included in the command. This special pattern 1 reserved ball number counter 223a is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls of the first special pattern up to a maximum of four times. Specifically, when a reserved ball count command (see S405, S412 in FIG. 244) set in the start winning process (see FIG. 244), which is executed when a ball wins in the start winning port (first winning port 64, second winning port 640), is received, the value of the special pattern 1 reserved ball count counter 223a is configured to be incremented by 1, and when a reserved ball count command (see S206, S211 in FIG. 239) set when a new special pattern change is started in the special pattern change process (see S104 in FIG. 239), the value of the special pattern 1 reserved ball count counter 233a is decremented by 1.

The special pattern 2 reserved ball count counter 223b, like the special pattern 1 reserved ball count counter 223a, is a display of the second special pattern changes performed by the first pattern display device 37 (and the third pattern display device 81), and is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of wait times) for the second special pattern change performance reserved in the main control device 110 up to a maximum of four times for each type of special pattern, and is updated according to the timing of the increase or decrease in the number of reserved balls, such as when a winning information command or a change pattern command is received.

As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 to obtain the values of the special pattern 1 reserved ball count counter 203d and the special pattern 2 reserved ball count counter 203e stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball count command sent from the main control device 110, and manages the number of reserved balls for each type of special pattern using the special pattern 1 reserved ball count counter 223a and the special pattern 2 reserved ball count counter 223b.

Specifically, when the main control unit 110 detects a start winning and adds to the number of reserved balls in the variable display, or when the main control unit 110 executes a variable display for a special pattern and subtracts the number of reserved balls, it sends a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special pattern 1 reserved ball number counter 203d or the special pattern 2 reserved ball number counter 203e after the addition or subtraction to the voice lamp control unit 113.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives a reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, it obtains the value of the special pattern 1 reserved ball number counter 203d or the special pattern 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main control device 110 from the reserved ball number command, and stores it in the counter corresponding to the command, either the special pattern 1 reserved ball number counter 223a or the special pattern 2 reserved ball number counter 223b (see S2207 in FIG. 298). In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the values of the special pattern 1 reserved ball number counter 223a and the special pattern 2 reserved ball number counter 223b according to the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, so that the values can be updated in synchronization with the values of the special pattern 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special pattern 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main control device 110.

The values of the special pattern 1 reserved ball counter 223a and the special pattern 2 reserved ball counter 223b are used to display the reserved ball number pattern on the third pattern display device 81. That is, in response to receiving a reserved ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the reserved ball number indicated by the command in the special pattern 1 reserved ball number counter 223a or the special pattern 2 reserved ball number counter 223b, and transmits a display reserved ball number command to the display control device 114 to notify the display control device 114 of the stored value of the special pattern 1 reserved ball number counter 223a or the special pattern 2 reserved ball number counter 223b.

When the display control device 114 receives this display reserved ball number command, it controls the drawing of the image so that the reserved ball number pattern corresponding to the reserved ball number value indicated by the command, that is, the value of the special pattern 1 reserved ball number counter 223a or the special pattern 2 reserved ball number counter 223b of the sound lamp control device 113, is displayed in the sub-display area Ds of the third pattern display device 81. As described above, the special pattern 1 reserved ball number counter 223a changes its value in synchronization with the special pattern 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110, and the special pattern 2 reserved ball number counter 223b changes its value in synchronization with the special pattern 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main control device 110. Therefore, the number of reserved ball number patterns displayed in the sub-display area Ds of the third pattern display device 81 can also be changed in synchronization with the values of the special pattern 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special pattern 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main control device 110. Therefore, the third pattern display device 81 can accurately display the number of reserved balls whose changing display is pending.

The normal reserved ball counter 223c has the same content as the special pattern 1 reserved ball counter 223a and the special pattern 2 reserved ball counter 223b described above, but differs only in that the target is changed from special patterns to normal patterns. Since the technical control concept is the same, a detailed explanation will be omitted.

The fluctuation start flag 223d is turned on when a fluctuation pattern command for the first special symbol or a fluctuation pattern command for the second special symbol transmitted from the main control unit 110 is received (see S2302 in FIG. 259), and is turned off when the fluctuation display is set in the third symbol display device 81 (see S3002 in FIG. 267). When the fluctuation start flag 223d is turned on, a fluctuation pattern command for display is set based on the fluctuation pattern extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command.

The display variation pattern command set here is stored in a ring buffer for sending commands provided in the RAM 223, and is sent to the display control device 114 during the command output process (S2102) of the main process (see FIG. 257) executed by the MPU 221. By receiving this display variation pattern command, the display control device 114 starts display control of the variation performance so that the third pattern is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command.

The stop type selection flag 223e is turned on when a stop type command for a special symbol is received from the main control unit 110 (see S2204 in FIG. 258), and is turned off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81 (see S3007 in FIG. 267). When the stop type selection flag 223e is turned on, the stop type is determined based on the stop type extracted from the received stop type command (the jackpot type in the case of a jackpot).

The winning information storage area 223f has one execution area, four areas (first area to fourth area) corresponding to the first special symbol, four areas (first area to fourth area) corresponding to the second special symbol, and four areas (first area to fourth area) corresponding to the normal symbol, and winning information is stored in each of these areas. In this pachinko machine 10, when the main control device 110 detects a start winning at the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640, the main control device 110 predicts (estimates) various information (whether or not it is a win, the jackpot type in the case of a jackpot, and the fluctuation pattern) that will be obtained when a lottery for the special symbol corresponding to the start winning is performed from the values of the special winning random number counter C1, the special winning type counter C2, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 obtained in response to the start winning, and the main control device 110 notifies the voice lamp control device 113 of the predicted various information by a winning information command.

In addition, when the passage of a ball through the through gate 67 is detected, the lottery result for the normal symbol corresponding to that passage is predicted in advance from the value of the second winning random number counter C4 obtained in response to that passage, and various predicted information is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by a winning information command from the main control device 110.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives a winning information command, various information notified by the winning information command (in the case of winning information for a special symbol, whether it was a win or not, the type of jackpot in the case of a jackpot, the variation pattern, and in the case of winning information for a normal symbol, whether it was a win or not) is extracted as winning information, and the winning information is stored in the winning information storage area 223f. More specifically, the extracted winning information is stored in order from the smallest area number (1st to 4th) among the vacant areas of the type of ball entry port where the ball was detected (first ball entry port 64 or second ball entry port 640) or the four areas (1st to 4th areas) corresponding to the normal symbol. In other words, the smaller the area number, the more data corresponding to an older winning event is stored, and the data corresponding to the oldest winning event is stored in the first area.

In this first control example, the main control device 110 is configured to set a winning information command based on various information (win or lose, type of jackpot in the case of a jackpot, and fluctuation pattern) obtained when a lottery is held for a special pattern corresponding to the start winning, and notify the audio lamp control device 113, but other configurations may be used.

For example, when a start winning occurs, a setting means may be provided that sets a winning information command by adding various information already stored in the special pattern 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special pattern 2 reserved ball storage area 203b to the various information predicted in response to the start winning, and a determination means may be provided that, when a winning information command is received, determines whether the various information (winning information) already stored in the winning information storage area 223f matches the various information (winning information) included in the received winning information command. This makes it possible to determine whether the various information (winning information) stored in the winning information storage area 223f has been stored appropriately.

In addition, in this first control example, a configuration is used in which a winning information command is set and notified to the voice lamp control device 113 when a new start winning occurs, but the timing of notifying the winning information command to the voice lamp control device 113 is not limited to the above-mentioned timing (the timing when the winning information command is set). For example, a configuration may be used in which a storage means is provided to temporarily store the winning information command, and the winning information command stored in the storage means is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 periodically (for example, every 5 seconds) when the game conditions change (for example, when the game state transitions from the time-saving state to the normal state, when the jackpot game starts or ends, etc.) in addition to the timing of the start winning, or when the special pattern starts (or stops) changing. By configuring in this way, it is possible to appropriately execute a performance (so-called pre-reading performance) using the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223f.

In this control example, the setting of the presentation mode, such as changing the display color of the reserved symbols, is executed as a look-ahead presentation based on each winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223f. In this way, by executing various presentations (look-ahead presentations) based on each winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223f, the player can have a sense of anticipation that each reserved ball will be a jackpot even before the variable display begins. It is also possible to execute a long-term presentation using multiple variable display periods.

The status setting area 223g is a memory area in which the current game status set in the pachinko machine 10 and the game status a predetermined period of time ago (for example, if a jackpot is currently being played, the game status at the time the jackpot was won) are set (stored).

In this state setting area 223g, when various state commands output from the main control device 110 are received by the command determination process (see S2114 in FIG. 258), information indicating the game state contained in the received state command is extracted, and the current game state is set. Also, in the command determination process (see S2114 in FIG. 258), when it is determined that a command indicating that a jackpot game is to be played is received, the information set (stored) as the current game state is set (stored) as the game state set immediately before. This makes it possible to vary the presentation mode of the variable presentation executed after the jackpot game ends according to the game state set at the time of winning the jackpot. Also, for example, even if the jackpot is of the same jackpot type, in the case where the configuration is such that the game state executed after the jackpot game ends is changed according to the game state at the time of winning, the sound lamp control device 113 can predict the game state to be set after the jackpot game ends during the jackpot game, and a presentation during the jackpot game to suggest the predicted result can be executed.

The operation presentation flag 223h is for indicating that an operation presentation is being executed, and is a flag that is set to ON when an operation presentation is being executed. The operation presentation flag 223h is configured to change the processing content when the operation means is operated depending on the setting status of the operation presentation flag 223h. Here, the operation presentation is a presentation in which the presentation mode changes based on the player's operation of the operation means (frame button 22), and includes the presentations described above with reference to Figures 214 to 218. Note that, although two operation presentations have been described with reference to Figures 214 to 218 as characteristic operation presentations executed in this control example, other operation presentations may be executed. For example, the presentation mode of the above-mentioned look-ahead presentation may be displayed based on the operation of the operation means (frame button 22).

When it is determined in the variable performance setting process (see S3004 in FIG. 268) that the variable pattern to be executed this time includes an operation performance (S3105: Yes in FIG. 268), the operation performance setting process (S3106 in FIG. 269) is set to ON (see S3204 in FIG. 269), and the frame button input monitoring and performance process (see S2107 in FIG. 271) refers to the operation performance flag 223h (S3304 in FIG. 271). When the operation performance flag 223h is set to ON (S3304: Yes in FIG. 271), the pressed flag 223k is set to ON (see S3305 in FIG. 271). The operation performance management process (see S2111 in FIG. 273) also refers to the operation performance management process (see S3501 in FIG. 273), and the performance mode of the operation performance based on the presence or absence of the frame button 22 operation is set for the operation performance being executed. Then, when the operation performance period has elapsed, the operation performance flag 223h is set to OFF.

The operation performance type storage area 223i is a memory area for temporarily storing the type of operation performance to be executed, and stores information indicating the type of operation performance determined in the operation performance setting process (see S3106 in FIG. 269) (see S3203, S3207 in FIG. 269). The operation performance type stored here is referenced when determining what operation performance is currently being executed in the operation performance management process (see S2111 in FIG. 273) (see S3502, S3509 in FIG. 273). This allows different processes to be executed depending on the type of operation performance. In addition, the information stored in the operation performance type storage area 223i is cleared when the operation performance ends (when the corresponding variable pattern performance ends).

The pressed flag 223k indicates that the player has pressed (operated) the frame button 22 (operation means), and is set to on when the frame button 22 is pressed during an operation presentation.

If it is determined in the frame button input monitoring and performance process (see S2107 in FIG. 271) that the frame button 22 was operated while the operation performance flag 223h was set to ON (S3304 in FIG. 271: Yes), this pressed flag 223k is set to ON (see S3305 in FIG. 271) and is referenced in the operation performance management process (see S2111 in FIG. 273) (S3503, S3511, S3518 in FIG. 273). Then, after the performance mode of the operation performance based on the reference result is set, it is set to OFF (S3505, S3513, S3520 in FIG. 273).

In this control example, as the operation presentation, there are cases where the presentation mode is changed immediately after the player operates the operation means, and cases where the presentation mode is changed after a predetermined period has passed. In such cases, by using the pressed flag 223k, that is, by configuring to temporarily store information indicating that the operation means has been operated (setting the pressed flag 223k to ON), and by making the stored information (setting status of the pressed flag 223k) distinguishable at the timing of changing the presentation mode based on the operation content (operation result) of the operation means, it is possible to reliably change the presentation mode of the operation presentation based on the operation result of the operation means. Note that in this control example, as the operation result for the operation means, only whether or not the operation means has been operated can be stored, but this is not limited to this, and for example, it is possible to store the number of times the operation means has been operated, or, in the case of having multiple operation means, to store how many times which operation means has been operated, or, in the case where one option can be selected from multiple options by operating the operation means, to store the selection result. If it is difficult to store the above-mentioned operation results using only the pressed flag 223k configuration used in this control example, an operation result storage area can be provided in place of the pressed flag 223k, and configured to temporarily store the operation contents performed by the player. In this way, by configuring the player to be able to perform multiple types of operations, the player can be actively involved in the game.

The reserved performance information storage area 223m is a memory area for storing various information set for executing the pre-reading performance, and is formed of four storage areas corresponding to the number of reserved balls of the first special pattern and four storage areas corresponding to the number of reserved balls of the second special pattern, and is configured to store information indicating the reserved rank, reserved state, and treasure chest state in each storage area. And, when a new special pattern variation starts, the various information stored in each storage area is shifted in the same way as the winning information storage area 223f.

In this control example, by using the information stored in the reserved performance information storage area 223m, the information set when the winning command was received (for example, information indicating the reserved rank) can be held until the special pattern variation starts, making it possible to execute a look-ahead performance using that information at any time. This allows a look-ahead performance that is unexpected for the player to be executed, enhancing the performance effect.

In this control example, the pre-reading performance is executed at the timing when the performance mode of the pre-reading performance is determined, but it may also be configured to store the determined performance mode of the pre-reading performance in the reserved performance information storage area 223m, and execute the pre-reading performance using the stored performance mode when a predetermined condition is met. By configuring in this way, for example, it is possible to determine the performance mode of the pre-reading performance using the winning information included in the winning command received during a period when the execution of the pre-reading performance is prohibited because a pre-reading performance is being executed for another reserved pattern, and execute a new pre-reading performance based on the end of the pre-reading performance executed for the other reserved pattern.

In addition, when a process for setting the performance mode of a look-ahead performance is executed once, if a process for prohibiting the process for setting the performance mode of a look-ahead performance from being executed again for a specified period of time (for example, the period until the special pattern change is executed twice), the process may be configured to store information specifying the prohibition period in the pending performance information storage area 223m, or to set prohibition information specific to a specific storage area on the storage area side so as to prohibit the execution of a look-ahead performance based on the pending performance information stored in the storage area in which the pending performance information corresponding to the pending pattern indicating the special pattern change to be executed next is stored.

The operation valid timer 223n is a timer for timing the operation valid period during an operation presentation (the period during which it is validly determined that the player has operated the operation means (frame button 22)), and a value is set for timing the period corresponding to when the operation presentation is executed. This operation valid timer 223n periodically subtracts the value set in the counter update process (S2113) executed at 1 millisecond intervals in the main process (see FIG. 257) of the voice lamp control device 113.

The effect counter group 223p is a counter group that has multiple counters used to select various effects. The contents of the various counters that this effect counter group 223p has will be explained with reference to Figure 230. Figure 230 is a schematic diagram that shows the contents of the effect counter group 223p. As shown in Figure 230, in this control example, the effect counter group 223p has a reserved rank counter 223p1, a reserved mode counter 223p2, a treasure chest mode counter 223p3, and other counters 223pz, and each counter is configured as a loop counter that is repeatedly updated within the range of "0 to 99".

Each counter in the group of performance counters 223p is updated by one each time the main process (see FIG. 257) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is executed. Each counter is configured to update within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99) without synchronization. Note that, as long as the values of each counter are updated without synchronization, a configuration other than that used in this control example may be used. For example, the range in which the value of each counter can be updated may be different. In this case, in order to make it difficult to synchronize when the counter update process is executed multiple times, it is preferable to configure the update range to be different prime numbers. By configuring in this way, it is possible to easily execute different combinations of performances, thereby enhancing the performance effect. On the other hand, if you want to execute (display) multiple performances while always having them related to each other, you can configure it so that the performance mode of the multiple performances is selected using the value of the same counter.

The pending performance flag 223q is a flag to indicate that a pending performance (a performance that changes the display mode of the pending pattern displayed in the small area Ds2 of the sub-display area Ds of the third pattern display device 81), which is one of the pre-reading performances, is being executed, and is set to ON when a pending performance is being executed. This pending performance flag 223q is set to ON (see S2405 in FIG. 261) in the pending performance selection process (see S2506 in FIG. 261), and when it is set to ON, it is referenced so that a new pending mode is not set (see S2501 in FIG. 261). Then, in the stop process (see FIG. 266), if it is determined that the special pattern variation that is the subject of the pending performance has stopped (S2957 in FIG. 266: Yes), it is set to OFF (see S2958 in FIG. 266).

This configuration makes it possible to prevent reserved effects from being executed simultaneously for multiple reserved symbols, and allows the player to focus on the look-ahead effect executed for a specific reserved symbol. Also, when a winning command indicating that the win/loss determination result is a win is received while a look-ahead effect has already been executed with a win/loss determination result of a miss, the execution of the look-ahead effect for the winning information corresponding to the winning command can be suppressed, providing an unexpected effect in which the special pattern change corresponding to a reserved symbol for which a look-ahead effect has not been executed results in a jackpot.

In this control example, the pending performance flag 223q is used to prevent the pre-reading performance from being performed for multiple pending symbols, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the pre-reading performance may be performed for up to two pending symbols, or the pending symbols that are the target of the pre-reading performance may be switched if it is determined that there is winning information that indicates a lottery result that is more favorable to the player than the lottery result of the special symbol that corresponds to the currently performed pre-reading performance.

The treasure chest performance flag 223r is a flag to indicate that a treasure chest performance (a performance that changes the display mode of the treasure chest device 750), which is one of the look-ahead performances, is being executed, and is set to on when a treasure chest performance is being executed. This treasure chest performance flag 223r differs only in that the target of the above-mentioned pending performance flag 223q has been replaced with a look-ahead performance that changes the display mode of the treasure chest device 750, so a detailed explanation of this will be omitted.

The pseudo winning order memory area 223s is a memory area for temporarily storing the order (pseudo winning order) of balls that have entered each winning port (specific general winning port 163, specific out port 166, specific winning port 65a) of the special winning device 550, which is calculated for the balls that have entered the pseudo attacka 165. When a command indicating that a ball has entered each winning port is received in the pseudo attacka performance process (see S2812 in FIG. 265) executed in the right attacka jackpot related process (see S2702 in FIG. 264), the pseudo winning order memory area 223s calculates the winning order of the pseudo attacka 165 by adding the ball flow period from each winning port to the pseudo attacka 165, and stores the calculation result (S2903 in FIG. 265). This is referenced when setting a specific presentation mode (overflow presentation mode) for pseudo winning information with winning orders of 10 or more stored in the winning order storage area 223s. The information stored in the pseudo winning order storage area 223s is cleared each time one round of play is completed (see S2808 in FIG. 264).

The normal symbol performance possible flag 223t is a flag for indicating whether or not the variation pattern of the normal symbol won in the long opening win is executed, and is set to ON when the variation pattern of the normal symbol won in the long opening win is executed. This makes it possible to determine whether or not the performance mode can be changed based on the lottery result of the normal symbol while a charge performance is being executed based on the lottery result of the special symbol. Note that when a variation pattern command indicating that the variation pattern of the normal symbol won in the long opening win is executed is received, if it is determined that the performance mode of the charge performance cannot be changed (S2305: No in FIG. 259), the flag is not set to ON.

The normal symbol performance prohibition flag 223u is a flag for indicating that the execution of a normal symbol performance (a performance in which the performance mode of a charge performance is changed based on the results of a lottery for normal symbols) is prohibited, and is set to ON when it is determined that the execution of a normal symbol performance is prohibited. This normal symbol performance prohibition flag 223u is set to ON (see S2408 in FIG. 260) when it is determined in the winning information related process (see S2209 in FIG. 260) that there is winning information indicating that a special symbol will be won (a big win or a small win) (see S2407 in FIG. 260).

Then, in the variable pattern reception process (see S2202 in FIG. 259), when a variable pattern command corresponding to a long open win (normal long win) of a normal pattern is received, it is referenced (S2305 in FIG. 259), and the setting status of the normal pattern performance possible flag 223t is changed based on the reference result. This normal pattern performance prohibition flag 223u is set to OFF when a special pattern indicating a win (big win, small win) is stopped and displayed.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to prevent the special symbol variable presentation from being changed based on the result of the lottery for the normal symbols when there is winning information indicating a special symbol win (big win, small win) that is more advantageous to the player than a long open win on a normal symbol. Therefore, for example, it is possible to prevent the presentation of a presentation that is difficult for the player to understand from being performed when a presentation based on a normal long win is being performed while a pre-reading presentation is being performed based on winning information indicating a win.

In this control example, the normal symbol presentation prohibition flag 223u is configured to be turned on when it is determined that there is winning information indicating that a special symbol will be won (a big win or a small win), but the normal symbol presentation prohibition flag 223u may be configured to be set on under other conditions. For example, the normal symbol presentation prohibition flag 223u may be set on at a timing other than when the variable presentation indicating the lottery result of the special symbol is rapidly changing. This makes it possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable when the variable presentation being executed suddenly changes.

Furthermore, in addition to the timing when the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the normal long opening hit is received, the normal play prohibition flag 223u may be configured to be set to ON based on the timing when the normal long opening hit game is executed.

The normal display flag 223v is a flag to indicate that the normal display is being executed, and is set to ON when the normal display is being executed. This normal display flag 223v is set to ON when the normal display is executed in the LCD display execution management process (see S2110 in FIG. 272) (see S3406 in FIG. 272). It is also referenced in the stop process (see S2213 in FIG. 266) that is executed when a stop command for the special symbol is received in order to set the display mode of the third symbol to be displayed at the timing when the special symbol stops (S2952 in FIG. 266). It is also referenced to set the change pattern of the change display that is set in accordance with the start of the change of the special symbol (see S3103 in FIG. 268).

The continuation flag 223x is a flag for determining that the normal symbol performance is executed so as to span multiple special symbol variations, and is set to ON when the normal symbol performance is executed so as to span multiple special symbol variations. This continuation flag 223x is set to ON (see S3231 in FIG. 270) when it is determined in the charge performance setting process (see S3104 in FIG. 270) that the normal symbol variation time is longer than the currently executed special symbol variation time (S3224 in FIG. 270: Yes). Then, it is referenced in the stop process (see S3103 in FIG. 266) (see S2953 in FIG. 266), and if it is determined that it is set to ON (S2953 in FIG. 266: Yes), a process is executed to display a reduced third symbol to reduce and stop the third symbol in order to continue the normal symbol performance (charge performance) without discomfort.

In this way, when a process is performed to change the presentation mode of the charge presentation based on the result of the lottery for the normal symbols while a charge presentation is being performed based on the result of the lottery for the special symbols, even if the timing at which the normal symbols stop changing is later than the timing at which the special symbols stop changing, by using the continuation flag 223x, it is possible to perform the charge presentation across the timing at which the special symbols stop changing. Also, when a charge presentation is performed across the timing at which the special symbols stop changing, the stopped display mode of the third symbol, which indicates the result of the lottery for the special symbols, can be variably set so that it is more difficult for the player to distinguish than the normal stopped display mode, allowing the player to perform the charge presentation without feeling uncomfortable.

The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third pattern display device 81, and controls the variable display (variable presentation) of the third pattern on the third pattern display device 81 based on commands received from the voice lamp control device 113. Details of this display control device 114 will be described later with reference to FIG. 231.

The power supply unit 115 has a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure or the like, and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110-114, etc. through a power supply path not shown. In summary, the power supply unit 251 takes in an externally supplied 24-volt AC voltage, generates a 12-volt voltage for driving various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc., a 5-volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc., and supplies the necessary voltages to each of the control devices 110-114, etc.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 and the MPU 211 of the dispensing control unit 111 when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of 24 volts DC, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and when this voltage falls below 22 volts, it determines that a power failure (power failure, power cut) has occurred and outputs a power failure signal SG1 to the main control unit 110 and the dispensing control unit 111. By outputting the power failure signal SG1, the main control unit 110 and the dispensing control unit 111 recognize the occurrence of a power failure and execute NMI interrupt processing. The power supply unit 251 is configured to maintain the output of the 5 volt voltage, which is the drive voltage of the control system, at a normal value for a sufficient time to execute the NMI interrupt processing, even after the voltage of 24 volts DC becomes less than 22 volts. Therefore, the main control unit 110 and the dispensing control unit 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 251).

The RAM clear switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM clear signal SG2 to the main control device 110 to clear the backup data when the RAM clear switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the main control device 110 inputs the RAM clear signal SG2 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, it clears the backup data and sends a payout initialization command to the payout control device 111 to clear the backup data in the payout control device 111.

Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 231. FIG. 231 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 has an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241.

The input side of the input port 238 is connected to the output side of the voice lamp control device 113, and the output side of the input port 238 is connected to the MPU 231, work RAM 233, character ROM 234, and image controller 237 via bus line 240. The image controller 237 is connected to the resident video RAM 235 and normal video RAM 236, and is also connected to the output port 239 via bus line 241. The output side of the output port 239 is also connected to the third pattern display device 81.

Incidentally, even if the pachinko machine 10 is of a different model with different lottery probabilities for a special jackpot or different numbers of prize balls paid out for one special jackpot, there are models with the exact same specifications for the pattern configuration displayed on the third pattern display device 81, so the display control device 114 is made into a common component to reduce costs.

In the following, we will first explain the MPU 231, character ROM 234, image controller 237, resident video RAM 235, and normal video RAM 236, and then explain the work RAM 233.

First, the MPU 231 controls the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 has a built-in command pointer 231a, reads and fetches the command code stored at the address indicated by the command pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the command code. The MPU 231 is configured to be reset by the power supply device 115 immediately after power is turned on (including power recovery from a power outage. The same applies below). When the system reset is released, the command pointer 231a is automatically set to "0000H" by the hardware of the MPU 231. Then, each time a command code is fetched, the value of the command pointer 231a is incremented by one. Also, when the MPU 231 executes a command to set the command pointer, the value of the pointer indicated by the command is set in the command pointer 231a.

In addition, although details will be described later, in this embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and the various fixed value data used in the control program are not stored in a dedicated program ROM as in conventional gaming machines, but are instead stored in a character ROM 234 provided for storing image data to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

Although details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND type flash memory 234a, which allows for a large capacity in a small area. This allows sufficient storage of not only image data but also control programs, etc. Furthermore, if the control programs, etc. are stored in the character ROM 234, there is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control programs, etc. This makes it possible to reduce the number of parts in the display control device 114, which not only reduces manufacturing costs but also suppresses an increase in the rate of failures due to an increase in the number of parts.

On the other hand, NAND flash memory has a problem in that the read speed is slow, especially when performing random access. For example, when reading data arranged continuously on multiple pages, the data from the second page onwards can be read at high speed, but when reading the data of the first page, it takes a long time from when the address is specified until the data is output. Also, when reading non-contiguous data, it takes a long time each time the data is read. As such, since the read speed of NAND flash memory is slow, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, it may take a long time to read the commands that make up the control program, and even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, this may deteriorate the processing performance of the display control device 114.

In this embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, the control program stored in the NAND type flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is first transferred to and stored in the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. The MPU 231 then executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. As described below, the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM (Dynamic RAM), and data can be read and written at high speed, so that the MPU 231 can read the commands that make up the control program without delay. This allows the display control device 114 to maintain high processing performance, and the third pattern display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated presentations.

The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores the control program executed by the MPU 231 and the image data displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via a bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, and transfers the control program stored in the second program memory area 234a1 of the character ROM 234, which will be described later, to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. The image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 transfers the image data stored in the character memory area 234a2 of the character ROM 234, which will be described later, to the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236, which are connected to the image controller 237.

This character ROM 234 is constructed by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR ROM 234d.

The NAND type flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as the main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has at least a second program memory area 234a1 that stores most of the control programs executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third pattern display device 81, and a character memory area 234a2 that stores data for images (characters, etc.) to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

The NAND flash memory has the characteristic of being able to obtain a large storage capacity in a small area, and the character ROM 234 can be easily increased in capacity. As a result, in this pachinko machine, by using a NAND flash memory 234a with a capacity of, for example, 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character memory area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. Therefore, in order to further increase the interest of the player, the images displayed on the third pattern display device 81 can be made more diverse and complex.

In addition, the NAND flash memory 234a can store a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2, and can also store control programs and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1. In this way, the control programs and fixed value data can be stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing image data to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81, without having to provide a dedicated program ROM as in conventional gaming machines. This reduces the number of parts in the display control device 114, reducing manufacturing costs and preventing an increase in the rate of failures due to an increase in the number of parts.

The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. For example, based on an address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b reads out the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a, etc., and outputs the data to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

Due to its nature, the NAND flash memory 234a generates a relatively large number of error bits (bits to which erroneous data is written) when writing data, and generates defective data blocks to which data cannot be written. Therefore, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and also performs known data address conversion so that data is read and written to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding the defective data blocks.

This ROM controller 234b performs error correction on data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, including error bits, so that even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing based on erroneous data and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

Furthermore, the ROM controller 234b analyzes the bad data blocks of the NAND flash memory 234a and avoids accessing the bad data blocks, so that the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 can easily access the character ROM 234 without having to consider the address positions of the bad data blocks, which differ in each NAND flash memory 234a. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent access control to the character ROM 234 from becoming complicated.

The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address assigned to the character ROM 234 is specified from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b determines whether one page (e.g., 2 kilobytes) of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If the data is not set, the buffer RAM 234c reads one page (e.g., 2 kilobytes) of data including the data corresponding to the specified address from the NAND flash memory 234a (or the NOR ROM 234d) and temporarily sets it in the buffer RAM 234c. The ROM controller 234b then performs a known error correction process and outputs the data corresponding to the specified address to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

This buffer RAM 234c is made up of two banks, and one page's worth of data from the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. This allows the ROM controller 234b to, for example, output data from the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside by using one bank while data is set in the other, or to perform parallel processing of transferring one page's worth of data, including data corresponding to an address specified by the MPU 231 or image controller 237, from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and setting it, and reading data corresponding to an address specified by the MPU 231 or image controller 237 from the other bank and outputting it to the MPU 231 or image controller 237. This improves the responsiveness of the character ROM 234 when reading it out.

The NOR ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub-storage unit in the character ROM 234, and is configured to have a much smaller capacity (e.g., 2 kilobytes) than the NAND flash memory 234a in order to complement the NAND flash memory 234a. This NOR ROM 234d is provided with at least a first program memory area 234d1 that stores, among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, programs that are not stored in the second program memory area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, specifically, a part of the boot program that is executed first in the MPU 231 after the system reset is released.

The boot program is a control program for starting the display control device 114 so that various controls for the third pattern display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 executes this boot program first after the system reset is released. This allows the display control device 114 to be in a state where various controls can be executed. The first program memory area 234d1 stores a predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, then 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes) worth of instructions) from the instruction to be first processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, within the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (i.e., one page of the NAND type flash memory 234a) of this boot program. Note that the number of instructions of the boot program stored in the first program memory area 234d1 only needs to be within the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and may be appropriately set according to the specifications of the display control device 114.

When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 is configured to set the value of the instruction pointer 231a to "0000H" by hardware and to specify the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a on the bus line 240. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" has been specified on the bus line 240, it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c and outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231.

When the MPU 231 fetches an instruction code received from the character ROM 234, it executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, increments the instruction pointer 231a by 1, and specifies the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. Then, while the address specified by the bus line 240 is an address indicating a program stored in the NOR ROM 234d, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 reads out from the buffer RAM 234c the instruction code at the corresponding address from the program previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR ROM 234d, and outputs it to the MPU 231.

In this embodiment, the reason why not all control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, but rather a predetermined number of commands from the boot program, starting with the command that should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, are stored in the NOR ROM 234d, is as follows. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a has a problem specific to NAND flash memories in that when reading data from the first page, it takes a long time from when an address is specified until the data is output.

If all the control programs are stored in such a NAND type flash memory 234a, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 to fetch the command code that the MPU 231 should execute first after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (command code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND type flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. And, because of the nature of the NAND type flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to read and set it in the buffer RAM 234c, so the MPU 231 consumes a lot of waiting time from specifying the address "0000H" to receiving the command code corresponding to the address "0000H". Therefore, it takes a long time to start up the MPU 231, which results in a problem that the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not start immediately.

On the other hand, since the NOR type ROM is a memory capable of reading data at high speed, by storing a predetermined number of commands from the command to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released in the NOR type ROM 234d, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 can immediately set the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c and output the corresponding data (command code) to the MPU 231. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the command code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", and can start up the MPU 231 in a short time. Therefore, even if a control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be immediately started.

Now, the boot program is programmed to transfer the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, i.e., the control programs excluding the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d, and the fixed value data used in the control programs (e.g., a display data table, a transfer data table, etc., which will be described later) to the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b of the work RAM 233 in a predetermined amount (e.g., the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). Then, the MPU 231 first transfers and stores the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c in which the boot program of the first program storage area 234d1 is set, according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released.

Here, as described above, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is configured with a capacity equivalent to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, so when the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to the address of the internal bus being specified as "0000H", the boot program is set in only one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, since there is no need to set the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 in the buffer RAM 234c again after the transfer process, the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

The boot program stored in the first program memory area 234d1 is programmed to set the instruction pointer 231a to a first predetermined location in the program storage area 233a when a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program memory area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a. As a result, after the system reset is released, when a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program memory area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to a first predetermined location in the program storage area 233a.

Therefore, when a predetermined amount of the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 can read out the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a and execute various processes. That is, the MPU 231 does not read out the control programs from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instructions, but reads out the control programs transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a, fetches the instructions, and executes various processes. As described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even if most of the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instructions at high speed and execute the process for the instructions.

The control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 includes the remaining boot program that is not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is programmed so that the remaining boot program is included in the control program transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount, and the instruction pointer 231a is programmed to set the top address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as a first predetermined address.

As a result, the MPU 231 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program memory area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a using the boot program stored in the first program memory area 234d1, and then executes the remaining boot program included in the transferred control program.

This remaining boot program executes a process of transferring all the remaining control programs not transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data used in the control programs (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc., described later) from the second program memory area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b in predetermined amounts. In addition, at the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to a second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, as this second predetermined address, the start address of the program stored in the program storage area 233a that corresponds to the initialization process (see S6002 in FIG. 274) that is executed after the boot process (see S6001 in FIG. 274) by the boot program is completed is set.

The MPU 231 executes the remaining boot program, and all of the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 executes various processes using the control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a.

Therefore, even if most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234, which is composed of a NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, by transferring the control program to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released, the MPU 231 can read the control program from the work RAM, which is composed of a DRAM with a fast read speed, and perform various controls. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated presentations can be easily executed using the third pattern display device 81.

As described above, instead of storing the entire boot program in NOR ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored starting from the instructions to be processed first by MPU 231 after system reset is released, and the remaining boot program is stored in second program storage area 234a1 of NAND flash memory 234a, so that the control program stored in second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to program storage area 233a. Therefore, by simply adding an extremely small capacity NOR ROM 234d to character ROM 234, it becomes possible to start up MPU 231 in a short time, and therefore the increase in cost of character ROM 234 associated with the shortened time can be suppressed.

The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and displays the drawn image on the third pattern display device 81 at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws one frame of an image based on a drawing list (see FIG. 237) sent from the MPU 231, and displays the drawn image in one of the first and second frame buffers 236b and 236c, which will be described later, while outputting the image information for one frame previously displayed in the other frame buffer to the third pattern display device 81, thereby displaying the image on the third pattern display device 81. The image controller 237 performs the drawing process for this one frame of an image and the display process for this one frame of an image in parallel within the image display time for one frame on the third pattern display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this embodiment).

The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter referred to as a "V interrupt signal") to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of one frame of image is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, it executes V interrupt processing (see FIG. 276 (b)) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw the next frame of image. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes drawing processing of the next frame of image and also executes processing to display the image previously developed by drawing on the third pattern display device 81.

In this way, MPU 231 executes V interrupt processing in response to a V interrupt signal from image controller 237 and issues drawing instructions to image controller 237, so that image controller 237 can receive image drawing instructions from MPU 231 at image drawing and display processing intervals (20 milliseconds). Therefore, image controller 237 will not receive a drawing instruction for the next image before the image drawing and display processing are completed, so it is possible to prevent starting drawing of a new image in the middle of drawing an image, or developing an image in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information currently being displayed is stored.

The image controller 237 also performs processing to transfer image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on transfer instructions from the MPU 231 or transfer data information included in the drawing list.

Images are drawn using image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on instructions from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

Here, while NAND type flash memory makes it easy to increase the capacity of ROM, its read speed is slower than other ROMs (such as mask ROM and EEPROM). In contrast, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer a portion of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after power is turned on. Then, as described below, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled to remain resident without being overwritten.

As a result, after the transfer of image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 can perform image drawing processing while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, there is no need to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, which is composed of the NAND type flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, when drawing an image, so the time required for reading can be saved, and the image can be drawn immediately and displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 stores image data of frequently displayed images and image data of images that should be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control unit 110 or the display control unit 114. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured from a NAND type flash memory 234a, high responsiveness can be maintained until an image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

When the display control device 114 uses image data that is non-resident in the resident video RAM 235 to draw an image, the MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data required for drawing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. As described below, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used to draw the image. However, when drawing the image, there is no need to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, which is made up of the NAND type flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, and the time required for reading can be saved, so that the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

In addition, by storing image data in the normal video RAM 236 as well, it is not necessary to keep all image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, and therefore it is not necessary to prepare a large-capacity resident video RAM 235. This makes it possible to suppress the increase in costs that would otherwise be caused by providing the resident video RAM 235.

The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a consisting of 132 kilobytes of SRAM, which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

The image data transfer instruction issued by the MPU 231 to the image controller 237 by the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list includes the start address (start address of the source storage) and the end address (end address of the source storage) of the character ROM 234 where the image data to be transferred is stored, the destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236), and the start address of the destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236). Note that the data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the end address of the source storage.

In accordance with the various information in this transfer instruction, the image controller 237 reads one block of data from a specified address in the character ROM 234, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and transfers the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 when the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not in use. This process is then repeated until all of the image data stored from the storage start address to the storage end address indicated by the transfer instruction has been transferred.

This allows image data that is read out from the character ROM 234 over a long period of time to be temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data can be transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. This prevents the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of image data while the image data is being transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. This prevents the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 from being occupied by the transfer of image data, which makes it impossible to use the video RAMs 235 and 236 for the image drawing process, and as a result, prevents the image from being drawn or displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in time for the required time.

In addition, the transfer of image data from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is performed by the image controller 237, so that the period during which the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are not being used for image drawing processing or display processing on the third pattern display device 81 can be easily determined, simplifying the processing.

The resident video RAM 235 is used to hold image data transferred from the character ROM 234 without being overwritten while the power is on, and is provided with a power-on main image area 235a, a back image area 235c, a character design area 235e, and an error message image area 235f, as well as a power-on variable image area 235b and a third design area 235d.

The power-on main image area 235a is an area that stores data corresponding to the power-on main image displayed on the third pattern display device 81 from when the power is turned on until all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. The power-on variable image area 235b is an area that stores image data corresponding to the power-on variable image that displays the lottery results performed in the main control device 110 by a variable presentation when the player starts playing while the power-on main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 and a ball entering the first starting hole 64a is detected.

When power supply from the power supply unit 251 begins, the MPU 231 sends a transfer instruction to the image controller 237 to transfer image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variable image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a (see FIG. 274).

The power-on variable image will now be described. Immediately after power is turned on, the display control device 114 transfers image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variable image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variable image area 235b, and then transfers the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While this remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the power-on main image area 235a to display the power-on main image (see FIG. 35) on the third pattern display device 81.

At this time, when the display control device 114 receives a display variation pattern command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a variation pattern command from the main control device 110, which is an instruction command to start the variation, the display control device 114 alternately displays, on the display screen of the main image when the power is turned on, a power-on variation image with a "○" pattern in the lower right position facing the screen and a power-on variation image with a "X" pattern in the same position as the "○" pattern, during the variation period. Then, the display control device 114 judges the result of the lottery performed by the main control device 110 from the display variation pattern command and display stop type command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command and stop type command from the main control device 110, and if it is a "special pattern jackpot", an image indicating this is displayed for a certain period after the variation performance stops, and if it is a "special pattern miss", an image indicating this is displayed for a certain period after the variation performance stops.

The MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw the power-on main image using the image data stored in the power-on main image area 235a until all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred to the resident video RAM 235. This allows players and hall staff to check the power-on main image displayed on the third pattern display device 81 while the remaining image data that should be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, the display control device 114 can take the time to transfer the remaining image data that should be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while the power-on main image is being displayed on the third pattern display device 81. Furthermore, since players can recognize that some processing is taking place while the main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, they can wait until the transfer of image data to the resident video RAM 235 is complete without worrying that operation may have stopped while the remaining image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is being transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235.

In addition, during operational checks at the factory during manufacturing, the main image is immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, so that it is possible to immediately confirm that the third pattern display device 81 has started operating without any problems upon power-on. Furthermore, by using a NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed for the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the efficiency of operational checks from deteriorating.

Furthermore, if a player starts playing while the power-on main image is being displayed on the third pattern display device 81 and a ball is detected entering the first entrance ball 64, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw a power-on variable image using image data corresponding to the power-on variable image that is constantly resident in the power-on variable image area 235b, and to display images showing "○" and "×" alternately on the third pattern display device 81. This allows a simple variable presentation to be performed using the power-on variable image. Therefore, the player can be sure that a lottery has been drawn by the simple variable presentation, even while the power-on main image is being displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

In addition, at the stage when the power-on main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81, image data corresponding to the power-on variable performance image is already resident in the power-on variable image area 235b, so if a ball entering the first entrance ball 64 is detected while the power-on main image is being displayed on the third pattern display device 81, the corresponding variable performance can be instantly displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

Returning to FIG. 231, the explanation will be continued. The rear image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the rear image displayed on the third pattern display device 81. The third pattern area 235d is an area for storing the third pattern used in the variable performance displayed on the third pattern display device 81. That is, the third pattern area 235d stores image data corresponding to the above-mentioned 10 types of main patterns (see FIG. 209) numbered "0" to "9" which are the third patterns. As a result, when performing a variable performance on the third pattern display device 81, it is not necessary to read image data from the character ROM 234 one by one, so that even if the NAND type flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, the variable performance can be started quickly on the third pattern display device 81. This makes it possible to prevent a situation from occurring in which a variable performance is not immediately started on the third pattern display device 81 even though a variable performance has already started on the first pattern display device 37 after a ball has entered the first starting hole 64a or the second starting hole 64b.

The character design area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to the character designs used in various effects displayed on the third design display device 81. In this pachinko machine 10, various characters including a "boy" are displayed according to various effects, and the data corresponding to these are resident in the character design area 235e. When the display control device 114 changes the character design based on the contents of a command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the display control device 114 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but reads the image data that is resident in advance in the character design area 235e of the resident video RAM 235, so that the image controller 237 can draw a predetermined image. This eliminates the need to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, so that the character design can be changed instantly even if a NAND-type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed is used for the character ROM 234.

The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message that is displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In this pachinko machine 10, for example, when the sound lamp control device 113 detects vibration from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back of the game board 13, the sound lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of a vibration error by an error command. Also, when the sound lamp control device 113 detects the occurrence of another error, the sound lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of that error together with the type of error by an error command. When the display control device 114 receives the error command, it is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third pattern display device 81.

Here, from the viewpoint of preventing players from committing fraud and protecting players from errors, it is required that the error message be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of the error. In this pachinko machine 10, image data corresponding to various error messages is pre-resident in the error message image area 235f, so that the display control device 114 can instantly draw each error message image in the image controller 237 by reading out the image data pre-resident in the error message image area 235f of the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. As a result, it is not necessary to sequentially read out image data corresponding to error messages from the character ROM 234, so that even if a NAND-type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed is used for the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message can be displayed immediately after the error command is received.

The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated as needed, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c.

The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, among the image data required for drawing the image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a number of sub-areas, and the type of image data to be stored in each sub-area is predetermined.

The MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and that is required for subsequent image drawing from the character ROM 234 to a specific sub-area in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the type of image data should be stored. As a result, the image controller 237 reads out the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to the specified specific sub-area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

The instruction to transfer image data is given by including transfer data information in a drawing list (described later) in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image. This allows the MPU 231 to issue an instruction to draw an image and an instruction to transfer image data simply by sending the drawing list to the image controller 237, thereby reducing the processing load.

The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for displaying an image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. The image controller 237 writes one frame of an image drawn in accordance with instructions from the MPU 231 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, thereby displaying one frame of an image in that frame buffer, and while displaying an image in one of the frame buffers, reads out one frame of image information previously displayed from the other frame buffer and transmits the image information to the third pattern display device 81 together with a drive signal, thereby executing a process for displaying the one frame of an image on the third pattern display device 81.

In this way, by providing two frame buffers, the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, the image controller 237 can display one frame of image drawn in one frame buffer while simultaneously reading out one frame of image previously displayed from the other frame buffer, and display the one frame of image that has been read out on the third pattern display device 81.

The frame buffer into which one frame's worth of image is displayed and the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read in order to display the image on the third pattern display device 81 are alternately designated by the MPU 231 as either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process for one frame's worth of image is completed.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer that will display one frame's worth of image, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read, and image drawing and display processing is executed. 20 milliseconds after the drawing processing of one frame's worth of image is completed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer that will display one frame's worth of image, and the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously displayed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is displayed in the second frame buffer 236c.

Then, after another 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the frame buffer in which one frame's worth of image is displayed, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read. This allows the image information of the image previously displayed in the second frame buffer 236c to be read and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, while at the same time a new image is displayed in the first frame buffer 236b. Thereafter, by alternately specifying the frame buffer in which one frame's worth of image is displayed and the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read, either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, every 20 milliseconds, it is possible to perform the display process of one frame's worth of image continuously in 20 millisecond units while performing the drawing process of one frame's worth of image.

The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing the control programs and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and for temporarily storing work data and flags used when the MPU 231 executes various control programs, and is composed of DRAM. This work RAM 233 has at least a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a time counter 233h, a stored image data discrimination flag 233i, and a drawing target buffer flag 233j.

The program storage area 233a is an area for storing the control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in this program storage area 233a. Then, when all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND type flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third pattern display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated performances.

The data table storage area 233b is an area that stores a display data table that describes the display content to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 over time for a performance that is displayed based on a command from the main control device 110, and a transfer data table that specifies the transfer data information and transfer timing for image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and is used in a performance that is displayed based on the display data table.

These data tables are usually stored as a type of fixed value data in the second program storage area 434 provided in the NAND type flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and according to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, these data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in this data table storage area 233b. Then, when all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 controls the display of the third pattern display device 81 using the data tables stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even if various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third pattern display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated performances.

Here, we will explain the details of the various data tables. First, a display data table is prepared for each presentation mode displayed on the third pattern display device 81 based on commands from the main control device 110. For example, display data tables corresponding to variable presentations, round presentations, ending presentations, and demo presentations are prepared.

The variable performance is an effect that is started in the third pattern display device 81 when a display variable pattern command is received from the sound lamp control device 113. When the display variable pattern command is received, a display stop type command that indicates the stop type of the variable performance is also received. For example, when the variable performance is started, if the stop type of the variable performance is a miss, the stop pattern indicating a miss is finally stopped and displayed, whereas if the stop type of the variable performance is either jackpot A or jackpot B, the stop pattern indicating the respective jackpot is finally stopped and displayed. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually checking the stop pattern in this variable performance, and can easily determine the game value awarded according to the jackpot type.

In addition, the first ball entrance 64 is a prize entrance from which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters it, so when a normal jackpot occurs and the electric device is opened, making it easier for balls to enter the second ball entrance 640, the number of prize balls increases. As a result, the pachinko machine 10 is in a state where the balls held are unlikely to be reduced or are not reduced even when playing, so the player can get a sense of the period when the balls held are unlikely to be reduced or are not reduced and a jackpot with a special pattern can be obtained. This increases the player's motivation to participate in the game, and allows the player to continue to be motivated to participate in the game.

As mentioned above, the demo effect is an effect that is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when a predetermined time has passed since the first variable effect stopped, but the next variable effect associated with a start winning does not start. The third symbol, consisting of the main symbols without the numbers "0" to "9", is displayed frozen, and only the back image changes. If the demo effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, players and hall staff can recognize that no play is being performed on the pachinko machine 10.

The data table storage area 233b stores one display data table each corresponding to the round performance, the ending performance, and the demo performance. In addition, if there are 32 variable performance patterns to be set, the variable display data table, which is the display data table for the variable performance, will have one table per variable performance pattern, for a total of 32 tables.

Now, with reference to Figure 235, the display data table will be described in detail. Figure 235 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a variable display data table among the display data tables. The display data table specifies in detail the contents (drawing contents) of one frame of image to be displayed at that time, corresponding to an address expressed as a unit of time (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) during which one frame of image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

The drawing contents specify the type of sprite for each sprite, which is a display object that constitutes one frame's worth of image, and also specify drawing information for the third pattern display device 81 to draw the sprite, such as display position coordinates, magnification ratio, rotation angle, semi-transparency value, alpha blending information, color information, and filter specification information, according to the sprite type.

The sprite type is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third pattern display device 81 where the sprite should be displayed. The magnification ratio is information for specifying the magnification ratio relative to a standard display size previously set for the sprite, and the size of the sprite to be displayed according to that magnification ratio is specified. Note that if the magnification ratio is greater than 100%, the sprite is displayed enlarged compared to the standard size, and if the magnification ratio is less than 100%, the sprite is displayed reduced compared to the standard size.

The rotation angle is information used to specify the angle of rotation when a sprite is rotated for display. The translucency value is used to specify the transparency of the entire sprite; the higher the translucency value, the more the image displayed behind the sprite is visible through it. The alpha blending information is information used to specify a known alpha blending coefficient used when overlaying other sprites. The color information is information used to specify the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. And the filter specification information is information used to specify the image filter to be applied to the specified sprite when drawing that sprite.

In the variable display data table, the drawing information for each sprite is specified for each address as the drawing content for one frame, which includes one background image, nine third patterns (pattern 1, pattern 2, ...), effects that express the shining of light in the image, and characters used for various effects such as boy images and text. Information about effects and characters is specified as one or more pieces according to the content to be displayed in that frame.

Here, the display position of the rear image is fixed to the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81, and the magnification ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, alpha blending information, color information, and filter specification information are constant over time, so the variable display data table specifies only the rear type, which is information for identifying the type of rear image.

When the MPU 231 determines that one of the backgrounds corresponding to the background mode (underwater, beach, preparation period background, background dedicated to time presentation) should be displayed based on the background type, it determines the background image corresponding to the stage specified by the player from among the backgrounds as the drawing target, and also determines the range of the background image to be displayed for that frame in accordance with the passage of time.

In this embodiment, the case where only the rear view type is specified as the drawing content of the rear view image in the display data table will be described. Alternatively, the rear view type and position information indicating which range of the rear view image corresponding to that rear view type should be displayed may be specified. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the rear view image in the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 identifies the range of the rear view image to be displayed for that frame based on the elapsed time since the rear view image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information was displayed.

The position information may also be information indicating the elapsed time since drawing of the image (or display of the third pattern display device 81) based on this display data table was started. In this case, the MPU 231 determines the range of the rear image to be displayed for that frame based on the position of the rear image that was displayed at the stage when drawing of the image (or display of the third pattern display device 81) was started based on the display database, and the elapsed time since drawing of the image (or display of the third pattern display device 81) was started, as indicated by the position information.

Furthermore, depending on the type of back surface, the position information may indicate either information indicating the elapsed time since the back surface image of the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed or information indicating the elapsed time since drawing of an image based on the display data table (or display of the third pattern display device 81) began, or, together with the back surface type and position information, type information of the position information (for example, information indicating whether it is information indicating the elapsed time since the back surface image of the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed or information indicating the elapsed time since drawing of an image based on the display database (or display of the third pattern display device 81) began) may be specified as the drawing content of the back surface image. In addition, the position information may be information indicating the address where the range of the back surface image to be displayed is stored, rather than information indicating the elapsed time.

For the third patterns (Pattern 1, Pattern 2, ...), pattern type offset information is recorded as pattern type information for specifying the third pattern to be displayed. This offset information is information that represents the difference between the numbers attached to each third pattern. The reason offset information is determined rather than the type of third pattern directly is that the display of the third pattern in the variable performance changes depending on the stopping pattern of the previous variable performance and the stopping pattern of the current variable performance, and the pattern offset information from the start of the fluctuation until a specified time has elapsed records the offset information from the stopping pattern of the previous variable performance. As a result, the variable performance starts from the stopping pattern of the previous variable performance.

On the other hand, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the fluctuation started, offset information from the stop pattern set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control unit 110 via the voice lamp control unit 113 is recorded. This makes it possible to stop the fluctuation performance at the stop pattern according to the stop type specified by the main control unit 110.

In addition, since each third symbol is assigned a unique number, the variable symbol in the previous variable performance and the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main control unit 110 are managed by the number assigned to the third symbol, and the offset information is represented by the difference between the numbers assigned to each third symbol, so that the third symbol to be displayed can be easily identified from the offset information.

In addition, the specified time during which the pattern offset information is switched from the offset information of the stopped pattern of the previous variable performance to the offset information of the stopped pattern of the currently variable performance is set to be the time during which the third pattern is rapidly variable displayed. While the third pattern is rapidly variable displayed, the third pattern is not visible to the player. Therefore, by switching the pattern offset information from the offset information of the stopped pattern of the previous variable performance to the offset information of the stopped pattern of the currently variable performance during that time, even if the continuity of the numbers of the third pattern is interrupted, the player cannot recognize the interruption in the continuity of the numbers.

The first address of the display data table, "0000H," contains "Start" information indicating the beginning of the data table, and the last address of the display data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 36) contains "End" information indicating the end of the data table. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" containing the "Start" information and the address containing the "End" information, drawing content corresponding to the presentation mode to be specified by that display data table is written.

The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in response to a command (e.g., a display variation pattern command) sent from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, reads the selected display data table from the data table storage area 233b, stores it in the display data table buffer 233d, and initializes the pointer 233f. Then, each time the drawing process for one frame is completed, the pointer 233f is incremented by one, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image content to be drawn next is specified based on the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, and a drawing list (see FIG. 237) is created, which will be described later. This drawing list is sent to the image controller 237 to instruct the drawing of the image. As a result, the drawing content is specified in the order specified in the display data table according to the update of the pointer 233f, and the image as specified in the display data table is displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

In this way, in this pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 can change the performance image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 by simply replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d as appropriate, rather than changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231 in response to commands (e.g., display variation pattern commands) sent from the audio lamp control device 113 based on commands from the main control device 110, etc.

If, as in conventional pachinko machines, a program executed by the MPU 231 is started each time the performance image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is changed, a large load is placed on the processing of starting and executing programs that become more complex and expansive as the variety of performance images increases, and this may limit the processing power of the display control device 114 and result in a limit to the diversification of controllable performance images. In contrast, in this pachinko machine 10, the performance image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 can be changed simply by replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d as appropriate, so that a variety of performance images can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 regardless of the processing power of the display control device 114.

The reason why the display data table is prepared in accordance with each performance mode, the display data table buffer is set according to the performance mode to be displayed, and the drawing list can be created frame by frame according to the set data table is because the performance to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning in the pachinko machine 10. In contrast, in game machines other than gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the display content changes on the spot based on the user's operation, so the display content cannot be predicted, and therefore it is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to each performance mode as described above. In this way, the configuration of preparing a display data table in accordance with each performance mode, setting a display data table buffer according to the performance mode to be displayed, and creating a drawing list frame by frame according to the set data table can only be realized based on the fact that the pachinko machine 10 is configured to determine in advance the performance mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning.

Next, the transfer data table will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 236. FIG. 236 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared in correspondence with the display data table prepared for each performance, and as described above, the transfer data table specifies the transfer data information and transfer timing for transferring image data of sprites used in the performance specified in the display data table that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

If all image data for sprites used in the effects defined in the display data table is stored in the resident video RAM 235, then no transfer data table corresponding to that display data table is prepared. This makes it possible to prevent an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b.

The transfer data table corresponds to an address specified in the display data table, and describes the transfer data information of the image data of the sprite (hereinafter referred to as the "image data to be transferred") that should start being transferred at the time indicated by that address (addresses "0001H" and "0097H" in Fig. 236 correspond to this). Here, the transfer start timing of the image data to be transferred is set so that the image data corresponding to a specific sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time drawing of the specific sprite starts according to the display data table, and the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified in the transfer data table in correspondence with the address corresponding to that transfer start timing.

On the other hand, if there is no image data to be transferred at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, Null data is specified, which means that there is no image data to be transferred at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table (this corresponds to address "0002H" in Figure 236).

The transfer data information includes the start address (start address of the source) and the end address (end address of the source) of the character ROM 234 where the image data to be transferred is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236).

The first address of the transfer data table, "0000H", contains "Start" information indicating the start of the data table, just like the display data table, and the last address of the transfer data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 236) contains "End" information indicating the end of the data table. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" containing the "Start" information and the address containing the "End" information, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred that should be specified in the transfer data table is contained.

The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in response to a command (e.g., a display variation pattern command) sent from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, etc., and if a transfer data table corresponding to that display data table exists, it reads the transfer data table from the data table storage area 233b and stores it in the transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, each time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is identified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 237) described later is created, and the transfer data information of the image data of a specified sprite that should start being transferred at that time is obtained from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data information is added to the created drawing list.

For example, in the example of FIG. 236, when pointer 233f is "0001H" or "0097H", MPU 231 adds the transfer data information specified at that address in the transfer data table to the drawing list created based on the display data table, and sends the drawing list after the addition to image controller 237. On the other hand, when pointer 233f is "0002H", Null data is specified at address "0002H" in the transfer data table, so it is determined that there is no transfer target image data that should start transferring, and the transfer data information is not added to the generated drawing list, and the drawing list is sent to image controller 237.

Then, if transfer data information is included in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 executes a process to transfer the image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to a specified sub-area of the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information.

As described above, the transfer data table specifies the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred for a specific address so that image data corresponding to a specific sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time drawing of the specific sprite begins in accordance with the display data table. By transferring image data from character ROM 234 to image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, when drawing a specific sprite in accordance with the display data table, image data that is not resident in resident video RAM 235 and is necessary for drawing the sprite can be stored in image storage area 236a without fail. Then, the image data stored in that image storage area 236a can be used to draw the specific sprite based on the display data table.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured using a NAND-type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the images required for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the corresponding effects can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 while drawing the images of each sprite specified in the display data table. Also, by writing in the transfer data table, only the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

In addition, in this pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 sets a display data table in the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command (e.g., a display variation pattern command) sent from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, and at the same time, a transfer data table corresponding to that display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, so that the image data of the sprite used in that display data table can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at the desired timing.

The transfer data table also specifies the transfer data information so that image data is transferred from character ROM 234 to normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. This allows the transfer of image data to be managed and controlled for each sprite, making it easy to process the transfer. By controlling the transfer of image data from character ROM 234 to normal video RAM 236 on a sprite-by-sprite basis, the process can be made easier while controlling the transfer of image data in detail. This makes it possible to efficiently prevent an increase in the load on the transfer.

The transfer data table has a data structure similar to that of the display data table, and the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred, which should start being transferred at the time indicated by the address, is specified in correspondence with the address specified in the display data table. Therefore, the timing of the start of transfer can be specified so that the image data of a specified sprite is reliably stored in the normal video RAM 236 before that image data is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is constructed using a NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, a wide variety of performance images can be easily displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

The simple image display flag 233c is a flag indicating whether or not the third pattern display device 81 displays the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on variable image) shown in FIG. 35. This simple image display flag 233c is set to ON in the main processing (see FIG. 274) executed by the MPU 231 after the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and power-on variable image are transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or power-on variable image area 235b of the resident video RAM (see S6005 in FIG. 274). Then, when all resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, it is set to OFF in order to display images other than the power-on image on the third pattern display device 81 (see S7705 in FIG. 285(b)).

This simple image display flag 233c is referenced in the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 each time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S6301 in FIG. 276(b)). When the simple image display flag 233c is on, a simple command determination process (see S6308 in FIG. 276(b)) and a simple display setting process (see S6309 in FIG. 276(b)) are executed so that the power-on image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, a command determination process (see FIGS. 277 to 282) and a display setting process (see FIGS. 283 to 284(b)) are executed so that various images are displayed in response to commands transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on commands from the main control device 110, etc.

The simple image display flag 233c is also referenced in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 during V interrupt processing (see S7601 in FIG. 285(a)). If the simple image display flag 233c is on, resident target image data exists that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235, so a resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 285(b)) is executed to transfer the resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. If the simple image display flag 233c is off, a normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 286) is executed to transfer the image data required for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The display data table buffer 233d is a buffer for storing a display data table corresponding to the performance mode to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in response to commands sent from the voice lamp control device 113 based on commands from the main control device 110. The MPU 231 determines the performance mode to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 based on the commands sent from the voice lamp control device 113, selects a display data table corresponding to the performance mode from the data table storage area 233b, and stores the selected display data table in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, while incrementing the pointer 233f by 1, the MPU 231 generates a drawing list (see FIG. 237) that describes the image drawing instructions to the image controller 237 for each frame based on the drawing contents specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. As a result, the third pattern display device 81 displays the performance corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d.

The MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f by one, and generates a drawing list (see FIG. 237) for each frame that describes image drawing instructions for the image controller 237 based on the drawing contents specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays the effect corresponding to the display data table.

The transfer data table buffer 233e is a buffer for storing a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in response to commands sent from the voice lamp control device 113 based on commands from the main control device 110. When storing a display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b and stores the selected transfer data table in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Note that if all the image data of the sprites used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, no transfer data table corresponding to that display data table is prepared, and the MPU 231 clears the contents of the transfer data table buffer 233e by writing Null data, which means that no image data to be transferred exists in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

Then, while incrementing the pointer 233f by one, if the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is specified (i.e., if no null data is specified), the MPU 231 adds the transfer data information to a drawing list (see FIG. 237) that is generated for each frame and that describes the image drawing instructions for the image controller 237.

As a result, if the drawing list received from the MPU 231 contains transfer data information, the image controller 237 executes a process of transferring the image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to a specified sub-area of the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information. Here, as described above, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a specified address in the transfer data table so that the image data corresponding to a specified sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the specified sprite begins in accordance with the display data table. Therefore, by transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, when drawing a specified sprite in accordance with the display data table, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and is necessary for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured using a NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the images required for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the corresponding effects can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 while drawing the images of each sprite specified in the display data table. Also, by writing in the transfer data table, only the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The pointer 233f is used to specify an address from which the corresponding drawing contents or transfer data information of the image data to be transferred should be obtained from the display data table and transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. The MPU 231 initializes the pointer 233f to 0 once when the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, during the display setting process (see S6303 in FIG. 276(b)) of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of one frame of image is completed, the pointer update process (see S7305 in FIG. 284(b)) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one.

Each time the pointer 233f is updated in this manner, the MPU 231 identifies the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, creates a drawing list (see FIG. 237) described below, and also obtains transfer data information for the image data of a specified sprite that should start being transferred at that time from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and adds the transfer data information to the created drawing list.

As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third pattern display device 81. Therefore, by simply changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the effect displayed on the third pattern display device 81 can be easily changed. Therefore, regardless of the processing power of the display control device 114, a wide variety of effects can be displayed.

In addition, when a transfer data table is stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and is used to draw a sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a based on the transfer data table until the drawing of the sprite is started by the corresponding display data table. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured with a NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, images required for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay, so that the corresponding effects can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 while drawing the images of each sprite specified in the display data table. In addition, by writing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The drawing list area 233g is an area for storing a drawing list that instructs the image controller 237 to draw one frame of an image, which is generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

Now, the details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. 237. FIG. 237 is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table that instructs the image controller 237 to draw one frame's worth of images, and as shown in FIG. 38, it describes detailed drawing information (detailed information) for each sprite, such as the back image used in one frame's image, the third pattern (pattern 1, pattern 2, ...), the effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), the character (character 1, character 2, ..., reserved ball number pattern 1, reserved ball number pattern 2, ..., error pattern). The drawing list also describes transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer specified image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the type of RAM (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and its address. The image controller 237 obtains the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and address. The detailed drawing information (detailed information) also includes display position coordinates, magnification ratio, rotation angle, semi-transparency value, alpha blending information, color information, and filter specification information. The image controller 237 performs enlargement/reduction processing according to the magnification ratio, rotation processing according to the rotation angle, semi-transparency processing according to the semi-transparency value, composition processing with other sprites according to the alpha blending information, color correction processing according to the color information, filtering processing according to the filter specification information in a manner specified by the information, and then performs various processing on the standard image generated by the image data of the sprite read from the various video RAMs, and draws the image obtained by performing various processing at the display position indicated by the display position coordinates. The drawn image is then expanded by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, as specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j.

The MPU 231 generates detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used to draw one frame of image based on the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the content of other images to be drawn (for example, a reserved image displaying a reserved ball count pattern, a warning image notifying the occurrence of an error, etc.), and creates a drawing list by sorting the detailed information for each sprite.

Here, among the detailed information for each sprite, the storage RAM type and address for the sprite (display object) data are generated according to the sprite type specified in the display data table or the sprite type identified from the contents of other images. That is, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data for that sprite is stored, or the sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236, is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 can instantly identify the storage RAM type and address in which the image data for that sprite is stored according to the sprite type, and easily include this information in the detailed information of the drawing list.

In addition, the MPU 231 copies other information (display position coordinates, magnification ratio, rotation angle, semi-transparency value, alpha blending information, color information, and filter specification information) from the detailed information of each sprite as is, as specified in the display data table.

When generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites in one frame's worth of images in order from the sprite that should be placed furthest back to the sprite that should be placed in the foreground, and describes detailed drawing information (detailed information) for each sprite. That is, in the drawing list, detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, followed by detailed information corresponding to each sprite in the following order: third pattern (pattern 1, pattern 2, ...), effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), character (character 1, character 2, ..., reserved ball count pattern 1, reserved ball count pattern 2, ..., error pattern).

The image controller 237 executes the drawing process for each sprite in the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprites in the frame buffer by overwriting them. Therefore, in one frame's worth of image generated by the drawing list, the first sprite drawn can be placed at the backmost side, and the last sprite drawn can be placed at the frontmost side.

Furthermore, when transfer data information is written at the address indicated by pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in transfer data table buffer 233e, MPU 231 adds the transfer data information (the source start address and source end address in character ROM 234 where the image data to be transferred is stored, and the destination start address of the sub-area in image storage area 236a where the image data to be transferred should be stored) to the end of the drawing list. When the transfer data information is included in the drawing list, image controller 237 reads image data from a specified area in character ROM 234 (area indicated by the source start address and source end address) based on the transfer data information, and transfers the image data to be transferred to a specified sub-area (destination address) in image storage area 236a in normal video RAM 236.

The timing counter 233h is a counter that counts the presentation time of the presentation displayed on the third pattern display device 81 based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. When the MPU 231 stores a display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, it sets time data indicating the presentation time of the presentation displayed based on that display data table. This time data is the presentation time divided by the image display time for one frame on the third pattern display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this embodiment).

Then, based on the V interrupt signal sent from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and display process for one frame of image are completed, each time the display setting process of the V interrupt process (see FIG. 276(b)) is executed by the MPU 231, the timing counter 233h is decremented by one (see S7307 in FIG. 283). As a result, when the value of the timing counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the presentation displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and executes various processes that should be performed in conjunction with the end of the presentation.

The stored image data discrimination flag 233i is a flag indicating the storage state, for each sprite whose corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, indicating whether the image data corresponding to that sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

This stored image data discrimination flag 233i is generated by the initial setting process (see S6002 in FIG. 274) executed by the MPU 231 during the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data discrimination flag 233i generated here is set to "off" for all sprites, indicating that they are not stored in the image storage area 236a.

The stored image data discrimination flag 233i is updated when a transfer instruction is set for image data to be transferred that corresponds to a sprite during the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 286) executed by the MPU 231. In this update, the storage status corresponding to the sprite for which a transfer instruction has been set is set to "on", indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. In addition, image data for other sprites that are to be stored in the same sub-area of the image storage area 236a as the one sprite will necessarily be in an unstored state due to the storage of the image data of the one sprite, so the storage status corresponding to the other sprites is set to "off".

In addition, when transferring image data of a sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data discrimination flag 233i and determines whether the image data of the sprite to be transferred is already stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 235 (see S7809 in FIG. 286). If the storage status corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "off" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, it sets a transfer instruction for that image data (see S7810 in FIG. 286) and causes the image controller 237 to transfer that image data from the character ROM 234 to a specified sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage status corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "on", the corresponding image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer process of that image data is stopped. This prevents unnecessary data transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, reducing the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and reducing traffic on the bus line 240.

The drawing target buffer flag 233i is a flag for specifying one of the two frame buffers (first frame buffer 236b and second frame buffer 236c) into which the image drawn by the image controller 237 is expanded (hereinafter referred to as the "drawing target buffer"); if the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the drawing target buffer, and if it is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is specified. Information on this specified drawing target buffer is then sent to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S7902 in FIG. 287).

As a result, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process in which the image drawn based on the drawing list is expanded onto the designated drawing target buffer. In addition, the image controller 237 executes a display process in which the image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 by reading out previously expanded drawing image information from a frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer, simultaneously and in parallel with the drawing process, and transferring the image information to the third pattern display device 81 together with a drive signal.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated in accordance with the drawing target buffer information being sent to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233j, i.e., by setting the value to "1" if it was "0" and to "0" if it was "1". As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time a drawing list is sent. In addition, the drawing list is sent each time the drawing process of the V interrupt process (see FIG. 276(b)) executed by the MPU 231 is executed based on the V interrupt signal sent from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and display process of one frame of image is completed (see S7902 in FIG. 287).

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer that will display one frame's worth of image, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read, and image drawing and display processing is executed. 20 milliseconds after the drawing processing of one frame's worth of image is completed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer that will display one frame's worth of image, and the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously displayed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is displayed in the second frame buffer 236c.

Then, after another 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the frame buffer in which one frame's worth of image is displayed, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read. This allows the image information of the image previously displayed in the second frame buffer 236c to be read and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, while at the same time a new image is displayed in the first frame buffer 236b. Thereafter, by alternately specifying the frame buffer in which one frame's worth of image is displayed and the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read, either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, every 20 milliseconds, it is possible to perform the display process of one frame's worth of image continuously in 20 millisecond units while performing the drawing process of one frame's worth of image.

<Regarding control processing of main control device 110>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of Fig. 238 to Fig. 255. The processes of the MPU 201 are roughly divided into start-up process which is started when the power is turned on, main process which is executed after the start-up process, timer interrupt process which is started periodically (at 2 ms intervals in this embodiment), and NMI interrupt process which is started by input of a power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and NMI interrupt process will be described first, and then the start-up process and main process will be described.

Figure 238 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110. The timer interrupt process is a periodic process executed, for example, every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, a process for reading various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the state of various switches connected to the main control unit 110 is read, and the state of the switches is determined and detection information (winning detection information) is saved.

Next, the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. The updated value of the initial value random number counter CINI1 is then stored in the corresponding buffer area of RAM 203. Similarly, the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of RAM 203.

Furthermore, the special win random number counter C1, the special win type counter C2, and the normal win random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, the special win random number counter C1, the special win type counter C2, and the normal win random number counter C4 are each incremented by 1, and when their counter values reach their maximum values (299, 99, and 239, respectively, in this embodiment), they are each cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of each counter C1 to C2, and C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of RAM 203.

Next, a special pattern change process is executed (S104), which is a process for displaying on the first pattern display device 37 and also sets the change pattern of the third pattern by the third pattern display device 81, and then a start winning process is executed in response to a win (start winning) in the first ball entry port 64 (S105). Details of the special pattern change process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to Figures 33 to 36.

After the start winning process is executed, the normal symbol change process, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device 83, is executed (S106), and the through gate passing process associated with the passage of the ball through the through gate 67 is executed (S107). Details of the normal symbol change process and the through gate passing process will be described later with reference to FIG. 37 and FIG. 39. After the through gate passing process is executed, the launch control process is executed (S108), and then the other winning process is executed (S109). Furthermore, other processes that should be executed periodically are executed (S110), and the timer interrupt process is terminated. The launch control process is a process that determines whether the launch of the ball is on or off, on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the shot stop switch 51b for stopping the launch is not operated. When the launch of the ball is on, the main control unit 110 instructs the launch control unit 112 to launch the ball.

Next, referring to FIG. 33, the special pattern change processing (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing this special pattern change processing (S104). This special pattern change processing (S104) is executed during the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 238), and is processing for controlling the change display of the special pattern (first pattern) performed by the first pattern display device 37, the change display of the third pattern performed by the third pattern display device 81, etc.

In this special symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not a special symbol jackpot is currently in progress (S201). The period during which a special symbol jackpot is in progress includes the period during which the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying a special symbol jackpot (including during a special symbol jackpot game), and during a predetermined period of time after the special symbol jackpot game ends. If the result of the determination is that a special symbol jackpot is in progress (S201: Yes), this process ends.

If the special symbol is not in the jackpot (S201: No), it is determined whether the display state of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202), and if the display state of the first symbol display device 37 is not changing (S202: No), the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (the reserved number of times the variable display of the special symbol is held N2) is obtained (S203). Next, it is determined whether the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is greater than 0 (S204), and if the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is not 0 (S204: Yes), the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is decremented by 1 (S205), and a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e changed by the calculation is set (S206). The reserved ball count command set here is stored in a ring buffer for sending commands provided in the RAM 203, and is sent to the voice lamp control device 113 during the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 253) executed by the MPU 201, which will be described later. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball count command, it extracts the value of the special pattern 2 reserved ball count counter 203e from the reserved ball count command, and stores the extracted value in the second special pattern reserved ball count counter 223b in the RAM 223.

After the reserved ball count command is set by the process of S206, the data stored in the special pattern 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, the data stored in the reserved area 1 to reserved area 4 of the special pattern 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted in order to the execution area side. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the following order: reserved area 1 → execution area, reserved area 2 → reserved area 1, reserved area 3 → reserved area 2, reserved area 4 → reserved area 3. After the process of S207 is executed, the special pattern 2 change start process is executed (S208), and this process is terminated. The special pattern 2 change start process will be described later with reference to FIG. 240.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S204 that the value of the second special symbol reserved ball counter 203d is 0 (S204: No), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d is obtained (S208). It is determined whether the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d obtained in the process of S208 is 0 (S209). If it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d is 0 (S209: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S209 that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d is not 0 (S209: Yes), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d is decremented by 1 (S210), and a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (S211). The reserved ball count command set here is stored in a ring buffer for sending commands provided in the RAM 203, and is sent to the voice lamp control device 113 during the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 253) executed by the MPU 201, which will be described later. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball count command, it extracts the value of the special pattern 1 reserved ball count counter 203d from the reserved ball count command, and stores the extracted value in the first special pattern reserved ball count counter 223a in the RAM 223.

After the reserved ball count command is set by the process of S211, the data stored in the special pattern 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted (S212). In the process of S212, the data stored in the reserved area 1 to reserved area 4 of the special pattern 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted to the execution area side in sequence. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the following order: reserved area 1 → execution area, reserved area 2 → reserved area 1, reserved area 3 → reserved area 2, reserved area 4 → reserved area 3. After the data is shifted, the special pattern 1 change start process is executed to start the change display in the first pattern display device 37 (S213). The special pattern 1 change start process will be described later with reference to FIG. 241.

In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first pattern display device 37 is changing (S202: Yes), it is determined whether the change time of the change display being executed in the first pattern display device 37 has elapsed (S214). The change time of the change display being executed in the first pattern display device 37 is determined according to the change pattern selected by the change type counter CS1 (determined according to the change pattern command), and if this change time has not elapsed (S214: No), the display of the first pattern display device is updated (S215), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S214, if the change time of the executed change display has elapsed (S214: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stopped pattern of the first pattern display device 37 is set (S216). The setting of the stopped pattern is performed in advance by the special pattern 2 change start process (S208) and the special pattern 1 change start process (S213) described later with reference to FIG. 240 and FIG. 241. When this special pattern 2 change start process (S208) or the special pattern 1 change start process (S213) is executed, a lottery for a special pattern is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area provided in common to the special pattern 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special pattern 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. More specifically, whether or not a special pattern is a jackpot is determined according to the value of the special winning random number counter C1, and if it is a special pattern jackpot, the jackpot type is determined according to the value of the special winning type counter C2.

In this embodiment, if the stopped pattern of the first pattern (special pattern) is jackpot A, the blue LED is turned on in the first pattern display device 37, and if it is jackpot B, the red LED is turned on. Also, if it is a miss, the red and green LEDs are set to light up. The LEDs are turned off when the next variable display starts, but may be turned on for only a few seconds after the variable display stops.

After the process of S216 is completed, when the ongoing variable display is started in the first symbol display device 37, it is determined whether the result of the lottery for the special symbol (the current lottery result) performed by the special symbol 2 variable start process (S208) or the special symbol 1 variable start process (S213) is a jackpot for the special symbol (S217). If the current lottery result is a jackpot for the special symbol (S217: Yes), a jackpot scenario corresponding to the jackpot scenario table 202f is set (S218). After that, the values of the probability bonus counter 203m and the time-saving counter 203j are set to 0 (S219), and the jackpot flag 203n is set to ON (S220). Then, a stop command is set (S221), and this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S217 that the current lottery result is not a big win (S217: No), a small win setting process (S222) is executed. The small win setting process (S222) will be described later with reference to FIG. 242. Next, a game status update process (S223) is executed. The game status update process (S223) will be described later with reference to FIG. 243. Then, a stop command is set (S221), and this process ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 240, the special symbol 2 change start process (S208) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 240 is a flow chart showing the special symbol 2 change start process (S209). This special symbol 2 change start process (S208) is a process executed in the special symbol change process (see FIG. 239) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 238), and is a process for drawing a lottery (determining whether or not a "special symbol jackpot" or a "special symbol miss" based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, and for determining the presentation pattern (variable presentation pattern) of the variable presentation performed by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81.

In the special symbol 2 variation start process (S208), first, the values of the special win random number counter C1, the special win type counter C2, and the variation type counter CS1 stored in the execution area of the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b are obtained (S251). Next, it is determined whether the game state is currently in a high probability state (high probability state of special symbols) (S252). The determination of whether or not a high probability state is in progress is made by determining whether the value of the high probability state counter 203m is 1 or more. Here, the high probability state counter 203m is set to a predetermined value based on the end of the jackpot game. On the other hand, the value is set to 0 based on the start of the jackpot game.

In the process of S252, if it is determined that the game is in a special chance mode (S252: Yes), the pachinko machine 10 is in a special chance mode (high probability state of special symbols), and the result of the lottery as to whether or not the game is a special chance mode is obtained based on the value of the special chance mode random number counter C1 obtained in the process of S251 and the special chance mode random number table 202a (see FIG. 222(a)). Specifically, the value of the special chance mode random number counter C1 is compared one by one with the random number value of 500 stored in the special chance mode random number table 202a. As described above, the six random numbers "5 to 10" are set as the random number value for the special chance mode (high probability state of special symbols), and if the value of the special chance mode random number counter C1 matches these random number values for the win, it is determined that the game is a special chance mode. After the result of the lottery for the special symbol is obtained in the process of S253, the process proceeds to S255.

On the other hand, in the process of S252, if it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is not in a high probability state (high probability state of special symbols), i.e., in a low probability state of special symbols (S252: No), the lottery result of whether or not the special symbol is a jackpot is obtained based on the value of the special win random number counter C1 obtained in the process of S251 and the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a (S254). Specifically, the value of the special win random number counter C1 is compared one by one with the random number value of 500 stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a. Five random numbers, "0 to 4," are set as the random number value that results in a jackpot for special symbols in the low probability state of special symbols, and if the value of the special win random number counter C1 matches these random number values that result in a win, it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot. After the lottery result for the special symbol is obtained, the process proceeds to S255.

In the process of S255, it is determined whether the result of the lottery for the special symbol acquired by the process of S253 or S254 is a special symbol jackpot (i.e., whether the value of the acquired special jackpot random number counter C1 matches the judgment value set in the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a) (S255), and if it is determined that it is a special symbol jackpot (S255: Yes), the display mode at the time of the jackpot is set based on the value of the special jackpot type counter C2 acquired by the process of S251 (S256). More specifically, the value of the special jackpot type counter C2 acquired by the process of S251 is compared with the random number value stored in the special symbol 2 jackpot type selection table 202d2, and it is determined which of the two types of special symbol jackpot types ((jackpot D, jackpot E)) that are the lottery results for the second special symbol (special symbol 2) is the jackpot type this time. As mentioned above, if the value of the special win type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 49", it is determined to be a jackpot D (16R guaranteed jackpot), and if it is in the range of "50 to 99", it is determined to be a jackpot E (3R guaranteed jackpot) (see Figure 223 (c)).

In this S256 process, the display mode (illumination state of LED 37a) of the first symbol display device 37 is set according to the determined jackpot type (jackpot D, jackpot E). In addition, the jackpot type (jackpot D, jackpot E) is set as the stop type so that the stop pattern corresponding to the jackpot type is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display mode of the stop pattern set in this S256 process is stopped and displayed by the process of S216 of the special symbol variation process described above (see S104 in FIG. 239).

Next, the variation pattern at the time of winning the jackpot is selected by referring to the variation pattern selection table 202e. Here, in this control example, as described above with reference to FIG. 224, in order to make it easier to set different variation patterns according to the set game state, the variation time of the special symbol is set by referring to different data tables according to the set game state. Specifically, when the game state is normal or potential (i.e., low probability state of normal symbol) and when the game state is probability (i.e., high probability state of special symbol), the variation pattern at the time of the jackpot is determined based on the variation pattern selection table 202b1 (S257). When the variation pattern is set in the process of S257, the variation time (display time) of the variation performance in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the variation time of the third symbol until it stops at the jackpot symbol in the third symbol display device 81 is determined. At this time, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the variation time of the symbol variation such as normal reach and super reach is determined based on the value of the stop type selection counter C3. The relationship between the value of the stop type selection counter C3 and the type of pattern change is specified in the normal change pattern selection table 202b1. Specifically, if the jackpot type determined this time is jackpot A, jackpot B, or jackpot D, the change pattern is determined as normal reach if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 50", and as super reach if it is in the range of "51 to 250".

In addition, in the fluctuation pattern, the fluctuation time of the third pattern for announcing the win/lose judgment result is determined and notified to the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 determines the content of the fluctuation display mode (fluctuation pattern) to actually display on the third pattern display device 81 according to the fluctuation time and the win/lose judgment result. Even if the main control device 110 is in a display mode of a miss reach, the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to be able to switch to a reach display mode or a non-miss display mode as long as the fluctuation time is the same. This allows a variety of display modes to be displayed, diversifying the presentation.

For example, the variation patterns for misses include "short miss," "long miss," various types of "miss normal reach," and various types of "miss super reach." Variation patterns shared by jackpot A, jackpot B, and jackpot D include various types of "normal reach" and "super reach."

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S255 that the special symbol is a miss (S255: No), the display mode in the case of a miss is set (S258). In the process of S258, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to a display mode corresponding to the missing symbol, and the fluctuation time (fluctuation pattern) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b.

Next, the variation pattern at the time of a miss is determined (S259). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the variation time of the third symbol until it stops at a miss symbol on the third symbol display device 81 is determined. At this time, similar to the process of S258, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is confirmed, and the variation time of the symbol variation such as normal reach, super reach, etc. is determined based on the value of the stop type selection counter C3.

When the processing of S257 or S259 is completed, next, a variation pattern command is set (S260) for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation pattern determined in the processing of S257 or S259. Next, a stop type command is set (S261) for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the processing of S257 or S259. When the processing of S261 is completed, the process returns to the special symbol variation process (S104).

Next, referring to FIG. 241, the special symbol 1 variation start process (S213) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 241 is a flowchart showing the special symbol 1 variation start process (S213). This special symbol 1 variation start process (S213) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 239) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 238), and is a process for drawing a lottery (determining whether or not a "special symbol jackpot" or a "special symbol miss" based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, and for determining the presentation pattern (variable presentation pattern) of the variation presentation performed by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81.

In this special symbol 1 variation start process (S214), similarly to the special symbol 1 variation start process (S209), first, the values of the special win random number counter C1 and the special win type counter C2 stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a obtained by the process of S271 are obtained (S271).

Next, it is determined whether the game state is currently in a high probability state (high probability state of special symbols) (S272). If it is determined that the game state is in a high probability state (S272: Yes), the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state of special symbols, so the process proceeds to S273. In the process of S273, the lottery result of whether or not the jackpot is a special symbol is obtained based on the value of the special win random number counter C1 obtained in the process of S271 and the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a (S273). Specifically, the value of the special win random number counter C1 is compared one by one with the 500 random number values stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a. As described above, 11 random numbers from "5 to 10" are set as the random number value that results in a jackpot for a special symbol, and if the value of the special win random number counter C1 matches these random number values that result in a jackpot, it is determined that the jackpot is a special symbol. Once the lottery results for the special design have been obtained, the process moves to S275.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S272 that the pachinko machine 10 is not in a high probability state (high probability state of special symbols), i.e., that the pachinko machine 10 is in a low probability state of special symbols (S272: No), the process of S274 is executed. In the process of S274, the result of the lottery as to whether or not the special symbol is a jackpot is obtained based on the value of the special win random number counter C1 obtained in the process of S271 and the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a (S254). Specifically, the value of the special win random number counter C1 is compared one by one with the 500 random number values stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a. Five random numbers, "0 to 4," are set as the random number values that result in a jackpot for the special symbol, and if the value of the special win random number counter C1 matches these random number values that result in a jackpot, it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot. Once the result of the lottery for the special symbol is obtained, the process proceeds to S275.

In the process of S275, it is determined whether the result of the lottery for the special symbol obtained by the process of S273 or S274 is a special symbol jackpot (S275), and if it is determined that it is a special symbol jackpot (S275: Yes), the display mode at the time of the jackpot is set based on the value of the special jackpot type counter C2 obtained by the process of S271 (S276). More specifically, the value of the special jackpot type counter C2 obtained by the process of S271 is compared with the random number value stored in the special jackpot type selection table 202d1, and it is determined which jackpot type is among the four types of special symbol jackpots (jackpot A, jackpot B, jackpot C, jackpot D). As described above, if the value of the special win type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 49", it is determined to be a jackpot A (6R certainty jackpot), if it is in the range of "50 to 68", it is determined to be a jackpot B (16R certainty jackpot), if it is in the range of "69 to 98", it is determined to be a jackpot C (8R certainty jackpot), and if it is in the range of "99", it is determined to be a jackpot C (see Figure 223 (c)).

In the process of S276, the display mode (illumination state of LED 37a) of the first symbol display device 37 is set according to the determined jackpot type (jackpot A, jackpot B, jackpot C, jackpot D). In addition, the jackpot type (jackpot A, jackpot B, jackpot C, jackpot D) is set as the stop type so that the stop pattern corresponding to the jackpot type is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of the big win is determined based on the fluctuation pattern selection table 202b (S277). In this process of S277, the fluctuation pattern is selected (set) by referring to the fluctuation pattern selection table 202b (see FIG. 224) corresponding to the currently set game state. When the fluctuation pattern is set in the process of S277, the fluctuation time (display time) of the fluctuation performance in the first pattern display device 37 is set, and the fluctuation time of the third pattern until it stops at the big win pattern in the third pattern display device 81 is determined. At this time, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the fluctuation time of the pattern fluctuation such as normal reach, super reach, etc. is determined based on the value of the stop type selection counter C3. The relationship between the value of the stop type selection counter C3 and the type of pattern fluctuation is specified in the normal fluctuation pattern selection table 202b1. Specifically, if the jackpot type determined this time is jackpot A, the variation pattern is determined as normal reach if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 50", and as super reach if it is in the range of "51 to 250".

In terms of the variation pattern, the main control device 110 determines the variation time of the third pattern that notifies the win/lose judgment result, and notifies the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 determines the content of the variation display mode (variation pattern) to actually be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 according to the variation time and the win/lose judgment result. Even if the main control device 110 is in a display mode of a miss reach, the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to be able to switch to a reach display mode or a non-miss display mode as long as the variation time is the same. This allows a variety of display modes to be displayed, diversifying the presentation.

For example, the fluctuation patterns for misses include "Miss (long time)", "Miss (short time)", various "Miss normal reaches", various "Miss super reaches", and various "Miss special reaches". The fluctuation patterns shared by jackpot A, jackpot B, and jackpot D include various "normal reaches" and various "super reaches".

If it is determined in the process of S275 that the special symbol is a miss (S275: No), the display mode in the case of a miss is set (S278). In the process of S278, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to a display mode corresponding to the missing symbol, and the fluctuation time (fluctuation pattern) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a.

Next, the variation pattern at the time of a miss is determined (S279). Here, the variation pattern selection table 202e is referenced to set the variation time of the first symbol to the first symbol display device 37, and the variation time of the third symbol until it stops at a miss symbol on the third symbol display device 81 is determined. At this time, similar to the process of S278, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is confirmed, and the variation time of the symbol variation such as normal reach, super reach, etc. is determined based on the value of the stop type selection counter C3.

When the processing of S277 or S279 is completed, next, a variation pattern command is set (S280) for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation pattern determined in the processing of S277 or S279. Next, a stop type command is set (S281) for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the processing of S277 or S279. When the processing of S281 is completed, the process returns to the special symbol variation process (S104).

Next, referring to FIG. 242, the small win setting process (S222) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 of this control example, the lottery content of the special symbol is configured so that the player can win a small win (a part of a miss) that can give a player a smaller benefit than a big win. FIG. 242 is a flowchart showing the small win setting process (S222). This small win setting process (S222) is a process executed in the special symbol change process (see FIG. 239) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 238), and performs a process to determine whether or not it is a small win based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, and is also a process to determine the scenario of the small win performed by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81.

In the small win setting process (S222), first, it is determined whether the current lottery result is a small win (S301). If it is determined that the current lottery result is a small win (S301: Yes), a small win scenario is set based on the small win scenario table 202g (S302). Next, the small win flag 203g is set to ON (S303), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S301 that the current lottery result is not a small win (S301: No), this process is terminated as it is. In this control example, a small win game is configured to be executed when a small win is won. This small win game is a winning game in which the third electric role 82a, which is opened during a big win game (during a big win game corresponding to a big win C), is opened for one round. Specifically, the same opening operation as the round game executed in the first round of the big win game corresponding to a big win C is set in the small win scenario. This makes it difficult to know whether the winning game being played this time is a big win game or a small win game immediately after the winning game is played. In this control example, if the lottery result is determined not to be a big win in the special pattern variation process (see S104 in FIG. 239) (S217 in FIG. 239: No), whether or not a small win has been won in the small win setting process (see FIG. 242) is determined by referring to the small win random number table 202e (see S301 in FIG. 242). However, without being limited to this, a special pattern winning random number table that can determine at once whether the lottery result of the special pattern is a big win, a small win, or a miss may be used.

Next, referring to FIG. 243, the game status update process (S223) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 243 is a flowchart showing the game status update process (S223). This game status update process (S223) is a process executed during the special symbol change process (see FIG. 239) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 238), and is a process for subtracting the values of the special bonus counter 203m and the time-saving counter 203j, and updating the game status based on the subtracted values.

In the game status update process (S223), first, it is determined whether the value of the variable probability counter 203m is greater than 1 (S351). If it is determined that the value of the variable probability counter 203m is less than 1 (i.e., 0) (S351: No), this process is terminated as it is. As described above with reference to Figs. 223(b) and (c), in this control example, the value set in the time-saving counter 203j is smaller than the value set in the variable probability counter 203m, so if it is determined in the process of S351 that the value of the variable probability counter 203m is not greater than 1 (is 0), the value of the time-saving counter 203j is also necessarily 0, so this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the variable probability counter 203m is greater than 1 (S351: Yes), the value of the variable probability counter 203m is decremented by 1 (S352). Next, in the process of S352, it is determined whether the decremented value of the variable probability counter 203m is 0 (S353). If it is determined that the value of the special chance counter 203m is 0 (S353: Yes), it is time to end the special chance, so a state command indicating the normal state is set (S354), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S353, if it is determined that the value of the probability change counter 203m is not 0 (S353: No), it is determined whether the value of the time-saving counter 203j is greater than 1 (S355). If it is determined that the value is less than 1 (i.e., 0) (S355: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S355, if it is determined that the value of the time-saving counter 203j is greater than 1 (S355: Yes), the value of the time-saving counter 203j is decremented by 1 (S356). Next, it is determined whether the value of the time-saving counter 203j decremented in the process of S356 is 0 (S357). If it is determined that the value of the time-saving counter 203j is 0 (S357: Yes), a state command indicating a transition to a potential state is set (S358), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S357 that the value of the time-saving counter 203j is not 0 (S357: No), this process is terminated as it is. Although omitted in the game state update process shown in FIG. 243, when the value of the probability change counter 203m or the value of the time-saving counter 203j is updated (decremented), a state command indicating the updated value is set. The set state command is then output to the voice lamp control device 113 by the external output process (see S1301 in FIG. 253) of the main process (see FIG. 253) of the main control device 110. This makes it possible for the voice lamp control device 113 to determine the current game state.

Next, referring to FIG. 244, the start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 will be described. FIG. 244 is a flowchart showing this start winning process (S105). This start winning process (S105) is executed within the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 238), and determines whether or not there has been a win in the first winning slot 64 (start winning). If there has been a start winning, it is a process for reserving the values indicated by the various random number counters, and for pre-reading the lottery results for the special symbol from the values indicated by the various random number counters that have been reserved.

When the start winning process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won the first winning port 64 (start winning) (S401). Here, the ball entering the first winning port 64 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has won the first winning port 64 (S401: Yes), the value of the special pattern 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of reserved times N1 of the variable display in the special pattern) is obtained (S402). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the special pattern 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S403).

Then, if there is no winning entry into the first winning slot 64 (S401: No), or if there is a winning entry into the first winning slot 64 but the value (N1) of the special pattern 1 reserved balls counter 203d is not less than 4 (S403: No), the process proceeds to S407. On the other hand, if there is a winning entry into the first winning slot 64 (S401: Yes) and the value (N) of the special pattern 1 reserved balls counter 203d is less than 4 (S403: Yes), the value (N) of the special pattern 1 reserved balls counter 203d is incremented by 1 (S404). Then, a reserved balls command for the first special pattern is set, indicating the value of the special pattern 1 reserved balls counter 203d changed by the calculation (S405).

The reserved ball count command set here is stored in a ring buffer for sending commands provided in the RAM 203, and is sent to the voice lamp control device 113 during the external output process (S1301) of the main process (see FIG. 253) executed by the MPU 201, which will be described later. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball count command, it extracts the value of the special pattern 1 reserved ball count counter 203d from the reserved ball count command, and stores the extracted value in the special pattern 1 reserved ball count counter 223a in the RAM 223.

After the reserved ball number command is set by the process of S405, the values of the special winning random number counter C1, the special winning type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the variable type counter CS1 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above are stored in the first area of the free reserved areas (reserved area 1 to reserved area 4) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 (S406). In addition, in the process of S406, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the reserved area 1 is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved area 2, if the value is 2, the reserved area 3, and if the value is 3, the reserved area 4 are set as the first area. After the process of S406 is completed, the pre-reading process is executed (S407), and the process proceeds to the process of S408. The details of this pre-reading process (S407) will be described later with reference to FIG. 245.

Next, for S408 to S414, the same processing is executed as for each of the processes of S401 to S407 described above, except that the processing for winning in the first winning slot 64 is changed to the processing for winning in the second starting slot 64b, so detailed explanations will be omitted. Note that when a gaming ball wins in the second winning slot 640 and is stored as a reserved ball, the values of the special winning random number counter C1 and the special winning type counter C2 are obtained and stored in the corresponding empty reserved area of the special pattern 2 reserved ball storage area 203b.

In this way, by obtaining the values of the special winning random number counter C1 and the special winning type counter C2 for the second special pattern, which are similar to those for the first special pattern, based on the ball entering the second winning slot 640, the lottery can be performed using a common random number for the first special pattern and the second special pattern, making it possible to keep the probability of winning constant for both the first special pattern and the second special pattern.

After the process of S413 is executed, a look-ahead process is executed (S414). Details of the look-ahead process (S414) will be explained with reference to FIG. 245, but a process is executed to determine in advance the results of each lottery to be executed at the start of fluctuations based on the values of various counters acquired for balls entering the first winning slot 64 or the second winning slot 640.

In this embodiment, the counter values are obtained based on the ball entering the game, but they may be obtained when the game starts. This configuration eliminates the need for storage space to store the values of the counters until the game starts, reducing the use of storage space in RAM 203. The counters may also be configured to be obtained only for a portion of the counters (for example, only the fluctuation type counter CS1) when the game starts. This configuration allows the counters related to the hit/miss determination to be obtained when the ball enters the game, and the counters not related to the hit/miss determination to be obtained later, reducing the amount of data to be stored while maintaining the fairness of the game.

Next, referring to FIG. 245, we will explain the look-ahead process (S407), which is one process within the start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. FIG. 245 is a flowchart showing this look-ahead process (S407).

In the look-ahead process (S407 in FIG. 245), it is determined whether a new winning has occurred (S501). In this S501 process, if the value of the special pattern 1 reserved ball count counter (N1) or the value of the special pattern 2 reserved ball count counter (N2) is incremented, it is determined that a new winning has occurred. In the S501 process, if it is determined that there has been no new winning (S501: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is a new winning combination (S501: Yes), it is then determined whether the current winning combination is special pattern 1 (special pattern 1) (S502), and if it is determined that it is special pattern 1 (S502: Yes), the lottery results for each counter value acquired this time are obtained in advance based on the special pattern jackpot random number table 202a, the special pattern 1 jackpot type selection table 202d1, and the small jackpot random number table 202e (S503), and a winning information command including the jackpot determination result, jackpot type, small jackpot determination result, and small jackpot type is set as the previously acquired lottery results (S504), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S502, if it is determined that the current winning is not special pattern 1 (special pattern 1), i.e., special pattern 2 (special pattern 2) (S502: No), the lottery results for each counter value obtained this time are obtained in advance based on the special pattern jackpot random number table 202a and the special pattern 2 jackpot type selection table 202d2 (S505), and a winning information command including the jackpot determination result and jackpot type is set as the previously obtained lottery result (S504), and this process ends.

In this way, the result of the win/loss judgment made in advance before the fluctuation starts is output to the voice lamp control device 113 as a winning information command each time a reserved ball is established, so the voice lamp control device 113 can recognize the win/loss judgment result and the type of win in advance. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 can execute a preview performance that notifies the player of the win/loss judgment result for the reserved ball in advance based on the winning information command (for example, a performance such as changing the color of the reserved pattern to a color that notifies the win/loss judgment result, or outputting a notification sound to notify the win/loss judgment result for the reserved ball). In addition, since one winning information command is output for the reserved ball each time the reserved ball is established, the voice lamp control device 113 can also recognize the establishment of the reserved ball. In the pre-reading process (see S407 in FIG. 245) in this control example, when it is determined that there is no new winning in the process of S501 (S501: No), this process is terminated as it is. However, without being limited to this, for example, it may be configured to set a winning information command again for each counter value already stored in the special pattern 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special pattern 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. By configuring in this way, even if it is determined that the advance notice performance is not to be performed for the winning information command received on the voice lamp control device 113 side, it is possible to make a determination as to whether or not to perform the advance notice performance again for the same reserved pattern. Also, in this control example, it is configured to determine the lottery result based on each counter value acquired on the main control device 110 side in advance, and to set information for indicating the advance determination result as the winning information command. However, without being limited to this, it may be configured to set information for indicating each acquired counter value as the winning information command, and to determine the lottery result in advance based on the winning information command received on the voice lamp control device 113 side. In addition, if information indicating each acquired counter value is set as a winning information command, it is advisable to encrypt the winning information command so that a player who acquires the command fraudulently cannot identify the currently acquired counter value, or to configure the winning information command to be output at multiple times.

Next, referring to FIG. 245, we will explain the look-ahead process (S407), which is one process in the start winning process (see S105 in FIG. 244) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. FIG. 245 is a flowchart showing this look-ahead process (S407).

In this look-ahead process (S407), first, it is determined whether there has been a new winning at the first winning slot 64 or the second winning slot 640 (S501). If the result of the determination is that there has been no new winning at the first winning slot 64 or the second winning slot 640 (S501: No), this process ends as is. On the other hand, if there has been a new winning at the first winning slot 64 or the second winning slot 640 (S501: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the winning is a winning of the first special pattern (S502).

If it is determined in the process of S502 that the winning is the first special symbol winning (S502: Yes), the lottery result, the big win type, and the small win type are obtained based on the special symbol big win random number table 202a1, the special symbol 1 big win type selection table 202d1, and the small win random number table 202e (S503), and the process proceeds to S504. In the process of S504, a winning information command including the big win determination result, big win type, small win determination result, and small win type obtained in S503 (or S505) is set (S504), and the process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S502 that the winning prize is the second special symbol (S502: No), the lottery result and the type of jackpot are obtained based on the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a and the special symbol 2 jackpot selection table 202d2 (S505), the process of S504 is executed, and this process ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 246, the normal symbol change processing (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 246 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol change processing (S106). This normal symbol change processing (S106) is executed during the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 238), and is processing for controlling the second symbol change display performed by the second symbol display device 83, the opening time of the first electric role 640 associated with the second winning slot 640, etc.

In this normal symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is currently winning (S601). The normal symbol (second symbol) is winning when the second symbol display device 83 is displaying a win and when the first electric device 640 associated with the second winning port 640 is being controlled to open and close. If the result of the determination is that the normal symbol (second symbol) is winning (S601: Yes), this process ends.

On the other hand, if the normal pattern (second pattern) is not winning (S601: No), it is determined whether the display state of the second pattern display device 83 is changing (S602), and if the display state of the second pattern display device 83 is not changing (S602: No), the value of the normal pattern reserved ball number counter 203f (the number of reserved variable display times M for the normal pattern) is obtained (S603). Next, it is determined whether the value (M) of the normal pattern reserved ball number counter 203f is greater than 0 (S604), and if the value (M) of the normal pattern reserved ball number counter 203f is 0 (S604: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal pattern reserved ball number counter 203f is not 0 (S604: Yes), the value (M) of the normal pattern reserved ball number counter 203f is decremented by 1 (S605).

Next, the data stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is shifted (S606). In the process of S606, the data stored in the reserved area 1 to reserved area 4 of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is shifted in order to the execution area side. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the following order: reserved area 1 → execution area, reserved area 2 → reserved area 1, reserved area 3 → reserved area 2, reserved area 4 → reserved area 3. After the data is shifted, the value of the normal win random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is obtained (S607).

Next, the normal pattern change start process is executed (S608), and this process is terminated. The normal pattern change start process will be described later with reference to FIG. 247. On the other hand, in the process of S602, if the display mode of the second pattern display device 83 is changing (S602: Yes), it is determined whether the change time of the change display being executed in the second pattern display device 83 has elapsed (S609). The change time here is the time that was previously set by the process of S716 or S717 in FIG. 247 described later before the change display was started in the second pattern display device 83.

In the process of S609, if the change time has not elapsed (S609: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S609, if the change time of the executed change display has elapsed (S609: Yes), the stop display of the second pattern display device 83 is set (S610). In the process of S610, if the lottery for the normal pattern is a win and the display mode is set by the process of S707 or S710 in FIG. 247, the "○" pattern as the second pattern is set to be stopped and displayed (lighted) on the second pattern display device 83. On the other hand, if the lottery for the normal pattern is a loss and the display mode is set by the process of S713 in FIG. 247, the "X" pattern as the second pattern is set to be stopped and displayed (lighted) on the second pattern display device 83. When the stop display is set by the processing of S610, the next time the second pattern display update processing (see S1308) of the main processing (see FIG. 253) is executed, the variable display on the second pattern display device 83 ends, and the stop pattern (second pattern) is displayed as a stop (illuminated) on the second pattern display device 83 in the display mode set by the processing of S707, S710, or S713 of FIG. 247.

Next, when the variable display being executed in the second symbol display device 83 starts, it is determined whether the lottery result of the normal symbol performed by the normal symbol variable processing (the current lottery result) is a normal symbol winning (S611). If the current lottery result is a normal symbol winning (S611: Yes), the opening and closing control start of the first electric role 640 associated with the second winning port 640 is set (S612), a normal symbol winning operation command is set (S613), and this processing is terminated. When the opening and closing control start of the first electric role 640 is set by the processing of S612, when the electric role opening and closing processing (see S1306) of the main processing (see FIG. 253) is next executed, the opening and closing control of the first electric role 640 is started, and the opening and closing control of the first electric role 640 is continued until the opening time and the opening number set in the processing of S709 or S712 of FIG. 247 are completed. On the other hand, in the process of S611, if the result of this lottery is a miss for the normal pattern (S611: No), the processes of S612 and S613 are skipped and this process ends.

Next, the normal pattern change start process (S608) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 247. FIG. 247 is a flowchart showing this normal pattern change start process (S608). This normal pattern change start process (S608) is a process for executing settings for the start of normal pattern change, which is executed in the normal pattern change process (see FIG. 246) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 238).

It is determined whether or not a special symbol jackpot is currently in progress (S701). The special symbol jackpot includes the time when the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying a special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game) and the time during a specified period of time after the special symbol jackpot game ends. If the result of the determination is that a special symbol jackpot is in progress (S701: Yes), the process proceeds to S704.

In the process of S701, if the special symbol is not in the jackpot (S701: No), it is determined whether or not the special symbol is in a special probability mode (high probability state of normal symbols) (S702). If the special symbol is not in a special probability mode (high probability state of normal symbols) (S702: No), the process proceeds to S704.

On the other hand, if the game is in a high probability state (high probability state of normal symbols) in the process of S702 (S702: Yes), the pachinko machine 10 is not in a jackpot state of a special symbol, but is in a high probability state of a normal symbol, so the lottery result of whether or not the normal symbol is a hit is obtained based on the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 obtained in the process of S607 of FIG. 246 and the normal hit random number table 202c for high probability (see FIG. 222(c)). Specifically, the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the normal hit random number table 202c for high probability (see FIG. 222(c)). As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that the normal symbol is a hit, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4, 205 to 239", it is determined that the normal symbol is a miss (see FIG. 222(c)).

In the process of S704, since the pachinko machine 10 is in a jackpot with a special symbol or is in a low probability state (normal state, potential state) with a normal symbol, the result of the lottery as to whether or not the normal symbol is a hit is obtained based on the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 obtained in the process of S607 in FIG. 246 and the normal hit random number table 202c for low probability (see FIG. 222(c)). Specifically, the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the normal hit random number table 202c for low probability (see FIG. 222(c)). As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5", it is determined to be a short hit with a normal symbol, if it is in the range of "6", it is determined to be a long (long) hit with a normal symbol, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4, 205 to 239", it is determined to be a miss with a normal symbol (see FIG. 222(c)).

In this control example, during a jackpot of a special symbol, the lottery for a normal symbol is less likely to be a winning one. This is because during a jackpot of a special symbol (i.e., during a special game state), the player hits the ball to make the specific winning hole 65a win, and the first electric device 640 attached to the second winning hole 640 is opened to prevent the ball intended to win the specific winning hole 65a from entering the second winning hole 640 as much as possible. Note that since the specific winning hole 65a is provided immediately below the second winning hole 640, even if balls are prevented from entering the second winning hole 640 during a jackpot of a special symbol, many balls enter the second winning hole 640. As a result, in most cases, the number of reserved balls for the second winning hole 640 becomes maximum (4 times) while the pachinko machine 10 is in the special game state.

Next, it is determined whether the result of the lottery for the normal symbol obtained by the processing of S703 or S704 is a normal symbol winning (S705), and if it is determined that it is a normal symbol winning (S705: Yes), it is determined whether the type of the winning of the normal symbol is a long-term winning (S706). If it is determined that the type of the winning of the normal symbol is a long-term winning (S706: Yes), the display mode for the long-term winning is set (S707). In the processing of this S707, after the variable display in the second symbol display device 83 ends, it is set so that the "○" symbol is lit and displayed as the stopping symbol (second symbol). Next, a normal symbol long winning variable pattern command is set (S708), and the opening time and number of times of the first electric role 640 are set to 2 seconds x 2 times (S709), and then the processing proceeds to S715.

On the other hand, if the process of S706 determines that the winning type of the normal symbol is a normal (short) win (S706: No), the display mode for a normal (short) win is set (S710). Next, a normal symbol winning variation pattern command is set (S711), the opening period of the first electric device 640 associated with the second winning slot 640 is set to 0.2 seconds, and the number of times it is opened is set to 1 (S712), and the process proceeds to S715.

If it is determined in the process of S705 that the normal pattern is a miss (S705: No), the display mode in the event of a miss is set (S713). In this process of S713, after the variable display in the second pattern display device 83 has ended, the "X" pattern is set to be lit and displayed as the stopping pattern (second pattern). Once the setting of the display mode in the event of a miss has been completed, a normal pattern miss variable pattern command is set (S714), and the process proceeds to S715.

In the process of S715, it is determined whether or not the current state is a high probability state (whether or not the normal pattern is in a high probability state) (S715), and if the current state is a high probability state (high probability state of normal patterns) (S715: Yes), the change time of the change display in the second pattern display device 83 is set to 3 seconds (S716), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the current state is not a high probability state (high probability state of normal patterns) in the process of S715, that is, if the current state is a low probability state of normal patterns (S715: No), the change time of the change display in the second pattern display device 83 is set to 30 seconds (S717), and this process is terminated. In this way, except during a jackpot of a special pattern, in a high probability state of a normal pattern, the time of the variable display is much shorter (from 30 seconds to 3 seconds) than in a low probability state of a normal pattern, and furthermore, the opening period of the second winning hole 640 is much longer (from 0.2 seconds x 1 time to 2 seconds x 2 times), making it easier for the ball to enter the second winning hole 640.

In this control example, the opening time and the number of times of opening in the long-time hit are the same in the normal state and the potential state, but they may be configured to be set to different opening times and numbers of times of opening. In addition, in this control example, the opening operation content of the first electric device 640a is set based on the game state set at the start of the normal pattern fluctuation (at the time of the lottery), but it is not limited to this, and for example, the winning or losing judgment of the normal pattern is performed based on the game state set at the start of the normal pattern fluctuation (at the time of the lottery), and the opening operation content of the first electric device 640a may be set based on the game state at the time when the fluctuation time of the normal pattern that won the winning has elapsed. In other words, in this control example, since the game state is configured to be variably set based on the lottery of the special pattern, the game state may be variably set during the fluctuation of the normal pattern. In such a case, if the opening operation contents of the first electric device 640a are set based on the game state set at the start of the change of the common pattern (at the time of the lottery), there is a problem that the first electric device 640a will be open for a long time during a big win game or during a high probability state of a normal pattern. In contrast, by configuring the opening operation contents of the first electric device 640a to be set based on the game state at the time when the change time of the normal pattern that won the win has elapsed, the opening operation of the first electric device 640a can be executed with contents suitable for the set game state.

Next, the through gate passing process (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 248. FIG. 248 is a flowchart showing this through gate passing process (S107). This through gate passing process (S107) is executed during timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 238) and is a process for determining whether or not the ball has passed through the first through gate 66 (the through gate located in the right area of the game board 13) or the through gate 67 (see FIG. 207), and if the ball has passed through, acquiring and reserving the value indicated by the normal win random number counter C4. In the following description, when both the first through gate 66 and the through gate 67 are indicated, they will simply be referred to as the through gate 67.

In the through gate passing process, first, it is determined whether the ball has passed through the through gate 67 (S801). Here, the passage of the ball through the through gate 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the first through gate 66 (S801: Yes), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number of reserved normal symbol variable display times M) is obtained (S802). Then, it is determined whether the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S803).

If the ball has not passed through the through gate 67 (S801: No), or if the ball has passed through the through gate 67 but the value (M) of the normal pattern reserved ball counter 203f is not less than 4 (S803: No), the process proceeds to S806. On the other hand, if the ball has passed through the through gate 67 (S801: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal pattern reserved ball counter 203f is less than 4 (S803: Yes), the value (M) of the normal pattern reserved ball counter 203f is incremented by 1 (S804). Then, the value of the normal winning random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above is stored in the first of the empty reserved areas (reserved area 1 to reserved area 4) of the normal pattern reserved ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203 (S805), and the process proceeds to S806. In the process of S805, the value of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203d is referenced, and if the value is 0, the first reserved area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the second reserved area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the third reserved area is set as the first area, and if the value is 3, the fourth reserved area is set as the first area. Next, the normal symbol pre-reading process (S806) is executed, and this process is terminated.

Next, the normal symbol pre-reading process will be described with reference to FIG. 249 (S806). FIG. 249 is a flowchart showing the contents of this normal symbol pre-reading process (S806). In the normal symbol pre-reading process (S806), first, a pre-determination is performed based on the value of the normal symbol random number counter C4 newly stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c (S901). Specifically, the value of the normal symbol random number counter C4 newly stored in the process of S805 is compared with the random number value stored in the normal symbol random number table 202c.

Next, based on the result of the preliminary judgment, the result of the pre-judgment of the winning status and the result of the pre-judgment of the change time are obtained (S902). Here, the processing contents of S902 will be explained in detail. In this control example, in the normal pattern pre-reading process, in addition to judging whether the normal pattern is a winning or losing status, the change time of the normal pattern (3 seconds or 30 seconds) is determined in advance. Specifically, the game state set at the time when the corresponding normal pattern starts to change is predicted, and the change time of the normal pattern based on the prediction result is determined in advance. After that, a normal pattern winning information command containing information for indicating the result of the pre-judgment of the normal pattern and the result of the pre-judgment of the change time is set (S903), and this process is terminated. In this control example, the main control unit 110 executes a normal symbol pre-reading process (see S806 in FIG. 249) to determine whether the normal symbol is a winner and the change time in advance, but this is not limited to this. Information indicating the value of the normal symbol random number counter C4 newly stored in the process of S805 may be set as a normal symbol winning information command, and the voice lamp control unit 113 may determine whether the normal symbol is a winner and the change time in advance based on this command.

Next, the other winning process (S109) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 250. FIG. 250 is a flowchart showing the contents of the other winning process (S109). This other winning process (S109) is executed within the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 238), and is a process for determining whether or not a ball has entered the specific winning hole 65a and the specific out hole, and for setting a command if a ball has entered.

In the other winning process (S109), first, it is determined whether or not a winning has been won in the specific winning slot 65a (S1001). If it is determined that a winning has been won in the specific winning slot 65a (S1001: Yes), a specific winning command is set and processing proceeds to S1003. On the other hand, if it is determined in processing S1001 that a winning has been won in the specific winning slot (S1001: No), processing skips S1002 and proceeds to S1003.

After executing the process of S1001 or S1002, it is determined whether or not a ball has entered the specific out-gate (S1003). If it is determined that a ball has entered the specific out-gate (S1003: Yes), a specific out-entry ball entry command is set (S1004), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1003 that a ball has not entered the specific out-gate (S1003: No), S1004 is skipped and this process ends. In this way, by setting a command to indicate that a ball has entered the specific general winning gate 163 or the specific out-gate 166 and configuring it to be output to the audio lamp control device 113, it is possible to perform an effect that matches the flow of balls (pseudo winning) into the pseudo attacker 165 (see FIG. 208).

Next, referring to FIG. 251, the NMI interrupt processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 251 is a flowchart showing the NMI interrupt processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The NMI interrupt processing is a processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 when the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power outage or the like. This NMI interrupt processing stores information on the occurrence of a power outage in the RAM 203. That is, when the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power outage or the like, the power outage signal SG1 is output from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed and starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the information on the occurrence of the power outage in the RAM 203 as the setting of the information on the occurrence of the power outage (S1101), and ends the NMI interrupt processing.

The above-mentioned NMI interrupt processing is also executed in the payout/firing control device 111, and this NMI interrupt processing causes information about the occurrence of a power outage to be stored in the RAM 213. In other words, when the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power outage or the like, a power outage signal SG1 is output from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control currently being executed and starts the NMI interrupt processing.

Next, referring to FIG. 252, the start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110 when the main control unit 110 is powered on will be described. FIG. 252 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is initiated by a reset when the power is turned on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S1201). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, a wait process (1 second in this embodiment) is executed to wait for the sub-side control units (peripheral control units such as the voice lamp control unit 113 and the dispensing control unit 111) to become operable (S1202). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S1203).

Then, it is determined whether the RAM clear switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided on the power supply device 115 is turned on (S1204), and if it is turned on (S1204: Yes), the process proceeds to S1213. On the other hand, if the RAM clear switch 122 is not turned on (S1204: No), it is further determined whether or not information on the occurrence of a power outage is stored in the RAM 203 (S1205), and if it is not stored (S1205: No), there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power outage did not end normally, so in this case too, the process proceeds to S1213.

If power outage information is stored in RAM 203 (S1205: Yes), a RAM judgment value is calculated (S1206). If the calculated RAM judgment value is not normal (S1207: No), that is, if the calculated RAM judgment value does not match the RAM judgment value saved at the time of power outage, the backed up data has been destroyed, and in such a case, the process also proceeds to S12913. Note that, as will be described later in the process of S1315 in FIG. 253, the RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value at the working area address of RAM 203. Instead of this RAM judgment value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not a keyword written in a specified area of RAM 203 is saved correctly.

In the process of S1213, a payout initialization command is sent to initialize the payout control device 111, which is the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S1213). When the payout control device 111 receives this payout initialization command, it clears the areas (working areas) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets initial values, and becomes ready to start controlling the payout of game balls. After sending the payout initialization command, the main control device 110 executes initialization processing of the RAM 203 (S1214, S1215).

As described above, in this pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall opens for business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed when the start-up process is executed, the RAM initialization process (S1214, S1215) is executed. Similarly, if the power outage occurrence information is not set, or if a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.), the RAM 203 initialization process (S1214, S1215) is executed. In the RAM initialization process (S1214, S1215), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S1214), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S1215). After the RAM 203 initialization process is executed, the process proceeds to S1211.

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S1204: No), power outage information is stored (S1205: Yes), and the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.) is normal (S1207: Yes), a status command is sent based on the long-release flag 203i (S1208). Next, the power outage information is cleared while retaining the data backed up in the RAM 203 (S1209). Next, a payout return command upon power recovery is sent to return the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the game state at the time of the drive power cutoff (S1210), and the process proceeds to S1211. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, it becomes capable of starting payout control of game balls while retaining the data stored in the RAM 213.

In the process of S1211, a performance permission command is sent to the voice lamp control device 113, and the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various performances. Next, an interrupt is permitted (S1212), and the process proceeds to the main process described below.

Next, referring to FIG. 253, the main processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the above-mentioned start-up processing will be described. FIG. 253 is a flowchart showing this main processing. In this main processing, the main processing of the game is executed. In summary, each process from S1301 to S1308 is executed as a periodic process at a cycle of 4 ms, and the counter update processes of S1311 and S1312 are executed in the remaining time.

In the main process, first, during execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 238), an external output process is executed to transmit output data such as commands stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 to each control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side (S1301). Specifically, the presence or absence of winning detection information detected in the switch reading process of S101 in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 238) is determined, and if there is winning detection information, a prize ball command corresponding to the number of balls obtained is transmitted to the payout control device 111. In addition, the reserved ball number command set in the special pattern variation process (see FIG. 239) or the start winning process (see FIG. 244) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. In addition, the winning command set in the start winning process (see FIG. 244) or the look-ahead process (see FIG. 245) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Furthermore, this external output process transmits to the voice lamp control device 113 a variation pattern command, a stop type command, etc. required for the third pattern display device 81 to display the variation of the third pattern.

Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S1302). Specifically, the fluctuation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. The updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is then stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

When the update of the variable type counter CS1 is completed, the prize ball count signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1303), and then, in the case of a special pattern jackpot state, a jackpot performance is executed, and a jackpot control process is executed to open or close the specific winning port (large opening port) 65a of the variable winning device 65 (S1304). In the jackpot control process, the specific winning port 65a or the third winning port 82 is opened according to the content of the jackpot game to be executed (jackpot type), and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning port 65a and the third winning port 82 has elapsed, or whether a specified number of balls have entered the specific winning port 65a and the third winning port 82. Then, when any of these conditions is established, the specific winning port 65a and the third winning port 82 are closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning port 65a and the third winning port 82 are repeatedly executed for a predetermined number of rounds. In this control example, the jackpot control process (S1304) is executed in the main process, but it may be executed in the timer interrupt process. Also, in this control example, the jackpot game content corresponding to the jackpot type (type of winning slot to be opened, opening time, number of openings (number of rounds), and opening period, interval period, and ending period) is pre-stored as a jackpot scenario, and the jackpot scenario corresponding to the jackpot type set when the jackpot is won is read out, and the jackpot game based on the read out jackpot scenario is executed.

Next, when the special symbol is in a small win state, a small win control process is executed to execute a small win performance and open or close the third winning opening 82 of the third electric device (S1305). In the big win control process, the third winning opening 82 is opened for each round in the small win state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the third winning opening 82 has elapsed or whether a specified number of balls have entered the third winning opening 82. Then, when either of these conditions is met, the third winning opening 82 is closed. Note that in this embodiment, the small win control process (S1305) is executed in the main process, but it may also be executed in the timer interrupt process.

Next, an electric device opening/closing process is executed to control the opening/closing of the first electric device 640a associated with the second winning slot 640 (S1306). In the electric device opening/closing process, when the start of the opening/closing control of the first electric device 640a is set by the process of S612 of the normal pattern change process (see FIG. 246), the opening/closing control of the first electric device 640a is started. Note that the opening/closing control of the first electric device 640a continues until the opening time and the number of openings set by the process of S709 or S712 of FIG. 247 in the normal pattern change start process are completed.

Next, a first pattern display update process is executed to update the display of the first pattern display device 37 (S1307). In the first pattern display update process, when a change pattern is set by the process of S257 or S259 of the special pattern 2 change start process (see FIG. 240), or the process of S277 or S279 of the special pattern 1 change start process (see FIG. 241), the change display according to the change pattern is started in the first pattern display device 37. In this embodiment, among the LEDs 37a of the first pattern display device 37, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off and the green LED is turned on, if the green LED is turned on, the green LED is turned off and the blue LED is turned on, and if the blue LED is turned on, the blue LED is turned off and the red LED is turned on.

The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the LED color were to be changed each time the main process was executed, the player would not be able to see the change in the LED color. Therefore, to allow the player to see the change in the LED color, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 each time the main process is executed, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED color is changed. In other words, the LED color is changed every 0.4 seconds. The counter value is reset to 0 when the LED color is changed.

In addition, in the first pattern display update process, when the change time corresponding to the change pattern set by the process S257 or S259 of the special pattern 2 change start process (see FIG. 240), or the process S277 or S279 of the special pattern 1 change start process (see FIG. 241), ends, the change display being performed in the first pattern display device 37 is terminated, and the stopped pattern (first pattern) is displayed (lit) in a stopped state in the first pattern display device 37 in the display mode set by the process S256 or S258 of the special pattern 2 change start process (see FIG. 208), or the process S276 or S278 of the special pattern 1 change start process (see FIG. 241).

Next, a second pattern display update process is executed to update the display of the second pattern display device 83 (S1308). In the second pattern display update process, when the second pattern change time is set by the process of S716 or S717 of the normal pattern change start process (see FIG. 247), the second pattern display device 83 starts a change display. As a result, the second pattern display device 83 performs a change display in which the "○" pattern and the "×" pattern as the second pattern are alternately lit. Also, in the second pattern display update process, when the stop display of the second pattern display device 83 is set by the process of S610 of the normal pattern change process (see FIG. 246), the change display executed in the second pattern display device 83 is terminated, and the stop pattern (second pattern) is displayed (lit) in a stopped state on the second pattern display device 83 in the display mode set by the process of S707 or S710 of the normal pattern change start process (see FIG. 247).

Then, it is determined whether or not information on the occurrence of a power outage is stored in RAM 203 (S1309). If information on the occurrence of a power outage is not stored in RAM 203 (S1309: No), the power outage signal SG1 is not output from the power outage monitoring circuit 252, and the power is not cut off. In such a case, it is determined whether or not the timing for executing the next main process has arrived, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the current main process (S1310). If the predetermined time has already elapsed (S1310: Yes), the process proceeds to S1301, and the above-mentioned processes from S1301 onwards are repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the specified time has not yet elapsed since the start of the current main process (S1310: No), the initial value random number counter CINI1, the normal initial value random number counter CINI2, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated until the specified time is reached, i.e., within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process (S1311, S1312).

First, the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1311). Specifically, the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299, 239 in this embodiment), they are cleared to 0. The updated values of the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 are then stored in the corresponding buffer areas of RAM 203. Next, the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated using the same method as the processing of S1302 (S1312).

Here, the execution time of each process from S1301 to S1308 changes depending on the game state, so the remaining time until the next main process is executed is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 using this remaining time, it is possible to randomly update the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 (i.e., the initial value of the special win random number counter C1, and the initial value of the normal win random number counter C4), and similarly, the variation type counter CS1 can also be randomly updated.

In addition, if the power interruption information is stored in the RAM 203 in the process of S1309 (S1309: Yes), the power is interrupted due to a power outage or power off, and the power outage monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power outage signal SG1, which means that the NMI interruption process in FIG. 40 is executed, so the process at the time of power interruption from S1313 onwards is executed. First, the occurrence of each interruption process is prohibited (S1313), and a power off command indicating that the power has been interrupted is sent to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the dispensing control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113) (S1314). Then, a RAM judgment value is calculated and the value is saved (S1315), and access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1316), and an infinite loop is continued until the power is completely cut off and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and working area backed up in the RAM 203.

The processing of S1309 is executed at the end of a series of processing corresponding to the change in the game state performed in S1301 to S1308, or at the end of one cycle of the processing of S1311 and S1312 performed within the remaining time. Therefore, in the main processing of the main control device 110, the power interruption occurrence information is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed, so when returning from the power interruption state, the processing can be started from the processing of S1301 after the start-up processing is completed. That is, the processing can be started from the processing of S1301, just as in the case of initialization in the start-up processing. Therefore, in the processing at the time of power interruption, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved to the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved, the stack pointer is set to a predetermined value (initial value) in the initial setting processing (S901), and the processing can be started from the processing of S1301. Therefore, the control burden on the main control device 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main control device 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

Next, referring to the flowchart in FIG. 254, the jackpot control process (S1304) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 254 is a flowchart showing this jackpot control process (S1304). This jackpot control process (S1304) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 253), and is a process for executing various effects according to the jackpot and opening or closing the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a or the third winning opening 82 when the pachinko machine 10 is in a jackpot state with a special symbol. Hereinafter, for the sake of convenience, the winning openings (specific winning opening (large opening) 65a or the third winning opening 82) that are opened or closed in the jackpot control process (S1304 in FIG. 254) will be collectively referred to as the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a.

In the jackpot control process (S1304), first, it is determined whether a jackpot scenario is set (S1401). If it is determined that a jackpot scenario is not set (S1401: No), this process ends as is. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1401 that a jackpot scenario is set (S1401: Yes), the jackpot scenario is updated (S1402), and it is determined whether it is time to start the opening of the jackpot scenario (S1403). More specifically, in the process of S1402, 1 is added to the counter value of a jackpot scenario counter (not shown), and in the process of S1403, it is determined whether the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter (not shown) is a value that corresponds to the start of the opening of the jackpot scenario.

If it is determined in the process of S1403 that it is time to start the opening of the jackpot scenario (S1403: Yes), a jackpot opening command is set (S1404) and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not time to start the opening of the jackpot scenario (S1403: No), it is then determined whether it is time to start a new round of the jackpot scenario (S1405).

If it is determined in the processing of S1405 that it is time to start a new round of the jackpot scenario (S1405: Yes), the specific winning port 65a is set to open during the jackpot (S1406), a round number command indicating the number of new rounds to start is set (S1407), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1405 that it is not the start timing of a new round of the big win scenario (S1405: No), then it is determined whether the round end condition of the currently executed round (the closing condition of the large opening) has been met (S1408). Here, in this control example, if a total of a predetermined number of balls (e.g., 5 balls) enter during one round play (while the specific winning opening 65a is open), or if the opening period of the specific winning opening 65a has elapsed for a predetermined time (e.g., 30 seconds), it is determined that the round end condition has been met. If it is determined that the round end condition of the specific winning opening 65a has been met (S1408: Yes), the specific winning opening 65a is set to be closed in the process of S1409 (the solenoid is set to off so that the opening and closing plate 65f1 of the specific winning opening 65a is in a closed state), and this process is terminated. The above-mentioned determination process from S1405 to S1409 is repeated for the number of jackpot rounds set in the jackpot scenario.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1408 that the round end condition of the currently executed round has not been met (S1408: No), it is next determined whether it is the timing to start the ending performance (S1410). If it is the timing to start the ending performance (S1410: Yes), an ending command for the big win is set (S1411) and this process ends. The ending command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in RAM 203, and is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 during the external output process (S1301) of the main process (see FIG. 253) executed by MPU 201. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the ending command, it transmits a display ending command to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display ending command, an ending performance indicating the end of the big win is started in the third pattern display device 81.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1410 that it is not the timing to start the ending performance (S1410: No), it is determined whether it is the timing to end the jackpot (S1412). Here, the timing to end the jackpot refers to when the execution period of the ending performance has elapsed. If it is determined in the process of S1412 that it is the timing to end the jackpot (S1412: Yes), the value of the time-saving counter 203j is set based on the type of jackpot this time (S1413), the value of the special counter 203m is set based on the type of jackpot (S1414), the jackpot flag 203n is set to off (S1415), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1412 that it is not the timing to end the jackpot (S1412: No), this process ends as it is.

Next, referring to FIG. 255, we will explain the small win control process (S1305), which is one process within the main process (see FIG. 253) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. FIG. 255 is a flowchart showing the contents of this small win control process (S1305).

In the small win control process (S1305), first, it is determined whether a small win scenario has been set (S1501). Specifically, it is determined whether a small win scenario has been set by the process of S302 of the small win setting process (see FIG. 242). In the process of S1501, if a small win scenario has not been set (S1501: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if a small win scenario is set in the process of S1501 (S1501: Yes), the small win scenario is updated (S1502), and it is determined whether it is time to start the opening of the small win scenario (S1503). More specifically, in the process of S1502, 1 is added to the counter value of a small win scenario counter (not shown), and in the process of S1503, it is determined whether the counter value of the small win scenario counter (not shown) is a value that corresponds to the start of the opening of the small win scenario.

If it is determined in the process of S1503 that it is time to start the opening of the small win scenario (S1503: Yes), the opening command for the small win is set (S1504) and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not time to start the opening of the small win scenario (S1503: No), it is then determined whether it is time to start a round of the small win scenario (S1505).

If it is determined in the process of S1505 that it is time to start a round of the small win scenario (S1505: Yes), the third winning hole 82 is set to open (S1506), then a round start command is set (S1507), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not time to start a round of the small win scenario (S1505: No), then it is determined whether the round end condition of the currently executed round has been met (S1508). Here, in this control example, if a predetermined number of balls (e.g., 5 balls) have won in total while the third winning hole 82 is open, or if the opening period of the third winning hole 82 has elapsed for a predetermined time, it is determined that the round end condition has been met.

If it is determined in the process of S1508 that the round end condition for the currently executed round has been met (S1508: Yes), the third winning port 82 is set to be closed in the process of S1509, and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the round end condition for the third winning port 82 has not been met (S1508: No), it is determined whether it is time to start the ending performance (S1510).

If it is determined in the processing of S1510 that it is time to start the ending performance (S1510: Yes), an ending command for the small win is set (S1511) and this processing ends. The ending command set here is stored in a ring buffer for sending commands provided in RAM 203, and is sent to the voice lamp control device 113 during the external output processing (S1301) of the main processing (see FIG. 253) executed by MPU 201. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the ending command, it sends a display ending command to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display ending command, an ending performance indicating the end of the small win is started in the third pattern display device 81.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1510 that it is not the start timing of the ending performance (S1510: No), it is determined whether it is the end timing of the small win (S1512). Here, the end timing of the small win refers to when the execution period of the ending performance has elapsed.

If it is determined in the process of S1512 that it is the end timing of the small win (S1512: Yes), the small win in progress flag 203g is set to OFF (S1513) and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is not the end timing of the small win (S1513: No), this process ends.

<Control process executed by the voice lamp control device 113>
Next, referring to Fig. 256 to Fig. 273, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. The process of the MPU 221 is roughly divided into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on, and a main process that is executed after the start-up process.

First, referring to FIG. 256, the start-up process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 256 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

When the startup process is executed, first, the initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S2001). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Then, depending on whether the power-off processing in progress flag is on, it is determined whether the current startup process was started during the execution of the power-off processing of S2119 (see FIG. 257) due to a momentary voltage drop (momentary power outage, so-called "instantaneous power outage") (S2002). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 257, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives a power-off command from the main control device 110 (see S2116 in FIG. 257), it executes the power-off processing of S2119. Before the execution of such power-off processing, the power-off processing in progress flag is turned on, and after the power-off processing is completed, the power-off processing in progress flag is turned off. Therefore, whether the power-off processing of S2119 is in the middle of execution can be determined by the state of the power-off processing in progress flag.

If the power-off processing in progress flag is off (S2002: No), the current startup process was started after the power was completely cut off, or after a momentary power outage occurred and the power-off processing of S2119 was completed, or the process was started after only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in these cases, it is checked whether the data in the RAM 223 has been corrupted (S2003).

The confirmation of data corruption in RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as the keyword "55AAh" is written in a specific area of RAM 223 by the processing of S2006. Therefore, by checking the data stored in that specific area, if the data is "55AAh", there is no data corruption in RAM 223, and conversely, if the data is not "55AAh", data corruption in RAM 223 can be confirmed. If data corruption in RAM 223 is confirmed (S2003: Yes), the process proceeds to S2004, where initialization of RAM 223 begins. On the other hand, if data corruption in RAM 223 is not confirmed (S2003: No), the process proceeds to S2008.

If the current startup process is started after the power supply is completely cut off, the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of RAM 223 (because the memory of RAM 223 is lost when the power supply is cut off), so it is determined that the data in RAM 223 has been destroyed (S2003: Yes) and the process proceeds to S2004. On the other hand, if the current startup process is started after a momentary power outage occurs and the power cut process of S2118 is completed, or if the startup process is started after only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like, the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of RAM 223, so the data in RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S2003: No) and the process proceeds to S2208.

If the power-off processing in progress flag is on (S2002: Yes), this startup process was started after a momentary power outage occurred, and the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 was reset while the power-off processing of S2119 was in progress. In this case, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct, since the power-off processing is in progress. Therefore, in this case, control cannot continue, so the process proceeds to S2004 and initialization of the RAM 223 begins.

In the process of S2004, the entire storage area of RAM 223 is checked (S2004). The check method is to first write "0FFh" to each byte, then read each byte to check whether it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined to be normal. This writing and checking for each byte is performed in the order of "0FFh", then "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". This read/write check of RAM 223 clears all storage areas of RAM 223 to 0.

If the read/write check is determined to be normal for all memory areas of the RAM 223 (S2005: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 to set RAM destruction check data (S2006). By checking the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether data destruction has occurred in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read/write check is detected in any memory area of the RAM 223 (S2005: No), the abnormality in the RAM 223 is notified (S2007) and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. The abnormality in the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. The abnormality in the RAM 223 may be notified by outputting a sound from the audio output device 226, or an error command may be sent to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third pattern display device 81.

In the process of S2008, it is determined whether the power-off flag is on (S2008). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S2119 is executed (see S2118 in FIG. 257). In other words, the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of S2119 is executed, so the process of S2008 will be reached with the power-off flag on if the current startup process is started after a momentary power outage occurs and the execution of the power-off process of S2119 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S2008: Yes), the working area of the RAM is cleared (S2009) to initialize each process of the voice lamp control device 113, and after setting the initial value of the RAM 223 (S2010), interrupt permission is set (S2011), and the process proceeds to the main process. Note that the working area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands received from the main control device 110.

On the other hand, the process of S2008 is reached when the power-off flag is off because the current startup process was started after the power was completely cut off, and so the process went from S2004 to S2006 and reached S2008, or because noise or the like caused only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 to be reset (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S2008: No), S2009, which is the process of clearing the working area of RAM 223, is skipped, and the process proceeds to S2010, where the initial value of RAM 223 is set (S2010), interrupt permission is set (S2011), and the process proceeds to the main process. After that, it is determined whether a status command has been received from the main control device 110 (S2012). Note that this status command is a command set in the process of S1208 of the startup process (see FIG. 252) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. If it is determined in the process of S2012 that a status command has been received (S2012: Yes), information indicating the received status command is set in the status setting area 223g, and this process ends (S2013).

In this way, when the power is turned on, the main control unit 110 outputs a command that can determine whether or not a long-term normal win is occurring, allowing the voice and lamp control unit 113 to also determine that state.

The clearing process of S2009 is skipped because when the process proceeds from S2004 to S2006 and then to S2008, all storage areas of RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process of S2004, and when only MPU 221 of voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and start-up processing is started, control of voice lamp control device 113 can be continued by storing the data in the working area of RAM 223 without clearing it.

Next, referring to FIG. 257, the main processing executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 after the start-up processing of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 257 is a flowchart showing this main processing. When the main processing is executed, first, it is determined whether or not 1 ms or more has elapsed since the main processing was started or since the current processing of S2101 was executed (S2101). If 1 ms or more has not elapsed (S2101: No), the processing of S2102 to S2113 is not executed and the processing proceeds to S2114. The reason for determining whether or not 1 ms has elapsed in the processing of S2101 is that, whereas S2102 to S2113 are mainly processing related to display (performance) and do not need to be edited in a short cycle (within 1 ms), it is preferable to execute the command determination processing of S2114, the variable display setting processing of S2115, and the processing of updating various counter values not shown in the figure in a short cycle. In other words, by executing the process of S2114 at short intervals, it is possible to prevent commands sent from the main control device 110 from being missed, and by executing the process of S2115 at short intervals, it is possible to set the variable performance without delay based on the commands received by the command determination process.

If 1 ms or more has elapsed in the processing of S2101 (S2101: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processing of S2103 to S2115 are sent to the display control device 114 (S2102). Next, the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 is set and the output of each lamp is set to the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the processing of S2108 described later (S2103), and then the power-on notification processing is executed (S2104). The power-on notification processing is a processing for notifying that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. In addition, a command may be sent to the display control device 114 to notify that power has been supplied on the screen of the third pattern display device 81. Note that if the power is not turned on, the notification by the power-on notification processing is not performed and the processing proceeds to S2105.

In the process of S2105, a customer waiting performance process is executed, and then a reserved number display update process is executed (S2106). In the customer waiting performance process, when a predetermined time has elapsed during which the pachinko machine 10 is not played by a player, a setting is made to switch the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen, and this setting is sent as a command to the display control device 114. In the reserved number display update process, a process is performed to light up the reserved lamp (not shown) according to the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a, the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b, and the value of the normal reserved ball number counter 223c.

After that, the frame button input monitoring/presentation process is executed (S2107). This frame button input monitoring/presentation process monitors input as to whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed in order to enhance the presentation effect, and sets up a corresponding presentation when input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. Details of this frame button input monitoring/presentation process (S2107) will be described later with reference to FIG. 271.

When the frame button input monitoring and performance process is completed, the lamp editing process is executed (S2108), and then the sound editing and output process is executed (S2109). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination units 29 to 33 are set to correspond to the display performed by the third pattern display device 81. In the sound editing and output process, the output pattern of the sound output device 226 is set to correspond to the display performed by the third pattern display device 81, and sound is output from the sound output device 226 according to the settings.

After processing S2109, the LCD performance execution management process is executed (S2110), and the process proceeds to S2111. In the LCD performance execution management process, a time is set that is synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third pattern display device 81 based on the variable pattern command sent from the main control device 110. The lamp editing process of S2108 is executed based on the time set in this LCD performance execution monitoring process. The sound editing and output process of S2109 is also executed in a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third pattern display device 81. The above-mentioned LCD performance execution management process (S2110) will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 272.

When the processing of S2110 is completed, an operation performance management process is executed (S2111). The operation performance management process (S2111) will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 273, but a process is executed to change the performance mode displayed during the operation performance depending on whether or not the operation means (frame button 22) is operated.

After the operation and performance management process (S2111) is executed, the motion control process (S2112) is executed. In this motion control process (S2112), motion control of the various performance movable parts provided in the pachinko machine 10 of this first control example is executed. The motion control of the various performance movable parts is executed according to the contents of the motion scenario of the performance movable parts that is set based on the lottery results of the special symbol and the lottery results of the normal symbol, the operation results of the operation means (frame button 22), the game results during the jackpot game, etc., and a detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

When the processing of S2112 is completed, a counter update process is executed (S2113). In this counter update process (S2113), a process is executed to update the value of a counter (timer) for timing information required when executing various effects, such as the operation validity timer 223n.

When the processing of S2113 is completed, a command determination process is then executed (S2114). Details of this command determination process (S2114) will be described later with reference to FIG. 258. After the command determination process (S2114) is executed, a variable display setting process is executed (S2115). In the variable display setting process, a display variable pattern command is generated and set based on the variable pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to execute a variable performance in the third pattern display device 81. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. Details of this variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 267.

After the processing of S2115 is completed, it is determined whether or not information on the occurrence of a power outage is stored in the work RAM 233 (S2116). Information on the occurrence of a power outage is stored when a power outage command is received from the main control unit 110. If information on the occurrence of a power outage is stored in the processing of S2116 (S2116: Yes), both the power outage flag and the power outage processing in progress flag are turned on (S2118), and the power outage processing is executed (S2119). After the power outage processing is executed, the power outage processing in progress flag is turned off (S2120), and the processing is then looped infinitely. In the power outage processing, the occurrence of interrupt processing is prohibited, and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. The stored information on the occurrence of a power outage is also erased.

On the other hand, if the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the process of S2116 (S2116: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S2117). If the RAM 223 is not destroyed (S2117: No), the process returns to the process of S2101 and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S2117: Yes), the process is infinitely looped to stop the execution of subsequent processes. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop occurs, the main process is not executed, and thereafter, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change. Therefore, the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, and can call a hall staff member or the like to repair the pachinko machine 10. In addition, if it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the sound output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may be used to notify the player of the RAM destruction.

Next, referring to FIG. 258, the command determination process (S2114) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 258 is a flowchart showing this command determination process (S2114). This command determination process (S2114) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 257) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and as described above, determines the command received from the main control device 110.

In the command determination process (S2114: FIG. 258), first, the first command received from the main control unit 110 among the unprocessed commands is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and it is determined whether or not a variation pattern command has been received from the main control unit 110 (S2201). If a variation pattern command has been received (S2201: Yes), variation pattern reception process is executed (S2202), and this process is terminated. Details of the variation pattern reception process (S2202) will be described later with reference to FIG. 259.

On the other hand, in the process of S2201, if a variation pattern command has not been received (S2201: No), it is determined whether or not a stop type command has been received (S2203). If a stop type command has been received (S2203: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (S2204), the stop type is extracted from the received command (S2205), and this process ends.

In the process of S2203, if the stop type command is not received (S2203: No), it is determined whether or not the reserved ball number command is received (S2206). If the reserved ball number command is received (S2206: Yes), the reserved ball number is extracted from the received command and stored in the corresponding special pattern reserved ball number counter (special pattern 1 reserved ball number counter 223a, special pattern 2 reserved ball number counter 223b) (S2207), and this process is terminated. Here, the reserved ball number corresponding to the first special pattern is stored in the special pattern 1 reserved ball number counter 223a, and the reserved ball number corresponding to the second special pattern is stored in the special pattern 2 reserved ball number counter 223b. In addition, when a reserved ball number command indicating the reserved ball number of a normal pattern is received, information indicating the reserved ball number is stored in the normal reserved ball number counter 223c. In this control example, the reserved ball count command sent from the main control unit 110 contains information indicating the current number of reserved balls, so even if the values of the reserved ball count counters on the voice lamp control unit 113 side are erased due to a power outage or the like, the value of each reserved ball count counter can be restored to the appropriate value by receiving the next reserved ball count command sent. In this case, it is recommended to configure the main control unit 110 to send each reserved ball count command in the process of sending a status command (see S1208 in FIG. 252) during the startup process (see FIG. 252).

On the other hand, if the reserved ball count command is not received in the process of S2206 (S2206: No), it is determined whether or not a winning-related command has been received (S2208). If a winning-related command has been received (S2208: Yes), the winning information-related process is started (S2209), and this process ends. Details of the winning information-related process (S2209) will be described later with reference to FIG. 260, but based on the winning information command output from the main control unit 110 (winning information command corresponding to a special pattern, winning information command corresponding to a normal pattern), the winning information included in the winning information command is pre-determined, and a performance (pre-reading performance) based on the pre-determination result is executed, and a process for temporarily storing the pre-determination result is executed.

If no winning-related command has been received in the process of S2208 (S2208: No), it is then determined whether a win-related command has been received (S2210). If it is determined that a win-related command has been received (S2210: Yes), a win-related process is executed (S2211), and the process ends. This win-related process (S2211) will be described later with reference to FIG. 263.

If it is determined in the process of S2210 that a win-related command has not been received (S2210: No), it is determined whether a stop command has been received (S2212). If it is determined that a stop command has been received (S2212: Yes), a stop process is executed (S2213), and this process ends. This stop process (S2213) will be described later with reference to FIG. 266. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2212 that a stop command has not been received (S2212: No), this process ends as it is.

Next, referring to FIG. 259, the variation pattern receiving process (S2202), which is one process within the command determination process (S2114: FIG. 258), will be described in detail. FIG. 259 is a flowchart showing this variation pattern receiving process. In this variation pattern receiving process (S2202), the variation pattern (variation presentation) of the special symbol is set using the variation pattern selection table 222a based on the received variation pattern command. Also, when a variation pattern command indicating the result of the normal symbol lottery is received, a determination is made as to whether or not it is possible to execute a variation presentation of the Large 3 symbol based on the result of the normal symbol lottery.

In the variation pattern reception process (S2202: Fig. 259), first, it is determined whether the currently received variation pattern command is for a special symbol (variation pattern command for a special symbol) (S2301). If it is determined that it is a variation pattern command for a special symbol, i.e., a command indicating a variation pattern for a special symbol (S2301: Yes), the variation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S2302), a variation pattern is extracted using the variation pattern selection table 222a based on the received command (S2303), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S2301, if it is determined that the currently received fluctuation pattern command is not for a special drawing, that is, if it is determined that a fluctuation pattern command for a normal drawing has been received (S2301: No), then it is determined whether the currently received fluctuation pattern command for a normal drawing is a fluctuation pattern command indicating that a normal drawing long win (long opening win) has been won (S2304). In the process of S2304, if it is determined that a fluctuation pattern command indicating that a normal drawing long win (long opening win) has been received (S2304: Yes), then it is determined whether the normal drawing performance prohibition flag 223u is set to on (S2305), and if it is determined that it is not set to on (S2305: No), the normal drawing performance possible flag 223t is set to on, and this process ends.

In the process of S2304, if it is determined that a command other than the fluctuation pattern command indicating that a normal long win (long open win) has been won has been received (S2304: No), or if it is determined in the process of S2305 that the normal pattern performance prohibition flag 223u is set to on (S2305: Yes), this process is terminated without setting the normal pattern performance possible flag 223t to on. By setting the normal pattern performance possible flag 223t to on in this process, it is possible to determine that one of the conditions for switching the third pattern fluctuation performance corresponding to the lottery result of the special pattern being executed to the third pattern fluctuation performance (charge performance) corresponding to the lottery result of the normal pattern (normal pattern) is established. Although omitted in FIG. 259, when a fluctuation pattern command for a normal pattern is received, a fluctuation pattern for a normal pattern is extracted to be displayed in the normal pattern display area Dm2 of the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81.

Next, referring to FIG. 260, we will explain the winning information related process (S2209), which is one process within the command determination process (S2114: see FIG. 258) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113. FIG. 260 is a flowchart showing this winning information related process (S2209). This winning information related process (S2209) is executed within the command determination process (see FIG. 258) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113.

In the winning information processing (S2209), first, it is determined whether the received winning information command is a command indicating winning information of a special pattern (winning information command for a special pattern) (S2401), and if it is determined that it is a winning information command for a special pattern (S2401: Yes), the winning information contained in the received winning information command is read (S2402), and a reserved rank is selected based on the reserved rank selection table 222b using the winning/losing judgment result contained in the read winning information and the acquired value of the reserved rank counter 223p1 (S2403). Although detailed explanations are omitted, in this control example, when the processing of S2402 is executed, the value of the reserved rank counter 223p1 updated in the counter update processing (see S2113 in FIG. 257) executed in the main processing (see FIG. 257) of the voice lamp control device 113 is acquired. By configuring it in this way, various reserved ranks can be selected depending on the value of the reserved rank counter 223p1 at the time when it is determined that a winning information command has been received, so a variety of effects can be provided to the player.

Then, the reserved rank selected in the process of S2403 is stored in the reserved performance information storage area 223m in a location corresponding to the winning information command received this time (S2404). After that, the reserved mode selection process (S2405) and the treasure chest mode selection process (S2406) are executed. Here, the reserved mode selection process (S2405) executes a process for setting a look-ahead performance (reserved performance) that changes the display mode of the corresponding reserved pattern based on the winning information read this time, and a detailed explanation of this will be given later with reference to FIG. 261. Also, the treasure chest mode selection process (S2406) executes a process for setting a look-ahead performance (treasure chest performance) that changes the display mode of the treasure chest role 750 based on the winning information read this time, and a detailed explanation of this will be given later with reference to FIG. 262.

After completing the process of S2406, it is next determined whether the winning information read this time contains winning information (information indicating a big win, information indicating a small win) (S2407), and if it is determined that the winning information is included (S2407: Yes), the normal pattern performance prohibition flag 223u is set to ON (S2408), the received winning information is stored in the corresponding position of the winning information storage area 223f (S2409), and this process is terminated. In other words, in this control example, when there is information indicating a win (big win, small win) in the reserved special pattern stored, that is, when a winning game is about to be executed, the variable performance based on the lottery result of the special pattern is configured not to be switched to the variable performance based on the lottery result of the normal pattern. As a result, for example, when a notice performance (pre-reading performance) suggesting a big win of a special pattern is being executed, it is possible to suppress (prohibit) the execution of a variable performance based on the lottery result of the normal pattern. This makes it possible to prevent the execution of effects that are difficult for players to understand (effects that are executed based on different lottery results) and therefore enhance the effect of the effects. It is sufficient to prevent the execution of effects that are difficult for players to understand. For example, when a preview effect (pre-reading effect) is executed based on receiving a winning information command for a special symbol, the normal symbol effect prohibition flag 223u may be configured to be set to ON.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2401 that the winning information command received this time is for a normal pattern (normal figure) (S2401: No), the process skips the processes of S2402 to S2408 and ends this process. Although detailed explanations are omitted, in the winning information related process (S2209), when a winning information command for a normal figure is received, it is determined whether or not the received winning information command contains winning information, and if it does, whether or not it contains winning information for a long opening winning game, and further, the normal figure fluctuation time, and the result of this determination is stored in the normal figure area of the winning information storage area 223f.

This makes it possible to determine in advance how many seconds after a normal symbol hit the long opening hit game will be played, making it possible to play a performance (normal symbol pre-reading performance) that suggests the result of the normal symbol lottery across multiple normal symbol changes, just like with special symbols. It also makes it possible to determine whether a long opening hit game will be played during an ongoing special symbol change period, so for example, it is possible to interrupt a performance based on a normal symbol change during a missed special symbol change.

Therefore, in a pachinko machine 10 in which multiple different symbol drawings (special symbol drawing and normal symbol drawing) are performed in parallel, a variable effect (variable effect performed by the third symbol display device 81) can be performed based on the symbol change that results in a drawing that is advantageous to the player, thereby increasing the interest of the game. In addition, since it is possible to prevent the variable effect based on a drawing result (miss) that is disadvantageous to the player from being performed, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the player's motivation to play.

Next, referring to FIG. 261, the contents of the reserved mode selection process (S2405) executed in the winning information related process (see FIG. 260) will be explained. FIG. 261 is a flowchart showing the contents of the reserved mode selection process (S2405). In this reserved mode selection process (S2405), a process is executed to set a reserved effect, which is an effect that changes the display mode of the reserved pattern based on the winning information of the currently received special pattern.

When the reserved mode selection process (S2405) is executed, first, it is determined whether the reserved performance flag 223q is set to on (S2501). If it is determined that the reserved performance flag 223q is not set to on (S2501: No), that is, if it is determined that a reserved performance is not currently set (executed), it is possible to set a new reserved performance, so the process of S2502 to S2506 for setting the reserved performance is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2501 that the reserved performance flag 223q is set to on (S2501: Yes), it is not possible to set (execute) a new reserved performance, so the process of S2502 to S2506 described above is skipped and this process ends.

When the process of S2502 is executed, the hold rank stored in the hold performance information storage area 223m is read (S2502), and a hold mode is selected based on the hold mode selection table 222c using the hold rank read in the process of S2502 and the acquired value of the hold mode counter 223p2 (S2503).

Then, a display hold command corresponding to the selected hold mode is set (S2504), the selected hold mode is stored in the hold performance information storage area 223m (S2505), and if a hold mode that changes the display mode of the hold pattern is selected, the hold performance in progress flag 223q is set to ON (S2506), and this process is terminated.

As explained above, this control example is configured to execute a reserved effect that changes the display mode of the reserved pattern when winning information is acquired. In addition, by using the reserved effect in progress flag 223q, it is possible to prevent the reserved effect from being set multiple times.

In this control example, while a pending effect is being executed (set), a new pending effect is not executed (set) based on a newly received winning command, thereby preventing overlapping execution of pre-reading effects (pending effects) and the execution of effects that are difficult for the player to understand. However, without being limited to this, for example, it may be configured to execute overlapping pending effects up to a predetermined number of times (e.g., two).

In addition, in this control example, the process of selecting the reserved effect is always executed when the reserved effect in progress flag 223q is not set to on, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a predetermined lottery may be executed in the winning information related process (see S2209 in FIG. 260) executed when a winning command is received, and if the lottery result is a predetermined lottery result, the reserved mode selection process described above may be executed. By configuring the process of setting the reserved effect to be executed randomly in this way, it is possible to make it difficult to tell whether the reserved pattern for which the reserved effect was not executed is a reserved effect for which the reserved mode selection process was executed but the reserved mode selection process was not executed, or whether the reserved mode selection process was not executed. This makes it possible to make the player interested in the variable performance of the special pattern corresponding to the reserved pattern for which the reserved effect was not executed.

In addition, a determination means may be provided to determine whether a predetermined condition (for example, a condition that is met when the number of times the special pattern changes reaches 10 times, or a condition that is met when 10 minutes have passed) is met after a hold effect has been executed once, and a new hold mode selection process may not be executed until the determination means determines that the predetermined condition is met. This allows a period during which hold effects are not executed intentionally to be set.

In addition, in this control example, when a reserved performance that changes the display mode of the reserved pattern is selected in the reserved mode selection process (when anything other than "-" is selected in the reserved mode selection table 222c (see FIG. 228)), the reserved performance in progress flag 223q is set to ON. However, for example, the reserved performance in progress flag 223q may also be set to ON when the display mode of the reserved pattern is not changed in the reserved mode selection process. In this case, it is advisable to set a period during which the reserved performance is not intentionally executed as described above. By configuring in this way, it becomes possible to set the period during which the display mode of the reserved pattern is not changed more randomly, thereby enhancing the performance effect.

Next, referring to FIG. 262, the contents of the reserved mode selection process (S2405) executed in the winning information related process (see FIG. 260) will be explained. FIG. 262 is a flowchart showing the contents of the treasure chest mode selection process (S2406). In this treasure chest mode selection process (S2406), processing is executed to set (execute) the treasure chest effect (see FIG. 210(b)), which is an effect that changes the display mode of the treasure chest device 750 based on the winning information received this time.

When the treasure chest mode selection process (S2406) is executed, first it is determined whether the treasure chest performance flag 223r is set to ON (S2601). If it is determined that the treasure chest performance flag 223r is not set to ON (S2601: No), i.e., if it is determined that a treasure chest performance is not set (executed), it is possible to set a new treasure chest performance, so the process of S2602 to S2606 for setting a treasure chest performance is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2601 that the treasure chest performance flag 223r is set to ON (S2601: Yes), it is not possible to set (execute) a new treasure chest performance, so the process of S2602 to S2606 described above is skipped and this process ends.

When the process of S2602 is executed, the winning/losing determination result is read from the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223f (S2602), and then information indicating whether the reserved mode has been changed (information indicating whether the reserved pattern is one for which a reserved performance is to be executed) is read from the information stored in the reserved performance information storage area 223m (S2603). Then, using the winning/losing determination result read in the process of S2602, the information indicating whether the reserved mode has been changed read in the process of S2603, and the acquired value of the treasure chest mode counter 223p3, a treasure chest mode is selected based on the treasure chest mode selection table 222d (S2604).

Then, a treasure chest command for the lamp corresponding to the selected treasure chest mode is set (S2605), the selected treasure chest mode is stored in the corresponding location in the pending performance information storage area 223m (S2606), and if a treasure chest mode that changes the display mode of the treasure chest device 750 is selected, the treasure chest performance flag 223r is set to ON (S2607), and this process is terminated.

The display mode of the treasure chest role 750 is variably controlled based on the treasure chest command for lamp set by the process of S2605. The voice lamp control device 113 may have a means for variably controlling the display mode of the treasure chest role 750, or a control device other than the voice lamp control device 113 may be used. In addition, in this control example, the treasure chest role selection process (see S2406 in FIG. 262) is configured to select the display mode of the treasure chest role 750 and execute a process for changing the display mode of the treasure chest role 750 to the selected display mode, but this is not limited to this. In the treasure chest role selection process (see S2406 in FIG. 262), only the display mode of the treasure chest role 750 after the change is selected, and when a specific variable display condition is established, the display mode of the treasure chest role 750 may be changed to the selected display mode. This makes it difficult for the player to know which reserved pattern the display mode of the treasure chest role 750 after the change corresponds to, and the player can have a sense of expectation for all reserved patterns.

As explained above, in this control example, the treasure chest mode selection process (see S2406 in FIG. 262) is executed in the winning information related process (see S2209 in FIG. 260) in the same manner as the reserved mode selection process (see S2405 in FIG. 261). When selecting a treasure chest mode in which the display mode of the treasure chest device 750 is changed in this treasure chest mode selection process, the treasure chest mode is selected based on the determination result of whether the display mode of the target reserved pattern is changed or not. Furthermore, in one winning information related process (S2209 in FIG. 260), the reserved mode selection process (S2405 in FIG. 261) is executed, and then the treasure chest mode setting process (S2406 in FIG. 262) is executed. This ensures that the appropriate performance can be set.

Next, the contents of the win-related processing (S2211 in FIG. 263) will be explained with reference to FIG. 263. FIG. 263 is a flowchart showing the contents of the win-related processing (S2211). This win-related processing (S2211) is executed by the command determination processing (see S2114 in FIG. 258) of the voice lamp control device 113, and is executed when a command related to a win (big win, small win) is received from the main control device 110.

In this control example, when the big win C is won by drawing a special pattern, or when the small win is won, a winning game (left winning game) is executed in which the third electric device 82a (see FIG. 207) provided on the left side area of the game board 13 is opened, and when the big win A, B, D, or E is won by drawing a special pattern, a winning game (right winning game) is executed in which the variable winning device 65 provided on the right side area of the game board 13 is opened. In the winning-related process (S2211 in FIG. 263), a process for setting a display command for displaying information related to the winning game on the third pattern display device 81, and a process for setting different winning effects depending on the type of winning game are executed.

When the hit-related process (S2211 in FIG. 263) is executed, first, it is determined whether the currently received command is a command related to a big win C or a small win, i.e., a command related to a left hit game (S2701). If it is determined that the currently received command is a command related to a big win C or a small win (S2701: Yes), the process of S2703 to S2709 is executed to set various display contents related to a left hit game. On the other hand, if it is determined that the currently received command is not a command related to a big win C or a small win, i.e., a command related to a right hit game (S2701: No), the process of right attacker big win related is executed to set various display contents related to a right hit game (S2702), and this process is terminated. The contents of the right attacker big win related process (S2702) will be described later with reference to FIG. 264, and first, the process of S2703 to S2709 for setting various display contents related to a left hit game will be explained.

When the process of S2703 is executed, it is determined whether the currently received command is a win start command indicating the start of a win (S2703), and if it is determined that it is a win start command (S2703: Yes), a roulette presentation (see FIG. 213) corresponding to the type of win is determined (S2704), a display command corresponding to the determined roulette presentation is set (S2705), and this process is terminated.

The roulette presentation described above with reference to FIG. 213 is a presentation that is executed for a predetermined period (5 seconds), and when a small win game is executed, it is executed using the small win game period (5 seconds), i.e., the opening period (2 seconds), round game period (1.5 seconds), and ending period (1.5 seconds) of the small win game. Also, when a big win (Big Win C) game is executed, it is executed using the 5 seconds from the start of the big win game, i.e., the opening period (2 seconds) and part of the round game period of the first round (3 seconds from the start of the round game).

In this control example, the same winning action is executed during the period when the roulette presentation is being performed, regardless of the result of the lottery for the special symbol. That is, the opening period of the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot C is set to 2 seconds, and as the first round of round play, the third electric device 82a is opened for 1.5 seconds after the round play starts, followed by a 3-second closing period (period during which the third electric device 82a is closed), and then the third electric device 82a is opened for 28.5 seconds.

By configuring it in this way, while the roulette effect is being executed (while a small win game or the first half of the jackpot game corresponding to jackpot C is being executed), it is difficult for the player to determine whether the currently executed winning game is a jackpot game or a small win game based on the content of the winning game being executed. Furthermore, as described above, a 1.5 second closure period is set after the execution period (5 seconds) of the roulette effect has elapsed for the first round of the jackpot game. This allows the third electric device 82a to not be opened from the time the result of the roulette effect is displayed until the player recognizes the result, thereby enhancing the effect of the performance.

In this control example, as shown in FIG. 213, the type of winning game being executed is notified to the player by the roulette effect, but in addition to such a roulette effect, a roulette effect (gasser roulette effect) that notifies the player of a winning type different from the type of winning game being executed may be executed. In this case, even if a big win game is actually being executed, it is preferable to configure the display result of the gasser roulette effect to display a small win game. This makes it possible to provide a surprising effect to the player, and improve the interest of the game. In addition, in this control example, the same winning action is executed during the period (5 seconds) during which the roulette effect is executed regardless of the lottery result of the special pattern, but the execution period of the roulette effect may be shorter than the period during which the same winning action is executed regardless of the lottery result of the special pattern. By configuring in this way, a player who does not know the result of the roulette effect will be slower in determining whether the current winning action is a big win game or a small win game than a player who knows the result of the roulette effect. This allows players who want to quickly determine the lottery result of the special symbol to focus on the roulette presentation. Note that the lottery result notification presentation (roulette presentation (see FIG. 213)) for notifying the lottery result of the special symbol executed in this control example is configured so that the lottery result of the current special symbol is difficult to predict until the presentation result is displayed, but this is not limited to this, and the lottery result notification presentation may be configured to change to a suggestive form that makes it easier to determine the lottery result as the lottery result notification presentation progresses. This allows players to focus on the presentation being executed, thereby enhancing the presentation effect.

Returning to FIG. 263 for further explanation, if it is determined in the process of S2703 that the currently received command is not a win start command (S2703: No), then it is determined whether the currently received command is a round number command (S2706). If it is determined that it is a round number command (S2706: Yes), a display round number command is set based on the round number indicated by the round number information included in the received round number command (S2707), and this process ends.

If it is determined in the process of S2706 that the currently received command is not a round number command (S2706: No), it is determined whether the currently received command is an ending command (S2708), and if it is determined that it is an ending command (S2708: Yes), an ending command for display is set (S2709) and this process ends. Also, if it is determined in the process of S2708 that an ending command has not been received (S2708: No), this process ends as it is.

Next, the contents of the right attacker jackpot related process (S2702) that is executed when it is determined in the jackpot related process (see S2701 in FIG. 263) that the currently received jackpot related command is a command related to jackpots A, B, D, or E (S2701 in FIG. 263: No) will be explained with reference to FIG. 264. FIG. 264 is a flowchart showing the contents of the right attacker jackpot related process (S2702).

In this control example, when a jackpot game is executed that opens the variable winning device 65 provided in the special winning device 550 in the right area of the game board 13, a pseudo jackpot presentation using the pseudo attacker 165 is executed (see FIG. 219). Then, in the right attacker jackpot related process (S2702), the necessary process is executed to make the presentation content of the pseudo jackpot presentation using the pseudo attacker 165 correspond to the jackpot game (right jackpot game) that is actually executed.

When the Right Attacker jackpot related process (S2702) is executed, it is first determined whether the currently received command is a jackpot start command (S2801). If it is determined to be a jackpot start command (S2801: Yes), the jackpot start command for display is set (S2802) and this process is terminated.

In the process of S2801, if it is determined that the jackpot start command has not been received (S2801: No), it is next determined whether the currently received command is a round number command (S2803). If it is determined that it is a round number command (S2803: Yes), a display round number command is set based on the round number (S2804), and as an opening operation for opening the pseudo attacker 165, an opening operation is set to open the pseudo attacker 165 0.5 seconds after the round number command is received (S2805), and this process ends. When the opening operation is set in the process of S2805, a solenoid (not shown) for operating the pseudo attacker 165 is set to on in the operation control process (see S2112) executed in the main process (see FIG. 257) of the sound lamp control device 113, and the pseudo attacker 165 is changed from a closed state in which it is difficult for the ball to enter to an open state in which it is easy for the ball to enter.

In this way, by configuring the pseudo-attacker 165 to open when the round number command is received from the main control device 110 to indicate that a new round of play is about to begin, the actual jackpot game content and the pseudo-jackpot presentation using the pseudo-attacker 165 can be made similar, so that the pseudo-jackpot presentation can be executed without giving the player a sense of incongruity. Also, by delaying the timing of opening the pseudo-attacker 165 by 0.5 seconds (the time it takes for a ball that has entered the specific winning hole 65a to reach the pseudo-attacker 165) relative to the timing of opening the specific winning hole 65a (the timing of receiving the round number command), it is possible to enter (score) the pseudo-attacker 165 without giving the player a sense of incongruity. In addition, the period by which the opening timing of the pseudo attacker 165 is delayed relative to the opening timing of the actual attacker (specific winning port 65a) is not limited to the period (0.5 seconds) set in this control example, but may be delayed for a period longer than 0.5 seconds, or the delay period may be 0 seconds (so that the opening operations occur at the same timing).

If it is determined in the processing of S2803 that the round number command has not been received (S2803: No), then it is determined whether a close command has been received (S2806). If it is determined that a close command has been received (S2806: Yes), a closing operation for the pseudo attacker 165 is set to close the pseudo attacker 165 with a timing delayed by 0.5 seconds from the closing timing of the specific winning port 65a, as in the case of setting the opening operation (S2807), the information stored in the pseudo winning order memory area 223s is cleared (S2808), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2806 that a closing command has not been received (S2806: No), it is determined whether an ending command has been received (S2809), and if it is determined that an ending command has been received (S2809: Yes), an ending command for display is set (S2810) and this processing ends. Also, if it is determined in the processing of S2809 that an ending command has not been received (S2809: No), it is next determined whether a winning-related command has been received (S2811).

The winning-related commands here refer to various commands that are output when the ball enters a winning port where the ball can enter if the player plays with a right-hand hit during a jackpot game, and specifically refer to a specific winning command to indicate that the ball has entered a specific winning port 65a, a specific general winning command to indicate that the ball has entered a specific general winning port 163, and a specific out-entry command to indicate that the ball has entered a specific out-entry port 166.

In this control example, the main control device 110 is configured to determine whether or not a ball has entered both a winning hole that awards a prize ball when a ball enters and an entry hole (out hole) that does not award a prize ball; however, this is not limited to this, and for example, a means for determining that a ball has entered a specific out hole 166 may be provided on the voice lamp control device 113 side.

In other words, in the case of a winning port that must award a prize ball when a ball enters (enters), the main control unit 110 has a configuration for determining whether a ball has entered in order to execute the process for awarding the prize ball, and so this configuration can be reused. On the other hand, since there is no particular process that the main control unit 110 must execute when a ball enters a specific outlet 166, the configuration for determining that a ball has entered the specific outlet 166 may be provided on the audio lamp control unit 113 side. By configuring in this way, the load on the control process of the main control unit 110 can be reduced.

If it is determined in the process of S2811 that a winning-related command has been received (S2811: Yes), a pseudo-attacker effect process is executed (S2812), and the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2811 that a winning-related command has not been received (S2811: No), the process ends.

Next, the contents of the pseudo-attacker effect processing (S2812) will be explained with reference to FIG. 265. FIG. 265 is a flowchart showing the contents of the pseudo-attacker effect processing (S2812). In this pseudo-attacker effect processing (S2812), processing is performed to set various effects that are executed during the pseudo-jackpot effect that opens the pseudo-attacker 165.

When the pseudo attacker effect process (S2812) is executed, it is first determined whether the command received this time is a specific winning command, i.e., whether a command indicating that a ball has entered the specific winning port 65a (see FIG. 208) of the variable winning device 65 has been received (S2901). If it is determined that a specific winning command has been received (S2901: Yes), the pseudo winning effect is set after 0.5 seconds (S2902).

When the pseudo winning performance is set by this process, a winning sound is output from the audio output device 226 based on the setting information, and winning information 831 is displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 to indicate the number of winning balls awarded based on the ball's entry into the specific winning port 65a. In addition, various performance devices provided in the pachinko machine 10 are made to execute a performance to indicate that the ball has entered the variable winning device 65. In other words, by executing the pseudo winning performance with a delay of 0.5 seconds, which is the period required for the ball that entered the specific winning port 65a to flow down the specific ball sending section 690c and enter (reach) the pseudo attacker 165 from the timing of the ball's entry into the specific winning port 65a (see FIG. 208), the player can be made to believe that the notification (performance) to indicate that the ball has entered the variable winning device 65a is a notification (performance) executed based on the ball's entry into the pseudo attacker 165. Therefore, it is possible to execute a jackpot game with the pseudo attacker 165 as a real attacker (a winning device that is opened for a jackpot game) without giving the player any sense of incongruity. Furthermore, since the ball that wins in the variable winning device 65 flows down a specific flow path (specific ball sending section 690c) to reach the pseudo attacker 165, it is possible to predetermine the delay time to be set when executing the pseudo winning performance. Therefore, there is no need to provide a detection means (such as a proximity switch) on the pseudo attacker 165 side to detect the ball entering, which reduces component costs.

After the process of S2902 is completed, the timing at which the currently set pseudo winning performance will be executed is stored in the pseudo winning order storage area 223s (S2903). To explain the process of S2903 in detail, the pseudo winning order storage area 223s is a storage area for storing the timing at which the pseudo winning performance will be executed, i.e., the timing at which the ball will enter (reach) the pseudo attacker 165, in chronological order. This pseudo winning order storage area 223s has an area capable of storing 20 pieces of timing information corresponding to the order in which the pseudo winning performance will be executed, and each time the timing at which the pseudo winning performance will be executed is set, the timing information is stored in each area in the order in which the pseudo winning performance will be executed (pseudo winning order).

In this control example, the special winning device 550 is configured so that the distance (ball flow distance) from each winning port (ball entry port) to the pseudo attacker 165 is different, so the order in which the balls enter each winning port (ball entry port) may differ from the order in which the balls reach (win) the pseudo attacker 165. For example, if a ball enters the specific winning port 65a 0.2 seconds after a ball enters the specific general winning port 163, the winning ball from the specific winning port 65a that entered later will reach the pseudo attacker 165 first.

The pseudo winning order storage area 223s is configured to easily shift the information stored in each area so that later-set timing information can be stored to interrupt the order of multiple timing information already stored. Furthermore, the upper limit (20) of timing information stored in the pseudo winning order storage area 223s is configured to be greater than the number of winnings (10) that is the closing condition for the round game executed during the jackpot game, and is configured to distinguish between timing information (normal timing information) stored within the number of winnings (10) that is the closing condition for the round game and timing information (over timing information) stored outside the number of winnings (10) that is the closing condition for the round game.

This allows the timing information set corresponding to the ball that wins (enters) the specific general winning port 163 or the specific out port 166 during a jackpot game to be reliably stored, in addition to the timing information set corresponding to the ball that wins (enters) the specific winning port 65a of the variable winning device 65.

After completing the process of S2903, next, based on the information stored in the pseudo winning order storage area 223s, an over pseudo winning effect is set for the timing information stored in the area from 10 onwards in the winning order of the pseudo attacker 165, i.e., the over timing information (S2904), and this process ends.

The pseudo over winning effects set in the processing of S2904 include, for example, varying the sound of the winning sound output from the audio output device 226, displaying a display mode indicating that an over winning has occurred on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81, and executing an effect to indicate that an over winning has occurred on various performance devices provided in the pachinko machine 10.

If it is determined in the process of S2901 that the currently received command is not a specific winning command (S2901: No), then it is determined whether the received command is a specific general winning command (S2905). If it is determined that it is a specific general winning command (S2905: Yes), a pseudo winning effect is set after 1.5 seconds (S2906), the processes of S2903 and S2904 described above are executed, and this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2905 that the received command is not a specific general winning command (S2905: No), it is then determined whether the received command is a specific out-going command (S2907), and if it is determined that it is a specific out-going command (S2907: Yes), a pseudo-winning effect is set after one second (S2908), the processes of S2903 and S2904 described above are executed, and this process ends. If it is determined in the process of S2907 that a specific out-going command has not been received (S2907: No), this process ends as it is.

In this control example, prize balls are awarded when a ball enters the specific winning hole 65a and when a ball enters the specific general winning hole 163, and prize balls are not awarded when a ball enters the specific out hole 166. Therefore, in the pseudo winning performance (S2902, S2906 in FIG. 265) set based on a ball entering the specific winning hole 65a and the specific general winning hole 163, the winning information 831 indicating the number of winning balls is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 (see FIG. 219), and in the pseudo winning performance (S2908 in FIG. 265) set based on a ball entering the specific out hole 166, the winning information 831 indicating the number of winning balls is not displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to prevent a large error from occurring between the display mode of the winning information 831 displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 during the pseudo jackpot performance using the pseudo attacker 165 and the number of winning balls actually paid out to the player. Also, since many balls enter the pseudo attacker 165 during the pseudo jackpot performance, the display mode of the winning information 831 can be updated without causing a sense of incongruity to the player without executing a process to update the display mode of the winning information 831 for each ball that enters the pseudo attacker 165.

In addition, in this control example, when updating the display mode of the acquisition information 831, the value displayed in the acquisition information 831 is updated in smallest units (for example, "1" for a numerical value) until it reaches a value corresponding to the set display mode. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to make it difficult to tell which winning ball the display mode of the acquisition information 831 is based on, and therefore it is possible to provide the player with a less awkward presentation.

As described above, in this control example, as a pseudo-jackpot presentation, the display mode of the winning information 831 is updated based on a ball entering a winning slot where a winning ball is generated, but this is not limited to this. For example, a storage means for storing the number of prize balls won during a jackpot game, an update means for executing an update process of the winning information 831 displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 based on the number of prize balls stored in the storage means, and a discrimination means for discriminating the number of prize balls stored in the storage means that have not been processed by the update means (number of unreported prize balls), and if the number of unreported prize balls is a predetermined number (e.g., 10 balls) or more, the update process may be periodically executed by the update means.

Furthermore, the pseudo attacker 165 may be provided with a detection means for detecting that a ball has entered the game, and when the detection means detects a ball, the update means may be configured to execute the update process based on the number of winning balls stored in the storage means described above, or the update process may be executed based on the detection that a ball has entered each winning port of the special winning device 550.

Next, the contents of the stop process (S2213) will be described with reference to FIG. 266. FIG. 266 is a flowchart showing the contents of the stop process (S2213). In this stop process (S2213), processing is executed to set the display mode of the third pattern that is stopped and displayed on the third pattern display device 81 according to the timing of the special pattern fluctuation stop.

When this stop process (S2213) is executed, first it is determined whether the special pattern change (the special pattern change currently being executed) corresponding to this stop command is a special pattern winning change (big win change, small win change) (S2951). If it is determined that it is not a special pattern winning change (S2951: No), it is then determined whether the normal pattern performance flag 223v is set to on (S2952). If it is determined that the normal pattern performance flag 223v is set to on (S2952: Yes), it is then determined whether the continuation flag 223x is set to on (S2953).

In other words, in the above-mentioned processing of S2951 to S2953, a process is executed to determine whether a normal pattern effect (a variable effect (charge effect) executed in accordance with the normal pattern stop timing) is to be executed across the current special pattern stop timing. In the processing of S2953, if it is determined that the continuation flag 223x is set to on (S2953: Yes), that is, if the normal pattern effect continues to be executed even after the special pattern stop, a display stop command showing the reduced third pattern is set (S2954), a stop display of the corresponding third pattern is set (S2955), and the process proceeds to S2957.

In this way, by configuring the reduced third symbol to be displayed when the normal symbol effect continues to be executed even after the special symbol fluctuation has stopped, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the timing when the special symbol fluctuation will stop, and therefore it is possible to make it difficult for the player to distinguish whether the charge effect being executed (see Figure 212) is being executed based on the lottery of a special symbol or a normal symbol, thereby enhancing the effect of the presentation.

On the other hand, if the process of S2951 determines that the special symbol has changed (S2951: Yes), or if the process of S2952 determines that the regular symbol display flag 223v is not set to on (is set to off), (S2952: No), then the charge display was not executed during the ongoing special symbol change, and the process proceeds to S2955 without setting the reduced third symbol.

In addition, if it is determined in the processing of S2953 that the continuation flag 223x is not set to ON (S2953: No), that is, if the normal symbol performance is completed during the current special symbol fluctuation, the normal third symbol only needs to be stopped and displayed, so the normal symbol performance in progress flag 223v is set to OFF (S2956) and the processing proceeds to S2955.

In the processing of S2957, it is determined whether the current special pattern change is a change that is the target of a pending performance (see FIG. 210(a)) or a treasure chest performance (see FIG. 210(b)). Here, the determination is made based on the information stored in the pending performance information storage area 223m. Then, if it is determined that it is a target change (S2957: Yes), the pending performance flag 223q and the treasure chest performance flag 223r are set to off (S2958), and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2957 that it is not a target change (S2957: No), this processing is terminated as it is. In this control example, when the special pattern change that is the target of the stop process (see S2213 in FIG. 266) is a pending effect, or a target change of a look-ahead effect (pre-notice effect) such as a treasure chest effect (S2957: Yes), the pending effect in progress flag 223q and the treasure chest effect in progress flag 223r are set to off, and a new look-ahead effect (pre-notice effect) can be set; however, without being limited to this, the pending effect in progress flag 223q and the treasure chest effect in progress flag 223r may be configured not to be set to off until a predetermined period of time (for example, the period until five special pattern changes are executed, or the period until a specific change pattern (a change pattern that results in a super reach) is executed) has elapsed even after the target change of the look-ahead effect (pre-notice effect) has ended (the target special pattern change has stopped). In this way, by intentionally setting a period in which the next look-ahead performance (advance notice performance) is not set after one look-ahead performance (advance notice performance) has ended, it is possible to suppress the look-ahead performance (advance notice performance) from being executed too frequently, and to make the player feel a sense of expectation for a jackpot even for special pattern variations in which a look-ahead performance (advance notice performance) is not executed. In addition, instead of a period in which the next look-ahead performance (advance notice performance) is not set after one look-ahead performance (advance notice performance) has ended, a period in which it is difficult to set may be set. In this case, during the period in which it is difficult to set the look-ahead performance (advance notice performance), it is preferable to configure it so that the look-ahead performance (advance notice performance) is more likely to be set when the lottery result of the special pattern is a jackpot, compared to other periods. This allows the player to pay attention not only to the performance mode of the look-ahead performance (advance notice performance) but also to the timing of its execution, thereby enhancing the performance effect.

Next, referring to FIG. 267, the variable display setting process (S2115) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 267 is a flowchart showing this variable display setting process (S2115). This variable display setting process (S2115) is executed within the main process (see FIG. 257) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and generates and sets a display variable pattern command based on the variable pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to execute a variable performance in the third pattern display device 81.

In the variation display setting process (S2115: FIG. 267), first, it is determined whether the variation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is on or not (S3001). Then, if it is determined that the variation start flag 223d is not on (i.e., it is off) (S3001: No), since no variation pattern command has been received from the main control device 110, the process proceeds to S3006. On the other hand, if it is determined that the variation start flag 223d is on (S3001: Yes), the variation start flag 223d is turned off (S3002), and the variation pattern type in the variation performance extracted from the variation pattern command for display is obtained from the RAM 223 (S3003).

Next, a variable performance setting process is executed (S3004), and a display variable pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated based on the acquired variable pattern type, and the command is set for transmission to the display control device 114 (S3005). The content of the variable performance setting process executed in the process of S3004 will be described later with reference to FIG. 268.

When the display control device 114 receives this display variation pattern command, it starts display control of the variation presentation so that the third pattern is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command.

Next, although not shown in the figure, the data stored in the winning information storage area 223f is shifted. In this process, the data stored in the first to fourth areas of the winning information storage area 223f is shifted in order to the execution area. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the following order: first area → execution area, second area → first area, third area → second area, fourth area → third area. After shifting the data, the process proceeds to S3006.

In the process of S3006, it is determined whether the stop type selection flag 223e provided in the RAM 223 is on or not (S3006). Then, if it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is not on (i.e., it is off) (S3006: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is on (S3006: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e is turned off (S3007), and the stop type in the variable performance extracted from the stop type command is obtained from the RAM 223 (S3008). Next, the stop type specified by the stop type command from the main control device 110 is set as it is as the stop type of the variable performance in the third pattern display device 81 (S3009), and the process proceeds to S3010.

In the process of S3010, a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated based on the set stop type, and the command is set for transmission to the display control device 114 (S3010). By receiving this display stop type command, the display control device 114 controls the stop display of the variable performance so that the stop pattern corresponding to the stop type indicated by the display stop type command is stopped and displayed on the third pattern display device 81. After the process of S3010 is executed, this process is terminated.

Next, referring to FIG. 268, the contents of the variable performance setting process (S3004), which is one process within the variable display setting process (see FIG. 267) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, will be explained. FIG. 268 is a flowchart showing the contents of the variable performance setting process (S3004). In this variable performance setting process (S3004), processing is executed to set the detailed performance mode (preview content) of the variable performance of the third pattern corresponding to the variation of the special pattern.

When the variable effect setting process (S3004) is executed, first, it is determined whether the current game state is a high probability state (S3101). Here, it is determined whether the current game state is a high probability state based on the information set in the state setting area 223g. In the process of S3101, if it is determined that the current state is a high probability state (S3101: Yes), a pattern command for display during the high probability state is set based on the extracted variable pattern (S3102), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S3101 that the current state is not a special chance state (S3101: No), then it is determined whether the normal symbol performance flag 223v is set to ON (S3103). If it is determined that it is set to ON, that is, if a normal symbol performance (a charge performance based on the result of the normal symbol lottery) is executed in the performance corresponding to the previous special symbol performance, and that normal symbol performance is executed across the current special symbol performance (S3103: Yes), the charge performance setting process is executed (S3104), and this process is terminated.

The details of this charge effect setting process (S3104) will be described later with reference to FIG. 270, but the charge effect to be continuously executed and the presentation mode of the variation effect after the charge effect ends are set based on the remaining period of the normal symbol effect and the variation time (variation pattern) of the current special symbol variation.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S3103 that the normal display flag 223v is not set to on (S3103: No), it is determined whether the currently acquired variation pattern includes an operation display (S3105), and if it is determined that an operation display exists (S3105: Yes), an operation display setting process is executed (S3106), and this process is terminated. The details of the operation display setting process (S3106) will be described later with reference to FIG. 269.

In the process of S3105, if it is determined that the currently acquired fluctuation pattern does not include an operation effect (S3105: No), then it is determined whether the currently acquired fluctuation pattern includes a charge effect (a charge effect executed based on a special pattern lottery) (S3107), and if it is determined that a charge effect is included (S3107: Yes), the charge effect in progress flag 223y is set to ON (S3108), and this process is terminated. By setting the charge effect in progress flag 223y to ON here, it becomes possible to determine that it is the timing to execute a regular pattern effect.

If it is determined in the process of S3107 that the currently acquired variation pattern does not include a charge effect (S3107: No), the reserved mode selection process is executed (S3109), the treasure chest mode selection process is executed (S3110), and this process is terminated. Note that the reserved mode selection process (S3109) executes the same process as the reserved mode selection process (S2405) described above, and the treasure chest mode selection process (S3110) executes the same process as the treasure chest mode selection process (S2406) described above, so detailed explanations are omitted.

In this way, in this control example, the system is configured to execute the look-ahead performance (reserved performance, treasure chest performance) at the timing when the winning command for the special pattern is received and when the special pattern starts to change, i.e., when the number of reserved patterns corresponding to the special pattern is changed. By configuring it in this way, the look-ahead performance can be executed at various times, providing the player with a game that they will never tire of.

Next, referring to FIG. 269, the contents of the operation performance setting process (S3106) executed in the variable performance setting process (see S3004 in FIG. 268) will be explained. FIG. 269 is a flowchart showing the contents of the operation performance setting process (S3106). In this operation performance setting process (S3106), preparation processing is executed according to the operation performance type included in the current variable pattern.

When the operation performance setting process (S3106) is executed, first it is determined whether the current operation performance is the first operation performance (button fusion performance: see FIG. 214) (S3201), and if it is determined to be the first operation performance (S3201: Yes), an operation command corresponding to the first operation performance is set (S3202), the first operation performance type is stored in the operation performance type storage area (S3203), the operation performance flag is set to on (S3204), and this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S3201 that the operation is not the first operation presentation (S3201: No), it is determined whether it is the second operation presentation (automatic press presentation: see FIG. 217) (S3205), and if it is determined that it is the second operation presentation (S3205: Yes), a presentation command corresponding to the second operation presentation is set (S3206), the second operation presentation means is stored in the operation presentation type storage area (S3207), and processing proceeds to S3204. Also, if it is determined in the processing of S3205 that the operation is not the second operation presentation (S3205: No), a presentation command corresponding to another operation presentation is set (S3208), the processing of S3204 described above is executed, and this processing ends.

In this control example, the first operation effect (button fusion effect: see FIG. 214) is configured to be set more frequently than the second operation effect (automatic press effect: see FIG. 217).The effects are then determined in descending order of frequency of setting.By configuring in this way, the processing speed can be increased.

Next, referring to FIG. 270, the contents of the charge presentation setting process (S3104) executed in the variable presentation setting process (see FIG. 268) will be explained. FIG. 270 is a flowchart showing the contents of the charge presentation setting process (S3104). When the charge presentation setting process (S3104) is executed, it is first determined whether the lottery result for the corresponding special symbol is a win (big win, small win) (S3221), and if it is determined to be a win (S3221: No), the regular symbol presentation possible flag 223t is set to off (S3222), and this process ends.

By configuring in this way, the charge effect (normal effect) showing that the lottery result of the normal pattern is a win (normal win) is set with a lower priority than the variable effect for showing the lottery result of the special pattern that may be more advantageous to the player than the normal win. This makes it possible to prevent the execution of the effect that the player is most interested in (for example, the effect for showing that a jackpot has been won) from being hindered by other effects. In addition, by setting the normal effect possible flag 223t to off in the processing of S3222, the performance mode of the charge effect executed across the previous special pattern change is executed by shifting the charge pattern and stopping it one second after the current special pattern change is executed, regardless of the timing of the stop of the normal pattern change. After that, the variable effect (variable effect based on the lottery result of the special pattern) set in response to the current special pattern change is configured to be executed. As a result, when the charge effect executed based on the lottery result of the normal pattern is executed next special pattern change across from the previous special pattern change, and the next special pattern change is a special pattern change corresponding to a jackpot win, the charge effect executed in advance (the charge effect executed based on the lottery result of the normal pattern) immediately ends after switching to the false charge effect, so that a change effect indicating that the lottery result of the special pattern is a jackpot can be provided to the player in an easy-to-understand manner. Also, by switching to the false charge effect, during the jackpot win of the special pattern, a notification effect is not executed that notifies the player of a win of the normal pattern, which has a smaller bonus (e.g., prize balls) than the jackpot win of the special pattern, so that an easy-to-understand effect can be executed.

If it is determined in the process of S3221 that the lottery result is not a win (a miss) (S3221: No), a process is executed to determine the special pattern change time extracted from the current special pattern change pattern and the remaining period of the regular pattern change at the current time (S3223), and based on the determination result of S3223, it is determined whether the regular pattern change time is longer (S3224). If it is determined in the process of S3224 that the regular pattern change time is shorter, that is, the regular pattern change that is the target of the regular pattern performance will end during the current special pattern change period (S3224: No), it is next determined whether the difference is 3 seconds or more (S3225), and if it is determined that it is 3 seconds or more (S3225: Yes), a change pattern (change performance) that temporarily stops the charge pattern (specific pattern) Z4 in accordance with the timing of the end of the regular pattern change is determined (S3226).

Then, a variation pattern using the remaining period after the specific symbol Z4 is temporarily stopped is determined (S3227), the normal symbol performance flag 223v is set to ON (S3228), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3225 that the difference between the stop timing of the normal symbol and the stop timing of the special symbol is less than 3 seconds (S3225: No), a variation pattern is determined in which the charge symbol (specific symbol) Z4 is temporarily stopped from the normal symbol variation end timing to the special symbol variation end timing, and the process proceeds to S3228. Here, the variation pattern determined in the process of S3227 may be variably set based on the length of the remaining period (the period from the end of the normal pattern variation to the end of the special pattern variation) or the result of the lottery for the special pattern. Specifically, it is determined whether the remaining period is a specific period longer than 3 seconds (for example, 10 seconds), and if the remaining period is equal to or longer than the specific period, a variation pattern that causes the temporarily stopped third pattern to vary again is set as a variation pattern corresponding to the remaining period. If the remaining period is longer than 3 seconds and shorter than the specific period, a roulette performance (Fig. 213) is executed after the charge performance ends, and a variation pattern that notifies the result of the lottery for the special pattern is set in the roulette performance. In addition, if the lottery result for the special pattern is a miss, it is preferable to configure it so that the above-mentioned variation pattern is more difficult to set than if the lottery result for the special pattern is a win, and it is preferable to configure it so that a variation pattern that continues to temporarily stop the third pattern during the remaining period is more easily set. Also, in this control example, the player is not notified of the length of the remaining period (the period from when the regular pattern variation ends until when the special pattern variation ends), but the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 may be configured to display a suggestion that allows the player to predict the length of this remaining period.

In other words, in this control example, when setting a variation effect corresponding to a new special symbol change, it is determined whether an effect (regular symbol effect) for showing the lottery result of the ongoing regular symbol change is being executed, and if the regular symbol effect is continuing to be executed, a variation effect corresponding to that regular symbol effect is executed. This makes it easy to set a variation effect (regular symbol effect) that corresponds to a regular symbol change that is executed across multiple special symbol changes.

In addition, the display mode of the identification information (charge pattern) for showing the lottery result of the normal symbol effect and the identification information (charge pattern) for showing the lottery result of the special symbol effect are configured to be the same (including slight differences), and furthermore, the normal symbol effect is executed using part of the variable effect of the special symbol (for example, the charge effect), so it is possible to make it difficult for the player to tell whether the performance result of the charge effect (charge pattern display) displays the lottery result of the special symbol or the lottery result of the normal symbol.

Furthermore, in this control example, if the time from when the normal symbol stops changing to when the special symbol stops changing is longer than a predetermined period (e.g., 3 seconds), a special symbol change performance is executed to show the lottery result for this special symbol after the normal symbol performance ends. This ensures that the lottery result is notified to the player.

On the other hand, in this control example, if the time from the normal symbol fluctuation stop timing to the special symbol fluctuation stop timing is shorter than a predetermined period (e.g., 3 seconds), even if the special symbol fluctuation performance is executed for a short period of time, it will only result in a confusing fluctuation performance. Therefore, the special symbol fluctuation performance is not executed, and the symbol showing the lottery result of the normal symbol is displayed as a long-term stop display (temporary stop display). Returning to the processing of FIG. 270, the explanation will continue. In the processing of S3224, if it is determined that the normal symbol fluctuation time is longer (S3224: Yes), a fluctuation pattern that continues the charge performance of this special symbol is determined (S3230), the continuation flag 223x is set to ON (S3231), and this processing ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 271, the frame button input monitoring and performance processing (S2107), which is one process within the main processing (see FIG. 257) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 271 is a flowchart showing this frame button input monitoring and performance processing (S2107). In the frame button input monitoring and performance processing (S2107), the pressing action of the frame button 22 is determined, and based on the pressing, the execution of a preview performance or the like is set.

In the frame button input monitoring and performance process (S2107: see FIG. 271), it is first determined whether the frame button 22 has been operated (S3301), and if it is determined that the frame button 22 has not been operated (S3301: No), this process ends as is. If it is determined that the frame button 22 has been operated (S3301: Yes), it is determined whether or not the current operation is within a valid operation period (S3302). In this S3302 process, if a type of operation performance is set in the operation performance setting process (S3106 in FIG. 269), the valid operation period corresponding to that type is set in the valid operation timer 223n, and it is determined whether or not the value of the valid operation timer 223n indicates the valid operation period.

If it is determined in the processing of S3302 that the operation is within the valid period (S3302: Yes), it is then determined whether the pressed flag 223k is set to on (S3303). If it is determined that the pressed flag 223k is not set to on (S3303: No), it is determined whether the operation presentation flag 223h is on (S3304). If it is determined that the operation presentation flag 223h is set to on (S3304: Yes), the pressed flag 223k is set to on and this processing ends.

In other words, in this control example, when the first operation performance or the second operation performance is set, if the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) during the operation valid period, the pressed flag 223k is set to on, and a performance mode is set according to the progress of the first operation performance or the second operation performance according to the setting status of the pressed flag 223k. This makes it possible to execute a performance based on the operation immediately after operating the frame button 22, or execute a performance based on the operation a predetermined period of time after operating the frame button 22, thereby increasing the variety of operation performances.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3304 that the operation performance flag 223h is not set to on (S3304: No), the operation mode corresponding to the set operation valid period is determined (S3306), a display command corresponding to the determined operation mode is set (S3307), and this process ends. Also, if it is determined in the process of S3302 that the operation valid period is not in progress (S3302: No), or if it is determined in the process of S3303 that the pressed flag 223k is on (S3303: Yes), this process ends as is.

In this control example, a variable condition for varying the presentation mode of the operation presentation is established based on operating (pressing) the frame button 22 once, but the present invention is not limited to this. The variable condition may be established when the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) a predetermined number of times (e.g., 20 times) within the effective operation period, or an operation means having multiple operation methods may be provided, and the variable condition may be established when the operation means is operated using a specific operation method.

Furthermore, in this control example, the operation of the operating means is indicated by setting one flag (pressed flag 223k) to on, but this is not limited thereto, and for example, it may be configured to indicate different operation results depending on the operating method for the operating means, and the presentation style of the operation presentation may be configured to be variable depending on the type of operation result.

In addition, in this control example, a display effect displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 is used as an example of an operation effect in which the presentation mode is changed based on the operation of the operation means, but this is not limited to this, and it may be configured to execute a presentation that moves a decorative movable device provided on the pachinko machine 10 based on the operation of the frame button 22 (operation means).

In this control example, when an operation presentation other than the first operation presentation or the second operation presentation is being executed, if the frame button 22 is operated, the operation mode corresponding to the set operation valid period is determined (see S3306 in FIG. 271), but other configurations may also be used.

Specifically, within the performance period of the display performance executed by the third pattern display device 81, a valid operation period during which the operation of the frame button 22 (operation means) can be effectively distinguished is set, and the value of the valid operation timer 223n is set to distinguish the set valid operation period. Then, a storage means is provided for storing the length of the set valid operation period, and a calculation means is provided for calculating the remaining period of the valid operation period based on the value of the valid operation timer 223n at the time the operation means is operated. Furthermore, it is preferable to configure the system to provide an operation mode selection table in which different operation modes are specified depending on the length of the remaining period calculated by the calculation means.

By configuring it in this way, different operation modes are selected depending on the timing at which the player operates the operation means (depending on the remaining time at the time the operation means is operated), making it possible to provide the player with a variety of different effects.

In addition, the system may be configured to include a valid operation period setting means for determining one valid operation period from among a plurality of valid operation periods and for setting the valid operation period within the display performance period, and a calculation means for calculating the progress rate (%) of the valid operation period based on the value of the valid operation timer 223n at the time the operation means is operated. By configuring in this way, different valid operation periods can be set for display performance of the same display mode, and further, the operation mode to be executed can be varied according to the progress rate of the valid operation period calculated based on the length of the set valid operation period and the timing of operating the operation means, that is, the value (%) calculated as a percentage of the period that has already elapsed (or the period that has not yet elapsed) with the entire length of the valid operation period being 100.

As a result, even if the operating means is operated at the same timing based on the display performance executed by the third pattern display device 81, different operation modes can be set, so a wider variety of performances can be provided to the player.

Furthermore, by setting the operation mode according to the percentage value calculated by the calculation means, rather than setting the operation mode according to the length of the remaining period (elapsed period) of the valid operation period, the range stipulated in the data table for selecting the operation mode can be limited to "1 to 100". In other words, when setting the operation mode according to the length of the remaining period (elapsed period) of the valid operation period, for example, in a configuration in which the length of the valid operation period can be set to 2 to 15 seconds, if the operation means is operated at 3 seconds when 6 seconds is set (remaining time 3 seconds) and if the operation means is operated at 7 seconds when 14 seconds is set (remaining time 7 seconds), the remaining time differs, and therefore a different operation mode will be set.

In addition, in the above examples, in both cases the operating means is operated at the midpoint of the valid operation period, and the operation difficulty level is the same. Therefore, when trying to set the same operation mode, it is necessary to define a data table so that the operation mode is selected based not only on the remaining time of the valid operation period, but also on the length of the set valid operation period and the remaining time of the valid operation period at the time the operating means is operated.

In this case, if the length of the operation valid period were set to be variable to multiple lengths, the capacity of the data table described above would increase significantly, resulting in a situation where data capacity would be strained. In contrast, by configuring the operation mode to be selected using a percentage value as described above, the same value can be used regardless of the length of the operation valid period, thereby reducing the data capacity of the data table for selecting the operation mode.

In addition, as a classification means for classifying the percentage value calculated by the calculation means into a plurality of ranges, for example, a first classification means for classifying into "1% to 50%" and "51% to 99%", and a second classification means for classifying into "1% to 10%", "11% to 20%", "21% to 30%, "41% to 50%, "51% to 60%, "61% to 70%, "71% to 80%, "81% to 90%, and "91% to 99%" may be provided, and further, a determination means may be provided for determining which classification means to use based on the establishment or non-establishment of a predetermined condition such as the result of a lottery for a special symbol, and the percentage value calculated by the calculation means may be classified by the classification means determined by the determination means, and an operation mode may be selected based on the classified information.

In addition, in this way, when using a configuration in which the operation mode to be executed thereafter is changed according to the operation timing of the operation means, for example, it is good to use an effect in which a movable role for effect provided in the pachinko machine 10 is moved as an operation effect executed by operating the operation means. This allows the operation effect to be executed without worrying about the period of the operation effect executed based on the set operation mode and the display effect period displayed on the display means. Furthermore, the third pattern display device 81 may be configured to suggest or notify a display mode indicating that the operation valid period has been set, a display mode for indicating the elapsed time of the operation valid period, a display mode for indicating the remaining time of the operation valid period, and a display mode for indicating the remaining ratio of the operation valid period (the ratio of the remaining period to the entire length of the operation valid period). In this case, for example, a special effect may be executed by operating the operation means at a timing when the display mode indicating the remaining ratio of the operation valid period becomes a predetermined display mode. In addition, when a display mode for indicating the elapsed time of the valid operation period or a display mode for indicating the remaining time of the valid operation period is displayed without notifying the player of the remaining percentage of the valid operation period (the percentage of the remaining period relative to the entire length of the valid operation period), a special effect may be executed when the remaining percentage of the valid operation period at the timing when the operating means is operated is a specific percentage (e.g., 50%). In this case, the timing at which the remaining percentage of the valid operation period becomes a specific percentage (e.g., 50%) can be varied depending on the length of the valid operation period that is set, making it difficult for the player to predict the timing at which the special effect will be executed.

Next, the contents of the LCD display execution management process (S2110) will be explained with reference to FIG. 272. FIG. 272 is a flowchart showing the contents of the LCD display execution management process (S2110). In the LCD display execution management process (S2110), a process is executed to update the display mode of the special symbol variable display being executed on the third pattern display device 81 based on a predetermined variable pattern, and a process is executed to replace the display mode of the special symbol variable display with a display based on a normal symbol lottery (normal symbol display).

When the LCD display execution management process (S2110) is executed, first, it is determined whether the charge display in progress flag 223y is set to ON (S3401), and if it is determined that it is set to ON (S3401: Yes), it is determined whether the currently executed special pattern change is a winning change (S3402). If it is determined that the winning change is not in progress in the process of S3402 (S3402: No), it is next determined whether the normal pattern display possible flag 223t is set to ON (S3403), and if it is determined that it is set to ON (S3403: Yes), it is determined whether the current time is within the period in which the display can be replaced (S3404).

In this control example, the presentation mode of the variable presentation set based on the special pattern lottery result can be replaced with a presentation mode based on the result of the normal pattern lottery only during the period when the special pattern variation is occurring at high speed (the period when none of the third patterns Z1 to Z3 are displayed as stopped), and only during the period when only the third pattern Z1, which is displayed as stopped first, is displayed as stopped. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to prevent the presentation mode of the variable presentation being replaced and a presentation that is difficult for the player to understand being executed after the special pattern variation presentation progresses and a state where the player can predict the special pattern lottery result (for example, a reach state) is reached.

If it is determined in the processing of S3404 that it is within the period in which the performance can be replaced (S3404: Yes), the normal map performance possible flag 223t is set to off (S3405), the normal map performance in progress flag 223v is set to on (S3406), a display command for replacement is set (S3407), other LCD performance execution management processing is executed (S3408), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, if the process of S3401 determines that the charge performance flag 223y is not set to on (S3401: No), if the process of S3402 determines that a winning combination is in progress (S3402: Yes), if the process of S3403 determines that the normal performance possible flag 223t is not set to on (S3403: No), or if the process of S3404 determines that the period during which the performance can be replaced is not in progress (S3404: No), then the normal performance cannot be executed, and the process proceeds directly to S3408.

Next, the contents of the operation performance management process (S2111) will be described with reference to FIG. 273. FIG. 273 is a flowchart showing the contents of the operation performance management process (S2111). In this operation performance management process (S2111), processing is executed to set the performance mode based on the operation of the frame button 22 during the period in which the operation performance is being executed.

When the operation presentation management process (S2111) is executed, first, it is determined whether the operation presentation in progress flag 223h is set to ON (S3501). Then, if it is determined that the operation presentation in progress flag 223h is not set to ON, that is, that the operation presentation is not currently in progress (S3501: No), this process ends as it is. If it is determined that the operation presentation in progress flag 223h is set to ON (S3501: Yes), it is next determined whether the first operation presentation is being executed based on the information stored in the operation presentation type storage area 223i (S3502), and if it is determined that the first operation presentation is in progress (S3502), it is next determined whether the pressed flag 223k is set to ON (S3503).

If it is determined in the process of S3503 that the pressed flag 223k is set to on (S3503: Yes), the corresponding button effect is set (S3504), the pressed flag 223k is set to off (S3505), the process for the first operation effect is terminated, and the process proceeds to S3509. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3503 that the pressed flag 223k is not set to on (S3503: No), it is next determined whether the timing is such that the display modes indicating the remaining period of the operation effective period set for each operation effect match (in this control example, the timing when the remaining period of the operation transition period becomes 1 second) (S3506).

If it is determined that it is a coincidence timing (S3506: Yes), a fusion effect display mode is set to change the currently unoperated button display to a fusion button display. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S3506 that it is not a coincidence timing, the processing proceeds directly to S3509. As a result, when the first operation presentation is being executed and a predetermined condition is met without operating the frame button 22 for multiple operation presentations, a fusion operation presentation that combines multiple operation presentations will be executed. This makes it possible to provide the player with a surprising presentation, thereby enhancing the presentation effect.

Next, in the process of S3509, it is determined whether the second operation presentation (see FIG. 216) is in progress. If it is determined that the second operation presentation is in progress (S3509: Yes), it is determined whether the current time is the first operation period (immediate button operation response period) (S3510). As described above with reference to FIG. 216, in the second operation presentation of this control example, a 10-second operation validity period is set, of which the first 8 seconds are set as a period during which the presentation result is displayed in immediate response to the operation of the frame button 22 (immediate button operation response period), and the remaining 2 seconds are set as a period during which it is determined periodically (at 0.5-second intervals, 1-second intervals) whether the frame button 22 has been operated, and the presentation result is displayed based on the determination result (periodic button operation response period).

If it is determined in the process of S3510 that the first operation period is in progress (S3510: Yes), it is determined whether the pressed flag 223k is on (S3511), and if it is determined that the pressed flag 223k is not set to on (S3511: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3511 that the pressed flag 223k is set to on (S3511: Yes), the corresponding button effect is set (S3512), the pressed flag 223k is set to off (S3513), and this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3510 that the current time is not the first operation period (S3510: No), then it is determined whether the first operation period has elapsed (S3514). If it is determined that the first operation period has elapsed (S3516: Yes), an automatic press performance mode is set (S3515), and then it is determined whether the current time is the second operation period (S3516). If it is determined in S3516 that the current time is the second operation period (S3516: Yes), then it is determined whether the current time is the timing to determine the operation status of the frame button 22 (whether a predetermined period has elapsed) (S3517), and if it is determined that the current time is not the timing to determine (S3517: No), this process ends.

In addition, if it is determined in the processing of S3517 that a predetermined period has elapsed (S3517: Yes), it is next determined whether the pressed flag 223k is set to on (S3518), and if it is determined that the pressed flag 223k is set to on (S3518: Yes), the corresponding button effect is set (S3519), the pressed flag 223k is set to off (S3520), and the processing proceeds to S3522. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S3518 that the pressed flag 223k is not set to on (S3518: No), an automatic press effect is set (S3521), and the processing proceeds to S3522. In the processing of S3522, a display effect command corresponding to each of the set effect modes is set, and this processing ends. Among the multiple effects described above in this first control example, the look-ahead effects (reserved effects, treasure chest effects) are executed when a winning information command sent from the main control device 110 is received, or when a new special symbol variation is started, that is, when the number of reserved balls for the special symbol is varied, and are different effects from the variation effects that indicate the special symbol variation. On the other hand, the charge effect, roulette effect, and operation effects executed based on the player's operation of the frame button 22 are effects executed based on the reception of a variation pattern command sent from the main control device 110. Each effect executed based on this variation pattern command may be set using the entire variation time (dynamic display period) corresponding to the information indicating the variation time of the special symbol contained in the variation pattern command, or may be set using a part of that variation time.

<Regarding control processing in the display control device 114>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to Figs. 274 to 287. The processing of the MPU 231 is roughly divided into a main processing which is repeatedly executed after power-on, a command interrupt processing which is executed when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, and a V interrupt processing which is executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of one frame of image is completed. The MPU 231 usually executes the main processing, and executes the command interrupt processing and the V interrupt processing in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal. Note that when the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal are performed simultaneously, the command reception processing is executed with priority. This allows the contents of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113 to be quickly reflected and the V interrupt processing to be executed.

First, referring to FIG. 274, the main processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 274 is a flowchart showing this main processing. The main processing is to execute the initialization processing when the power is turned on.

Specifically, the main process is started according to the following flow. When the power is applied from the power supply circuit 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231, using its hardware configuration, sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" and specifies the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified on the bus line 240 is "0000H", it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c and outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231. The MPU 231 then fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234 and starts the execution of the process according to the fetched instruction, thereby starting the main process.

If all the boot programs to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, when the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified on the bus line 240 is "0000H", it must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to read and set the data in the buffer RAM 234c, so the MPU 231 will consume a lot of waiting time from specifying the address "0000H" to receiving the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H". This increases the time it takes to start up the MPU 231, resulting in a problem that the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not start immediately.

In contrast, in this embodiment, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program, starting with the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, are stored in the NOR ROM 234d. Since the NOR ROM is a memory capable of reading data at high speed, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 can immediately set the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c and output the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", so that the main processing can be started in the MPU 231 in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234, which is composed of a NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

When the main processing is executed as described above, first, the boot processing executed by the boot program is executed (S6001), and the display control device 114 is started so that various controls for the third pattern display device 81 can be executed.

Now, the boot process (S6001) will be described with reference to FIG. 275. FIG. 275 is a flowchart showing the boot process (S6001) executed during the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114.

As described above, in this embodiment, the control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are not stored in a dedicated program ROM as in conventional gaming machines, but are stored in the character ROM 234 provided to store image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND type flash memory 234a, which allows for a large capacity in a small area, so that not only image data but also control programs and the like can be sufficiently stored, while there is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing control programs and the like. This makes it possible to reduce the number of parts in the display control device 114, which not only reduces manufacturing costs but also suppresses an increase in the rate of failures due to an increase in the number of parts.

However, since the read speed of NAND flash memory is slow, especially when performing random access, if the MPU 231 directly reads and processes the control program and fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, there is a risk that the processing performance of the display control device 114 will deteriorate even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231. Therefore, in this boot process, a process is executed in which the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and data table storage area 233b provided in the work RAM 233 composed of DRAM.

Specifically, first, based on the operation of the hardware of the MPU 231 and character ROM 234 described above, a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program memory area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a in accordance with the boot program read from the first program memory area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d after the system reset is released and set in the buffer RAM 234c (S6101). The predetermined amount of the control program transferred here includes the remaining boot program that is not stored in the first program memory area 234d1.

Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to a first predetermined address in the program storage area 233a, i.e., the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S6102). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot program included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S6101.

Also, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined location in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S6102, the MPU 231 executes various processes while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND type flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetches instructions, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a, fetches instructions, and executes various processes. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND type flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch instructions at high speed and execute the process for the instructions.

When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the processing of S6102, the remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not yet been transferred to the program storage area 233a among the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are transferred in predetermined amounts to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b in accordance with the remaining boot programs whose execution is started by the set instruction pointer 231a (S6103). Specifically, the control programs and some of the fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the above-mentioned various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) among the fixed value data are transferred to the data table storage area 233b.

Then, after executing other processes necessary for the boot process (S6104), the instruction pointer 231a is set to a second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a, that is, the start address of the program corresponding to the initialization process (see S6002 in FIG. 274) that should be executed after the end of this boot process (see S6001 in FIG. 274) (S6105), thereby completing the execution of the boot program and terminating this boot process.

In this way, by executing the boot process (S6001), the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and data table storage area 233b of the work RAM 233, which are all composed of DRAM. Then, when the boot process ends, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address described above, and thereafter, the MPU 231 executes various processes using the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a.

Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND type flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, by transferring the control program and fixed value data to the program storage area 233a and data table storage area 233b of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released, the MPU 231 can read the control program and fixed value data from the work RAM composed of DRAM, which has a fast read speed, and perform various controls, so that the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance and easily execute diversified and complicated performances using the auxiliary performance unit.

On the other hand, instead of storing the entire boot program in the NOR ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored starting from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, so that the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, by simply adding the extremely small capacity NOR ROM 234d to the character ROM 234, the MPU 231 can be started up in a short time, and the increase in cost of the character ROM 234 associated with this shortening of the time can be suppressed.

In the boot process shown in FIG. 275, the predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S6101 are configured to include all remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1, but this is not necessarily limited to this, and the predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S6101 may be part of the boot program that executes the boot process to be processed following the process of S6102. The boot program transferred here may transfer a predetermined amount of control programs including all remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a, and further execute a process of setting the top address of the boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a to the instruction pointer 231a. Then, the processes of S6103 to S6105 may be executed by all remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

The boot program transferred by the process of S6101 may further transfer a predetermined amount of a portion of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a, and then execute a process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a to the instruction pointer 231a. The boot program stored in the program storage area 233a by this process may further transfer a predetermined amount of a portion of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a, and then execute a process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a to the instruction pointer 231a. Then, the process of transferring a predetermined amount of a portion of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a, and then setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a to the instruction pointer 231a may be repeated multiple times, including the processes of S6101 and S6102, and then the processes of S6103 to S6105 may be executed.

As a result, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the remaining boot program not stored in the first program memory area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a all at once, the MPU 231 can use the boot program already stored in the program storage area 233a and transfer it to the program storage area 233a in a predetermined amount at a time.

In addition, in this embodiment, a case has been described in which a part of the boot program that is executed first by the MPU 231 when the system reset is released is stored in the first program storage area 234d1, but all of the boot program may be stored in the first program storage area 234d1. In this case, when the MPU 231 starts the boot process, it may execute the processes of S6103 to S6105 without executing the processes of S6101 and S6102. This eliminates the need to transfer the boot program to the program storage area 233a, and therefore reduces the number of times the program is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a, thereby reducing the processing time of the boot process. This allows the MPU 231 to start controlling the auxiliary performance unit, which becomes possible after the boot process, more quickly.

Now, let us return to the explanation of FIG. 274. After the boot process is completed, the initial setting process is then executed in accordance with the control program transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S6002). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231, and various settings are made for the registers in the MPU 231 and for the I/O devices, etc. Also, processes such as clearing the memory of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 are performed. Furthermore, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set for each flag. The initial value of each flag is set to "off" or "0" unless otherwise specified.

Furthermore, in the initial setting process, after initial setting of the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute image drawing and display processing so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81. As a result, immediately after power is turned on, an image of a specific color is first displayed on the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81 immediately after power is turned on is set to be a different color depending on the model of the pachinko machine. As a result, during an operation check at a factory or the like during manufacturing, by checking whether an image of a color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 immediately after power is turned on, it is possible to easily and immediately determine whether the pachinko machine 10 can start up normally.

Next, a transfer instruction is sent to the image controller 237 to transfer image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 (S6003). This transfer instruction includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the power-on main image is stored, the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the start address of the power-on main image area 235a, which is the transfer destination. In accordance with this transfer instruction, the image controller 237 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235.

When the transfer of all image data specified by the transfer instruction is complete, image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal to MPU 231 indicating the end of transfer. By receiving this transfer end signal, MPU 231 can know that the transfer of image data specified in the transfer instruction has ended. Note that when image controller 237 has completed the transfer of all image data specified by the transfer instruction, it may write transfer end information indicating the end of transfer to a register or a partial area of built-in memory provided inside image controller 237. MPU 231 may then read information from this register or partial area of built-in memory at any time and detect the writing of transfer end information by image controller 237, thereby knowing that the transfer of image data specified in the transfer instruction has ended.

The image data transferred to the power-on main image area 235a is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is cut off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction sent to the image controller 237 by the processing of S6003, a transfer instruction is then sent to the image controller to transfer the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image to the power-on variable image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 (S6004). This transfer instruction includes the top address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image is stored, the data size of the image data, information on the transfer destination (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the top address of the power-on variable image area 235b, which is the transfer destination, and the image controller transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on variable image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 in accordance with this transfer instruction. The image data transferred to the power-on variable image area 235b is then retained so that it is not overwritten until the power is turned off.

When the transfer of image data corresponding to the power-on variable image to the power-on variable image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction sent to the image controller 237 by the processing of S6004, the simple image display flag 233c is then turned on (S6005). As a result, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, a resident image transfer setting process is executed in which the image controller 237 is instructed to transfer all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in the transfer setting process described below (see FIG. 285(a)) (see S7602 in FIG. 285(a)).

Furthermore, the simple image display flag 233c is maintained on until the transfer of all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is completed based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by this resident image transfer setting process. As a result, during that time, the simple command determination process (see S6308 in FIG. 276(b)) and the simple display setting process (see S6309 in FIG. 276(b)) are executed so that the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on variable image) shown in is drawn in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 276(b)).

As described above, in this pachinko machine 10, since the NAND type flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, due to its slow read speed, it takes a long time for all image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in this main process, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on variable image are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the power-on main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81, so that while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, players and hall personnel can check the power-on main image displayed on the third pattern display device 81. Therefore, while the display control device 114 is displaying the power-on main image on the third pattern display device 81, it can take time to transfer the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. On the other hand, players can recognize that some kind of initialization process is taking place while the main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, so they can wait until the initialization is complete without worrying that operation may have stopped until the image data that should be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235.

In addition, during operation checks at the factory during manufacturing, the main image is immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, making it possible to immediately confirm that the third pattern display device 81 has started operating without any problems upon power-on, and the efficiency of operation checks can be prevented from deteriorating due to the use of a NAND-type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed for the character ROM 234.

In addition, the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10 transfers the power-on variable image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the power-on main image after power is turned on. Therefore, if the player starts playing while the power-on main image is being displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and a ball enters the first start hole 64 (start winning), and an instruction to start the variable performance is given by the main control device 110 via the sound lamp control device 113, i.e., if a display variable pattern command is received, the power-on variable image (not shown) can be instantly displayed during the variable performance period, and a simple variable performance can be performed. Therefore, the player can be sure that the lottery has been drawn by the simple variable performance, even while the power-on main image is being displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

As described above, the power-on main image continues to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. However, since the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND-type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the transfer takes time, and the power-on main image continues to be displayed for a long time after power is turned on. However, in this pachinko machine 10, a simple variable performance can be performed using the power-on variable image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after power is turned on, so that the player can play with peace of mind even while the power-on main image is being displayed immediately after power is turned on, for example, immediately after recovery from a power outage.

After the processing of S6005, interrupt permission is set (S6006), and thereafter, the main processing executes an infinite loop process until the power is turned off. As a result, after interrupt permission is set by the processing of S6006, command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing are executed according to the reception of a command and the detection of a V interrupt signal.

Next, referring to FIG. 276(a), the command interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 276(a) is a flowchart showing the command interrupt processing. As described above, when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the command interrupt processing is executed by the MPU 231.

In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, and the extracted command data is stored sequentially in a command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S6201), and the process ends. The various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt process are read out by the command determination process or simple command determination process of the V interrupt process described below, and processing according to the command is carried out.

Next, referring to FIG. 276(b), the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 276(b) is a flowchart showing the V interrupt processing. In this V interrupt processing, various processes corresponding to the commands stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt processing are executed, and the image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is identified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 237) of the image is created, and the drawing list is sent to the image controller 237, thereby instructing the image controller 237 to execute drawing processing and display processing of the image.

As described above, this V interrupt process is started when a V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V interrupt signal is generated in the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of one frame of an image is completed, and is transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is sent to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of one frame of an image is completed. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction for the next image before the drawing process or display process of the image is completed, so it is possible to prevent starting drawing of a new image in the middle of drawing an image, or developing an image in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information currently being displayed is stored.

Here, we will first explain the outline of the V interrupt processing flow, and then explain the details of each process with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt processing, as shown in FIG. 276(b), first, it is determined whether the simple image display flag 233c is on or not (S6301). If the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, it is off (S6301: No), this means that the transfer of all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed, so in order to display a normal performance image on the third pattern display device 81 instead of the power-on image, a command determination process (S6302) is executed, and then a display setting process (S6303) is executed.

In the command determination process (S6302), the contents of the command from the voice lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are analyzed, and processing according to the command is executed. If a display demo command or a display variation pattern command is stored, a demo display data table or a variation display data table according to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and a transfer data table corresponding to the set display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and processed. This is because the command determination process is performed at 20 millisecond intervals when the V interrupt process is executed, and it is highly likely that multiple commands are stored in the command buffer area during those 20 milliseconds. In particular, when the main control device 110 decides to start a variable performance, it is highly likely that a display variable pattern command and a display stop type command are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, it is possible to quickly grasp the state and stop type of the variable performance selected by the main control device 110 and the voice lamp control device 113, and control the drawing of the image so that the performance image corresponding to that state is displayed on the third pattern display device 81. Details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to Figures 277 to 282.

In the display setting process (S6303), the contents of one frame of image to be displayed next on the third pattern display device 81 are specifically identified based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S6302) or the like. In addition, depending on the processing status, etc., the presentation mode to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is determined, and the display data table corresponding to the determined presentation mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. Details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to Figures 283 to 284.

After the display setting process is executed, task processing is then executed (S6304). In this task processing, based on the content of the next frame of image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81, which was specified by the display setting process (S6303) or the simplified display setting process (S6309), the type of sprite (display object) that constitutes the image is identified, and various parameters required for drawing, such as the display coordinate position, magnification rate, and rotation angle, are determined for each sprite.

Next, a transfer setting process is executed (S6305). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, a transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 to transfer image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Also, while the simple image display flag 233c is off, a transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and even when a continuous preview command (not shown) is received from the voice lamp control device 113, a transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 to transfer image data of the continuous preview image used in the continuous preview performance and image data of the changed back image from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. Details of the forwarding setting process will be described later with reference to Figures 285 and 286.

Next, the drawing process is executed (S6306). In this drawing process, a drawing list as shown in FIG. 237 is generated from the types of sprites constituting one frame and the parameters required for drawing each sprite, which were determined in the task process (S6304), and the transfer instructions set in the transfer setting process (S6305), and this drawing list is sent to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. As a result, the image controller 237 executes the image drawing process according to the drawing list. Details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG. 287.

Next, the display control device 114 executes an update process for various counters (S6307). Then, the V interrupt process is terminated. An example of a counter updated by the process of S6307 is a stop pattern counter (not shown) for determining the stop pattern. The value of this stop pattern counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and an update process is performed each time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, in the command determination process, when the reception of a display stop type command is detected, the stop type table corresponding to the stop type (jackpot A, jackpot B1, jackpot B2, jackpot C) indicated by the display stop type command is compared with the stop type counter, and the stop pattern after the variable performance displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is finally set.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S6301 that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S6301: Yes), this means that the transfer of all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed, so a simple command determination process (S6308) is executed to cause the power-on image (not shown) to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and then a simple display setting process (S6309) is executed, and the processing proceeds to S6304.

Next, the details of the above-mentioned command determination process (S6302), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to Figs. 277 to 282. First, Fig. 277 is a flowchart showing this command determination process.

As shown in FIG. 277, in this command determination process (S6302), first, it is determined whether there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S6401), and if there is no unprocessed new command (S6401: No), the command determination process ends and the process returns to V interrupt processing. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S6401: Yes), a new command flag is set to ON (S6402), which notifies the display setting process (S6303) that a new command has been processed in the ON state, and then the type of each command stored in the command buffer area is analyzed (S6403).

Then, first, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S6404), and if there is a display variation pattern command (S6404: Yes), variation pattern command processing is executed (S6405), and processing returns to S6401.

Here, the variation pattern command processing (S6405) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 278(a). FIG. 278(a) is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing. This variation pattern command processing executes processing corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

In the variation pattern command processing, first, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation performance pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is determined, and the determined variation display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6501).

Here, the main control unit 110 always judges the start of the fluctuation at least several seconds apart, so two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are never received within 20 milliseconds. Therefore, when executing the command judgment process, it is impossible for two or more display fluctuation pattern commands to be stored in the command buffer area. However, there is a possibility that part of the command may change due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command may be erroneously interpreted as a display fluctuation pattern command. In the process of S6501, in preparation for such a case, if it is judged that two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the fluctuation display data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern with the shortest fluctuation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

If a change display data table corresponding to a change pattern with a long change time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and a change presentation having a shorter change time than the set display data table is actually instructed by the main control device 110, the next display change pattern command will be received from the main control device 110 while a change presentation according to the set change display data table is being displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and a different change display will suddenly begin, which may cause the player to feel uncomfortable.

In contrast to this, by setting the display data table buffer 233d with a variable display data table corresponding to the variable pattern with the shortest variable time as in this embodiment, even if the main control unit 110 has instructed a variable presentation with a longer variable time than the set display data table, as described below, the display of the third pattern display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that a demo presentation is displayed after the variable presentation according to the display data table buffer 233d has ended and until the next display pattern command is received from the main control unit 110, so that the player can continue to watch the third pattern variation on the third pattern display device 81 without feeling any discomfort.

Then, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S6501 is determined and read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6502). Then, among the data table discrimination flags provided for each variation display data table corresponding to each variation pattern, the data table discrimination flag corresponding to the variation display data table set by the processing of S6501 is set to ON, and the data table discrimination flags corresponding to the other variation display data tables are set to OFF (S6503). In the display setting process, by referring to the data table discrimination flag set by the processing of S6503, it is possible to easily determine which variation pattern the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d corresponds to.

Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6501, time data representing that fluctuation time is set in the timing counter 233h (S6504), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6505). Then, both the demo display flag and the final display flag are set to off (S6506), the fluctuation pattern command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

When this variable pattern command processing is executed, the display setting processing updates the pointer 233f initialized by the processing of S6505, extracts the drawing contents specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the variable display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6501, and specifies the contents of one frame's worth of image to be displayed next on the third pattern display device 81. At the same time, the processing of S6502 extracts the transfer data information specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and controls the image controller 237 so that the image data of the sprite required in the set variable display data table is transferred in advance from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

In addition, in the display setting process, the timing counter 233h, in which the time data is set by the process of S6504, is used to time the time of the variable performance specified in the variable display data table, and when it is determined that the variable performance in the variable display data table has ended, the setting of the stop display is controlled so that the stop pattern corresponding to the display stop type command from the main control unit 110 is displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

Now, let us return to the explanation of FIG. 277. If it is determined in the processing of S6404 that there is no variation pattern command for display (S6404: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a stop type command for display among the unprocessed commands (S6406), and if there is a stop type command for display (S6406: Yes), stop type command processing is executed (S6407), and processing returns to S6401.

Here, the details of the stop type command processing (S6407) will be described with reference to FIG. 278(b). FIG. 278(b) is a flowchart showing the stop type command processing. This stop type command processing executes processing corresponding to the display variable type command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

In the stop type command processing, first, a stop type table corresponding to the stop type information (jackpot A, jackpot B1, jackpot B2, jackpot C) indicated by the stop type command for display is determined (S6601), and the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter, which is updated each time the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 276 (b)) is executed, to finally set the stop pattern after the variable performance to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 (S6602).

Then, among the stop pattern discrimination flags provided for each stop pattern, the stop pattern discrimination flag corresponding to the stop pattern set by the processing of S6602 is turned on, and the stop pattern discrimination flags corresponding to the other stop patterns are set to off (S6603). After that, the process returns to the processing of S6401 in FIG. 277.

Here, as described above, in the variable display data table, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation based on the data table, offset information (pattern offset information) from the stop pattern set by the processing of S6602 is described as type information for identifying the third pattern to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. In the above-mentioned task processing (S6304), after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation, the stop pattern set by the processing of S6602 is identified from the stop pattern discrimination flag set by S6603, and the pattern offset information acquired by the display setting processing is added to the identified stop pattern to identify the third pattern to be actually displayed. Then, the address where the image data corresponding to this identified third pattern is stored is identified. Note that the image data corresponding to the third pattern is stored in the third pattern area 235d of the resident video RAM 235, as described above.

Returning to FIG. 277, the explanation will continue. In the process of S6406, if it is determined that there is no display stop type command (S6406: No), it is then determined whether there is a display notice display command among the unprocessed commands (S6408). If it is determined that a display notice display command has been received (S6408: Yes), a notice performance display process is executed (S6409). Details of the notice performance display process (S6409) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 279(a), but during the variable display of the special pattern, a notice display mode is set to notify the player of the expectation of a jackpot, a notice that a jackpot has occurred, etc., which are displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

Here, the preview performance display process (S6409) will be described with reference to FIG. 279(a). FIG. 279(a) is a flowchart showing this preview performance display process (S6409).

In the preview performance display process (Fig. 279 (a), S6409), first, a display data table corresponding to the received preview display command for display is determined and set in the display data table buffer (S6701). A transfer data table corresponding to the display data table for the preview set to be displayed at a display timing based on the display timing of the preview display indicated by the received preview display command for display is determined and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6702).

Next, the data table discrimination flag is set to ON (S6703), and based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the setting display data table buffer 233d, time data representing that fluctuation time is set in the timing counter 233h (S6704), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6705).

In this way, the preview display is set based on the display preview command output from the sound lamp control device 113, and is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 at the specified timing. Therefore, a variety of display modes can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and the same variation pattern can be made to appear to the player as if it were a different display mode.

In this embodiment, the content of the preview display and the display timing are selected by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, but the selection of the preview display may be performed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114.

In addition, in this embodiment, a display data table for a notice is set, but this is not limited to this, and a display data table that has already been set may be overwritten with a notice display setting.

Returning to FIG. 277 for further explanation. If it is determined in the processing of S6408 that there is no display preview command (S6408: No), it is determined whether there is a display variable replacement command among the unprocessed commands (S6410). If it is determined that there is a display variable replacement command (S6410: Yes), a variable replacement display process is executed (S6411). This variable replacement display process (S6411) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 279 (b).

Here, the change replacement display process (S6411) will be described with reference to FIG. 279(b). FIG. 279(b) is a flowchart showing this change replacement display process (S6411).

In the variable replacement display process (Fig. 279 (b), S6411), first, a display data table corresponding to the received display variable replacement command is determined and set in the display data table buffer (S6801). A transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set for variable replacement to be displayed at a display timing based on the display timing of the variable replacement display indicated by the received display variable replacement command is determined and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6802).

Next, the data table discrimination flag is set to ON (S6803), and based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the setting display data table buffer 233d, time data representing that fluctuation time is set in the timing counter 233h (S6804), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6805).

In this way, the variable replacement display is set based on the display variable replacement command output from the voice lamp control device 113, and is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 at the specified timing. Therefore, a variety of display modes can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and the same variable pattern can be made to appear to the player as if it were a different display mode.

In this embodiment, the content of the variable replacement display and the display timing are selected by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, but the present invention is not limited to this and may be configured so that the selection of the variable replacement display is performed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114.

In addition, in this embodiment, a display data table for variable replacement is set, but this is not limited to this, and the display data table that has already been set may be overwritten by setting the variable replacement display.

Returning to FIG. 277 for further explanation. In the process of S6410, if it is determined that there is no display variable replacement command (S6410: No), it is determined whether there is a display operation performance command among the unprocessed commands (S6412). If it is determined that there is a display operation performance command (S6412: Yes), an operation performance display process is executed (S6413). Details of this operation performance display process (S6413) will be explained with reference to FIG. 280(a).

Here, the operation presentation display process (S6413) will be described with reference to FIG. 280(a). FIG. 280(a) is a flowchart showing this operation presentation display process (S6413).

In the operation performance display process (Fig. 280 (a), S6413), first, a display data table corresponding to the received operation performance command for display is determined and set in the display data table buffer (S6901). A transfer data table corresponding to the display data table for the operation performance set to be displayed at a display timing based on the display timing of the operation performance display indicated by the received operation performance command for display is determined and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6902).

Next, the data table discrimination flag is set to ON (S6903), and based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the setting display data table buffer 233d, time data representing that fluctuation time is set in the timing counter 233h (S6904), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6905).

In this way, the operation display is set based on the display operation display command output from the voice lamp control device 113, and is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 at the specified timing. Therefore, a variety of display modes can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and the same variation pattern can be made to appear to the player as if it were a different display mode.

In this embodiment, the content of the operation display and the display timing are selected by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, but the present invention is not limited to this and may be configured so that the selection of the operation display is performed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114.

In addition, in this embodiment, a display data table for operation effects is set, but this is not limited to this, and the display data table that has already been set may be overwritten by setting the operation effect display.

Returning to FIG. 277 for further explanation. If it is determined in the processing of S6412 that there is no display operation performance command (S6412: No), it is determined whether there is a display button fusion command among the unprocessed commands (S6414). If it is determined that there is a display button fusion command (S6414: Yes), button fusion display processing is executed (S6415). Details of this button fusion display processing (S6415) will be described with reference to FIG. 280 (b).

Here, the button fusion display process (S6415) will be described with reference to FIG. 280(b). FIG. 280(b) is a flowchart showing this button fusion display process (S6415).

In the button fusion display process (Fig. 280 (b), S6415), first, a display data table corresponding to the received button fusion command for display is determined and set in the display data table buffer (S7001). A transfer data table corresponding to the display data table for button fusion set for display at a display timing based on the display timing of the button fusion display indicated by the received button fusion command for display is determined and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S7002).

Next, the data table discrimination flag is set to ON (S7003), and based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the setting display data table buffer 233d, time data representing that fluctuation time is set in the timing counter 233h (S7004), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7005).

In this way, the button fusion display is set based on the display button fusion command output from the voice lamp control device 113, and is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 at the specified timing. Therefore, a variety of display modes can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and the same variation pattern can be made to appear to the player as if it were a different display mode.

In this embodiment, the content of the button fusion display and the display timing are selected by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, but the selection of the button fusion display may be performed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114.

In addition, in this embodiment, a display data table for button fusion is set, but this is not limited to this, and it may be configured to overwrite an already set display data table with the button fusion display setting.

Returning to FIG. 277 for further explanation. If it is determined in the processing of S6414 that there is no display button fusion command (S6414: No), it is determined whether there is a display pseudo-winning command among the unprocessed commands (S6416). If it is determined that there is a display pseudo-winning command (S6416: Yes), a pseudo-winning display process is executed (S6417). Details of this pseudo-winning display process (S6417) will be explained with reference to FIG. 281.

Here, the pseudo-winning display process (S6417) will be described with reference to FIG. 281. FIG. 281 is a flowchart showing this pseudo-winning display process (S6417).

In the pseudo-winning display process (FIG. 281, S6417), first, a display data table corresponding to the received pseudo-winning command for display is determined and set in the display data table buffer (S7101). A transfer data table corresponding to the display data table for the pseudo-winning set for display at a display timing based on the display timing of the pseudo-winning display indicated by the received pseudo-winning command for display is determined and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S7102).

Next, the data table discrimination flag is set to ON (S7103), and based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the setting display data table buffer 233d, time data representing that fluctuation time is set in the timing counter 233h (S7104), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7105).

In this way, a pseudo winning display is set based on the pseudo winning command for display output from the voice lamp control device 113, and is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 at the specified timing. Therefore, a variety of display modes can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and the same variation pattern can be made to appear to the player as if it were a different display mode.

In this embodiment, the content of the pseudo winning display and the timing of display are selected by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, but it is not limited to this and the selection of the pseudo winning display may be performed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114.

In addition, in this embodiment, a display data table for pseudo winning is set, but this is not limited to this, and the display data table that has already been set may be overwritten by setting the pseudo winning display.

Returning to FIG. 277 for further explanation, if it is determined in the processing of S6416 that there is no pseudo-winning command for display (S6416: No), it is determined whether or not there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (S6418), and if there is an error command (S6418: Yes), error command processing is executed (S6419), and processing returns to S6401.

Now, with reference to FIG. 282, the error command processing (S6419) will be described in detail. FIG. 282 is a flowchart showing the error command processing. This error command processing executes processing corresponding to the error command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

In error command processing, first, an error occurrence flag that is in the ON state and indicates that an error has occurred is set to ON (S7201). Then, of the error discrimination flags provided for each error type, the error discrimination flag that corresponds to the error type indicated by the error command is set to ON, and the other error discrimination flags are set to OFF (S7202), the error command processing is terminated, and the process returns to command judgment processing.

In the display setting process, when an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S7201, the type of error that has occurred is determined from the error discrimination flag set by the process of S7202, and a process is executed to display a warning image corresponding to that error type on the third pattern display device 81.

If it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, the process in S7202 sets the error discrimination flags corresponding to all error types indicated by the respective error commands to ON. As a result, warning images corresponding to all error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, allowing the player and hall staff to correctly understand the error occurrence situation.

Now, let us return to the explanation of FIG. 277. If it is determined in the processing of S6418 that there is no error command (S6418: No), then processing corresponding to other unprocessed commands is executed (S6420), and the process returns to the processing of S6401.

In the process of S6401, which is executed again after the processing of each command has been executed, it is again determined whether there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S6401: Yes), the processes of S6402 to S6420 are executed again. Then, the processes of S6401 to S6420 are repeatedly executed until there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, and when it is determined in the process of S6401 that there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, this command determination process ends.

The simple command determination process (S6308), which is executed when the simple image display flag 233c is on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 276(b)), is similar to the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination process, only the commands necessary to display the power-on image shown in FIG. 35, i.e., the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command, are extracted from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area, and the variation pattern command process (see FIG. 278(a)) and the stop type command process (see FIG. 278(b)), which are the processes corresponding to each command, are executed, while the other commands are discarded without executing the processes corresponding to those commands.

In the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 278(a)) executed in this case, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the power-on variation image is set in the display data table buffer 233d in the processing of S6501, and since the image data of the power-on main image and the power-on variation image required in this case are stored in the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235, in the processing of S6502, Null data is written to the transfer data table buffer 233e and its contents are cleared.

Next, with reference to Figs. 283 and 284, the details of the above-mentioned display setting process (S6303), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. Fig. 283 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 283, it is determined whether the new command flag is on or not (S7301), and if the new command flag is not on, i.e., it is off (S7301: No), it is determined that a new command has not been processed in the command determination process executed first, and the processes of S7302 to S7304 are skipped and the process moves to S7305. On the other hand, if the new flag is on (S7301: Yes), it is determined that a new command has been processed in the command determination process executed first, and after setting the new command flag to off (S7302), the process corresponding to the new command is executed by the processes of S7303 to S7304.

In the process of S7303, it is determined whether the error occurrence flag is on (S7303). If the error occurrence flag is on (S7303: Yes), a warning image setting process is executed (S7304).

Here, the warning image setting process will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 284(a). FIG. 284(a) is a flowchart showing the warning image setting process. This process is for expanding image data for displaying a warning image corresponding to an error that has occurred on the third pattern display device 81. First, the error discrimination flags are referenced, and warning image data for displaying warning images of errors corresponding to all error discrimination flags that are set to on on the third pattern display device 81 is expanded (S7401).

The task process uses this expanded warning image data to identify the type of sprite (display object) that makes up the warning image, and determines various parameters required for drawing each sprite, such as the display coordinate position, magnification rate, and rotation angle.

Then, in the warning image setting process, after processing S7401, the error occurrence flag is set to off (S7402) and the process returns to the display setting process.

Now, let us return to the explanation of FIG. 283. After the warning image setting process (S7304), or in the process of S7303, if it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, i.e., is off (S7303: No), then the process proceeds to S7305.

In S7305, pointer update processing is executed (S7305). Details of the pointer update processing will now be described with reference to FIG. 284(b). FIG. 284(b) is a flowchart showing the pointer update processing. This pointer update processing is processing for updating the pointer 233f that specifies the address from which the corresponding drawing content or transfer data information of the image data to be transferred should be obtained from the display data table and transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively.

In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S7501). That is, in principle, the update process is performed so that the pointer 233f is incremented by 1 each time the V interrupt process is executed. Also, as described above, in various data tables, Start information is written at address "0000H" and the actual data of each table is specified from address "0001H" onwards. If the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 as the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update process, so that the actual data can be read from each data table in order starting from address "0001H".

After the value of the pointer 233f is updated by the processing of S7501, it is then determined whether the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is End information (S7502). If the data is End information (S7502: Yes), this means that the pointer 233f has been updated past the address where the entity data is written in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d.

Then, it is determined whether the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demo display data table (S7503), and if it is a demo display data table (S7503: Yes), time data corresponding to the performance time of the demo display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is set in the timing counter 233h (S7504), the pointer 233f is set to 1 for initialization (S7505), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be expanded in order from the top of the demo display data table, so that the third pattern display device 81 can be made to repeatedly display demo performances.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S7503 that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not a demo display data table (S7503: No), the value of the pointer 233f is decremented by 1 (S7506), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, if a display data table other than the demo display data table, for example, a variable display data table, is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the drawing contents of the previous address in which the End information is written are always expanded, so that the third pattern display device 81 can display the last image specified in the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S7502, if the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not End information (S7502: No), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the display setting process.

Now, returning to FIG. 283, the explanation will continue. After the pointer update process, the drawing contents of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process are expanded from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7306). In the task process, based on the drawing contents expanded in the process of S7306, together with the warning image etc. expanded earlier, the type of sprites (display objects) that make up the image is identified, and various parameters required for drawing, such as the display coordinate position, magnification rate, and rotation angle, are determined for each sprite.

Then, the value of the timing counter 233h is decremented by 1 (S7307), and it is determined whether the value of the timing counter 233h after decrement is 0 or less (S7308). If the value of the timing counter 233h is 1 or more (S7308: No), the display setting process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if the value of the timing counter 233h is 0 or less (S7308: Yes), this means that the performance time for the performance corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is time to end the variable display and perform a stop display, so it is checked whether the fixed display flag is on (S7309).

If the result is that the final display flag is off (S7309: No), the final display has not yet been performed and it is time to perform the final display, so first, the final display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7310), and then null data is written to the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear its contents (S7311). Then, time data corresponding to the performance time of the final display data table is set in the timing counter 233h (S7312), and further, the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7313). Then, after the final display flag, which indicates that the final display is being performed in the on state, is set on (S7314), the contents of the stop symbol discrimination flag are copied directly to the previous stop symbol discrimination flag provided in the work RAM 233 (S7315), and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

In this way, when a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the drawing contents can be set so that the final display performance of the stopped pattern in the variable performance is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in accordance with the end of the performance. Also, by simply changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d to the final display data table, the performance displayed on the third pattern display device 81 can be easily changed to the final display performance. And compared to the conventional case where the display contents are changed by starting another program, the program does not become complicated and bloated, and therefore the MPU 231 is not subjected to a large load, so that various types of performance images can be displayed on the third pattern display 81 regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 114.

The previous stop pattern discrimination flag set by the processing of S7315 is used to identify the third pattern to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in the next variable performance. That is, as described above, the display of the third pattern in the variable performance changes depending on the stop pattern of the previous variable performance, and in the variable display data table, pattern offset information from the stop pattern of the previous variable performance is recorded until a predetermined time has passed since the start of the change based on the data table. In the task processing (S6304), the stop pattern of the previous variable performance is identified from the previous stop pattern discrimination flag set by S7315 until a predetermined time has passed since the start of the change, and the pattern offset information obtained by the display setting processing is added to the identified stop pattern to identify the third pattern to be actually displayed. As a result, the variable performance starts from the stop pattern in the previous variable performance.

On the other hand, in the process of S7309, if the fixed display flag is on and not off (S7309: Yes), it is determined whether the demo display flag is on or not (S7316). If the demo display flag is off (S7316: No), this means that the value of the timing counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the fixed display effect, so the demo display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7317), and then null data is written to the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear its contents (S7318). Then, time data corresponding to the effect time of the demo display data table is set in the timing counter 233h (S7319). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7320), the demo display flag, which indicates that a demo effect is being performed in the on state, is set to on (S7321), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

In the processing of S7316, if the demo display flag is on (S7316: Yes), this means that the demo performance is performed after the final display performance has ended, and that the demo performance has ended, so the display setting processing is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt processing. In this case, various settings are made so that the demo performance will start again, as described above, by the pointer update processing executed in the next V interrupt processing, so that the demo performance can be repeatedly displayed on the third pattern display device 81 until a new display variation pattern command is received from the voice lamp control device 113.

The same processing as the display setting processing is also performed in the simple display setting processing (S6309) that is executed when the simple image display flag 233c is on in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 276 (b)). However, in the simple display setting processing, a processing is performed to set in the display data table buffer 233d a display data table that specifies that one of the images (FIG. 35) of the power-on variable image corresponding to the stop pattern set based on the display stop type command is displayed in a stopped state for a predetermined time after the performance time of the variable performance using the power-on variable image has ended.

Next, with reference to Figs. 285 and 286, the above-mentioned transfer setting process (S6305), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described in detail. First, Fig. 285(a) is a flowchart showing this transfer setting process.

In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether the simple image display flag 233c is on or not (S7601). Then, if the simple image display flag 233c is on (S7601: Yes), all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so the resident image transfer setting process is executed (S7602), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 to transfer the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 285(b).

On the other hand, if the result of the processing of S7601 is that the simple image display flag 233c is not on, i.e., it is off (S7601: No), all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S7603), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction is set so that subsequent transfers of image data from the character ROM 234 are to the normal video RAM 236. Details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 286.

Next, referring to FIG. 285(b), we will explain the resident image transfer setting process (S7602), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. FIG. 285(b) is a flowchart showing this resident image transfer setting process (S7602).

In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not an instruction to transfer untransferred image data has been sent to the image controller 237 (S7701), and if a transfer instruction has been sent (S7701: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the image data transfer process performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction has been completed (S7702). In this process of S7702, after an instruction to transfer image data has been sent to the image controller 237, if a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has been completed. Then, if it is determined by the process of S7702 that the transfer process has not been completed (S7702: No), the image transfer process is still being performed in the image controller 237, and therefore the resident image transfer setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has been completed (S7702: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S7703. Also, if the result of processing in S7701 indicates that a transfer instruction for untransferred image data has not been sent to the image controller 237 (S7701: No), the process proceeds to S7703.

In the processing of S7703, it is determined whether all resident target image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (S7703), and if there is untransferred resident target image data (S7703: No), a transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 to transfer the untransferred resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S7704), and the resident image transfer setting processing ends.

As a result, the drawing list sent to the image controller 237 in the drawing process includes transfer data information on the untransferred resident target image data, and the image controller 237 can transfer the resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 236 based on the transfer data information written in the drawing list. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 where the resident target image data is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the start address of the transfer destination (an area provided in the resident video RAM 235 where the resident target image data to be transferred here should be stored). The image controller 237 executes the image transfer process based on this transfer data information, reads out the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and then transfers it to the specified address of the resident video RAM 236 while the resident video RAM 236 is not in use. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is sent to the MPU 231.

If all resident target image data has been transferred as a result of the processing of S7703 (S7703: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S7705) and the resident image transfer setting processing is terminated. As a result, in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 276(b)), instead of the simple command determination processing (see S6308 in FIG. 276(b)) and the simple display setting processing (see S6309 in FIG. 276(b)), the command determination processing (see FIG. 277 to FIG. 282) and the display setting processing (see FIG. 283 to FIG. 284(b)) are executed, so that the drawing of the normal image is set, and the normal image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In addition, the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 thereafter is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 286) (see S7601: No in FIG. 285(a)).

By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 can transfer all resident target image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, excluding the power-on main image and power-on variable image that have already been transferred during the main processing. The MPU 231 then controls the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 so that it continues to be retained without being overwritten while the power is on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process remains resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is on.

Therefore, after all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 can perform image drawing processing in the image controller 237 while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. As a result, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, there is no need to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, which is made up of the NAND type flash memory 234a, which has a slow readout speed, when drawing an image, so the time required for reading can be saved, and the image can be drawn immediately and displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 stores image data of frequently displayed images such as the back image, the third pattern, the character pattern, and error messages, as well as image data of images that should be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control unit 110, the audio lamp control unit 113, the display control unit 114, etc. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND type flash memory 234a, high responsiveness can be maintained from various operations performed by the player at any time to displaying some image on the third pattern display device 81.

Next, referring to FIG. 286, we will explain the normal image transfer setting process (S7603), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. FIG. 286 is a flowchart showing this normal image transfer setting process (S7603).

In this normal image transfer setting process, first, the information written at the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S7305) of the previously executed display setting process (S6303) is obtained from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S7801). Then, it is determined whether the obtained information is transfer data information (S7802), and if it is transfer data information (S7802: Yes), the start address (source start address) and end address (source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted from the transfer data information and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 (S7803), and further, a transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233, which indicates that image data to be transferred is present in the ON state, is set to ON (S7804), and the process proceeds to S7805.

In addition, in the process of S7802, if the acquired information is not transfer data information but is Null data (S7802: No), the processes of S7803 and S7804 are skipped and the process proceeds to S7805. In the process of S7805, it is determined whether a new image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer has ended (S7805), and if a transfer instruction has been set (S7805: Yes), it is further determined whether the image data transfer performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction has ended (S7806).

In the process of S7806, after setting an instruction to transfer image data to the image controller 237, if a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. Then, if it is determined by the process of S7806 that the transfer process has not ended (S7806: No), the image transfer process is still being performed in the image controller 237, so this normal image transfer setting process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (S7806: Yes), the process proceeds to S7807. Also, if the result of the process of S7805 shows that an instruction to transfer image data has not been set for the image controller 237 after the end of the previous transfer process (S7805: No), the process proceeds to S7807.

In the processing of S7807, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S7807). If the transfer start flag is on (S7807: Yes), image data for which transfer should begin is present, so the transfer start flag is turned off (S7808), the image data of the sprite indicated by the various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the processing of S7803 is set as the image data to be transferred, and processing proceeds to S7809. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S7807: No), this processing ends.

In the process of S7809, it is determined whether the image data to be transferred is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S7809). This determination in the process of S7809 is made by referencing the stored image data determination flag 233i. That is, the storage status corresponding to the sprite that is the image data to be transferred is read from the stored image data determination flag 233i, and if the storage status is "on", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 236, and if the storage status is "off", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

If the result of the processing of S7809 is that the image data to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S7809: Yes), there is no need to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and the normal image transfer setting process is terminated. This makes it possible to prevent image data from being transferred unnecessarily from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, thereby reducing the processing burden on each part of the display control device 114 and reducing traffic on the bus line 240.

On the other hand, if the result of the processing of S7809 is that the image data to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S7809: No), a transfer instruction for the image data to be transferred is set (S7810). As a result, the transfer data information for the image data to be transferred is included in the drawing list sent to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 can transfer the image data of the image to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 based on the transfer data information described in the drawing list. The transfer data information includes the start address and the end address of the character ROM 234 where the image data of the image to be transferred is stored, the information of the transfer destination (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the start address of the transfer destination (a sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 where the image data of the image to be transferred here should be stored). The image controller 237 executes the image transfer process based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and transfers it to the specified address of the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). Then, when the transfer is complete, it transmits a transfer end signal to the MPU 231.

After processing of S7810, the stored image data discrimination flag 233i is updated (S7811), and this normal transfer setting process is terminated. As described above, the stored image data discrimination flag 233i is updated by setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the image data to be transferred to "on," and by setting the storage state corresponding to other sprites that are to be stored in the same sub-area of the image storage area 236a as that one sprite to "off."

In this way, by executing this normal image transfer process, a process corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the previously executed command determination process, and as a result, if it is determined that the stop type information indicated by the display stop type command is a jackpot stop type, image data used in the fanfare performance can be transferred without delay from character ROM 234 to normal video RAM 236. Also, if the rear image is changed based on the reception of a rear image change command in the previously executed command determination process, image data used for that rear image that is not stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 can be transferred without delay from character ROM 234 to normal video RAM 236.

In addition, in this embodiment, in response to a command (e.g., a display variation pattern command) sent from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, a display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and at the same time, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Then, by executing the normal image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 sets a transfer instruction for the image controller 237 for the image data to be transferred according to the transfer data information written in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, so that the image data of the sprite used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at the desired timing.

In this case, the transfer data table specifies the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred for a specific address so that the image data corresponding to a specific sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time drawing of the specific sprite begins in accordance with the display data table. By transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, when drawing a specific sprite in accordance with the display data table, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and is necessary for drawing the sprite can be ensured to be stored in the image storage area 236a.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured using a NAND-type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the images required for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the corresponding effects can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 while drawing the images of each sprite specified in the display data table. Also, by writing in the transfer data table, only the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The transfer data table also specifies the transfer data information so that image data is transferred from character ROM 234 to normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. This allows the transfer of image data to be managed and controlled for each sprite, making it easy to process the transfer. By controlling the transfer of image data from character ROM 234 to normal video RAM 236 on a sprite-by-sprite basis, the process can be made easier while controlling the transfer of image data in detail. This makes it possible to efficiently prevent an increase in the load on the transfer.

Next, referring to FIG. 287, the above-mentioned drawing process (S6306), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described in detail. FIG. 287 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

In the drawing process, a drawing list as shown in FIG. 237 is generated (S7901) from the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S6304), the parameters required for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, magnification ratio, rotation angle, semi-transparency value, alpha blending information, color information, filter specification information), and the transfer instructions set in the transfer setting process (S6305). That is, in the process of S7901, from the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S6304), the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of that sprite is stored are identified for each sprite, and the parameters required for that sprite determined in the task process are associated with the identified storage RAM type and address. Then, the sprites are rearranged in the order of the sprites that should be placed furthest behind the sprites that should be placed in the foreground in one frame of image, and a drawing list is generated by describing, in the rearranged sprite order, the type and address of the storage RAM in which the image data of the sprites are stored and the parameters required for drawing the sprites as detailed drawing information (detailed information) for each sprite. Also, if a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S6305), the start address (start address of the storage source) and the end address (end address of the storage source) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are added as transfer data information to the end of the drawing list.

As mentioned above, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored, or the sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236, is fixed for each sprite, so the MPU 231 can instantly identify the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored according to the sprite type, and easily include this information in the detailed information of the drawing list.

When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j are sent to the image controller (S7902). Here, if the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the drawing target buffer information includes information instructing the first frame buffer 236b to expand the image drawn, and if the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 1, the drawing target buffer information includes information instructing the second frame buffer 236c to expand the image drawn.

Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 draws images starting from the sprite described at the top of the drawing list, and expands them by overwriting them in the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information. This allows the first sprite drawn to be positioned at the backmost position, and the last sprite drawn to be positioned at the foremost position, in one frame's worth of image generated by the drawing list.

If the drawing list contains transfer data information, the start address (source start address) and end address (source end address) of character ROM 234 where the image data to be transferred is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted from the transfer data information, and the image data stored from the source start address to the source end address are read out of character ROM 234 in order and temporarily stored in buffer RAM 237a, and then, when the normal video RAM 236 is in an unused state, the image data stored in buffer RAM 237a is transferred sequentially to the area of normal video RAM 236 indicated by the destination start address. The image data stored in this normal video RAM 236 is then used based on the drawing list sent by MPU 231, and an image is drawn according to the drawing list.

The image controller 237 reads image information of the previously expanded image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information, and transmits the image information to the third pattern display device 81 together with a drive signal. This allows the third pattern display device 81 to display the image expanded in the frame buffer. Also, while an image drawn in one frame buffer is being expanded, an image expanded from the other frame buffer can be displayed on the third pattern display 81, allowing the drawing process and the display process to be processed simultaneously in parallel.

After the processing of S7902, the drawing process updates the drawing target buffer flag 233j (S7903). Then, the drawing process ends and returns to the V interrupt processing. The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated by inverting its value, i.e., by setting the value to "1" if it was "0" and to "0" if it was "1". As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time a drawing list is transmitted.

Here, the drawing list is transmitted each time the drawing process of the V interrupt process (see FIG. 276(b)) executed by the MPU 231 is executed based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and display process of one frame of the image are completed. As a result, when the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer that displays one frame of the image at a certain timing, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of one frame is read, and the image drawing process and display process are executed, 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of one frame of the image is completed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer that displays one frame of the image, and the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of one frame is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously displayed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is displayed in the second frame buffer 236c.

Then, after another 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the frame buffer in which one frame's worth of image is displayed, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read. Thus, the image information of the image previously displayed in the second frame buffer 236c is read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is displayed in the first frame buffer 236b. Thereafter, by alternately specifying the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c as the frame buffer in which one frame's worth of image is displayed and the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read, each time every 20 milliseconds, it is possible to perform the display process of one frame's worth of image continuously in 20 millisecond units while performing the drawing process of one frame's worth of image.

In addition, in the above embodiment, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are provided separately, but instead, the devices 113 and 114 may be integrated and provided as a single device.

In addition, in the above embodiment, a command is first sent from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113, and when the command is received by the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 determines the command to be sent to the display control device 114, and then the command is sent from the voice lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114. In contrast to this, a command may be first sent from the main control device 110 to the display control device 114, and when the command is received by the display control device 114, the display control device 114 determines the command to be sent to the voice lamp control device 113, and then the command is sent from the display control device 114 to the voice lamp control device 113.

In the above embodiment, the image controller 237 executes the process of transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the MPU 231 may directly access the character ROM 234, read image data from the character ROM 234, and transfer the image data to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. In this case, the MPU 231 may temporarily store the image data read from the character ROM 234 in the buffer RAM 237a, and then determine whether the destination resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is unused. If it is unused, the image data may be transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the destination resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236.

In this case, whether the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 of the transfer destination is unused may be determined by providing the image controller 237 with a resident video RAM access flag (not shown) indicating that the image controller 237 is accessing the resident video RAM 235 (i.e., in use) and a normal video RAM access flag (not shown) indicating that the image controller 237 is accessing the normal video RAM 236 (i.e., in use), and the MPU 231 checking the access flag corresponding to the buffer RAM of the transfer destination.

Alternatively, the MPU 231 may monitor signals transmitted between the image controller 237 and the resident video RAM 235, or signals transmitted between the image controller 237 and the normal video RAM 236, and check whether the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is unused based on the state of the signals. Alternatively, when the image controller 237 starts accessing the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, or when it ends its access, the image controller 237 may notify the MPU 231 of this information as needed, and the MPU 231 may determine whether the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is unused based on the notification.

Alternatively, when the image controller 237 scans the third pattern display device 81, the MPU 231 can determine whether the scan is in a blank period by checking the drive status of the image controller 237 or by receiving a notification from the image controller 237, and if the scanning state is in a blank period, it can determine that each video RAM 235, 236 is unused. In this way, the image controller 237 can easily make the determination by checking only the scanning state of the third pattern display device 81 to determine whether it is unused or not.

In this case, when transfer data information other than null data exists at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e or the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 may start a process of reading image data from the character ROM 234 and transferring it to the normal video RAM 236 according to the transfer data information. Here, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a specific address so that the image data corresponding to a specific sprite is stored in the normal video RAM 236 by the time the drawing of the specific sprite is started according to the display data table or the like. By transferring image data according to the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, when drawing a specific sprite according to the display data table or the like, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and is necessary for drawing the sprite can be stored in the normal video RAM 236 without fail. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 can be used to draw the specific sprite based on the display data table.

The process of reading image data from character ROM 234 and transferring it to normal video RAM 236 may be performed within the display main process or main process loop executed by MPU 231. This allows MPU 231 to execute image data transfer processing by utilizing time when important processes in display control device 114, such as command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing, are not being performed. Furthermore, since command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing are executed with priority over display main processing, MPU 231 can execute image data transfer processing without affecting command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing.

In the above embodiment, the MPU 231 may not use the addresses of the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 to manage each video RAM, but may assign different address areas to each video RAM in an address system commonly used by the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 to manage each video RAM. In this way, the MPU 231 does not directly specify to the image controller 237 the video RAM to be accessed (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236), but simply specifies an address, and the image controller 237 can determine whether the area specified by the address is for the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. In other words, when the MPU 231 specifies the video RAM to be accessed and the address of the area of that video RAM to the image controller 237, it is sufficient to simply specify an address set in the common address system, and the configuration of the command for specifying the video RAM can be simplified. For example, in the drawing list sent from the MPU 231 to the image controller 237, the information indicating the storage destination of sprite data does not include the storage RAM type, but simply specifies the storage destination address using an address set within a common address system, thereby simplifying the configuration of the drawing list.

In the above embodiment, the character ROM 234 is directly connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) that connects the MPU 231 and the image controller 237, but this is not necessarily limited to the above, and the character ROM 234 may be directly connected to the image controller 237. Also, a bridge circuit may be provided that converts the input/output specifications of the character ROM 234 into the input/output specifications of the mask ROM, and the character ROM 234 may be connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) or the image controller 237 via the bridge circuit.

By providing this bridge circuit, it is possible to connect the character ROM 234, which is configured with a NAND type flash memory 234a, by using the existing image controller 237 or internal bus (bus line 240), which are designed on the assumption that a general mask ROM will be used as the character ROM. Even if the character ROM 234 is connected via the image controller 237 or bridge circuit, it may be configured so that the character ROM 234 can be accessed directly from the MPU 231.

In the above embodiment, the character ROM 234 is configured as a NAND flash memory 234a, but this is not necessarily limited to this and may be configured as a large-capacity, inexpensive non-volatile storage means, such as a hard disk. Such large-capacity, inexpensive storage means generally have a slow read speed, but by configuring the display control device 114 as described in the above embodiment, it is possible to display the image at the desired time without any problems.

In the above embodiment, a NOR ROM 234d is provided in the character ROM 234, and a part of the boot program that is executed first in the MPU 231 after the system reset is released is stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. However, this is not necessarily limited to the above, and a first program storage area may be provided in a memory made of a non-volatile storage medium that can perform a read operation faster than the NAND flash memory 234a, and a part of the boot program that is executed first in the MPU 231 after the system reset is released may be stored in the first program storage area. For example, instead of the NOR ROM 234d, a Ferroelectric RAM (FeRAM), a Magnetoresistive RAM (MRAM), or a Phase change RAM (PRAM) may be provided in the character ROM 234, and a first program storage area may be provided in the first program storage area to store a part of the boot program that is executed first in the MPU 231 after the system reset is released.

In addition, in the above embodiment, a first program storage area 234d1 is provided in the NOR ROM 234d connected to the internal bus (bus line 240), and a portion of the boot program that is executed first in the MPU 231 after a system reset is released is stored in that area. However, this is not necessarily limited to this, and a memory composed of a non-volatile storage medium that can perform a read operation faster than the NAND flash memory 234a may be connected to the internal bus (bus line 240), a first program storage area is provided in that memory, and a portion of the boot program that is executed first in the MPU 231 after a system reset is released may be stored in that area. For example, instead of the NOR ROM 234d, a Ferroelectric RAM (FeRAM), a Magnetoresistive RAM (MRAM), or a Phase change RAM (PRAM) may be provided on the internal bus (bus line 240), and a first program storage area may be provided therein to store a portion of the boot program that is executed first after the system reset is released in the MPU 231.

In the above embodiment, when the ROM controller 234b detects that the address of the internal bus (bus line 240) is designated as "0000H", the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c, and the data (instruction code) corresponding to the designated address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231 via the internal bus (bus line 240). In contrast, when the ROM controller 234b detects that the power is turned on from the power supply device 115, the ROM controller 234b may set the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 in the buffer RAM 234c, and then, when the ROM controller 234b detects that the address of the internal bus (bus line 240) is designated as "0000H", the data (instruction code) corresponding to the designated address may be read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231 via the internal bus (bus line 240). In this case, when the MPU 231 designates the address "0000H" on the internal bus (bus line 240) after the system reset is released, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has already been set in the buffer RAM 234c or is in the process of being set, so that the character ROM 234 can output the corresponding data (instruction code) with less delay after the address "0000H" is designated by the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after designating the address "0000H", the MPU 231 can start the display main process in a short time. As a result, even if a control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control of the auxiliary performance section or the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

In addition, when the ROM controller 234b detects that the address specified on the internal bus (bus line 240) specifies the control program stored in the first program memory area 234d1, it may directly read data (instruction code) corresponding to the specified address from the first program memory area 234d1 and output it to the MPU 231 via the internal bus (bus line 240). As a result, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", so that the MPU 231 can start the display main process in a short time. As a result, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control of the auxiliary performance section or the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be immediately started. In this case, the process of setting the control program (boot program) stored in the first program memory area 234d1 to the buffer RAM 234c may not be performed. This reduces power consumption in the character ROM 234.

In the above embodiment, the resident video RAM 235 is connected to the image controller 237, but this is not necessarily limited to the above, and the resident video RAM 235 may be directly connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) to which the MPU 231, character ROM 234, and image controller 237 are connected. In addition, when the character ROM 234 is connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) or image controller 237 via the bridge circuit, the resident video RAM 235 may be connected to the bridge circuit. If the resident video RAM 235 is configured to be connected to the bridge circuit, the resident video RAM 235 can be easily provided in the display control device 114 even if the existing image controller 237 or internal bus (bus line 240) is not configured to be able to directly connect the resident video RAM 235.

In the above embodiment, a case has been described in which one resident video RAM 235 and one normal video RAM 236 are provided in the display control device 114, but the number of various video RAMs is not limited to this, and more video RAMs may be provided. Also, multiple resident video RAMs may be provided, each of which stores resident image data corresponding to images according to various modes, and the resident video RAM to be used may be selected according to the mode.

In the above embodiment, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are described as being configured from a single-port type (single input/output port) DRAM, but this is not necessarily limited to this, and a multi-port type RAM may be used. This allows writing to and reading from the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 to be performed simultaneously, so that, for example, image data can be read from the normal video RAM 236 to draw an image while image data read from the character ROM 234 is written to the normal video RAM 236 in parallel. This reduces the risk of delays in the drawing process due to the writing of image data.

In the above embodiment, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are configured as separate memories, but this is not necessarily limited to this. A single RAM may be divided into a resident area and a normal area, and the same contents as the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 may be stored in each area. When configuring a resident area and a normal area in a single RAM, it is preferable to use a multi-port RAM to prevent the input/output ports of the memory from being occupied by either the resident area or the normal area during read or write processing.

The type of image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 in the above embodiment is an example, and the type may be set appropriately depending on the content of the image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. In this case, it is preferable to make at least the image data corresponding to the image to be instantly displayed on the third pattern display device 81 resident in the resident video RAM 235 in response to a received command received from the main control device 110 or the voice lamp control device 113 or other external input.

In the above embodiment, a portion of the image data stored in character ROM 234 is transferred to resident video RAM 235 and made resident, but all of the image data stored in character ROM 234 may be transferred to resident video RAM 235. In this case, since the image data stored in non-resident character ROM 234 does not exist in resident video RAM 235, normal video RAM 236 may be used as a dedicated memory for storing drawn image data obtained by drawing by image controller 237.

In the above embodiment, the resident video RAM 235 is described as retaining its contents without being overwritten while the power is on, but this is not necessarily limited to the above. The image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 may be overwritten and updated based on a predetermined trigger, such as when the image displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is to be significantly different based on a command received from the main control device 110 or the voice lamp control device 113. In this case, a predetermined transitional image may be displayed as a transitional period while the image displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is being changed. The image data corresponding to the transitional image may be stored in the resident video RAM 235 when the power is turned on, and may continue to be retained in the resident video RAM 235 without being updated even when other resident images are updated. Also, while the transition image is being displayed, the MPU 231 may directly access the character ROM 234 to read the image data that is to be newly resident, and transfer the read image data via the buffer RAM 237a while the resident video RAM 235 is not in use (i.e., while the image data corresponding to the transition image is not being read). Alternatively, while the transition image is being displayed, the MPU 231 may transmit a transfer instruction (transfer data information) for the image data that is to be newly resident to the image controller 237, and the image controller 237 may read the image data that is to be resident from the character ROM 234 in accordance with the transfer instruction (transfer data information), and transfer the image data via the buffer RAM 237a while the resident video RAM 235 is not in use (i.e., while the image data corresponding to the transition image is not being read).

When updating the resident video RAM 235, image data corresponding to the transition image may be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in advance, and the transition image may be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236. Then, while the transition image is being displayed, the MPU 231 may directly access the character ROM 234 to read the image data to be newly resident, and transfer the read image data via the buffer RAM 237a. Alternatively, the image controller 237, which has received an instruction from the MPU 231 to transfer the image data to be resident, may access the character ROM 234 to read the image data to be newly resident, and transfer the read image data via the buffer RAM 237a. By updating the contents of the resident video RAM 235 while the transition image is being displayed, the resident video RAM 235 can be updated without causing the player to feel uncomfortable.

In the above embodiment, after all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is made resident, a RAM judgment value for judging whether the data in the resident video RAM 235 is normal when the power outage is resolved is stored, and during the main display process or main process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 after power is turned on, the RAM judgment value is checked before starting to transfer the main image data at power on from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and if the RAM judgment value is a normal value, this means that the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 continues to be stored normally, so the transfer of image data to the resident video RAM 235 may be prevented. In this case, the transfer of image data to the resident video RAM 235 may be prevented by turning off the simple image display flag. As a result, even if a system reset is input to the display control device 114 due to the occurrence of a momentary power outage and the execution of the display main process or the main process is started by the MPU 231, if the data in the resident video RAM 235 is stored normally, it is possible to prevent the image data from being transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in vain, and the time required for recovery from the power outage can be shortened. In particular, since the character ROM 234 is composed of the character ROM 234a with a slow read speed, it takes a long time to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. In contrast, by storing the RAM judgment value in the resident video RAM 235 as in this modified example, if the data in the resident video RAM 235 remains normal due to a momentary power outage or the like, the time required for the transfer of the image data can be shortened, so that the third symbol display device 81 can immediately display a normal performance image. Therefore, the player can immediately start playing. The RAM judgment value may be, for example, a checksum value of the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235. In addition, instead of using this RAM judgment value, the validity of the data may be determined based on whether or not a keyword written to a specific area of the resident video RAM 235 is correctly stored.

In the above embodiment, the buffer RAM 237a is provided in the image controller 237, but this is not necessarily limited to the above, and it may be provided outside the image controller 237. For example, the buffer RAM may be configured independently and directly connected to the internal bus (bus line 240). In addition, when the character ROM 234 is connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) or the image controller 237 via the bridge circuit, the buffer RAM may be provided in the bridge circuit. Furthermore, the resident video RAM 235 may be directly connected to the bridge circuit having the buffer RAM. In this case, image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 connected to the bridge circuit to the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM provided in the bridge circuit, so that the transfer can be performed efficiently without being affected by the internal bus (bus line 240) which has a lot of data signal exchange.

In the above embodiment, the storage capacity of the buffer RAM 237a is described as one block of the NAND type flash memory 234a, but this is not necessarily limited to this and may be set appropriately. For example, the storage capacity of the buffer RAM 237a may be set to a data capacity sufficient to complete the transfer of image data from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 during the period (blank period) during which the third pattern display device 81 scans a blank area, which is a scanning area other than the display area where the actual image is displayed. This allows the transfer of image data from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 to be reliably performed by utilizing the unused period of each video RAM 235, 236 that occurs during this blank period.

In the above embodiment, the case where one buffer RAM 237a is provided has been described, but this is not necessarily limited to this, and two or more buffer RAMs may be provided. In this case, while image data read from the character ROM 234 is stored in one buffer RAM, image data stored in another buffer RAM may be transferred to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. Also, one buffer RAM may be divided into two or more areas, and while image data read from the character ROM 234 is stored in one area, the image data may be transferred from the other area in which the image data is stored to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. In either case, the writing of image data read from the character ROM 234 to the buffer RAM and the transfer of image data written to the buffer RAM to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 can be processed in parallel, so that the time required for the processing can be shortened.

In the above embodiment, the case where image data corresponding to the power-on main image is transferred from character ROM 234 to power-on main image area 235a of resident video RAM 235 after power is turned on has been described, but the image data corresponding to the power-on main image may also be transferred from character ROM 234 to normal video RAM 236 after power is turned on. This makes it possible to transfer image data to be resident from character ROM 234 to resident video RAM 235 while displaying the power-on main image using image data corresponding to the power-on main image stored in normal video RAM 236. During this time, image data is not read from resident video RAM 235, so image data can be transferred from character ROM 234 to resident video RAM 235 without monitoring the usage status of resident video RAM 235. This makes it possible to complete the transfer of image data quickly and simplify the process.

Similarly, in the above embodiment, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variable image are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variable image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 after power is turned on. However, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variable image may be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after power is turned on. This allows the image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 to be transferred while the power-on image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 using the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variable image stored in the normal video RAM 236. During this time, image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235, so image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without monitoring the usage status of the resident video RAM 235. This allows the image data transfer to be completed quickly and simplifies the process.

In the above embodiment, a case was described in which image data corresponding to the power-on main image is transferred from character ROM 234 via buffer RAM 237a to power-on main image area 235a of resident video RAM 235. However, since image data is not read from resident video RAM 235 while image data corresponding to the power-on main image is being transferred, image data corresponding to the power-on main image may also be transferred directly from character ROM 234 to power-on main image area 235a of resident video RAM 235 without going through buffer RAM 237a. Also, in a configuration in which image data corresponding to the power-on main image is transferred from character ROM 234 to normal video RAM 236 after power is turned on, and the power-on main image is displayed using the image data corresponding to the power-on main image stored in normal video RAM 236, and image data that should be resident is not read from resident video RAM 235 while the image data is being transferred from character ROM 234 to resident video RAM 235, the image data that should be resident may be transferred directly from character ROM 234 to resident video RAM 235 without going through buffer RAM 237a. This allows the transfer of image data to be completed more quickly without going through buffer RAM 237a.

Similarly, in the above embodiment, a case has been described in which image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variable image are transferred from character ROM 234 via buffer RAM 237a to power-on main image area 235a and power-on variable image area 235b of resident video RAM 235. However, since image data is not read from resident video RAM 235 while image data corresponding to the power-on main image and power-on variable image are being transferred, image data corresponding to the power-on main image and power-on variable image may also be transferred directly from character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and power-on variable image area 235b of resident video RAM 235 without going through buffer RAM 237a. In addition, when image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variable image are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after power is turned on, and the power-on image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 using the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variable image stored in the normal video RAM 236, and image data that should be resident is not read from the resident video RAM 235 while the image data is being transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the image data that should be resident may be transferred directly from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without going through the buffer RAM 237a. This allows the transfer of image data to be completed more quickly without going through the buffer RAM 237a.

In the above embodiment, when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the sound lamp control device 113 generates a back image change command or a frame button operation command, and the display control device 114 changes the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the presentation mode of the super reach based on the back image change command or the frame button operation command, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the sound lamp control device 113 may grasp the game state of the gaming machine 10 based on the content of the command received from the main control device 110, and generate a back image change command or a game state command according to the game state, for example, in accordance with the change in the game state. As a result, the display control device 114 can change the presentation mode of the back image or the super reach according to the game state based on the back image change command or the game state command. The display control device 114 may also directly grasp the game state of the gaming machine 10 and change the presentation mode of the back image or the super reach according to the game state. Then, image data corresponding to at least a portion of the range of the rear image after the change, or the rear image corresponding to the super reach of the changed performance mode, is made resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, so that the rear image can be instantly displayed from the resident range using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c.

The display control device 114 may also change the rear image in accordance with the specifications of the display data table, transfer data table, additional data table, or composite data table. In this case, the image data corresponding to the changed rear image may be configured to be transferred in advance from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in accordance with the transfer data information described in the transfer data table, composite data table, or display data table. Here, when transferring image data of the rear image according to the transfer data information described in the transfer data table, composite data table, or display data table, the transfer data information of the transfer data table may be specified so that the new rear image is stored in a sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the original rear image is stored, or the transfer data information of the transfer data table may be specified so that the new rear image is stored in an area other than the sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the original rear image is stored. In the latter case, when returning the rear image to the original rear image selected and displayed by the player, it is not necessary to transfer image data corresponding to the original rear image again, so that an increase in the processing load of the display control device 114 can be suppressed.

In the above embodiment, the output signal of the vibration sensor is input to the voice lamp control device 113, and when a vibration error is detected by the voice lamp control device 113, an error command is sent to the display control device 114, causing the display control device 114 to immediately display a warning image on the third pattern display device 81. However, this is not necessarily limited to this, and the output signal of the vibration sensor may be input to the main control device 110, a vibration error may be detected by the main control device 110, and an error command notifying the main control device 110 of the error may be sent to either the voice lamp control device 113 or the display control device 114. When an error command is sent to the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 may receive the error command and further send an error command notifying the display control device 114 of the error.

On the other hand, the output signal of the vibration sensor may be input to the display control device 114, and the presence or absence of a vibration error may be detected by the display control device 114. If a vibration error is detected, an error occurrence flag may be turned on, and an error determination flag corresponding to the vibration error may be turned on. If the display setting process (see FIG. 283) determines that the error occurrence flag is on, a warning image setting process (see FIG. 284(a)) may be executed, thereby causing a warning image to be displayed immediately on the third pattern display device 81. In this case, this eliminates the need to send and receive error commands from the voice lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114, and therefore allows the warning image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 more quickly.

In the above embodiment, the vibration sensor is attached to the back of the game board 13, but instead of or together with the vibration sensor, a magnet sensor may be attached to the back of the game board 13. This magnet sensor is a sensor for detecting a magnetic field applied to the game board in order to prevent the ball from being intentionally thrown into the ball entry hole by changing the flow of the ball with a magnetic field such as a magnet, and the output signal of the magnet sensor may be input to any of the main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113, and the display control device 114. When the output signal of the magnet sensor is input to the main control device 110, if the main control device 110 determines that a magnetic field has been applied to the game board 13 based on the output signal of the magnet sensor, an error command conveying the magnetic field error may be sent from the main control device 110 to the display control device 114 via the sound lamp control device 113 or directly. In addition, when the output signal of the magnet sensor is input to the voice lamp control device 113, when the voice lamp control device 113 judges that a magnetic field has been applied to the game board 13 based on the output signal of the magnet sensor, an error command notifying the magnetic field error may be transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114. Then, the error message image area 235f of the resident video RAM 235 of the display control device 113 may be configured to be resident with image data corresponding to an error message image for notifying the magnetic field error by displaying the third pattern display device 81, and when an error command notifying the magnetic field error is received from the main control device 110 or the voice lamp control device 113, the display control device 113 may display the warning image on the third pattern display device 81. In addition, when the output signal of the magnet sensor is input to the display control device 110, when the display control device 114 judges that a magnetic field has been applied to the game board 13 based on the output signal of the magnet sensor, the display control device 113 may display the warning image on the third pattern display device 81 by setting the error occurrence flag on and the error type flag corresponding to the magnetic field error on. As a result, when the display control device 114 receives an error command from the main control device 110 or the voice lamp control device 113, or detects the occurrence of a magnetic field error based on an output signal from the magnet sensor, it can display an error message image notifying the magnetic field error without delay on the third pattern display device 81 using an error message image that is resident in the error message image area 235f of the resident video RAM 235, even if the character ROM 234 is configured with a NAND type flash memory 234a. Therefore, when a magnetic field is applied to the game board by a player, the magnetic field error is immediately notified by the display of an error message image by the third pattern display device 81, so that the player can be deterred from engaging in fraudulent behavior.

When the drawing contents required to change the color tone of a part or all of a performance are specified by an additional data table or a display data table, the additional data table or the display data table may correspond to an address expressed as a unit of time (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) for which one frame of an image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and may specify the type of sprite whose color tone is to be changed and color information specifying the color tone of the sprite after the change in that time. Then, when the type of sprite whose color tone is to be changed and color information specifying the color tone of the sprite after the change are specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the additional drawing contents specified in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 452d, the MPU 231 may replace the color information of the corresponding sprite type specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the drawing contents specified in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d with the color information specified by the additional drawing contents of the display data table to create a drawing list. This allows the image controller 237 to draw the image while changing the color tone of the sprite based on the color information defined by the additional data table.

In addition, when the drawing contents required to change and display an image displayed in one performance are specified by a display data table, the display data table may correspond to an address that represents the time (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) during which one frame of an image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as one unit, and may specify the sprite type to be replaced, the sprite type to be newly displayed, and the drawing information of the sprite to be newly displayed at that time. Then, when the sprite type to be replaced, the sprite type to be newly displayed, and the drawing information of the sprite to be newly displayed are specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the additional drawing contents specified in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 452d, the MPU 231 may include the sprite type to be newly displayed and the drawing information of the sprite in place of the sprite to be replaced among the various sprites specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the drawing contents specified in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. This allows the image controller 237 to draw an image that includes the new sprite to be displayed.

In the above embodiment, the display data table includes transfer data information of image data required to draw an image according to the drawing content specified in the display data table. In addition, the display data table may include transfer data information of image data required to draw an image according to the additional drawing content specified in the display data table (additional transfer data information). In this case, the additional transfer data information may be specified together with or separately from the additional drawing content, in association with identification information (such as "additional performance 1", "additional performance 2", etc.) for identifying the additionally displayable performance for each address. Then, when the MPU 231 determines the performance to be additionally displayed, it may be configured to create a drawing list including the additional drawing content and the additional transfer data information associated with the identification information corresponding to the determined performance.

In this way, the image controller 237 can transfer the image data of the sprites used in drawing according to the additional drawing contents to the normal video RAM 236 in advance according to the drawing list before the image data is used. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured with a NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the additional effects to be displayed can be easily and reliably displayed on the third pattern display device 81. Also, by using the additional transfer data information specified in the display data table, the necessary image data can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 while instructing the drawing of an image based on the additional drawing contents, so that the drawing of many sprites can be specified according to the additional drawing contents. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured with a NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, various types of effects can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

In the above embodiment, a case was described in which the drawing contents corresponding to all Super Reaches that can be selected by the player are specified in the display data table in a display table corresponding to a variation pattern that allows the player to select a Super Reach, and only the drawing contents corresponding to the Super Reach selected by the player are identified, but this is not necessarily limited to this, and the drawing contents corresponding to the selected Super Reach may be added to the display data table. This makes it easy to identify the drawing contents of the Super Reach selected by the player. Also, because there is no need to specify the drawing contents corresponding to all Super Reaches in the display data table, it is possible to prevent the data search in the display data table from becoming too large.

In the above embodiment, the display data table includes the drawing contents and the transfer data information, but this is not necessarily limited to this. The display data table may specify the drawing contents and the transfer data information, and the additional drawing contents of the effect to be added and displayed may be specified in the additional data table. In this case, the work RAM 233 may be provided with an additional data table buffer, and when the effect to be added and displayed is determined, the additional data table corresponding to the effect may be set in the additional data table buffer. In addition, the additional data table may specify not only the additional drawing contents, but also the transfer data information (additional transfer data information) of the image data required for drawing the image according to the additional drawing contents. This allows the drawing contents of the effect to be added and displayed and the transfer data information of the image required for the drawing to be specified using the additional data table, so that the processing load required for the specification can be reduced compared to the case where the drawing contents and the transfer data information are specified from the additional data table and the additional transfer data table, respectively.

In the above embodiment, the display control device 114 prepares a display data table for each variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a display data table may be prepared for each element of the variation performance, such as "variation start-up", "high-speed variation", "preview performance", "normal reach", and "super reach", and the elements required for the variation performance may be identified according to the variation pattern indicated in the display variation pattern command. Then, the display data tables corresponding to the identified papers required for the variation performance may be compiled into one, and a final regular display data table corresponding to the variation pattern may be generated. In many cases, "variation start-up", "high-speed variation", "normal reach", and the like are displayed in common to each variation pattern. Therefore, by breaking down the variation performance into elements in this way and preparing a display data table for each element, the data tables can be efficiently prepared.

In the above embodiment, a common pointer 233f is used in the display data table and the transfer data table to identify the drawing content and transfer data information from the address indicated by the pointer 233f. However, a pointer may be prepared for each data table.

In the above embodiment, the image controller 237 transmits a V interrupt signal to the MPU 231 at each display interval of one frame of an image at which the drawing process is completed (every 20 milliseconds in the above embodiment), but the image controller 237 may transmit this V interrupt signal to the MPU 231 each time the third pattern display device 81 is driven to display one frame of an image. The third pattern display device 81 is driven so that one frame of an image is always displayed at equal time intervals (20 millisecond intervals), so by transmitting a V interrupt signal each time one frame of an image is displayed, the time interval can be accurately maintained without having to be timed.

In the above embodiment, the image controller 237 identifies the frame buffer in which the drawn image should be displayed based on the drawing target buffer information sent from the MPU 231, and reads out the image information previously displayed from the other frame buffer and transmits it to the third pattern display device 81. However, this is not necessarily limited to this. The image controller 237 may alternately select the frame buffer in which the drawn image should be displayed each time it receives a drawing list, and read out the image information previously displayed from a frame buffer other than the selected frame buffer and transmit it to the third pattern display device 81. Also, the image controller 237 may switch the frame buffer in which the drawn image should be displayed and the frame buffer that outputs image information to the third pattern display device 81 each time it transmits one frame of image information to the third pattern display device 81.

In the above embodiment, after the confirmed display data table corresponding to the confirmed display performance is set in the display data table buffer 233d, if neither the variation pattern command (display variation pattern command) nor the demo command (display demo command) is received from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113 until the confirmed display performance ends, the demo display data table corresponding to the demo performance is set in the display data table buffer 233d. However, this may be set again to the display data table buffer 233d. In this case, the confirmed display data table corresponding to the confirmed display performance may be reset to the display data table buffer 233d each time the confirmed display performance ends until either the variation pattern command (display variation pattern command) or the demo command (display demo command) is received from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113. This allows the third pattern display device 81 to continue displaying the confirmed display performance until the variation pattern command or the demo command is received from the main control device 110.

In the above embodiment, a case was described in which the demo performance changes the back image and displays a frozen third pattern consisting of a main pattern without a number from "0" to "9." However, this is not necessarily limited to this, and the demo performance may be a frozen third pattern consisting of a main pattern with a number or a main pattern without a number, displayed in a semi-transparent state. Alternatively, the demo performance may change only the back image without displaying the third pattern. Alternatively, the demo performance may display a character or back image that is completely different from the third pattern or back image used in the variable display.

In the above embodiment, the display control means 114 first transfers image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variable image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variable image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 after power is turned on, and after the transfer is completed, the power-on main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and the remaining image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. However, this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, in the display control means 114, after power is turned on, first, only image data corresponding to the power-on main image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235, and after the transfer is completed, the power-on main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and then the image data to be resident, including the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image, is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. This allows the main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 sooner after the power is turned on, so that players, hall staff, or operational checks at the factory during manufacturing can immediately confirm that the pachinko machine 10 has started operating without any problems after the power is turned on.

In this case, the MPU 231 may also monitor the completion of the transfer of image data corresponding to the power-on variable image to the power-on variable image area 235b. As a result, if a display variable pattern command is received from the voice lamp control device 113 after image data corresponding to the power-on variable image is stored in the power-on variable image area 235b, a simplified variable display can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 using the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image stored in the power-on variable image area 235b based on the display variable pattern command. Note that it is preferable to transfer the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image to the power-on variable image area 235b immediately after the power-on main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81. This allows the variable display using the power-on variable image to be performed more quickly.

In the above embodiment, the display data table and the transfer data table are described as specifying the contents of the image to be drawn at that time (drawing contents) and the information of the image data to be transferred at that time (transfer data information) in accordance with a time expressed in units of 20 milliseconds, but this is not necessarily limited to this, and any display contents may be specified at a predetermined time interval. This predetermined time interval may be set according to the frame rate of the third pattern display device 81. For example, if the frame rate of the third pattern display device 81 is 30 fps, that is, the third pattern display device 81 displays 30 frames of images per second, the third pattern display device 81 displays one frame of image every 1/30 seconds, so the display data table may specify the display contents at every 1/30 second interval.

In addition, in the display data table, the sprite type to be drawn at each predetermined time interval may be specified as the address of the character ROM 234 where image data corresponding to that sprite type is stored, rather than specifying the sprite type itself. In order to read image data corresponding to the sprite type to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 from the character ROM 234, the display control device 114 manages the address of the character ROM 234 where the image data of that sprite type is stored in association with each sprite type. Therefore, if the address of the character ROM 234 where the image data corresponding to that sprite type is stored is specified as the display content to be displayed at each predetermined time interval in the display data table, it becomes unnecessary to manage both the information specifying the sprite and the address of the character ROM 234 in association with each sprite type, thereby reducing the processing load.

In the above embodiment, a stored image data discrimination flag 233i is provided in the work RAM 233 of the display control device 114, and whether or not the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is described as being stored for each sprite. Alternatively, information indicating the sprite type stored in the image storage area 236a may be stored in the work RAM 233. In this case, when instructing the transfer of image data of a specific sprite type, the MPU 231 may refer to the information indicating the sprite type stored in the image storage area 236a stored in the work RAM 233, determine whether or not the specific image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a, and if not, set a transfer instruction for the image data of the specific sprite type. In addition, when the MPU 231 sets a transfer instruction for image data of a specific sprite type, the MPU 231 may store information indicating the sprite type for which the transfer instruction is set in the work RAM 233, and erase information indicating the sprite type stored in the sub-area of the image storage area 236a in which the image data of the sprite type is stored.

In the above embodiment, when transferring image data of a specific sprite type from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the MPU 231 determines whether the image data of the sprite type is stored in the normal video RAM 236 based on the stored image data discrimination flag 233i, and if the image data of the specific sprite type is stored in the normal video RAM 236, the transfer process is not executed. However, this process may be performed by the image controller 237. In this case, a flag equivalent to the stored image data discrimination flag 233i may be prepared in the work RAM provided in the image controller 237, and whether the corresponding image data is stored in the normal video RAM 236 for each sprite may be stored. In addition, the sprite type stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 may be stored in the work RAM provided in the image controller 237. In this case, if it is necessary to transfer image data of a specific sprite type from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the MPU 231 may send transfer data information for that image data to the image controller 237, regardless of the storage state of the image data in the normal video RAM 236.

In the above embodiment, a case has been described in which only image data corresponding to "rear A" among multiple rear images is made resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, but this is not necessarily limited to the above, and image data corresponding to two or more rear images may be made resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. For example, image data of rear images used in some super reaches may be made resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. In particular, by making the rear images of super reaches that appear frequently or are expected to appear frequently resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, the number of times that the transfer process of image data from the character ROM 737 to the normal video RAM 536 is executed can be reduced.

In the above embodiment, the transfer command for image data is defined by the transfer data table or the display data table in association with the address indicated by the pointer 233f, and the MPU 231 controls the image controller 237 to transfer the image data specified by the transfer command from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a predetermined time defined by the display pointer. However, this is not necessarily limited to this. Information on the sprite type required in the display data table may be written at the beginning of the display data table, and the MPU 231 may control the image controller 237 to transfer the required image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 based on the information written at the beginning of the display data table. Alternatively, based on a command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 may determine the sprite type to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in response to the command, and control the image controller 237 to transfer the image data of that image type from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

In the above embodiment, a case was described in which the color tone of a portion of the image, rear C, which is the rear image of the "island stage," changes over time, but the color tone of the entire image may change over time. Furthermore, the rear image is not limited to one that scrolls or changes color over time, and instead of such a rear image, an object (e.g., a person) that appears may move or change over time.

In the above embodiment, the main control unit 110 includes in the reserved ball count command the information of the various counters (special win random number counter C1, special win type counter C2) acquired at the time of the initial winning, which it notifies to the voice lamp control unit 113. However, this is not necessarily limited to this, and the information of the various counters (special win random number counter C1, special win type counter C2) acquired at the time of the initial winning may be notified to the voice lamp control unit 113 by a separate command.

In the above embodiment, when executing the variation effect, a case was described in which high-speed variations are displayed in which all of the patterns Z1 to Z3 scroll so quickly that the player cannot see them. However, instead of displaying this high-speed variation, all of the patterns Z1 to Z3 may be displayed in a reduced size so that they are not visible to the player, or all of the patterns Z1 to Z3 may be displayed as a snow noise-like image in which numerous white dots are displayed randomly.

In the above embodiment, a case has been described in which one first start port 64a is arranged on the game board 13, in which a lottery for a jackpot with a special pattern is started when a ball enters the game board 13. However, this is not necessarily limited to this, and multiple (e.g., two) first ball entry ports, in which balls are detected independently and a lottery for a jackpot is started, may be arranged on the game board 13. In this case, the reserved ball count command sent by the main control unit 110 to the sound lamp control unit 113 when there is a reservation at each first ball entry port may include information indicating which first ball entry port the reservation is made through. In addition, the variation pattern command sent by the main control unit 110 to the sound lamp control unit 113 when starting a variation may also include information indicating which first ball entry port the variation performance is reserved through. As a result, in the audio lamp control device 113, a reserved ball counter is prepared for each first ball entrance, and when a reserved ball number command is received, the reserved ball number counter for the first ball entrance indicated in the reserved ball number command is set to the reserved ball number, and when a fluctuation pattern command is received, the reserved ball number counter for the first ball entrance indicated in the fluctuation pattern command is decremented by 1, allowing the number of reserved balls to be counted for each first ball entrance.

In the above embodiment, the case where the reserved ball number command is sent from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 every time the value (N) of the special pattern 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is updated in the main control device 110 (i.e., when it increases or decreases, respectively) is described, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the reserved number command is sent from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 only when the value (N) of the special pattern 1 reserved ball number counter 203d increases in the main control device 110. In addition, the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to decrease the value of the special pattern reserved ball number counter 223b by 1 when it receives a variable pattern command sent from the main control device 110. This can reduce the number of times the main control device 110 sends reserved number commands to the voice lamp control device 113 and the number of times the voice lamp control device 113 receives reserved number commands, respectively, thereby reducing the control burden on the main control device 110 and the voice lamp control device 113.

In the above embodiment, the winning entry into the first starting port 64a and the passing through the through gate 67 are each configured to be reserved up to four times, but the maximum number of reserved balls is not limited to four times and may be set to three times or less, or five times or more (e.g., eight times). In addition, the number of reserved balls displayed in the variable display based on the winning entry into the first starting port 64a may be displayed in a part of the third pattern display device 81 as numbers, or in four divided areas with different modes (e.g., colors or lighting patterns) depending on the number of reserved balls, and a light-emitting element such as a lamp may be provided separately from the first pattern display device 37 to notify the number of reserved balls.

As shown in the above embodiment, the variable display, which is one type of dynamic display, is not limited to vertical scrolling of the pattern as identification information on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81, but may be a display in which the pattern moves vertically or along a predetermined path such as an L-shape. The dynamic display of identification information is not limited to the variable display of the pattern, but also includes, for example, a performance display in which one or more characters are displayed in a variety of movements or changes together with the pattern or separately from the pattern. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third pattern.

<Second control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIG. 288 to FIG. 306. In addition to the contents described in the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, in this second control example, a control example in which a performance is executed to give points to a player, and the player can select the result of the special symbol hit or miss judgment and the reach content by consuming the points owned by the player himself will be mainly described. Note that the description of the same contents as the first control example will be omitted. Also, in this second control example, there are some parts described in the control process in which the performance etc. described in the first control example are deleted, but this is omitted for convenience of explanation, and naturally, in addition to all the contents described in the first control example, the contents of this second control example may be added. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the first control example are given the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

With reference to Figures 288 to 291, an example of a point acquisition effect and a point consumption effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in this control example will be described. Figure 288 is an example of a point acquisition effect. In this control example, in addition to the prize balls paid out to the player when the game ball enters a jackpot game or a general winning slot, etc., points (numerical prizes) are awarded as a special bonus to the player, and a point effect is executed in which the awarded points are accumulated.

Figures 288 (a)-(b) are diagrams showing a part of the display mode in the point acquisition effect variation pattern, which is one of the variation patterns determined by the voice lamp control device 113 and is set to execute the point acquisition effect. This point acquisition effect variation pattern is a variation pattern that is determined by lottery based on the variation pattern command obtained from the main control device 110 when the win/loss judgment result is a win or a miss. In the case of a win, it is configured with a variation pattern (dynamic display mode) that is displayed with a pattern (the third pattern is a combination of the same number) that finally notifies the player that it is a win, and in the case of a miss, it is configured with a variation pattern that is displayed with a pattern (the third pattern is a combination of numbers other than a number) that finally notifies the player that it is a miss.

Figure 288 (a) is a diagram showing a display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the execution of the point acquisition effect is started in the point acquisition effect variation pattern. This point acquisition effect is set to start in the middle of the execution period (dynamic display period) of the variation pattern regardless of whether it is a win or a miss, and the displayed third symbol is hidden or displayed in a state where the point acquisition effect displayed semi-transparently is easily visible, and information values (number patterns) indicating multiple point values are displayed rotating like a tornado along with the display of a tornado. In the same display area, a hero character 811b is displayed facing the tornado, and multiple (for example, four) swords are displayed above the hero's head. In the example of Figure 288 (a), four swords (a1 to a4) are displayed. It is announced that the effect allows the player to acquire point values by stabbing the point values with the swords against the many point values displayed rotating together with the tornado. Additionally, at the bottom of the display area, the words "GET POINTS!!" are displayed as a notification indicating that the player will be able to acquire points, making it easy to understand that the effect is to notify the player that one of the point values rotating with the tornado will be awarded to the player. Additionally, the total number of points currently acquired by the player is displayed in a total point display area Dm20 formed at the bottom left of the display area (above the display area Ds for the pending pattern being executed) (in the example of FIG. 288(a) the current number of points is 500).

Figure 288 (b) shows an example of the display mode when, in the point acquisition effect, swords displayed above the hero's head are shot (flew) towards the point value, and an effect is executed in which each sword pierces the point value.

The example in Figure 288(b) shows a case in which sword a1 is stuck at a point value of 100 points, sword a2 at a point value of 20 points, sword a3 at a point value of 50 points, and sword a4 at a point value of 70 points. The total point value acquired by the four swords is displayed at the bottom of the display area as the words "GET 240 POINTS!!". The total value displayed in the total point display area Dm20 is "740", which is the point value "500" shown in Figure 288(a) plus the currently acquired point value of "240".

In this control example, the points are awarded to the player mainly during the period when the special symbols are changing, and are displayed in accordance with the period when the preview display suggesting the lottery result is executed before the special symbol lottery result is displayed (the period from just before the end of the changing display period to when it is determined). The lottery result of the special symbol that has started changing, or the lottery result of the reserved special symbol that has been stored (pre-determination result) is judged before the change starts (pre-reading result) as one piece of selection information, and a point value is selected and a preview performance is executed to award the points to the player.

When the result of the change display or the hit/miss judgment of the stored reserved ball is a hit, a higher point value is more likely to be determined than when it is a miss. As a result, by displaying a preview of a high point value, it is possible to make the player expect that the lottery result of the changing special symbol or the reserved special symbol stored in memory may be a hit, and the player can play the game with anticipation of a hit not only for the change of the special symbol, but also for the reserved balls already stored. In other words, the preview display effect that awards the player with a point value displayed as a preview display is a preview display effect for the lottery result of the special symbol that is displayed in a change and that varies across multiple changes, and it is possible to make the player expect a longer period of time for the preview effect.

Even if point values are awarded but there is no winning result from the variation or the lottery results for the reserved special symbols, the awarded point values are accumulated and can be used for a later performance that uses the awarded point values (such as a performance that uses the point values to select a reach mode), and the larger the total accumulated point values, the more the player can use the point values to select a reach display mode with a high probability of winning.

As a result, when the total accumulated point value is large, and a reach selection variation pattern is executed in which the player can select the type of reach display mode using the point value, the player can have high expectations for a big win game. Therefore, the presentation in which the point value is awarded is not only for notifying the player of the variation of the special symbol and the lottery result of the reserved special symbol, but is also used to notify the player of the future lottery result when the game ball enters the first winning slot 64 or the second winning slot 640 and the lottery is executed, and the player can have high expectations for a big win for a longer period of time.

Although details will be described later, the display data for the point values displayed along with the tornado in the point acquisition effect shown in Figure 288(a) is set in the display control device 114 as individual data so that each can be set individually identifiable, and when the time comes to display the point acquisition effect, the sound lamp control device 113 determines by lottery the current point value and the lottery results for the variable or reserved special pattern to be thrust into the swords (a1 to a4).

In detail, a first basic point value, a second basic point value (low), and a second basic point value (high) are determined as the basic point values at the start of the fluctuation of the point acquisition presentation fluctuation pattern (fluctuation pattern of the point consumption presentation). At the start of the fluctuation, the point value is determined based on the total of the currently accumulated point values, the lottery result of the fluctuating special pattern (win/lose determination result), and the lottery result of the special pattern that is reserved and stored (winning information).

However, in the configuration of this control example, a preview performance in which a point value is awarded is executed at random timing after the special pattern begins to change, so by the time the point acquisition performance is actually executed, the total accumulated point value may have increased or the pre-read result of a newly entered reserved ball (a new reserved ball stored by winning in the first winning slot 64 or the second winning slot 640) may have changed to a winning value. At the time the preview performance in which this point value is awarded is executed, the current point value and the state of the lottery result must be determined again to determine the point value to be awarded.

In this control example, the point values determined when the point acquisition performance variation pattern is executed include the first basic points (a portion of the point value to be awarded is allocated to one or both of the two swords), the second basic points (low), which is a point value less than the point value to be awarded minus the first basic points, and the second basic points (high), which is the point value to be awarded minus the first basic points. If the accumulated points have increased by a reference value or more (e.g., 500 points or more) since the time of determination at the time the point acquisition performance is executed, a display command indicating the first basic points and the second basic points (low) is output to the display control device 114.

In addition, even if the cumulative point value has increased by more than the reference value since the time of determination, if a winning reserved ball is stored, a display command indicating the first basic point and the second basic point (high) is output to the display control device 114.

In this way, since the two patterns of point values are determined in advance at the time of determination, the control load at the time of executing the point acquisition performance can be reduced. In addition, in this second control example, by determining the above-mentioned two patterns of point values, the point value obtained by adding the point value (undisplayed point value) that can be granted to the player after the timing of the start of the change of the point acquisition performance variation pattern can be smoothly displayed at the timing when the point acquisition performance is executed, but without being limited to this, for example, in order to respond to a case where the point value (undisplayed point value) that can be granted to the player after the timing of the start of the change of the point acquisition performance variation pattern decreases, a second basic point (subtraction) from which the point value displayed in the total point display area Dm20 is subtracted may be set. In this way, even if the function of subtracting the point value that can be granted to the player is provided, a performance that does not feel strange to the player can be provided. In addition, in this control example, the number of points to be granted to the player in the point acquisition performance is determined by adding up two basic points, the first basic point and the second basic point, but without being limited to this, it may be configured to add up three or more basic point types. In addition, in the point acquisition performance described with reference to FIG. 288, all the points to be awarded to the player according to the result of one performance are displayed at once, but this is not limited to this and the point values may be awarded to the player at different times, or the point values may be awarded when the player performs a predetermined operation on the operation means (frame button 22). In this case, if the player does not operate the operation means, the point values to be awarded are not awarded to the player. For example, a storage means for storing the unawarded points is provided, and if the lottery result of the currently running special pattern variation is a lottery result that is favorable to the player (for example, a big win), the point values are automatically awarded, and if the lottery result of the currently running special pattern variation is a lottery result that is unfavorable to the player (for example, a miss), the unawarded points are awarded in the next point acquisition performance.

Next, referring to Fig. 289 to Fig. 291, the point presentation in this control example will be described. First, Fig. 289(a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when the execution of the point acquisition presentation with the reserved ball is started in the point acquisition presentation change pattern. In Fig. 289(a), the special pattern is changed, and the total points currently acquired (900 points in the example of Fig. 289(a)) is displayed in the point display area Dm3 of the main display area Dm, and the currently acquired points are clearly notified to the player. Then, in the sub-display area, the active pattern m0, the first reserved pattern m1, and the second reserved pattern m2 are displayed, and the reserved ball with 500p written on it is displayed in the second reserved pattern m2. In this way, in this control example, the result of determining the lottery result of the reserved special pattern before the start of the change (pre-reading result), it is possible to notify the player using the reserved ball that a point value will be given in the second change from the change. By configuring in this way, the player can have a sense of expectation that point values can be obtained not only by the result of the change, but also by the change of the reserved special pattern stored in reserve. In addition, the point-granting performance using the reserved ball may be displayed not only for the reserved ball stored in reserve, but also for the active pattern m0. By configuring in this way, the player can play the game while expecting to acquire unexpected points. In FIG. 289(a), the special pattern change display is being performed in the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81, and the fourth pattern (decorative pattern) corresponding to the first special pattern (special pattern 1) is displayed in a changing state (display mode showing a flashing state in the figure) in the special pattern 1 display area Dm1a. On the other hand, since the normal pattern is not displayed in a changing state, the fourth pattern (decorative pattern) corresponding to the normal pattern is displayed in a changing stop display mode in the normal pattern display area Dm2.

Figure 289(b) shows an example of a display mode for an effect that allows a player to select the desired reach for the next variation by consuming the points value currently acquired.

In the example of FIG. 289(b), the currently acquired point value is displayed in the point display area Dm3 (1800 points in the example of FIG. 289(b)), and the player can use this to select the reach for the next change. The reach patterns that can be selected this time are displayed in the main display area Dm, and the left option 822e, the middle option 822f, and the right option 822g are displayed. The words "Buy a reach!!" are displayed at the top of the main display area Dm, and the player is clearly informed that the current point value can be used to select the reach for the next change. In addition, a cursor ka is displayed in the center of the main display area Dm. As will be described in detail later, when the player presses the frame button 22, the displayed cursor ka moves under the options 822e to 822g, and the player can select the option he or she wants by aligning the cursor ka with it.

The options 822e-822g each display the reach details and the required point value, and in the example of Figure 289(b), the left option 822e displays "A reach 500 points," the middle option 822f displays "B reach 800 points," and the right option 822g displays "SP reach 10,000 points." The player can select a reach based on the display details of each option and the current acquired point value displayed in the point display area Dm3. In the example of Figure 289(b), the current point value is 1,800 points, so the player can select "A reach" or "B reach" from the left option 822e.

In this way, by configuring the player to be able to select the variation pattern of the next variation according to the current acquired point value, the player can have a sense of expectation for the point acquisition game, and the interest of the game can be increased. In addition, in this control example, it is configured to display the reach that cannot be selected with the current point value, as in the right option 822g, but it may be configured to display only the reach that can be selected with the current point value. By configuring in this way, the player can play without feeling disappointed that he cannot select the desired reach. In the performance example described with reference to FIG. 289(b), the reach that cannot be selected with the current point value is displayed, and for example, when the player selects a reach that cannot be selected with the current point value, the reach cannot be purchased, so that the normal reach that is initially set without using the acquired point value is executed. Also, unlike the performance example described with reference to FIG. 289(b), it may be configured to set a reach that does not use acquired points (for example, normal reach 0 points) as an option that the player can select. This makes it possible to use many points for the desired performance mode while accumulating acquired points. Furthermore, when the display screen shown in FIG. 289(b) is displayed and the player performs a predetermined operation on the operating means (frame button 22) or causes a ball to enter each winning hole arranged on the game board 13, the number of points displayed for each reach may be decreased when a variable condition is satisfied. This allows the player to play more actively. In addition, it is preferable to display at least two values on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81, for example, so that the player can grasp the total point value acquired in one point acquisition performance, the total point value already consumed, and the current point value.

Figure 290 shows an example of a presentation in which, when a pseudo-change of a special pattern is performed by the third pattern display device 81, the special pattern can be changed again using points.

In the example of FIG. 290(a), the main display area Dm displays the result of the special symbol being out of the game, temporarily stopped. The left symbol Z1 is displayed with a 7, the right symbol Z3 is displayed with a 7, and the game is ready to play, but the center symbol Z2 is displayed with a 4, and the game is ready to play, temporarily stopped as a missed game. The lower right corner of the main display area Dm displays the words "Use 500 points to re-change!!", informing the player that the special symbol can be re-changed by using the currently acquired point value. The presentation mode described with reference to FIG. 290(a) (presentation of executing a pseudo-change using acquired points) is executed, for example, after a normal reach that is executed when a specific reach is not purchased on the reach selection screen of FIG. 289(b). In other words, when a reach (e.g., SP reach 822g) with a set point value that cannot be purchased with the acquired point value is selected on the reach selection screen shown in FIG. 289(b), and none of the reaches can be purchased and a normal reach is executed, a reach presentation that is shorter than the other reach times (normal reach presentation) is executed. Then, the presentation screen shown in FIG. 289(b) is set according to the remaining period after the normal reach presentation is executed. In this way, in a variable presentation for showing the lottery result of one special symbol, if the point value is not used on one selection screen (reach purchase screen), the next selection screen (pseudo variable purchase screen) where points can be used is displayed, thereby encouraging the player to use the point value.

Figure 290(b) is a diagram showing an example of the display content when points are used to re-change the special symbol from Figure 290(a). In the main display area Dm, the left symbol Z1 and the right symbol Z3 are displayed as stopped 7s, and the center symbol Z2 is re-changed and displayed.

In this way, even if pseudo-fluctuation is set as the special symbol fluctuation pattern, by setting the point consumption effect, it is possible to provide the player with a sense of excitement even after the symbol fluctuation has stopped.

Figure 291 shows an example of display content in which some of the patterns displayed on the third pattern display device 81 are not changed (fixed) using the acquired point value. In Figure 291 (a), patterns Z1 to Z3 are displayed in a changing manner. The upper part of the main display area Dm displays the text "Use 2000 points to change the left pattern 3 times and hold it at pattern 7!!" In other words, the player is clearly informed that if 2000 points are used, the left pattern Z1 will be fixed at pattern 7, which has a higher chance of winning a jackpot, for the period from the change to the 3 changes.

Figure 291 (b) shows an example of the display content when the left symbol Z1 is fixed at 7. The main display area Dm displays the left symbol Z1, which is fixed at 7, and the middle symbol Z2 and right symbol Z3, which are changing. The top of the main display area Dm displays "2 changes remaining HOLD", informing the player in an easy-to-understand manner of the number of changes remaining before the left symbol Z1 is fixed.

This configuration increases the opportunities for point effects to be executed, giving players even more excitement for the point effects.

<Electrical configuration in second control example>
The electrical configuration of the second control example will be described with reference to Fig. 292 to Fig. 296. The second control example differs from the first control example in that a point selection table 222ad, a variable point selection table 222ae, and a consumption point selection table 222af are added to the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113. The other configurations are the same as those of the first control example, so their description will be omitted.

The point selection table 222ad is a selection table for selecting the point value to be awarded to the player in a preview, etc. Specifically, as shown in Figs. 293 and 294, the selection table is configured to switch between a state in which there is a reserved ball and a state in which there is no reserved ball. In a state in which there is a reserved ball (see Fig. 293), one of the reserved performances (a performance in which the reserved symbols are changed to award points (point values are displayed in the reserved symbols)), PUSH performances (a performance in which a point value is displayed and awarded by pressing the frame button 22), and character performances (a performance in which a preview character is displayed while the special symbols are changing and the character earns points) is determined by the acquired performance counter, and the point value set in the table is set. For example, if the acquired performance counter value is 100, 200 points is determined for the character performance.

In addition, when the special symbol is not being displayed in a variable manner (such as at a fixed timing), the reserved effect is forcibly selected; for example, if the value of the effect counter is 100, a reserved effect of 200 points is selected.

Next, when there are no reserved balls, a selection is made from the point selection table 222ae shown in FIG. 294. Note that this differs in that when there are no reserved balls, the reserved performance is not selected.

The variable point selection table 222ae is a selection table for setting the point value set in the point acquisition performance shown in FIG. 288. The variable point selection table is a table for selecting the first basic point (1st) and the second basic point (2nd (low), 2nd (high)). At the start of the fluctuation, the first basic point, the second basic point (low), and the second basic point (high) are selected. The first basic point is the point value displayed in the performance in any state, and the second basic point value is selected as the high point value, the second basic point (high), or the low point value, the second basic point (low), depending on the point value reserved by the player at the actual performance execution timing. The second basic point (high) is selected when the owned points are not higher by 1000 pts or more than the time of selection, while the second basic point (low) is displayed when the held points are higher by 1000 pts or more. The contents of the variable point selection table 222ae will be explained with reference to FIG. 295(a). In the variable point selection table 222ae, the values of the first basic point, the second basic point (low), and the second basic point (high) are defined according to the point value (current point value) selected with reference to the point selection table 222ae and the acquired value of the effect counter 223ad. Specifically, when the current point value is in the range of "0 to 300" and the acquired value of the effect counter 223ad is in the range of "0 to 10", the value of the first basic point is defined as "20", the value of the second basic point (low) is defined as "30", and the value of the second basic point (high) is defined as "100". When the acquired performance counter 223ad value is in the range of "11 to 20", the first basic point value is set to "50", the second basic point (low) value is set to "20", and the second basic point (high) value is set to "90". When the acquired performance counter 223ad value is in the range of "21 to 100", the first basic point value is set to "60", the second basic point (low) value is set to "20", and the second basic point (high) value is set to "100". When the acquired performance counter 223ad value is in the range of "101 to 150", the first basic point value is set to "20", the second basic point (low) value is set to "30", and the second basic point (high) value is set to "100". Below, it is specified that different values are set depending on the performance counter 223ad value and the current point value.

In this way, by making a selection so as to be able to respond even if the point value changes when the fluctuation starts, the processing load when the performance is executed can be reduced. In other words, the first basic point, the second basic point (low), or the second basic point (high) is selected by referring to the fluctuation point selection table 222ae based on the point value when the special pattern starts to fluctuate (the point value selected by referring to the point selection table 222ad), and the value to be added to the first basic point as the point value to be awarded in the current point acquisition performance is selected from the second basic point (low) or the second basic point (high) depending on the difference between the point value at the start timing of the point acquisition performance executed at a predetermined timing during the special pattern fluctuation period and the point value at the start of the current special pattern fluctuation, so that the processing load when the point acquisition performance is executed can be reduced.

As shown in FIG. 288(a), the points to be given to each sword (a1-a4) are determined by allocation based on the display position table shown in FIG. 295(b). When the obtained performance counter is 100, the first basic point value is allocated to sword a4 and sword a3. This allocation is made so that the first basic point value is within the selected first basic point value that is a possible combination for the point value displayed in FIG. 288(a). For example, when the performance counter is 100 and the reserved point value is 300, 60 points are selected as the first basic point value, 60 points as the second basic point (low), and 120 points as the second basic point (high). In addition, in the display position table, the first basic point value of 60 points is set to, for example, 40 points for sword a4 and 20 points for sword a3. Here, the display control device 114 is configured to set the display data for each sword and each point value shown in FIG. 288(a) individually for each point value, and by setting each sword in correspondence with each point value data, it is possible to execute an effect in which the point values selected in the variable point selection table are allocated to each sword and acquired by the player.

By configuring it in this way, even if the same first basic points are selected, the point value corresponding to each sword can be made random, allowing for a variety of effects. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to execute a variety of point acquisition effects with fewer fluctuation patterns than if multiple effects were set for the point values that can be acquired for each fluctuation pattern.

The point consumption selection table 222af is a data table for setting the amount of points consumed when selecting a point performance (performance executed using the acquired point value), and is specifically composed of a winning point consumption selection table 222af, which is referred to when the lottery result of the special pattern is a win (small win, big win), and a losing point consumption selection table 222af, which is referred to when the lottery result of the special pattern is a miss. The winning point consumption selection table 222g is a selection table for determining the points consumed for each reach in the consumption performance shown in FIG. 289(b) when the winning/losing judgment result is a winning variation. Specifically, it is selected based on the current points held and the acquired performance counter value as shown in FIG. 296(a). Specifically, when the currently held acquired point value is "0-300" and the value of the performance counter 223ad is in the range of "0-40", the consumption points "100" for the selection mode A, "150" for the selection mode B, and "200" for the selection mode C are specified, when the value of the performance counter 223ad is in the range of "41-150", the consumption points "130" for the selection mode A, "200" for the selection mode B, and "300" for the selection mode C are specified, and when the value of the performance counter 223ad is in the range of "151-198", the consumption points "150" for the selection mode A, "250" for the selection mode B, and "350" for the selection mode C are specified. As shown in FIG. 296(a), the consumption points set for each selection mode are specified according to the currently held acquired points and the acquired value of the performance counter 223ad. In this winning consumption point selection table 222af, the larger the reserved acquisition point value, the more consumption points are set. By configuring in this way, the point value acquired by the player can be used in the performance without waste, so the performance effect can be improved. In addition, in this embodiment, the consumption points are set for each of the three selection modes A to C. This allows various consumption points to be set for each selection mode displayed on the reach selection screen (see FIG. 289(b)). In the performance described with reference to FIG. 289(b), three selection modes are displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81, and selection mode A, selection mode B, and selection mode C are associated in order from the left, so that the three consumption points selected in the winning consumption point selection table 222af can be used without waste, but this is not limited to this, and the lottery result of the special pattern may be notified without using all of the three set consumption points.

The loss consumption point selection table 222f is a table for determining the point value to be selected when a loss variation display is being executed (see FIG. 296 (b)). The specific configuration is the same as that of the winning consumption point selection table, so its description is omitted. Next, referring to FIG. 292 (b), the contents of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this second control example will be described. The variation pattern selection counter 223aa is a counter whose value is updated by the counter update process (see S2113 in FIG. 297) of the main process (see FIG. 297) of the voice lamp control device 113, and is a loop counter whose value is updated in the range of "0 to 198". When the current variation pattern performance (variation performance) is selected by referring to the variation pattern selection table 222a based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110, the current value of the variation pattern selection counter 223aa is obtained. As a result, even if the same variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110, different variation performances can be executed on the voice lamp control device 113 side, so that a variety of performances can be executed without increasing the control load of the main control device 110. Note that, in the above-mentioned first control example, the same content is configured to select the variation performance. The point memory area 223ab is a storage area for temporarily storing point values that are variable due to the point acquisition performance (see FIG. 289(a)) and the point performance (see FIG. 289(b), FIG. 290). The point memory area 223ab stores the point value selected by the point selection table 222ad, and stores the point value actually acquired in the point acquisition performance among the point values selected by the variation point selection table 222ae. In addition, the point value consumed by the point performance is also stored. Note that, in this control example, the value of the point memory area 222ab is configured to accumulate unless it is cleared. Therefore, if the point value is selected multiple times by the point selection table 222ad without clearing the value of the point memory area 222ab, many points are stored. In this way, the remaining point value that can be given in the point acquisition performance, the point value acquired by the player by executing the point acquisition performance, and the point value that has already been consumed can be stored, so that the remaining point value that can be given and the point value that can be consumed can be easily calculated. The cursor position storage area 223ac is a storage area for storing which selection mode among multiple selection objects (for example, selection modes 822e to 822g (see FIG. 289(b))) was selected by the player by operating the operation means (frame button 22). Although detailed explanation is omitted, in this control example, multiple selection results (for example, 10) made by the player can be stored, and different selection modes are set according to the selection results selected in the past. For example, when the ratio of selection modes with high value (high consumption point value) selected among the multiple selection modes exceeds a predetermined ratio (for example, 50%), the selection mode with high consumption point value is easily set as the multiple selection modes. This makes it easier for the selection mode desired by the player to be displayed, so that the player can be motivated to participate in the game. The performance counter 223ad is composed of a loop counter that is repeatedly updated within the range of "0 to 198," and is updated each time the counter update process (S2113 in FIG. 297) of the main process (see FIG. 297) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is executed. Note that this counter update process (S2113 in FIG. 297) is configured so that multiple counters used in the performance are updated within a predetermined range without synchronization. This makes it easy to execute a variety of combinations of performances.

<Regarding the control process of the voice lamp control device in the second control example>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the second control example will be described with reference to Fig. 297 to Fig. 304. The control process of the voice lamp control device 113 in this second control example differs from the control process of the voice lamp control device 113 in the first control example described above in that a notice setting process (S2131), a special point selection process (S2132), and a consumption reach selection process (S2133) are added, and a command determination process 2 (S2134) is executed instead of the command determination process (S2114 in Fig. 258). Note that, for other processes, the same parts as those in the first embodiment are given the same reference numerals, and their description will be omitted.

First, the main processing in this second control example will be described with reference to FIG. 297. FIG. 297 is a flowchart showing the contents of the main processing in this second control example. The main processing in this second control example differs from the main processing in the first control example (see FIG. 257) in that after executing the LCD performance execution management processing (S2110), a notice setting processing (S2131), a special point selection processing (S2132), and a consumption reach selection processing (S2133) are added, the frame button input monitoring and performance processing (S2107) is replaced by a frame button input monitoring and performance processing 2 (S2130), and the command determination processing (S2114) is replaced by a command determination processing 2 (S2134). The other processing is the same, so a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, command determination process 2 (S2134) in this second control example will be described with reference to FIG. 298. FIG. 298 is a flowchart showing the contents of command determination process 2 (S2134) in this second control example. Command determination process 2 (S2134) in this second control example differs from command determination process (S2114) in the first control example in that if it is determined that a variation pattern command has been received (S2201: Yes), variation pattern reception process 2 (S2220) is executed. The other processes are the same, so detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted.

Next, referring to FIG. 299, the variation pattern reception process 2 (S2220) in this second control example will be described. FIG. 299 is a flowchart showing the contents of the variation pattern reception process 2 (S2220) in this second control example. The variation pattern reception process 2 (S2220) in this second control example differs from the variation pattern reception process (S2202) in the first control example in that it determines whether the currently received variation pattern command is a point acquisition performance and executes point selection processing. The other processes are the same, so detailed explanations thereof will be omitted.

In the variation pattern reception process 2 (S2220), first, the variation start flag 223d is set to ON (S2221), and the variation pattern is determined based on the currently received variation pattern command and the value of the variation pattern selection counter 223aa (S2222). Next, it is determined whether the variation pattern determined in the process of S2222 is a point acquisition effect (S2223). If it is determined that the determined variation pattern is a point acquisition effect (S2223: Yes), a point selection process is executed (S2224), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the determined variation pattern is not a point acquisition effect (S2223: No), this process is terminated as it is.

Next, referring to FIG. 300, the point selection process (S2224), which is one process of the variation pattern reception process 2 (S2220) in this second control example, will be described. FIG. 300 is a flowchart showing the contents of the point selection process (S2224). This point selection process (S2224) executes a process for setting a reference amount of points to be acquired in the point acquisition performance to be executed, and a process for determining whether or not to execute a point acquisition performance depending on the result of the lottery for the special pattern.

In the point selection process (S2224), first, the value of the point memory area 223ab is obtained (S2321), and it is determined whether the currently determined variation pattern is a win (S2322). If it is determined that the currently determined variation pattern is a win (S2322: Yes), it is determined whether the received winning information contains a win (S2323). If it is determined that the winning information contains a win (S2323: Yes), a no-point effect (0-point effect) is set (S2324), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S2322, if it is determined that the current variation pattern is not a win (i.e., a miss) (S2322: No), or if it is determined that the received winning information does not contain a win (S2323: No), a basic point is selected from the variation point selection table 222ae based on the current points and set in the first basic point setting area (S2325). Then, based on the current point value, a point value is selected from the second basic point selection table 222ae2, and the current point value and the selected point value are set in the second basic point setting area (S2326), and this process is terminated. In this way, by setting the reference value of the point value to be acquired in the point acquisition performance executed during the current special pattern change at the timing when the special pattern change starts at which the point acquisition performance is executed, the processing executed at the timing when the point acquisition performance is actually executed can be reduced. Also, in this control example, when the current special pattern change is a win (big win) and the winning information stored in reserve includes information indicating a win (big win), that is, when multiple big wins can be won in a short period of time, a special performance (no point performance) is executed. This no point performance is a performance in which a performance mode in which points cannot be acquired in the point acquisition performance described with reference to FIG. 288 (for example, a performance mode in which all swords a1 to a4 are blown away) is executed. Therefore, when the above-mentioned special performance is executed, the player can expect multiple big wins. When this special effect is executed, the swords a1 to a4 may be configured to pierce a jackpot symbol (for example, a "V") that indicates a jackpot, rather than a number symbol that resembles a point value, and the number of swords a1 to a4 pierced into the jackpot symbol may be configured to indicate to the player the special symbol change being executed and the number of wins (number of jackpots) included in the reserved and stored winning information. Also, when a no-point effect is set, the execution of the point acquisition effect may be prohibited and a normal effect may be executed. This can create a sense of expectation that if a jackpot is won through a normal effect (without the execution of a point acquisition effect), the reserved and stored winning information may contain information indicating a jackpot.

Next, referring to FIG. 301, the frame button input monitoring/performance process 2 (S2130) in this second control example will be described. FIG. 301 is a flowchart showing the contents of the frame button input monitoring/performance process 2 (S2130) in this second control example. The frame button input monitoring/performance process 2 (S2130) in this second control example differs from the command determination process (S2114) in the first control example in that if it is determined that a variable pattern command has been received (S2201: Yes), operation processing related to point selection and determination is executed.

In the frame button input monitoring and performance process 2 (S2130), first, it is determined whether the value of the operation valid timer 223n is greater than 0, i.e., whether it is the valid period of the button operation (S2421). If it is determined that the value of the operation valid timer 223n is not greater than 0 (i.e., it is 0) (S2421: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2421 that the value of the operation valid timer 223n is greater than 0 (S2421: No), the value of the operation valid timer 223n is subtracted (S2422), and then it is determined whether the value of the operation valid timer 223n subtracted in the process of S2422 is greater than 0 (S2423). If it is determined that the subtracted value of the operation valid timer 223n is greater than 0 (S2423: Yes), a display command indicating the reach content corresponding to the cursor position is set (S2424), and the process proceeds to S2425. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2423 that the value of the operation validity timer 223n is 0 (S2423: No), the process of S2424 is skipped and the process proceeds to S2425.

After executing the process of S2423 or S2425, it is determined whether or not a selection operation has been performed (S2425). If it is determined that a selection operation has been performed (S2425: Yes), information corresponding to the operation is stored in the cursor position storage area 223ac (S2426), a display command corresponding to the cursor position is set (S2427), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2425 that a selection operation has not been performed (S2425: No), it is determined whether or not a decision operation has been performed (S2428). If it is determined that a decision operation has been performed (S2428: Yes), a reach command for display of the reach content determined in the process of S2428 is set (S2429), the points corresponding to the determined reach content are subtracted (S2430), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that a decision operation has been performed in the process of S2428 (S2428: No), this process is terminated as it is.

Next, the contents of the notice setting process (S2131) will be described with reference to FIG. 302. FIG. 302 is a flowchart showing the contents of the notice setting process (S2131). The notice setting process (S2131) is one process within the main process (FIG. 297) in this second control example, and when the special pattern is changing, a process is executed to select the point value for the point presentation from the point selection table 222ad.

In the notice setting process (S2131), first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is changing (S2511). If it is determined that the special symbol is not changing (S2511: No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special symbol is changing in the process of S2511 (S2511: Yes), it is determined whether or not it is within the execution period of the notice performance (S2512). Here, the execution period of the notice performance corresponds to, for example, a period in which the special symbol changes at high speed, or a period in which a performance corresponding to a super reach is not being executed in a reach state. If it is determined that it is within the execution period of the notice performance (S2512: Yes), the value of the performance counter 223ad is obtained (S2513), and a point value is selected from the point selection table 222ad based on the value of the performance counter 223ad obtained in the process of S2513 (S2514), and this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2512 that the period during which the notice can be executed is not in progress (S2512: No), it is determined whether the number of reserved balls is greater than 0 (S2515). If it is determined that the number of reserved balls is greater than 0 (S2515: Yes), since it is a period during which the reserved performance can be executed, the value of the performance counter 223ad is acquired (S2516), and points for the reserved performance are selected from the point selection table 222ad based on the value of the performance counter 223ad acquired in the process of S2516 (S2517), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the number of reserved balls is 0 in the process of S2515 (S2515: No), it is determined that the notice cannot be set, and this process is terminated as it is. As described above, in this second control example, as a performance that allows the player to earn points, a point acquisition performance executed as a variation performance executed in response to a special pattern variation, a notice performance executed independently of the variation performance of the special pattern, and a reserved performance are configured to be set. By configuring in this way, since the point value can be acquired at various timings, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored of the game early. Furthermore, even outside the notice execution period (period during which the notice performance cannot be executed), if the number of reserved balls is 1 or more, it is possible to execute a performance in which the point value is acquired using the reserved patterns m1 to m8 (see FIG. 289(a)) for indicating the number of reserved balls, so that the player can play with enthusiasm in order to secure the number of reserved balls. Note that the timing of executing the performance in which the point value is acquired is not limited to the contents of this second control example, and for example, the reserved performance may be configured to be executed even in a state in which the special pattern change is not being executed (for example, during a jackpot game). Furthermore, if a no-point performance is set as the variation performance of the special pattern change, it is preferable to configure so that the player cannot acquire the point value even by the notice setting process (S2131 in FIG. 302).

Next, the contents of the special point selection process (S2132) will be explained with reference to FIG. 303. FIG. 303 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special point selection process (S2132).

In the special point selection process (S2132), first, it is determined whether or not a change is occurring that will result in a point effect (S2611). If it is determined that the change is not a change that will result in a point effect (S2611: No), this process ends as is. Meanwhile, in the process of S2611, it is determined whether or not it is the timing for point setting (S2612). If it is determined that it is not the timing for point setting (S2612: No), this process ends as is. Meanwhile, if it is determined that it is the timing for point setting (S2612: Yes), it is determined whether or not the current point effect is an effect that sets 0 points (S2613). If it is determined that the current point effect is an effect that sets 0 points (S2613: Yes), this process ends as is. Meanwhile, if it is determined in the process of S2613 that the current effect is not an effect that sets 0 points (S2613: No), the process moves to S2614.

After executing the process of S2613, it is next determined whether there is winning information in the winning information storage area 223f (S2614). If it is determined that there is a winning information in the winning information storage area 223f (S2614: Yes), a display command indicating the high points in the first basic point setting area and the second basic point setting area is set (S2615), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2614 that there is no winning information in the winning information storage area 223f (S2614: No), it is determined whether the difference between the points to be acquired this time and the current points is 1000 points or more (S2616). If it is determined that the difference between the points to be acquired this time and the current points is 1000 points or more (S2616: Yes), the above-mentioned process of S2615 is executed, and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S2616, if it is determined that the difference between the points to be acquired this time and the current points is not 1000 points or more (S2616: No), a display command indicating the lower point between the first basic point setting area and the second basic point setting area is set (S2617), and this process is terminated. According to the above-mentioned special point selection process (S2132 in FIG. 303), in the process of S2616, if the difference between the point value at the start of the current special pattern change and the current point value is 1000 points or more, that is, if a performance in which a large number of points are acquired is executed by a notice performance or a reserved performance during the special pattern change, a performance in which a large number of points can be acquired is executed in the point acquisition performance. However, conversely, if a performance in which a large number of points are acquired by a notice performance or a reserved performance during the special pattern change is executed, a performance in which only a small number of points can be acquired in the point acquisition performance may be executed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the point value acquired by the player from becoming excessively large.

Next, the contents of the consumption reach selection process (S2133) will be described with reference to FIG. 304. FIG. 304 is a flowchart showing the contents of the consumption reach selection process (S2133). In this control example, the presentation mode of the consumption reach is set not at the timing when the special pattern variation starts, but at the timing when the consumption reach is executed at a predetermined timing during the special pattern variation period (for example, 30 seconds after the variation starts). In other words, the presentation mode of the consumption reach (point values corresponding to each selection mode selectable in the consumption reach) is set based on the point value acquired by the player at the timing when the consumption reach is executed, not the point value acquired by the player at the timing when the special pattern variation starts. This makes it possible to execute a consumption reach that corresponds to a more real-time point value, thereby enhancing the presentation effect.

In the consumption reach selection process (S2133), first, it is determined whether the consumption reach is executable (S2711). Here, the determination of whether the consumption reach is executable is based on the determination result of whether the fluctuation pattern determined in the process of S2222 of the fluctuation pattern reception process 2 (see S2220 in FIG. 299) is a fluctuation pattern including the consumption reach and whether the acquired point value currently stored in the point storage area 222ab is a predetermined amount (for example, 200 points) or more. If it is determined that the current fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern including the consumption reach and the acquired point value is 200 or more, it is determined that the consumption reach is in an executable state. In the process of S2711, if it is determined that the consumption reach is not executable (S2711: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the consumption reach is executable (S2711: Yes), it is determined whether it is the timing to select reach data (S2712). In this control example, the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 has a measuring means (not shown) that measures the elapsed time since the variable performance was executed, and determines whether or not it is currently the timing to execute a consumption reach based on the measurement results of the measuring means. If it is determined that it is not the timing to select reach data (timing to execute a consumption reach) (S2712: No), this process ends as is. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is the timing to select reach data (timing to execute a consumption reach) (S2712: Yes), processing proceeds to S2713.

In the process of S2713, it is determined whether the current fluctuation is a winning fluctuation pattern (S2713). If it is determined that the current fluctuation is a winning one (S2713: Yes), the consumption points are set based on the current number of points from the winning consumption point selection table 222af (S2714), and the process proceeds to S2717. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2713 that the current fluctuation is not a winning fluctuation pattern (i.e., a miss), it is determined whether the current points are equal to or greater than the set value (S2715). If it is determined that the current points are not equal to or greater than the set value (S2715: No), the process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2715 that the current points are equal to or greater than the set value (S2715: Yes), the consumption points are set based on the current number of points from the consumption point selection table 222af for losses (S2716), and the process proceeds to S2717. In the process of S2717, a reach selection command for display corresponding to the selected reach performance for which the selected consumption points have been set is set (S2717), and this process ends.

<Regarding control process of the display control device in the second control example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 in this second control example will be described with reference to Fig. 305 and Fig. 306. The process in the display control device 114 in this second control example differs from the process in the display control device 114 in the first control example in that V interrupt process 2 (see Fig. 305) is executed instead of V interrupt process (see Fig. 276 (b)), and command judgment process 2 (S6311 in Fig. 306) is executed instead of command judgment process (S6302 in Fig. 277). Note that, for other processes, the same reference numerals are attached to the same parts as in the first control example, and the description thereof will be omitted.

Next, referring to FIG. 305, the V interrupt processing 2 executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 in this second control example will be described. FIG. 305 is a flowchart showing the contents of V interrupt processing 2. The difference is that V interrupt processing 2 in this second control example executes command judgment processing 2 (S6311) instead of command judgment processing (S6302). The other processing is the same, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, referring to FIG. 306, we will explain command determination process 2 (S6311) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 in this second control example. FIG. 306 is a flowchart showing the contents of command determination process 2 (S6311).

In the command determination process 2 (S6311) in this second control example, if it is determined in the process of S6408 that there is no preview display command for this time (S6408: No), it is determined whether there is a display point command (S6421). If it is determined that there is a display point command (S6421: Yes), the point command received this time is set in the display point storage area (S6422), and the process returns to the process of S6401. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6421 that there is no display point command (S6421: No), it is determined whether there is a display performance point command (S6423). If it is determined that there is a display performance point command (S6423: Yes), the point display process (S6424) is executed, and the process returns to the process of S6401.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S6423 that there is no display performance point command (S6423: No), it is determined whether there is a display reach command (S6425). If it is determined that there is a display reach command (S6425: Yes), a display data table for the reach corresponding to the currently received command is set (S6426), and the processing returns to S6401. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S6425 that there is no display reach command (S6425: No), it is determined whether there is a display reach selection command (S6427), and if it is determined that there is a display reach selection command (S6427: Yes), a display data table for the corresponding selected reach is set (S6428), and the processing returns to S6401. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no display reach selection command (S6427: No), the processing proceeds to S6418.

<Regarding the third control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the third control example will be described with reference to Figures 307 to 319. In this third control example, the control in the above-mentioned lower displacement unit 400 will be described. Note that the above-mentioned first and second control examples may of course be combined with this third control example, but for convenience, some of the first and second control examples will be described without illustrating them.

In this third control example, we will explain the operation control of the lower displacement unit 400 and the control in the configuration in which the game ball is launched from the exit opening 471. Note that the explanation of the same contents as in the first control example will be omitted. Hereinafter, the same elements as in the first control example will be given the same reference numerals, and illustrations and explanations thereof will be omitted.

<Configuration of the lower displacement unit 400 in the third control example>
FIG. 307 is a front view of the lower displacement unit 400 in this third control example, which is roughly the same as FIG. 66 described above, but with the addition of a storage sensor SP5. The storage sensor SP5 is configured to detect the entrance of a game ball through the opening 451a (see FIG. 58) and to detect whether a game ball has entered the ball receiving section 467. Furthermore, since both ends of the ball receiving section 467 are arranged at positions where they can be detected, the position of the ball receiving section 467 can also be detected. Specifically, the storage sensor SP5 measures the time during which the object to be detected is continuously detected (measures the number of times that an ON signal (a signal output when an object to be detected) that is periodically output is continuously output), and if the measurement result is equal to or greater than a lower limit value and equal to or less than a predetermined value, it is determined that a game ball has entered, and if it is determined that the measurement result is equal to or greater than a specific value that is greater than the predetermined value, it is determined that a game ball has entered the ball receiving section 467. Furthermore, since the storage sensor SP5 is configured to be able to output an ON signal that can also determine the direction from which the detected object is approaching, the position of the ball receiving portion 467 can also be determined.

As a method of detecting the position of the ball receiving part, when the movable rack 464 is moved from the origin position toward the exit opening 471, the tip of the ball receiving part 467 is detected by the storage sensor SP5, and then the tip of the rear ball receiving part 467 is detected. In this case, the slide motor is driven 10 steps from the state in which the front storage sensor SP5 is turned on, and then stopped, so that the ball receiving part 467 can be moved to the ball receiving position (the position shown in Figure 307 (b)).

Furthermore, if the storage sensor turns on 20 steps after detecting the front end of the ball receiving portion 467 and before the slide motor KM2 is driven, it can be determined that a game ball is being held in the ball receiving portion 467 (a game ball has entered the ball receiving portion 467). Also, when the movable rack 464 is moved from the state in which it has moved to the launch position (position shown in FIG. 307(c)) to the origin position (position shown in FIG. 307(a)), the storage sensor SP5 detects the rear end (ball receiving portion 467) first, but the method for detecting the position of the ball receiving portion 467 is the same.

The storage sensor SP5 is composed of a reflective laser output sensor, and is a sensor in which the laser light output from the storage sensor SP5 to the front is blocked and the reflected laser light is detected by the detection section of the storage sensor SP5 (ON state).

The storage sensor SP5 can therefore not only detect when a gaming ball has entered the opening 451a, but also detect the state in which the gaming ball has entered the ball receiving section 467, detect the position of the ball receiving section 467, and detect the position of the movable rack 464. Although not shown in the figure, an origin position sensor is attached at a position where it can detect that the movable rack 464 is in the origin position (see FIG. 307(a)), and a launch position sensor is attached at a position where it can detect that the movable rack 464 is in the launch position (see FIG. 307(c)).

In the initial state (when the initial operation after power-on is completed), the movable rack 464 is moved to the origin position shown in FIG. 307(a). As already described with reference to FIG. 81, in the origin position, the abutment plate 464c rotates the bulge portion 543a backward to restrict the distribution of the game balls to the opening 451a. When the movable rack 464 moves from the origin position to the ball receiving position (see FIG. 307(b)), the bulge portion 543a rotates forward to distribute the game balls to the opening 451a. Here, the time required for the movable rack 363 to move to the ball receiving position is configured to be shorter than the time required for the game balls distributed in the direction of the opening 451a by the rotation of the distribution member 540 to reach the opening 451a. This prevents the game ball from entering the ball receiving section 467 before the ball receiving section 467 moves to the ball receiving position, preventing the game ball from being received by the ball receiving section 467.

When a game ball is received by the ball receiving portion 467, the movable rack 464 is moved to the origin position in this state, and then the tilt motor KM1 of the lower displacement unit 400 is driven to rotate and raise the lower displacement unit 400 to the first extended state (see FIG. 48). As a result, the lower displacement unit is driven to rise with the ball receiving portion 467 positioned on the rotation axis side of the lower displacement unit 400, so that the driving force required for lifting can be reduced, and the load on the motor, etc. can be reduced.

When the lower displacement unit 400 is in the first extension state, the lower displacement unit 400 is driven upward by the player's operation of the frame button 22. This drive is stopped when the slide motor KM2 is driven 30 steps, and then when the frame button 22 is operated, the slide motor KM2 is driven 30 steps to drive the displacement unit 400 downward. At this time, while driving 30 steps, it is determined whether the lower displacement unit 400 is detected (detected as ON) by the rising position sensor that detects that it is in the position of the first extension state, and it is configured to be stopped at the timing of detection. Also, in a state where the rising position sensor does not turn on even after driving 30 steps, the slide motor KM2 is driven further until the rising position sensor turns on. Note that, if the rising position sensor does not turn on even after driving 15 steps, the lower displacement unit 400 is stopped at a position raised 15 steps. In this way, it is clearly determined that there is a malfunction in which the rising position sensor does not turn on, and the game can be played by switching to control only the number of steps. In this case, the error may be notified by a lamp, display, external terminal, etc.

When the ending for the big win is set, the lower displacement unit is moved to the raised position, and then the movable rack 464 is moved toward the launch position, causing the game ball held in the ball receiving section 467 to be launched from the launch opening 471. The timing of launch is when the player operates the frame button 22, and if the frame button 22 is not operated even after the effective time of the frame button 22 has elapsed, the launch operation is automatically executed.

When the power is turned on, the initial operation described below is also performed in the lower displacement unit 400. If a small win or a big win C is being executed when a power outage occurs, when the power is turned on, the small win or big win C that was being executed is restored to the state when the power was turned off, and the third electric device 82a is opened. In that case, there is a risk that the game ball will enter the third electric device and flow down to the lower displacement unit 400 before the initial operation of the lower displacement unit 400 executed by the sound lamp control device 113 is completed.

In that case, a malfunction may occur in which the game ball enters through the opening 451a of the lower displacement unit 400 and enters the ball receiving portion 467, or in which the game ball enters through the opening 451a and enters the lower displacement unit 400 (see Figure 67 (c)). However, in this third control example, when a command (to execute a payout command or a winning presentation (a command to display a value corresponding to the number of paid-out winning balls on the third pattern display device 81)) is received from the main control device 110 based on the entry of a game ball into the third electric device 82a while the initial operation is being performed, monitoring of the storage sensor SP5 is started, and monitoring is performed to see if the storage sensor SP5 is on (identifying whether it is on at intervals (e.g., 4 ms) that allow a game ball to pass) until 2 seconds have elapsed since the initial operation is completed and either an ending command, a variation pattern command, or a customer waiting command (a command output from the main control device 110 when a certain period of time has elapsed in which no variation has been performed or neither the variation nor the launch handle has been operated).

By configuring in this way, even during the period when the third electric role is opened due to the timing of the execution of the initial operation, the storage sensor SP5 can be monitored during the period during which the game ball can enter the opening 451a, and it can be monitored whether the game ball has entered the lower displacement unit 400. When the storage sensor SP5 is monitored and the passage of the game ball is detected, the game ball is discharged from the lower displacement unit 400 at the timing when 2 seconds have elapsed since the ending command (a command output at the end of a big win game), the variable pattern command, or the customer waiting command was output, and the game ball is discharged from the lower displacement unit 400 in the discharge operation (the movable rack 464 moves to the launch position while the lower displacement unit 400 is in the origin position, and then moves to the origin position), and the game ball discharged from the exit opening 471 of the lower displacement unit 400 is collected from the collection port 411f (see FIG. 43).

As a result, even if a game ball is guided into the lower displacement unit 400 during the initial operation, the discharge operation is performed only after the game ball has reached a state where it cannot enter the lower displacement unit 400.

The ejection operation is performed two seconds after each of the above commands because the two-second delay is set in consideration of the time it takes from when the movable rack 464 moves from the launch position to the origin position and the distribution member 540 stops distributing game balls to the lower displacement unit 400 until the game ball reaches the opening 451a (the last distributed game ball).

When the above command is received from the main control device 110 based on the ball entering the third electric device while the initial operation is being performed, the selection of a performance (variation pattern) that tilts the lower displacement unit 400 is prohibited and its execution is prohibited when the storage sensor monitoring flag 223bi is turned on until the discharge operation is completed. In other words, performances using the lower displacement unit 400 are prohibited until the variation in which the discharge operation is completed.

On the other hand, if a command is received but the storage sensor monitoring flag 223bi is not turned on (i.e., OFF), the system is configured to monitor the storage sensor SP5 until a monitoring period of 2 seconds has elapsed since the reception of an ending command (a command output at the end of a jackpot game), a fluctuation pattern command, or a customer waiting command, and to prohibit the performance using the lower displacement unit 400 for fluctuations that begin before the end of that monitoring.

By configuring in this way, the lower displacement unit 400 is configured not to tilt when a game ball accidentally enters the lower displacement unit 400 due to the initial operation, so that the tilt motor KM1 is tilted when the game ball enters the lower displacement unit 400, and the tilt motor KM1 is subjected to an excessive load and damaged. In this control example, regardless of the state of the pachinko machine 10, a specific pattern of initial operation is configured to be executed as the initial operation executed when the power is turned on. However, without being limited to this, for example, when the power is turned off during a winning game (during a big win game of a big win C or during a small win game) and the power is turned on in that state, the initial operation for the lower displacement unit 400 may be configured to be executed with priority. In other words, the initial operation mode may be variably set depending on the game state when the power is turned on. In this case, for example, it is preferable to configure it so that the initial operation mode that completes the initial operation of the lower displacement unit 400 by the time the third electric role 82a is opened after the power is turned on can be set. This makes it possible to prevent the game ball from entering the lower displacement unit 400 during the initial operation.

<Electrical configuration in the third control example>
In this third control example, initial operation data 222ba, launch operation data 222bb, origin operation data 222bc, ejection operation data 222bd, first operation data 222be, and second operation data 222bf are added to the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 compared to the ROM 222 of the first control example. Other points are the same as those of the first control example, so their description will be omitted.

The initial operation data 222ba is movable data set to execute the initial operation of the lower displacement unit 400 executed when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 309, the type of motor to be driven, the drive direction, and the motor stop conditions are set for each operation status. The operation status is set in the initial operation setting process (S2021, see FIG. 312) executed in the start-up process executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 executed when the power is turned on, and starts from the initial value 0, is incremented by 1, the drive corresponding to that operation status is executed, and each time that execution is completed, the operation status is incremented and the required initial operation is executed in sequence. Note that, with respect to the drive direction set in the initial operation data 222ba, the + direction of the slide motor is the direction in which the motor is driven in the direction in which the movable rack 464 is moved from the origin position toward the firing position, and the + direction of the tilt motor is the direction in which the lower displacement unit 400 is rotated from the origin position (the retracted position sensor is on) toward the first extension state.

The launch operation data 222bb is operation data for driving the movable rack 464 from the origin position to the launch position to launch the game ball from the outlet opening 471. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 310(a), it is composed of data for driving the slide motor in the + direction until the launch position sensor turns on.

The origin operation data 222bc is movement data for returning to the origin to move the movable rack 464 and the lower displacement unit 400 to the origin position. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 310(b), after the game ball is launched from the ejection opening 471, the slide motor is driven in the negative direction (towards the origin position) until the origin position sensor turns on, and the tilt motor is driven in the negative direction (towards the retracted position (origin position)) until the retracted position sensor turns on.

In addition, when the lower displacement unit 400 is in the retracted position (origin position) and the ejection operation is performed by the operation of the movable rack 464, the setting of the movement data for the tilt motor is not performed.

The ejection operation data 222bd is operation data for ejecting a game ball that has entered the lower displacement unit 400, and is set to the same data as the launch operation data 222bb.

The first operation data 222be is operation data for receiving a game ball in the ball receiving section 467 when the lower displacement unit 400 is in the retracted position, and is drive data for moving the movable rack 464 from the origin position to the ball receiving position and then moving it back to the origin position (see FIG. 311(a)). This first operation data 222be is set to execute a big win game (big win C) or a small win game, that is, a winning game that opens the third electric role 82a (see S4002 in FIG. 315), and the ball that enters the third winning hole 82 during the winning game is stored in the ball receiving section 467, and then the movable rack 464 is positioned at the origin position to end the game. When a command (win-related command) indicating that a big win game of the big win C or a small win game is executed is received from the main control device 110, the corresponding flag among the big win flag 223ba and the small win flag 223bb is set to ON, and in the operation control process (see S2141 in FIG. 313) executed in the main process (see FIG. 313) of the voice lamp control device 113, it is determined whether the big win flag 223ba or the small win flag 223bb is set to ON, and if it is determined that either is set to ON, the first operation data 222be is set. Here, the contents stipulated in the first operation data 222be will be specifically explained with reference to FIG. 311(a). The first operation data 222be defines a plurality of operation statuses (operation status 1, operation status 3), and operation status 1 defines drive data for driving the movable rack 464 from the origin position in the plus direction (toward the launch position), and a termination condition is defined so that the operation of operation status 1 ends when the movable rack 464 is driven in the plus direction (toward the launch position) for another 10 steps after the storage sensor SP5 is turned on, that is, after the tip side (the tip on the launch position side) of the ball receiving portion 647 is detected by the storage sensor SP5. The position where the termination condition of this operation status 1 is satisfied becomes the ball receiving position of the movable rack 464 (see FIG. 307(b)). Then, when operation status 1 ends, the operation status 1 transitions to operation status 2. No drive data is defined for this operation status 2, and the movable rack 464 is maintained in a state where the termination condition of operation status 1 is satisfied. The end condition of the operation status 2 is configured to be established when the storage sensor SP5 detects that balls are stored in the ball receiving section 467, and when it is determined that the storage sensor SP5 detects the storage of balls while the operation status 2 is set, the end condition of the operation status 2 is established, and the operation status 2 is changed to the operation status 3. In the operation status 3, drive data is specified for driving the movable rack 464 in the negative direction (toward the origin position) until the origin sensor (not shown) detects the movable rack 464. Then, when it is determined that the origin sensor (not shown) detects the movable rack 464, the end condition of the operation status 3 is established, and the drive of the movable rack 464 based on the first operation data 222be is terminated. Then, when the drive of the movable rack 464 based on the first operation data 222be is terminated, the flags set to ON among the big win flag 223ba and the small win flag 223bb are set to OFF. By configuring in this way, it is possible to reliably store balls in the ball receiving portion 467 of the movable rack 464 during a winning game, and it is possible to suppress the operation of the movable rack 464 based on the first operation data 222be from being executed multiple times during one winning game. Furthermore, in this control example, the first operation data 222be for executing a series of driving operations for the movable rack 464 specifies an operation status (operation status 2) that does not drive the movable rack 464, and is configured not to drive the movable rack 464 until a condition other than the driving of the movable rack 464 (storage of balls by the ball receiving portion 467) is satisfied. In this way, by setting a period in which the movable rack 464 is not driven in the operation data 222be, it is possible to smoothly execute a series of driving operations. In the above description of the operation of the movable rack 464 using the first operation data 222be, an example was described in which the movable rack 464 was normally driven according to the contents defined in the first operation data 222be. However, in order to notify the outside of the occurrence of an abnormality early, for example, if the slide motor for driving the movable rack 464 breaks down, a time limit is set for each operation status defined in the first operation data 222be. This time limit is set to a time that is sufficient for the end condition (stop condition) to be satisfied if the movable rack 464 operates normally, and if the time limit has elapsed without the end condition being satisfied, an abnormality notification is output to the outside. Also, if it is within the time limit, the drive process for the movable rack 464 is repeatedly executed.

The second operation data 222bf is drive data that specifies the operation content of the lower displacement unit 400 executed during a specific period (round game period of the 8th round) in the jackpot game, and is for executing a provocative effect of swinging the lower displacement unit 400 in response to the operation of the frame button 22. Here, the second operation data 222bf will be specifically explained with reference to FIG. 311. When the 8th round of the jackpot game (jackpot game of jackpot C) is executed, the second operation data 222bf is set in the operation control process (see S2141 in FIG. 313) executed in the main process (see FIG. 313) of the sound lamp control device 113. In this second operation data 222bf, the drive data for driving the tilt motor for driving the lower displacement unit 400 in the up and down direction is specified by dividing it into three operation statuses. Specifically, when the second operation data 222bf is set, first, the operation status 1 for driving the lower displacement unit 400 in the plus direction (upward direction) is executed. The end condition (stop condition) of the drive of the lower displacement unit 400 based on this operation status 1 is specified so that it ends (stops) when the rise sensor (not shown) detects the risen lower displacement unit 400. Then, when the operation status 1 ends, it transitions to the operation status 2, and the drive content opposite to the drive content of the operation status 1 is executed. That is, the drive content for driving the tilt motor in the negative direction (downward direction) is specified in the operation status 2. The end condition (stop condition) of this operation status 2 is specified so that it ends (stops) when the retraction sensor (rise sensor) detects that the lower displacement unit 400 has descended to the down position. Then, when the player operates the frame button 22 in the state where the operation status 2 ends, the transition condition of the operation status is established, and it transitions to the operation status 3. In this operation status 3, the drive content for driving the lower displacement unit 400 in the positive direction (upward direction) by 30 steps of the tilt motor is specified, and when the drive operation for 30 steps is executed, the operation status 3 ends and transitions to the operation status 2. Thereafter, the operation status 2 and the operation status 3 are repeatedly executed until the specific period during the big win game (the round game period of the 8th round) ends. In this way, even when using a configuration in which the lower displacement unit 400 is driven (swinging operation) based on the operation of the frame button 22, the movable object can be driven smoothly by using the operation data (second operation data 222bf) indicating a series of operation contents. The second operation data 222bf may be configured as follows. Specifically, the lower displacement unit 400 may be configured to move to the raised position (first protruding state), and then to perform a tilting operation (swinging operation) of lowering the lower displacement unit 400 until the rise sensor is turned on when the frame button 22 is next operated. Also, a display mode imitating the lower displacement unit 400 can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and in a performance in which a game ball is launched from the exit opening 471 of the lower displacement unit 400, the display mode imitating the lower displacement unit can be changed to the first protruding state without operating the lower displacement unit 400, and the performance in which the game ball is launched can be displayed instead of the display mode. Also, when performing a swing performance of the lower displacement unit 400, the lower displacement unit 400 is changed to the first protruding state, but in the swing performance, the lower displacement unit 400 is stopped at the position of the first protruding state without swinging, and a display mode imitating a pattern imitating the lower displacement unit 400 swinging in a predetermined movable range from the stopped lower displacement unit 400 is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 on the back side of the lower displacement unit 400, so that the swing performance can be performed by fusing the display mode and the lower displacement unit 400. Here, the voice lamp control device 113 is equipped with an RTC capable of measuring the date and time, and by switching to a swing performance that is combined with the display mode without executing the swing performance of the lower displacement unit 400 after a certain period of time has passed (for example, one year later), it is possible to suppress the lower displacement unit 400 from breaking down due to movement exceeding the durability of the lower displacement unit 400. In addition, when a failure is detected in which the lower displacement unit 400 does not operate even if the operation data of the lower displacement unit 400 is set, instead of the performance in which the lower displacement unit 400 operates, a display mode imitating the lower displacement unit 400 may be variably displayed and used as a substitute. Next, referring to FIG. 308(b), the contents defined in the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this control example will be described. FIG. 308(b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents defined in the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. In this third control example, the difference is that a jackpot in progress flag 223ba, a small jackpot in progress flag 223bb, a jackpot ending flag 223bc, a small jackpot ending flag 223bd, an operation status memory area 223bf, a launching performance flag 223be, a launching operation flag 223bg, an origin operation flag 223bh, a storage sensor monitoring flag 223bi, a ball discharge flag 223bj, an operation prohibition counter 223bk, and a standby counter 223bl are added to the second control example described above, and the rest are the same. Note that for the convenience of explanation, some of the elements described in the first control example and the second control example described above are omitted. The jackpot in progress flag 223ba is a flag for indicating that a jackpot game with a jackpot type of jackpot C is executed, and is set to ON when a jackpot game with a jackpot type of jackpot C is executed. Then, when it is determined that the flag is set to ON, a driving operation for storing balls in the ball receiving portion 467 of the movable rack 464 is executed, and when the driving operation is completed, the flag is set to OFF. The small win flag 223bb is a flag for indicating that a small win game is executed, and is set to ON when a small win game is executed. When the small win flag 223bb is set to ON, the same driving operation as the jackpot win flag 223ba described above is executed, and when the driving operation is completed, the flag is set to OFF. In other words, in this control example, when a winning game that can cause a ball to enter the third winning hole 82 is executed, the process for executing the driving operation for storing balls in the ball receiving portion 467 of the movable rack 464 is executed only once, and the jackpot win flag 223ba and the small win flag 223bb described above are the triggers for executing the driving operation. The big win ending flag 223bc is a flag for indicating that it is the ending period of the big win game of the big win C, and is set to ON when it is the ending period of the big win game of the big win C. The setting status of this big win ending flag 223bc is referred to in the operation control process (see S2141 in FIG. 315) (see S4007 in FIG. 315), and when it is determined that it is set to ON (S4007 in FIG. 315: Yes), a launch operation setting process (see S4008 in FIG. 315) is executed to launch the balls stored in the ball receiving portion 467 of the movable rack 464 toward the treasure box role 750 (see FIG. 207). Then, when the launch operation setting process (see S4008 in FIG. 319) is all completed, it is set to OFF. The small win ending flag 223bd is a flag for indicating that it is the ending period of the small win game, and is set to ON when it is the ending period of the small win game. The setting status of the ending flag 223bc of the small winning game is referred to in the operation control process (see S2141 in FIG. 315) (see S4003 in FIG. 315), and when it is determined that it is set to ON (S4003 in FIG. 315: Yes), a discharge operation setting process (see S4004 in FIG. 315) for discharging the balls stored in the ball receiving portion 467 of the movable rack 464 is executed. Then, when all the processes of the discharge operation setting process (see S4004 in FIG. 317) are completed, it is set to OFF. The operation status storage area 223bf is a storage area for identifiably storing the types of operation data (initial operation data 222ba, launch operation data 222bb, origin operation data 222bc, discharge operation data 222bd, first operation data 222be, second operation data 222bf) set in various control processes of the voice lamp control device 113 and the currently executed operation status. The launch effect flag 223be is a flag for indicating that the launch effect executed during the ending period of the big win game is in an executable state, and is set to ON when it is determined that the launch effect is in an executable state (see S4404 in FIG. 319). When the frame button 22 is operated with the launch effect flag 223be set to ON, a launch operation (an operation of launching the balls stored in the ball receiving portion 467 of the lower displacement unit 400 toward the treasure box role 750 (see FIG. 207)) is executed. Then, when the launch operation is executed, it is set to OFF (see S4408 in FIG. 319). The launch operation flag 223bg is a flag that is set to ON when the frame button 22 is operated with the launch effect flag 223be set to ON, and indicates that the launch operation is currently in progress by setting this launch operation flag 223bg to ON. When the ending period of the big win is over, this launch operation flag 223bg is set to OFF. The origin operation flag 223bh is a flag for indicating that the origin operation data 222bc is set, and is set to ON when the origin operation data 222bc is set. By determining the setting status of this origin operation flag 223bh, the process for setting the origin operation data (processing of S4202 to S4205 in FIG. 317) can be skipped. The storage sensor monitoring flag 223bi is a flag for indicating that, in the initial operation setting process (S2021 in FIG. 312) executed when the power is turned on, when the upper left prize ball command, which is set when a ball enters the third winning opening 82, is transmitted from the main control device 110, the period in which the ball that entered the third winning opening 82 is monitored for storage in the ball receiving section 467. When the storage sensor monitoring flag 223bi is set to ON and it is detected that the ball is stored in the ball receiving section 467, the ball discharge flag 223bj is set to ON. The ball discharge flag 223bj is a flag for indicating that the condition for setting the discharge operation data 222bd is satisfied, and is set to ON when the condition for setting the discharge operation data 222bd is satisfied. The setting status of this ball discharge flag 223bj is referred to in the initial discharge operation setting process (see S2140 in FIG. 314), and when it is set to ON, the discharge operation data 222bd is set. The operation prohibition counter 223bk is a counter that is set for a predetermined period (2) in the initial operation setting process (see S2021 in FIG. 312). A specific operation (e.g., ball discharge operation) is prohibited during the period until the value of this operation prohibition counter 223bk is changed to an initial value (e.g., 0). The standby counter 223bl is a counter for measuring a waiting period of a predetermined period after receiving a command (ending command, variation pattern command, customer waiting command) indicating that the initial operation process has ended. When a command indicating that the initial operation process has ended is received (S3906: Yes in FIG. 314), a value indicating a predetermined period (a value indicating 2 seconds) is set (see S3907 in FIG. 314). The value of this standby counter 223bl is subtracted by 1 every time the initial discharge operation setting process (see S2140 in FIG. 314), which is executed every millisecond in the main process (see FIG. 313) of the voice lamp control device 113, is executed. When the value of the standby counter 223bl becomes 0, if the ball discharge flag 223bj is set to on (S3913 in FIG. 314: Yes), the discharge operation data 222bd is set. By configuring it in this manner, even if a ball enters the third winning port 82 during the initial operation processing, the discharge operation processing can be executed after waiting the period (within 2 seconds) required for the winning ball to reach the ball receiving section 467, thereby preventing abnormal performance from being executed based on a ball entering the third winning port 82 during the initial operation processing.

<Regarding the control process of the voice lamp control device in the third control example>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the third control example will be described with reference to Figs. 312 to 319. The control process of the voice lamp control device 113 in this third control example differs from the control process of the voice lamp control device 113 in the first control example described above in that an initial operation setting process (S2071), an initial discharge operation setting process (S2140), and an operation control process (S2112) are added. Specifically, a process for controlling the operation of the lower displacement unit 400 and a process for checking the initial operation of the lower displacement unit 400 during start-up processing are added.

Next, the initial operation setting process (S2071), which is one process of the start-up process in this third control example, will be described with reference to FIG. 312. FIG. 312 is a flowchart showing the contents of the initial operation setting process (S2071). The initial operation setting process (S2071) is a process for checking the operation contents of the lower displacement unit 400 during the start-up process.

In the initial operation setting process (S2071), first, it is determined whether the storage sensor monitoring flag 223bi is on (S2031). If it is determined that the storage sensor monitoring flag 223bi is not on (S2031: No), it is determined whether the upper left prize ball command has been received (S2032). If it is determined that the upper left prize ball command has been received (S2032: Yes), the operation prohibition counter 223bk is set to 2 (S2033), the storage sensor monitoring flag 223bi is set to on (S2034), and the process proceeds to S2038. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2032 that the upper left prize ball command has not been received (S2032), the processes of S2033 to S2034 are skipped and the process proceeds to S2038.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2031 that the storage sensor monitoring flag 223bi is on (S2031: Yes), it is determined whether the ball discharge flag 223bj is on (S2035). If it is determined that the ball discharge flag 223bj is not on (S2035: No), the ball discharge flag 223bj is set on (S2036), the storage sensor monitoring flag 223bi is set off (S2037), and the processing proceeds to S2038. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2035 that the ball discharge flag 223bj is on (S2035: Yes), the processing of S2036 to S2037 is skipped and the processing proceeds to S2038.

In the process of S2038, it is determined whether the ball discharge operation is completed or whether the value of the operation status stored in the operation status storage area 223bf is 0. If it is determined that the initial operation is not completed (S2038: No), the processes of S2031 to S2037 are repeated until the operation is completed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the operation is completed (S2038: Yes), it is determined whether the operation status is set to 5 (S2039). If it is determined that the operation status is not set to 5 (S2039: No), the operation status is set to +1 (S2040), the corresponding operation data is set (S2041), the time data is set in the timing counter based on the confirmed display data table (S2042), and the process returns to S2031. On the other hand, if it is determined that the operation status is 5 in the process of S2039 (S2039: Yes), the operation status is reset (S2043), and this process ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 313, the main processing executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this third control example will be described. The main processing in this third control example differs in that after executing the same processes as S2101 to S2111 in the main processing in the first control example (see FIG. 257), an initial discharge operation setting process (S2140) and an operation control process (S2141) are added. The other processes are the same, so detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted.

Next, referring to FIG. 314, we will explain the initial discharge operation setting process (S2140), which is one process of the main process (see FIG. 313) in this third control example. FIG. 314 is a flowchart showing the contents of the initial discharge operation setting process (S2140).

In the initial discharge operation setting process (S2140), first, it is determined whether the storage sensor monitoring flag 223bi is on (S3901). If it is determined that the storage sensor monitoring flag 223bi is not on (S3901: No), since no balls are stored in the ball receiving unit 455, this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the storage sensor monitoring flag 223bi is on (S3901: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the standby counter 223bl is greater than 0 (S3902). If it is determined that the value of the standby counter 223bl is not greater than 0 (i.e., 0) (S3902: No), it is determined whether the ball discharge flag 223bj is on (S3903). If it is determined that the ball discharge flag 223bj is not on (S3903: No), it is determined whether the storage sensor is on (S3904). If it is determined that the storage sensor is on (S3904: Yes), the ball discharge flag 223bj is set to on (S3905), and the process proceeds to S3906. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3903 that the ball discharge flag 223bj is on (S3903: Yes), or if it is determined in the process of S3904 that the storage sensor is not on (S3904: No), the process of S3905 is skipped and the process proceeds to S3906.

In the process of S3906, it is determined whether a jackpot ending command, a fluctuation pattern command, or a customer waiting command has been received (S3906). If it is determined that a jackpot ending command, a fluctuation pattern command, or a customer waiting command has been received (S3906: Yes), a waiting counter value corresponding to 2 seconds is set (S3907), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that none of the jackpot ending command, the fluctuation pattern command, or a customer waiting command has been received (S3906: No), this process ends as is.

On the other hand, in the process of S3902, if it is determined that the value of the standby counter 223bl is greater than 0 (S3902: Yes), it is determined whether the ball discharge flag 223bj is on (S3908). If it is determined that the ball discharge flag 223bj is not on (S3908: No), it is determined whether the storage sensor is on (S3909). If it is determined that the storage sensor is on (S3909: Yes), the ball discharge flag 223bj is set to on (S3910) and the process proceeds to S3911. On the other hand, in the process of S3908, if it is determined that the ball discharge flag 223bj is on (S3908: Yes), or if it is determined that the storage sensor is not on in the process of S3904 (S3909: No), the process of S3910 is skipped and the process proceeds to S3911.

In the process of S3911, the value of the standby counter 223bl is decremented by 1 (S3911). Next, it is determined whether the value of the standby counter 223bl decremented in the process of S3911 is 0 (S3912). If it is determined that the value of the standby counter 223bl is 0 (S3912: Yes), it is determined whether the ball discharge flag 223bj is on (S3913). If it is determined that the ball discharge flag 223bj is on (S3913: Yes), the discharge operation data is set (S3914), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the standby counter 223bl is not 0 (i.e., 1 or more) in the process of S3912 (S3912: No), or if it is determined that the ball discharge flag 223bj is not on in the process of S3913 (S3913: No), this process is terminated as it is.

Next, referring to FIG. 315, the motion control process (S2141), which is one process of the main process (see FIG. 313) in this third control example, will be described. FIG. 315 is a flowchart showing the contents of the motion control process (S2141). In this motion control process (S2141), processing is executed to control the motion of the lower displacement unit 400 according to the game state.

In the operation control process (S2141), first, it is determined whether the small win flag 223ac or the big win flag 223ab is on, i.e., whether the current game state is a small win or a big win (S4001). If it is determined that the small win flag 223ab or the big win flag 223ab is on, the first operation setting process is executed (S4002), and this process is terminated.

Now, referring to FIG. 316, we will explain the first operation setting process (S4002), which is one process within the operation control process (S2141). FIG. 316 is a flowchart showing the contents of the first operation setting process (S4002). In this first operation setting process (S4002), processing is executed to control the operation of the ball receiving unit 445 when the game status is a small win or a big win.

In the first operation setting process (S4002), first, it is determined whether the operation status is 0 (S4101). Specifically, it is determined whether the value stored in the operation status memory area 223bf is 0. If it is determined that the operation status is 0 (S4101: Yes), the operation status is set to 1 (S4102), and operation data is set in the ball receiving unit 445 (S4103). The operation status 1 is specified in the first operation data 222be (see FIG. 310(a)). When the operation status is set to 1, the slide motor KM is driven and driven in the plus direction from the origin position. Then, when the first sensor is set to ON, it stops. By driving in this manner, it is possible to drive the ball flowing in from the third winning opening 82 to a position where the ball receiving section 467 can receive the ball.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4101 that the operation status is not 0, it is determined whether the operation status is 1 (S4104). If it is determined that the operation status is 1 (S4104: Yes), it is determined whether the second position sensor is on (S4105). If it is determined that the second position sensor is not on (S4105: No), since the ball receiving unit 445 has not been driven up to the second position, the processing of S4106 to S4107 is skipped and the processing proceeds to S4108. On the other hand, if it is determined that the second position sensor is on, the operation status is set to 2 (S4106), and the operation data is set (S4107). For operation status 2, it is set to wait until the ball is stored in the ball receiving section 467 from the third winning opening 82.

On the other hand, in the process of S4104, if it is determined that the operation status is not 1, it is determined whether the operation status is 2 (S4108). If it is determined that the operation status is 2 (S4108: Yes), it is determined whether the storage sensor is on (S4109). If it is determined that the storage sensor is not on (S4109), since the ball that entered from the third winning port 82 is not being stored, the processes of S4110 to S4111 are skipped and the process proceeds to S4112. On the other hand, in the process of S4109, if it is determined that the storage sensor is on (S4109: Yes), the operation status is set to 3 (S4110), the operation data is set (S4111), and the process proceeds to S4112. In the operation status 3, when a ball is stored in the ball receiving section 467 from the third winning port 82, the slide motor is driven in the negative direction. Then, when the origin sensor is set to on, it stops. In other words, the ball receiving unit 445 is controlled to return to the origin position once it has collected a ball from the third winning port 82. The collected ball is then discharged in the discharge operation setting process (S4004) or the launch operation setting process (S4008) described below.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4108 that the operation status is not 2 (S4108: No), it is determined whether the operation status is 3 (S4112). If it is determined that the operation status is 3 (S4112: Yes), it is determined whether the origin sensor is on (S4113). If it is determined that the origin sensor is on (S4113: Yes), the operation status is reset (S4114) and this processing ends.

Returning to FIG. 315, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S4001, if it is determined that the small win during flag 223bb or the big win during flag 223ba is not on (S4001: No), it is determined whether the small win ending flag 223bd is set to on (S4003). If it is determined that the small win ending flag 223bd is on (S4003: Yes), the discharge operation setting process (S4004) is executed, and this process ends.

Now, referring to FIG. 317, we will explain the discharge operation setting process (S4004), which is one process within the operation control process (S2141). FIG. 317 is a flowchart showing the contents of the discharge operation setting process (S4004). In this discharge operation setting process (S4004), processing is executed to control the operation of discharging balls from the ball receiving unit 445 at the timing of the ending of a small win.

In the ejection operation setting process (S4004), first, it is determined whether the origin operation flag 223bh is on. If it is determined that the origin operation flag 223bh is not on (S4201: No), ejection operation data is set (S4202). Then, it is determined whether the launch position sensor is set on (S4203). If it is determined that the launch position sensor is off (S4203: Yes), origin operation data is set (S4204), the origin operation flag 223bh is set on (S4205), and the process proceeds to S4206. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4201 that the origin operation flag 223bh is off (S4201: No), the processes of S4201 to S4205 are skipped and the process proceeds to S4206.

Next, it is determined whether the origin sensor is on (S4206). If it is determined that the origin sensor is on (S4206: Yes), the origin operation flag is set to off (S4207), the small win ending flag 223bd is set to off (S4208), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4206 that the origin sensor is not on (S4206: No), this process ends as it is.

Returning to FIG. 315, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S4003, if it is determined that the small win ending flag 223bd is off (S4003: No), it is determined whether the big win round is the 8th round (S4005). If it is determined that the big win round is the 8th round (S4005: Yes), the second operation setting process (S4006) is executed, and this process ends.

Now, referring to FIG. 318, we will explain the second action setting process (S4006), which is one process within the action control process (S2141). FIG. 318 is a flowchart showing the contents of the second action setting process (S4006). This second action setting process (S4006) is a control process for raising the lower displacement unit 400 to the launch position in the eighth round of a jackpot, and executing an up and down projection effect when the player presses the frame button 22.

In the second operation setting process (S4006), first, it is determined whether the operation status is 0 (S4301). Specifically, it is determined whether the value stored in the operation status memory area 223bf is 0. If it is determined that the operation status is 0 (S4301: Yes), the operation status is set to 1 (S4302), and operation data is set in the lower displacement unit 400 (S4303). Operation status 1 is specified in the second operation data 222bf (see FIG. 310(b)), and when the operation status is set to 1, the tilt motor is driven and driven in the plus direction from the origin position. Then, it stops when the rise sensor is set to ON.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4301 that the operation status is not 0 (S4301: No), it is determined whether or not the operation status is 1 (S4304). If it is determined that the operation status is 1 (S4304: Yes), it is determined whether or not the ascent sensor is on (S4305). If it is determined that the ascent sensor is not on (S4305: No), since the lower displacement unit 400 has not been driven to the first position, the processing of S4306 to S4307 is skipped and processing proceeds to S4308. On the other hand, if it is determined that the ascent sensor is on, the operation status is set to 2 (S4306), and the operation data is set (S4307).

On the other hand, in the process of S4304, if it is determined that the operation status is not 1 (S4304: No), it is determined whether the operation status is 2 (S4308). If it is determined that the operation status is 2 (S4308: Yes), it is determined whether the rise sensor is on (S4309). If it is determined that the rise sensor is not on (S4309), the lower displacement unit 400 is in a standby state at the origin position, so the processes of S4310 to S4312 are skipped and the process proceeds to S4313. On the other hand, in the process of S4308, if it is determined that the rise sensor is on (S4309: Yes), it is determined whether the frame button 22 has been pressed (S4310). If it is determined that the frame button 22 has not been pressed (S4310: No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the frame button 22 has been pressed (S4310: Yes), the operation status is set to 3 (S4311), the operation data is set (S4312), and processing proceeds to S4313. In operation status 3, when a ball is stored in the ball receiving section 467 from the third winning opening 82, the tilt motor is driven in the plus direction. Then, when the lower displacement unit 400 is set to rise 30 steps, it stops.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4308, if it is determined that the operation status is not 2 (S4308: No), it is determined whether the operation status is 3 (S4313). If it is determined that the operation status is 3 (S4313: Yes), it is determined whether the lower displacement unit 400 has risen 30 steps (S4314). If it is determined that the lower displacement unit 400 has risen 30 steps (S4314: No), this processing ends as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the lower displacement unit 400 has risen 30 steps (S4314: Yes), it is determined whether the frame button 22 has been pressed (S4315). If it is determined that the frame button 22 has not been pressed (S4315: No), this processing ends as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4315 that the frame button 22 has been pressed (S4315: Yes), the operation status is set to 2 (S4316), the operation data is set (S4317), and this processing ends.

Returning to FIG. 315 for further explanation. In the process of S4005, if it is determined that there is no 8th round of the jackpot (S4005: No), it is determined whether or not it is the jackpot ending flag 223bc (S4007). If it is determined that the jackpot ending flag 223bc is on (S4007: Yes), the firing operation setting process (S4008) is executed and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the jackpot ending flag 223bc is not on (S4007: No), this process ends as it is.

Now, referring to FIG. 318, the firing operation setting process (S4008), which is one process within the operation control process (S2141), will be described. FIG. 318 is a flowchart showing the contents of the firing operation setting process (S4008). This firing operation setting process (S4008) executes processing for firing the balls stored in the first operation setting process (S4002) from the lower displacement unit 400 at the ending of a big win.

In the firing operation setting process (S4008), first, it is determined whether the ascent sensor is on (S4401). If it is determined that the ascent sensor is not on (S4401: No), descent 30 step data is set (S4402), and the process proceeds to S4411. On the other hand, if it is determined that the ascent sensor is on (S4401: Yes), it is determined whether the firing performance flag 223be is on, i.e., whether a firing performance is set (S4403). If it is determined that the firing performance flag 223be is not on (S4403: No), a firing performance is not set, so the firing performance flag 223be is set on (S4404), a firing performance is set (S4405), and the process proceeds to S4411.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4403 that the firing performance flag 223be is on (S4403: Yes), it is determined whether the frame button 22 is on (S4406). If it is determined that the frame button 22 is on (S4406: Yes), the processing of S4407 to S4410 is skipped and the processing proceeds to S4411. If it is determined that the frame button 22 is not pressed (S4406: No), a firing performance is set (S4407), and the firing performance flag 223be is set to off (S4408). Next, firing operation data is set (S4409), the firing performance operation flag 223bg is set to on (S4410), and the processing proceeds to S4411.

In the process of S4411, it is determined whether the firing position sensor is on (S4411). If it is determined that the firing position sensor is on (S4411: Yes), origin operation data is set (S4412) to return the lower displacement unit 400 to the origin position, the origin operation flag 223bh is set to on (S4413), and the process proceeds to S4414. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4411 that the firing position sensor is off (S4411: No), the lower displacement unit 400 is not in the firing position, so the processes of S4412 and S4413 are skipped and the process proceeds to S4414.

After executing the processing of S4411 or S4413, it is determined whether the origin sensor is on, i.e., whether the lower displacement unit 400 is at the origin position (S4414). If it is determined that the origin sensor is on (S4414: Yes), the big win ending flag 223bc is set to off (S4415), the origin operation flag 223bh is set to off (S4416), and this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4414 that the origin sensor is not on (S4414: No), this processing ends.

<Fourth control example>
Next, the fourth control example will be described with reference to Fig. 320 to Fig. 351. This fourth control example differs from the first control example described above in that the configuration of the game board 13 has been changed, the control content of the main control device 110 has been changed, and the control content of the voice lamp control device 113 has been changed. Note that the same elements as those in the first control example described above are given the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The major difference between this fourth control example and the first control example described above will be briefly explained. In the first control example described above, the control process of the main control device 110 is executed so that the first special pattern and the second special pattern are not dynamically displayed simultaneously (in parallel), whereas in this fourth control example, the control process is executed so that the first special pattern and the second special pattern are dynamically displayed simultaneously (in parallel), which is a major difference.

In addition, while the first control example described above is configured to execute a pseudo-jackpot presentation using the pseudo attacker 165 while a jackpot game is being played, the fourth control example is significantly different in that it is configured to execute a pseudo-jackpot presentation using the pseudo attacker 165 when a potential state is set as the game state. Furthermore, there is also a significant difference in that the content of the pseudo-jackpot presentation is different.

First, the configuration of the game board 13 in this fourth control example will be described with reference to Figures 320 and 321. The game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in this fourth control example differs from the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example described above in that a lower first ball entry port 64D and a lower electric device 64Da associated with the lower first ball entry port 64D are provided in the lower area of the game board 13, a second variable winning device 650 (second specific winning port 650a) is provided below the lower first winning port 64D, and a special winning device 1550 is provided in place of the special winning device 550 in the right area of the game board 13.

The lower first ball entry port 64D is a ball entry means that can set a state where it is difficult for the ball to enter or a state where it is easy for the ball to enter by the lower electric device 64Da, which is variably controlled from a closed position where it is difficult for the ball to enter to an open position when a winning normal pattern is selected by lottery. When a ball enters this lower first ball entry port 64Da, the same process is executed as when a ball enters the first ball entry port 64.

The lower first ball entrance 64D is arranged in a location less visible to the player than the first ball entrance 64, and is configured in a shape less visible to the player than the first ball entrance 64, so that the player is not notified that the first ball entrance 64D is in a state where it is easy for a ball to enter. This makes it difficult for the player to know when they have acquired the right to draw the special drawing 1. In this control example, the lower first ball entry port 64D is located directly below the first ball entry port 64, and is configured so that balls shot at the first ball entry port 64 that do not enter the first ball entry port 64 can enter the lower first ball entry port 64D, allowing the ball to enter the lower first winning port 64D without giving the player a sense of discomfort. However, the location of the lower first ball entry port 64D is not limited to this, and it may be located above the first ball entry port 64, or it may be located near the general winning port 63 so as to be inconspicuous.

The second variable winning device 650 is a winning device that is opened when a specific jackpot is won in the lottery of the special drawing 1, and is controlled so that the opening and closing door 650f1 is opened to make it easier for balls to win, and the closing door 650f1 is closed to make it harder for balls to win. In this control example, when the second variable winning device 650 wins a jackpot that opens, a jackpot game is played in which only a small number of prize balls (about 40 balls) are awarded. Therefore, the winning of a jackpot that opens the second variable winning device 650 is not a jackpot aimed at in order to win prize balls, but a jackpot aimed at in order to transition to a game state that is advantageous to the player (a potential state in this control example). In this way, even if the number of prize balls awarded to the player by one jackpot win is small, if a game state that is advantageous to the player is set after the jackpot ends, the jackpot game (winning the jackpot) will give the player an advantageous privilege.

Next, referring to Fig. 321, the details of the special prize device 1550 provided in place of the special prize device 550 in the first control example described above in this fourth control example will be described. Fig. 208 is a schematic cross-sectional view of the special prize device 1550. As shown in FIG. 208, the special winning device 1550 in the fourth control example differs from the special winning device 550 in the first control example in that a second ball entry port 640 is provided at the position where the specific general winning port 163 was located (to the left of the specific outlet port 166 when viewed from the front), a pseudo through gate 1167 is provided above the second ball entry port 640, a pseudo second ball entry port 1640 is provided above the performance flow path 691, a branch section 694a is provided upstream of the guide flow path 690 (around the general ball sending section 690a) which branches off to a flow path different from the guide flow path 690 (a second guide flow path 694 for allowing the game ball to flow down to the pseudo second ball entry port 1640), and a flow path switching member 695 is provided which switches whether the game ball that has reached the branch section 694a is allowed to flow down to the guide flow path 690 or the second guide flow path 694. Another difference is that the second ball entry port 640 has been moved to the location where the specific general winning port 163 in the first control example was located, and the location where the second ball entry port 640 was located in the first control example is now hollow. Another difference is that the number of prize balls paid out when a ball entry into the specific winning port 65a is detected has been changed to 10.

As shown in FIG. 321, the second ball inlet 640 in this fourth control example only has a pseudo through gate 1167 above it, and no structure is provided to prevent balls from entering, so that balls can always enter by the player hitting the ball to the right. More specifically, about 1/3 of the game balls hit to the right enter the second ball inlet 640, and about 2/3 flow into the main path SK1. The branching section 694a, which is provided at a position where the game ball that entered the second ball inlet 640 can reach, branches toward the back side of the general ball sending section 690a when viewed from the front, and when the flow path switching member 695 is retracted to the retracted position (back side when viewed from the front), the game ball flows down along the slope of the guide flow path 690, so it does not flow down to the second guide flow path 694 via the branching section 694a. On the other hand, when the flow path switching member 694a is in the extended position shown in FIG. 321, it is impossible for the ball to proceed through the guide flow path 690. In addition, since the flow path switching member 695 is inclined in a direction that guides the game ball toward the back side when viewed from the front in the extended position, the game ball is guided to the branching portion 694a by the inclination of the flow path switching member 695 and is distributed to the guide flow path 694. In addition, when the lottery for the second special symbol is executed based on the ball entering the second ball entrance 640 during the execution of the potential performance B described later, the flow path switching member 695 is temporarily moved to the extended position, and after distributing the game ball that triggered the lottery for the second special symbol to the second guide flow path 694, it is retreated to the retreat position.

As shown in FIG. 321, the second guide flow path 694 is provided with a guide flow path sensor 694s capable of detecting the passage of a game ball. When the guide flow path sensor 694s detects the passage of a game ball, the pseudo electric device 1640a associated with the pseudo second ball entrance 1640 is opened for two seconds, and the pseudo second ball entrance 1640 is made available for entry. At the most downstream side of the second guide flow path 694, a ball discharge section 694b is provided that can roll the game ball that has flowed down the second guide flow path 694 from the back side as viewed from the front to the front side as viewed from the front, and drop it into the pseudo second ball entrance 1640. The game ball that has fallen from the ball discharge section 694b enters the pseudo second ball entrance 1640 or enters the out port 1640b provided on the left side of the pseudo second ball entrance 1640, and is discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, since the time required for the ball to flow down the second induction flow path 694 is approximately 1 second, the ball that flows down the second induction flow path 694 basically enters the pseudo second ball inlet 1640 during the 2-second opening period of the pseudo electric device 1640a. The outlet 1640b is provided for the purpose of properly discharging the ball that reaches the pseudo second ball inlet 1640 after the opening period of the pseudo electric device 1640a has elapsed due to an irregular event such as a ball jamming.

As shown in FIG. 321, the pseudo second ball entrance 1640 is provided with a pseudo electric device 1640a. This pseudo electric device 1640a is opened and closed as part of the entertainment effect (potential effect B) in the potential mode (high probability state of special symbols and low probability state of normal symbols) which is the most advantageous for the player. Details will be described later, but once the game moves to the potential mode, if the lottery for the second special symbol is a miss, there is a high probability that the specific winning port 65a will be opened for one second, resulting in a special miss (small win). As a result, in the potential mode, simply by continuing to hit the right, the ball can be made to enter the second ball entrance 640 and the lottery for the second special symbol can be executed, and if the lottery for the second special symbol is a small win, the game ball can be made to flow down the main paths SK1 to SK3 and enter the open specific winning port 65a. That is, it is an advantageous state in which the lottery for the second special symbol can be executed without reducing the number of balls held. Furthermore, if a jackpot is won in the lottery for the second special symbol in the potential probability mode, the game state after the jackpot ends is set to the potential probability mode again unless the probability probability limit number of times is reached. In other words, the potential probability mode and the jackpot are repeated until the probability probability limit number of times is reached. In this fourth control example, since the probability probability limit number of times is set to 36 times, the advantageous potential probability mode and the jackpot are repeated until a maximum of 36 jackpots are reached (the potential probability mode is looped).

However, since relatively few machines are equipped with the high probability limit number of times and small jackpots, and these specifications are unfamiliar to many players, it may be difficult to understand the gameplay, and players may be put off playing pachinko machine 10. Therefore, in this fourth control example, a configuration is implemented to execute a presentation (high probability presentation B) that allows the player to perceive the behavior in the advantageous high probability mode as if it were a high probability state of a general machine. More specifically, when the lottery for the second special symbol is executed in the potential mode (and when the pseudo jackpot performance described later is not being executed), the game ball that triggered the lottery for the second special symbol (the game ball that entered the second ball entrance 640) is made to flow down the second guide flow path 694 (i.e., the flow path switching member 695 is moved to the extended position), and the pseudo electric role 1640a is opened at the timing when the passage is detected by the guide flow path sensor 694s, and the game ball that flowed down the second guide flow path 694 is made to enter the pseudo second ball entrance 1640 in the open state. Then, in the third pattern display device 81, the variable display performance of the jackpot is executed after the game ball enters the pseudo second ball entrance 1640. Also, the board is configured so that the ball cannot enter the second ball entrance 640 unless it passes through the pseudo through gate 1167. This allows the player to believe that the pseudo electric device 1640a has been opened based on the game ball passing through the pseudo through gate 1167. Also, it is possible to perform an effect as if a lottery for a second special symbol has been performed based on the ball entering the pseudo second ball entrance 1640. In other words, it is possible to realize behavior similar to the behavior of a probability variable state (a game state in which the electric device is likely to open and the probability of a jackpot is high) in a typical gaming machine (in a favorable probability variable state, when the ball passes through the through gate by hitting from the right, the electric device in the second starting hole is opened with a high probability, and by entering the game ball into the second starting hole, the behavior of a jackpot is highly likely).

In addition, in all game modes other than the potential mode, the presentation and other aspects are set so that the behavior is similar to the normal state of a typical gaming machine (a game state in which the electric device is unlikely to open and the probability of winning a jackpot is low). This makes it easy for a wide range of players to understand, and allows for a well-balanced game experience.

In addition, in the fourth control example, in the probability change mode, a performance (pseudo jackpot performance) is executed to make multiple (e.g., five) jackpots look like one jackpot. More specifically, by making multiple rounds (e.g., five rounds) in a jackpot look like one round through the performance, it is possible to give the player the illusion that the number of prize balls in one jackpot is greater than the actual number of prize balls. Therefore, when a jackpot is obtained, the player can feel a greater sense of satisfaction. Also, as described above, in the fourth control example, once the potential mode is entered, the jackpot and potential mode are repeated until a maximum of 36 jackpots are obtained, so if the actual internal state and the performance content are linked, the jackpot and potential mode are frequently switched, which may cause the player to feel annoyed. In contrast, in the fourth control example, a performance (pseudo jackpot performance) is executed to make multiple jackpots (and potential modes between jackpots) look like one jackpot, so it is possible to make the player feel as if they have won more prize balls with fewer jackpots. This makes it possible to prevent players from feeling annoyed. In addition, in this fourth control example, once the game has entered the potential mode, the potential mode is looped until the probability limit number of times is reached, so it is possible to easily determine the number of remaining jackpots at the time of entering the potential mode. This makes it easy to determine how many jackpots are required to produce one pseudo-jackpot effect in order to neatly end the pseudo-jackpot effect at the end of the potential mode (i.e., when the probability limit number of times is reached). This makes it possible to execute the pseudo-jackpot effect in a more natural manner.

In the fourth control example, when the game is in the potential mode and the pseudo jackpot performance is not being performed, each time a game ball enters the second ball entrance 640, the game ball is made to enter the pseudo second ball entrance 1640, so that it appears as if the variable display performance of the second special symbol is performed in response to the ball entering the pseudo second ball entrance 1640, but this is not limited to the above. For example, only when the lottery for the second special symbol results in a jackpot, the game ball that triggered the jackpot lottery may be made to flow down to the pseudo second ball entrance 1640. By configuring in this way, in the potential mode, when a ball enters the pseudo second ball entrance 1640, it is possible to realize a behavior that always results in a jackpot, so that the player can play the game by paying attention to whether or not the game ball enters the pseudo second ball entrance 1640. This can further increase the player's interest in the game.

Next, referring to FIG. 322, the flow of the game in this fourth control example will be described. FIG. 322 is a transition diagram that shows the flow of the game state. As shown in FIG. 322, the pachinko machine 10 in this fourth control example is configured to be able to set four game states (normal state, probability change state, potential probability state, time-saving state). And, when a jackpot with a special symbol is won, the high probability state of the special symbol is always set after the jackpot game ends. In addition, an upper limit is set to the number of times the high probability state of the special symbol is set consecutively, and only when a jackpot is won in a state where the number of times the high probability state of the special symbol is set consecutively reaches the upper limit (probability change limit state), the low probability state of the special symbol (time-saving state) is set after the jackpot ends.

In addition, in this fourth control example, among the game states in which the high probability state of the special symbol is set, the potential state is configured to be a more advantageous game state for the player than the probability state. Furthermore, once a transition to the potential state has occurred, it is configured to make it easier to set the potential state continuously until the probability limit state is reached. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to allow the player to play advantageously by transitioning to the potential state while the number of times the high probability state of the special symbol has been set continuously is still low.

When the normal state is set as the game state, the game state is one in which the lottery for special chart 1 is mainly performed (the lottery for special chart 2 in the normal state is set to a long period of time (e.g., 10 minutes) as the variable time), and when the jackpot for special chart 1 is won, 99.5% of the time it will transition to a high probability state, and 0.5% of the time it will transition to a potential high probability state.

When the probability state is set, a high probability state of normal symbols is set, making it easier for balls to enter the lower first ball entrance 64D than in the normal state, making it easier to draw special symbol 1. Furthermore, the probability of winning a jackpot on special symbol 1 is also set higher than in the normal state, and the transition rate to the potential state when a jackpot on special symbol 1 is won is 10 times (5%) that of the normal state. Note that even when the probability state is set, a long period of time (e.g. 10 minutes) is set as the fluctuation time for the special symbol 2 drawing, so even during this probability state, the game state is one in which the drawing of special symbol 1 is mainly performed.

In the potential state, the variation time of the special chart 1 lottery is set to a long time (for example, 10 minutes), and the variation time of the special chart 2 lottery is set to a short time, resulting in a game state in which the special chart 2 lottery is mainly performed, and the player is configured to play with a right-hand hit. If a jackpot is won in the special chart 2 lottery, the potential state is set again until the probability change limit state is reached. Also, in the special chart 2 lottery, in most cases where a jackpot is not won, a small jackpot is won. Therefore, the special chart 2 lottery during the potential state is the lottery that is most advantageous to the player, and the potential state is the most advantageous game state for the player.

When a jackpot is won in the limited probability state, a time-saving state is set. In this time-saving state, the game state is one in which the lottery for special pattern 1 is mainly performed, and the lottery for special pattern 1 is executed with the same jackpot probability as in the normal state. Since a high probability state for normal patterns is set, the lottery for special pattern 1 is easier to execute than in the normal state. In addition, the time-saving state is configured to continue until a predetermined condition other than winning a jackpot (for example, a condition in which the number of times the special pattern changes reaches a predetermined number (50 times), a condition in which a small jackpot is won a predetermined number (1 time), etc.) is met, and if a jackpot is won during this time-saving state, it is configured to transition to a potential state that is most advantageous to the player with a high probability (95%). In this way, by transitioning (pulling back) from the time-saving state to the potential state, the game can be executed in the potential state from the first of the number of times that the high probability state of the special pattern is set in succession, so that a fun game can be provided to the player.

In this control example, if a small prize is won in the special drawing 1 lottery, a small prize game is executed in which the second variable winning device 650 is opened in the same way as in the case of a big prize win in the special drawing 1. This makes it difficult to know the current number of chance wins (the number of times remaining until the chance win limit state) based on the number of times the second variable winning device 65 has been opened.

In addition, unlike the configuration of this control example, it may be configured to execute a suggestion effect that suggests to the player the current number of chance bonuses (the number of times remaining until the chance bonus limit state) based on winning a small jackpot.

Next, referring to FIG. 323, we will explain the presentation (presentation mode) that is executed according to the set game state, among the presentations executed in this fourth control example. FIG. 323 is a transition diagram showing the transition contents of the presentation executed according to the game state. As shown in FIG. 323, when the normal state and the special chance state are set, the same presentation mode (normal presentation mode) is set, and it is configured to make it difficult for the player to tell whether the current state is normal or the special chance state. This makes it difficult for the player to easily grasp the number of remaining special chances until the special chance limit state is reached.

In this control example, the time-saving state is set only if a jackpot is won when the probability-change limit state is reached, so the player can understand that the current state is normal only if the normal presentation mode is executed without winning a jackpot during the time-saving state. Therefore, advantageous game information can be provided only to players who have been playing for a long time.

In addition, in this control example, the change time set based on the special drawing 1 is the same for the normal state and the special chance state (the same change pattern selection table is used). This makes it possible to prevent the current game state from being determined by the change time of the special drawing 1 being executed. It is not limited to this, but the change time may be set so that it can be set only for either the special chance state or the normal state, and when the change time is set, it may be possible to suggest the current game state. Furthermore, the change time may be set by referring to a different change pattern selection table depending on the current number of special chances (the number of times remaining until the special chance limit state), and the player may be able to determine the current number of special chances depending on the change time of the special drawing 1 being executed.

Next, when a normal presentation is being performed (normal state, state where the probability variable state is set) and a transition is made to a potential probability variable state, two presentation modes are set according to the current number of probability variable occurrences. Specifically, when the potential probability variable state is set and there are 30 or more remaining occurrences until the probability variable limit state, an odd number sequence (e.g., 777) is displayed as the third symbol indicating a jackpot, and a potential probability variable presentation mode A is set, which executes a pseudo jackpot game presentation from the start of the jackpot game to the end of the jackpot game executed when the probability variable limit state is reached.

If the number of remaining turns until the probability limit state is reached is less than 30 while the potential state is set, a sequence of even numbers (for example, 666) is displayed as the third symbol indicating a jackpot, and a potential state performance B mode is set in which a game performance during the potential state is executed from the end of the jackpot game to the end of the jackpot game executed when the probability limit state is reached, until a predetermined number of jackpots (1 to 5 times) are won, and then a pseudo jackpot game performance is executed until a predetermined number of jackpots (1 to 5 times) are won.

In other words, this control example is configured to award many prize balls to the player in two states: a big win game state and a consecutive small win game state during the potential win state (so-called small win rush). However, during the potential win state, not only do small wins occur frequently, but there is also a high probability of winning a big win. Therefore, if the big win game presentation is executed based on an actual big win, and the small win game presentation is executed based on a small win, the presentation becomes complicated and difficult for the player to understand, which is a problem.

In response to this, as described above, in this control example, during the period when the potential state is set, a period in which a pseudo jackpot game presentation is executed, regardless of whether a jackpot game is being played or a small jackpot game is being played, and a period in which a pseudo potential state game presentation (small jackpot rush presentation) is executed are set. This prevents the presentations from becoming complicated, and provides a pachinko machine 10 that is easy for players to understand.

In addition, when the probability limit state is reached and the time-saving state is then set, the pull-back mode is set and a provocative effect is executed to show the player that the game state is likely to transition to the potential probability state.

Next, the characteristic effects of this fourth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 324. First, the pseudo-jackpot effect (super jackpot effect) executed during potential effect A mode will be described with reference to FIG. 324(a). FIG. 324(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a pseudo-jackpot effect (super jackpot effect) executed during potential effect A mode. Note that the same elements as those in the display screen of the first control example described above are given the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 324(a), in the pseudo jackpot presentation (super jackpot presentation) executed during potential presentation A mode, a comment indicating that a super jackpot is occurring is displayed in the main display area Dm, and acquisition information 803 indicating the number of prize balls awarded during the super jackpot presentation is displayed. Then, a storage image is displayed in the center to show the player with a dynamic image that the acquisition information 803 is increasing. Then, a guidance display Dm9 is displayed to guide the player to play with a right-hand hit.

Here, during the potential winning performance A mode, the pseudo-jackpot performance is executed so that all prize balls awarded during the potential winning state, i.e., prize balls awarded when a ball played to the right during the potential winning state enters each winning port (prize balls awarded based on the ball that enters the second ball entry port 640 and the ball that enters the variable winning device 65 during the small winning play) are treated as prize balls acquired during the big winning play, and during the potential winning performance A mode, the flow path switching member 695 (see FIG. 321) is located in the buried position, and the ball flow is configured so that the ball that enters the second ball entry port 640 enters the pseudo attacker 165.

This allows a pseudo-jackpot presentation to be executed in which all winning balls during the potential winning state are awarded to the pseudo attacker 165, and also allows a pseudo-jackpot presentation to be executed in which the third symbol display device 81 indicates that the jackpot game is continuing to be played. This allows a pseudo-jackpot presentation to be executed during the potential winning state without giving the player a sense of incongruity.

Next, referring to FIG. 324(b), the contents of the pseudo-latent state game presentation among the presentations executed during the potential presentation B mode will be described. FIG. 324(b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a pseudo-latent state game presentation. As shown in FIG. 324(b), in the pseudo-latent state game presentation, the word "RUSH" is displayed to indicate that the current state is a potential state game, and a presentation indicating whether or not a small win game will be executed is executed (a game in which the character 811 opens a treasure box 812, and if the contents of the treasure box 812 are "V", it indicates that a small win has been won). This pseudo-latent state game presentation is executed during the potential state and the period during which a jackpot game is being played until a predetermined number of times is reached, and if a jackpot is won during the pseudo-latent state game presentation and a jackpot game is executed, the number of prize balls awarded during the jackpot game and the prize balls awarded by the small win game are notified to the acquisition information 803.

Here, during the period during which the pseudo-potential state game presentation is being executed during the potential presentation B mode, if a ball enters the second ball entrance 640, it is necessary to indicate to the player that the special chart 2 lottery is being executed. Therefore, the flow path switching member 695 (see FIG. 321) is positioned in the protruding position, and the ball that enters the second ball entrance 640 is configured to flow downward toward the pseudo electric device 1640a.

The timing of updating the winning information 803 displayed in each of the above-mentioned effects and the timing of updating the effect mode are set to match the timing based on the predicted result by predicting the timing at which the ball reaches the pseudo winning hole based on the timing at which the ball actually enters, just like in the first control example described above. The details are the same as in the first control example described above, so they will be omitted here.

<Electrical configuration of the main control device in the fourth control example>
The ROM 202 of the main control device 110 in this fourth control example differs from the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 in the first control example described above in that a special pattern win random number 4 table 202ca is provided instead of the special pattern win random number table 202a, a fluctuation pattern selection 4 table 202cb is provided instead of the fluctuation pattern selection table 202b, a normal win random number 4 table 202cc is provided instead of the normal win random number table 202c, a special chart 1 jackpot type selection 4 table 202cd1 is provided instead of the special chart 1 jackpot type selection table 202d1, a special chart 2 jackpot type selection 4 table 202cd2 is provided instead of the special chart 2 jackpot type selection table 202d2, and a small win random number 4 table 202ce is provided instead of the small win random number table 202e.

The RAM of the main control device 110 in this fourth control example differs from the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 in the first control example described above in that it has added a special bonus flag 203ca, a game status storage area 203cb, a big win flag 203cc, a special bonus 1 change stop flag 203cd, a special bonus 2 change stop flag 203ce, a small win flag 203cf, a special bonus 1 temporary stop flag 203cg, a special bonus 1 change time counter 203ch, a special bonus 2 change time counter 203ci, and a special bonus upper limit counter 203cj. All other elements are the same, and the same elements are given the same reference numerals and their detailed explanations are omitted.

First, the contents of the special symbol hit random number 4 table 202ca will be explained with reference to FIG. 325(a). This special symbol hit random number 4 table 202ca differs from the special symbol hit random number table 202a described above in that the range of values of the first hit random number counter C1 that results in a jackpot for a special symbol is different. Specifically, the range "0 to 4" is set as the range corresponding to a jackpot in the low probability state of the special symbol, and the range "0 to 39" is set as the range corresponding to a jackpot in the high probability state of the special symbol.

Next, referring to FIG. 325(b), the contents of the small prize random number 4 table 202ce will be explained. Unlike the small prize random number table 202e described above, this small prize random number 4 table 202ce is configured so that both special drawing 1 and special drawing 2 will win a small prize. Specifically, in the case of special drawing 1, the range of the value of the first prize random number counter C1 is set to "50 to 59", and in the case of special drawing 2, the range of "50 to 479" is set to be determined as a big prize. In other words, in this fourth control example, the probability of winning a small prize in the drawing of special drawing 1 is about 1/50, and the probability of winning a small prize in the drawing of special drawing 2 is about 1/1.1.

Next, the contents of the normal win random number 4 table 202cc will be explained with reference to FIG. 325(c). This normal win random number 4 table 202cc differs from the above-mentioned normal win random number table 202c in that the element of the long open win has been removed, the probability of winning in a low probability state of the normal pattern has been lowered, and the probability of winning in a high probability state of the normal pattern has been increased, but otherwise it is the same.

Next, the contents of the special chart 1 jackpot type selection 4 table 202cd1 will be explained with reference to FIG. 326(a). FIG. 326(a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the special chart 1 jackpot type selection 4 table 202cd1. As shown in FIG. 326(a), when a special chart 1 jackpot is won in the normal state, the jackpot (jackpot A, jackpot B) that opens the first attacker (second variable winning device 650) and sets the probability variable state, and the jackpot (jackpot C) that opens the second attacker (variable winning device 65) and sets the potential variable state are specified in correspondence with the value of the special winning type counter C2.

Next, the contents of the special chart 2 jackpot type selection 4 table 202cd2 will be explained with reference to FIG. 326(b). FIG. 326(b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the special chart 2 jackpot type selection 4 table 202cd2. As shown in FIG. 326(b), when a special chart 2 jackpot is won, the second attacker (variable winning device 65) is opened and a jackpot (jackpot C) in which a potential state is set is determined in correspondence with the value of the special jackpot type counter C2.

Next, the contents of the variation pattern selection 4 table 202cb will be explained with reference to Figs. 327 to 329. As shown in Fig. 327, this control example has a normal/probable variable 4 table 202cb1 that is used when the normal state or the probable variable state is set, a potential variable 4 table 202cb2 that is used when the potential variable state is set, and a time-saving 4 table 202cb3 that is used when the time-saving state is set, and the table corresponding to the set game state is referenced.

Figure 328 is a schematic diagram showing the contents of table 202cb1 for normal and special chances. As shown in Figure 328, in this control example, when the normal state and special chance state are set, a long-term fluctuation pattern is set as the fluctuation pattern of special chart 2. Therefore, a lottery game of special chart 1 is essentially played.

Figure 329 (a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the potential winning table 4 202cb2. As shown in Figure 329 (a), in this control example, when the potential winning state is set, a long-term fluctuation pattern is set as the fluctuation pattern of special chart 1. Therefore, a lottery game of special chart 2 is essentially played.

Figure 329 (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of time-saving table 4 202cb3. As shown in Figure 329 (b), in this control example, when the time-saving state is set, a long-term fluctuation pattern is set as the fluctuation pattern of special chart 2. Therefore, a lottery game of special chart 1 is essentially played. And, normally, it is specified that the length of the fluctuation time selected as the fluctuation pattern of special chart 1 is shorter than that of table 4 for special variable 202cb1. Therefore, normally, it is possible to execute the fluctuation of special chart 1 more efficiently than in the special variable state.

Next, the configuration of the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 in this fourth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 330. FIG. 330 is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203. This control example differs from the first control example described above in that the following configuration has been added. All other elements are the same, so detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted.

The probability change flag 203ca is a flag that indicates whether or not a high probability state for the special symbol is set, and when it is set to on, it indicates that the special symbol is in a high probability state. In other words, when the probability change flag 203ca is set to on, the game state is set to either a probability change state (special symbol: high probability state, normal symbol: high probability state) or a potential probability state (special symbol: high probability state, normal symbol: low probability state).

This probability change flag 203ca is set to ON at the end of a jackpot if the type of jackpot that was won is a jackpot that sets a probability change state or a potential probability state after the jackpot ends. Then, it is set to OFF when a symbol indicating that the special symbol lottery result is a jackpot is stopped and displayed.

As described above, in this embodiment, the high probability state of the special pattern is set based on the winning of the jackpot with the special pattern, and the high probability state of the special pattern is continued until the next jackpot is won. However, without being limited to this, for example, as a special pattern high probability termination condition for terminating the high probability state of the special pattern, when the number of times the special pattern changes (the number of times of special pattern changes) after the high probability state of the special pattern (the special pattern high probability state) is set reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times), the probability change flag 203ca may be set to OFF. In this case, in order to determine the timing for setting the probability change flag 203ca to OFF, it is sufficient to provide a storage means for storing the number of times of special pattern changes as the high probability termination condition of the special pattern in advance, a measurement means for measuring the number of times of special pattern changes after the high probability state of the special pattern is set, and an end determination means for determining whether the number of times of special pattern changes measured by the measurement means meets the number of times of special pattern changes (the high probability termination condition of the special pattern) stored in the storage means.

Furthermore, it is also possible to prepare a number of special pattern high probability end conditions, for example, a special pattern 1 high probability end condition that can be established based only on the number of times the first special pattern changes in the special pattern high probability state, a special pattern 2 high probability end condition that can be established based only on the number of times the second special pattern changes, and a lottery end condition that can be established when the lottery result for the special pattern is a predetermined lottery result (for example, a lottery result that wins a small prize), and to configure it so that the probability change flag 203ca is set to off when any of the special pattern high probability end conditions are established.

The special chart 1 jackpot flag is a flag that is set to on when it is determined that the value of the first jackpot random number counter C1 obtained based on a ball entering the first ball entrance 64 matches the jackpot determination value at the start of fluctuation. This special chart 1 jackpot flag is set to off when setting the display of the stop pattern corresponding to the jackpot.

When the special symbol 1 jackpot flag is on and the time for displaying the first special symbol has finished, a process is executed to forcibly stop the second special symbol at a miss symbol. This prevents a problem where the first special symbol and the second special symbol become a jackpot or small jackpot while the other is in the middle of a jackpot.

The special chart 2 jackpot flag is a flag that is set to on when it is determined that the value of the first jackpot random number counter C1 obtained based on a ball entering the second ball entrance 640 matches the jackpot determination value at the start of fluctuation. This special chart 2 jackpot flag is set to off when setting the display of the stop pattern corresponding to the jackpot.

When the special symbol 2 jackpot flag is on and the time for displaying the second special symbol has finished, a process is executed to forcibly stop the first special symbol at a miss symbol. This prevents a problem where the first special symbol and the second special symbol become a jackpot or small jackpot while the other is in the middle of a jackpot.

The game status storage area 203cb is a storage area for storing information indicating the currently set game status and the game status at the time of winning the jackpot. Specifically, if the game status at the time of winning the jackpot is normal (if the value of the time-saving counter 203j is 0 and the probability variable flag 203ca is off), "00H" is stored in the winning status area of this game status storage area 203cb as information indicating the normal status. On the other hand, if the game status at the time of winning the jackpot is a probability variable state (if the value of the time-saving counter 203j is 1 or more and the probability variable flag 203ca is on), "01H" is stored in the winning status area of this game status storage area 203cb as information indicating the probability variable state. Furthermore, if the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is a potential state (if the value of the time-saving counter 203j is 0 and the probability change flag 203ca is on), "02H" is stored in the winning state area of this game state storage area 203cb as information indicating the potential state.

The information stored in this game status storage area 203cb is retained until the end of the jackpot, and is referenced when setting the game status after the jackpot ends.

The small win flag 203cf is a flag that is set to on when it is determined that the value of the first win random number counter C1 obtained based on the ball entering the second ball entrance 640 matches the small win determination value at the start of the fluctuation. This small win flag 203cf is set to off when setting the display of the stop pattern corresponding to a small win. When the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display of the second special pattern ends while this small win flag 203cf is on, a process is executed to temporarily stop the fluctuation of the other special pattern (stop the subtraction of the counter that measures the fluctuation time of the special pattern). This makes it possible to prevent (suppress) the occurrence of a malfunction in which a big win is obtained by drawing the first special pattern while a small win of the second special pattern is being executed, and a big win starts during a small win.

The special pattern 1 variation time counter 203ch and the special pattern 2 variation time counter 203ci are counters for timing the variation time of the first special pattern and the second special pattern, respectively. When the variation pattern of the first special pattern and the second special pattern is selected, the variation time corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set. Whether or not the variation time of each special pattern has ended is determined based on the timing results of the special pattern 1 variation time counter 203ch and the special pattern 2 variation time counter 203ci.

The jackpot in progress flag 203cc is a flag that indicates whether or not a jackpot is in progress. If this jackpot in progress flag 203cc is on, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a jackpot, and if it is off, it indicates that the jackpot is not in progress. This jackpot in progress flag 203cc is set on when the start of a jackpot is set. On the other hand, it is set off during the jackpot end process that is executed at the end of the jackpot.

The small win flag is a flag that indicates whether or not a small win is in progress. If this small win flag is on, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a small win, and if it is off, it indicates that a small win is not in progress. This small win flag is set on when the start of a small win is set. On the other hand, it is set off when the small win ends.

The pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured to win a small win with the second special symbol, and is configured to suspend the variable display of the first special symbol when a small win is won (when the small win flag is set to ON). In other words, when a small win is won in a lottery for one of the multiple types of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) and the small win flag is set to ON, the variable display of the other special symbol (first special symbol) does not end, so the player can focus on the small win game and play it. In addition, it is possible to prevent the variable display of the other special symbol from ending and the big win game from starting during a small win game.

In this control example, the first special symbol is configured to win a small prize just like the second special symbol described above. The process for winning a small prize in the drawing of the first special symbol is the same as the process for winning a small prize in the drawing of the second special symbol, so a detailed explanation is omitted.

The special pattern 2 change stop flag 203ce is a flag indicating the period between when the change of the first special pattern is stopped (confirmed) at the jackpot stop pattern and when the jackpot is started. When this special pattern 2 change stop flag 203ce is set to on, the execution of the change display of the second special pattern is avoided even if a new ball enters the second ball entrance 640. This special pattern 2 change stop flag 203ce is set to on when the second special pattern is forcibly stopped at a miss pattern, and is set to off when the process for executing the change display of the second special pattern is avoided.

In this control example, a special chart 2 change stop flag 203cd is provided in which the target of the special chart 2 change stop flag 203ce described above is changed from special chart 2 to special chart 1. However, the only difference between the flags is that the target of the special chart 2 change stop flag 203ce described above is changed from special chart 2 to special chart 1, so a detailed explanation of this is omitted.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the game content of the small prize game is set so that the period during which the first specific winning port 65a is opened is 1.5 seconds, and the round end condition that is established by the number of winning balls is set to 10. In other words, the effective period of the round game (1.5 seconds) will have elapsed by the time 10 balls enter the first specific winning port 65a during the small prize game (until the round end condition for the number of winning balls is established). Therefore, since the period of the small prize game can be made constant, the performance period of the performance that spans the small prize game (a series of performances that are executed during the period from the start of the change of one special pattern to the end of the change of another special pattern via the small prize game) can be determined in advance. Therefore, the timing of the change of the special pattern and the execution timing of the performance can be easily synchronized, and the performance effect can be improved.

The special chart 1 temporary stop flag 203cg is a flag that indicates the period during which the update (subtraction) of the variable time of special chart 1 is stopped. When the flag is set to on, the update (subtraction) of the variable time is stopped, and when the flag is set from on to off, the update (subtraction) of the variable time that was stopped is resumed.

This special pattern 1 temporary stop flag 203cg is set to ON when the variation of the second special pattern (special pattern 2) whose lottery result is a small win is stopped, and is referred to in the special pattern variation process (see FIG. 32). If the result of the reference is that it is set to ON, a process is executed to update the display of the first pattern display device corresponding to special pattern 1 in the same way as during variation. In other words, while the special pattern 1 temporary stop flag 203cg is set to ON, the update (subtraction) of the variation time is stopped, but the first pattern display device is in a state in which the variation display is continuously executed. As a result, it is possible to notify that the variation of special pattern 1 has not been forcibly stopped by setting the special pattern 1 temporary stop flag 203cg to ON. Then, when it is determined that it is set to ON in the first special pattern variation execution process, it is set to OFF.

In this embodiment, since only the second special symbol is selected as the winning symbol for the small prize, the first special symbol is the only special symbol whose variable display is temporarily stopped based on the winning symbol being selected for the small prize. However, if the first special symbol is selected as the winning symbol for the small prize, a special symbol 2 temporary stop flag may be set to temporarily stop the variable display of the second special symbol.

The high probability limit counter 203cj is a counter for setting the upper limit value for the number of times the high probability state can be set consecutively. In this control example, the upper limit number of times the high probability state can be set consecutively after the end of a jackpot is specified (36 times). The value of the high probability limit counter 203cj is referenced when determining whether the number of times the high probability state has been set consecutively has reached the upper limit number. The value of this high probability limit counter 203cj is incremented by 1 each time the high probability state is set at the end of a jackpot game. The counter value is cleared when the normal state or the time-saving state is set.

As described above, in this embodiment, if the result of the lottery for one special symbol is a big win, the process forcibly stops the variable display of the other special symbol as a miss based on the fact that one special symbol has stopped in a combination that indicates a big win (based on the fact that a big win game is being played), and if the result of the lottery for one special symbol is a small win, the process forcibly stops the variable display of the other special symbol (based on the fact that one special symbol has stopped in a combination that indicates a small win) based on the fact that one special symbol has stopped in a combination that indicates a small win in this embodiment.

In other words, the system is configured so that the variable display of one special symbol can be processed in various ways depending on the lottery result of the other special symbol. By configuring it in this way, if the lottery result of one special symbol becomes the most advantageous game result for the player (for example, a big win), and the variable display to show that game result is being executed, the other special symbol (the lottery result is a small win) is displayed stationary, which prevents the big win from being erased by the small win.

<Regarding the electrical configuration of the voice lamp control device in the fourth control example>
Next, the configuration of the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 in this fourth control example will be described with reference to Fig. 331. The RAM 223 of the pachinko machine 10 in this fourth control example differs from the RAM 223 of the pachinko machine 10 in the above-mentioned first control example in that a performance mode storage area 223ca and a high probability upper limit number counter 223cb are added. Other than that, they are the same, and the same elements are given the same symbols and their detailed description is omitted.

The presentation mode memory area 223ca is an area for storing the currently set presentation mode. In this fourth control example, the presentation mode that is set when the potential state is set as the game state can be set to a potential presentation A mode that executes a pseudo-potential presentation (see FIG. 324(a)) that simulates the jackpot game presentation executed during a jackpot game, and a potential presentation B mode that divides consecutively set potential states into predetermined periods (for example, the period until three jackpots are won) and executes a pseudo potential presentation (see FIG. 324(b)) for each division.

This presentation mode memory area 223ca stores a presentation mode selected based on the value of the probability change upper limit counter 223cb when a jackpot is won in a game state other than the potential jackpot state (normal state, probability change state, time-saving state) and the potential jackpot state is set after the jackpot game ends. Then, while the potential jackpot state is continuously set, the same presentation mode is stored, and the information (presentation mode) that was stored based on the setting of a game state other than the potential jackpot state is cleared.

The high probability limit counter 223cb is a counter for measuring the number of times that a high probability state (high probability state, potential probability state) of a special symbol is set consecutively, and is referenced when determining whether the number of times that a high probability state (high probability state, potential probability state) of a special symbol has been set consecutively has reached the upper limit (e.g., 36 times). This high probability limit counter 223cb is incremented by 1 when a high probability state of a special symbol is set after the end of a jackpot game, and is cleared when a high probability state of a special symbol is not set after the end of a jackpot game.

<Regarding control process of main control device in fourth control example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of Figures 332 to 347. The processes of the MPU 201 are roughly divided into start-up process which is started when the power is turned on, main process which is executed after the start-up process, timer interrupt process which is started periodically (at 2 ms intervals in this control example), and NMI interrupt process which is started by input of a power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and NMI interrupt process will be described first, and then the start-up process and main process will be described.

First, referring to FIG. 332, the contents of the special symbol change process 4 (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in this control example will be described. FIG. 332 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special symbol change process 4 (S104). When the special symbol change process 4 (S104) is executed, first, it is determined whether the current state is a big win or a small win (S4501), and if it is determined that the current state is a big win or a small win (S4501: Yes), it is next determined whether the special symbol 1 temporary stop flag 203cg is set to on (S4502). In this S4502 process, it is determined whether the subtraction of the special symbol change time of the other special symbol that is changing is interrupted because one special symbol is stopped and displayed with a symbol indicating a win. In the process of S4502, if it is determined that the special symbol 1 temporary stop flag 203cg is set to ON (S4502: Yes), the display of the first symbol display device 37 corresponding to the temporarily stopped special symbol is updated (S4503), that is, a process is executed to continue the change display of the first symbol display device 37 for the special symbol for which the subtraction of the change time has been interrupted, and this process is terminated. This makes it possible to inform the player that the special symbol change has not been forcibly stopped.

On the other hand, in the process of S4501, if it is determined that the current status is a big win or a small win (S4501: No), it is determined whether the value of the special pattern 1 change time counter 203ch is greater than 0 (i.e., whether the special pattern 1 is changing) (S4504), and if it is determined that the value of the special pattern 1 change time counter 203ch is not greater than 0 (is 0) (S4504: No), the first special pattern change start process (S4508) is executed, and then the process proceeds to S4509 in which change process regarding the special pattern 2 is executed. Details of the first special pattern change start process (S4508) will be described later with reference to FIG. 333.

If it is determined in the process of S4504 that the value of the special pattern 1 change time counter 203ch is greater than 0 (S4504: Yes), the first special pattern change in progress process 4 (S4505) is executed. This first special pattern change in progress process 4 (S4505) executes the process during the special pattern 1 change, and a detailed explanation thereof will be given later with reference to FIG. 336.

When the first special symbol change in progress process 4 (S4505) is completed, it is next determined whether it is the end of the change time (whether the special symbol 1 change time counter 203ch is 0) (S4506). If it is determined that it is the end of the change time (S4506: Yes), the first special symbol change stop process (S4507) is executed, and then the process proceeds to S4509. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4506 that it is not the end of the change time (S4506: No), the process skips S4507 and proceeds to S4509.

In the processing of S4509 to S4513, the same processing as S4504 to S4507 executed for special symbol 1 is executed. When the processing of S4509 is executed, first, it is determined whether the value of the special symbol 2 change time counter 203ci is greater than 0 (i.e., whether the special symbol 2 is changing) (S4509), and if it is determined that the value of the special symbol 2 change time counter 203ci is not greater than 0 (is 0) (S4509: No), the second special symbol change start processing 4 (S4510) is executed, and then this processing is terminated. Details of this second special symbol change start processing 4 (S4510) will be described later with reference to FIG. 338.

On the other hand, in the process of S4509, if it is determined that the value of the special symbol 2 change time counter 203ci is greater than 0 (S4509: Yes), the second special symbol change execution process 4 (S4511) is executed. This second special symbol change execution process 4 (S4511) executes the process during the special symbol 2 change, and will be described later with reference to FIG. 343.

When the second special symbol change execution process 4 (S4511) is completed, it is next determined whether it is the end of the change time (whether the special symbol 2 change time counter 203ci is 0) (S4512). If it is determined that it is the end of the change time (S4512: Yes), the second special symbol change stop process 4 (S4513) is executed and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4512 that it is not the end of the change time (S4512: No), the process of S4513 is skipped and this process is terminated.

Next, referring to FIG. 333, we will explain the first special symbol change start process (S4508), which is one process of the special symbol change process 4 (S104 in FIG. 332) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. FIG. 333 is a flowchart showing this first special symbol change start process (S4508).

In the first special symbol variation start process (S4508), first, the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203d is obtained (S4601), and it is determined whether the obtained value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203d is greater than 0 (S4602). In the process of S4602, if it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203d is greater than 0 (S4602: Yes), the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203d is decremented by 1 (S4603), and a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203d after the decrement is set to notify the voice lamp control device 113 (S4604).

The reserved ball count command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 in the external output process (S2201) of the main process (see FIG. 52) executed by the MPU 201, which will be described later. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball count command, it extracts the value of the first special pattern reserved ball count counter 203d from the reserved ball count command, and stores the extracted value in the first special pattern reserved ball count counter 223c in the RAM 223. In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the first special pattern reserved ball count counter 223c according to the reserved ball count command transmitted from the main control device 110, so that the value can be updated in synchronization with the value of the first special pattern reserved ball count counter 203d in the main control device 110.

When the processing of S4604 is completed, the data in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is then shifted to the previous data (S4605). More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the following order: reserved area 1 → execution area, reserved area 2 → reserved area 1, reserved area 3 → reserved area 2, reserved area 4 → reserved area 3, and so on.

When the processing of S4605 is completed, the first special symbol jackpot determination process is then executed (S4606). This first special symbol jackpot determination process (S4606) will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 334, but it is a process for executing a jackpot determination as to whether or not a jackpot has occurred based on the value of the first jackpot random number counter C1 that has been shifted to the execution area of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, and based on the set game state.

When the processing of S4606 is completed, the first special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process 4 is then executed (see FIG. 335). Details will be described later, but this first special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process 4 (S4607) is a process for selecting a fluctuation pattern based on the result of the hit/miss judgment of the first special symbol and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the execution area of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a.

When the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 4 (S4607) is completed, it is then determined whether the value of the time-saving counter 203j is greater than 0 (S4608). If it is determined that the value of the time-saving counter 203j is greater than 0 (S4608: Yes), the value of the time-saving counter 203j is decremented by 1 (S4609), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4608 that the value of the time-saving counter 203j is not greater than 0 (S4608: No), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4602 that the value (N1) of the first special pattern reserved ball count counter 203d is 0 (S4602: No), this process is terminated.

Next, referring to FIG. 334, the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S4606), which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (S4504 in FIG. 333) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 334 is a flowchart showing this first special symbol jackpot determination process (S4606). The pachinko machine 10 of this control example is configured so that while a variation display (jackpot variation) indicating a jackpot win is being displayed for one of the special symbols, it does not determine whether or not a jackpot win has been achieved in the other special symbol lottery.

In other words, when it has been determined that a jackpot game will be played after a certain period of time (after the variable time has elapsed) through one special pattern drawing, the system is designed to prevent a jackpot being won through another special pattern drawing, resulting in multiple jackpot wins in a short period of time and excessive awarding of special prizes.

In this way, the process of acquiring various counter values is performed in the same way as in a normal special symbol lottery, and the judgment based on the various counter values acquired in that process is skipped, and a losing symbol is set, making it possible to quickly respond to the lottery results of the other special symbol lottery.

In the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S4606), first, each counter value stored in the execution area of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is obtained (S4701). Next, it is determined whether the probability variable flag 203ca is set to ON (S4702). In other words, it is determined whether the special symbol is in a high probability state (probability variable state, potential probability state). If it is determined that the probability variable flag 203ca is ON (i.e., the special symbol is in a probability variable state) (S4702: Yes), it is determined whether the random number value for the jackpot specified in the first hit random number table 202a for high probability matches the value of the first hit random number counter C1 obtained from the counter buffer, and the determination result (lottery result) is obtained (S4703). On the other hand, in the process of S4702, if it is determined that the probability of a jackpot 203ca is off (i.e., the special pattern is in a low probability state) (S4702: No), it is determined whether the random number value for a jackpot defined in the first jackpot random number table 202a for low probability matches the value of the first jackpot random number counter C1 obtained from the counter buffer, and the lottery result is obtained (S4704).

Next, it is determined whether the lottery result obtained in S4703 or S4704 is a jackpot (S4705), and if the lottery result is a jackpot (S4705: Yes), the special symbol 1 jackpot flag 203ck is set to on for the first special symbol (S4706), and the lottery result for the first special symbol is set to a jackpot (S4707). Then, based on the obtained value of the winning type counter, the jackpot symbol for the first special symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set (S4709), and this process ends.

On the other hand, if the lottery result is determined to be a loss in the process of S4705 (S4705: No), the losing pattern of the first special pattern to be displayed on the first pattern display device 37 is set (S4709), and then this process is terminated.

Next, referring to FIG. 335, we will explain the first special symbol change pattern selection process 4 (S4607), which is one process of the first special symbol change start process (S4508 in FIG. 333). FIG. 335 is a flowchart showing this first special symbol change pattern selection process 4 (S4607).

In the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 4 (S4607 in FIG. 335), first, in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S4606 in FIG. 334), it is determined whether the lottery result of the first special symbol was determined to be a jackpot, that is, whether a jackpot for the first special symbol has been set (S4801). Here, the determination of whether or not there is a jackpot is determined by whether or not the special symbol 1 jackpot flag 203ck is on. This special symbol 1 jackpot flag 203ck is set to on in the process of S4707 in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 334) described above.

If it is determined in the process of S4801 that a jackpot for the first special symbol has been set (S4801: Yes), the jackpot type is determined from the special symbol 1 jackpot type selection 4 table 202d1 (see FIG. 326(a)) based on the value of the first jackpot type counter C2 obtained in the process of S4701 in the first special symbol jackpot determination process described above (see FIG. 334) (S4802), and the process proceeds to S4803.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4801 that the lottery result for the first special symbol is a miss (i.e., the special symbol 1 jackpot flag 203ck is off) (S4801: No), the process of S4802 is skipped and the process proceeds to S4803.

In the process of S4803, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is obtained from the execution area of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a (S4803). Next, a variation pattern selection table (see Figures 327 to 329) according to the game status is read (S4804), and the process proceeds to S4805. The game status is determined based on the state of the probability variation flag 203ca and the value of the time-saving counter 203f. In the process of S4805, a variation pattern corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 is selected from the read variation pattern selection table (S4805), and then the special symbol 1 variation pattern command is set based on the selected variation pattern (S4806).

When the processing of S4806 is completed, a special pattern 1 stop type command indicating the stop pattern is set (S4807), then the start of the fluctuation of the first special pattern is set on the first pattern display device 37 (S4808), a value indicating the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern selected in the processing of S4805 is set in the special pattern 1 fluctuation time counter 203ch, and this processing is terminated.

Next, referring to FIG. 336, the contents of the first special pattern change in progress process 4 (S4505) executed in the special pattern change in progress process 4 (see S154 in FIG. 332) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 336 is a flowchart showing the contents of the first special pattern change in progress process 4 (S4505). In this first special pattern change in progress process 4 (S4505), a process is executed to resume the subtraction of the change time of special pattern 1 if the subtraction has been suspended, and a process to subtract the change time.

When the first special pattern change execution process 4 (S4505) is executed, first, it is determined whether the special pattern 1 temporary stop flag 203cg is set to ON (S4901). Here, we will briefly explain the case where this process is executed with the special pattern 1 temporary stop flag 203cg set to ON. As described above, the special pattern 1 temporary stop flag 203cg is set to ON when the special pattern 2 is stopped and displayed with a pattern indicating a win (small win) while the special pattern 1 is changing. Then, when the special symbol 1 temporary stop flag 203cg is set on, the jackpot in progress flag 203o is set on during the process, so that the timer interrupt process executed every 2 milliseconds by the main control device 110 loops, and the next time (2 milliseconds after the special symbol 1 temporary stop flag 203cg is set on) the special symbol change process 4 (see FIG. 332) is executed, it is determined that a jackpot is in progress in the process of S4501, so the first special symbol change in progress process 4 (S4505) is not executed. Then, the jackpot game (or small jackpot game) ends, and it is determined that the jackpot is not in progress (or small jackpot) in the process of S4501, so the first special symbol change in progress process 4 (S4505) is executed. By configuring it in this way, the state in which the first special pattern change in progress process 4 (S4505) is executed while the special pattern 1 temporary stop flag 203cg is set to ON is configured to be the timing when the big win (or small win) game ends and the deduction of the special pattern change change time that was suspended is resumed.

Returning to FIG. 336 for further explanation. In the process of S4901, if it is determined that the special chart 1 temporary stop flag 203cg is set to on (S4901: Yes), then the special chart 1 fluctuation resume command is set (S4902), the special chart 1 temporary stop flag 203cg is set to off (S4903), and the process proceeds to S4904. On the other hand, in the process of S4901, if it is determined that the special chart 1 temporary stop flag 203cg is not set to on (is set to off) (S4901: No), the processes of S4902 and S4903 are skipped and the process proceeds to S4904.

In the process of S4904, the special pattern 1 variable time counter 203ch is updated by subtracting 1 (S4904), the display of the first pattern display device 37 is updated (S4905), and this process is terminated.

Next, referring to FIG. 337, the first special symbol change stop process (S4507), which is one process of the special symbol change process 4 (S154 in FIG. 332), will be described. FIG. 337 is a flowchart showing this first special symbol change stop process (S4507).

In the first special symbol variation stop process (S4507), first, it is determined whether the special symbol 1 jackpot flag 203ck is set to on for the first special symbol (special symbol 1) (S5001). If it is determined that the special symbol 1 jackpot flag 203ck is set to on for the first special symbol (S5001: Yes), the special symbol 2 variation stop flag 203ce is set to on (S5002), and a special symbol 2 variation stop command indicating that the special symbol 2 variation stop flag 203ce has been turned on is set (S5003). Next, the second special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is displayed as a stop symbol (S5004).

When the processing of S5004 is completed, the value of the special chart 2 variable time counter 203ci is set to 0 (S5005), and it is determined whether the special chart 2 jackpot flag 203cl is set to ON (S5006). The stored information for the special chart 2 jackpot is deleted (S5008), and the processing proceeds to S5009. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S5006 that the special chart 2 jackpot flag 203cl is set to OFF (S5006: No), the processing of S5007 to S5008 is skipped, and the processing proceeds to S5009.

After executing the processing of S5006 or S5008, the jackpot scenario is set (S5009). Next, the special chart 1 jackpot flag 203ck, the probability bonus flag 203ca, and the time-saving counter 203j are reset (S5010), the jackpot flag 203cc is set to ON (S5011), and the process proceeds to S5012. On the other hand, even if it is determined in the processing of S5001 that the special chart 1 jackpot flag 203ck is not ON (S5001: No), the process proceeds to S5012.

In the process of S5012, a special pattern 1 confirmation command is set to notify the voice lamp control device 113 that the first special pattern is to be confirmed and stopped (S5012). After that, a process is executed to stop the variable display of the first special pattern displayed by the first pattern display device 37 (S5013), and this process is terminated.

In this way, in the first special symbol stopping process (S4507), a process (S5002 to S5009) is executed to stop the variable display at the symbol that indicates the result of the first lottery game. Also, if the lottery result of the first special symbol is determined to be a jackpot (S5001: Yes), a process (S5003, S5004) is executed to forcibly stop the variable display of the second special symbol.

In this fourth control example, when the first special symbol is stopped as a jackpot symbol, the second special symbol being displayed as a missing symbol is forcibly stopped as a missing symbol, but this is not limited to the above. For example, the display of the second special symbol may be interrupted (temporarily stopped) when the first special symbol is stopped as a jackpot symbol. Then, after the first special symbol has finished hitting the jackpot, the display of the second special symbol may be resumed. This allows for a more natural presentation compared to when the display is forcibly stopped as a missing symbol.

Next, referring to FIG. 338, the contents of the second special pattern change start process 4 (S4510) executed in the special pattern change process 4 (FIG. 332) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 338 is a flowchart showing the contents of the second special pattern change start process 4 (S4510). In this second special pattern change start process 4 (S4510), processing is executed to start the change of special pattern 2. Note that detailed explanations will be omitted for elements that simply change the target of the change from the first special pattern to the second special pattern in the processing related to the change of the first special pattern described above with reference to FIG. 333 to FIG. 337.

In the second special symbol variation start process 4 (S4510), first, it is determined whether the special symbol 2 variation stop flag 203ce is set to ON (S5101). If it is determined that the special symbol 2 variation stop flag 203ce is set to ON (S5101: Yes), the special symbol 2 variation stop flag 203ce is set to OFF (S5102), and this process is terminated. As described above, the special symbol 2 variation stop flag 203ce is a flag that is set to ON when the jackpot variation of the first special symbol ends, and that causes the second special symbol to be displayed as a stop symbol corresponding to a miss. In other words, if the special symbol 2 variation stop flag 203ce is ON, it means that a jackpot will start, so the start of variation of the second special symbol should not be set. For this reason, if the special symbol 2 variation stop flag 203ce is ON in the process of S5101, the process is terminated without executing each process of S5102 to S5107 for setting the start of variation.

On the other hand, in the process of S5101, if it is determined that the special pattern 2 variation stop flag 203ce is set to off (i.e., not set to on) (S5101: No), data (various counter values) of the second special pattern execution area is acquired (S5103). Next, based on the data acquired in the process of S5103, it is determined whether or not there is acquired data (S5104). In other words, if it is determined that there is no data in the second special pattern execution area (S5104: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S5103, if it is determined that there is data (S5104: Yes), a second special pattern jackpot determination process 4 is executed to execute a jackpot determination of the second special pattern based on each stored counter value (S5105). Details of this second special pattern jackpot determination process 4 will be described later with reference to FIG. 339.

After the process of S5105 is completed, the second special symbol variation pattern selection process 4 is executed to select a variation pattern based on the lottery result of the second special symbol and the data acquired in the process of S5103 (S5106). Details of this second special symbol variation pattern selection process 4 (S5106) will be described later with reference to FIG. 341. After the process of S5106 is completed, it is determined whether the value of the time-saving counter 203j is greater than 0 (S5107). If it is determined that the value of the time-saving counter 203j is greater than 0 (S5107: Yes), the value of the time-saving counter 203j is decremented by 1 (S5108), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5107 that the value of the time-saving counter 203j is 0, that is, that the time-saving is not in progress (S5107: No), this process is terminated as it is.

Next, referring to FIG. 339, we will explain the second special symbol big win determination process 4 (S5105), which is one process of the second special symbol variation start process 4 (S4510 in FIG. 338) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. FIG. 339 is a flowchart showing this second special symbol big win determination process 4 (S5105).

In this second special symbol jackpot determination process 4 (S5105), the same process as the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 334) described above is executed, so the following explanation will focus on the differences from the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 334).

When the second special symbol jackpot determination process 4 (S5105) is executed, each counter value stored in the second special symbol execution area is obtained (S5201). Then, the processes of S5202 to S5204 are executed to obtain the lottery result of whether or not there is a jackpot based on each obtained counter value and the state of the probability change flag 203ca. In each of these processes, the only difference is that the counter value used in the lottery (determination) is obtained from the second special symbol execution area, and otherwise the same control is executed as in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 334).

When the processing of S5203 or S5204 is completed, it is determined whether the obtained lottery result is a jackpot (S5205), and if it is determined to be a jackpot (S5205: Yes), the processing of S5206 to S5208 is executed to set the lottery result of the second special symbol to a jackpot, and this processing ends. In each of these processes of S5206 to S5208, the same processing as each of S4706 to S4708 for setting the lottery result of the first special symbol to a jackpot in the first special symbol jackpot determination processing (see FIG. 334) is executed.

On the other hand, in the process of S5205, if it is determined that the lottery result of the acquired second special symbol is not a big win (S5205: No), Special symbol 2 Miss variation process 4 is executed (S5209) to set the stopping symbol corresponding to a small win or a miss of the second special symbol, and this process ends. Details of this Special symbol 2 Miss variation process 4 (S5209) will be explained with reference to FIG. 41. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing this Special symbol 2 Miss variation process 4 (S5209).

In the special symbol 2 miss variation process 4 (S5209), first, it is determined whether the lottery result obtained in the process of S5203 or S5204 in FIG. 339 is a small win for the second special symbol (S5301). If it is determined that the lottery result is a small win (S5301: Yes), the small win flag 203cf is set to ON (S5302) and the lottery result for the second special symbol is set to a small win (S5303). Then, the small win symbol indicating the small win type corresponding to the obtained value of the small win type counter C5 is set as the stop symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 (S5304), and this process ends.

On the other hand, if the lottery result is determined to be a loss in the process of S5301 (S5301: No), the losing pattern of the second special pattern to be displayed on the first pattern display device 37 is set (S5305), and then this process is terminated.

Next, referring to FIG. 341, we will explain the second special symbol change pattern selection process 4 (S5106), which is one process of the second special symbol change start process 4 (S4510 in FIG. 338) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. FIG. 341 is a flowchart showing this second special symbol change pattern selection process 4 (S5106).

In the second special symbol variation pattern selection process 4 (S5106 in FIG. 341), first, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is obtained from the second special symbol execution area (S5401). Next, in the second special symbol jackpot determination process 4 (S5105 in FIG. 339), it is determined whether the lottery result of the second special symbol is a jackpot or not, that is, whether a jackpot of the second special symbol is set or not (S5402). Here, the determination of whether or not it is a jackpot is determined by whether or not the special symbol 2 jackpot flag 203cl is on for the second special symbol. This special symbol 2 jackpot flag 203cl is set to on in the process of S5207 in the second special symbol jackpot determination process 4 (see FIG. 339) described above.

If it is determined in the process of S5402 that a jackpot for the second special symbol is set (S5402: Yes), the variable pattern selection table (see Figs. 328 and 329) corresponding to the current game state is read (S5403). Then, based on the value of the first jackpot type counter C2 obtained in the process of S5201 in the second special symbol jackpot determination process 4 (see Fig. 339) described above, the jackpot type is determined from the special symbol 2 jackpot type selection 4 table 202cd2 (see Fig. 326(b)) (S5404).

When the process of S5404 is completed, a variation pattern corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 is selected from the read variation pattern selection table (S5405), and then a special chart 2 variation pattern command is set based on the selected variation pattern (S5406). Then, the process proceeds to S5408.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5402 that the jackpot for the second special symbol is not set (S5402: No), the process executes the special symbol 2 miss variation pattern selection process 4 (S5407) and proceeds to the process of S5408.

In the process of S5408, a special symbol 2 stop type command indicating the stop symbol is set (S5408). Next, the start of the fluctuation of the second special symbol is set in the first symbol display device 37 (S5409), and a value indicating the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern selected in the process of S5405 is set in the special symbol 2 fluctuation time counter 203ci (S5410), and this process ends.

Next, the special chart 2 deviation variation pattern selection process 4 (S5407) will be described with reference to FIG. 342. FIG. 342 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special chart 2 deviation variation pattern selection process 4 (S5407).

In the special pattern 2 miss variation pattern selection process 4 (S5407 in FIG. 342), first, it is determined whether the lottery result of the second special pattern is a small win (S5501). Here, it is determined whether the small win flag 203cf is set to on (S5501). If it is determined that the small win flag 203cf is on (S5501: Yes), the value of the small win type counter C5 is obtained from the second special pattern execution area (S5502). Then, based on the obtained value of the small win type counter C5 and the small win type selection table 202ce (not shown), a small win type is selected (S5503).

Next, the variation pattern selection table (see Figures 327 to 389) corresponding to the current game state is read (S5504), and from the read variation pattern selection table, the small win variation pattern corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 is selected (S5505). After that, the special chart 2 variation pattern command indicating the selected small win variation pattern is set (S5506), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S5501, if it is determined that the lottery result for the second special symbol is not a small win (i.e., a miss) (S5501: No), a variation pattern selection table (see Figures 327 to 389) corresponding to the current game state is read (S5507), and a miss variation pattern corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 is selected from the read variation pattern selection table (S5508). After that, a special symbol 2 variation pattern command is set based on the selected miss variation pattern (S5509), and this process is terminated.

Next, referring to FIG. 343, the contents of second special pattern change in progress process 4 (S4511), which is one process within the special pattern change process (see S154 in FIG. 332) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be explained. FIG. 343 is a flowchart showing the contents of second special pattern change in progress process 4 (S4511). In this second special pattern change in progress process 4 (S4511), a process is executed to resume the subtraction of the change time of special pattern 2 if the subtraction has been suspended, and a process to subtract the change time.

When the second special symbol change in progress process 4 (S4511) is executed, first, the special symbol 2 change time counter 203ci is updated by subtracting 1 (S5601), the display of the second special symbol on the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S5602), and this process is terminated.

Next, referring to FIG. 344, the contents of the second special symbol variation stop process 4 (S4513) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be explained. FIG. 344 is a flowchart showing the contents of the second special symbol variation stop process 4 (S4513). This second special symbol variation stop process 4 (S4513) executes processing when the variation of the special symbol 2 is stopped.

When the second special symbol variation stop process 4 (S4513) is executed, first, it is determined whether the special symbol 2 big win flag 203cl is set to on (S5701), and if it is determined that the special symbol 2 big win flag 203cl is set to on (S5701: Yes), a special symbol 1 variation stop command indicating the stop of the special symbol 1 variation is set (S5703). Next, when the process of S5703 is completed, the first special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is stopped and displayed as a missing symbol (S5704). Next, it is determined whether the special symbol 1 big win flag 203ck is on (S5706). If it is determined that the special symbol 1 big win flag 203ck is on (S5706: Yes), the special symbol 1 big win flag 203ck is set to off (S5707), the stored information for the special symbol 1 big win is deleted (S5708), and the process proceeds to S5709. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S5706 that the special chart 1 jackpot flag 203ck is off (S5706: No), the processing of S5707 to S5708 is skipped and the processing proceeds to S5709.

In the process of S5709, a jackpot scenario corresponding to the selected jackpot type is set (S5709), and the special chart 2 jackpot flag 203cl, the probability bonus flag 203ca, and the time-saving counter 203j are reset (S5710). Next, the jackpot flag 203cc is set to ON (S5711), and the process proceeds to S5712.

In the process of S5712, a special symbol 2 confirmation command is set to notify the voice lamp control device 113 that the second special symbol is to be confirmed and stopped (S5712). After that, a process is executed to stop the variable display of the second special symbol being displayed on the first symbol display device 37 (S5713), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S5701 that the special chart 2 jackpot flag 203cl is not set to on (S5701: No), the special chart 2 miss stop processing 4 is executed (S5702), the above-mentioned processing of S5712 and S5713 is executed, and this processing ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 345, we will explain special symbol 2 miss stop processing 4 (S5702), which is one process of second special symbol change stop processing 4 (S4513 in FIG. 344). FIG. 345 is a flowchart showing special symbol 2 miss stop processing 4 (S5702). This special symbol 2 miss stop processing 4 (S5702) is a process that is executed when the lottery result of the second special symbol (special symbol 2) is other than a big win (small win, miss) and the special symbol 2 indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed, and if the lottery result of the special symbol 2 is a small win, a process is executed to temporarily stop the special symbol 1 change that is being performed.

In the special chart 2 miss stop process 4 (S5702), first, it is determined whether the small win flag 203cf is set to on (S5801). If it is determined that the small win flag 203cf is set to on (S5801: Yes), the special chart 1 temporary stop flag 203cg is set to on (S5802). Next, a special chart 1 temporary stop command is set, which indicates that the special chart 1 temporary stop flag 203cg is on (S5803).

When the processing of S5803 is completed, a small win scenario is set based on the selected small win type (S5804). After that, the small win flag 203cf is set to OFF (S5805), and the small win middle flag 203g is set to ON (S5806).

When the processing of S5806 is completed, a special pattern 2 confirmation command is set to instruct the voice lamp control device 113 to stop confirming the second special pattern (S5807). After that, the second special pattern displayed on the first pattern display device 37 is stopped changing to a small win pattern (S5808), and this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S5801, if it is determined that the small win flag 203cf is off (i.e., the lottery result for the second special symbol is a miss) (S5801: No), a special symbol 2 confirmation command is set to instruct the voice lamp control device 113 to stop the confirmation of the second special symbol (S5809). After that, the second special symbol displayed in a variable manner on the first symbol display device 37 is stopped changing at the miss symbol (S5810), and this process is terminated.

As described above, the control of the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is configured to be able to be executed independently and in parallel, so that the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be displayed in a variable manner at the same time. This allows a lottery game with more special symbols to be executed within a specified time, and increases the probability that the player will be awarded a jackpot within the specified time. This allows the player to play efficiently.

In this control example, when either the first or second special symbol indicates a jackpot, the other special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed. However, the other special symbol may be temporarily stopped or displayed while the measurement of the change time is interrupted. In such a case, the temporarily stopped special symbol is stopped in a display or notification manner that lets the player know that it is temporarily stopped, so the player can know that the lottery game that was in the middle of changing display has not disappeared, and can play the jackpot game with peace of mind.

Next, referring to FIG. 346, the normal symbol change process (S156) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 346 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol change process (S156). This normal symbol change process (S156) is executed during timer interrupt processing, and is a process for controlling the change display and change time of the second symbol performed by the second symbol display device 83, the opening operation and opening time of the lower electric role 64Da associated with the lower first ball entrance 64D, etc.

In this normal symbol variation process (S156 in FIG. 346), first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is currently winning (S5901). The normal symbol (second symbol) is winning when the second symbol display device 83 is displaying a win and when the lower electric device 64Da associated with the lower first ball entrance 64D is being controlled to open and close. If it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is winning (S5901: Yes), a new normal symbol variation (lottery) cannot be started (executed), so this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the normal pattern (second pattern) is not winning (S5901: No), then it is determined whether the display state of the second pattern display device 83 is changing (normal pattern changing) (S5902). If it is determined that the display state of the second pattern display device 83 is not changing (normal pattern changing) (S5902: No), that is, if it is determined that the normal pattern is not currently winning or changing, that is, a new normal pattern change (lottery) can be started (executed), then the value of the normal pattern reserved ball count counter 203e (the number of reserved times M of the changing display for the normal pattern) is obtained (S5903).

Next, it is determined whether the value (M) of the normal pattern reserved ball count counter 203e is greater than 0 (S5904), and if it is determined that the value (M) of the normal pattern reserved ball count counter 203e is 0 (S5904: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value (M) of the normal pattern reserved ball count counter 203e is not 0 (S5904: Yes), the value (M) of the normal pattern reserved ball count counter 203e is decremented by 1 (S5905), and the data stored in the normal pattern reserved ball storage area 203c is shifted (S5906).

In the process of S5906, the data stored in the first to fourth normal pattern reserve areas of the normal pattern reserve ball storage area 203c is shifted in sequence to the execution area. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the following order: normal pattern reserve first area → execution area, normal pattern reserve second area → normal pattern reserve first area, normal pattern reserve third area → normal pattern reserve second area, and normal pattern reserve fourth area → normal pattern reserve third area. After the data is shifted, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal pattern reserve ball storage area 203c is obtained (S5907).

Then, it is determined whether the value of the time-saving counter 203j is greater than 0 (S5908). If it is determined that the value of the time-saving counter 203j is greater than 0 (S5908: Yes), since the time-saving state is in effect, the lottery result is obtained based on the normal winning random number 4 table 202cc for high probability (S5909). Specifically, if the value of the second winning type counter C4 is in the range of "0 to 204", it is determined that the normal pattern is a winning symbol, and if it is in the range of "205 to 232", it is determined that the normal pattern is a losing symbol. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5908 that the value of the time-saving counter 203j is not greater than 0 (i.e., 0) (S5908: No), the lottery result is obtained based on the normal winning random number 4 table 202cc for low probability (S5910). Specifically, the lottery result is obtained based on the winning random number 4 table 202cc for normal patterns for low probability. If the value of the second winning type counter C4 is in the range of "5", it is determined that the normal pattern is a winning symbol, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4, 6 to 232", it is determined that the normal pattern is a losing symbol.

Next, it is determined whether the result of the lottery for the normal symbol obtained by the processing of S5909 or S5910 is a winning normal symbol (S5911), and if it is determined that the normal symbol is a winning normal symbol (S5911: Yes), the display mode at the time of winning is set (S5912), and processing proceeds to S5914. In the processing of S5911, after the variable display on the second symbol display device has ended, the "○" symbol is set to be lit and displayed as the stopping symbol (second symbol).

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5911 that the normal pattern is a miss (S5911: No), the display mode in the event of a miss is set (S5913), and the process proceeds to S5914. In this process of S5913, after the variable display in the second pattern display device has ended, the "X" pattern is set to be displayed as a lit stop pattern (second pattern). Once the setting of the display mode in the event of a miss has been completed, the process proceeds to S5914. When the process of S5912 or S5913 has ended, the variable time of the normal pattern is determined based on the value of the normal pattern variable type counter (S5914), and this process ends.

When the processing of S5912 or S5914 is completed, in the processing of S591, it is determined whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state (time-saving state) for normal symbols (S5911), and if it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state (time-saving state) for normal symbols (S5911: Yes), the normal symbol fluctuation time in the second symbol display device is set to 3 seconds (S5913), and then the normal symbol short fluctuation flag 203t is set to ON (S5914), and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is not in a high probability state (time-saving state) for normal symbols (it is in a low probability state for normal symbols) (S5911: No), the normal symbol fluctuation time in the second symbol display device is set to 10 seconds (S5915), and this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5902 that the display mode of the second pattern display device 83 is changing (S5902: Yes), it is determined whether the change time of the changing display being executed in the second pattern display device 83 has elapsed (S5915). Note that the change time here is the time that was previously set by the process of S5910 or the process of S5912 before the changing display was started in the second pattern display device 83.

In the process of S5915, if it is determined that the change time has not elapsed (S5915: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S5915, if it is determined that the change time of the executed change display has elapsed (S5915: Yes), then the stop display of the second pattern display device is set (S5916). In the process of S5916, if the lottery for the normal pattern is a win and the display mode is set by the process of S5912, the "○" pattern as the second pattern is set to be stopped and displayed (lighted) on the second pattern display device. On the other hand, if the lottery for the normal pattern is a loss and the display mode is set by the process of S5913, the "×" pattern as the second pattern is set to be stopped and displayed (lighted) on the second pattern display device. Note that the period during which the second pattern is stopped and displayed is configured to be longer (determined display) than the period during which one part of the blinking display (alternating display of "○" and "×") indicating that the second pattern is changing is lit. This allows the player to easily understand that the second symbol has stopped and been displayed.

After completing the processing of S5916, when the ongoing variable display is started on the second pattern display device, it is determined whether the result of the lottery for the normal pattern performed by the normal pattern variable processing (S156) (the current lottery result) is a winning normal pattern (S5917). If it is determined that the current lottery result is a losing normal pattern (S5917: No), this processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the current lottery result is a winning normal pattern (S5917: Yes), it is next determined whether the value of the time-saving counter 203j is greater than 0 (S5918).

If it is determined in the process of S5918 that the value of the time-saving counter 203j is 0, that is, that the game state at the timing when the current lottery (variation) of the normal symbol is started is the normal state (S5919: No), the opening time of the lower electric device 64Da is set to 0.9 seconds and the number of times it is opened is set to 2 times (S5920), and the process proceeds to S5921.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S5918 that the value of the time-saving counter 203j is greater than 0, that is, if it is determined that the game state at the timing when the current lottery (variation) of the normal pattern is started is in the time-saving state (S5918: Yes), the opening period of the lower electric device 64Da attached to the lower first ball entrance 64D is set to 1 second, and the number of times it is opened is set to 2 times (S5924), and the processing proceeds to S5923.

As explained above, in this control example, the lower electric device 64Da is configured to set an opening operation advantageous to the player (long opening) only when both the timing at which the lottery (variation) of the normal symbol is executed and the timing at which the opening operation of the lower electric device 64Da, which is executed based on the winning of the normal symbol, are in the time-saving state.

By configuring in this way, the conditions for setting the opening operation that is advantageous to the player can be set strictly. For example, even if a lottery (variation) of normal symbols is executed while the normal state is set as the game state, a winning result is won, and a time-saving state is set before the normal symbol variation time (10 seconds) ends, a long opening will not be set as the operation of the lower electric device 64Da. Similarly, even if a winning result is won in the variation (lottery) of normal symbols executed while the time-saving state is set, and a normal state is set as the game state before the variation of the normal symbol stops, a long opening of the lower electric device 64Da will not be set. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an excessively advantageous privilege (long opening of the lower electric device 64Da) from being provided to the player.

Furthermore, since the lower electric device 64Da can be prevented from being opened for a long time when the normal state is set as the game state, the period during which the lottery for the special symbol (second special symbol) advantageous to the player is likely to be executed can be limited during the time-saving state. Note that in this control example, the game state at the timing when the lottery (variation) for the normal symbol starts and the timing when the opening operation of the lower electric device 64Da is set is determined, and the opening operation content of the lower electric device 64Da is set based on the game state set at each timing. Although the above-mentioned configuration is used as a configuration, other configurations may also be used.

For example, an opening operation that is disadvantageous to the player (opening operation set in S5924 in FIG. 346) may be set (a short opening is set) only when both the timing at which the lottery (variation) of the normal symbols begins and the timing at which the opening operation of the lower electric device 64Da is set are in the normal state, and a long opening (opening operation set in S5922 in FIG. 346) is set in other states. By configuring in this way, a special benefit (long opening) that is advantageous to the player can be provided even for normal symbol variations that are executed in the period before and after the time-saving state, which is a game state advantageous to the player, is set, making the time-saving state more advantageous to the player.

In this way, while the time-saving state is set as the game state, the normal pattern change time becomes very short (10 seconds → 3 seconds) compared to when the normal state is set, and the opening period of the lower first ball entrance 64D becomes very long (0.2 seconds × 1 time → 2 seconds × 2 times), making it easier for the ball to enter the lower first ball entrance 64D. In this control example, the time-saving state is configured to end when a big win game is played, so the normal state is set during the big win game. On the other hand, when a small win game is played, the time-saving state is configured to continue as long as the time-saving end condition is not met, so during the small win game played while the time-saving state is set, the first variable winning device 65 opens in the small win game and the lower electric role 64Da is long-opened, making it a specific period in which it is easy for the ball to enter the multiple winning entrances (first specific winning entrance 65a, lower first ball entrance 64D).

By using such a configuration, for example, instead of the configuration of the game board 13 shown in Figure 2, a lower electric device 64Da and a lower first ball entry port 64D can be arranged above the first variable winning device 65, and the balls can enter two winning ports (V winning device 65a, lower first ball entry port 64D) during the small win game. This increases the number of winning balls that can be won during the small win game, making it possible to provide the player with more advantageous benefits.

Returning to FIG. 346 for further explanation, the process of S5920 sets the start of opening and closing control of the lower electric role 64Da associated with the lower first ball entrance 64D (S5921), and ends this process. When the start of opening and closing control of the lower electric role 64Da is set by the process of S5923, the next time the electric role opening and closing process of the main process is executed, the opening and closing control of the electric role will be started, and the opening and closing control of the electric role will continue until the opening time and number of openings set by the process of S5924 or the process of S5922 is completed.

Next, referring to FIG. 347, the jackpot end process (S1451) will be described. FIG. 347 is a flowchart showing the jackpot end process (S1451). In the jackpot end process (S1451), a process is executed at the end of a jackpot game to set the game state after the jackpot.

In the jackpot end process (S1451), first, it is determined whether the value of the special upper limit counter 203cj is 35 or less (S5951). If it is determined that the value of the special upper limit counter 203cj is 35 or less (S5951: Yes), the special upper limit flag 203ca is set to ON (S5952), and the value of the special upper limit counter 203cj is incremented by 1 (S5953). Next, a count command indicating the value of the special upper limit counter 203cj is set (S5954), and the process proceeds to S5955.

In the process of S5955, it is determined whether the value of the special upper limit counter 203cj, which was incremented in the process of S5953, is 35 (S5955). If it is determined that the value of the special upper limit counter 203cj is 35 (S5955: Yes), the state command before the upper limit was reached is set (S5956), and the process proceeds to S5957. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5955 that the value of the special upper limit counter 203cj is not 35 (S5955: No), the process skips S5956 and proceeds to S5957.

In the process of S5957, the type of jackpot executed this time is read (S5957). Next, it is determined whether the type of jackpot read in the process of S5957 is jackpot C (S5958). If it is determined that the type of jackpot read is jackpot C (S5958: Yes), the value of the time-saving counter 203j is set to 0 (S5960), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5958 that the jackpot type is not jackpot C (S5958: No), it is determined whether the read jackpot type is jackpot B (S5959). If it is determined that the read jackpot type is jackpot B (S5959: Yes), the game state at the time of winning is read from the game state storage area 203cb (S5961). Next, it is determined in the process of S5962 whether the game state at the time of winning is a potential or a high probability state (S5962). If it is determined that the game state at the time of winning is not a potential or a high probability state (i.e., it is a normal state or a time-saving state) (S5962: No), the value of the time-saving counter 203j is set to 10000 (S5964), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S5962, if it is determined that the game state at the time of winning is a potential state or a probability state (S5962: Yes), the value of the time-saving counter 203j is set to 0 (S5963), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the jackpot B is not reached in the process of S5959 (S5959: No), the game state at the time of winning is read from the game state storage area 203cb (S5965). Next, it is determined whether the game state at the time of winning is a time-saving state (S5966). If it is determined that the game state at the time of winning is a time-saving state (S5966: Yes), the time-saving counter 203j is set to 0 (S5960), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S5966, if it is determined that the game state at the time of winning is not a time-saving state (S5966: No), the time-saving counter 203j is set to 10000 (S5964), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S5951 that the value of the special upper limit counter 203cj is not 35 or less (S5951: No), the value of the time-saving counter 203j is set to 50 (S5967), the value of the special upper limit counter 203cj is cleared (S5968), and this processing ends.

<Regarding the control process of the voice lamp control device in the fourth control example>
Next, referring to the flowcharts of Fig. 348 to Fig. 351, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the voice lamp control device 110 in this fourth control example will be described. First, referring to Fig. 348, main process 4 in this fourth control example will be described. This main process 4 is a process executed in place of the main process (see Fig. 257) in the first control example.

In the main processing 4 (see FIG. 348) in the fourth control example, the same processing as S2101 to S2113 and S2115 to S2120 in the main processing (see FIG. 257) in the first control example is executed in each of the processing steps S2101 to S2113 and S2115 to S2120. In addition, in the main processing 4 (see FIG. 348) in the fourth control example, instead of the command judgment processing (S2114, see FIG. 258) in the main processing (see FIG. 257) in the first control example, the command judgment processing 4 is executed (S2171) and the processing proceeds to S2115. This command judgment processing 4 (S2171) is a processing for executing control according to the type of command received from the main control unit 110, similar to the command judgment processing (see FIG. 258) in the first control example. Details of this command judgment processing 4 (S2171) will be described with reference to FIG. 349.

Figure 349 is a flowchart showing command determination process 4 (S2171) described above. As described above, this command determination process 4 (S2171) is a process that is executed in place of the command determination process in the first control example (see Figure 258). Of command determination process 4 (S2171) in this fourth control example, each of S2201 to S2213 is identical to each of S2201 to S2213 of the command determination process in the first control example (see Figure 258).

In addition, in the command determination process 4 (see FIG. 349) in this fourth control example, if it is determined in the process of S2212 that the unprocessed commands received from the main control device 110 do not include a stop command (S2212: No), then it is determined whether or not the unprocessed commands include a status command (S2251), and if it is determined that a status command is included (S2251: Yes), a status command is executed to execute control according to the game status notified by the status command (S2252). Details of this status command process (S2252) will be described later with reference to FIG. 350. In addition, when the status command process (S2252) ends, a pseudo-effect setting process is executed (S2253) to set the effect type and effect period of the pseudo-effect (such as a pseudo-jackpot effect using the pseudo attacker 165 or a pseudo-variable effect using the pseudo second ball entrance 1640), and this process ends. Details of this pseudo-effect setting process (S2253) will be described later with reference to FIG. 351.

In addition, in command judgment process 4 (see FIG. 349) in this fourth control example, if it is determined in the process of S2251 that the unprocessed commands received from the main control unit 110 do not include a status command (S2251: No), then it is determined whether or not the unprocessed commands include a special chance count command (S2254), and if it is determined that the unprocessed commands include a special chance count command (S2254: Yes), the number of consecutive special chance states notified by the special chance count command (the value of the special chance count upper limit counter 203cj provided in the RAM 203 of the main control unit 110) is set as the value of the special chance count upper limit counter 223cb (S2255), and this process is terminated. This process of S2255 allows the value of the high probability limit counter 223cb to be updated in sync with the value of the high probability limit counter 203cj each time the main control device 110 changes the value of the high probability limit counter 203cj (each time a jackpot ends and a high probability state for a special symbol or a low probability state for a special symbol is set). Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 can accurately grasp the remaining number of jackpots until the high probability limit is reached. Note that if it is determined in the process of S2251 that the unprocessed commands do not include a high probability limit command (S2251: No), this process ends as is.

Next, the details of status command process 4 (S2252) will be described with reference to FIG. 350. As described above, this status command process 4 (S2252) is a process for executing control according to the type of game status notified by the status command received from the main control device 110.

In this state command process 4 (see FIG. 350), first, it is determined whether or not a change in the game state has been notified (S3601), and if it is determined that the game state has not been changed (i.e., it has been notified that the number of time-saving times has been reduced by 1) (S2601: No), the process proceeds to S3609. On the other hand, if it is determined that a change in the game state has been notified by a state command (S3601: Yes), it is determined whether the game state after the change is either a normal state (normal mode) or a high probability state (high probability mode) (S3602), and if it is determined that it is either a normal state or a high probability state (S3602: Yes), a display command indicating the normal presentation mode is set, and the process proceeds to S3609. As described above, the normal presentation mode is a presentation mode in which a presentation is executed to make it appear as if the state is normal in a general gaming machine.

As described above, in this fourth control example, both the normal state and the probability change state are game states in which the game progresses by playing a left-handed shot aimed at the first ball entrance 64. In addition, even if a jackpot is hit, if the game state after the jackpot is not a potential state, the fact that a jackpot has been hit is concealed, and it is configured to appear as if a prize ball has been awarded simply because a game ball entered the general winning entrance in the normal state. By configuring in this way, it is possible to allow the player to play without being aware of the relatively complicated state transitions until the transition to the most advantageous potential state (potential mode). In other words, it is possible to suppress the player being disappointed by only being able to acquire a small number of prize balls (40 balls) despite the jackpot being hit, or the player feeling uncomfortable because the player is at a disadvantage despite the transition to the probability change state and the lower electric device 64Da being easily opened and closed. This allows the player to see that the unfavorable game state continues during a jackpot state that does not transition to a normal state, a high probability state, or a potential high probability state, which are relatively unfavorable to the player, and thus provides a more easily understandable presentation to the player. This prevents the gameplay from becoming difficult for the player to understand, and prevents players from avoiding playing with the pachinko machine 10. This allows the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 to be improved.

Furthermore, in the status command processing 4 in this fourth control example (see FIG. 350), if it is determined in the processing of S3602 that the state notified by the current status command is neither the normal state nor the special state (S3602: No), this means that the game state notified by the status command is either a potential state (potential mode) or a time-saving state, and therefore it is next determined whether or not the game state notified by the status command is a potential state (S3604). In the process of S3604, if it is determined that the transition to the potential state (potential mode) has been notified by the state command (S3604: Yes), it is then determined whether the value of the probability change upper limit number counter 223cb is 5 or less (S3605). If it is determined that the value of the probability change upper limit number counter 223b is 5 or less (i.e., there are 30 or more times remaining to loop the potential mode before the probability change limit number is reached) (S3605: Yes), a display command indicating the potential effect A mode is set (S3606), and the process proceeds to S3609. As a result, it is possible to continue to execute an effect (see FIG. 324(a)) that makes it appear as if the jackpot state continues until the potential mode ends, so that the player can be given the illusion that a very large number of rounds, such as 60 or more, have been executed. This allows the player to feel a greater sense of satisfaction.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3605 that the value of the probability change upper limit counter 223b is 6 or more (i.e., the number of times the potential change mode is looped before the probability change limit number is reached is less than 30), a display command indicating the potential change performance B mode is set (S3607), and the process proceeds to S3609. In this potential change performance B mode, broadly speaking, a pseudo special 2 variable performance opens the pseudo electric role 1640a and a game ball enters the pseudo second ball entrance 1640 each time a lottery for the second special pattern is executed, and a period in which a variable display performance is executed and a period in which a pseudo jackpot performance using the pseudo attacker 165 is executed are set. In the pseudo jackpot performance, a performance is executed in which a maximum of five jackpots (and potential modes between jackpots) appear as if they were one jackpot. This allows the player to see as if a special symbol has been drawn based on the ball entering the pseudo second ball entrance 1640, and the pseudo attacker 165 has opened and closed to create a jackpot state, making the operation easier for the player to understand. This can improve the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S3604 that the game state notified by the state command is not a potential state (S3604: No), this means that the state command has notified a transition to a time-saving state (time-saving mode), so a display command indicating the time-saving mode is set (S3608), and this processing ends.

In the processing of S3609, the information indicated by the received status command is stored (memorized) in the status setting area 223g (S3609), and information corresponding to the presentation mode set by any one of the processing of S3603, S3606, S3607, or S3608 is stored in the presentation mode memory area 223ca (S3610), and this processing ends. By executing this status command processing 4 (see FIG. 350), it is possible to set a presentation mode corresponding to the game status notified by the main control device 110.

Next, the pseudo-effect setting process (S2253) described above will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 351. This pseudo-effect setting process (S2253) is a process for setting a performance action according to the type of pseudo-effect set in state command process 4 (see FIG. 350).

In this pseudo performance setting process (see FIG. 351), first, the information stored in the performance mode memory area 223ca is read (S3701), and it is determined whether the read information indicates the potential performance A mode (S3702). In the process of S3702, if it is determined that the information indicating the potential performance A mode is stored in the performance mode memory area 223ca (S3702: Yes), the discharge path switching solenoid for controlling the closing and opening of the flow path switching member 695 is set to off, thereby setting the flow path switching member 695 to an open state (S3703). Next, the number of rounds corresponding to the value of the probability change upper limit counter 223cb is set as the number of rounds of the super big win performance (S3704), and the process proceeds to S3705. In addition, in the super big win performance, a performance is executed in which five rounds of an actual big win are made to look like one round. Since all jackpots for the second special symbol are 10 rounds, the number of rounds for the super jackpot effect is set to the value of the number of jackpots remaining until the probability limit (the value obtained by subtracting the value of the probability limit counter 223cb from 36) multiplied by 2. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S3702 that the information stored in the effect mode storage area 223ca is not information indicating the potential probability effect A mode (S3702), the processing of S3703 and S3704 is skipped and the processing proceeds to S3705.

In the process of S3705, it is determined whether the information stored in the presentation mode memory area 223ca is information indicating the potential probability presentation B mode (S3705). If it is determined that the information is information indicating the potential probability presentation B mode (S3705: Yes), the value of the probability variation upper limit counter 223cb is read (S3706), the presentation period of the pseudo jackpot presentation is set based on the read counter value (S3707), and the period outside the presentation period of the set jackpot presentation (outside the execution period of the pseudo jackpot presentation) is set as the presentation period of the pseudo special chart 2 variable presentation (S3708), and the process proceeds to S3709.

In the processing of S3707 and S3708, for example, each pseudo jackpot is set to be as many as five actual jackpots, and if the remaining number of jackpots (the number of jackpots remaining until the probability limit number) is a value that is not divisible by 5, the number of jackpots remaining when divided by 5 is set as the duration of the first pseudo jackpot presentation. More specifically, for example, if the value of the probability limit counter 223cb is determined to be 8 in the processing of S3705, this means that the remaining number of jackpots until the probability limit number (the number of jackpots that will be won in this potential mode) is 28, so the first to third jackpots (the three jackpots that are the remainder when 28 is divided by 5) (and the period of the potential mode between jackpots) are set as the presentation period of one pseudo jackpot presentation. In addition, from then on, the pseudo special 2 variable performance period that is linked to the potential mode period between jackpots and the pseudo jackpot performance period that continues for five jackpots (and the potential mode period between jackpots) are set to repeat.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3705 that the information stored in the effect mode storage area 223ca is not information indicating the potential effect B mode (S3705: No), the processes of S3706 to S3708 are skipped and the process proceeds to S3709. In the process of S3709, a display effect command corresponding to each of the set effects is set, and this process ends.

By executing this pseudo-effect setting process (see FIG. 351), the presentation mode of the pseudo-effect executed in the potential probability mode can be set to a mode corresponding to the remaining number of jackpots (the number of jackpots that can be won before the probability limit is reached). This can increase the interest in playing in the potential probability mode.

In the fourth control example, the period of five jackpots in the potential performance B mode is matched to the period of one pseudo jackpot performance, but this is not limited to this. For example, the periods of the pseudo jackpot performances may be as close as possible (number of jackpots). Specifically, for example, when it is determined that the value of the probability change upper limit counter 223cb is 8, two pseudo jackpot performances consisting of four jackpot execution periods (and potential mode periods between jackpots) may be set as pseudo performances, and four pseudo jackpot performances consisting of five jackpot execution periods (and potential mode periods between jackpots) may be set. By configuring in this way, the difference in the duration and number of winning balls of each pseudo jackpot performance can be reduced, so that it is possible to suppress the player from feeling uncomfortable.

<Modification of the First Control Example>
Next, a modified example of the first control example described above will be described with reference to FIG. 352. FIG. 352 is a front view showing the game board 13 in this modified example. In the configuration of the game board 13 in the first control example described above, the second ball entrance 640 and the electric role 640a associated with the second ball entrance 640 were provided in the right area (see FIG. 208). In contrast, this modified example is different in that the second ball entrance 640 and the electric role 640a associated with the second ball entrance 640 are provided in the right area.

By configuring it in this way, if a normal winning combination is won while playing left-handed, the ball can be made to enter the second ball entrance without changing the playing method. Therefore, when the presentation mode of the charge presentation is changed based on the result of the normal lottery, the player can be notified of the lottery result that is favorable to the player, which has the effect of making the player pay attention to the content of the presentation that is being executed.

<Additional detailed explanation of the third control example>
Next, the third control example described above will be explained in more detail. In the third control example described above, the first drive control for raising or lowering the lower displacement unit 400 by the tilt motor and the second drive control for moving the movable rack 464 provided in the lower displacement unit 400 in the left-right direction (origin position, ball receiving position, launch position) by the slide motor are executed, and the initial operation executed when the power is turned on and the performance operation executed during a winning game are explained. In this additional explanation, the detailed operation of the lower displacement unit 400 and the movable rack 464 operated by the first drive control and the second drive control will be explained in more detail with reference to the structures of each of the above-mentioned embodiments.

First, the operation of the lower displacement unit 400 and the movable rack 464 used in the third control example described above will be described with reference to Figs. 47 to 49 and Fig. 307. As shown in Fig. 47, the lower displacement unit 400 in this third control example is pivotally fixed to the base member 410 at one end in the left-right direction, and is configured to rotate the lower displacement unit 400 so that the other end opposite to the one end at which the pivot is fixed is separated from the base member 410 by driving the tilt motor (see Fig. 49). In such a movable member pivotally supported at one end and rotated, a slight clearance (tolerance) is provided in the pivot part to smoothly execute the rotation operation, so that a slight deviation occurs in the trajectory of the other end of the movable member. In the movable control of such a movable member, if the drive control, i.e., the operating position of the movable member, is set by the number of drives (number of steps) of the tilt motor, there is a risk that the operating position of the movable member will differ due to the slight deviation described above.

In contrast, in this third control example, the operating position of the movable member is determined not by the number of drives (number of steps) of the tilt motor, but by a detection means (e.g., a firing position sensor) for detecting that the movable member has reached a predetermined operating position, so that the movable member can be reliably positioned at a specific, predetermined position.

Furthermore, in the third control example described above, the lower displacement unit 400 is configured to be rotatable around one end of the lower displacement unit 400 as an axis, while the movable rack 464, which can slide from one end to the other end within the lower displacement unit 400, is configured to be drive-controllable. With a movable member configured in this manner, the center of gravity of the lower displacement unit 400 differs depending on the operating position of the movable rack 464, so there was a risk that the rotation of the lower displacement unit 400 would be significantly shifted depending on the operating position of the movable rack 464. In addition, if the lower displacement unit 400 is rotated with the movable rack 464 positioned on the other end side (positioned at a position away from the pivot side), the weight of the movable rack 464 would move away from the axis of the rotation (pivot position), so it was necessary to increase the driving force required for the rotation. In addition, if it is intended to rotate the lower displacement unit 400 at a constant speed regardless of the operating position of the movable rack 464, it is necessary to install an inverter that varies the output of the motor, which could cause problems such as an increase in size and cost of the device.

In contrast, in this third control example, the operation data is specified so that the lower displacement unit 400 is rotated with the movable rack 464 positioned at the origin position (position on one end side). This reduces the burden on the tilt motor when rotating the lower displacement unit 400. In addition, since the position of the movable rack 464 can be kept constant when rotating the lower displacement unit 400, the rotation speed can be kept constant simply by using a constant motor output.

In addition, in the initial operation process (processing to check whether each movable part operates normally) executed when the power is turned on, the movable rack 464 is driven when the lower displacement unit 400 is located at the origin position (see FIG. 47) to check whether the movable rack 464 operates normally. This reduces the load on the support part of the lower displacement unit 400 compared to, for example, checking whether the movable rack 464 operates normally when the lower displacement unit 400 is located at the launch position (see FIG. 48).

Furthermore, in this third control example, the tilt motor is driven by operating the frame button 22, and a swing performance can be executed in which the lower displacement unit 400 swings between the state shown in FIG. 48 (firing position state) and the state shown in FIG. 49 (performance position state). In this configuration, the number of times the swing performance is executed varies based on the number of times the frame button 22 is operated, so there is a risk that a deviation will occur when the lower displacement unit 400 is positioned in the firing position state after the swing performance ends. In contrast, in this third control example, when the lower displacement unit 400 is positioned in the firing position state, the lower displacement unit 400 is driven until the lower displacement unit 400 is detected by the firing position sensor, not by the number of drives (number of steps) of the tilt motor, so that the lower displacement unit 400 can be positioned in the appropriate position (firing position). In addition, when using a configuration such as this third control example, for example, an auxiliary member for fixing the position of the lower displacement unit 400 after positioning the lower displacement unit 400 in the appropriate position may be provided.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to prevent a situation in which a large burden is placed on the pivot support of the lower displacement unit 400 even if the movable rack 464 is driven with the lower displacement unit 400 positioned in the firing position. Therefore, it is possible to extend the period during which the movable rack 464 can be operated without placing a burden on the pivot support of the lower displacement unit 400, which relaxes the restrictions on the drive control of the movable members (lower displacement unit 400, movable rack 464), allowing a variety of drive performances to be accurately executed.

In addition, in each of the above control examples, the display effects displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 have been used as examples of the various effects that can be executed, but any other effect that can achieve the same desired effect can be used, such as a display effect displayed on a display device other than the third pattern display device 81, an audio effect that notifies the player by sound, or a light-emitting effect that notifies the player using various light-emitting means (LEDs) attached to the pachinko machine 10.

The various effects executed in each of the above control examples include notification effects that ensure the player understands the content, and suggestive effects that subtly inform the player of the content, but suggestive effects may be executed instead of notification effects, or the system may be configured to execute notification effects instead of suggestive effects.

Furthermore, in each of the above-mentioned control examples, a pachinko machine 10 is used that has two types of probability of winning a jackpot in the lottery for special symbols (jackpot probability), high and low (high probability state for special symbols, low probability state for special symbols). However, without being limited to this, for example, a setting means (e.g., a setting switch) that can set one setting value from a plurality of types of setting values may be provided, and the main control unit 110 may be configured to execute control in which a different jackpot probability is set for each setting value set by the setting means.

In this case, for example, six setting values from 1 to 6 can be prepared, and the probability of a jackpot can be set for each setting value in order so that when setting value "1" is set, the probability of a jackpot is the highest, and when setting value "6" is set, the probability of a jackpot is the lowest.

In addition, the jackpot probability set for each setting value may be configured so that only the jackpot probability corresponding to the low probability state of the special pattern differs depending on the setting value, or only the jackpot probability corresponding to the high probability state of the special pattern differs depending on the setting value.

In addition to the jackpot probability, the selection rate for each jackpot type, the probability of winning a small jackpot, the selection rate for the special symbol variation pattern, and the variation time may be varied depending on the setting value described above. In this case, for example, a variation pattern or jackpot type that is likely to be selected only when a specific setting value is set may be provided, and the player may determine the currently set setting value by paying attention to whether or not a special symbol variation based on that variation pattern or a jackpot game based on that jackpot type has been executed.

Furthermore, it may be configured to set a setting command to indicate the set value that has been set, and execute a setting suggestion effect that suggests the currently set setting value based on the setting command received on the voice lamp control device 113 side, or to determine the currently set setting value from the content of the received command when a command indicating the type of jackpot (a command to indicate the lottery result) or a command indicating the fluctuation pattern of the special pattern (a command to indicate the fluctuation time) output from the main control device 110 is received, and execute a setting suggestion effect based on the determination result. By configuring in this way, the number of commands output from the main control device 110 can be reduced.

Also, unlike the above-mentioned control examples, a pachinko machine 10 may be used that can simultaneously draw (change) the first special symbol and draw (change) the second special symbol. In this case, when using a configuration that can set the above-mentioned setting values, various parameters may be specified for each setting value so that the ease of variation (drawing) of each special symbol varies depending on the set value, or various parameters may be specified for each setting value so that a specific game state in which the drawing of one special symbol is advantageous to the player at a specific setting value, and a specific game state in which the drawing of the other special symbol different from the one special symbol is advantageous to the player at a specific setting value different from the specific setting value. In this case, the drawing of the special symbol being advantageous to the player is a concept that includes a state in which the drawing of the special symbol is easier to be performed, and a privilege (jackpot game content, small jackpot game content, game state set after the end of the jackpot game) that is granted when the drawing result of the special symbol is a specific drawing result is advantageous to the player.

In addition, the game state transition destination and allocation rate are unified according to the type of special chart regardless of the game state, but without being limited to this, the game state transition destination and transition allocation rate may be changed according to the game state. This has the effect of making it possible to provide more complex gameplay and preventing players from becoming bored with the game early on.

Furthermore, the special chance state may continue until the special symbol changes a predetermined number of times (e.g. 100 times), or a lottery may be held to transition to the normal game state each time the special symbol changes, and a transition from the special chance state to the normal game state may occur if the lottery is won. In this case, the special chance state that is favorable to the player and the special chance state that is unfavorable to the player may be determined, for example, by setting a difference in the number of times the special symbol changes before the special chance state ends, or by varying the probability of transitioning from the special chance state to the normal game state.

In addition, multiple time-saving end conditions, which are conditions for ending the high probability state of normal symbols, may be set, and among the multiple time-saving end conditions, when the time-saving end condition is met when the number of times the special symbols change reaches a specific number of times, i.e., when the change count end condition is met, and when the time-saving end condition is met when a small jackpot is won by the lottery for the special symbols, i.e., when the win count end condition is met, it may be configured so that the high probability state of normal symbols can be transitioned to a low probability state at different times.

Using this configuration, for example, a gaming machine can be provided that is controlled so that when the variable count end condition is met, the gaming state transitions from the time-saving state to the normal state based on the start of the special pattern variation, and when the winning count end condition is met, the gaming state transitions from the time-saving state to the normal state based on the end of the small win game.

As a result, even if the time-saving state ends based on the variation of the same special symbol depending on the time-saving end condition that is established, the timing at which the time-saving state ends can be made different within the combined range of the time for which the special symbol varies and the time for which the small win game is executed. Therefore, the player can also be interested in the type of time-saving end condition that is established. Furthermore, depending on the time-saving end condition that is established, even during the small win game that gives the player a small bonus, it is possible to make the small win game a more advantageous game state for the player by operating the electric device 640a to make it easier for the ball to enter the ball entrance.

In addition, it is a good idea to provide multiple types of small wins with different periods during which the small win game is played, and to vary the bonus given to the player depending on the type of small win for which the winning count ending condition is met, even if the winning count ending condition is met. This makes it possible to get the player interested not only in the type of time-saving ending condition that has been met, but also in the more detailed content of the time-saving ending condition.

In this case, even if the winning count end condition is met, it is preferable to configure the time-saving state to end when the small win game starts and when the small win game ends. This makes it difficult for the player to understand when the time-saving state ends. Furthermore, in the above-mentioned embodiment, a configuration is used in which the process of determining whether the time-saving end condition is met based on the number of times the special pattern changes and the process of determining whether the time-saving end condition is met based on winning a small win are separately executed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration may be used in which the time-saving information updated according to the lottery (change) of the special pattern is centrally managed and the timing to end the time-saving state is set based on the time-saving end condition that has been met.

In each of the above control examples, the main control unit 110 transmits a reserved ball number command to the voice lamp control unit 113 each time the value (N) of the special pattern 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is updated in the main control unit 110 (i.e., when it increases or decreases, respectively), but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the reserved number command is transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the voice lamp control unit 113 only when the value (N) of the special pattern 1 reserved ball number counter 203d increases in the main control unit 110. In addition, the voice lamp control unit 113 is configured to decrease the value of the special pattern 2 reserved ball number counter 223b by 1 when it receives a variable pattern command transmitted from the main control unit 110. This reduces the number of times the main control unit 110 transmits reserved number commands to the voice lamp control unit 113 and the number of times the voice lamp control unit 113 receives reserved number commands, respectively, thereby reducing the control burden on the main control unit 110 and the voice lamp control unit 113.

In each of the above control examples, the entry into the first ball entrance 64 and the passage through the through gate 67 are each configured to be reserved up to four times, but the maximum number of reserved balls is not limited to four times and may be set to three times or less, or five times or more (e.g., eight times). In addition, the number of reserved balls displayed in the variable display based on the entry into the first ball entrance 64 may be displayed in a part of the third pattern display device 81 as numbers, or in four divided areas with different modes (e.g., colors or lighting patterns) depending on the number of reserved balls, and a light-emitting element such as a lamp may be provided separately from the first pattern display device 37, and the number of reserved balls may be notified by the light-emitting element.

Also, as shown in each of the above control examples, the variable display, which is a type of dynamic display, is not limited to vertical scrolling of the pattern as identification information on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81, but may be a display in which the pattern moves vertically or along a predetermined path such as an L-shape. The dynamic display of identification information is not limited to the variable display of the pattern, but also includes, for example, a performance display in which one or more characters are displayed in a variety of movements or changes together with the pattern or separately from the pattern. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third pattern.

In each of the above control examples, the third pattern display for showing the player the lottery results for each pattern is performed by one display means (third pattern display device 81), but other configurations may be used. For example, different display means may be provided for displaying the main pattern that is highlighted to the player among the third patterns, and for displaying the secondary patterns. In addition, the display means may be configured as a configuration other than a liquid crystal display.

In each of the above control examples, a right-hand hit game is executed to target the right area of the game board 13 in a game state (time-saving state) that is advantageous to the player, and a left-hand hit game is executed to target the left area of the game board 13 in a normal game state; however, it is sufficient to vary the area of the game board 13 targeted depending on the game state, and a left-hand hit game may be executed during a time-saving state and a right-hand hit game may be executed during a normal state. In addition, a game may be configured to be executable in different game states while targeting the same area.

In each of the above control examples, the frame button 22 is used as the operation means that the player can operate, which is determined by the player pressing it, but other configurations may be used, such as a lever-shaped operation means that can determine whether it has been operated by the player tilting it left and right or forward and backward, a touch sensor type operation means that can determine whether it has been operated by the player touching or approaching it, or a wireless operation means that can determine whether it has been operated by emitting a predetermined radio wave. In addition, some or all of the operation controls of the movable valve 750, the storage device (first storage device 770, second storage device 771), the second frame button (release button) 22b (1022b, 1122b), and the third frame button (release button) 22c may be configured to be executed by the voice lamp control device 113 side instead of the main control device 110.

In each of the above control examples, the voice lamp control device 113 performs the process for setting the display mode in the performance executed using the display screen of the third pattern display device 81, and the game (lottery) itself is executed by a main control device 110 different from the voice lamp control device 113, but without being limited to this, the process for executing the game (lottery) and the process for displaying the result of the game (lottery) as a performance may be executed by the same control device. By configuring in this way, it becomes possible to execute multiple different processes with one control device.

The present invention may be implemented in a type of pachinko machine that is different from the above-mentioned embodiments. For example, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine (commonly referred to as a two-time right machine or a three-time right machine) in which the expected value of a jackpot is increased until the jackpot state occurs multiple times (for example, two or three times) including the first jackpot. It may also be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game in which the player is given a predetermined game value by making the ball enter a predetermined area as a necessary condition after the jackpot pattern is displayed. It may also be implemented as a pachinko machine that has a winning device with a special area such as a V zone, and the special game state is entered as a necessary condition by making the ball enter the special area. It may also be implemented as a pachinko machine that has a combination of probabilities (commonly referred to as settings) related to the jackpot lottery in multiple stages, and is configured so that the settings can be changed by the gaming parlor. In addition to pachinko machines, it may also be implemented as various gaming machines such as arepachi, mahjong ball, slot machines, and gaming machines that combine a pachinko machine and a slot machine.

A representative example of a pachinko machine with multiple settings is one that allows the combination of jackpot probabilities (a combination of the jackpot probability in a low probability state and the jackpot probability in a high probability state) to be set to one of multiple levels (e.g., six levels), but is not limited to this. Instead of or in addition to the combination of jackpot probabilities, for example, a pachinko machine may be implemented that allows the ratio of each jackpot pattern (each jackpot type) that is determined in the event of a jackpot to be changed according to the setting. That is, the ratio of a jackpot type that is advantageous to the player to be determined according to the setting, or the ratio of a jackpot type that is disadvantageous to the player to be determined may be changed. More specifically, for example, the ratio of a jackpot with a large number of rounds (e.g., 16 rounds) to be determined may be changed according to the setting, or the ratio of a jackpot with a small number of rounds (e.g., 2 rounds) to be determined may be changed according to the setting, thereby varying the degree of advantage for each setting. Also, for example, the rate at which a jackpot that gives a large number of time-saving times (e.g., 100 times) after the jackpot is determined may be varied according to the setting, or the rate at which a jackpot that gives a small number of time-saving times (e.g., 0 times) may be varied according to the setting. Furthermore, the rate at which a jackpot that transitions (or is likely to transition) to a favorable game state (e.g., a probability change state) after the jackpot is determined may be varied according to the setting, or the rate at which a jackpot that transitions (or is likely to transition) to an unfavorable game state (e.g., a normal state) may be determined may be varied according to the setting. Also, a configuration may be provided in which a jackpot type that is determined at a significantly higher rate only in a specific setting (almost never determined in other settings) is provided. Specifically, for example, the setting may be configured to be settable in six stages from 1 to 6, and the most favorable setting may be set to setting 6. Then, in setting 6, a jackpot with 6 rounds is determined at a rate of 2% when a jackpot occurs, while a jackpot with 6 rounds is determined only at a rate of 0.01% in other settings. By configuring in this way, the possibility of the most advantageous setting 6 being the most likely to occur when the jackpot ends after six rounds is extremely high, so that the player can play the game while paying attention to the number of rounds of the jackpot. Also, instead of or in addition to this, for example, in setting 6, the ratio of the jackpot type in which 66 time-saving times are given after the jackpot ends may be higher than in other settings. By configuring in this way, the player can play the game while paying attention to the number of times the time-saving state ends. Also, instead of or in addition to these, for example, a jackpot type in which the jackpot entry port (or the role inside the jackpot entry port) operates in an operation pattern different from other jackpot types during the execution of the jackpot game may be provided, and the jackpot type may be configured to be more likely to be determined in a specific setting (the ratio of being determined is higher). Also, when the combination of jackpot probabilities is changed according to the settings, in a low probability state, the more advantageous the setting is to the player, the higher the jackpot probability, while in a probability variable state, the more disadvantageous the setting is to the player, the higher the jackpot probability may be. This configuration is particularly effective in gaming machines of a type in which the more times the special symbols are drawn in the probability variable state, the easier it is to increase the number of balls held (the more prize balls are paid out than the number of game balls fired). More specifically, for example, the probability variable state continues until the next jackpot is won, and by applying this to a gaming machine of a type in which the probability variable state has a high probability of resulting in a small jackpot, the advantage of a high setting can be further enhanced. In other words, if the probability of a jackpot is low in the probability variable state, the number of draws until the next jackpot tends to be large, and there are also more opportunities to win small jackpots and win prize balls. Therefore, when the probability variable state is reached, it becomes easier to win more prize balls until the next jackpot, which is advantageous for the player.

Furthermore, in each of the above embodiments, two types of special symbols, a first special symbol and a second special symbol, are used as the multiple special symbol types, but the types of special symbols are not limited to this, and three or more special symbol types may be used, or only one special symbol type may be used. Also, in each of the above embodiments, a game feature in which multiple special symbols are drawn (varied) according to predetermined rules and a game feature in which the symbols are drawn (varied) independently of one another are described, but the game features described in each embodiment may be interchanged or combined.

Slot machines are well known in that, for example, after inserting a coin and determining the effective line of symbols, a lever is operated to change the symbols, and a stop button is operated to stop and finalize the symbols. Therefore, the basic concept of a slot machine is "a slot machine that has a display device that displays a variable display of a string of identification information consisting of multiple identification information, and then displays the determined identification information, and that starts the variable display of the identification information due to the operation of a start operation means (e.g., a lever), stops the variable display of the identification information due to the operation of a stop operation means (e.g., a stop button) or after a predetermined time has passed, and generates a special game that awards a predetermined game value to the player, provided that the combination of identification information at the time of the stop is a specific one." In this case, typical examples of the game medium include coins, medals, etc.

An example of a gaming machine that combines a pachinko machine and a slot machine is one that has a display device that displays a pattern sequence consisting of multiple patterns in a variable manner and then displays the pattern in a fixed manner, but does not have a handle for shooting balls. In this case, after a specified amount of balls are inserted based on a specified operation (button operation), the pattern starts to change due to, for example, the operation of an operating lever, and the pattern change is stopped due to, for example, the operation of a stop button or after a specified time has passed, and a special game is generated in which a specified gaming value is awarded to the player, provided that the fixed pattern at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot pattern, and a large number of balls are paid out to the player in a receiving tray at the bottom. If such a gaming machine is used instead of a slot machine, the gaming hall can handle only the balls as the gaming value, which can eliminate problems seen in current gaming halls where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed, such as the burden on facilities due to the separate handling of medals and balls as the gaming value, and the restrictions on the location of gaming machines.

Below, we will explain the gaming machine of the present invention as well as the various invention concepts included in the above-mentioned embodiments.

<Concept of the invention using the lower displacement unit 400 as an example>
In a gaming machine including a displacement member formed to be displaceable in a first direction from a reference position and capable of moving a gaming ball in association with the displacement in the first direction, and a restricting means for restricting the game ball from being sent from outside a trajectory area of the displacement member to a trajectory area of the displacement member, the displacement member being:
The gaming machine A1 is formed so as to be displaceable from the reference position in a second direction opposite to the first direction.

Here, a gaming machine is known that includes a displacement member that is formed to be displaceable in a first direction from a reference position and that is formed to be able to move a gaming ball in association with the displacement in the first direction, and a restricting means that restricts the game ball from being sent from outside the trajectory area of the displacement member to the trajectory area of the displacement member (for example, JP 2010-166997 A). According to this gaming machine, the restricting means can prevent more than a specified number of game balls from being sent to the trajectory area of the displacement member. However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, if the restricting means malfunctions due to, for example, sticking or wear, there is a risk that more than a specified number of game balls will be sent toward the trajectory area of the displacement member, and in this case, there is a problem that the game balls that exceed the specified number may cause a malfunction. That is, for example, there is a risk that the game balls that exceed the specified number will enter the drive mechanism of the displacement member and get caught in the moving part, causing damage. Alternatively, there was a risk that game balls exceeding the specified number would flow out of the game area (for example, to the back side of the game board).

In contrast, according to the gaming machine A1, the displacement member is formed to be displaceable from the reference position in the second direction opposite to the first direction, so that the trajectory area of the displacement member can be expanded accordingly. Therefore, for example, even if the regulating means malfunctions and more than the specified number of game balls are sent,
Since the trajectory area of the displacement member is expanded, the game balls exceeding the specified number can be received in the trajectory area. As a result, the game balls exceeding the specified number can be moved in association with the displacement of the displacement member in the first direction. Therefore, the game balls exceeding the specified number can be prevented from entering the drive mechanism of the displacement member or flowing out of the game area, and as a result, malfunctions caused by the game balls exceeding the specified number can be prevented.

The gaming machine A2 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine A1, a passage member is provided which is formed as a passage through which gaming balls can pass and whose downstream is connected to the trajectory area of the displacement member, and the regulating means regulates the passage of the gaming balls through the passage member.

According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A1, a passage member is provided which is formed as a passage through which the gaming balls can pass and whose downstream is connected to the track area of the displacement member, and the restricting means restricts the passage of the gaming balls through the passage member, so that even if the restricting means malfunctions and more than the specified number of gaming balls are sent, the gaming balls in excess of the specified number can be reliably sent to the track area of the displacement member through the passage member. As a result, it is possible to prevent malfunctions caused by the gaming balls in excess of the specified number.

In the gaming machine A2, the displacement member is formed to be capable of receiving and holding a specified number of gaming balls sent from the passage member at the reference position, and is also formed to be capable of being displaced from the reference position in a second direction by a distance that exceeds at least the diameter of the gaming balls.

According to gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects of gaming machine A2, the displacement member is formed to be able to receive and hold the specified number of game balls sent from the passage member at the reference position, and is also formed to be able to be displaced from the reference position in the second direction by a distance that exceeds at least the diameter of the game balls, so that after receiving the specified number of game balls at the reference position, the displacement member is displaced from the reference position in the second direction, so that the game balls exceeding the specified number can be sent to the trajectory region of the displacement member (the region on the first direction side of the displacement member). Therefore, the game balls exceeding the specified number can be moved in conjunction with the displacement of the displacement member in the first direction.

In this case, the displacement member holds the specified number of game balls, and the game balls in excess of the specified number can be sent to the trajectory region, so that the specified number of game balls and the game balls in excess of the specified number can be separated. Thus, for example, by displacing the displacement member in a first direction, it becomes possible to discharge only the game balls in excess of the specified number from the trajectory region while maintaining the state in which the displacement member holds the specified number of game balls.

The gaming machine A4 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine A3, the displacement member is formed so as to be able to change its posture when displaced in the first direction and reaches a predetermined position.

According to gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects of gaming machine A3, the displacement member is formed so that its posture can be changed when it is displaced in a first direction and reaches a predetermined position, making it easier for the displacement member to maintain a state in which it holds a specified number of game balls until the predetermined position is reached, thereby preventing the game balls from falling out of the displacement member, while when the predetermined position is reached, the change in posture of the displacement member can be used to make it easier to eject the game balls from the displacement member.

A gaming machine A5 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine A4, a recess is provided in a trajectory area when the displacement member is displaced from the reference position in the first direction, and the displacement member has a protrusion that engages with the recess when displaced in the first direction, and is formed so that its posture can be changed by the protrusion engaging with the recess.

According to gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects of gaming machine A4, the displacement member is provided with a recess that is recessed into the trajectory area when it is displaced in the first direction from the reference position, and the displacement member is provided with a protrusion that engages with the recess when it is displaced in the first direction, and is formed so that its posture can be changed by the protrusion engaging with the recess, thereby simplifying the structure for changing the posture of the displacement member.

In the gaming machine A5, the protrusion protrudes from the displacement member in the first direction, and the protruding tip abuts against the lower half of the gaming ball sent into the trajectory area of the displacement member.

According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A5, the protrusion is protruded from the displacement member in the first direction, and the protruding tip is formed so as to be able to abut against the lower half of the gaming balls (i.e., the gaming balls that exceed the specified number) that are sent to the trajectory area of the displacement member, so that when the displacement member is displaced in the first direction, the gaming balls can be moved while pushing the lower half of the gaming balls with the protrusion. As a result, the gaming balls that exceed the specified number can be easily discharged from the trajectory area.

Furthermore, by providing a protrusion between the specified number of game balls held by the displacement member and the game balls sent to the track area of the displacement member (the game balls in excess of the specified number), a distance between the specified number of game balls and the game balls in excess of the specified number can be secured by the protruding length of the protrusion. This makes it possible to easily discharge only the game balls in excess of the specified number from the track area while maintaining the specified number of game balls held by the displacement member.

Furthermore, since the protrusion serves both the function of changing the posture of the displacement member by engaging with the recess, and the function of moving the game ball while pushing its lower half, the number of parts can be reduced accordingly, thereby reducing product costs.

Gaming machine A7 is characterized in that in the gaming machine A5 or A6, the size of the recess in the first direction is made smaller than the diameter of a gaming ball.

According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines A5 and A6, the size of the recess in the first direction is made smaller than the diameter of the gaming ball, so that the gaming balls sent to the trajectory region of the displacement member (i.e., the gaming balls exceeding the specified number) can easily pass through the recess when they are moved with the displacement of the displacement member in the first direction. As a result, the gaming balls exceeding the specified number can be easily discharged from the trajectory region.

Gaming machine A8 is any one of gaming machines A5 to A7, and is provided with a wall portion that is erected at a height lower than the radius of the game ball in a trajectory area when the displacement member is displaced in the first direction from the reference position and is located on the first direction side of the recess, and when a game ball sent to the trajectory area of the displacement member moves in conjunction with the displacement of the displacement member in the first direction, the game ball abuts against the wall portion and the displacement member, thereby regulating the change in posture of the displacement member.

According to gaming machine A8, in any of gaming machines A5 to A7, a wall portion is provided that is erected at a height lower than the radius of the game ball in the trajectory area when the displacement member is displaced in a first direction from a reference position and is located on the first direction side of the recess, and when a game ball sent to the trajectory area of the displacement member moves as the displacement member is displaced in the first direction, the game ball abuts against the wall portion and the displacement member, and is formed in such a way that the change in posture of the displacement member can be regulated, so that the displacement member can maintain a state in which it holds the specified number of game balls, while making it easy to discharge only the game balls in excess of the specified number from the trajectory area.

That is, since the wall portion is erected at a height lower than the radius of the game ball, when the game ball is pushed by the protrusion as the displacement member is displaced in the first direction, the lower half of the game ball is brought into contact with the wall portion, making it easier for the game ball to overcome the wall portion. In this case, the game ball is brought into contact with the displacement member (i.e., the game ball is interposed between the displacement member and the wall portion), and a reaction force can be applied from the game ball to the displacement member, so that the change in the attitude of the displacement member can be regulated and the specified number of game balls held by the displacement member can be prevented from falling out. As a result, while maintaining the specified number of game balls held by the displacement member, only the game balls exceeding the specified number can be easily discharged from the track area.

On the other hand, when no game balls (i.e., game balls exceeding the prescribed number) are being sent to the trajectory region of the displacement member, no game balls are interposed between the wall portion and the displacement member, and the position of the displacement member can be changed by engaging the protrusion with the recess. As a result, the positional change of the displacement member can be utilized to facilitate the discharge of the prescribed number of game balls (i.e., game balls held by the displacement member) from the displacement member.

A gaming machine A9, in any one of the gaming machines A1 to A8, is characterized in that the regulating means is formed so as to be operable in conjunction with the displacement of the displacement member.

According to the gaming machine A9, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines A1 to A8, the restricting means is formed to be operable in conjunction with the displacement of the displacement member, so that the sending of the game ball to the trajectory area of the displacement member can be restricted or permitted according to the displacement of the displacement member. That is, since the restriction or permission of the sending of the game ball can be switched in mechanical synchronization with the displacement of the displacement member, for example, a sensor device that detects the position of the restricting means, a driving means that drives the restricting means according to the detection result of the sensor device, or the control of each of these means can be eliminated, and accordingly, the product cost can be reduced and the reliability of the operation can be improved.

In the gaming machine A9, the regulating means allows a gaming ball to be sent into the trajectory area of the displacement member in conjunction with the displacement of the displacement member from the reference position in the second direction.

According to gaming machine A10, in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machine A9, the regulating means allows the game ball to be sent to the trajectory area of the displacement member in conjunction with the displacement of the displacement member from the reference position in the second direction, thereby enabling the game ball to be reliably sent to the trajectory area of the displacement member which is an area on the first direction side of the displacement member.

A gaming machine A11 is characterized in that it comprises, in any one of gaming machines A1 to A10, a base member on which the displacement member is arranged so as to be displaceable, and a recovery member arranged vertically below the end of the base member on the first direction side and having an opening vertically above.

According to gaming machine A11, in addition to the effects of gaming machine A10, it is equipped with a base member on which the displacement member is arranged so as to be displaceable, and a recovery member which is arranged vertically below the end of the first direction side of the base member and has an opening vertically above, so that the game balls which are moved as the displacement member moves in the first direction and are discharged from the orbital area of the displacement member (i.e., game balls in excess of the specified number) can be received and recovered through the opening of the recovery member.

In the gaming machine A11, the base member is formed so as to be displaceable between a retracted position and a displaced position, and the opening of the recovery member is formed to a size that is positioned vertically below at least the end of the base member on the first direction side when displaced to the retracted position or the displaced position.

According to gaming machine A12, in addition to the effects of gaming machine A11, the base member is formed so as to be displaceable between a retracted position and a displaced position, and the opening of the recovery member is formed with a size such that it is positioned vertically below at least the end of the first direction side of the base member displaced to the retracted position or the displaced position. Therefore, regardless of whether the base member is displaced to either the retracted position or the displaced position, game balls discharged from the orbital area of the displaced member (i.e., game balls in excess of the specified number) can be received and recovered through the opening of the recovery member.

In any one of the gaming machines A5 to A8, by inserting the ball into the recessed space of the recess,
A gaming machine A13 characterized by having an insertion member that regulates the engagement of the protrusion with the recess.

According to the gaming machine A13, in any of the gaming machines A5 to A8, an insertion member is provided that is inserted into the recessed space of the recess to restrict the protrusion from engaging with the recess, so that when the displacement member is displaced in the first direction, the attitude of the displacement member is prevented from changing when the game balls exceeding the specified number are discharged from the track area of the displacement member. Therefore, it is possible to easily discharge only the game balls exceeding the specified number from the track area while maintaining the state in which the displacement member holds the specified number of game balls.

A gaming machine A13, comprising a base member formed to be displaceable between a retracted position and a displaced position and on which the displaceable member is displaceably disposed, the insertion member being inserted into a recessed space of the recess when the base member is displaced to the retracted position and being separated from the recessed space when the base member is displaced to the displaced position.
4.

According to gaming machine A14, in addition to the effects of gaming machine A13, when the base member is displaced to the retracted position, the insertion member is inserted into the recessed space of the recess, so that when the displacement member is displaced in the first direction to discharge more than the specified number of game balls from the orbital area of the displacement member, the posture of the displacement member is prevented from changing, making it easier to maintain the state in which the displacement member holds the specified number of game balls.On the other hand, when the base member is displaced to the displacement position, the insertion member is separated from the recessed space of the recess, so that the protrusion engages with the recess as the displacement member is displaced in the first direction, changing the posture of the displacement member, making it easier to discharge the specified number of game balls from the displacement member.

<Concept of the invention using the sorting unit 500 as an example>
A gaming machine B1 is provided with a flow-down passage through which game balls flow, a first branch passage and a second branch passage branching off from the flow-down passage, and a distribution means for distributing game balls flowing down the flow-down passage to either the first branch passage or the second branch passage, the gaming machine further comprising a displacement member that is formed to be displaceable and receives game balls from the first branch passage, and the distribution means is displaced when the displacement member comes into contact with the distribution means and is displaced, thereby switching the distribution destination.

Here, a gaming machine is known that includes a flow passage through which gaming balls flow, a first branch passage and a second branch passage branched off from the flow passage, and a distribution means that distributes the gaming balls that have flowed down the flow passage to either the first branch passage or the second branch passage (for example, see JP 2014-223 A).
However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, the gaming balls that flow down the flow passage are
Since the structure alternately distributes one ball each to the first branch passage and the second branch passage, the game balls flowing down the flow passage are distributed evenly (i.e., half each) to the first branch passage and the second branch passage. In other words, there was a problem in that the number of game balls distributed to the first branch passage could not be changed.

In contrast, the gaming machine B1 includes a displaceable member that receives gaming balls from the first branch passage, and the displaceable member comes into contact with the distribution means and is displaced, displacing the distribution means and switching the distribution destination, so that the number of gaming balls distributed to the first branch passage or the second branch passage can be changed according to the displacement of the displacement member. That is, the number of gaming balls distributed to the first branch passage can be changed.

In addition, according to the gaming machine B1, since the distribution means can be displaced by utilizing the displacement of the displacement member, it is not necessary to provide a separate drive means or transmission mechanism for displacing the distribution means, and therefore the number of parts can be reduced, leading to a reduction in the product cost.

Furthermore, for example, in a structure in which the displacement of the distribution means is controlled using position detection by a sensor device or drive by a drive means, malfunctions due to poor detection or control can lead to a decrease in the reliability of the distribution operation of the distribution means. However, according to gaming machine B1, the destination of distribution by the distribution means can be switched mechanically in synchronization with the displacement of the displacement member, thereby improving the reliability of the distribution operation.

In particular, since the displacement member is a member that receives game balls from the first branch passage, the distribution destination of the distribution means can be switched to the first branch passage in synchronization with the displacement of the displacement member, so that the game balls distributed to the first branch passage can be reliably received by the displacement member.

A gaming machine B2 further comprising a biasing means for applying a biasing force to the distribution means to maintain the distribution destination of the distribution means to one of the first branch passage or the second branch passage, and the displacement member displaces the distribution means in a direction against the direction of the biasing force, thereby switching the distribution destination of the distribution means to the other of the first branch passage or the second branch passage, and the biasing force of the biasing means returns the distribution destination of the distribution means to one of the first branch passage or the second branch passage.

According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B1, a biasing force is applied to the distribution means,
Since the biasing means is provided to maintain the distribution destination of the distribution means in either the first branch passage or the second branch passage, it is possible to prevent the distribution destination of the distribution means from being inadvertently switched. In this case, the distribution means is displaced in accordance with the displacement of the displacement member, and after the distribution destination is switched, the distribution destination before the switch can be returned to the previous destination by the biasing force of the biasing means, so it is not necessary for the displacement member to be in contact with the distribution means. In other words, the displacement member can be separated from the distribution means. This increases the degree of freedom in designing the movable range of the displacement member.

Gaming machine B3, in which the biasing means in the gaming machine B2 applies a biasing force to the sorting means to maintain the sorting destination of balls by the sorting means in the second branch passage.

According to gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects of gaming machine B2, the biasing means applies a biasing force to the distribution means to maintain the distribution destination of the distribution means in the second branch passage, thereby preventing the distribution destination of the distribution means from being switched to the first branch passage when the displacement member is in a state in which it is unable to receive game balls.

Gaming machine B4 further comprises a base member on which the displacement member is disposed and which is formed so as to be displaceable between a first position and a second position, and when the base member is disposed at the first position, the displacement member is capable of receiving game balls from the first branch passage and is capable of contacting the sorting means, and when the base member is disposed at the second position, the displacement member is unable to receive game balls from the first branch passage and is unable to contact the sorting means.

According to gaming machine B4, in addition to the effects of gaming machine B3, a base member formed to be displaceable between a first position and a second position is provided, and a displacement member is disposed on the base member, so that it is possible to form a mode in which the displacement member is displaced with the base member disposed at the first position, and a mode in which the displacement member is displaced with the base member disposed at the second position, thereby enhancing the presentation effect accordingly.

In this case, when the base member is positioned at the second position, the displacement member is unable to receive game balls from the first branch passage, and in such a state the displacement member is unable to abut against the distribution means, so that when the displacement member is unable to receive game balls (when the base member is positioned at the second position), the distribution destination by the distribution means can be prevented from being switched to the first branch passage.

Gaming machine B5 is characterized in that in the gaming machine B4, a second base member formed as a separate member from the base member is provided, and the sorting means is disposed on the second base member.

According to gaming machine B5, in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machine B4, it is provided with a second base member formed as a separate member from the base member, and a distribution means is arranged on the second base member, thereby making it possible to suppress the increase in size of the base member.

In any one of the gaming machines B1 to B5, the displacement member is formed to be displaceable at least between a switching position and a receiving position set at a position different from the switching position, and when the displacement member is displaced to the switching position, the distribution destination by the distribution means is switched to the first branch passage, and when the displacement member is displaced to the receiving position, the displacement member is capable of receiving game balls from the first branch passage and the distribution destination by the distribution means is switched to the second branch passage.
.

According to gaming machine B6, in addition to the effects of any of gaming machines B1 to B5, the displacement member is formed so as to be displaceable at least between a switching position and a receiving position which is set at a position different from the switching position, and when the displacement member is displaced to the switching position, the destination of distribution by the distribution means is switched to the first branch passage, and when the displacement member is displaced to the receiving position, the displacement member is capable of receiving game balls from the first branch passage and the destination of distribution by the distribution means is switched to the second branch passage, thereby preventing game balls in excess of the specified number that the displacement member can receive from being distributed to the first branch passage.

In other words, if the switching position and the receiving position are set to the same position, the displacement member receives game balls while the distribution destination by the distribution means remains switched to the first branch passage, and there is a risk that game balls will be distributed to the first branch passage in excess of the specified number that the displacement member can receive. If a separate means for restricting the inflow of game balls into the first branch passage is provided, the structure will become more complex, reducing reliability and increasing product costs.

In contrast, according to gaming machine B6, when the displacement member is displaced to the switching position and a specified number (or less than the specified number) of gaming balls are distributed to the first branch passage, the distribution destination is switched to the second branch passage when the displacement member is displaced to the receiving position, so that gaming balls in excess of the specified number are prevented from flowing down into the first branch passage. Therefore, it is possible to prevent gaming balls in excess of the specified number that the displacement member can receive from being distributed to the first branch passage. Also,
Since there is no need to provide the above-mentioned means separately, it is possible to improve reliability and reduce product costs.

In the gaming machine B6, the first branch passage is formed as one or more protrusions or recesses protruding or recessed into its inner wall surface, and is characterized in that it is equipped with a resistance means for providing resistance to the gaming ball passing through the first branch passage.

According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B6, the first branch passage is provided with a resistance means formed as one or more protrusions or recesses protruding or recessed on its inner wall surface, which provides resistance to the game ball passing through the first branch passage, so that the speed of the game ball passing through the first branch passage can be slowed down. Therefore, the time required for the displacement member to displace from the switching position to the receiving position can be lengthened accordingly, so that the displacement member can reliably receive the game ball. Also, the output of the drive means can be reduced by the amount of the displacement speed required for the displacement member to be slowed down, thereby reducing the product cost.

In the gaming machine B6 or B7, the distribution means is configured to distribute the first ball to the player in accordance with the displacement of the distribution means.
The first and second in/out portions are formed so as to be able to in/out of the branch passage, and the first in/out portion projects into the first branch passage to guide the game balls flowing down the flow passage to the second branch passage.
The second recessed portion is formed so as to be capable of being distributed to a branch passage, and the second recessed portion is closer to the first recessed portion than the first recessed portion.
The first branch passage is located downstream of the branch passage and protrudes into the first branch passage, thereby being formed to be able to regulate the flow of the game balls distributed to the first branch passage downward.
The gaming machine B8 is characterized in that, when one of the recessed portions protrudes into the passage of the first branch passage, the other portion retracts outside the passage of the first branch passage.

According to gaming machine B8, in addition to the effects of gaming machines B6 or B7, the distribution means is provided with a first inlet and outlet portion and a second inlet and outlet portion formed to be able to appear and disappear in the first branch passage as the distribution means is displaced, the first inlet and outlet portion is formed to be able to distribute game balls flowing down the flow passage to the second branch passage by protruding into the first branch passage, the second inlet and outlet portion is located downstream of the first branch passage from the first inlet and outlet portion and is formed to be able to restrict the flow down of the game balls distributed to the first branch passage by protruding into the first branch passage, and when one of the first inlet and outlet portions protrudes into the first branch passage, the other is retracted outside the first branch passage, so that by displacing the distribution means in accordance with the displacement of the displacement member, only a specified number of game balls can be distributed to the first branch passage and received by the displacement member.

That is, a first state in which the first intruded portion projects and distributes game balls flowing down the flow passage to the second branch passage; a second state in which the first intruded portion retracts and distributes game balls flowing down the flow passage to the first branch passage; a third state in which the second intruded portion projects and restricts the flow of game balls distributed to the first branch passage (stores game balls); and a fourth state in which the second intruded portion retracts and causes game balls stored in the first branch passage to flow down and be received by the displacement member.
By combining these states, only a specified number of game balls can be distributed to the first branch passage and received by the displacement member.

According to the gaming machine B8, the distribution means includes a first inlet portion and a second inlet portion, that is,
Since it is formed as one part, the structure of the distribution means (the structure for operating the first and second in/out parts to perform their functions) can be simplified. Furthermore, since one of the first and second in/out parts is protruding into the passage of the first branch passage and the other is retreated outside the passage of the first branch passage, it is sufficient that the distribution means is also formed to be displaceable to two positions according to the two positions (switching position and receiving position) of the displacement member. That is, by displacing the distribution means at two positions, the first to fourth states described above can be formed. Therefore, the structure of the distribution means and the structure for displacing the distribution means in accordance with the displacement of the displacement member can be simplified, and the reliability of the distribution operation of the game balls can be improved accordingly.

<Concept of the invention using the sorting unit 500 as an example>
A gaming machine C1 is provided with a flow-down passage through which game balls flow, a first branch passage and a second branch passage branching off from the flow-down passage, and a distribution means for distributing game balls flowing down the flow-down passage into either the first branch passage or the second branch passage, the gaming machine being characterized in that it further comprises a flow-down state change means located downstream of the distribution means for restricting or allowing the flow-down of game balls in the first branch passage.

Here, a gaming machine is known that includes a flow passage through which gaming balls flow, a first branch passage and a second branch passage branched off from the flow passage, and a distribution means that distributes gaming balls flowing down the flow passage to either the first branch passage or the second branch passage (for example, see JP 2014-223 A).
However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, the gaming balls flowing down the flow passage are
Since the ball is simply diverted to either the first branch passage or the second branch passage, there is a problem in that it does not sufficiently provide the player with an interest.

In contrast, the gaming machine C1 is provided with a flow state changing means that is located downstream of the distribution means and that restricts or allows the flow of gaming balls down the first branch passage, thereby providing an entertainment for the player.

In other words, by operating the flow state change means, the flow of game balls diverted to the first branch passage is restricted to store the game balls in the first branch passage, while allowing the game balls to flow down in the first branch passage and allowing the game balls stored in the first branch passage to flow down (release).
This allows for the action of directing the game balls flowing down the flow passage to either the first branch passage or the second branch passage, as well as the action of temporarily stopping (storing) the flow of the game balls that have been diverted to the first branch passage, and the action of allowing (releasing) the stopped (stored) game balls to flow down, providing an added interest to the player.

Gaming machine C2 is characterized in that, in gaming machine C1, the distribution means and the flow-down state change means are provided as an integrated member formed integrally therewith, and when the distribution destination by the distribution means is set to the first branch passage, the flow-down state change means restricts the flow-down of game balls in the first branch passage, and when the distribution destination by the distribution means is set to the second branch passage, the flow-down state change means allows the flow-down of game balls in the first branch passage.

According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C1, the sorting means and the flow-down state change means are formed as one integral part, so that the structure for operating the sorting means and the flow-down state change means can be simplified and the reliability of the operation can be improved. In other words, if the sorting means and the flow-down state change means are formed separately, they become two parts, so the structure for operating the two parts becomes complicated and the reliability of the operation is reduced. In contrast, according to the gaming machine C2, the sorting means and the flow-down state change means can be formed as one part, so that the structure can be simplified accordingly, the product cost can be reduced, and the reliability of the operation can be improved.

In this case, when the distribution destination by the distribution means is set to the first branch passage by the operation of the integrated member, the flow-down state changing means restricts the flow of the game balls distributed to the first branch passage and stores the game balls in the first branch passage, and when the distribution destination by the distribution means is set to the second branch passage, the flow-down state changing means allows the game balls to flow down in the first branch passage and the game balls stored in the first branch passage can be made to flow down (released). That is, in addition to the operation of distributing the game balls flowing down the flow-down passage to either the first branch passage or the second branch passage, not only can an operation of stopping (storing) the flow of the game balls distributed to the first branch passage and an operation of allowing (releasing) the stopped (stored) game balls to flow down can be formed, but also these storing and releasing operations can be formed alternately in conjunction with the distribution operation.

Gaming machine C3, characterized in that in a state in which the integrated member is displaceable between a first state position and a second state position, and in a state in which the integrated member is displaced to the first state position, the distribution means is disposed at a position to distribute the first branch passage and the flow-down state change means is disposed at a position to restrict the flow-down of game balls in the first branch passage, and in a state in which the integrated member is displaced to the second state position, the distribution means is disposed at a position to distribute the second branch passage and the flow-down state change means is disposed at a position to allow the flow-down of game balls in the first branch passage.

According to gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects of gaming machine C2, the integrated member is formed to be displaceable between a first state position and a second state position, and when the integrated member is displaced to the first state position, the distribution means is disposed at a position to distribute the first branch passage and the flow-down state change means is disposed at a position to restrict the flow-down of the game balls in the first branch passage, and when the integrated member is displaced to the second state position, the distribution means is disposed at a position to distribute the second branch passage and the flow-down state change means is disposed at a position to allow the game balls to flow-down in the first branch passage;
By displacing the integral member between two positions (a first state position and a second state position), the game balls flowing down the flow passage are diverted to either the first branch passage or the second branch passage, and the first
It is possible to perform an operation of temporarily stopping (storing) the flow of game balls sorted into the branch passages and an operation of allowing (releasing) the stopped (stored) game balls to flow down, and also to perform these storing and releasing operations alternately in conjunction with the sorting operation. In other words, it is possible to simplify the structure, reduce product costs, and improve operational reliability.

In gaming machine C3, the integrated member is formed to be rotatable, and at least the flow-down state change means is formed to be able to appear and disappear from the first branch passage, protruding into the first branch passage to regulate the flow-down of the game balls, and is formed in an arc-shaped curved shape centered on the rotation axis of the integrated member, in gaming machine C4.

According to gaming machine C4, in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machine C3, the integral member is formed to be rotatable, and at least the flow-down state change means is formed to be capable of appearing and disappearing in the first branch passage, and by protruding into the first branch passage, the flow-down of the game balls is restricted, and since it is formed in a shape curved like an arc centered on the rotation axis of the integral member, the area of the hole opened in the inner wall of the first branch passage for the appearance and disappearance of the flow-down state change means can be reduced.

Gaming machine C5 is characterized in that, in gaming machine C4, the flow-down state changing means is disposed in an orientation in which the side facing the upstream of the first branch passage is concave.

According to gaming machine C5, in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machine C4, the flow-down state change means is arranged in a concave orientation on the side facing the upstream of the first branch passage, so that in the initial state in which the flow-down state change means begins to protrude into the first branch passage (i.e., the state in which only the tip end of the flow-down state change means protrudes into the passage), the shape of the tip end of the flow-down state change means can be positioned in a direction that makes it easy to regulate the flow-down of game balls, making it easier to regulate the flow-down of game balls that have been distributed to the first branch passage.

In addition, when the flow-down state changing means is maximally protruded into the first branch passage to restrict the flow-down of the game ball, the concave portion of the flow-down state changing means can stably hold the game ball, thereby preventing the game ball from moving wildly.

Gaming machine C6 is characterized in that, in gaming machines C4 or C5, it is provided with a biasing means which applies a biasing force to the integrated member to bias the flow-down state change means in a direction in which the flow-down state change means protrudes into the first branch passage, and the distance from the flow-down state change means to the rotation axis of the integrated member is made greater than the distance from the distribution means to the rotation axis of the integrated member.

According to gaming machine C6, in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machines C4 or C5, a biasing means is provided which applies a biasing force to the integrated member, biasing it in a direction in which the flow-down state change means protrudes into the first branch passage, and thus such biasing force can be utilized to more easily maintain the integrated member in a position in which the flow-down state change means protrudes into the first branch passage (i.e., the first state position).

In this case, in gaming machine C6, the distance from the flow-down state change means to the rotation axis of the integrated member is made greater than the distance from the distribution means to the rotation axis of the integrated member, so when a flowing game ball collides with it, the flow-down state change means is more likely to become submerged even if the same impact force is applied because the distance from the rotation axis is greater. However, by setting the biasing direction of the biasing means to a direction in which the flow-down state change means protrudes into the first branch passage, the biasing force can be used to prevent the flow-down state change means from becoming submerged.

Gaming machine C7, in which the integrated member in accordance with the gaming machine C6 is rotated by its own weight in a direction in which the flow-down state changing means protrudes into the first branch passage.

According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C6, the integral member is rotated in a direction in which the flow-down state change means protrudes into the first branch passage by its own weight, and the integral member is rotated by utilizing the own weight in a position in which the flow-down state change means protrudes into the first branch passage (i.e., the first state position).
Therefore, when a gaming ball collides with the flow-down state changing means, the flow-down state changing means can be further prevented from being immersed due to its own weight.

Furthermore, even if the biasing means falls off, the weight of the integrated part can maintain the flow state changing means in a position in which it protrudes into the first branch passage, thereby preventing the game balls from flowing down into the first branch passage.

In any one of the gaming machines C2 to C7, the distribution destination by the distribution means is the first branch passage, and the flow-down state change means regulates the flow-down of the gaming balls in the first branch passage, and when a specified number of gaming balls are stored in the first branch passage, the gaming machine C is formed so that the gaming balls flowing down the flow-down passage can flow down to the second branch passage.
8.

According to the gaming machine C8, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines C2 to C7, the distribution destination of the distribution means is the first branch passage, and the flow of the game balls in the first branch passage is regulated by the flow state changing means, and when a specified number of game balls are stored in the first branch passage, the game balls flowing down the flow passage are formed to be able to flow down to the second branch passage, so that when more than the specified number of game balls flow down the flow passage, it is possible to prevent the game balls exceeding the specified number from staying in the flow passage. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the displacement of the distribution means (the operation of distributing the game balls to the second branch passage) from being hindered by the game balls stuck in the flow passage.

Gaming machine C9 is characterized in that, in gaming machine C8, the inner wall of the flow-down passage on the side facing the second branch passage is formed so as to be able to guide gaming balls flowing down the flow-down passage to the side of the second branch passage of the last gaming ball among the specified number of gaming balls stored in the first branch passage.

According to the gaming machine C9, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C8, the inner wall of the flow-down passage on the side facing the second branch passage is formed so as to be able to guide the gaming balls flowing down the flow-down passage to the side surface of the second branch passage of the last gaming ball among the specified number of gaming balls stored in the first branch passage.
The game ball flowing down the flow passage can be made to collide with the last game ball among the specified number of game balls, and then made to flow down into the second branch passage more easily.

In addition, the last game ball among the specified number of game balls means the game ball located on the upstream side (opposite the flow state changing means). Also, when the specified number is 1, the last game ball means the game ball stored in the first branch passage itself.

Gaming machine C10 is characterized in that, in gaming machine C8 or C9, the flow direction of the downstream end of the flow passage is formed in a direction different from the flow direction of the upstream end of the first branch passage.

According to the gaming machine C10, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines C8 and C9, the flow direction of the downstream end of the flow passage is formed in a direction different from the flow direction of the upstream end of the first branch passage, so that when a gaming ball flowing down the flow passage collides with the last gaming ball of the specified number of gaming balls stored in the first branch passage, the direction of the repulsive force acting on the last gaming ball can be made different from the flow direction of the upstream end of the first branch passage. As a result, it is possible to prevent the last gaming ball from flying out of the upstream end of the first branch passage due to the repulsive force at the time of the collision and flowing into the second branch passage.

Gaming machine C11 is characterized in that, in any one of gaming machines C2 to C10, the distribution means is formed to be able to appear and disappear in the flow-down passage or the first branch passage, and its appearance and disappearance position is the inner wall on an extension line in the flow-down direction at the downstream end of the flow-down passage.

According to the gaming machine C11, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines C2 to C10, the distribution means is formed so as to be able to appear and disappear from the flow-down passage or the first branch passage, and the appearance and disappearance position is the inner wall on the extension line of the flow-down direction at the downstream end of the flow-down passage, so that the distribution means can be protruded at a position close to the game balls flowing down from the downstream end of the flow-down passage.
The time required from when the distribution means starts to project into the flow passage or the first branch passage until the distribution means is ready to distribute the game balls can be shortened. As a result, the distribution destination can be switched more reliably by the distribution means.

In the gaming machine C11, the distribution means protrudes into the flow-down passage or the first branch passage to distribute game balls flowing down the flow-down passage to the second branch passage, and the protruding direction of the distribution means is set to the direction toward the upstream end of the second branch passage.

According to the gaming machine C12, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C11, the distribution means projects into the downflow passage or the first branch passage to distribute the game balls flowing down the downflow passage to the second branch passage, and the projecting direction of the distribution means is set to a direction toward the upstream end of the second branch passage, so that when a game ball flowing down the downflow passage abuts against the distribution means in the middle of its projecting motion, the game ball can be pushed into the second branch passage by the projecting motion of the distribution means. As a result, distribution to the second branch passage can be more reliably performed.

Gaming machine C13 is characterized in that, in any one of gaming machines C1 to C12, the first branch passage is formed with a downward slope downstream and is formed so that a gaming ball can roll along its inner wall on the lower side in the direction of gravity, and the flow down state change means is formed so as to be able to appear and disappear into the first branch passage from the inner wall on the lower side in the direction of gravity.

According to the gaming machine C13, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines C1 to C12, the first branch passage is formed with a downward incline toward the downstream and is formed so that the game balls can roll along its inner wall on the lower side in the direction of gravity, and the flow-down state change means is formed so that it can appear and disappear from the inner wall on the lower side in the direction of gravity into the first branch passage, so that the time required from when the flow-down state change means starts to protrude into the first branch passage until it can regulate the flow-down of the game balls can be shortened. As a result, when the distribution destination of the distribution means is switched from the second branch passage to the first branch passage and the game ball is distributed to the first branch passage, it is easier to protrude the flow-down state change means in time to regulate the flow-down of the game ball.

Gaming machine C14 is characterized in that, in any one of gaming machines C1 to C13, the flow-down state change means is formed to be able to appear and disappear from the first branch passage, and at least when it is maximally protruding into the first branch passage, a force component in the protruding direction is applied from the gaming ball to the flow-down state change means.

According to gaming machine C14, in any of gaming machines C1 to C13, the flow-down state change means is formed so as to be able to appear and disappear from the first branch passage, and at least in a state where it is maximally protruding into the first branch passage, a force component in the protruding direction is applied from the gaming ball to the flow-down state change means, so that when restricting the flow-down of the gaming ball sorted into the first branch passage, it is possible to suppress the flow-down state change means from being immersed due to the impact of the gaming ball colliding with the flow-down state change means. Therefore, it is possible to easily restrict the flow-down of the gaming ball.

<Concept of the invention using the lower displacement unit 400 as an example>
Gaming machine D1 is characterized in that it has a base member, a base member one side of which is displaceably arranged on the base member, and a displacement member which is displaceably arranged on the base member, and is equipped with a suppression means for suppressing the reaction of the base member due to the displacement of the displacement member.

Here, a gaming machine is known that includes a base member, a base member that is displaceably disposed on the base member at one side, and a displacement member that is displaceably disposed on the base member (for example, JP 2015-029849 A). According to this gaming machine, in addition to the performance of displacing the base member between an extension position where the base member extends into the play area and is visible to the player, and a retracted position where the base member is retracted from the play area, it is possible to perform a performance of displacing the displacement member when the base member is disposed in the extension position.

However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, one side of the base member is arranged so as to be displaceable on the base member, so that when the displaceable member is displaced, there is a problem in that the base member is likely to rattle relative to the base member, with the one side acting as a fulcrum.

In contrast, gaming machine D1 is provided with a suppression means for suppressing the reaction of the base member caused by the displacement of the displacement member, thereby making it possible to suppress the occurrence of rattling of the base member relative to the base member when the displacement member is displaced.

Examples of reaction forces associated with the displacement of the displacement member include those generated by a change in the center of gravity associated with the displacement of the displacement member, those generated by the action of inertial forces associated with an increase or decrease in the displacement speed of the displacement member (change in acceleration), and those generated by a reaction force when the displacement member displaces and ejects a game ball.

In the gaming machine D1, the suppression means includes a mounting member that is displaceably mounted on the base member, the displacement member is formed to be capable of holding and ejecting the gaming ball, and the mounting member is formed to be displaceable when the gaming ball is ejected from the displacement member.
2.

According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D1, the suppression means includes an arrangement member that is displaceably arranged on the base member, and the displacement member is formed to be able to hold and eject the gaming balls,
The arrangement member is formed so as to be displaceable when a game ball is shot from the displacement member, so that the occurrence of rattling of the base member relative to the base member can be suppressed. That is, when a game ball is shot from the displacement member, the center of gravity of the base member changes by the weight of the game ball. For example, when a configuration is adopted in which the arrangement member is displaced in a direction that offsets the change in the center of gravity caused by the shot of the game ball, the occurrence of rattling of the base member caused by the change in the center of gravity can be suppressed. Also, when a game ball is shot from the displacement member, the base member receives a reaction due to the shot of the game ball. For example, when a configuration is adopted in which the arrangement member is displaced in a direction that offsets the reaction due to the shot of the game ball, the occurrence of rattling of the base member caused by the reaction can be suppressed.

Gaming machine D3 is characterized in that, in gaming machine D1 or D2, it is provided with an inverse member that is displaced when the displacement member is displaced, with at least a displacement component that is in the opposite direction to the displacement direction of the displacement member.

According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines D1 and D2, since it is provided with an inverse member that is displaced with at least a displacement component in the opposite direction to the displacement direction of the displacement member when the displacement member is displaced, the change in the center of gravity of the base member caused by the displacement of the displacement member can be reduced by the displacement of the inverse member. As a result, the rattling of the base member caused by the change in the center of gravity can be suppressed.

If the counter member starts to displace when the displacement member starts to displace, the inertial forces of the two can be at least partially cancelled out, making it easier to suppress rattling of the base member when the displacement member is displaced from a stopped state.

Gaming machine D4 is characterized in that it is equipped with a transmission mechanism in gaming machine D2 or D3, which transmits the displacement of the displacement member to the arrangement member or (and) the reverse member, thereby displacing the arrangement member or (and) the reverse member.

According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines D2 and D3, a transmission mechanism is provided to transmit the displacement of the displacement member to the arrangement member or (and) the reverse member to displace the arrangement member or (and) the reverse member, so that there is no need to provide a separate drive means for displacing the arrangement member or (and) the reverse member.
The base member can also be used as a driving means for displacing the reverse member, which allows the base member to be lighter in weight and makes it easier to suppress rattling.

Furthermore, since the arranged and/or reverse member can be displaced in mechanical synchronization with the displacement of the displacement member, it is possible to eliminate the need for control such as detecting the position of the displacement member with a sensor device and driving the arranged and/or reverse member with a driving means in accordance with the detection result, which in turn enables reduction in product costs and ensures reliability of the displacement operation of the displacement member and/or reverse member relative to the displacement member.

Gaming machine D5 is characterized in that, in any of gaming machines D1 to D4, the displacement member is formed so as to be capable of starting displacement from a second position and starting displacement from a first position that is closer to one side of the base member than the second position, and that at least when the base member is positioned at a predetermined position relative to the base member, the displacement member starts displacement from the first position.

Here, when the displacement member is displaced from a stopped state, the change in acceleration is maximum.
The base member is prone to rattling due to the influence of inertial forces.

In contrast, according to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines D1 to D4, the displacement member is formed so as to be capable of forming a mode in which the displacement starts from the second position and a mode in which the displacement starts from the first position closer to one side of the base member than the second position, and at least in a state in which the base member is arranged at a predetermined position relative to the base member (for example, a protruding position in which the base member protrudes into the play area and is visible to the player), the displacement starts from the first position, so that the rattling of the base member can be suppressed. That is, since the first position is a position closer to one side of the base member than the second position, by setting the first position as the starting position of the displacement of the displacement member, the weight of the displacement member can be made closer to the fulcrum when the base member rattles against the base member, and accordingly, the influence of the inertial force when the displacement member is displaced from the stopped state can be made less likely to act on the base member. As a result, it is easier to suppress the rattling of the base member.

Gaming machine D6 is characterized in that, in gaming machine D5, it comprises a pinion gear arranged on the base member, and a rack member having a rack gear that meshes with the pinion gear, and the displacement member is arranged on the rack member.

According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D5, a pinion gear is provided on a base member, and a rack member is provided with a rack gear meshed with the pinion gear, and a displacement member is provided on the rack member, so that when the displacement member starts to be displaced from the first position, not only the weight of the rack member but also the weight of the rack member can be brought closer to one side of the base member (the fulcrum when the base member rattles against the base member). As a result, it is possible to easily suppress rattling of the base member when the displacement member is displaced from a stopped state.

Gaming machine D7 is characterized in that, in gaming machine D6, the displacement direction of the displacement member when it starts to displace from the first position is a direction away from one side of the base member.

According to the gaming machine D7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D6, the direction of displacement when the displacement member starts to be displaced from the first position is the direction away from the one side of the base member, so that the rack member can be brought closer to the one side of the base member when the displacement member is arranged at the first position. That is, in order for the displacement member (rack member) to be displaced in the direction away from the one side of the base member, the rack member will face the rack gear side part with which the pinion gear meshes after the displacement member starts to be displaced toward the one side of the base member. Therefore, the weight of the rack member can be brought closer to the one side of the base member (the fulcrum when the base member rattles against the base member), and as a result, it is easier to suppress rattling of the base member when the displacement member is displaced from the stopped state.

Gaming machine D8 is characterized in that, in any of gaming machines D1 to D7, it is provided with a support structure that supports one side of the base member on the base member in a displaceable manner, and a drive mechanism that drives the base member supported by the support structure, the displacement member is formed to be able to hold and eject game balls, and the drive mechanism is provided with a regulating means that regulates the displacement of the base member in the reaction direction when the game ball is ejected from the displacement member.

According to gaming machine D8, in addition to the effects of any of gaming machines D1 to D7, a support structure that displaceably supports one side of a base member on a base member, and a drive mechanism that drives the base member supported by the support structure, the displacement member is formed to be able to hold and shoot game balls, and the drive mechanism has a restricting means that restricts the base member from being displaced in the direction of the reaction when the game ball is shot from the displacement member, so that the displacement of the base member relative to the base member due to the reaction can be suppressed. As a result, the occurrence of rattling of the base member can be suppressed.

<Concept of the invention using the rotation unit 700 as an example>
A gaming machine E1 is provided with a reel member that is rotatably formed and whose outer peripheral surface is arranged so as to be visible to a player, and is characterized in that it further comprises a displacement member that is displaceably arranged on the outer peripheral surface of the reel member.

Here, a gaming machine equipped with a reel member that is formed to be rotatable and arranged so that its outer peripheral surface is visible to a player is known (for example, JP 2009-119140 A). In this gaming machine, the reel member is formed in a cylindrical shape, and the display (pattern) on its outer peripheral surface is made visible to a player while the reel member is rotating or by stopping the reel member. However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, it is only possible to form a presentation mode that allows a player to see the display on the outer peripheral surface as the reel member rotates or stops, so there is a problem that the presentation mode is poorly changed and the presentation effect is insufficient.

In contrast, gaming machine E1 is equipped with a displacement member that is displaceably arranged on the outer peripheral surface of the reel member, so that in addition to a presentation mode that allows the player to visually recognize the display on the outer peripheral surface as the reel member rotates or stops, a presentation mode can be created in which the displacement member is displaced, and therefore it is possible to add variety to the presentation mode and enhance the presentation effect.

In addition, the cross-sectional shape of the reel member cut by a plane perpendicular to its rotation axis does not have to be circular, and may be polygonal, elliptical, or a combination of these. Therefore, the outer circumferential surface of the reel member does not have to be a circumferential surface, and may be a flat surface, a curved surface, or a combination of these.

In gaming machine E1, the displacement member is formed so as to be displaceable at least between a first position and a second position, and in the first position, a portion of the outer peripheral surface of the reel member is formed by the displacement member, and in the second position, at least a portion of the displacement member protrudes radially outward from the reel member.

According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E1, when the displacement member is displaced to the first position, a part of the outer peripheral surface of the reel member is formed by the displacement member, so that the outer shape of the reel member can be made smaller, and the space required for the reel member to rotate can be reduced accordingly. On the other hand, when the displacement member is displaced to the second position, at least a part of the displacement member is protruded radially outward from the reel member, so that the displacement of the displacement member can be easily visually recognized by the player, and the performance effect can be enhanced. Also, for example, by rotating the reel member with the displacement member disposed in the first position, and disposing (displacing) the displacement member in the second position when the rotation of the reel member is stopped, a part (displacement member) that was visually recognized as the outer peripheral surface of the reel member can be formed to protrude radially outward from the reel member, and the interest can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine E2, a light emitting means for emitting light is provided, the reel member is formed with an internal space, and the light emitting means is disposed in the internal space, and the displacement member is
When displaced to this position, the outer peripheral surface of the reel member is opened and the internal space is connected to the outside.

According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E2, a light emitting means for emitting light is provided,
The reel member is formed to have an internal space, and a light emitting means is disposed in the internal space;
When the displacement member is displaced to the second position, the outer peripheral surface of the reel member is opened and the internal space is connected to the outside, so that the light emitted by the light emitting means can be emitted to the outside, and when the displacement member is displaced to the first position, the emission to the outside can be blocked, thereby enhancing the presentation effect.

Gaming machine E4 is characterized in that, in any one of gaming machines E1 to E3, it is provided with a driving means for generating a driving force and a transmission means for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the reel member and the displacement member.

Here, in order to form the reel member rotatably and to displaceably dispose the displacement member on the reel member, a drive means is required for each of the reel member and the displacement member, which increases the production cost. Also, if the drive means for displacing the displacement member is mounted on the reel member, the weight of the reel member increases, making it difficult to smoothly start or stop the rotation of the reel member.

In contrast, the gaming machine E4 has the same effects as any of the gaming machines E1 to E3, and includes a driving means for generating a driving force and a transmission means for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the reel member and the displacement member, so that a single driving means can be used for both the rotation of the reel member and the displacement of the displacement member. This reduces the cost of the product. In addition, since there is no need to mount a driving means for displacing the displacement member on the reel member, the weight of the reel member can be reduced, and the start and stop of the rotation of the reel member can be smoothly performed.

Gaming machine E5 is characterized in that, in gaming machine E4, the driving means is formed to be capable of generating a rotational driving force, and the transmission means includes a rotation side transmission means for transmitting the rotational driving force of the driving means to the reel member, a displacement side transmission means for transmitting the rotational driving force of the driving means to the displacement member, and a one-way clutch mechanism for transmitting the rotational driving force to either the rotation side transmission means or the displacement side transmission means and cutting off transmission to the other depending on the rotational direction of the rotational driving force of the driving means.

According to the gaming machine E5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E4, the driving means is formed to be capable of generating a rotational driving force, and the transmission means includes a rotation side transmission means for transmitting the rotational driving force of the driving means to the reel member, a displacement side transmission means for transmitting the rotational driving force of the driving means to the displacement member, and a one-way clutch mechanism for transmitting the rotational driving force to either the rotation side transmission means or the displacement side transmission means and blocking transmission to the other depending on the rotation direction of the rotational driving force of the driving means, so that the driven object (the reel member or the displacement member) driven by the rotational driving force can be switched by simply switching the rotation direction of the driving means. That is, depending on the rotation direction of the driving means, the rotation of the reel member and the stop of the rotation, and the displacement of the displacement member and the stop of the displacement can be switched, and the structure can be simplified while allowing the formation of a plurality of modes.

In gaming machine E5, the rotation side transmission means is characterized in that it includes a gear train that forms part or all of the transmission path that transmits the rotational driving force of the drive means to the reel member, and a load gear that meshes with one of the gears in the gear train.

Here, in a structure in which a one-way clutch mechanism is used to switch the driven object (the reel member or the displacement member) depending on the rotation direction of the drive means, when the transmission of the driving force from the drive means is interrupted, the reel member becomes free to rotate or displace in the direction in which it was driven by the driving force. Therefore, for example, when the driven object of the drive means is switched from the reel member to the displacement member and the transmission of the driving force is interrupted, the reel member becomes free to rotate, and there is a risk that the rotation will continue (spin on its own axis) due to inertial force.

In contrast, according to gaming machine E6, in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machine E5, the rotation side transmission means includes a gear train that forms part or all of the transmission path that transmits the rotational driving force of the driving means to the reel member, and a load gear that meshes with one of the gears in the gear train.Therefore, even if the transmission of the rotational driving force from the driving means is cut off, the load (resistance) generated when rotating the load gear can be utilized to prevent the rotation of the reel member from continuing.

Gaming machine E7 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine E5 or E6, it is provided with a reverse rotation restriction means for restricting the reel member from rotating in a direction opposite to the direction in which it is rotated by the rotational driving force of the driving means.

According to gaming machine E7, in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machines E5 or E6, it is equipped with a reverse rotation restriction means for restricting the rotation of the reel member in the direction opposite to the direction in which it is rotated by the rotational driving force of the drive means, and therefore it is possible to prevent the reel member from rotating in the reverse direction due to, for example, a deviation in the center of gravity position of the reel member or a collision with a gaming ball.

Gaming machine E8 is characterized in that, in gaming machine E2 or E3, the reel member is formed with an internal space, and when the displacement member is displaced to the second position, the outer peripheral surface of the reel member is opened and the internal space is connected to the gaming area.

According to the gaming machine E8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines E2 and E3, the reel member is formed with an internal space, and when the displacement member is displaced to the second position, the outer peripheral surface of the reel member is opened,
Since the internal space is connected to the play area, game balls flowing down the play area can flow into the internal space of the reel member, or game balls in the internal space of the reel member can flow out to the play area. When the displacement member is displaced to the first position, the outer peripheral surface of the reel member is closed, thereby blocking the flow of game balls in and out between the internal space and the play area. As a result, the presentation effect can be enhanced.

In gaming machine E8, one side of the displacement member is rotatably supported on the reel member, and when the displacement member is displaced to the second position, the other side opposite to the one side is extended into the gaming area.

According to the gaming machine E9, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E8, one side of the displacement member is rotatably supported by the reel member, and when the displacement member is displaced to the second position, the other side opposite to the one side is extended into the play area, so that the game balls flowing down the play area can be received on the upper surface of the displacement member. Therefore, the game balls flowing down the play area can be easily caused to flow into the internal space of the reel member by using the displacement member.

A gaming machine E10, in which the displacement member in a state displaced to the second position has an upper surface inclined downward from the other side to the one side.

According to the gaming machine E10, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E9, when the displacement member is displaced to the second position, its upper surface is inclined downward from the other side to one side, so that after the gaming ball flowing down the play area is received by the upper surface of the displacement member, the received gaming ball can be guided (rolled) into the internal space of the reel member along the downward inclination of the upper surface of the displacement member. Therefore, the gaming ball flowing down the play area can be easily made to flow into the internal space of the reel member by using the displacement member.

A gaming machine E11, which is characterized in that it is equipped with a displacement setting means for restricting or allowing the displacement of the displacement member depending on the rotational position of the reel member in the gaming machine E9 or E10.

According to gaming machine E11, in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machines E9 or E10, it is equipped with a displacement setting means for restricting or allowing the displacement of the displacement member depending on the rotational position of the reel member, thereby preventing the protruding displacement member from interfering with other members around the reel member.

Gaming machine E12 is any one of gaming machines E9 to E11, and is provided with a rotation regulating means for regulating the rotation of the reel member, and the rotation regulating member regulates the rotation of the reel member when the displacement member is displaced to the second position and the other side of the displacement member is extended into the gaming area.

According to the gaming machine E12, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines E9 to E11, a rotation restricting means for restricting the rotation of the reel member is provided, and the rotation restricting member restricts the rotation of the reel member when the displacement member is displaced to the second position and the other side of the displacement member is extended into the play area, so that the reel member rotates in the extended state of the displacement member and the displacement member can be prevented from interfering with other members located on the rotation trajectory. Also, the reel member can be prevented from being rotated by the load acting when the displacement member receives a game ball flowing down the play area or the weight of the game ball rolling on the upper surface of the displacement member.

<Concept of the invention using the rotation unit 700 as an example>
A gaming machine F1 is provided with a reel member that is formed to be rotatable and whose outer peripheral surface is arranged so as to be visible to a player, the reel member being characterized in that it has an internal space formed therein and a communication port that connects the internal space to the outside and is formed so that gaming balls can pass through.

Here, a gaming machine is known that has a reel member that is formed to be rotatable and that is arranged so that its outer circumferential surface is visible to a player (for example, JP 2009-119140 A). In this gaming machine, the reel member is formed in a cylindrical shape, and the display (pattern) on its outer circumferential surface can be made visible to a player while the reel member is rotating or by stopping the reel member. However,
In the conventional gaming machines described above, the reel member was only used as a component for holding a display on its outer surface for the player to see, and there was a problem in that the reel member was not utilized sufficiently.
That is, the reel member is formed relatively large because it needs to hold a display that is visible to the player. Therefore, the space occupied by the reel member is large, while the part other than the outer circumferential surface is not utilized.

In contrast, according to the gaming machine F1, the reel member has an internal space formed therein and a communication port that connects the internal space to the outside and allows the game balls to pass through, so that the game balls flowing down the game area can flow into or out of the internal space through the communication port. Therefore, the internal space of the reel member, which is a dead space, can function as a storage space for the game balls or a ball sending passage, and the reel member can be utilized accordingly.

The communication opening may be formed in only one place on the reel member, or may be formed in two or more places. When the communication opening is formed in only one place, the communication opening is formed on the outer peripheral surface of the reel member. This allows the position of the communication opening to be raised and lowered according to the rotational position of the reel member, so that game balls can flow into or out of the internal space through the communication opening (when the communication opening faces upward, game balls can flow into the internal space, and when the communication opening faces downward, game balls can flow out of the internal space).

In addition, the cross-sectional shape of the reel member cut by a plane perpendicular to its rotation axis does not have to be circular, but may be polygonal, elliptical, or a combination of these. Therefore, the outer circumferential surface of the reel member does not have to be a circumferential surface, but may be a flat surface, a curved surface, or a combination of these.

In the gaming machine F2, the communication port in the gaming machine F1 includes a first communication port and a second communication port formed at a position different from the first communication port.

According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F1, the communication port includes a first communication port and a second communication port formed at a position different from the first communication port, so that one of the first communication port or the second communication port can be used as an inlet port for inflowing game balls from the outside into the internal space, and the other of the first communication port or the second communication port can be used as an outlet port for outflowing game balls from the internal space to the outside. That is, even if the reel member is not rotated (while being kept in a stopped state), the reel member can be used as a ball throwing passage for game balls. In addition, the reel member may be used as a ball throwing passage while the reel member is rotating.

In gaming machine F2, the first communication port is formed on the outer peripheral surface of the reel member and is formed as an inlet for allowing game balls flowing down the game area to flow into the internal space, and the second communication port is formed on the end surface of the reel member in the rotation axis direction and is formed as an outlet for allowing game balls to flow out from the internal space to the game area.

According to gaming machine F3, in addition to the effects of gaming machine F2, the first communication port is formed on the outer peripheral surface of the reel member and is formed as an inlet for allowing game balls flowing down the game area to flow into the internal space, and the second communication port is formed on the end surface in the rotational axis direction of the reel member and is formed as an outlet for allowing game balls to flow out from the internal space to the game area, making it easier for the player to visually see the flow of game balls into the internal space of the reel member and allowing the game balls to be discharged while the reel member is maintained in a stopped state.

That is, the reel member is disposed so that the outer peripheral surface is visible to the player, and the outer peripheral surface is
Since the first communication port (inlet) is formed, it is easy for the player to see the inflow of the game balls. On the other hand, if the second communication port is formed on the outer peripheral surface of the reel member, when the reel member is displaced to a rotational position where the communication port is upward, the game balls cannot flow out from the internal space. However, since the second communication port (outlet) is formed on the end surface of the reel member in the rotational axis direction, it is possible to create a state where the game balls can flow out from the internal space regardless of the rotational position of the reel member.

Gaming machine F4 is characterized in that, in any of gaming machines F1 to F3, it is provided with a displacement member that is displaceably arranged on the outer peripheral surface of the reel member, and when the displacement member is displaced to a first position, the communication port is blocked by the displacement member, and when the displacement member is displaced to a second position, the communication port is opened.

According to gaming machine F4, in addition to the effects achieved by any of gaming machines F1 to F3, it is provided with a displacement member that is displaceably arranged on the outer peripheral surface of the reel member, and when the displacement member is displaced to a first position, the communication port is blocked by the displacement member, and when the displacement member is displaced to a second position, the communication port is opened, so that the inflow and outflow of gaming balls through the communication port can be switched between a blocked state and an allowed state.

In gaming machine F4, the communication port is formed on the outer peripheral surface of the reel member, one side of the displacement member is rotatably supported on the reel member, and when the displacement member is displaced to the second position, the other side opposite to the one side protrudes into the playing area.

According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E4, one side of the displacement member is rotatably supported by the reel member, and when the displacement member is displaced to the second position, the other side opposite to the one side is extended into the play area, so that the game balls flowing down the play area can be received on the upper surface of the displacement member. Therefore, for example, when the communication port is formed as an inlet, the game balls flowing down the play area can be easily flowed into the internal space of the reel member by using the displacement member.

In the gaming machine F5, the displacement member is characterized in that one side of the displacement member is positioned forward in the rotation direction of the reel member relative to the other side.

According to gaming machine F6, in addition to the effects of gaming machine F5, one side of the displacement member is positioned further forward in the rotation direction of the reel member than the other side, so that even if the displacement member interferes with a member disposed around the reel member when the reel member is rotated, the force generated by such interference can be applied in a direction to close the displacement member (to displace it to the first position). In other words, when the reel member rotates, the displacement member interferes with another member and is protruded (displaced to the second position).
In addition, it is possible to prevent the displacement member from engaging with another member, which would hinder the rotation of the reel member.

Gaming machine F7 is characterized in that, in any of gaming machines F1 to F6, it comprises a base member on which the reel member is rotatably arranged, and a fixed member supported by the base member, arranged in the internal space of the reel member, and non-rotatable relative to the reel member.

According to the gaming machine F7, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines F1 to F6, a base member on which a reel member is rotatably arranged, and a fixed member that is supported by the base member and arranged in the internal space of the reel member and does not rotate with respect to the reel member are provided. Therefore, by holding a gaming ball flowing into the internal space on the fixed member or rolling it on the fixed member toward the outlet,
As the reel member rotates, the game ball can be prevented from moving wildly within the internal space or from being hindered from rolling and remaining in the internal space.

Gaming machine F8 is any one of gaming machines F4 to F6, characterized in that it is provided with a displacement setting means for restricting or allowing the displacement of the displacement member depending on the rotational position of the reel member.

According to the gaming machine F8, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines F4 to F6, a displacement setting means is provided for restricting or allowing the displacement of the displacement member according to the rotational position of the reel member.
This prevents the displacement member displaced to the desired position from interfering with other members around the reel member.

Gaming machine F9 is characterized in that, in gaming machine F5 or F6, it is provided with a rotation regulating means for regulating the rotation of the reel member, and the rotation regulating member regulates the rotation of the reel member when the displacement member is displaced to the second position and the other side of the displacement member is extended into the gaming area.

According to the gaming machine F9, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines F5 and F6, a rotation restriction means for restricting the rotation of the reel member is provided, and the rotation restriction member restricts the rotation of the reel member when the displacement member is displaced to the second position and the other side of the displacement member is extended into the play area, so that the reel member rotates in the extended state of the displacement member and the displacement member can be prevented from interfering with other members located on the rotation trajectory. Also, the reel member can be prevented from being rotated by the load acting when the displacement member receives a game ball flowing down the play area or the weight of the game ball rolling on the upper surface of the displacement member.

A gaming machine F10 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine F3, it is provided with a light-emitting means that is formed to be capable of emitting light and is arranged in the internal space of the reel member, and an opening is formed in an end face of the reel member in the rotation axis direction opposite the end face in which the second communication port is formed, and an electrical connection wire of the light-emitting means is wired through the opening.

According to the gaming machine F10, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F3, an opening is formed on the end face of the reel member in the rotation axis direction opposite to the end face where the second communication port is formed, and the electrical connection wire of the light emitting means is wired through the opening, so that it is easy to secure the space that can be used for each of the second communication port and the opening. As a result, the game balls can be smoothly discharged through the second communication port, and the wiring work of the electrical connection wire to the opening can be easily performed. Also, since the second communication port and the opening can be separated as far as possible, the internal space can be made smaller than the second communication port.
This makes it easier to prevent interference between the game ball rolling into the communication port and the electrical connection wire.

<Concept of the invention using the rotation unit 700 as an example>
A gaming machine G1 is provided with a first member and a second member which are formed to be displaceable, and the first member is formed to be displaceable between a covering position which invisibly covers at least a portion of the second member, and a retracted position which reduces the area which invisibly covers the second member compared to when the first member is in the covering position, characterized in that the first member is formed to be able to restrict the displacement of the second member when displaced to the retracted position.

Here, a gaming machine is known that includes a first member and a second member that are displaceable, and the first member is formed to be displaceable between a covering position where the first member covers at least a part of the second member so as to be invisible, and a retracted position where the area of the second member that is invisibly covered is reduced compared to the state where the first member is disposed in the covering position (for example, JP 2015-029849 A).
By displacing the first member to a retracted position from a state in which the member is placed in a covered position and the second member is not visible to the player, it is possible to create an effect in which the second member is exposed and visible to the player.

However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, since the second member is formed to be displaceable, when the first member is displaced to the retracted position and the second member is exposed, there is a risk that the second member may be displaced. Therefore, there is a problem that the player cannot visually recognize the second member in an appropriate state, and the presentation effect is reduced.

In contrast, according to the gaming machine G1, when the first member is displaced to the retracted position,
Since the second member is formed to be capable of restricting the displacement, the second member can be visually recognized by the player in an appropriate state, and the presentation effect can be ensured. That is, when performing a presentation in which the first member is displaced to the retracted position and the second member is exposed, the displacement of the first member to the retracted position, which is unavoidable for the presentation, is utilized as a means for restricting the displacement of the second member. Therefore, there is no need to provide or control a separate mechanism for restricting the displacement of the second member, and the structure can be simplified accordingly.

In the gaming machine G1, the second member is formed to be rotatable, and the position of its center of gravity is eccentric from the center of rotation.

According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine G1, the second member is formed to be rotatable and the center of gravity is eccentric from the center of rotation, so that the degree of freedom in designing the second member can be increased. That is, the second member does not need to be shaped so that the center of gravity is located at the center of rotation, and for example, a shape asymmetrical with respect to the axis of rotation can be adopted, so that the presentation effect of the second member can be enhanced. On the other hand, if the center of gravity of the second member is eccentric in this way, there is a risk that the second member will rotate (spin) around the center of rotation by its own weight. Therefore, the configuration in which the first member displaced to the retracted position is formed so as to be able to regulate the displacement of the second member is particularly effective, and this allows the player to view the second member in an appropriate state, ensuring the presentation effect.

In the gaming machine G1 or G2, a displacement member is provided displaceably on the second member,
The displacement member is formed so as to be displaceable at least when the first member is displaced to the retracted position.

According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines G1 or G2, a displaceable member is provided on the second member, and the displaceable member is formed to be displaceable at least when the first member is displaced to the retracted position, so that when performing a performance in which the first member is displaced to the retracted position and the second member is exposed, the displaceable member can be further displaced to enhance the performance effect. On the other hand, if the displaceable member is displaced when the second member is exposed, the center of gravity position may move with the displacement, and the second member may rotate (spin). Therefore, the configuration in which the first member displaced to the retracted position is formed to be capable of restricting the displacement of the second member is particularly effective, and this allows the player to view the second member in an appropriate state, ensuring the performance effect.

In the gaming machine G3, the second member is arranged so that its outer peripheral surface is visible to the player, and the displacement member has one side rotatably supported on the outer peripheral surface of the second member, and the other side opposite to the one side is formed so that it can extend into the gaming area.

According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G3, the second member is disposed so that its outer circumferential surface is visible to the player, and one side of the displacement member is rotatably supported on the outer circumferential surface of the second member,
Since the other side opposite to the one side is formed so as to be able to overhang into the play area, the game balls flowing down the play area can be received on the upper surface of the displacement member. Therefore, for example, when an inlet for game balls is formed in the second member, the game balls flowing down the play area can be easily made to flow into the inlet by using the displacement member. In this case, if the game balls flowing down the play area are received by the displacement member, there is a risk that the second member will rotate due to the load acting at that time or the weight of the game balls rolling on the upper surface of the displacement member. Therefore, a configuration in which the first member displaced to the retracted position is formed so as to be able to regulate the displacement of the second member is particularly effective, and this makes it easier to maintain the state in which the displacement member overhangs a predetermined position in the play area.

In the gaming machine G4, the first member is positioned in the playing area while facing the outer peripheral surface of the second member in the covering position, and is positioned outside the playing area in the retracted position.

According to the gaming machine G5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G4, in the covered position, the first member is disposed in the playing area facing the outer peripheral surface of the second member, so that it is possible to prevent the game balls flowing down the playing area from colliding with the second member and rotating the second member. In particular, when the rotation position of the second member is a rotation position that faces the displacement member toward the playing area, it is possible to prevent the game balls flowing down the playing area from colliding with the displacement member and opening (projecting) the displacement member.

In addition, since the first member is disposed outside the play area in the retracted position, a space can be secured for the displacement member to extend into the play area by displacing the first member to the retracted position, and therefore the outer peripheral surface of the second member can be brought closer to the play area (player side), making it easier for the player to see the displacement member.

In the gaming machine G5, the first member is formed to be rotatable around a rotation axis that is approximately parallel to the rotation axis of the second member, and is formed into a plate shape that is curved along the outer peripheral surface of the second member.

According to the gaming machine G6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G5, the first member is formed to be rotatable around a rotation axis substantially parallel to the rotation axis of the second member, and is formed in a plate shape curved along the outer circumferential surface of the second member, so that the space required for displacement between the covering position and the retracted position can be reduced, and therefore, the space for arranging other members can be secured.
In addition, by forming the first member in a curved shape in this manner, the game balls flowing down the game area,
This prevents the water from remaining on the first member arranged in the covering position, allowing the water to flow down smoothly.

A gaming machine G7 is any one of gaming machines G3 to G6, characterized in that it is provided with a driving means for generating a driving force, and a transmission means for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the second member and the displacement member.

Here, in order to form the second member rotatably and to displaceably dispose the displacement member on the second member, a drive means is required for each of the second member and the displacement member, which increases the production cost.
Since the weight of the member increases, it becomes difficult to smoothly start or stop the rotation of the second member.

In contrast, the gaming machine G7 has the same effects as any of the gaming machines G3 to G6, and is provided with a driving means for generating a driving force and a transmission means for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the second member and the displacement member, so that a single driving means can be used for both rotating the second member and displacing the displacement member. This allows for a reduction in product costs. In addition, since there is no need to mount a driving means for displacing the displacement member on the second member, the weight of the second member can be reduced, and the rotation of the second member can be started or stopped smoothly.

A gaming machine G8 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine G7, it is provided with a connecting means for connecting the first member and the displacement member and linking the displacement of the first member to the displacement of the displacement member.

According to gaming machine G8, in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machine G7, a connecting means is provided for connecting the first member and the displacement member and linking the displacement of the first member to the displacement of the displacement member, so that the driving means for displacing the displacement member can also be used as the driving means for displacing the first displacement member.
In this case, when the displacement member and the first member are displaced by the driving forces of separate driving means,
If a control failure occurs, there is a risk of interference between the displacement member and the first member. However, by mechanically connecting the displacement member and the first member to synchronize their displacement, interference between the displacement member and the first member can be reliably prevented.

<Concept of the invention using the rotation unit 700 as an example>
A gaming machine H1 comprising a driving means for generating a driving force, a displacement member displaced by the driving force of the driving means, and a transmission means for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the displacement member, wherein the transmission means comprises a first member, a second member located closer to the displacement member than the first member in a transmission path of the driving force, and an engaging member disposed between the first member and the second member, and when the first member is displaced in one direction relative to the second member, the engaging member engages with the first member and the second member to transmit the driving force, and in a predetermined section of the displacement section of the displacement member, the second member is displaced ahead of the first member in the one direction.

Here, a gaming machine is known that includes a driving means for generating a driving force, a displacement member displaced by the driving force of the driving means, and a transmission means for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the displacement member (for example, JP 2015-029849 A). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, the transmission state of the driving force from the driving means to the displacement member by the transmission means is always constant, so when the driving means is driven at a constant driving speed, the displacement member is also displaced at a constant displacement speed, and it is not possible to give a change to the displacement mode of the displacement member. Therefore, there was a problem that the performance effect of the performance accompanying the displacement of the displacement member was insufficient.

Although the displacement speed of the displacement member can be changed by increasing or decreasing the drive speed of the drive means, in order to make the displacement speed in a specific section of the displacement section of the displacement member different from the displacement speed in other sections, a sensor device that detects the position of the displacement member is required, and the output of the drive means needs to be increased or decreased according to the detection result of the sensor device, which increases the production cost and the control cost, and also complicates the structure and control, resulting in a decrease in reliability.

In contrast, according to the gaming machine H1, the transmission means includes a first member, a second member located closer to the displacement member than the first member in the transmission path of the driving force, and an engagement member disposed between the first member and the second member, and when the first member is displaced in one direction relative to the second member, the engagement member engages with the first member and the second member, transmitting the driving force and cutting off the transmission of the driving force, and in a predetermined section of the displacement section of the displacement member, the second member is displaced in one direction ahead of the first member, so that the displacement speed of the displacement member in the predetermined section can be made faster than the displacement speed of the displacement member in other sections regardless of the driving state of the drive means. Thus, by imparting a change to the displacement mode of the displacement member, the presentation effect of the presentation accompanying the displacement of the displacement member can be enhanced.

In addition, according to the gaming machine H1, the second member can be caused to precede the first member in one direction regardless of the driving state of the driving means. Therefore, for example, the driving means can be driven at a constant driving speed in the entire displacement section of the displacement member, and in the middle of the displacement section of the displacement member (i.e.,
There is no need to increase or decrease the drive speed of the drive means depending on whether the section is a specified section or another section. As a result, control can be simplified, control costs can be reduced, and operational reliability can be improved. Alternatively, the drive means can be stopped in a specified section, in which case energy consumption can be reduced.

In addition, according to the gaming machine H1, in a driving state in a direction in which the first member is displaced in the other direction relative to the second member, the engagement of the engagement member is released and the transmission of the driving force is interrupted, so that the displacement member can be brought into a stopped state (non-driven state), and the driving force of the driving means in such a driving state is
The displacement member and the other member can be displaced by switching the driving direction of the driving means.

The transmission means may be formed such that, when the first member is displaced in the other direction relative to the second member, the engagement of the engagement member is released and the transmission of the driving force is interrupted.

In the gaming machine H1, the displacement member is formed to be rotatable and its center of gravity is eccentric from the center of rotation, and in the specified section, the weight of the displacement member is formed to act in a direction to displace the second member in the one direction.

According to the gaming machine H2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine H1, the displacement member is formed to be rotatable, and the position of its center of gravity is offset from the center of rotation, and in a predetermined section, the weight of the displacement member is formed to be able to act in a direction to displace the second member in one direction, so that the weight of the displacement member can be used to displace the second member in one direction ahead of the first member. That is, the displacement speed of the displacement member in a predetermined section can be made faster than the displacement speed of the displacement member in other sections. As a result, the displacement mode of the displacement member can be changed, and the presentation effect of the presentation accompanying the displacement of the displacement member can be enhanced.

For example, in the case where the displacement member is formed so as to be capable of repeated 360-degree rotation about its rotation axis, it is possible to repeatedly perform a rotation mode in which the displacement speed (rotation speed) of the displacement member in a specified section is made faster than the displacement speed (rotation speed) of the displacement member in other sections, i.e., a rotation mode in which the rotation speed is increased or decreased during one rotation.

In gaming machine H2, the transmission means comprises a crank member having a main body portion that is rotationally driven by the second member, a pin portion that protrudes from the main body portion and is positioned eccentrically from the center of rotation of the main body portion, and an arm member having a sliding groove formed on one end thereof through which the pin portion of the crank member is slidably inserted and an intermediate portion of which is rotatably supported, and the other end of the arm member is connected to the displacement member.

According to the gaming machine H3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine H2, the transmission means includes a crank member having a main body portion rotated by the second member, a pin portion protruding from the main body portion and positioned eccentrically from the rotation center of the main body portion, and an arm member having a sliding groove formed at one end thereof through which the pin portion of the crank member is slidably inserted and a middle portion rotatably supported, so that the crank member is rotated by the second member and the pin member is slid along the sliding groove, thereby causing the other end of the arm member to reciprocate. In this case, since the other end of the arm member is connected to the displacement member, the displacement member can be caused to reciprocate between the first position and the second position in accordance with the reciprocating movement of the other end of the arm member. That is,
The displacement direction of the displacement member can be switched without switching the drive direction of the drive means.

In the gaming machine H3, the displacement member moves in accordance with the reciprocating motion of the other end of the arm member.
Gaming machine H4, characterized in that the direction in which the weight of the displacement member acts on the second member is changed from a direction displacing the second member in the other direction to a direction displacing the second member in the one direction while the displacement member reciprocates between a first position and a second position, and during each of the steps of being displaced from the first position to the second position and from the second position to the first position.

According to the gaming machine H4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine H3, the displacement member is reciprocated between the first position and the second position in accordance with the reciprocating movement of the other end side of the arm member, and the displacement member is moved from the first position to the second position.
While the displacement member is displaced to the first position and while the displacement member is displaced from the second position to the first position, the direction in which the weight of the displacement member acts on the second member is changed from a direction that displaces the second member in the other direction to a direction that displaces the second member in one direction, so that when the displacement member reciprocates, the displacement speed of the displacement member can be increased from the middle of the displacement in either direction. As a result, the displacement mode of the displacement member can be changed, and the presentation effect of the presentation accompanying the displacement of the displacement member can be enhanced.

For example, when the displacement member is caused to reciprocate between an extended position (first position) where it is extended so as to be visible to a player, and a retracted position (second position) where it is retracted from the extended position, when the displacement member is caused to extend from the retracted position to the extended position, it can be displaced at a constant displacement speed up to a certain point, and then the displacement speed of the displacement member can be increased from that point on, allowing the displacement member to be extended with force to the extended position, and when the displacement member is caused to retract from the extended position to the extended position, it can be displaced at a constant displacement speed up to a certain point, and then the displacement speed of the displacement member can be increased from that point on, allowing the displacement member to be instantly retracted to the retracted position.

Gaming machine H5 is characterized in that, in gaming machine H1, the displacement member is formed to be capable of sliding displacement, and in the specified section, it is inclined downwardly in the direction of the sliding displacement, so that the weight of the displacement member can act in a direction to displace the second member in the one direction.

According to the gaming machine H5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine H1, the displacement member is formed to be capable of sliding displacement, and in a predetermined section, the displacement member is inclined downward toward the direction of sliding displacement, so that the weight of the displacement member can act in a direction to displace the second member in one direction, and the weight of the displacement member can be used to displace the second member in one direction ahead of the first member. That is, the displacement speed of the displacement member in a predetermined section can be made faster than the displacement speed of the displacement member in other sections. As a result, the displacement mode of the displacement member can be changed, and the presentation effect of the presentation accompanying the displacement of the displacement member can be enhanced.

Gaming machine H6 is any one of gaming machines H2 to H5, characterized in that the displacement member is formed so as to be able to hold a gaming ball at least in the specified section.

According to the gaming machine H6, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines H2 to H5, the displacement member is formed to be able to hold a game ball at least in a predetermined section, so that when the displacement member holds a game ball, the weight of the displacement member as a whole can be increased by the weight of the game ball, and the displacement speed of the displacement member in the predetermined section can be made faster. Also, the weight of the displacement member as a whole can be made different between when the displacement member holds a game ball and when the displacement member does not hold a game ball, or according to the number of game balls held. This makes it possible to change the displacement speed of the displacement member in each case. As a result, the displacement mode of the displacement member can be changed, and the presentation effect of the presentation accompanying the displacement of the displacement member can be enhanced.

Gaming machine H7 is characterized in that, in any of gaming machines H2 to H6, the displacement member is provided with a receiving portion that receives a gaming ball flowing down the gaming area, and at least in the specified section, the force acting from the gaming ball to the displacement member when the receiving portion receives the gaming ball can act in a direction to displace the second member in the one direction.

According to the gaming machine H7, in any of the gaming machines H2 to H6, the displacement member has a receiving portion that receives a game ball flowing down the game area, and is formed so that, at least in a predetermined section, the force acting from the game ball to the displacement member when the receiving portion receives the game ball can act in a direction that displaces the second member in one direction, so that when the receiving portion receives the game ball, the kinetic energy of the game ball can be used to make the displacement speed of the displacement member in the predetermined section faster. In addition, the force acting on the displacement member can be made different depending on whether the receiving portion is receiving the game ball or not, or depending on the flow speed (magnitude of kinetic energy) of the game ball when receiving it. This makes it possible to change the displacement speed of the displacement member in each case. As a result, the displacement mode of the displacement member can be changed, and the presentation effect of the presentation accompanying the displacement of the displacement member can be enhanced.

In addition, the game balls flowing down the game area are not limited to game balls moving along the front of the game board in the direction of gravity, but also include game balls moving in a direction different from the direction of gravity. Examples of game balls moving in a direction different from the direction of gravity include game balls that collide with nails, tulips, or other accessories and move in a direction different from the direction of gravity, and game balls that roll on a stage and then fly out of the stage and move in a direction different from the direction of gravity.

Gaming machine H8 is characterized in that, in gaming machines H6 or H7, the transmission means comprises a gear train that forms part or all of the transmission path of the driving force, and a load gear that meshes with one of the gears in the gear train.

According to gaming machine H8, in addition to the effects of gaming machines H6 or H7, the transmission means includes a gear train that forms part or all of the transmission path of the driving force, and a load gear that meshes with one gear of the gear train. Therefore, when a game ball is held by the displacement member or received by the receiving portion in a specified section, the weight or kinetic energy of the game ball is utilized to displace the second member in one direction ahead of the first member (i.e., the displacement speed of the displacement member in the specified section is made faster than the displacement speed of the displacement member in other sections). On the other hand, when a game ball is not held by the displacement member or a game ball is not received by the receiving portion, the load (resistance) generated when the load gear is rotated is utilized to prevent the second member from being displaced in one direction ahead of the first member (i.e., the displacement speed of the displacement member in the specified section is made faster).

In other words, when a game ball is not held by the displacement member or when the receiving portion is not receiving a game ball, the displacement speed of the displacement member in a specified section is prevented from being faster than the displacement speed of the displacement member in other sections, and it is easy to create a configuration in which the displacement speed of the displacement member in a specified section is made faster than the displacement speed of the displacement member in other sections only when a game ball is held by the displacement member or when the receiving portion has received a game ball.

<Concept of the invention using rear case 300 as an example>
Gaming machine I1 is characterized in that it comprises a gaming board, a back member disposed on the back side of the gaming board, and a fixed member disposed on the back member, the gaming machine further comprising a displacement member disposed in the opposing space between the gaming board and the back member, the displacement member being operable from outside the opposing space between the gaming board and the back member on the back side of the gaming board, the fixed member having a protrusion that engages with the displacement member, the protrusion engaging with the displacement member so that the fixed member is disposed on the back member.

Conventionally, a gaming machine including a gaming board, a back member disposed on the back side of the gaming board, and a fixing member disposed on the back side of the back member has been known (see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2004-3360
According to this gaming machine, the fixing member is fastened to the rear member by a screw that is inserted from the front side of the rear member. This prevents the fixing member from being removed from the rear side of the gaming board.

However, in conventional gaming machines, the process of arranging the fixing member on the back member and the process of fastening the fixing member to the back member are performed from the rear side of the back member and the front side of the back member, respectively, in opposite directions.
There is a problem in that the number of work steps required to attach the fixing member to the rear member increases.

In contrast, the gaming machine I1 includes a displacement member (displacement member 310) that is disposed between the game board and the rear member and can be operated from the rear side of the game board and the outside of the gap between the game board and the rear member, and the fixed member includes a protrusion (engaged portion 322) that engages with the displacement member, and the protrusion engages with the displacement member to dispose the fixed member on the rear member, so that the fixed member can be disposed on the rear case by working in one direction from the rear side. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the process of going around to the front side or inverting the rear member after working from the rear side. As a result, the number of work steps for disposing the fixed member on the rear member can be reduced.

A gaming machine I2, which is characterized in that a first member is provided between the game board and the back member in opposition to the gaming machine I1, and the displacement member is provided on the back side of the first member.
.

Here, in recent gaming machines, the first member (
In the conventional gaming machines, the size of the first member is becoming larger. Therefore, in the conventional gaming machines described above, if the enlarged first member is disposed in front of the fixed member or in a position close to the fixed member, the first member gets in the way when fastening the fixed member from the front side of the back member. Therefore, it is difficult to fasten the fixed member to the back member with a screw that is inserted from the front side of the back member and to arrange the fixed member on the back member.

In contrast, according to the gaming machine I1, the first
Since the first member is disposed in the space between the game board and the rear member, the displacement member can be operated from outside the space between the game board and the rear member to engage the displacement member and the fixed member. Therefore, the fixed member can be disposed on the rear member without being obstructed by the first member disposed in the space between the game board and the rear member.

In addition, since the displacement member is disposed between the rear member and the first member, the engagement portion between the displacement member and the fixed member can be disposed between the rear member and the first member. This makes it possible to prevent access to the engagement portion between the displacement member and the fixed member. As a result, it is possible to prevent the engagement between the displacement member and the fixed member from being illegally released and tampering with the fixed member (e.g., replacement with an illegal fixed member).

Gaming machine I3, in which the displacement member in the gaming machine I1 or I2 is slidably displaced on a plane parallel to the opposing surface between the back member and the gaming board.

According to the gaming machine I3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines I1 and I2, the displacement member is slid and displaced on a plane parallel to the opposing surface between the back member and the game board, so that when the displacement member is displaced, the amount of displacement in the opposing direction between the back member and the game board can be set to 0. This makes it possible to secure a space for disposing the first member between the opposing surfaces of the displacement member and the game board. As a result,
The outer shape of the first member in the opposing direction between the back member and the game board can be enlarged, improving the freedom in designing the first member.

Gaming machine I4 is characterized in that, in any one of gaming machines I1 to I3, the rear member is formed in a box shape having a bottom wall portion facing the gaming board and a side wall portion erected on the gaming board side from the edge of the bottom wall portion, an opening is formed in either the bottom wall portion or the side wall portion, and the displacement member has an operator that is inserted into the opening and protrudes from the inside of the rear member to the outside.

According to the gaming machine I4, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines I1 to I3, the back member is formed in a box shape with a bottom wall portion facing the gaming board and a side wall portion standing on the gaming board side from an edge of the bottom wall portion, and an opening portion is formed in either the bottom wall portion or the side wall portion, and the displacement member is provided with an operator that passes through the opening portion and protrudes from the inside of the back member to the outside, so that the operator can be operated from the outside of the back member (outside the opposing space between the gaming board and the back member),
The displacement member can be displaced. Therefore, even if the first member is disposed inside the back member (between the game board and the back member), the displacement member can be displaced without being hindered by the first member.

Gaming machine I5 is characterized in that, in gaming machine I4, it is provided with a biasing means for biasing the displacement member in a direction to release the engagement with the fixed member when the engagement between the displacement member and the fixed member is released.

According to the gaming machine I5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine I4, a biasing means is provided for biasing the displacement member in a direction to release the engagement with the fixed member when the displacement member and the fixed member are disengaged, so that the displacement member can be displaced in a direction to release the engagement with the fixed member when the displacement member and the fixed member are forgotten to be engaged or when the engagement between the displacement member and the fixed member is incomplete. Therefore, the operator can determine whether the displacement member and the fixed member are correctly engaged by the position where the operator protruding outward from the back member is positioned. As a result, it is possible to prevent the displacement member and the fixed member from being forgotten to be engaged.

Examples of the biasing means include a form in which a spring, rubber, or the like is disposed between the displacement member and the back member to bias the displacement member in a direction to release the engagement with the fixed member, or a form in which the weight of the displacement member acts in a direction to release the engagement of the displacement member with the fixed member.

Gaming machine I6 is characterized in that, in gaming machines I4 or I5, it is provided with an outer frame formed into a frame-like shape capable of accommodating the gaming board and rear member, the inner shape of the outer frame is formed to be approximately the same as the outer shape of the gaming board and rear member when viewed from the front, and when the displacement member and the fixed member are in a disengaged state, the operator is positioned outside the opposing space from the gaming board to the rear member.

According to the gaming machine I6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines I4 and I5, an outer frame is provided that can accommodate the gaming board and the back member, and the inner shape of the outer frame is formed to be substantially the same as the outer shape of the gaming board and the back member when viewed from the front, and when the displacement member and the fixed member are not engaged,
Since the operator is disposed outside the opposing gap between the game board and the rear member, when the displacement member and the fixed member are disengaged, the operator can be abutted against the outer frame when the game board and the rear member are housed in the outer frame. This makes it possible to prevent the game board and the rear member from being housed in the outer frame. Therefore, when the fixed member is forgotten to be disposed on the rear member, or when the displacement member and the fixed member are forgotten to be engaged, the operator can be made aware of this omission (abnormality). As a result, it is possible to prevent the game board from being housed in the outer frame when the fixed member is forgotten to be disposed on the rear member, or when the displacement member and the fixed member are forgotten to be engaged.

Gaming machine I7 is any one of gaming machines I4 to I6, further comprising a suppression means for suppressing the operation of the operator in a direction that releases the engagement between the displacement member and the fixed member.

According to gaming machine I7, in addition to the effects of any of gaming machines I4 to I6, a suppression means is provided for suppressing the operation of the operator in a direction that would release the engagement between the displacement member and the fixed member, so that the operator can be prevented from being operated to displace the displacement member in a direction that would release the engagement between the displacement member and the fixed member. As a result, the operator can be used to suppress the disengagement between the displacement member and the fixed member.

Examples of restraint means for preventing the operator from being operated in the direction of releasing the engagement between the displacement member and the fixed member include a configuration in which the operator is journaled so as to be able to rotate freely in the direction of releasing the engagement, a configuration in which the protruding tip of the operator is formed on an inclined surface that protrudes in the direction of releasing the engagement between the displacement member and the fixed member, and a configuration in which the operator is disposed between the displacement member and the fixed member.

In any one of the gaming machines I1 to I7, the displacement member includes an elastic piece that is elastically deformable,
a first protrusion protruding from the elastic piece, the fixed member having a accommodating portion that opens into the displacement area of the displacement member and is recessed in the displacement direction of the displacement member, the accommodating portion having a second protrusion protruding into the displacement area of the first protrusion, the second protrusion abutting against the first protrusion when the displacement member is displaced in one direction, thereby displacing the elastic piece, and abutting against the first member when the displacement member is displaced in the other direction, thereby enabling engagement between the displacement member and the fixed member.

According to the gaming machine I8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines I1 to I7, the displacement member includes an elastically deformable elastic piece and a first protrusion protruding from the elastic piece, the fixed member includes a housing portion that opens in the displacement area of the displacement member and is recessed in the displacement direction of the displacement member, and the housing portion includes a second protrusion protruding from the displacement area of the first protrusion, and the second protrusion abuts against the first protrusion when the displacement member is displaced in one direction to displace the elastic piece, and abuts against the first member when the displacement member is displaced in the other direction to engage the displacement member and the fixed member, so that the second protrusion allows the displacement of the displacement member in one direction and restricts the displacement of the displacement member in the other direction. This restricts the displacement of the displacement member in both the direction of engagement with the fixed member and the direction of detachment.

In gaming machine I8, the storage portion is set to a size capable of storing the elastic piece, and when the first protrusion and the second protrusion are engaged, the elastic piece is stored in the storage portion.

According to the gaming machine I9, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine I8, the storage section is set to a size capable of storing the elastic piece, and when the first protrusion and the second protrusion are engaged, the elastic piece is stored in the storage section, so that when the displacement member and the fixed member are engaged, it is possible to make it difficult to operate the elastic piece from outside the storage section. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the elastic piece from being operated from outside the storage section and elastically deformed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the engagement between the displacement member and the fixed member from being illegally released. In this case, it is possible to remove the fixed member from the back member by cutting the displacement member (the base end portion of the stored portion) located outside the storage section.

In gaming machine I10, the displacement member has a plurality of elastic pieces that can be accommodated in the accommodation portion, and the accommodation portion is set to a size that can accommodate a plurality of the elastic pieces.

According to the gaming machine I10, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine I9, the displacement member has a plurality of elastic pieces that can be accommodated in the accommodation section, and the accommodation section is set to a space large enough to accommodate a plurality of elastic pieces, so that when the displacement member (the base end portion of the elastic piece) located outside the accommodation section is cut and the fixed member is removed from the back member, the cut displacement member (elastic piece) can be left inside the accommodation section, and the uncut displacement member (elastic piece) in this state can be accommodated inside the accommodation section. Therefore, since the cut displacement member (elastic piece) can be accommodated and left inside the accommodation section, by comparing the number of displacement members accommodated in the accommodation section and the number of cut elastic pieces of the displacement member, when the fixed member is illegally removed and replaced with an illegal fixed member, the difference in the number allows the operator to sense that the gaming machine has been rigged.

Gaming machine I11 is characterized in that, in any of gaming machines I1 to I10, the first member is provided with a regulating means for regulating displacement of the displacement member in a direction disengaging from the fixed member when the displacement member engages with the fixed member.

According to the gaming machine I11, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines I1 to I10, a restricting means is provided for restricting the displacement of the displacement member in a direction to release the engagement with the fixed member when the displacement member engages with the fixed member, so that the displacement of the displacement member can be restricted when a force acts in a direction to release the engagement between the displacement member and the fixed member due to fraud. Therefore, when a force acts in a direction to release the engagement between the displacement member and the fixed member due to fraud, it is possible to suppress the force from concentrating on the engagement portion between the displacement member and the fixed member, so that the displacement member or the fixed member can be prevented from being damaged by a force input due to fraud.

In addition, since the first member is provided with the restricting means, when the fixing member is to be removed from the rear member,
The restriction on the displacement of the displacement member by the restricting means can be released by removing the first member from the rear member. In this case, the engagement portion between the displacement member and the fixed member can be accessed by removing the first member, so that the work efficiency when removing the fixed member from the rear member can be improved.

The restricting means for restricting the displacement of the displacement member may, for example, be a projection disposed inside the engagement recess for restricting elastic deformation of the displacement member, or a projection for engaging with the displacement member.

<Concept of the invention using the general prize-winning unit 150 as an example>
A base member having a play area on a front side thereof, and a first member forming a decoration on the front side of the base member.
Gaming machine J1 is equipped with a decorative means and a second decorative means which forms a decoration continuous with the decoration of the first decorative means when viewed from the front, characterized in that the first decorative means and the second decorative means are arranged in adjacent positions in the front-to-back direction when viewed from the front.

Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine that includes a base member having a play area on the front side, a first decoration means that is disposed on the front side of the base member and forms a decoration on the front side, a first member that is disposed on the front side of the first decoration means, and a second decoration means that is disposed on the front side of the first member and forms a decoration that is continuous with the decoration of the first decoration means in a front view (for example, see JP 2007 A2336644A).
According to this gaming machine, the decorations of the first decoration means and the second decoration means are visually recognized by the player as a single decoration, so that the design of the base member can be ensured.

However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the first decorative means is disposed in front of the first member, and therefore the second decorative means is disposed at a position separated from the first decorative means by the thickness of the first member. Therefore, depending on the position (the direction of the line of sight) from which the player views the base member, the decoration of the first decorative means and the decoration of the second decorative means are viewed as being shifted by the thickness of the first member, which causes a problem that the design of the base member is deteriorated.

In contrast, according to the gaming machine J1, the first and second decorative means are disposed adjacent to each other in the front-rear direction when viewed from the front, so that the distance between the first and second decorative means can be reduced. This makes it possible to prevent the decoration of the first and second decorative means from being seen out of alignment when the first and second decorative means are viewed from an angle inclined relative to the front view of the first or second decorative means. This makes it easier for the player to view the decoration of the first and second decorative means together as one decoration, improving the design of the base member.

Furthermore, the first decorative means may be anything that forms a decoration, such as a plate-shaped member having a sticker member with a decoration printed on it attached to the front surface of the base member, or a means for printing a decoration on the front surface of the base member.

In addition, when the second decorative means is attached (adhered) to the front surface of the first decorative means, the worker can attach (adhere) the second decorative means while visually checking the decoration of the first decorative means. Therefore, the worker can easily attach the second decorative means to the first decorative means at a position where the decoration of the first decorative means and the decoration of the second decorative means are continuous. Therefore, the workability of the worker who attaches the second decorative means to the first decorative means can be improved.

A gaming machine J2 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine J1, a front member is formed from a light-transmitting material, formed with an outer shape larger than the outer shape of the second decorative means when viewed from the front, and arranged in front of the second decorative means, the front member has a recess formed on the surface facing the second decorative means, the recessed dimension of the recess is set to a value larger than the thickness dimension of the second decorative means.

According to gaming machine J2, in addition to the effects of gaming machine J1, a front member is provided that is made of a light-transmitting material and has an outer shape larger than the outer shape of the second decorative means when viewed from the front, and is disposed in front of the second decorative means, and the front member has a recess that is recessed in a shape larger than the outer shape of the second decorative means on the surface facing the second decorative means, and the recess dimensions are set to a value larger than the thickness dimension of the second decorative means, so that the front member can be disposed on the base member with the second decorative means housed in the recess, thereby preventing the second decorative means from falling out from between the base member and the front member.

In addition, the recessed dimension of the recess is set to a value larger than the thickness dimension of the second decorative means,
It is possible to prevent a gap from being formed between the front member and the first decorative means, thereby preventing dust or dirt from being trapped between the front member and the first decorative means, which makes it difficult to see the decoration of the first decorative means.

A gaming machine J3 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine J2, the inner surface of the recess is formed along the outer shape of the second decorative means, and the second decorative means is adhered and arranged on the recessed bottom surface of the recess.

According to the gaming machine J3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine J2, the inner surface of the recess is formed along the outer shape of the second decorative means, and the second decorative means is attached to the recessed bottom surface of the recess,
By disposing the second decorative means along the recess of the front member, the second decorative means can be positioned relative to the front member. This makes it possible to prevent the second decorative means from being caught between the edge of the front member and the facing first decorative means when the front member is disposed in front of the first decorative means. As a result, it is possible to prevent a gap from being formed between the first decorative means and the front member, and to prevent dust or dirt from being caught between the front member and the first decorative means, making it difficult to see the decoration of the first decorative means.

In gaming machine J3, the front member has a protrusion that protrudes toward the base member from the surface facing the base member, and the base member has an opening that opens at a position corresponding to the protrusion, and the front member is positioned relative to the base member by inserting the protrusion into the opening.

According to gaming machine J4, in addition to the effects of gaming machine J3, the front member has a protrusion that protrudes toward the base member from the surface facing the base member, and the base member has an opening that opens at a position corresponding to the protrusion, and the front member is positioned relative to the base member by inserting the protrusion into the opening, so that the position of the front member relative to the first decorative means can be prevented from shifting. Also, the second decorative means is positioned relative to the front member by a recess in the front member. Therefore,
By positioning the front member relative to the first decorative means, it is possible to prevent the first decorative means and the second decorative means from being misaligned, which makes it easier for a player to visually recognize the decoration of the first decorative means and the decoration of the second decorative means as a single decoration.

Gaming machine J5 is characterized in that, in gaming machine J4, the protrusion is formed on the concave bottom surface of the recess, and a through hole is formed in the second decorative means at a position corresponding to the protrusion, and the protrusion is inserted into the through hole.

According to gaming machine J5, in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machine J4, a protrusion is formed on the concave bottom surface of the recess, and a through hole is formed in the second decorative means at a position corresponding to the protrusion, and the protrusion is inserted into the through hole, thereby simplifying the positioning of the second decorative means relative to the front member.
That is, if the second decorative means is simply disposed inside the recess of the front member, the edge of the second decorative means must be disposed along the recess, whereas if a through hole through which the protrusion is inserted is formed in the second decorative means, the position of the second decorative means relative to the front member can be determined simply by inserting the protrusion into the through hole. As a result, the positioning of the second decorative means relative to the front member can be simplified.

In addition, since the projection for positioning the front member with respect to the first decorative means is inserted into the through hole of the second decorative means, the second decorative means and the first decorative means can be positioned with the same part (projection), improving the positioning accuracy of the decorative member and the first decorative means. As a result, the decoration of the first decorative means and the decoration of the second decorative means can be easily visually recognized by the player as one decoration.

In any one of the gaming machines J2 to J5, the front member has an inclined portion that inclines toward the first decorative means toward the outer edge in a front view, and the second decorative means is provided on the rear side of the inclined portion.
A gaming machine J6 characterized in that the edges of decorative means are provided.

Here, in order to make it easier for a player to see both the decorations of the first and second decorative means as a single decoration, it is necessary to suppress the misalignment of the two decorations. However, when the first and second decorative means are overlapped in the front-to-rear direction, the positions of the two decorations are misaligned in the front-to-rear direction by the thickness of the second decorative means, and there is a problem in that when the first and second decorative means are viewed from an angle inclined with respect to the front view of the first or second decorative means, the misalignment in the front-to-rear direction may be recognized.

In contrast, according to gaming machine J6, in addition to the effects achieved by any of gaming machines J2 to J5, the front member has an inclined portion that slopes toward the first decorative means as it approaches the outer edge when viewed from the front, and the edge of the second decorative means is arranged on the back side of the inclined portion, so that the refraction of light by the inclined portion of the front member makes it difficult for the player to notice the misalignment of the decoration caused by the different fore-and-aft arrangement of the second decorative means and the first decorative means.

In more detail, when the inclination angle of the light passing through the front member and emitted from the inclined portion is smaller than the inclination angle of the inclination of the inclined portion with respect to the front face of the base member, the inclination angle of the light emission direction from the inclined portion with respect to the front face of the base member is smaller than the inclination angle of the light passing through the front face of the base member. Therefore, the light passing direction seen by a player viewing the connection part between the first decorative means and the second decorative means from a direction at a smaller intersection angle with the front face of the base member than the inclination angle of the inclination of the inclined portion with respect to the front face of the base member can be made closer to the overlapping direction of the first decorative means and the second decorative means. As a result, when a player views the first decorative means and the second decorative means, it is difficult for the player to recognize the positional deviation between the front and rear.

In gaming machine J6, the second decorative means has an adhesive surface that is adhered to the front member and a non-adhesive surface that is not adhered to the front member, and the non-adhesive surface is provided at a position where the inclined portion and the second decorative means are at least opposed to each other.

Here, if a player views the connecting portion of the decorations between the first decorative means and the second decorative means from a direction perpendicular to the inclination of the inclined portion, the player may become aware of a misalignment of the decorations in the fore-and-aft direction between the first decorative means and the second decorative means.

In contrast, according to the gaming machine J7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine J6, the second decoration means is as follows:
The front member has an adhesive surface that is adhered to the front member, and a non-adhesive surface that is not adhered to the front member.
Since the decorative means has a non-adhesive surface at least at a position where the decorative means faces the front member (inclined portion), a gap is formed between the second decorative means and the front member (inclined portion) at the non-adhesive surface, and light passing through the non-adhesive surface of the front member can be totally reflected. This makes it possible to prevent the player from seeing the decoration of the end of the second decorative means when the player views the second decorative means through the inclined portion from a direction perpendicular to the inclination of the inclined portion. As a result, when the player views the first decorative means and the second decorative means through the inclined portion from a direction perpendicular to the inclination of the inclined portion, the decoration of the second decorative means is made difficult to see, thereby preventing the player from recognizing the positional deviation of the decoration of the first decorative means and the second decorative means in the front-rear direction.

Gaming machine J8 is characterized in that, in gaming machine J6 or J7, the inclined portion is formed in an arc shape in which the outer edge of a cross section perpendicular to the extension direction of the outer edge of the front member when viewed from the front is curved convexly toward the outer edge of the front member, and the end of the second decorative means is arranged closer to the center of the front member when viewed from the front than the approximate midpoint of the straight line connecting the ends of the inclined portions.

According to gaming machine J8, in addition to the effects of gaming machines J6 or J7, the inclined portion is formed in an arc shape in which the outer edge of the cross section perpendicular to the extension direction of the outer edge of the front member in a front view is curved convexly toward the outer edge of the front member, and the end of the second decorative means is disposed closer to the center of the front member in a front view than the approximate midpoint of the straight line connecting the ends of the inclined portion, so that when the first decorative means and the second decorative means are viewed from an angle inclined with respect to the front view of the first decorative means or the second decorative means, the refraction of light due to the curvature of the inclined portion can bring the direction of light passing through the center of the front member closer to the direction in which the first decorative means and the second decorative means overlap.
Since the end of the decorative means is disposed, it is possible to prevent a player from noticing a positional deviation between the first decorative means and the second decorative means in the front-rear direction.
This makes it easier for the player to visually recognize the decoration of the decorative means as one decoration.

Gaming machine J9 is characterized in that, in any of gaming machines J2 to J8, the inner surface of the recess is formed with a second inclined portion that slopes outward in a front view toward the first decorative means, and the inclination angle of the second inclined portion with respect to the front surface of the base member is set to be smaller than the inclination angle of the inclined portion with respect to the front surface of the base member.

According to the gaming machine J9, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines J2 to J8, the inner surface of the recessed portion is
A second inclined portion is formed that inclines outward in front view toward the decorative means, and the inclination angle of the second inclined portion with respect to the front surface of the base member is set smaller than the inclination angle of the inclined portion with respect to the front surface of the base member, so that the position of the decoration (virtual image) of the first decorative means viewed through the inclined portion and the second inclined portion can be made closer to the position of the decoration (real image) of the first decorative means viewed without passing through the inclined portion and the second inclined portion. As a result, when the first decorative means is viewed through the front member, it is possible to prevent the decoration of the first decorative means from becoming difficult to view due to refraction of light through the front member.

<Concept of the invention using the special prize device 550 as an example>
A gaming machine K1 comprising a gaming board having a game area on the front side, and a path unit arranged on the gaming board and having a path for guiding a game ball flowing down the game area, the path unit comprising a first path for sending the game ball to one side in a horizontal direction with respect to the gaming board in a front view, a second path for sending the game ball sent from the first path to the other side in the horizontal direction opposite to the guiding direction of the first path, and a third path connecting one side of the first path and the second path, the third path comprising a guide means for sending the game ball to at least one of the front side or rear side of the gaming board, on at least one inner wall of the front side or rear side of the gaming board.

Conventionally, a gaming machine is known that includes a gaming board having a gaming area on the front side and a path unit that is arranged on the gaming board and has a path for guiding a gaming ball flowing down the gaming area (for example, JP 2015-131046 A). According to this gaming machine, the gaming ball that has flowed into the guide path formed in the path unit is guided (rolled) along the path of the guide path, so that the rolling (flowing) of the gaming ball can be made interesting.

However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, in order to ensure a predetermined throwing distance for the gaming ball inside the path unit, when a first path that throws the gaming ball to one side of the gaming board, a second path that throws the gaming ball from the first path to the other side of the gaming board, and a third path that connects one side of the first path and the second path are formed, the speed of the gaming ball rolling on the first path is maximized at the connecting portion with the third path (the downstream end of the first path), so the gaming ball collides with the inner wall of the third path where the throwing direction is changed, and is likely to bounce off.
There was a risk that the game ball that collided with the inner wall of the third path would return to the first path, or would sway (vibrate) inside the third path in the ball throwing direction of the first path (horizontal direction when viewed from the front).
Since the game ball sent from the first path to the third path sways on the third path, the player's line of sight cannot follow the game ball sent to the third path in a fixed direction, and there has been a problem that the player has difficulty visually recognizing the game ball sent to the third path.

In this case, by lengthening the third path, the throwing direction of the game ball sent from the first path can be smoothly switched to the rolling direction of the second path, preventing the game ball from swinging as it passes through the third path. However, since the third path is formed to be long, the size of the entire path unit increases accordingly, making it impossible to secure space on the game board to arrange the path unit.

In contrast, according to the gaming machine K1, the path unit has a first path for sending the gaming ball to one side in the horizontal direction with respect to the gaming board in a front view, and a first path for sending the gaming ball sent from the first path to the first path.
a second path for throwing the ball to the other side in the horizontal direction opposite to the guide direction of the path;
and a third path connecting one side of the paths, and the third path is provided with a guide means for sending the game ball to at least one of the front side or rear side of the game board on at least one of the inner walls of the front side or rear side of the game board, so that the game ball passing through the third path can be moved to the front side or rear side (front-rear direction of the game board when viewed from the front). The game ball that has accelerated by rolling on the first path due to the movement of the game ball on the front side or rear side can be slowed down on the third path, and accordingly, the game ball that has collided with the inner wall of the third path can be prevented from returning to the first path or from swaying (shaking) on the third path in the sending direction of the first path (horizontal direction when viewed from the front). This allows the player's line of sight to follow the game ball sent from the third path in a fixed direction. As a result, it is possible to make the player easily visually recognize the game ball sent to the third path.

In addition, since the swinging (vibration) of the game ball in the horizontal direction (left and right direction when viewed from the front) relative to the game board when viewed from the front can be suppressed, it is not necessary to lengthen the third path connecting the first path and the second path to suppress the swinging of the game ball, and the path of the third path can be shortened. As a result, the path unit can be contained within a predetermined area relative to the game board, and the arrangement space of the path unit relative to the game board can be secured.

Examples of guiding means for guiding the game ball include a method of switching the rolling direction of the game ball by using unevenness, or a method of guiding the game ball to the second path by displacing a displacement member at the path switching portion.

In gaming machine K1, the guiding means is composed of a concave portion recessed into the inner wall of either the front side or the rear side, and a convex portion protruding into the other inner wall of either the front side or the rear side, and the concave portion and the convex portion are formed in positions facing each other.

According to the gaming machine K2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine K1, the guide means is composed of a recessed portion recessed into the inner wall of either the front side or the back side, and a protruding portion protruding into the inner wall of either the front side or the back side, and the recessed portion and the protruding portion are formed at positions facing each other, so that the ball can be partially displaced in the middle of the third path, and the ball sending speed of the ball can be slowed down. Therefore, the path of the third path can be shortened. As a result, the path unit can be easily accommodated within a predetermined area with respect to the game board, and the arrangement space of the path unit with respect to the game board can be secured.

A gaming machine K3, characterized in that in the gaming machine K2, the horizontal distance from the protruding tip of the convex portion to one of the inner walls of the third path is set to be smaller than the diameter of a gaming ball.

According to the gaming machine K3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine K2, the horizontal distance from the protruding tip of the convex portion to one of the inner walls of the third path is set to be smaller than the diameter of the gaming ball, so that the gaming ball flowing down the third path and sent to the guide means can be easily abutted against the convex portion of the guide means. This makes it easier to make the gaming ball flowing down the first path and sent to the third path abut against the convex portion, slowing down its rolling speed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the gaming ball that collides with the inner wall of the third path from returning to the first path, or from swinging in a direction different from the sending direction of the third path on the third path on the third path. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player to see the gaming ball passing through the third path.

Gaming machine K4 is characterized in that, in gaming machine K2 or K3, the convex portion is formed on the inner wall on the front side of the gaming board, and the concave portion is formed on the inner wall on the rear side of the gaming board.

According to the gaming machine K4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines K2 or K3, the convex portion is formed on the inner wall on the front side of the gaming board, and the concave portion is formed on the inner wall on the back side of the gaming board, so that the plate thickness on the front side of the path unit can be thinned. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the player to see the inside of the path unit through the front side of the path unit, and it is possible to make it easier for the player to see the game ball sent inside the path unit. In addition, since the concave portion is formed on the inner wall on the front side of the path unit, it is possible to suppress the guide means from protruding to the front side of the path unit, so that the path unit can be arranged on the player side, and it is possible to make it easier for the player to see the game ball passing through the path unit.

To explain in detail, when the recess is formed on the inner surface of the front side, the plate thickness of the front side of the path unit needs to be greater than the recess depth of the recess. Therefore, the greater the plate thickness of the front side of the path unit, the less visible the game ball sent on the back side of the path unit becomes. In addition, when the recess is formed on the inner surface of the front side, it is possible to curve the front side plate of the path unit along the shape of the recess, but in this case, a gap is required between the glass plate that forms the front of the game area and the recess, and the entire game board needs to be placed on the back side. Therefore, the more distant the path unit is from the player, the less visible the game ball sent on the path unit becomes.

Furthermore, when the recess is formed on the inner surface of the front side, it is possible to open the portion where the recess is formed. In this case, however, the rigidity of the path unit is reduced by the amount of the opening.
The path unit becomes easily damaged. Also, if an opening is formed in the front of the path unit, there is a risk that fraudulent activity may occur by passing through the opening.

In contrast, in gaming machine K4, a concave portion is formed on the back side of the path unit and a convex portion is formed on the front side of the path unit, thereby preventing the overall plate thickness of the front side of the path unit from becoming too thick, making it easier to see the game ball passing inside the path unit, and by preventing the path unit from partially protruding on the front side and arranging the path unit on the front side of the gaming machine, it is easier to see the game ball passing inside the path unit.

Gaming machine K5 is characterized in that, in gaming machine K3 or K4, the convex portion and the concave portion are formed in an arc-shaped cross section in the direction of gravity when viewed from the front, and the axes of the arcs are set coaxially.

According to the gaming machine K5, in the gaming machine K3 or K4, the cross section of the convex portion and the concave portion in the gravity direction is formed in an arc shape, and the axis of the arc is set coaxially, so that the distance between the convex portion and the concave portion can be made constant. This makes it possible to prevent the distance between the convex portion and the concave portion from being partially smaller than the diameter of the gaming ball, and to prevent the gaming ball passing through the inside of the path unit from being caught between the convex portion and the inner wall.

In the gaming machine K5, the upper end of the recess is formed at a position along an extension of the rolling trajectory of the center of the gaming ball rolling on the first path when viewed from the front.

According to the gaming machine K6, the upper end of the recess is formed at a position along an extension of the rolling path of the center of the gaming ball rolling on the first path in a front view, so that even if the rolling speed of the gaming ball rolling on the first path is fast, the center of the gaming ball sent from the first path to the third path can be prevented from being sent above the upper end of the recess. As a result, the gaming ball sent from the first path to the third path can be sent inside the recess.

Gaming machine K7 is characterized in that, in any one of gaming machines K2 to K6, the recess is formed at a position farther away from both horizontal sides of the third path in a front view than the radial dimension of the gaming ball.

According to the gaming machine K7, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines K2 to K6, the recess is formed at a position farther away from both horizontal sides of the third path in a front view than the radial dimension of the gaming ball, so that the gaming ball flowing down along the inner wall of the recess can be prevented from colliding with both horizontal sides of the path unit in a front view and swinging inside the recess. As a result, the gaming ball sent along the inside of the recess can be sent smoothly to the second path.

Game K8 is characterized in that, in any one of gaming machines K3 to K7, the concave portion is recessed in a cross-section in the ball throwing direction of the first path when viewed from the front, such that the cross-section in the ball throwing direction of the first path when viewed from the front is recessed in a cross-sectional arc shape centered on the horizontal center of the third path, and the convex portion is protruded in a rectangular shape, such that the cross-section in the ball throwing direction of the first path when viewed from the front is protruded in a rectangular shape.

According to the gaming machine K8, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines K3 to K7, the concave portion is recessed in a circular arc shape in cross section in the ball throwing direction of the first path when viewed from the front, and the convex portion is protruded in a rectangular shape in cross section in the ball throwing direction of the first path when viewed from the front. Therefore, the guiding means
The distance between the recessed and protruding portions is narrowed toward both ends of the first path in the ball throwing direction. Therefore, the game ball thrown inside the recessed portion is less likely to swing in the ball throwing direction of the first path. As a result, the game ball thrown to the third path can be easily visually recognized by the player.

In the gaming machine K8, the convex portion is extended with a downward incline to one side opposite the throwing direction of the gaming ball on the second path when viewed from the front.

According to gaming machine K9, in addition to the effects of gaming machine K8, the convex portion is extended with a downward incline to one side opposite to the throwing direction of the gaming ball on the second path when viewed from the front, so that the gaming ball that comes into contact with the convex portion while flowing down the third path can be guided in the inclined direction of the convex portion. This allows the gaming ball that comes into contact with the convex portion to be guided along the inner wall of the recess on the side away from the second path.
As a result, the game ball flowing from the third path to the second path can be rolled in the throwing direction of the game ball on the second path, allowing the game ball to flow smoothly from the third path to the second path.

Gaming machine K10 is characterized in that, in any one of gaming machines K1 to K9, the first path is provided with a second guiding means at the connecting portion with the third path, and the second guiding means is capable of guiding a gaming ball sent from the first path to the guiding means.

According to the gaming machine K10, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines K1 to K9, the first path is provided with a second guide means at the connection portion with the third path, and the second guide means can guide the gaming ball sent from the first path to the guide means, so that the gaming ball sent from the first path to the third path can be easily sent to the guide means of the third path. This makes it possible to smoothly send the gaming ball from the first path to the third path. Therefore, the flow of the gaming ball from the third path to the second path can be made smoother to the extent that the gaming ball sent from the first path can be easily sent to the guide means. As a result, it is possible to stabilize the sending of the gaming ball of the entire path unit.

In the gaming machine K10, the second guide means is composed of a second convex portion protruding from either the front side or the back side of the first path, and a second concave portion recessed at a position opposite the second convex portion, and the width dimension of the second concave portion is set to be larger in a direction perpendicular to the flow direction of the gaming ball toward the upstream side of the first path when viewed from the front.

According to the gaming machine K11, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine K10, the second guide means is composed of a second convex portion protruding from one of the front side or the back side of the first path and a second concave portion recessed at a position opposite to the second convex portion, and the second concave portion is set to have a large width dimension in a direction perpendicular to the flow direction of the game ball toward the upstream side of the first path in a front view, so that the game ball sent through the first path can be easily received in the second concave portion. This makes it possible to smoothly send the game ball from the first path to the third path. Therefore, the game ball sent from the first path can be easily sent to the guide means, and the flow of the game ball from the third path to the second path can be made smooth. As a result, the sending of the game ball of the entire path unit can be stabilized.

Gaming machine K12 is characterized in that, in gaming machine K10 or K11, the second recess has a downstream end of the first path located downstream of the rolling surface of the gaming ball on the first path.

According to the gaming machine K12, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines K10 and K11, the second recessed portion:
Since the downstream end of the first path is located downstream of the rolling surface of the game ball on the first path, the game ball flowing from the first path to the third path along the inner wall of the second recess can be made to flow into the third path on the far side from the first path. As a result, the game ball flowing from the first path to the third path can be easily sent to the inside of the recess, and the game ball can be made to flow smoothly from the third path to the second path.

<Concept of the invention using the special prize device 550 as an example>
Gaming machine L1 is characterized in that it comprises a gaming board having a playing area on the front side, and a flow direction changing means arranged in front of the gaming board for changing the flow direction of gaming balls flowing down the playing area, the flow direction changing means comprising a first member arranged on the front side of the gaming board, a second member arranged on the front side of the first member at a predetermined distance, and an adjustment means for displacing at least one of the first member or the second member, and the adjustment means changes the distance between the opposing first member and second member, thereby adjusting the flow direction of gaming balls flowing down between the opposing first member and second member.

Conventionally, a gaming machine is known that includes a gaming board having a gaming area on the front side and nails that are hammered into the front of the gaming board (for example, JP-A-11-197311). According to this gaming machine, the angle of the nail hammered into the gaming board can be adjusted (the nail is bent) to adjust the flow direction of the gaming balls that flow down the gaming area. However, when changing the angle of the nail to change the flow direction of the gaming balls, the angle of the nail is visible to the player, and if the player recognizes that the angle of the nail is disadvantageous (the angle of the nail makes it difficult for the gaming balls to flow down to the flow path that is advantageous), the player will stop playing the gaming machine that he/she judges to be disadvantageous, and the operation rate of the gaming machine will decrease.

In contrast, according to the gaming machine L1, the flow direction changing means includes a first member disposed in front of the gaming board, a second member disposed on the front side of the first member at a predetermined distance, and an adjustment means for displacing at least one of the first member or the second member, and the adjustment means can change the distance between the opposing first member and the second member to adjust the flow direction of the gaming ball flowing down between the opposing first member and the second member, so that the flow direction of the gaming ball can be changed (adjusted) by the distance in the front and rear directions with respect to the front view of the gaming board. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the player from visually recognizing the flow direction changing means and determining that it is disadvantageous or advantageous, compared to the nail that changes the flow direction of the gaming ball by the horizontal separation distance with respect to the front view of the gaming board. As a result, the operation rate of the gaming machine can be improved.

In the gaming machine L1, the second member is fixed to the gaming board, and the adjustment means adjusts the second member to the gaming board.
A gaming machine L2 characterized in that the position of the first member is displaced.

According to the gaming machine L2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine L1, the second member is fixed to the gaming board, and the position of the first member is displaced by the adjustment means, so that the second member disposed on the front side hides at least a part of the first member disposed on the back side, making it difficult for the player to see the position of the first member. Therefore, when the position of the first member is displaced, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the displacement of the position. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from understanding the distance between the facing first member and the facing second member. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from deciding that the distance between the facing first member and the facing second member is disadvantageous and from stopping playing with the gaming machine, so that the operating rate of the gaming machine can be improved.

In gaming machine L2, the gaming board has a first opening that opens at a position corresponding to the first member, and the first member is disposed on the gaming board by fastening a fastening member that passes through the first opening from the rear side of the gaming board to the first member.

According to the gaming machine L3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine L2, the gaming board has a first opening that opens at a position corresponding to the first member, and the first member is disposed on the gaming board by fastening a fastening member that passes through the first opening from the rear side of the gaming board to the first member, so there is no need to form a fastening part that fastens the first member on the front side of the gaming board, and the external shape of the first member in a front view can be made smaller accordingly, which makes it easier to secure space to arrange other members in front of the gaming board.

In addition, since the fastening member is fastened from the back side of the game board, it is possible to make it difficult to access the fastening member from the front side of the game board when the flow direction changing means and the game board are assembled. As a result, it is possible to prevent the fastening member from being illegally operated and the position of the first member from being illegally changed.

In the gaming machine L3, the first member includes a protruding portion that protrudes toward the gaming board and is inserted into the first opening, and the fastening member is fastened to a tip of the protruding portion, thereby
A gaming machine L4 characterized in that components are arranged on the gaming board.

According to the gaming machine L4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine L3, the first member has a protruding portion that protrudes toward the gaming board and is inserted into the first opening, and the first member is disposed on the gaming board by fastening a fastening member to the tip of the protruding portion, so that the fastening portion of the fastening member can be contained inside the first opening. Therefore, the fastening portion with the fastening member can be prevented from protruding to the front side of the first member, so that a space can be secured between the opposing first member and the second member.

In gaming machine L4, the first member is capable of sliding and displacing on a plane parallel to the front of the gaming board by the adjustment means, and the first opening is opened to a size equal to the displacement area of the protrusion.

According to the gaming machine L5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine L4, the first opening is opened to the same size as the displacement area of the protrusion, so that when the position of the first member is displaced, the protrusion can be displaced along the first opening.
It is possible to prevent the member from being displaced in a direction other than the displacement direction (the direction in which it is displaced by the adjustment means), which simplifies the work performed by an operator when adjusting the position of the first member.

Gaming machine L6 is any one of gaming machines L3 to L5, except that the gaming board has a second opening that opens at a position different from the first opening.

According to the gaming machine L6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines L3 to L5, the gaming board
Since the second opening is provided at a position different from the first opening, the fastening member fastened to the rear side of the game board can be operated through the second opening, which simplifies the work process when an operator operates the adjustment means.

In other words, since the reel device and the case member housing the reel device are arranged on the rear side of the game board, when operating the fastening member from the rear side of the game board, it is necessary to remove the reel device and the case member housing the reel device from the game board. However, with this second opening, the fastening member can be operated from the front side of the game board, so there is no need for the worker to remove the reel device and the case member housing the reel device arranged on the rear side of the game board, thereby simplifying the worker's work process.

Gaming machine L7 is characterized in that, in gaming machine L1, the adjustment means changes the position of the second member relative to the first member in the front-to-rear direction when viewed from the front.

According to the gaming machine L7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine L1, the position of the second member is changed in the front-rear direction relative to the first member when viewed from the front, so that the position of the second member when viewed from the front can be prevented from being changed compared to when the position of the second member is changed in the left-right or up-down direction when viewed from the front. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from determining that the change in the position of the second member when viewed from the front is advantageous or disadvantageous. As a result, the operating rate of the gaming machine can be improved.

Gaming machine L8 is characterized in that, in any of gaming machines L2 to L7, the second member is formed from a non-light-transmitting material, has an outer shape larger than that of the first member when viewed from the front, and the first member is covered by the second member when viewed from the front.

According to the gaming machine L8, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines L2 to L7, the second member is made of a non-light-transmitting material and has an outer shape larger than that of the first member when viewed from the front,
Since the first member is covered by the second member in a front view, the first member is covered by the second member in a front view.
The first member can be hidden by the member, making it difficult for the player to recognize the first member. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from noticing the distance between the facing first member and the second member, and it is possible to improve the operating rate of the gaming machine.

Gaming machine L9 is characterized in that, in any of gaming machines L1 to L8, the second member is formed from a non-light-transmitting material, and at least one of the first member or the second member has a protruding portion that protrudes toward the other of the first member or the second member.

According to the gaming machine L9, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines L1 to L8, the second member is made of a non-light-transmitting material, and at least one of the first member and the second member has a protruding portion protruding toward the other of the first member and the second member, so that the game ball sent between the opposing first member and the second member can be abutted against the protruding portion to change the direction of the ball. Therefore, by recognizing the distance between the opposing first member and the second member, it is possible to suppress the player from judging that it is advantageous or disadvantageous. As a result, it is possible to improve the operating rate of the gaming machine.

Gaming machine L10 is characterized in that, in any of gaming machines L1 to L9, the adjustment means is provided with a step adjustment means capable of gradually adjusting the position of the other of the first member or the second member relative to one of the first member or the second member.

According to the gaming machine L10, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines L1 to L9, the adjustment means includes a step adjustment means capable of stepwise adjusting the position of the first member or the second member relative to the other of the first member or the second member, so that an operator who changes the position of the first member or the second member can adjust the change in position stepwise. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of an error in the adjustment position of the first member or the second member. Therefore, it is possible to simplify the position adjustment of the first member or the second member.

Examples of means for gradually adjusting the positions of the first member and the second member include changing the position of the first member or the second member by changing the insertion position of a protrusion protruding from the first member or the second member into a plurality of grooves recessed into one of the first member or the second member, or changing the position of the first member by changing the insertion position of a protrusion protruding from the first member or the game board into a plurality of grooves recessed into the other of the first member or the game board.

<Concept of the invention using the special prize device 550 as an example>
A gaming machine including a gaming area in which gaming balls flow down, and a path unit having a plurality of guide paths for guiding the sending of the gaming balls flowing down the gaming area and disposed in the gaming area,
The path unit comprises a first guide path formed from a light-transmitting material and arranged on the front side of the game area, and a second guide path arranged on the rear side of the first guide path, the first guide path having a first winning opening through which game balls can enter, the second guide path having a second winning opening through which game balls can enter, and a game ball that enters the first winning opening is given a higher game value than a game ball that enters the second winning opening.

Conventionally, there have been gaming machines in which a path unit having multiple guide paths along which gaming balls flow is arranged in a gaming area, allowing a player to visually see the gaming balls flowing down inside the unit, thereby increasing the player's interest (for example, JP 2015-131046 A).

However, in conventional gaming machines, in order to increase the interest of the player by making the player see the game ball flowing down the guide path, the layout of each guide path tends to be complicated. Therefore, it becomes difficult for the player to determine which of the guide paths the game ball is flowing down. Therefore, when the game values of the game balls flowing down the guide paths are different,
This caused a problem in that it became difficult for the player to judge whether he was passing through an advantageous (high game value is awarded) or unfavorable (low game value is awarded) path, and the game balls flowing down the path units could not sufficiently increase the player's interest.

In contrast, according to gaming machine M1, the path unit comprises a first guide path formed from a light-transmitting material and disposed on the front side of the gaming area, and a second guide path disposed on the rear side of the first guide path, the first guide path comprises a first winning opening through which gaming balls can enter, and the second guide path comprises a second winning opening through which gaming balls can enter, and a higher gaming value is assigned to a gaming ball that enters the first winning opening than to a gaming ball that enters the second winning opening,
It is possible to make the player pay attention to the game ball flowing down the first guide path. Also, when the game ball flows down the first and second guide paths at the same time, the second guide path with the second winning hole with a low game value is formed on the back side of the first guide path, so that it is possible to make the player easily visually recognize the game ball flowing down the first guide path with the first winning hole with a high game value. As a result, it is possible to make the player visually recognize the game ball with a high game value, so that it is possible to easily improve the interest of the player.

It should be noted that the specified gaming value means, for example, a gaming ball that is paid out to a player as a bonus when the gaming ball enters the first or second winning slot.

In the gaming machine M1, the first guide path includes a first path that sends the game ball to one side in a horizontal direction when viewed from the front, a second path that sends the game ball sent from the first path to the other side in the horizontal direction opposite the guiding direction of the game ball on the first path, and a connecting path that connects one side of the first path and the second path in the direction of gravity, and the connecting path is formed by curving in a semicircular arc shape toward the back side of the gaming area.

According to the gaming machine M2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine M1, the first guide path includes a first path for sending the game ball to one side in the horizontal direction in a front view, a second path for sending the game ball sent from the first path to the other side in the horizontal direction opposite to the guide direction of the game ball of the first path, and a connecting path for connecting one side of the first path and the second path to each other in the direction of gravity, and the connecting path is curved in a semicircular arc shape toward the back side of the game area, so that the number of curved parts of the ball sending path can be increased compared to the case where the first path and the second path are directly connected at the shortest distance. This allows the flow speed of the game ball to be gradually slowed down at the curved parts, and the game ball can be prevented from colliding with the inner wall of the connecting path and swaying (shaking) in the connecting path. As a result, the game ball can be smoothly flowed from the first path to the second path, so that the player can easily visually recognize the sending of the game ball from the first path to the second path.

In addition, to prevent the game ball from colliding with the inner wall of the connecting path and swinging (vibrating),
It is also possible to enlarge the internal space of the connecting path in the ball throwing direction of the first path to prevent the game ball from repeatedly colliding with the inner wall of the connecting path, but in this case, the connecting path protrudes in the horizontal direction in front view by the amount of the internal space of the connecting path being enlarged in the ball throwing direction of the first path. Therefore, since the path unit in the front view is enlarged in the horizontal direction, it is difficult to keep the path unit within a predetermined range in the front view.

In contrast, in the gaming machine M2, the connecting path is curved in a semicircular arc toward the rear side, so that the external shape of the path unit in a front view can be kept within a predetermined range.
When a player visually recognizes a game ball flowing down the first guide path, the range that the player can visually recognize can be kept within a predetermined range (the outer shape of the path unit). As a result, it is possible to make the player easily visually recognize the game ball flowing down the path unit.

A gaming machine M3 is characterized in that in the gaming machine M2, the path unit is arranged on the other horizontal side of the gaming area when viewed from the front, and the connecting path is formed on one horizontal side of the path unit when viewed from the front.

According to the gaming machine M3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine M2, the path unit is disposed on the other side of the horizontal direction of the game area when viewed from the front, and the connecting path is formed on one side of the path unit in the horizontal direction when viewed from the front, so that the connecting path can be formed in a position close to the player positioned in front of the game board. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the player to see the game ball passing through the connecting path. As a result, even if the game ball is sent to the rear side by the connecting path, it is possible to make it easier for the player to see the game ball passing through the connecting path.

Gaming machine M4 is characterized in that in gaming machine M2 or M3, the first winning port is disposed between the first path and the second path when viewed from the front.

According to the gaming machine M4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines M2 and M3, the first winning port:
Since the first winning hole is disposed between the first path and the second path in a front view, the first winning hole can be formed in the first guide path by utilizing the dead space formed by the first path and the second path. This makes it possible to prevent the external shape of the path unit from becoming large in a front view. As a result,
The range in which the player can see the path unit can be reduced, making it easier for the player to see the game ball flowing down the path unit.

Gaming machine M5 is any one of gaming machines M2 to M4, characterized in that the connecting path is equipped with a third winning opening through which gaming balls can enter at two locations at the connecting portion with the first path and the second path, and a displacement member that can be displaced to a position to close or open the third winning opening, and a gaming ball that enters the third winning opening is awarded the same gaming value as a gaming ball that enters the first winning opening.

According to the gaming machine M5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines M2 to M4, the connecting path has a third winning hole that can receive game balls at two points at the connecting portion with the first path and the second path, and
and a displacement member that can be displaced to a position that closes or opens the third winning hole, and the same game value is given to a game ball that enters the third winning hole as to a game ball that enters the first winning hole,
The game ball sent from the first path to the connecting path can be easily made to enter either of the two third winning holes, and the game ball flowing down the connecting path can easily give the player an interest.

That is, since the connecting path can be disposed between the upstream third winning opening formed at the connecting portion of the connecting path and the first path and the downstream third winning opening formed at the connecting portion of the connecting path and the second path, when the displacement member is repeatedly operated at a predetermined timing to a position for closing or opening the third winning opening, the game ball sent from the first path to the connecting path when the third winning opening is closed by the displacement member can be made to flow down the connecting path that curves to the back side, ensuring time until the third winning opening is opened, and can flow into the downstream third winning opening. As a result, the game ball sent to the connecting path can be easily made to flow into the third winning opening, making it easier for the player to be interested in the game ball flowing down the connecting path.

In addition, the two third winning holes are formed at the upstream and downstream ends of the connecting path (the connecting portion between the first path and the second path), respectively, so that the time during which a ball can enter the third winning hole can be extended. This can therefore lengthen the time during which the player is interested, making it easier to increase the player's interest.

Gaming machine M6 is any one of gaming machines M2 to M5, characterized in that a detection means for detecting the passage of a gaming ball is disposed outside the connecting path.

According to the gaming machine M6, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines M2 to M5, a detection means for detecting the passage of a gaming ball is disposed in the connecting path, so that if a gaming ball gets stuck in the connecting path, the detection by the detection means continues, and the gaming machine can detect an error. Also, since the detection means is disposed outside the connecting path, it is possible to prevent the gaming ball from getting caught in the detection means, compared to a case in which the detection means is disposed inside the connecting path, and therefore it is possible to prevent the gaming ball from getting stuck in the connecting path.

Furthermore, since the detection means is disposed outside the connecting path where the rolling of the game balls is slowed down, it is possible to easily and accurately detect the number of game balls passing through the connecting path. Therefore, when the number of balls detected by the detection means is greater than the number of balls entering the first winning hole or the third winning hole, the gaming machine can be made to recognize that cheating is occurring. As a result, by notifying the user that cheating is occurring with a warning sound, an abnormal light, or the like, it is possible to prevent the cheating from continuing.

In the gaming machine M6, the dimension between the inner walls of the connecting path when viewed from the front is set to be larger than the diameter of the gaming ball and smaller than the dimension between the inner walls of the first path in a direction perpendicular to the throwing direction of the gaming ball.

According to the gaming machine M7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine M6, the dimension between the inner walls of the connecting path when viewed from the front is set to be larger than the diameter of the game ball and smaller than the dimension between the inner walls of the first path in the direction perpendicular to the throwing direction of the game ball, so that when a game ball with a diameter equal to or larger than a predetermined dimension (diameter larger than the regulation) is thrown, the game ball can be made to stay (clog) in the connecting path. As a result, it is possible to prevent a game ball with a diameter larger than the regulation from flowing down the path unit.

In addition, a detection means for detecting the passage of a gaming ball is disposed in the connecting path, so that if a gaming ball with a diameter larger than the specified size becomes stuck in the connecting path (clogs), the detection means can cause the gaming machine to detect an error.

In gaming machine M6 or M7, the connecting path is characterized in that an opening is formed in the radially outer side wall of the path that curves in a semicircular arc toward the back side, the opening opening being at a predetermined value smaller than the diameter of the gaming ball.

According to the gaming machine M8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines M6 and M7, the connecting path has an opening formed on the radially outer side wall of the path curved in a semicircular arc toward the back side, the opening being a predetermined value smaller than the diameter of the gaming ball, so that when a gaming ball having a diameter equal to or smaller than the predetermined size (a diameter smaller than the regulation) is sent, the gaming ball can be discharged from the opening of the opening to the outside of the connecting path. As a result, it is possible to prevent a gaming ball having a diameter smaller than the regulation from flowing down the path unit.

In addition, the opening is formed in the radially outer side wall of the connecting path, which serves as the rolling surface for the game ball flowing down the connecting path, making it easier to discharge the game ball flowing down the connecting path if the game ball has a diameter smaller than specified.

In the gaming machine M8, a storage section formed in a box shape protruding from the radially outer side of the connection path and communicating with the opening is provided, and the storage section is set to a size capable of storing game balls;
A gaming machine M9 characterized by being formed within the detection range of the detection means.

According to the gaming machine M9, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine M8, a storage section formed in a box shape protruding from the radial outside of the connecting path and communicating with the opening is provided, and the storage section is formed to a size capable of storing game balls inside and is formed within the detection range of the detection means, so that game balls having a diameter equal to or smaller than a predetermined dimension (diameter smaller than the regulation) discharged from the opening of the opening to the outside of the connecting path can be stored inside the storage section. Also, since the storage section is formed within the detection range of the detection means, the game balls stored inside the storage section can be detected by the detection means. As a result, when game balls are stored inside the storage section, the detection means can cause the gaming machine to detect an error.

Gaming machine M10 is characterized in that, in any one of gaming machines M1 to M9, the inlet for game balls of the first guide path and the inlet for game balls of the second guide path are formed in positions adjacent to each other in the horizontal direction when viewed from the front.

According to the gaming machine M10, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines M1 to M9, the inlet of the gaming ball of the first guide path and the inlet of the gaming ball of the second guide path are formed at positions adjacent to each other in the horizontal direction when viewed from the front, so that the gaming ball flowing down the gaming area of the gaming board is guided to the first guide path.
It is possible to make it difficult for the player to know whether the ball will flow into the first guide path or the second guide path until just before the ball flows into the first guide path. As a result, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the game ball flowing down the game area and being sent to the path unit. As a result, it is possible to make the player more interested.

<Concept of the invention using the lower displacement unit 400 as an example>
Gaming machine N1 comprises a base member having a game area on the front side, and a first member disposed on the front side of the base member and having a ball sending path formed as a space through which game balls flowing down the game area can be sent, characterized in that the first member is disposed on the base member in a state in which it is biased toward the rear side of the base member by a fixing means fastened from the rear side of the base member.

Conventionally, a first ball game has been provided that has a base member having a game area on the front side and a ball sending path that is disposed on the front side of the base member and is formed as a space through which a game ball flowing down the game area can be sent.
According to this gaming machine, the first member has an extension portion on a plane parallel to the front surface of the base member on a side surface (abutting portion with the base member) of the base member side, and a screw inserted through an opening formed in the extension portion is screwed into the base member, whereby the first member is disposed in intimate contact with the front surface of the base member.

However, in conventional gaming machines, in order to arrange the first member in a state of close contact with the front of the base member, it is necessary to fasten the screw inserted from the front side of the first member to the base member, and an opening for inserting the screw needs to be formed in the first member. Here, in order to form the opening at a position that does not interfere with the throwing of the game ball, it is necessary to form the opening outside the throwing space of the game ball, and the extension part where the opening is formed needs to be formed outside the throwing space. Therefore, since the extension part is formed on the outer edge of the first member, the area available as a throwing path is smaller than the outer shape of the first member, and there is a problem that the throwing path of the first member cannot be made sufficiently large.

In contrast, according to the gaming machine N1, the first member is arranged on the base member in a state where it is biased toward the rear side of the base member by the fixing means fastened from the rear side of the base member, so that the first member and the base member can be arranged in a state of close contact by the biasing force toward the rear side acting on the first member. Also, since the first member is arranged on the base member by the fixing means inserted from the rear side of the base member, it is not necessary to form a fastening margin with the base member (an extension part where an opening through which the fixing means is inserted is formed) on the front side of the first member. Therefore, the entire area of the outer shape of the first member in a front view can be used as a ball throwing path. As a result, the ball throwing path of the first member can be enlarged.

In addition, since the fastening portion between the base member and the first member is not exposed on the front side, it is possible to prevent the fastening portion between the base member and the first member from being tampered with and also to prevent the player's interest from being reduced due to the fastening portion being visible to the player.

In the gaming machine N1, a second member is disposed on the rear side of the first member via the base member.
the second member is fixed to the first member by the fixing means which is inserted from the rear side of the second member into the first member and fixed to the first member, and is disposed on the base member with a predetermined gap between the second member and the first member.

According to gaming machine N2, in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machine N1, it is provided with a second member arranged on the back side of the first member via a base member, and the second member is fixed to the first member by a fixing means that is inserted from the back side of the second member to the first member and fixed to the first member, and is arranged on the base member with a predetermined gap between it and the first member. Therefore, when the first member and the second member are fastened together, a force can be applied to the first member toward the back side by the amount of the predetermined gap.
In addition, since a force biasing the second member toward the front side can be applied to the second member, the base member can be sandwiched between the first member and the second member. Therefore, the first member and the second member are less likely to be displaced from the base member due to the sandwiching force between the first member and the second member.
This eliminates the need to fasten the member or the second member to the base member, which makes it easier to fasten the second member.

The predetermined gap between the first member and the second member is set to a value greater than 0 and smaller than the width dimension of the base member in the front-rear direction when viewed from the front. This allows a force that attracts the first member and the second member to act on each other through the gap when the first member and the second member are fastened together.

Gaming machine N3 is characterized in that, in gaming machine N1 or N2, the base member has a first opening formed at a position opposite the first member, the first member has a protrusion that protrudes inward from the first opening, and the fixing means is fastened to the tip of the protrusion, thereby disposing the first member on the base member.

According to the gaming machine N3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines N1 and N2, the base member
The first member has a protruding portion protruding inward from the first opening, and the fastening means is fastened to the tip of the protruding portion, so that the first member is disposed on the base member, and the fastening portion of the fastening means can be disposed inside the first opening. This prevents the fastening portion of the fastening means from being disposed on the front side of the base member, and prevents the fastening portion of the fastening means from being formed in the ball throwing space of the first member. As a result,
The size of the ball throwing space of the component can be secured.

In addition, since the protrusion ensures a sufficient fastening margin (insertion depth) for the fixing means, it is possible to prevent the fixing means from coming undone from the first member. As a result, it is possible to easily increase the urging force acting on the first member toward the back side.

In the gaming machine N1, a second member is disposed on the rear side of the first member via the base member.
a base member having a first opening formed at a position opposite the first member, the third member having a front-to-back dimension in a front-to-back direction when viewed from the front that is set smaller than the front-to-back dimension of the base member when viewed from the front and disposed inside the first opening, the first member being disposed in close contact with the front side of the third member, and the second member being fastened to the rear side of the third member with a predetermined gap between them by the fixing means inserted from the rear side of the base member.

According to the gaming machine N4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine N1, a second member is disposed on the back side of the first member via a base member, and a third member is disposed between the first member and the second member, and the base member has a first opening formed at a position opposite to the first member,
The third member is set to have a smaller front-rear dimension in a front-rear direction than the base member in a front-rear direction, and is disposed inside the first opening, the first member is disposed in close contact with the front side of the third member, and the second member is fastened to the rear side of the third member with a predetermined gap therebetween by a fastening means inserted from the rear side of the base member, so that a urging force toward the rear side can be applied to the first member via the third member. Therefore, the urging force toward the rear side that acts when the second member and the third member are fastened by the fastening means can also be applied to the third member. As a result, the urging force acting on the contact portion of the first member with the base member can be reduced, and damage to the first member can be suppressed.

In addition, the third member is in close contact with the back side of the first member, thereby increasing the rigidity of the first member as a whole. Therefore, the force acting on the first member toward the back side elastically deforms the first member as a whole, and deformation of the ball throwing path formed in the first member can be suppressed. As a result, the throwing of the ball from the first member can be stabilized.

Gaming machine N5 is characterized in that, in gaming machine N4, the third member is part of a frame-shaped member arranged on the front side of the base member along the second opening formed in the base member.

According to the gaming machine N5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine N4, since the third member is a part of the frame-shaped member disposed on the front side of the base member along the second opening portion formed in the base member,
The biasing force acting on the third member can be used as a force for biasing the frame-shaped member toward the rear surface.
This makes it easier to arrange the frame-shaped member in a state of close contact with the base member.

In addition, the biasing force acting toward the rear side when fastening the second member and the third member with the fastening means is
Since the force can be applied to the contact surface between the frame-shaped member and the base member, the force acting on the contact portion of the first member with the base member can be reduced, thereby preventing damage to the first member.

In gaming machine N4 or N5, the first member comprises a displacement member capable of displacing the ball sending space of the first member, and a drive means arranged on the rear side of the first member for driving the displacement member, and the third member comprises a third opening opened to a size sufficient to insert the drive means, and is arranged on the rear side of the first member with the drive means inserted inside the third opening.

According to the gaming machine N6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines N4 and N5, the first member includes a displacement member capable of displacing the ball throwing space of the first member, and a drive means arranged on the back side of the first member and driving the displacement member, and the third member includes a third opening opened to a size that allows the drive means to be inserted, and is arranged on the back side of the first member with the drive means inserted inside the third opening, so that the drive means can be covered by the third member. This makes it possible to prevent illegal objects such as wires and piano wires inserted from the outside of the gaming machine from accessing the drive means. As a result, it is possible to prevent illegal acts on the drive means.

In gaming machine N6, the second member is provided with a communication portion that protrudes toward the first member and communicates with the ball throwing space of the first member so that a gaming ball thrown into the ball throwing space of the first member can be sent to the second member, and the communication portion is disposed outside the third opening.

According to the gaming machine N7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine N6, the second member is provided with a communication part that protrudes toward the first member and communicates with the ball sending space of the first member to send the game ball sent to the ball sending space of the first member to the second member, and the communication part is disposed outside the third opening, so that the third member can be disposed between the communication part and the drive means. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the magnetic force generated by the drive of the drive means to act on the communication part. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball sent to the communication part from being slowed down in speed passing through the communication part or being stopped at the communication part due to the influence of the magnetic force of the drive means, and it is possible to stabilize the sending of the game ball from the first member to the second member.

In the gaming machine N1, the base member has a first opening formed at a position opposite the first member, the first member has a protruding portion protruding from at least two places on the back side of the first member, the protruding portion has a first piece protruding from the back side of the first member and passing through the first opening, a second piece bent at an end of the first piece and extending toward the outside of the first opening, and a protruding portion protruding from the front side of the second piece overlapping with the base member in a front view, the first piece is set to a protruding dimension larger than the width dimension of the base member in the front-to-rear direction in a front view, the protruding portion has a dimension between the first piece and the back side of the first member that is set to be equal to or smaller than the width dimension of the base member in the front-to-rear direction in a front view, and the bent tip of the second piece is fastened to the base member by the fixing means,
The gaming machine N8 is characterized in that the first member is arranged in a state where it is biased toward the rear side of the base member.

According to gaming machine N8, in addition to the effects of gaming machine N1, the base member has a first opening formed at a position opposite to the first member, and the first member has a protruding portion protruding from at least two places on the back side of the first member, and the protruding portion has a first piece protruding from the back side of the first member and passing through the first opening, a second piece bent at an end of the first piece and extending toward the outside of the first opening, and a protruding portion protruding on the front side of the second piece overlapping with the base member in a front view, and the first piece is The protruding dimension is set to a value larger than the front-rear width dimension of the first member, the dimension of the raised portion between the rear surface of the first member and the base member is set to be equal to or smaller than the front-rear width dimension of the base member in a front view, and the bent tip of the second piece is fastened to the base member by a fastening means, so that the first member is disposed in a state in which it is biased toward the rear side of the base member, and therefore it is not necessary to provide a portion for fastening a fastening means (e.g., a screw) on the rear side of the first member, and a throwing space for the game ball formed in the first member can be secured. As a result, the throwing space can be enlarged, so that the throwing direction of the game ball thrown to the first member can be changed to make the throwing more interesting.

In addition, since the screw-threaded portion of the fixing means can be made into the base member, the action of a biasing force on the screw-threaded portion of the fixing means can suppress elastic deformation of the ball throwing space of the first member.
The first member is elastically deformed, and the speed of the game ball sent through the ball sending path of the first member is prevented from slowing down.

In gaming machine N8, the base member has a second opening formed in the front-to-rear direction when viewed from the front, and a frame-shaped member arranged on the front side of the base member along the second opening, and gaming machine N9 is characterized in that the first opening and the second opening are connected.

According to the gaming machine N9, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine N8, the base member has a second opening formed in the front-rear direction when viewed from the front, and a frame-shaped member arranged on the front side of the base member along the second opening, and the first opening and the second opening communicate with each other, so that the protrusion can be arranged inside the first opening by utilizing the opening of the second opening. Therefore, the work of arranging the first unit on the base member can be simplified, and the manufacturing cost can be reduced.

<Concept of the invention using the lower displacement unit 400 as an example>
In a gaming machine including a base member, a displacement member displaceably disposed on the base member, and a driven member connected to the displacement member and driven by the displacement of the displacement member, the gaming machine further includes a restricting means for restricting the swing of the driven member in a direction other than the driven direction, the displacement member being displaced between a first position and a second position, the displacement member having a first displacement region displaced from the first position to a third position which is an intermediate position between the first position and the second position, and a second displacement region displaced from the third position to the second position, and the driven member is configured to restrict the swing of the displacement member from the first position to a third position which is an intermediate position between the first position and the second position, a first driven region that is driven from a first driven position to a second driven position by being displaced from the first driven position to the second position, and that displaces from the first driven position to a third driven position that is an intermediate position between the first driven position and the second driven position, and a second driven region that displaces from the third driven position to the second driven position, wherein at least a portion of the second displacement region and the first driven region are set to the same region, and when the displacement member is displaced in the second displacement region, the regulating means regulates the oscillation of the displacement member in directions other than the displacement direction.

Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine that includes a base member, a displacement member that is displaceably disposed on the base member, and a driven member that is connected to the displacement member and follows the displacement of the displacement member, and in which the displacement of the driven member is displaced by the displacement of the displacement member (for example, see JP 2015-02984 A).
However, in conventional gaming machines, when a restricting means is formed to restrict the rocking of both the displacement member and the driven member in order to restrict the displacement and rocking of the displacement member and the driven member in directions other than the driven direction, it is necessary to form the restricting means in two places, which makes the shape more complicated and increases the manufacturing cost.

In contrast, in the gaming machine O1, the displacement member is provided with a regulating means for regulating the swinging of the driven member in a direction other than the driven direction, the displacement member is displaced between a first position and a second position, and has a first displacement region in which the displacement member is displaced from the first position to a third position which is an intermediate position between the first position and the second position, and a second displacement region in which the displacement member is displaced from the third position to the second position, the driven member is driven from the first driven position to the second driven position by the displacement of the displacement member from the first position to the second position, and has a first driven region in which the displacement member is displaced from the first driven position to a third driven position which is an intermediate position between the first driven position and the second driven position, and a second driven region in which the displacement member is displaced from the third driven position to the second driven position, at least a part of the second displacement region and the first driven region are set to the same region, and when the displacement member is displaced in the second displacement region, the swinging of the displacement member in a direction other than the displacement direction is regulated by the regulating means;
The same portion of the restricting means can be used to restrict the swinging of the driven member and the displacement member. Therefore, since the restricting means only needs to be formed in one place, the shape can be simplified accordingly, and manufacturing costs can be reduced.

In addition, since the oscillation of the driven member and the displacement member can be regulated by utilizing the same part of the regulating means, there is no need to form a driven member, a displacement member, and a regulating part in a single regulating means, and therefore the regulating means can be made smaller.

In the gaming machine O1, the regulating means is configured as a wall portion protruding from the base member toward the driven member, the driven member is capable of sliding and displacing on a plane parallel to the base member at a position overlapping at least a portion of the base member when viewed from the front, and the area overlapping with the base member when viewed from the front becomes gradually smaller as the driven member moves from the first driven position to the second driven position.

According to the gaming machine O2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine O1, the regulating means is configured as a wall portion protruding from the base member toward the driven member, and the driven member is slidably displaceable on a plane parallel to the base member at a position overlapping at least a part of the base member in a front view,
As the driven member moves from the first driven position to the second driven position, the area overlapping with the base member in a front view is gradually reduced, so that in the second driven position, the area in which the driven member protrudes outward from the base member in a front view is made larger than in the first driven position. Therefore, the driven member protrudes outward from the base member, making it difficult to restrict the swinging of the driven member by the restricting means disposed on the base member. Therefore, the driven member tends to swing toward the base member as it is driven from the first driven position to the second driven position. However, by restricting the swinging of the displacement member connected to the driven member, the number of restricted locations by the restricting means is increased, making it difficult for the driven member to swing. As a result, the swinging of the driven member can be suppressed when it is disposed in the second driven region.

In the gaming machine O2, the driven member is formed in a rectangular shape with one side being longer when viewed from the front,
a driven member having a rotatable rotation shaft on one side in a longitudinal direction and rotatably disposed on the base member, the longitudinal direction of the driven member being substantially parallel to a horizontal direction at the first driven position, and when the driven member is driven from the first driven position to the second driven position, the driven member rotates around the rotation shaft,
A gaming machine O3, characterized in that the other side of the driven member is positioned above the rotation axis in the direction of gravity.

According to the gaming machine O3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine O2, the driven member is formed in a rectangular shape with one side longer than the other when viewed from the front, has a rotatable rotation shaft on one side in the longitudinal direction, is rotatably disposed on the base member, and in the first driven position, the longitudinal direction of the driven member is approximately parallel to the horizontal direction;
When the driven member is driven from the first driven position to the second driven position, the driven member rotates about the rotation axis and the other side of the driven member is disposed above the rotation axis in the direction of gravity, so that the driven member rotates and stands up when driven from the first driven position to the second driven position. Therefore, as the driven member stands up, the load of the driven member is more likely to act toward the rotation axis, and the load of the driven member acts in the swing direction of the driven member, making it easier for the driven member to swing.

In contrast, in the present embodiment, the swing of the displacement member connected to the driven member is restricted, so that the number of restricted locations by the restricting means is increased, making it difficult for the driven member to swing. As a result, the swing of the driven member can be suppressed when the driven member is disposed in the second driven region.

Furthermore, when the driven member moves in the first driven region where a force is required to lift the other end side of the driven member, it is necessary to displace the displacement member from the first position where the restriction of the displacement member is released to the third position (first displacement region), and since the restriction of the displacement member by the restricting means is released in the first displacement region, it is possible to prevent the operation of the displacement member from being slowed down by the restricting means.
In the case where a displacement force of the driven member is required, the displacement force of the driven member can be ensured.

In gaming machine O2 or O3, the driven member has a protruding portion protruding at a position opposite the wall portion, and the tip of the protruding portion abuts against the wall portion to regulate the displacement of the driven member, the displacement member is set so as to be able to displace the space between the driven member and the opposing wall portion in the second displacement region, and at least a portion of the displacement member overlaps with the driven member in the opposing direction between the driven member and the wall portion.

According to the gaming machine O3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine O2, the driven member has a protruding portion protruding from a position facing the wall portion, the tip of the protruding portion abuts against the wall portion to restrict the displacement of the driven member, the displacement member is set to be able to displace the space between the driven member and the wall portion in the displacement region at the end, and at least a part of the displacement member overlaps with the driven member in the opposing direction of the driven member and the wall portion, so that the displacement member can be prevented from tilting to the side opposite the wall portion. As a result, the displacement of the displacement member in both axial directions can be restricted by the driven member and the wall portion, and the displacement member can be prevented from swinging when displaced.

Gaming machine O5, in which, in the gaming machine O4, the side surface of the displacement member abuts against the protrusion portion of the driven member in the second driven position.

According to the gaming machine O5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine O4, the side surface of the displacement member abuts on the protruding portion of the driven member at the second driven position, so that when the displacement member is displaced from the first driven position to the second driven position, the outer edge can abut on the protruding portion of the displacement member to stop it. Therefore, the protruding portion can abut on the wall to restrict the displacement of the driven member, and also can assist in the stopping operation of the displacement member. Therefore, a space in which the displacement member and the driven member can be displaced can be secured.

In the gaming machine O5, one end of the driven member is pivotally supported by the base member, and when the displacement member is disposed at the second driven position, a displacement direction of a connection portion of the driven member with the displacement member is set to a direction toward an axis of the displacement member.
.

According to gaming machine O6, in addition to the effects of gaming machine O5, one end of the driven member is journaled on the base member, and when the displacement member is placed in the second driven position, the displacement direction of the connected portion of the driven member with the displacement member is set in a direction toward the axis of the displacement member, so that when the load of the driven member acts on the displacement member, the displacement member can be prevented from being displaced by the load of the driven member. In other words, when the displacement member is placed in the second driven position, the relationship between the driven member and the displacement member can be made a dead center relationship, so that the displacement member can be prevented from being displaced. As a result,
In the driven position, the displacement member can be prevented from being displaced by an external force other than that of the driving means.

In gaming machine O5, the driven member has one end journaled on the base portion, and when the displacement member is positioned in the second driven position, the combined direction of the displacement direction of the connection portion of the driven member with the displacement member and the direction in which the reaction force acts due to the abutment of the protrusion portion and the displacement member is set to a direction toward the axis of the displacement member.

According to the gaming machine O7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine O5, one end of the driven member is pivotally supported by the base member, and when the displacement member is placed in the second driven position, the combined direction of the displacement direction of the connection part of the driven member with the displacement member and the direction of the reaction force caused by the abutment of the protrusion and the displacement member is set to the direction toward the axis of the displacement member, so that when the load of the driven member acts on the displacement member, the displacement member can be prevented from being displaced by the load of the driven member. In other words, when the displacement member is placed in the second driven position, the direction of the force acting from the driven member to the displacement member is directed toward the axis of the displacement member, so that the generation of a force in the direction of rotation of the displacement member around the pivot part can be prevented. As a result, the displacement member can be prevented from being displaced by an external force other than the driving means in the second driven position.

In the gaming machines O1 to O7, the protrusion portion is arranged with a predetermined gap between it and the wall portion, and the protrusion portion abuts against the wall portion when the displacement member abuts against it.

Here, if the protrusion of the driven member and the wall portion are constantly in contact with each other, this creates resistance when the displacement member is displaced by the driving means, and there is a concern that it may become difficult to displace the displacement member stably.

According to gaming machine O8, the protrusion portion is arranged with a predetermined gap between it and the wall portion, and the displacement member abuts against the wall portion when it comes into contact with it. Therefore, when the displacement member is displaced to the second driven position, the displacement member can be prevented from swinging, and the protrusion and bulge portion can be prevented from becoming a resistance during the displacement.

<Concept of the invention using the lower displacement member 440 as an example>
a decorative member at least a part of which is made of a light-transmitting material that can transmit light from the rear side when viewed from the front; and a display panel disposed on the rear side of the decorative member in a state in which the display panel can be displaced on a plane parallel to the front side;
A gaming machine P1 having a receiving section capable of receiving and holding gaming balls, further comprising a light-emitting means arranged on the rear side of the decorative member and capable of emitting light toward a displacement area of the receiving section, the light-emitting means being arranged on the rear side of the receiving section or between the decorative member and the receiving section, and the light emitted from the light-emitting means is blocked or reflected by the receiving section or a gaming ball received by the receiving section, thereby partially varying the amount of light emitted from the decorative member.

Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine that includes a decorative member formed of a light-transmitting material at least a portion of which can transmit light from the rear side when viewed from the front, and a receiving section that is disposed on the rear side of the decorative member in a state in which it can be displaced on a plane parallel to the front side and can receive and hold a gaming ball (for example, JP 2010-166997 A). According to this gaming machine, after a gaming ball is received and held in the receiving section, the receiving section can be moved to perform an effect in which the gaming ball moves in accordance with the movement of the receiving section.

However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the receiving section is disposed on the rear side of the decorative member, which makes it difficult for the player to recognize the position of the receiving section and the gaming ball received in the receiving section. Therefore, when the receiving section moves after the gaming ball is received (held) in the receiving section,
This caused a problem in that it became difficult for the player to grasp the direction in which the receiving section and the game ball received (held) in the receiving section moved, making it difficult for the player to grasp the position of the game ball received in the receiving section.

In contrast, gaming machine P1 is equipped with a light-emitting means that is arranged on the back side of the decorative member and is capable of emitting light toward the displacement area of the receiving section. The light-emitting means is arranged on the back side of the receiving section or between the decorative member and the receiving section, and the light emitted from the light-emitting means is blocked or reflected by the receiving section or the game ball accepted by the receiving section, thereby making the amount of light emitted from the decorative member partially different. Therefore, by making the amount of light emitted from the decorative member located on the front side of the receiving section or the game ball accepted by the receiving section different from the amount of light emitted from the decorative member in other positions, the player can recognize that the receiving section or the game ball accepted by the receiving section is located on the back side of the part where the amount of light is different.

To explain in more detail, when the light emitting means is disposed on the back side of the receiving part, the light emitted from the light emitting means can be blocked by the receiving part or the game ball received in the receiving part, so that the amount of light emitted from the decorative member on the front side of the receiving part or the game ball received in the receiving part can be made darker than other parts of the decorative member. As a result, the amount of light emitted from the decorative member is small (
This allows the player to recognize that the receiving section or the game ball received in the receiving section is located on the back side of the (dark) portion.

On the other hand, when a light emitting means is disposed between the decorative member and the receiving section, the light emitted from the light emitting means can be reflected by the receiving section or the game ball received in the receiving section, so that the amount of light emitted from the decorative member on the front side of the receiving section or the game ball received in the receiving section can be brighter than other parts of the decorative member. As a result, a part of the decorative member that emits a large amount of light (
This allows the player to recognize that the receiving section or the game ball received in the receiving section is located on the back side of the (bright) section.

Gaming machine P2 is characterized in that, in gaming machine P1, the receiving portion is formed lower in the direction of gravity than the center of the gaming ball held in the receiving portion, the light emitting means has a light emitting portion arranged at approximately the same height as the center of the gaming ball held in the receiving portion, and the light transmitting portion of the decorative member is formed at a position higher than the light emitting portion of the light emitting means.

Here, in a structure in which the light irradiated from the light emitting means is transmitted through a decorative member and is reflected or blocked by the receiving section or the game ball received in the receiving section, the light emitted from the light emitting means is irradiated not only to the game ball but also to the receiving section, making the light more likely to be reflected or blocked by the receiving section. Therefore, when the light and shade formed by the difference in the amount of light emitted from the decorative member is affected by the receiving section, the shape of the light and shade becomes different from the outer shape of the game ball, which may make it difficult for the player to recognize that the game ball is located behind the part with a different amount of light.

In contrast, in the gaming machine P2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine P1, the receiving portion is formed lower in the direction of gravity than the center of the gaming ball held in the receiving portion, the light emitting means has a light emitting portion disposed at approximately the same height as the center of the gaming ball held in the receiving portion, and the light transmitting portion of the decorative member is
Since it is formed at a position higher than the light emission part of the light emitting means, it is possible to prevent the light and shade formed by the light emitted from the light emitting means and blocked or reflected by the receiving part from being transmitted through the light transmitting part of the decorative member and being formed on the front side of the decorative member. This makes it possible to make the shape of the light and shade formed by transmitting through the light transmitting part of the decorative member closer to the outer shape (circular shape) of the game ball. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that the game ball is placed in a part with a different amount of light.

Gaming machine P3 is characterized in that, in gaming machine P1 or P2, the receiving portion is formed from a light-transmitting material.

According to the gaming machine P3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines P1 and P2, the receiving part is made of a light-transmitting material, so that the light irradiated from the light-emitting means can be prevented from being reflected or blocked by the receiving part. This makes it possible to prevent the formation of parts with different amounts of light in the light-transmitting part of the decorative member when a gaming ball is not received in the receiving part. Therefore, when a gaming ball is not received in the receiving part, the positioning operation and the return operation of the receiving part can be performed without the player noticing. As a result, the player is prevented from gazing at the decorative member during the positioning operation and the return operation of the receiving part, and the player can be made to focus only on the displacement operation of the receiving part when it is desired to focus on it.

Gaming machine P4 is characterized in that, in gaming machines P2 or P3, a connecting member is provided which is made of a non-light-transmitting material and is connected to one side of the receiving part in the displacement direction, the light-emitting means is arranged on the rear side of the displacement area of the receiving part, the connecting member has a dimension in the displacement direction of the receiving part which is set larger than the displacement distance of the receiving part, the connecting member is arranged on the rear side of the light-transmitting part of the decorative member, and protrudes or retracts between the light-emitting means and the decorative member as the receiving part is displaced.

According to the gaming machine P4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines P2 and P3, a connecting member is provided which is made of a non-light-transmitting material and connected to one side of the receiving part in the displacement direction, the light emitting means is disposed on the rear side of the displacement area of the receiving part, the connecting member is set to have a dimension in the displacement direction of the receiving part larger than the displacement distance of the receiving part, and is disposed on the rear side of the light transmitting part of the decorative part, and is extended or retreated between the light emitting means and the decorative part as the receiving part is displaced, so that the emission area of the light from the decorative part can be changed as the receiving part is displaced. That is, the light irradiated from the light emitting means to the decorative part can be blocked by the connecting member, and the area of the light blocking can be changed as the receiving part is displaced. As a result, the receiving part and the connecting member are displaced to extend between the light emitting means and the decorative part, so that the emission area of the light emitted from the decorative part can be reduced. As a result, the light emission surface of the decorative member is made smaller, making it easier for the player to recognize areas where a small amount of light is emitted from the decorative member due to the receiving section or the game ball received in the receiving section.

Gaming machine P5 is characterized in that, in gaming machine P4, the connecting member is part of a drive means that drives the receiving portion.

According to the gaming machine P5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine P4, since the connecting member is a part of the drive means for driving the receiving part, the connecting member can serve both the role of transmitting the drive force of the drive means to the receiving part and the role of blocking the light emitted from the light emitting means. As a result, it is possible to secure the arrangement space for the drive means for driving the receiving part.

Gaming machine P6 is characterized in that, in gaming machines P1 to P5, the light-emitting means is arranged on the rear side of the displacement area of the receiving section, the receiving section is provided with a displacement member that is displaceable by a game ball received in the receiving section, the displacement member is formed from a non-light-transmitting material and is displaceable to a position where it protrudes or retracts between the light-emitting means and the decorative member, and when a game ball is received in the receiving section, it protrudes between the light-emitting means and the decorative member.

According to the gaming machine P6, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines P1 to P5, the light emitting means is disposed on the rear side of the displacement area of the receiving part, the receiving part is provided with a displacement member that can be displaced by the game ball received in the receiving part, the displacement member is formed of a non-light-transmitting material and is displaceable at a position where it protrudes or retreats between the opposing light emitting means and the decorative member, and when the game ball is received in the receiving part, it protrudes between the opposing light emitting means and the decorative member, so that only when the game ball is held in the receiving part, the displacement member and the game ball block the light emitted from the light emitting means, and the player can recognize the position of the game ball by the shadow (dark part) formed on the decorative member. Therefore, when the game ball is not received in the receiving part, the positioning operation and return operation of the receiving part can be performed without the player being aware of it. As a result, the player is prevented from staring at the decorative member at the wrong time, and the player can concentrate on playing the game.

Gaming machine P7, in which the light emitting means is disposed on the front side of the displacement area of the receiving section, the receiving section is provided with a displacement member that is displaceable from the game ball received in the receiving section, the displacement member is made of a non-light-transmitting material and is displaceable to a position where it protrudes or retreats between the light emitting means and the decorative member, and when the game ball is received in the receiving section, the displacement member protrudes between the light emitting means and the game ball.
.

According to the gaming machine P7, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines P1 to P5, the light emitting means is disposed on the front side of the displacement area of the receiving part, the receiving part is provided with a displacement member that can be displaced from the game ball received in the receiving part, the displacement member is formed of a non-light-transmitting material and is displaceable at a position where it protrudes or retreats between the opposing light emitting means and the decorative member, and when the game ball is received in the receiving part, it protrudes between the opposing light emitting means and the game ball, so that only when the game ball is held in the receiving part, the displacement member and the game ball reflect the light emitted from the light emitting means, and the bright part (part with a larger amount of light than the other parts) formed in the decorative member allows the player to recognize the position of the game ball. Therefore, when the game ball is not received in the receiving part, the positioning operation and return operation of the receiving part can be performed without the player being aware of it. As a result, the player is prevented from staring at the decorative member at the wrong time, and the player can concentrate on playing the game.

In this case, it is preferable that the displacement member is made of a metal material, which generally has a higher light reflectance than a resin material, or that the outer surface is coated with a metal coating. This makes it easier to reflect the light irradiated onto the displacement member, and makes the difference in the amount of light emitted from the decorative member clear,
This allows the player to easily recognize the position of the game ball.

Gaming machine P8 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine P7, the displacement member is formed into a concave curved shape that is recessed toward the rear side.

According to the gaming machine P8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine P7, the displacement member is formed in a concave curved shape that is concave on the back side, so that when the light irradiated from the light emitting means to the displacement member is reflected toward the decorative member, the reflected light is less likely to diffuse (the light is easier to concentrate). Therefore, by concentrating the light reflected by the displacement member and emitted from the decorative member, the difference in the amount of light is made clear, making it easier for the player to recognize the position of the gaming ball.

Gaming machine P9 is characterized in that, among the gaming machines P1 to P8, the decorative member is formed so as to bulge convexly in the direction of irradiation of the light-emitting means.

According to gaming machine P9, in addition to the effects of gaming machines P1 to P8, the decorative member is formed to bulge convexly in the direction of irradiation of the light emitting means, so that the light of the light emitting means transmitted through the decorative member can be easily diffused. As a result, the part where the amount of light formed by the game ball received in the receiving section differs can be enlarged and recognized by the player, so that the position of the game ball received in the receiving section can be easily recognized by the player.

Gaming machine P10 is characterized in that, in the gaming machines 01 to P9, the light-emitting means is capable of emitting light in at least two colors.

According to gaming machine P10, in addition to the effects of gaming machines P1 to P9, the light-emitting means is capable of emitting light in at least two colors, so that the degree of expectation can be changed depending on the position where the receiving section is placed, depending on the light-emitting color.

For example, by dividing the light emission into a first region of a first light emission color and a second region of a second light emission color, and arranging the receiving portion in the first region, the expectation of a big win is increased.
This makes it easier for the player to focus on the position of the game ball held in the receiving section.

In this case, the range of the first area and the range of the second area can be changed simply by changing the light color, so by changing the light-emitting area, multiple different presentation forms can be created, making it easier to interest the player.

<Feature Q Group> (Always take launch sensor when descending with up and down tilt)
Gaming machine Q1 has a movable means configured to be movable between a first position and a second position different from the first position, a movable control means capable of controlling the movement of the movable means, and a first position detection means capable of detecting that the movable means is at the first position, characterized in that when moving the movable means from the first position to the second position, the movable control means moves the movable means based on predetermined movement data for moving the movable means from the first position to the second position and then stops the movable means, and when moving the movable means from the second position to the first position, the movable control means moves the movable means based on movement data for moving the movable means from the second position toward the first position, and controls the movable means to stop when the movable means is detected by the first position detection means.

Conventionally, when a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine receives a game ball in a starting hole on the game board, a lottery is held to determine whether the game will be a success or failure, and if the lottery result is a success, a bonus game that is advantageous to the player is executed. Furthermore, a performance is executed in which the lottery result is notified to the player after a pattern or the like is displayed variably for a certain period of time, and a gaming machine has been proposed that notifies the player of various performance modes by executing a performance in which a movable object or the like is moved during the period in which the performance is executed (for example, JP 2012-130802 A). However, the above gaming machine executes a stop control to stop a movable object at a predetermined stop position when moving the movable object, but there is a problem that the movable object cannot be stopped at the predetermined stop position when stopping it, and the stop position varies. The object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can stably control the movement of a movable object in the above gaming machine.

According to gaming machine Q1, when moving from the first position to the second position, the movement is based on the movement data, which allows control with less control load than when the movement is performed while constantly detecting the movement position, but when moving from the second position to the first position, the moving means is stopped and controlled based on the result detected by the detection means, so even if the position of the moving means moved to the first position actually varies, it can be stopped and controlled at a more accurate first position, preventing a problem in which the variation when moved to the first position becomes large depending on the number of movements, and has the effect of allowing the movable object to be stably controlled.

In gaming machine Q1, the movable means has a launching means capable of launching gaming balls, and the launching means is configured to launch gaming balls when moved to the first position. Gaming machine Q2.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine Q1, gaming machine Q2 has the effect of suppressing problems such as variation in the accuracy of the launch of gaming balls due to accurate movement to the first position, since the gaming balls are launched while moved to the first position.

A gaming machine Q3, which has a base member that movably fixes the movable means in the gaming machine Q1 or Q2, and the movable means has at least an axis part that is pivotally supported on the base member at one end, a moving means that moves a gaming ball from the one end to the other end, and an opening at the other end for launching the gaming ball by the launching means, and the movable means is configured to be movable from an origin position to the first position set at a position rotated in a first direction around the axis part by a first rotation amount, and to be movable from the first position to the second position set at a position rotated from the origin position to the first direction around the axis part by a second rotation amount.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines Q1 and Q2, gaming machine Q3 has a configuration in which the gaming ball is moved by the moving means, causing the center of gravity of the movable means to change and making stopping control difficult, but since it is configured to be stopped accurately at the first position, it has the effect of suppressing malfunctions caused by stopping control of the movable means.

In gaming machine Q3, the moving means is characterized in that the moving means starts moving the gaming ball from the shaft portion to the other end side after the moving control from the origin position to the first position is started. Gaming machine Q4.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine Q3, gaming machine Q4 has the effect of suppressing a malfunction in which the weight of the other end becomes heavy and the moving load increases when the gaming ball moves to the other end before rotating to the first position. Also, by moving the gaming ball to the first position after the movement control is started, it is possible to move the gaming ball to the other end in a way that is more in line with the timing when the moving means moves to the first position.

<Feature R group> (sensor detection of power recovery)
A gaming machine R1 comprising: an entry means through which a gaming ball can enter; movable means capable of moving from a first position to a second position different from the first position; and guiding means capable of guiding a gaming ball that has entered the entry means to the movable means, wherein the movable means comprises an opening means through which the gaming ball guided to the guiding means can enter, a holding means capable of holding a gaming ball that has entered through the opening means, and a moving means capable of moving the gaming ball held by the holding means, and wherein the gaming machine comprises a discharge control means capable of causing the moving means to execute a discharge operation capable of discharging a gaming ball that has entered through the opening means outside the movable means.

Conventionally, gaming machines such as pachinko machines have been proposed that move movable objects to positions visible to the player as one of the effects for notifying the player of the results of a win or loss determination, giving the player a novel impression and preventing the player from quickly becoming bored with the game (for example, JP 2012-130802 A). However, the above gaming machines have had problems with malfunctions caused by the movement. The objective of this invention is to provide a gaming machine that can suppress malfunctions in the above gaming machine.

According to gaming machine R1, even if the movable means is configured to allow gaming balls to enter and to move the entered gaming balls, it is configured so that gaming balls that enter the movable means can be discharged to the outside by a discharge operation. Therefore, even if an excessive number of gaming balls enter the movable means, the gaming balls can be discharged and the machine can operate normally, and malfunctions can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine R1, a main control means capable of controlling the game, a slave control means capable of controlling the game based on a control signal output from the main control means, and a ball entry detection means capable of detecting that a game ball has entered the ball entry means, the main control means has an output means for outputting a ball entry signal to the slave control means based on the ball entry detection means detecting that a game ball has entered, the slave control means has an opening detection means capable of detecting that a game ball has entered through the opening means, a movable control means capable of movably controlling the movable means, an initial operation control means for causing the movable control means to execute a predetermined initial operation on the movable means when the power to the gaming machine is turned on, and an initial discharge operation control means for causing the discharge control means to execute the discharge operation based on the opening detection means detecting that a game ball has entered, at least for the period until the initial operation is completed, when the ball entry signal is received during the period during which the initial operation is being performed.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine R1, gaming machine R2 has the effect of suppressing malfunctions during execution of the initial operation, because if there is a possibility that a gaming ball will enter the movable means while the initial operation is being performed, monitoring is performed by the opening detection means and the ball enters, and the ejection operation is performed after the initial operation is completed.

A gaming machine R3 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine R2, when the holding means is moved to a predetermined position by the moving means, the holding means is configured to be able to hold a gaming ball that has entered through the opening means.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine R2, gaming machine R3 has the effect of being able to control the acceptance of gaming balls by limiting the timing at which the holding means can hold the gaming balls, since the holding means is configured to be able to hold gaming balls that have entered through the opening means by being moved to a predetermined position by the moving means.

Gaming machine R3 is characterized in that, in gaming machine R2 or R3, when the ball entrance signal is received during the period in which the initial operation is being performed, it has a judgment control execution means that executes judgment control to determine whether a gaming ball is detected by the opening detection means for a period until a predetermined period has elapsed after the completion of the initial operation.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines R2 and R3, gaming machine R3 has the following advantages: if a ball-entering signal is received while the initial operation is being performed, the opening detection means determines whether a gaming ball has been detected; therefore, in a state in which the gaming ball cannot enter the movable means, the detection process can be omitted, thereby reducing the control load.

Gaming machine R4 is characterized in that in gaming machine R3, the predetermined period is the period from when a specific control signal is received from the main control means until a predetermined number of seconds has elapsed.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine R3, gaming machine R4 has the effect of being executed after a specific control signal is output, which makes it possible to make the timing of the ejection operation constant and execute the ejection operation at the appropriate timing.

In any of the gaming machines R1 to R4, the main control means has a judgment means capable of executing a judgment, a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying identification information showing the judgment result by the judgment means on the display means, a dynamic display mode determination means for determining the dynamic display mode of the identification information executed by the dynamic display means, and a special state setting means for changing the ball entry means to a special state in which it is easy for a gaming ball to enter when the identification information showing the specific judgment result is displayed stationary on the display means. The gaming machine R5 is characterized in that it has the following features: a judgment means for executing a judgment, a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying identification information showing the judgment result on the display means, and a dynamic display mode determination means for determining the dynamic display mode of the identification information executed by the dynamic display means, and a special state setting means for changing the ball entry means to a special state in which it is easy for a gaming ball to enter the ball when the identification information showing the specific judgment result is displayed stationary on the display means.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines R1 to R4, gaming machine R5 has the effect of providing the player with an opportunity to get the gaming ball into the movable means, since it becomes easier for the gaming ball to enter the ball entry means when a specific judgment result is obtained, thereby providing the player with an innovative presentation.

Gaming machine R6 is characterized in that in gaming machine R5, the specific secondary control signal is a signal that is output based on the end of the special state.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine R5, gaming machine R6 can perform the ejection operation after the special state ends, making it possible to perform the ejection operation after it becomes difficult for the gaming ball to enter the movable means, which has the effect of further reducing malfunctions.

<Feature S Group> (Sound effects when special electric devices win)
A gaming machine having a first ball entry means through which a gaming ball can enter, a first detection means capable of detecting that a gaming ball has entered the first ball entry means, a first signal output means for outputting a first signal when the first detection means detects that a gaming ball has entered, a first flow path through which a gaming ball that has entered the first ball entry means can pass, and a visual confirmation section for making it possible to visually confirm a gaming ball passing through a part of the first flow path, the gaming machine further comprising a second ball entry means through which a gaming ball that has not entered the first ball entry means can enter, and a visual confirmation section for confirming that a gaming ball has entered the second ball entry means. a second detection means capable of detecting a ball entering the game machine S1, a second signal output means for outputting a second signal when the second detection means detects that a game ball has entered the game machine S1, a first flow path guiding means for guiding the game ball that has entered the second ball entry means to the first flow path, a first effect execution means for executing a first effect based on the elapse of a first period since receiving the first signal, and a second effect execution means for executing a second effect based on the elapse of a second period since receiving the second signal.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a gaming ball enters a starting hole provided on the gaming board, a lottery is held to see whether the game will be a success or failure, and if the lottery result is a success, a bonus game that gives the player an advantage is executed. (For example, JP 2012-217766 A). However, the above gaming machines have a problem in that the game becomes monotonous during the bonus game, and players get bored with the game. The objective of this invention is to provide a gaming machine that can prevent the problem of players getting bored with the game early on in the above gaming machine.

According to the gaming machine S1, the second presentation is executed when a gaming ball that does not enter the first ball entry means but enters the second ball entry means passes through the viewing section, so that the presentation can be diversified in combination with the first presentation resulting from the ball entering the ball entry means, and there is an effect of suppressing the problem of players becoming bored with the game early on.

A gaming machine S2 has a display means for displaying information corresponding to a gaming ball that has entered the first ball entry means in the gaming machine S1, and an update means for updating the information displayed on the display means in accordance with the gaming ball that has entered the first ball entry means, the update means updating the information at least in accordance with the timing at which the second performance is executed.

In addition to the effects of the gaming machine S1, the gaming machine S2 has the effect of making the player believe that information has been updated for gaming balls that have not entered the first ball entry means, and making the player believe that all gaming balls, including those that have entered the second ball entry means, have entered the ball entry means.

A gaming machine S3 is characterized in that it has a third guiding means for guiding a gaming ball that has not entered the first ball entry means or the second ball entry means to the first guide path, and a third performance execution means for executing a third performance when the gaming ball guided by the third guiding means reaches the visual recognition section, in the gaming machine S1 or S2.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines S1 and S2, gaming machine S3 has the effect that the gaming ball guided to the third guidance means is also guided to the visual recognition section and the third performance is executed, so that it is possible to give the player the impression that the gaming ball that has entered the ball entry means passes through the visual recognition section, and thus gives the player the impression that many gaming balls are entering the ball entry means.

A gaming machine S4 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine S3, the update means updates the information at least at the timing when the third performance is executed.

In addition to the effect of gaming machine S3, gaming machine S4 updates information in accordance with the timing at which the third performance is executed, making it seem as if a gaming ball that has not entered the first or second ball entry means has entered the first ball entry means, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

In any of the gaming machines S1 to S4, the first period is set to be equal to or longer than the first flow-down period required for a gaming ball that has entered the first ball entry means to reach the visual recognition section, and the second period is set to be equal to or longer than the second flow-down period required for a gaming ball that has entered the second ball entry means to reach the visual recognition section. Gaming machine S5 is characterized in that.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines S1 to S4, the gaming machine S5 has the effect of providing a performance that coincides with the timing of the ball reaching the visible area, making the visible area seem like a ball-entering means.

Gaming machine S6 is characterized in that, in any one of gaming machines S1 to S5, an opening through which a gaming ball can enter is formed as part of the first flow path in the visual confirmation section, and the gaming ball entering the opening is configured to be visually confirmed.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines S1 to S5, gaming machine S6 has the effect of making the opening formed in the visual section appear as a ball entry means, making it appear as if more gaming balls are entering the ball entry means.

<Feature T group> (pseudo jackpot performance during potential state)
a display means for displaying identification information showing a result of the determination by the determination means; a bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game that is advantageous to a player when the identification information showing a first determination result is displayed on the display means; a game state setting means for setting a first game state and a second game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state after the bonus game executed by the bonus game execution means is completed; a bonus game performance execution means for executing a bonus game performance when the bonus game is being executed by the bonus game execution means; and a pseudo bonus game performance execution means for simulating the bonus game performance when the second game state is set by the game state setting means.

In the past, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board, a lottery is held to determine whether the game will be a success or failure, and if the lottery result is a success, a bonus game in which a large number of prize balls can be awarded to the player is executed. Furthermore, a gaming machine has been proposed that is configured to be able to set a first gaming state and a second gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state as the gaming state in which the above-mentioned lottery is executed, and when the second gaming state is set, a special game in which prize balls can be awarded to the player is easily executed (for example, JP 2013-226399 A). Incidentally, the above-mentioned gaming machine can increase the interest of the game because it is possible to award prize balls to the player through the bonus game and the special game, but there was a problem that the gameplay becomes complicated and the player's motivation to play is reduced because it is necessary to execute a game aiming at the bonus game and a game aiming at the special game. The objective of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that prevents a decline in motivation to play and improves the enjoyment of the game.

According to gaming machine T1, when a game state that is advantageous to the player is set, a pseudo bonus game presentation is executed, so the content of the presentation executed in a state that is advantageous to the player can be unified. Therefore, by executing a presentation that is easy for the player to understand, it has the effect of preventing a decrease in motivation to play and increasing the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, because the bonus game presentation can be simulated even when the bonus game is not being played, the player can be made to believe that bonus games are being played frequently. This has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game.

Gaming machine T2 has a variable ball entry means that can change between a first state in which a ball can enter and a second state in which it is more difficult for a ball to enter than the first state in gaming machine T1, a pseudo ball entry means that allows at least a gaming ball that has entered the variable ball entry means to enter, and a variable control means that changes the variable ball entry means to the first state when the bonus game is executed by the bonus game execution means, and the pseudo ball entry means is a means by which a gaming ball enters when the pseudo bonus game performance is executed by the pseudo bonus game performance execution means.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine T1, gaming machine T2 has the effect of being able to execute a realistic pseudo performance, since a performance in which a gaming ball enters a pseudo ball entry means is executed when a pseudo bonus game performance is executed.

Gaming machine T3 is characterized in that it has a performance condition determination means for determining whether a predetermined performance condition is met when the second gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means in gaming machine T1 or T2, and the pseudo bonus game performance execution means executes the pseudo bonus game performance when the performance condition determination means determines that the predetermined performance condition is met.

Gaming machine T3 provides the following effect in addition to the effect of gaming machines T1 or T2. That is, if a predetermined presentation condition is not met, the pseudo bonus game presentation will not be executed even during the second gaming state. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to prevent the pseudo bonus game presentation from being executed, for example, when the period during which the second gaming state is set is short (shorter than the execution period of one bonus game). This has the effect of preventing the execution of a presentation that gives the player a sense of discomfort, thereby enhancing the presentation effect of the presentation that is executed.

A gaming machine T4, which has an upper limit setting means for setting an upper limit of the number of times the second gaming state is set in succession after the end of the big win game, and a set number measuring means for measuring the number of times the second gaming state is set in succession by the gaming state setting means, and the performance condition determining means determines that the performance condition is established when it is determined that the number of times measured by the set number measuring means is less than a predetermined number.

Gaming machine T4 provides the following effect in addition to the effect provided by gaming machine T3. That is, it sets an upper limit on the number of times the second gaming state can be set in succession, and determines how many times the second gaming presentation has been set in succession. If the number of times the second gaming state has been set in succession is less than a predetermined number, the presentation condition is met. This has the effect of increasing interest in the game, since a stable pseudo bonus gaming presentation can be executed while ensuring the period during which the second gaming state is set.

Gaming machine T5 is characterized in that it has a second game state presentation execution means capable of executing a second game state presentation different from the pseudo bonus game presentation when the presentation condition determination means determines that the number of times measured by the set number measurement means is greater than a predetermined number of times in gaming machine T4.

Gaming machine T5 has the following effect in addition to the effect of gaming machine T4. That is, when the number of consecutive settings of the second gaming state is greater than a predetermined number, a specific second gaming state presentation is executed without executing a pseudo bonus gaming presentation, which has the effect of executing a presentation that is easy for the player to understand.

<Feature U group> (Point consumption performance)
a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying, on a display means, an identification information indicating a particular judgment result; a dynamic display mode determination means for determining a dynamic display mode of the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means; and a bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game that is advantageous to a player when the identification information indicating a particular judgment result is statically displayed on the display means, the gaming machine U1 having: a ball entry means through which a gaming ball can enter; a judgment means for executing, on a display means, an identification information indicating a particular judgment result;

Conventionally, when a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine receives a game ball in a starting hole on the game board, a lottery is held to determine whether the game will be a win or a lose, and if the lottery result is a win, a bonus game that is advantageous to the player is executed. As an effect for displaying the lottery result, multiple symbols for notifying the lottery result are displayed in a variable manner, and the lottery result is notified by the combination of the symbols that are displayed in a stopped state. As an effect other than the symbols, a gaming machine has been proposed that executes a notice effect that notifies the player of the lottery result before the symbols are stopped (for example, JP 2012-217766 A). However, the above gaming machine has a problem that the player becomes bored with the executed effect during the period until the lottery result is a win. The objective of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can suppress the problem of the player becoming bored with the game early in the above gaming machine.

According to the gaming machine U1, the content of the dynamic display mode related to the notification of the judgment result can be changed according to the numerical information accumulated by the executed numerical presentation, so that the execution of the numerical presentation can generate interest in accumulating numerical information, and it has the effect of preventing players from becoming bored with the gaming machine too early.

A gaming machine U2 characterized in that, in the gaming machine U1, when the dynamic display mode determination control means determines the part of the mode, the corresponding numerical information is updated and stored so as to be subtracted from the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means.

In addition to the effect of gaming machine U1, gaming machine U2 determines a dynamic display mode corresponding to the numerical information, and subtracts the accumulated numerical information, so that it is possible to execute a performance that provides a dynamic display mode in exchange for using the numerical information, which has the effect of increasing the interest of the player.

A gaming machine U3 is characterized in that it has a notification means for notifying information corresponding to the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means in the gaming machine U1 or U2.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines U1 and U2, gaming machine U3 notifies the player of information corresponding to the stored numerical information, making it easier for the player to recognize the status of the accumulated numerical information.

A gaming machine U4 is characterized in that it has a numerical information determination means for determining the numerical information to be given to the player by the numerical effect executed by the numerical effect execution means in any one of the gaming machines U1 to U3, and the numerical information determination means is configured to be able to determine numerical information corresponding to the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines U1 to U3, gaming machine U4 has the advantage that the numerical information provided by the numerical effects can be determined in accordance with the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means, making it possible to provide numerical information in accordance with the numerical information held by the player.

<Feature Group V> (Common acquisition process of button press timing)
A gaming machine V1 having an operating means that can be operated by a player, an operation effect execution means for executing a predetermined operation effect based on the operation of the operating means, a valid period setting means for setting a valid period during which the operation on the operating means is valid, and an effect setting means for setting a presentation mode for a predetermined period including the valid period set by the valid period setting means, characterized in that the gaming machine V1 has a calculation means for calculating an operation timing based on the valid period set by the valid period setting means when the operating means is operated during the valid period, and an effect mode setting means for setting the presentation mode of the operation effect executed by the operation effect execution means based on the operation timing calculated by the calculation means.

Conventionally, some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, hold a winning lottery and execute a variable display effect on a display device to show the lottery result. Furthermore, gaming machines have been proposed that are provided with multiple suggestive effects to suggest the lottery result, and execute a specific suggestive effect as part of the multiple suggestive effects based on the operation result of an operating means that can be operated by the player (for example, JP 2004-283442 A). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines, the specific suggestive effect is executed regardless of the timing of the operation of the operating means, which reduces the player's motivation to operate the operating means, resulting in a problem in which the player quickly becomes bored with the game.

With gaming machine V1, the presentation mode of the operation presentation can be set based on the operation timing of the operating means during the valid period, so a variety of presentations can be provided to the player. This has the effect of preventing the player from becoming bored with the gaming machine too quickly.

A gaming machine V2, in which the calculation means in the gaming machine V1 calculates the ratio between the valid period and the remaining period of the valid period at the time when the operating means is operated.

Gaming machine V2 provides the following effect in addition to the effect provided by gaming machine V1. That is, the presentation mode of the operation presentation is set based on the ratio between the valid period and the remaining period of the valid period calculated based on the timing at which the operation means is operated. As a result, since the operation presentation is set based on the length of the valid period to be set and the operation timing of the operation means, a variety of operation presentations can be set, which has the effect of enhancing the presentation effect.

When using the configuration of gaming machine V2, it is preferable to configure it so that different effective periods are set for the same presentation mode set by the presentation setting means. By configuring it in this way, even if the operation means is operated at the same timing for the presentation mode being executed, the calculation result of the calculation means can be made different by setting different effective periods, and the presentation mode of the operation presentation can be changed.

A gaming machine V3 is characterized in that it has a display means capable of displaying a predetermined effect and a moving means capable of executing a predetermined moving effect in the gaming machine V1 or V2, the effect setting means sets the effect mode to be executed on the display means, and the operation effect execution means executes the operation effect using the moving means.

Gaming machine V3 provides the following effect in addition to the effect of gaming machines V1 or V2. That is, if the effect operation means is operated while an effect displayed on the display means is being executed, an operation effect that moves the movable means is executed, so that no matter when the operation means is operated within the valid period, the operation effect can be executed without changing the content of the effect displayed on the display means. This has the effect of simplifying the control for executing the operation effect, and reducing manufacturing costs.

Gaming machine V4 is characterized in that, in gaming machine V2 or V3, the validity period setting means is capable of setting different validity periods when the same presentation mode is set by the presentation setting means.

Gaming machine V4 has the following effect in addition to the effect of gaming machine V2 or 3. That is, even if the operation means is operated at the same timing for the currently executed presentation mode, by varying the set effective period, the calculation result of the calculation means can be made different, and the presentation mode of the operation presentation can be varied. Therefore, a variety of operation presentations can be provided to a player who always operates the operation means at a fixed timing, and there is an effect of preventing the player from becoming bored with the game too early.

A gaming machine V5, which is any one of the gaming machines V2 to V4, has a first division means for dividing the ratio calculated by the calculation means according to a first condition, a second division means for dividing the ratio according to a second condition different from the first condition, and a division decision means for deciding whether to divide the ratio according to the first division means or the second division means, and the presentation mode setting means sets the presentation mode of the operation presentation based on the contents determined by the division decision means.

Gaming machine V5 has the following effect in addition to the effect of any of gaming machines V2 to V4. That is, the ratios calculated by the calculation means are divided under different conditions, and the presentation mode of the operation presentation is set based on the contents of the division, so that even if the calculation results of the calculation means are the same, different operation presentations can be executed. This has the effect of providing a variety of operation presentations to the player, and preventing the player from becoming bored with the game too early.

<Feature W group> (Big hit prediction result is notified)
a game machine having a ball entry means through which a game ball can enter, an acquisition means capable of acquiring information based on the entry of a game ball into the ball entry means, a storage means for storing the information acquired by the acquisition means, a judgment means capable of making a judgment based on the information stored in the storage means, a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying, on a display means, an identification information showing a judgment result by the judgment means, a bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game advantageous to a player when the identification information showing a specific judgment result is statically displayed on the display means, and a bonus game type determination means for determining the type of the bonus game to be executed based on the information stored in the storage means when the bonus game is executed by the bonus game execution means, a pre-determination means for executing a pre-determination based on the information obtained by the pre-determination means, a pre-notification means for notifying pre-information indicating the result of the pre-determination by the pre-determination means before dynamic display of the identification information indicating the determination result corresponding to the pre-determined information is started, a bonus game type pre-determination means for determining in advance, when the determination means determines a specific determination result, the type of bonus game to be determined by the bonus game type determination means based on the information stored in the storage means before being determined by the determination means, and a pre-bonus game type notification means for notifying pre-determination information indicating the determination result by the bonus game type pre-determination means before dynamic display of the identification information indicating the determination result of the determined information is started.

In the past, when a gaming ball entered a starting hole on the game board of a pachinko machine or other gaming machine, a lottery was held to determine whether the game would be a win or a loss, and if the lottery result was a win, a bonus game that was advantageous to the player was executed. Different types of bonuses that multiple types of players can obtain were set for the bonus games executed, and a single bonus game type was determined in the event of a win, so that gaming machines that differentiated the player's interest depending on the type of bonus game being executed even in the event of a win were proposed (for example, JP 2012-217766 A). However, the above gaming machines were required to not only provide a performance that increased interest in wins and losses, but also to increase interest in the types of bonus games. The objective of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that further increases the interest of the game among the above gaming machines.

According to gaming machine W1, advance game information corresponding to the type of bonus game that will be executed if a win occurs is also notified, so that the player can be provided with a presentation that matches the notification results based on the advance judgment, which has the effect of increasing the interest of the game.

A gaming machine W2 is characterized in that it has a pattern display means for displaying on the display means a pattern corresponding to the information stored in the memory means before being determined by the determination means in the gaming machine W1, and the advance notification means notifies by varying the display mode of the pattern displayed by the pattern display means.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine W1, gaming machine W2 allows players to identify information related to the judgment result by the pattern while it is stored in the storage means before the identification information is dynamically displayed, and allows players to be interested not only in the judgment results of the dynamically displayed identification information, but also in the judgment results stored in the storage means, which has the effect of preventing players from becoming bored with the game too quickly.

Gaming machine W3 is characterized in that, in gaming machine W1 or W2, it has a presentation means for executing a presentation when the bonus game is executed, and the advance bonus game type notification means causes the presentation means to execute a specific presentation.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines W1 and W2, gaming machine W3 has the effect of making it easy to identify that the notification is related to a bonus game because the presentation means that executes the presentation when a bonus game is executed early notifies the player about the type of bonus game.

Gaming machine W4 is characterized in that in gaming machine W3, the advance bonus game type notification means issues a notification in response to the advance notification means executing a notification to indicate the advance judgment.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine W3, gaming machine W4 also notifies the player of the bonus game type in advance in response to the execution of advance notification of the judgment result, which has the effect of providing the player with advance notification that combines the notification content with the judgment result.

<Feature X group> (small win notification and charge pattern)
a game machine having an entry means through which a game ball can enter, an acquisition means capable of acquiring information based on the entry of a game ball into the entry means, a storage means for storing the information acquired by the acquisition means, a first judgment means for executing a first judgment based on the information stored in the storage means, a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying on a display means an identification information showing a first judgment result by the first judgment means, a bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game which is advantageous to a player when the identification information showing a specific first judgment result is statically displayed on the display means, a second judgment means for executing a second judgment based on the establishment of a judgment condition, and a variable means for varying the state of the entry means so that the game ball can enter easily when the second judgment result by the second judgment means is a specific second judgment result, The gaming machine X1 is characterized in that the second judgment result includes a first judgment type for changing the variable means to the ball-scoring easy state and a second judgment type for changing the variable means to a special ball-scoring easy state so that the ball-scoring means is more likely to have a game ball enter the ball-scoring means than the first judgment type, the bonus game execution means is capable of executing a special game different from the bonus game when the judgment means judges a special first judgment result different from the specific judgment result, the identification information is displayed as special identification information as a stop display mode for indicating the special first judgment result, and when a special game judged to be the specific second judgment result corresponding to the second judgment type is executed during the dynamic display of the identification information, the identification information being dynamically displayed is switched to the special identification information and temporarily stopped before the special game is executed.

Conventionally, when a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine receives a game ball in a starting hole on the game board, a lottery is held to determine whether the game will be a win or a lose, and if the lottery result is a win, a bonus game that is advantageous to the player is executed. As an effect for displaying the lottery result, multiple symbols for notifying the lottery result are displayed in a variable manner, and the lottery result is notified by the combination of the symbols that are displayed in a stopped state. As an effect other than the symbols, a gaming machine has been proposed that executes a notice effect that notifies the player of the lottery result before the symbols are stopped (for example, JP 2012-217766 A). However, the above gaming machine has a problem that the player becomes bored with the executed effect during the period until the lottery result is a win. The objective of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can suppress the problem of the player becoming bored with the game early in the above gaming machine.

The gaming machine X1 can increase the frequency with which the special identification information is displayed, which has the effect of reducing the inconvenience of players becoming bored with the game during the period until a specific judgment result is announced due to the special identification information being displayed.

The gaming machine X2 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine X1, it has a dynamic display mode determination means for determining the dynamic display mode of the identification information when the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display mode determination means determines whether the special game is executed during the dynamic display and determines the dynamic display mode based on the determination result.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine X1, gaming machine X2 has the effect of facilitating the setting of special identification information by determining whether a special game is being executed before dynamic display.

<Feature Y Group> (Multiple button effects notify the end of the valid time at the same time)
a game machine Y1 having an operation means operable by a player, an operation effect setting means for setting an operation effect to be executed corresponding to the operation of the operation means, and a valid period setting means for setting a valid period that is determined to be valid when the operation means is operated, corresponding to the operation effect set by the operation effect setting means, the operation effect setting means is capable of setting a plurality of the operation effects, the valid period setting means determines one valid period for the plurality of operation effects set by the operation effect setting means, the plurality of operation effects are executed in a predetermined order based on the fact that one operation is executed by the player within the valid period, and the notification means notifies identification information for indicating individual valid periods corresponding to each of the plurality of operation effects in accordance with the set valid period.

In the past, when a gaming ball enters a starting hole on the game board of a pachinko machine or other gaming machine, a lottery is held to determine whether the game will be a win or a lose, and if the lottery result is a win, a bonus game that is advantageous to the player is executed. When the lottery result is announced, a symbol or the like for announcing the lottery result is displayed in a variable time determined by the lottery, and then the combination of symbols showing the lottery result is displayed stationary to announce the lottery result. During the period in which the variable display is executed, a gaming machine has been proposed in which a performance is executed in which a notice display or the like regarding the announced lottery result is displayed by operating an operation unit that the player can operate (for example, JP 2012-217766 A). However, there has been a demand for the above gaming machine to further increase the interest in the game by suitably performing a variety of performances using the operation means. The objective of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that further increases the interest in the game among the above gaming machines.

According to gaming machine Y1, even if multiple operation effects are set, the effective operation period for each is notified, so that the period during which the operation means can be operated can be recognized as a separate operation effect, which has the effect of increasing the interest of the game.

Gaming machine Y2 is characterized in that in gaming machine Y1, the identification information is notified by varying the individual validity periods in sequence in accordance with the predetermined order in response to the decrease in the validity period.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine Y1, gaming machine Y2 has the effect of allowing the player to identify the order in which multiple operation effects are executed, since the identification information indicating the individual validity periods is displayed in a variable manner in accordance with the order in which the operation effects are executed.

Gaming machine Y3 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine Y2, when the multiple operation effects are set and the validity period expires, each of the identification information notified is changed so that the expiration of the validity period is notified at the same time.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine Y2, gaming machine Y3 can notify the player that an individual validity period has elapsed in accordance with the lapse of the validity period, thereby providing the effect of correctly notifying the player of the lapse of the validity period.

Gaming machine Y4 is characterized in that, among gaming machines Y1 to Y3, when the identification information changes in response to a decrease in the validity period, the identification information is updated and changed after being displayed in a flashing manner.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines Y1 to Y3, gaming machine Y4 has the effect of making it difficult to notice even if the speed at which the identification information is changed is not constant, since the identification information is changed after flashing, and thus facilitating the control of notifying the effective time.

<Feature Z> (Automatic button press)
Gaming machine Z1 has an operation means that can be operated by a player, an operation effect setting means for setting an operation effect to be executed when the operation means is operated, a validity period setting means for setting a validity period during which operation by the operation means is determined to be valid when the operation effect is set by the operation effect setting means, and a notification means for notifying identification information corresponding to the set validity period when the validity period is set by the validity period setting means, characterized in that the notification means notifies of a specific notification mode when the validity period becomes equal to or shorter than a predetermined period.

In the past, when a gaming ball enters a starting hole on the game board of a pachinko machine or other gaming machine, a lottery is held to determine whether the game will be a win or a lose, and if the lottery result is a win, a bonus game that is advantageous to the player is executed. When the lottery result is announced, a symbol or the like for announcing the lottery result is displayed in a variable time determined by the lottery, and then the combination of symbols showing the lottery result is displayed stationary to announce the lottery result. During the period in which the variable display is executed, a gaming machine has been proposed in which a performance is executed in which a notice display or the like regarding the announced lottery result is displayed by operating an operation unit that the player can operate (for example, JP 2012-217766 A). However, there has been a demand for the above gaming machine to further increase the interest in the game by suitably performing a variety of performances using the operation means. The objective of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that further increases the interest in the game among the above gaming machines.

According to gaming machine Z1, when the validity period reaches a predetermined period, a specific notification mode is issued, so that the player can be notified in an easily understandable manner that a specific period has been reached, which has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game.

A gaming machine Z2, which has a suggestion mode display means for displaying on a display means a suggestion mode suggesting to a player that it is the period during which the operating means is to be operated during the period during which the valid period is set, and the suggestion mode display means changes and displays the suggestion mode to an operation-completed suggestion mode indicating that the operating means has been operated based on the operation of the operating means, and displays a pseudo-operation mode indicating that the operating means has been pseudo-operated in a mode different from the operation-completed suggestion mode based on the operation of the operating means not being operated even when the valid period is equal to or less than a predetermined period.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine Z1, gaming machine Z2 has the effect of displaying a pseudo operation mode, which allows the player to easily recognize that the valid period has elapsed, even if an operation presentation is automatically executed as the valid period elapses.

Gaming machine Z3 is characterized in that in gaming machine Z2, the suggestive mode is configured with a pattern that imitates the shape of the operating means, and the pseudo-operation mode is configured with a performance mode that operates the pattern.

Gaming machine Z3 has the effect of clearly notifying the player that an operation presentation has been performed due to the lapse of the valid period, in addition to the effect of gaming machine Z2.

Gaming machine Z4 is characterized in that, in any of gaming machines Z1 to Z3, if the operating means is operated at the timing when a specific notification mode is displayed, a special notification mode is notified in addition to the specific notification mode.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines Z1 to Z3, gaming machine Z4 has the effect of notifying the player of a special notification mode when the operating means is operated at the timing when a specific notification mode is displayed, thereby allowing the player to realize that a performance has been executed as a result of the operation.

Among the gaming machines described above, the gaming machine γ1 is characterized in that the gaming machine is a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of a slot machine is "a gaming machine equipped with a variable display means for dynamically displaying a string of identification information consisting of a plurality of identification information and then definitively displaying the identification information, and equipped with a special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, the dynamic display of the identification information being started due to the operation of a start operating means (e.g., an operating lever), the dynamic display of the identification information being stopped due to the operation of a stop operating means (a stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and the necessary condition being that the definitive identification information at the time of stopping is a specific identification information." In this case, typical examples of the gaming medium include coins, medals, etc.

Among the above-mentioned gaming machines, the gaming machine γ2 is characterized in that the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Among them, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine includes a control handle, which is operated to launch a ball into a predetermined gaming area, and the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is fixed and stopped after a predetermined time, as a necessary condition that the ball enters (or passes through) an operating port arranged at a predetermined position in the gaming area. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning port) arranged at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to allow the ball to win, and a value (including not only prize balls but also data written to a magnetic card, etc.) according to the number of winning balls is given.

Among the above-mentioned gaming machines, the gaming machine γ3 is characterized in that the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the combined gaming machine is "a gaming machine having a variable display means for dynamically displaying a sequence of identification information consisting of a plurality of identification information and then definitively displaying the identification information, a special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, in which the variation of the identification information is started due to the operation of a start operating means (e.g., an operating lever), the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of a stop operating means (e.g., a stop button) or by the passage of a predetermined time, and the definitive identification information at the time of the stop is a specific identification information as a necessary condition, using balls as a gaming medium, and a predetermined number of balls are required to start the dynamic display of the identification information, and a large number of balls are paid out when the special gaming state is generated."
＜Other＞
Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a gaming ball enters a starting hole provided on the gaming board, a lottery is held to determine whether the game will be a win or a lose, and if the lottery result is a win, a bonus game that is advantageous to the player is executed. When the lottery result is announced, a symbol or the like for announcing the lottery result is displayed in a variable manner at a variable time determined by the lottery, and then the result is announced by displaying a combination of symbols showing the lottery result in a stationary manner. During the period in which the variable display is executed, a gaming machine has been proposed in which a performance is executed in which a preview display or the like regarding the announced lottery result is displayed by operating an operation unit that the player can operate (for example, Patent Document 1: Publication No. 2012-217766).
However, there has been a demand for the above gaming machine to further enhance the entertainment value of the game by suitably implementing a variety of effects using the operating means. The object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that further enhances the entertainment value of the game.
<Means>
In order to achieve this purpose, the gaming machine of technical idea 1 has an operation means that can be operated by a player, an operation performance setting means for setting an operation performance to be executed when the operation means is operated, a validity period setting means for setting a validity period during which operation by the operation means is determined to be valid when the operation performance is set by the operation performance setting means, and a notification means for notifying identification information corresponding to the set validity period when the validity period is set by the validity period setting means, and the notification means notifies a specific notification mode based on the validity period becoming equal to or less than a predetermined period.
The gaming machine of technical idea 2 is a gaming machine described in technical idea 1, and has a suggestion mode display means for causing a display means to display a suggestion mode suggesting to the player that it is the period in which to operate the operating means during the period in which the valid period is set, and the suggestion mode display means changes and displays the suggestion mode to an operated suggestion mode indicating that the operating means has been operated based on the operating means being operated, and displays a pseudo-operation mode indicating that the operating means has been pseudo-operated in a mode different from the operated suggestion mode based on the operating means not being operated even when the valid period becomes equal to or less than a specified period.
A gaming machine of technical idea 3 is a gaming machine described in technical idea 2, in which the suggestive mode is composed of a pattern imitating the shape of the operating means, and the pseudo-operation mode is composed of a presentation mode that operates the pattern.
＜Effects＞
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Idea 1, the gaming machine has an operation means that can be operated by a player, an operation performance setting means for setting an operation performance to be executed when the operation means is operated, a validity period setting means for setting a validity period during which operation by the operation means is determined to be valid when the operation performance is set by the operation performance setting means, and a notification means for notifying identification information corresponding to the set validity period when the validity period is set by the validity period setting means, and the notification means notifies a specific notification mode when the validity period becomes equal to or less than a predetermined period.
This has the effect of increasing the enjoyment of the game.
The gaming machine described in Technical Concept 2 achieves the following effects in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine described in Technical Concept 1. That is, the gaming machine has a suggestion mode display means for displaying on a display means a suggestion mode suggesting to a player that it is the period during which the operating means is to be operated during the period during which the valid period is set, and the suggestion mode display means changes and displays the suggestion mode to an operation suggestion mode indicating that the operating means has been operated based on the fact that the operating means has been operated, and displays a pseudo-operation mode indicating that the operating means has been pseudo-operated in a mode different from the operation suggestion mode based on the fact that the operating means has not been operated even when the valid period becomes equal to or shorter than a predetermined period.
This has the effect of making it easy to recognize that the validity period has expired.
The gaming machine described in Technical Concept 3 has the following effect in addition to the effect of the gaming machine described in Technical Concept 2. That is, the suggestive mode is configured with a pattern imitating the shape of the operating means, and the pseudo-operation mode is configured with a performance mode that operates the pattern.
This has the effect of making it possible to clearly notify that the operation presentation has been executed due to the expiration of the valid period.

10 Pachinko machines (amusement machines)

Claims (1)

A gaming machine including a gaming board having a gaming area on a front side thereof, a first member for disposing on the front side of the gaming board, and a second member disposed on the front side of the first member at a predetermined interval and allowing gaming balls to flow down between the first member and the second member,
a change means for changing a distance between a predetermined portion disposed on at least one of the first member or the second member and the other of the first member or the second member;
The change means can form a first state and a second state in which the flow direction of the game ball flowing down between the opposing first member and the second member is different from that of the first state ,
The predetermined portion is configured to be longer in the width direction than in the up-down direction when viewed from the front of the game board,
The change means is
The predetermined portion is displaced in the front-rear direction of the game board to change the opposing interval,
The interval can be configured to be maintained at a first interval and a second interval,
When the interval is changed, the predetermined portion is capable of being contacted by a game ball flowing down between the first member and the second member,
A gaming machine , characterized in that the first member and the second member are configured to be able to be arranged on the gaming board from a front side of the gaming board .

Images